-
REVISED LATIN GRAMMAR.
J±
LATIN GRAMMAR.
/
B. L. GILDEKSLEEVE, Ph.D. (Gottingen), LL.D.,
Professor of Greek in the University of Virginia.
UNIVERSITY PUBLISHING COMPANY,
NEW YORK and BALTIMORE.
1872.
T.
?* <*'„
:
Entered according to Act of Congress, in the year 1872, by the
UNIVERSITY PUBLISHING COMPANY,
In the Office of the Librarian of Congress, at Washington.
PREFACE
TO THE REVISED EDITION.
In this new edition of my Latin Grammar, I have not made any essen-
tial change in the Inflections, as I am thoroughly in accord with the wise
self-restraint of the G-erman authors, Professors Lattmann and Muller,
who have presented simply the results and not the processes of Compara-
tive Grammar. A few sections and a few notes have been added, and
here and there I have allowed myself to vary from the original, but in the
main I have kept to the translation, as made by Professor Thomas R.
Price, of Randolph Macon College, a scholar whose attainments need no
testimonial from me, a man whose friendship I count among my most
valued possessions.
To the revision of the Syntax, which was originally based on Kritz,
and largely indebted for its practical features to Lattmann and Muller,
especial attention has been given ; and, whilst I have not deviated from
the general arrangement, which was dictated by the design of writing a
parallel Greek Grammar, the variations in detail are so numerous that
this part of the book may be considered a new work.
The orthography has been brought nearer to recent results, but I have
not aimed at a painful consistency.
In the treatment of the metres I have had regard to the system of
Heinrich Schmidt.
It would be pedantry to enumerate all the grammars that I have con-
sulted, worse than pedantry to acknowledge my obligations to the great
4 PREFACE.
masters of the department, without whose aid no tolerable Latin grammar
can be written, and unworthy of the aims of my life to advertise my own
efforts or to call attention to the supposed excellences of my own methods.
To all who have encouraged me by their sympathy, or aided me by
corrections and suggestions, I am truly grateful. To none do I owe
more, both for encouragement and for aid, than to my tried friend and
esteemed colleague, Professor Peters, whose acute criticism and practical
experience have been of great service to me in the prosecution of my
Latin studies.
B. L. GILDERSLEEVE.
September, 1872.
CONTENTS.
The references are to the paragraphs.
Inflections 1 — 191
Alphabet 1
Vowels 2
Consonants 6
Syllables 8
Quantity 10
Accentuation 14
Parts of Speech . . 15
Inflection 16
Substantive 17
Gender 18
Cases 21
Declensions 25
First 27
Second 29
Third 36
Fourth 67
Fifth 69
Greek Nouns 71
Irregular Nouns 74
Adjectives 81
Comparison 86
Adverbs 90
Numerals 92
Pronouns 97
Verb 109
Conjugation of Sum . , . . 112
Systems of Conjugation 116
First Conjugation 119
Second Conjugation 123
Third Conjugation 131
Fourth Conjugation 135
Appendix to third Conj 139
Deponents of First Conj 141
Deponents of Second Conj 143
Deponents of Third Conj 145
Deponents of Fourth Conj 147
Periphrastic Conjugation 149
Abbreviations 151
Present Stem 152
Perfect " 153
Supine " 154
Euphonic Laws 155
Change of Conjugation 156
Stems in a P-mute. 157
Stems in a K-mute 159
Aspirate Stems in H and Y . . . 163
Stems in a T-mute 164
Liquid Stems 169
Stems in S 172
Stems in U 173
Deponents 175
Change of Conjugation 176
Inchoative Verbs. 181
Irregular Verbs 183
Obsolete forms of the Verb . . 191
Syntax 192—697
Syntax of Simple Sentence 192
Nominative and Vocative 193
Concord 201
Voices 203
Tenses 213
Present Tense 218
Imperfect 222
Perfect 226
Pluperfect 233
Future 234
Future Perfect 236
Periphrastic Tenses 238
Tenses in Letters 244
Moods 245
Indicative 246
Subjunctive. . . 247
Imperative 259
Tenses of Moods and Verbal
Nouns 270'
Simple Sentence Expanded 280
Multiplication of Subject 281
Qualification of Subject 284
Attribute 285
Demonstrative Pronouns 290
Determinative and Reflexive
Pronouns 293
Possessive Pronouns. . ... 299
Indefinite Pronouns 300
Numerals 307
Comparatives and Superla-
tives 311
6
CONTENTS.
Apposition 318
Predicative Attribution, and
Apposition 324
Multiplication of Predicate. . . . 325
Qualification of Predicate 326
Accusative 327
Dative 343
Genitive 357
Ablative 383
Names of Towns and Islands. . 410
Prepositions 414
With Accusative 417
With Ablative 418
With Ace. and Abl 419
Infinitive as a Substantive 420
Gerund and Gerundive 426
Supine 435
Adverb 440
Negatives 442
Incomplete Sentence 451
Interrogative Sentences 452
Syntax of Compound Sentence. . 474
( Coordination 475
Copulative Sentences 476
Adversative Sentences 485
Disjunctive Sentences 494
Causal and Illative Sentences. 500
Subordination 505
Sequence of Tenses 510
Reflexive 520
Object Sentences 523
With Quod 524
With Ace. and Inf. 526
Object Sentences with Parti-
ciple 536
Causal Sentences 538
Sentences of Design and Ten-
dency 543
Final Sentences 544
Consecutive Sentences 553
Temporal Sentences 561
Antecedent Action 563
Contemporaneous Action. 570
Prior Action 576
Cum (Quum) 580
Conditional Sentences 590
Logical 597
Ideal 598
Unreal 599
Incomplete 600
Of Comparison 604
Concessive Sentences 605
Relative Sentences 612
Comparative Sentences 641
Correlative 645
With atque 646
With quam 647
Abridged Sentence 648
Infinitive 649
Oratio Obllqua 651
Participle 669
Arrangement of Words. ....... 671
Arrangement of Glauses 682
Figures of Syntax . . 685
Pkosody 698
Versification 723
INFLECTIONS
LATIN LANGUAGE,
ON THE BASIS OF LATTMANN AND MULLER.
ALPHABET.
1. The Latin alphabet is the same as the English, except that
i it has no W.
Remark. — K is used chiefly m abbreviations — K. (Caeso), Kal. (Oa-
lendae). Y and Z occur in Greek words only. Originally, there was no
difference in character between I and J, between V and U. In the olden
time U did not come after V : servos (servus) equos or ecus (equus),
quom (cum).
VOWELS.
2. The vowels are a, e, i, o, u ; and are divided :
i 1. According to their quality, into
open, a., e, o.
close, i, u.
2. According to their quantity, into
long, —
sliort, — *
common, i. e., sometimes short, and sometimes long, 3
The following distinction is made :
common : by preference short, ~
common : by preference long, —
In this grammar, every long vowel sound is marked. But see 700 R. 2.
Sounds of the Vowels.
a
in
father. 5 = o
in
e
in
prey, u = oo
in
i
in
caprice. y = u
in
O VOWELS — CONSONANTS.
3.
a = a in father. 5 = o in bone
e = e in prey. u = oo in moon
I = i in caprice. y = u in stir (French).
Remark.— The short sounds are only less prolonged in pronunciation than tke long
sounds, and have no exact English equivalents.
DIPHTHONGS.
4. There are but few diphthongs or double sounds in Latin. The theory
of the diphthong requires that both elements be heard in a slur. The tend-
ency iu Latin was to reduce diphthongs to simple sounds ; hence frequent
variations in spelling : so glaeba and gleba, sod; oboedire and obedire,
obey ; faenum (foenum) and fenum, hay.
ae and
oe — ae
in
Graeme.
au = ou
in
our.
ei = ei
in
feint (drawled).
eu == eu
in
Spanish dewda.
ui = oui
in
French oui.
Diaeresis.
5. The sign •• (Dimresis — Greek = separation) over the second vowel
shows that each sound is to be pronounced separately : a§r, air ; Oeno-
maiis, aloe.
CONSONANTS.
6. Consonants are divided:
1. According to the principal organs by which they are pronounced,
into
Labials (lip-sounds): b, p, (ph), f, v, m.
Denials (tooth-sounds) : d, t, (th), 1, n, r, s.
Gutturals (throat-sounds) : g, c, k, qu, (ch), h.
2. According to their prolongation, into
A. Semi-vowels : of which
1, m, n, r, are liquids, (m and n being nasats).
h, j, and v, are breathings, and
s is a sibilant.
B. Mutes : to which belong
P-mutes, p, b, (ph), i> labials.
T- mutes, t, d, (th), dentals.
K-mutes, k, c, qu, g, (ch), gutturals.
in*
C
(
roi
(
I
if\o
DIVISION OF SYLLABLES. 9
Those on the same line are said to be of the same organ.
Mutes are further divided into
Tenuis (thin) : p, t, k, c, qu, hard (surd).
Mediae (middle) : b, d, g, soft (sonant).
[Aspiratae (aspirate) : ph, th, ch,] aspirate.
The aspirates occur chiefly in Greek words.
Those on the same line are said to be of the same order.
ryy 3. Double consonants are : z = dz in adze ; x = cs (ks) ; j between two
.pwels is a double sound, half vowel, half consonant, and always length-
it jis the preceding vowel ; jejiinus, hungry.
Sounds op the Consonants.
7. The consonants are sounded as in English, with the following
inceptions :
C is hard throughout = k (commonly assibilated before e (ae, oe) and i.
Ch is not a genuine Latin sound. In Latin words it is a k ; in Greek
wds a kh ; commonly pronounced as ch in German.
G is hard throughout, as in get, give.
J has the sound of a broad y ; much fuller than y in yo\x\\
N has a guttural nasal sound before c, g, q, as in anchor, anguish.
Qu = kw (nearly) ; before u, qu = c ; quum = cum 5 equus = ecus.
2uum is a late spelling, retained for convenience' sake.
R must be trilled.
S and X are always hard, as in hiss, &xe.
T is hard throughout.
V was nearer our w than our v ; still nearer the French ou in oui.
SYLLABLES.
8. The syllable is the unit of pronunciation, and consists of a
'owel, or a vowel and one or more consonants.
A consonant, between two vowels, belongs to the second:
i-mo, / love.
Two or more consonants belong to the following vowel:
t-sper, rough j fau-stus, lucky ; ii-brl, books.
Exceptions. — 1. Liquids, 1, m, n, r, join the preceding vowel : al-mus,
fostering ; am-bo, both ; an-guis, snake ; ar-bor, tree ; mn follows the
general rule : a-mnis, river.
2. When the consonant is doubled, the first belongs to the first, the
i*
1 0 QUANTITY ACCENTUATION.
second to the second syllable: cas-sis, helmet; al-lium, garlic ; map-pa
napkin ; an-nus, year ; mit-to, I send.
3. Compounds are treated as if their parts were separate words : ab-igo,
Idri/r off; res-publica, commonwealth.
9. The last syllable of a word is called the ultima ; the next
to the last, the penult ; the one before the penult, the ante-
penult.
10. Quantity. — A syllable is said to be long by nature,
when it contains a long vowel or diphthong; by position, when
a short vowel is followed by two or more consonants, or a dou-
ble consonant: ars, art; collum, neck; abrampo, I break off;
p<?r mare, through the sea ; nex, murder.
Remark. — Nf, ns, and j make a preceding vowel sound long, not merely
the syllable.
Exception. — J in the compounds of jugum, yoke; bi-jugus, two-horse.
11. A syllable ending in a short vowel, followed by a mute
with 1 or r, is common (anceps) : tenebrae, darkness.
12. Every diphthong, and every vowel derived from a diph-
thong, or contracted from other vowels, is long: saevus, cruel ;
concludo, / shut up (from claudo, / shut) ; cogo (from co-igo),
/ drive together.
13. One simple vowel before another vowel-sound makes a
short syllable: dens, God; puer, boy.
Remarks. — 1. h does not count: nihil, nothing.
2. Exceptions will be noted as they occur.
3. On the quantity of final syllables see Prosody.
14. Accexttjation". — 1. Dissyllabic words have the accent
or stress on the penult: equus, horse.
2. Polysyllabic words have the accent on the penult, when
the penult is long; on the antepenult, when the penult is short
or common : mandare, to commit ; mandere, to chew ; integrum,
entire.
Remarks. — 1. The little appendages (enclitics), que, ve, ne, add an
accent to the ultimate of words accented on the antepenult : luminaque,
and lights ; fluminave, or rivers ; vomerene, from a "ploughshare ?
2. Other exceptions will be noted as they occur.
STTBSTAOTIVE. ] J
PAETS OP SPEECH.
15. The parts of speech are:
I. The Noun, embracing :
1. The Substantive, which gives a name: vir, a wan; Codes,
Socles ; donum, a gift
2. The Adjective, which adds a quality to the substantive.
( II. The Pronoun, which points out.
III. The Verb, which says.
IV. The Particles, which are mainly mutilated forms of the
loun, and embrace :
1. The Adverb, which shows circumstances.
\ 2. The Preposition, which shows local relation.
3. The Conjunction, which shows connection.
Remarks. — 1. Pronoun and noun have essentially the same inflec-
:ion ; 'but they are commonly separated, partly on account of the differ-
ence in signification, partly on account of the greater antiquity of the
pronominal forms. The pronominal element is the formative element of
language.
2. The Interjection is either a mere cry of feeling: ah! all! and does
■lot belong to language, or fails under one of the above-mentioned classes.
INFLECTION.
16. Inflection is that bending or change, chiefly in the end of
a, word, which shows a change in the relations of that word.
The noun, pronoun, and verb are inflected ; the particles are not
papable of further inflection.
The inflection of nouns and pronouns is called declension,
and nouns and pronouns are said to be declined.
The inflection of verbs is called conjugation, and verbs are
-said to be conjugated.
SUBSTANTIVE.
17. The substantive gives the name of a person or thing
((concrete), or of a quality (abstract).
Concrete substantives are either proper or common,
12 GENDER.
The proper noun is proper, or peculiar, to certain persons or
things: Horatius, Horace ; Neapolis, Naples; Padus, Po.
Common nouns are common to a whole class: dominus, a lord;
urbs, a city ; amnis, a river.
GENDER.
18. For the names of animate beings, the gender is deter-
mined by the signification; for things and qualities, by the
termination.
Males are masculine ; Females, feminine. Masculine : Romu-
lus ; Jupiter ; vir, man ; equus, 7wrse. Feminine : Cornelia ; Juno ;
femina, woman ; equa, mare.
19. Some classes of words, without natural gender, haye their
gender determined by the signification:
1. Names of months (menses, masc), ivinds (venti, masc),
rivers (fluvil, masc), and mountains (montes, masc), are mascu-
line: Aprllis, the opening month, April ; Aquilo, the north wind ;
Albis, the River Elbe ; Ath5s, Mount Athos.
Exceptions. — 1. Feminine are the rivers Allia; Albula; Matrbna,
the Marne ; Styx ; Lethe.
2. Of the mountains, the Alps, Alpes, are feminine, and sundry (Greek)
names in a (Gen. ae), e (Gen. es) : Aetna, Cyllene; Soracte, and Pelion
are neuter, and so are names of mountains in a (Gen. orum) : Maenala,
Maenalorum.
II. Names of countries (terrae, fern.), islands (insulae, fern.),
cities (urbes, fern.), plants (plantae, fern.), and trees (arbores,
fern.), are feminine : Aegyptus, Egypt ; Rhodus, Rhodes ; pints,
a pear-tree ; abies, a fir-tree.
Exceptions. — The exceptions, which are numerous, are chiefly Greek,
and follow the termination, instead of the signification.
III. All indeclinable nouns, and all words and phrases treated
as indeclinable nouns, are neuter : fas, right ; a longum, a long ;
scire tuum, thy Tcnoiving ; triste vale, a sad "fareioell."
20. 1. Nouns which have but one form for masculine and
feminine are said to be of common gender : clvis, citizen (male
or female) ; comes, companion ; judex, judge.
CASES. 13
2. Substantlva mobilia are words of the same origin, whose
different terminations designate difference of gender: magister,
master, teacher ; magistra, mistress ; servus, serva, slave (m. and
f.) ; victor, victrlx, conqueror (m. and f.)
3. If the male and female of animals have but one designa-
tion, mas, male, and femina, female, are added, when it is neces-
sary to be exact : pavo mas (maseulus), peacock-, pavo femina, pea-
lien. These nouns are called epicene.
Oases.
21. The Latin noun has six cases :
1. Nominative (Case of the Subject).
Answers : who t what?
2. Genitive (Case of the Complement).
Answers : whose ? whereof?
3. Dative (Case of Indirect Object or Personal Interest).
Answers : For or To whom f
4. Accusative (Case of Direct Object).
Answers : whom ? what?
\ 5. Vocative (Case of Direct Address).
6. Ablative (Case of Adverbial Relation).
Answers : wliere f whence f wherewith ?
22. According to their syntactical use, the cases are divided
into Casus Recti, or Independent Cases, and Casus Obllqui, or De-
, pendent Cases. Nominative and Vocative are Casus Recti, the
, rest Casus Obllqui.
23. According to their form, the cases are divided into
1 strong and weak : The strong cases are Nominative, Accusative,
and Vocative. The weak cases are Genitive, Dative, and Ablative.
Remarks.— These six cases are the remains of a larger number. The Locative, which
is akin to the Dative, and coincident with it in the 1st and 3d Declensions, is lost in the
Genitive of the 2d Declension, and often blended with the Ablative in form, regularly in
syntax. The Instrumental, which is found in other members of the family, is likewise
merged in the Ablative.
24. The case-forms arise from the combination of the ending
, with the stem.
The stem is that which is common to a class of formations.
1 4 DECLENSIONS.
y \i;ks.- 1. The stem is often so much altered by contact with the ending, the end-
ing so much altered by the wearing away of vowels and consonants, that they can be de-
termined only by BcientiflLc analysis. So in the paradigm mensa, the stem is not mens,
but mensa, the final a having been absorbed by the ending in the Dative and Ablative
Plural mensis. So -d. the characteristic of the Ablative Singular, has disappeared, and
the locative ending has undergone many changes (6, ei, I. e). The '-crude form"1 it is
often impossible to ascertain.
'2. The root is an ultimate stem, and the determination of the root belongs to compara-
tive etymology. The stem may be of any length, the root must be a monosyllable. In
penna the stem is penna- ; in pennula, pennula- ; in pennatulus, pennatulo- ; the
root is pet (petna. pesna. penna), and is found in pet-ere, to fall upon, to fly at ; Greek,
itir-ofJLOCi) Ttrepov ; English, feather.
Declensions.
25. There are five declensions in Latin, which are character-
ized by the final sound of their respective stems :
Stem
characteristic.
a
6
a consonant,
i and u
u
e
are called Vowel De-
The stems of the First Declension end in
The stems of the Second Declension end in
The stems of the Third Declension end in
or the close vowels ....
The stems of the Fourth Declension end in
The stems of the Fifth Declension end in
26- 1. The First, Second, and Fifth Declensions ;
clensions ; the Third and Fourth, which really form but one, the Conso-
nant Declension, i and u being semi-consonants.
2. General Kules of Declension.
I. For the strong cases :
Neuter nouns have Nominative and Vocative like the Accusative ; in
the Plural the strong cases always end in a.
In the Third, Fourth, and Fifth Declensions the strong cases are alike
in the Plural.
The Vocative is like the Nominative, except in the Second Declension,
when the Nom. ends in -us.
II. For the weak cases:
Dative and Ablative Plural have a common form.
Remarks. — In declining neuter nouns, follow the order of strong cases and weak
cases. It saves time, and shows connection.
Fikst Declension.
27. The stem ends in a, which disappears in the ending -is
of the Dative and Ablative plural.
DECLENSIONS. 15
Feminine,
sing. — N. mensa, the, or a, table.
Gr. mensae, of the, or a, table.
D, mensae, to, for the, or #, table.
Ac. mensa-m, £7w, or a, table.
V. mensa, 0 table I or ta5te /
Abl. mensa, from, with, by, the, or a, table.
plur. — N. mensae, the tables, or tables.
G. mensarum, of the tables, or tables.
D. mensis, to, for the tables, or tables.
Ac. mensas, the tables, or tables.
Y. mensae, 0 tables !
Abl. mensis, from, with, by, the tables, or tables.
Remarks. — 1. The Gen. -ai is found in poetry. The Gen. in -as occurs
in the word familia, family, when combined with pater, father, mater,
mother, fUius, son, filia, daughter, viz. : paterfamilias, materfamilias,
fUius familias, filia familias.
The Gen. PI. sometimes takes the form -um instead of -arum, chiefly in
the Greek words amphora (amphora, measure of tonnage), and drachma,
franc — {Greek coin). The poets make frequent use of this form in patro-
nymics and compounds of -cola (from colo, / inhabit) and -gena(from gen,
beget).
2. The Locative Dative case singular is like the Genitive Romae,
at Borne.
3. Dea, goddess, filia, daughter, ambae, both, and duae, two, have the form
-abus in the Dative and Ablative Plural, viz. : deabus, filiabus, ambabus,
duabus.
28. Rule of Gender. — The gender is feminine, except when
males are meant.
Hadria, the Adriatic, is masculine.
Second Declension.
29. The stem ends in -6? which appears in the older forms of
the Norn, and Ace. singular, servo-s, servo-m. In the ordinary
forms it is changed into u, e, lengthened into 6, or disappears
wholly.
Masculine.
sing.— N". hortus, garden. m.UR. — horti, gardens.
G. horti, hortoruai.
D. horto, hortis.
Ac. hortum, hoitos.
V. horte, hoiti.
Abl. horto, hortls.
16 SECOND DECLENSION.
Neuter.
sing. — N. Ac. V. bellum, war, plur. — bella, wars.
G. belli, bellorum.
D. Abl. bello, bellis.
Remarks. — 1. In the Genitive Singular, ii is often contracted into i,
the accent remaining unchanged : ingenii, of genius, into ing^ni.
2. In the Vocative Singular, ie (je) is commonly contracted into I in
proper names in -ius, -eius (ejus), -aius (ajus), the accent remaining un-
changed ; as, Antoni, Tulli, Gai, Vergili. Filius, son, genius, genius, and
meus, my, form their Vocatives in like manner : fill, geni, mi.
3. In the Genitive Plural, -um for -orum is found in words denoting
coins and measures ; as, nummum (of moneys) — sestertium, of sesterces ;
modium, of measures. Faber, workman, has both fabrum and fabrdrum ;
Hberi, children, both liberum and liberorum ; and vir, man, in compounds
has triumvirum, of the triumvirs, and the like.
4. The Locative Singular, which has a restricted use, ends in I (Appa-
rent Genitive), as Rhodi, at Rhodes, Tarenti, at Tarentum.
5. Deus, God, is irregular. Singular Vocative, deus. Plural Nomina-
tive (del), dii, dij Genitive, deorum, deum; Accusative, deos; Dative
and Ablative (dels), diis, dis.
30. Rule of Gender. — Nouns in -us are masculine; in -um,
neuter.
Exceptions. — Feminine are: 1st. Cities and islands, as, Corinthus,
Samus. 2d. Most trees, as, fagus, beech ; pirus, pear-tree. 3d. Many Greek
nouns, as, atomus, atom ; paragraphus, paragraph ; methodus, method ;
periodus, period; dialectus, dialect. 4th. Alvus, belly ; colus, distaff ;
humus, ground ; vannus, wheat-fan.
Neuters are : virus, venom ; pelagus, sea ; vulgus, the rabble (sometimes
masculine).
31. Most masculines in r drop -us in the Nominative and e
in the Vocative Singular :
N.
puer, boy.
pueri.
ager, field.
agri.
G.
pueri,
puerorum.
agri,
agrorum
D.
puero,
pueris.
agr5,
agris.
Ac.
puerum,
pueros.
agrum,
agros.
V.
puer,
pueri.
ager,
agri.
Abl.
puero,
pueris.
agr5,
agris.
DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES.
17
32- The e belongs to the stem, and is retained through all the cases in
adulter, adulterer ; alter, the oilier ; asper, rough ; dexter, on tlie right
(which has either dextrl or dexteri) j exter, outside ; gener, son-in-law ;
gibber, hump-backed ; lacer, torn; liber, free; Liber, god of wine ; miser,
wretched; prosper, lucky ; puer, boy ; socer, father-in-law; tener, soft;
vesper, evening ; and in words ending in -fer and -ger, from fero, I bear ,
and gero, I carry, as, signi fer, standard-bearer, armi ger, armor-bearer.
Iber and Celtiber (names of nations) have in the Plural Iberi and
CeltiberL
In other words, the e is inserted only in the Nominative and Vocative
Singular.
33. Declension of Adjectives in -us, -a, -tun.
Bonus, bona, bonum, good.
M. F. N.
-N. bonus, bona, bonum.
G. boni, bonae, boni.
D. bono, bonae, bono.
Ac. bonum, bonam, bonum.
V. bone, bona, bonum.
Abl. bono, bona, bono.
M. F. N.
plur.— boni, bonae, bona.
bonorum, bonarum, bonorum.
bonis, bonis, bonis,
bonos, bonas, bona,
boni, bonae, bona,
bonis, bonis, bonis.
34.
Miser, misera, miserum, wretched.
SINGULAR.
N. miser, misera, miserum.
G. miseri, miserae, miseri.
D. misero, miserae, misero.
Ac. miserum, miseram, miserum.
V. miser, misera, miserum.
Abl. misero, misera, misero.
PLURAL.
miseri, miserae, misera.
miserorum, miserarum, miserorum.
miseris, miseris, miseris.
miseros, miseras, misera.
miseri, miserae, misera,
miseris, miseris, miseris.
sing.— N. piger, pigra, pigrum
G. pigri, pigrae, pigri.
D. pigro, pigrae, pigrQ.
Ac. pigrum, pigram, pigrum.
V. piger, pigra, pigrum.
Abl. pigro, pigra, pigro.
Piger, pigra, pigrum, slow,
PLUR.
-pigri, pigrae, pigra.
pigrorum, pigrarum. pigrorum.
pigris, pigris, pigris.
pigros, pigras, pigra.
pigri, pigrae, pigra.
pigris, pigris. pigris.
35. The following have Genitive Singular in -Ins, and Dative
Singular in I :
unus, ullus,
nullus.
one,
any,
none.
s51us, totus,
alius.
sole,
whole,
other.
uter, alter,
neuter,
which of the two,
one of the two,
neither.
Remark. — In poetry, the I of the Genitive ending -ius is often shortened,
excf- It in alius (rare), solius, utrius, neutrius.
18
TIIIKD DECLENSION.
HNG. — 1ST. nullus, nulla, nullum, none.
G. nullius, nullius, nullius.
D. nulli, nulll, nulli.
Ac. nullum, nullam, nullum.
Abl. nullo, nulla, nullo.
The Plural is regular.
alius, alia, aliud, ot7ier-
alius, alius, alius,
alii, alii, alii,
alium, aliam, aliud.
alio, alia, alio.
Thied Declension".
36. The stem ends in a consonant, or the close vowels i andu.
37. The stems are divided according to their last letter, called
the stem-characteristic, following the subdivisions of the letters
of the alphabet :
I.— Consonant Stems.
A. Liquid stems, ending in 1, m, n, r.
B. Sibilant stems, ending in s.
il. Ending in a P-mute, b, p.
2. Ending in a K-mute, c, g.
3. Ending in a T-mute, d, t.
II.— Vowel Stems.
1. Ending in i.
2. Ending in u.
(Compare the Fourth
Declension.)
38. The sign of the Nominative Singular, masculine and
feminine, is s, which, however, is dropped after 1, n, r, s.
The Nominative Singular undergoes various changes.
The Vocative is like the Nominative. In the other cases, the
endings are added to the unchanged stem.
the Nominative without the case
ending s.
the Accusative and Vocative case
in both numbers like the
Nominative,
the Nominative Plural in a.
39. Neuters always form i
Remark.— Originally coincident with the Dative, the Locative of the Third Declension
was finally blended with Ablative, both in form and in syntax. In the names of nouns
the old form is frequently retained : Karthagini, at Carthage, Sulmoni, at Sulmo. Ac-
cording to some, riiri, in the country, is an Ablative.
I.— Consonant Stems.
A.— LIQUID STEMS.
1. Liquid stems in 1.
40. Nominative without s, as, consul, the consul. ^p
j
i
THIRD DECLENSION.
19
ENTG.-
consul,
consul.
PLUR-
-K
consul-es, the consuls.
G.
consul-um.
D.
consul-ibus.
Ac.
consul-es.
Y.
consul-es.
Abl.
consul-ibus.
■K
G. consul-is,
D. consul-I,
Ac. consul-em,
Y. consul,
Abl. consul-e,
Rule of Gender. — Stems in 1 are masculine : sol, the sun, solis;
al, salt, salis.
Exceptions. — Neuters are : mel, honey, mellis ; fel, gall, fellis.
2. Liquid stems in m.
41. Nominative with s. One example only: hiem(p)s, winter ;
3-enitive, Mem-is (fern.).
3. Liquid stems in n.
42. The Nominative Singular of masculine and feminine stems
L's formed without s, drops the n of the stem, and ends in 5.
The Genitive Singular has, in some nouns, -onis; in others,
inis.
The Nominative Singular of the neuter stems retains the n,
md terminates in -en5
The Genitive Singular of neuters ends in -mis.
43.
SING —
PLUR-
MASCULINE.
-K
leS, lio
G.
le5n-is,
D.
leon-i,
Ac.
le5n-em,
Y.
leo,
Abl.
leon-e,
-N.
le5n-es,
G.
leon-um,
D.
le5n-ibus,
Ac.
leon-es,
Y.
leon-es,
Abl.
leon-ibus.
FEMININE.
imago, likeness.
imagin-is,
imagin-i,
imagin-em,
imago,
imagine,
imagin-es,
imagin-um,
imagin-ibus,
imagin-es,
imagin-es,
imagin-ibus.
NEUTER.
nomen, name.
nomin-is,
nomin-i,
nomen,
nomen,
nomin-e,
n5min-a,
n5min-um,
n5min-ibus,
nomin-a,
nomin-a,
nomin-ibus.
"Remakes. — 1. Nouns in -do and -go have in the Genitive -inis, whilst
the rest in -o have -onis ; as, grando, hail, grandinis ; virgo, maid,
virginis.
Exceptions.— Praedo, robber ; harpago, grappling -hook ; ligo, mattock, have onis
hlmo, man ; turbo, whirlwind, have Inis.
20
Till III) DECLENSION.
2. To the stems in n belong sanguis, blood, sanguin-is ; pollis, flour, pollin
-is (both masc). In these, n of the stem is dropped before s of the Nom.
3. Masculines in -en, Genitive inis, are: pecten, comb, and the personal |
designations: tibicen, flitter ; tubicen, trumpeter; cornicen, horn-blower ;\
and flamen, priest.
Masculines in -en,-enis, are only : splen and lien, spleen, and the Plural]
renes, kidneys.
44. Rules of Gender.— 1. Masculine are nouns in -o, save
those in -do, -go, and -io, with caro, flesh : but ordo, cardo, are
masculine, with ligo, margo; add harpago; and in -io, all con
crete nouns like pugio.
ordo, rank ; cardo, hinge ; ligo, mattock ; margo, border ; harpago, grappling
hook; pugio, dagger ; vespertllio, bat ; titio, firebrand.
2. Nouns in -en (men) are neuter. See exceptions 43, 3.
4. Liquid stems in r.
45. Nominative without s.
Remark. — In several words in -6r and -ur, the r has arisen from s
Hence, labos, as well as labbr, toil; robus and r5bnr, oak ; vomis an
vomer, ploughshare.
o.
MASCULINE.
NEUTER.
passer, sparrow.
pater,
father.
cadaver, dead body.
passer-is.
patr-is.
cadaver-is.
labor, toil.
orator,
speaker.
robur, oak.
labor-is.
5rator-is.
robor-is.
fur, thief.
vultur,
vulture.
fulgur, lightning.
fur-is.
vultur-is
fulgur-is.
46- Words in -ter, syncopate, i. e.t leave out the e, except later, brie
later-is.
N.
G.
D.
Ac.
V.
SINGULAR.
labor, toil.
labor-is,
lab5r-i,
labor-em,
labor,
Abl. labor-e,
PLURAL
labor-e s.
labor-um.
labor-ibus.
labor-es.
labor-es.
labor-ibus.
SINGULAR.
pater, father.
patr-is,
patr-i,
patr-em,
pater,
patr-e,
PLURAL.
patr-es.
patr-um.
patr-ibus,
patr-es.
patr-es.
patr-ibus
47. Rules of Gender. -
those in -ur, neuter.
-Words in -er and -or are masculine
THIRD DECLENSION. 21
i Exceptions. — The only feminine is arbor.
Neuters are : far, nectar, marmor,
Aequor, iter, acer, piper,
Verber, uber, ver, cadaver,
Ador, tuber, and papaver.
cer, maple; ador, spelt; aequor, sea; arbor, tree; cadaver, dead body ; far, spelt;
larmor, marble; nectar, nectar; piper, pepper ; papaver, poppy; tuber, tumor;
ber, teat ; ver, spring.
Furfur, bran, is masculine.
B.— SIBILANT STEMS.
48. The Nominative has no additional s,
In the other cases, the s of the stem passes over, between two
owels, into r.
Instead of the final stem-vowel e, the Nominative of Mascu-
ines has i.
Instead of the final stem-vowels e and o, the Nominative of
leuters has u.
uf Remake:. — S is retained throughout in the neuter : vas, dish, vasis.
5S occurs in as, a copper, genitive assis (masc), and os, bone, ossis (neut).
SINGULAR. PLURAL. SINGULAR. PLURAL.
49. N. genus, kind, gener-a. corpus, body. corpor-a.
G. gener-is, gener-um. corpor-is, corpor-um.
D. gener-i, gener-ibus. corpor-i, corpor-ibus.
Ac. genus, gener-a. corpus, corpora.
Y. genus, gener-a. corpus, corpor-a.
Abl. gener-e, gener-ibus. corpor-e, corpor-ibus.
50. Rule of Gender. — Masculine are nouns in -is (-eris), and
-os, -oris: except os, mouth; genitive oris, neuter.
Neuter are nouns in -us, genitive -eris, -oris, and in -us, -uris;
except telltis, earth, telltiris, which is feminine ; and the mascu-
lines, lepus, hare, leporis ; mus, mouse, muris.
C— MUTE STEMS.
51. All masculines and feminines of mute stems have s in the
Nominative.
Most polysyllabic mute stems change their final vowel i into
e in the Nominative.
22 THIRD DECLENSION.
A K-nm te, combining with s, becomes x, as, pac-s = pax, peace J
reg-s = rex. Icing.
A T-mute before s is dropped, as, aetat-s = aetas, age ; ped-s ~
pes, foot.
52. /Stems m a Y-mute.
A E I O
trab-s. fieaw. pleb-s, commons, stip-s, dole, princep-s, chief, (op-s), power.
trab-is (fern.) pleb-is (fern.) stip-is (fem.) princip-is, op-is (fern.)
With consonant preceding the stem-characteristic :
Urb-s, city, urb-is (fem.) ; stirp-s, stock, stirp-is (fem.).
53. Stems in a K-mute.
pax, peace, rex, king, radix, root. vox, voice, lux,
pac-is (fem.) reg-is (mas.) radic-is (fem.) voc-is (fem.) luc-is (fem.)
fax, torch, grex, herd, salix, willow, judex, judge. dux, leader.
fac-is (fem.) greg-is (mas.) salic-is (fem.) judic-is. due-is.
54. With consonant preceding the stem-characteristic : si
Arx, citadel, arc-is (fem.) ; falx, sickle, falc-is (fem.).
Seng. — N". princep-s, chief. Plur. — princip-es,
G. princip-is, princip-um,
D. princip-I, princip-ibus,
Ac. princip-em, princip-es,
V. princep-s, princip-es,
Abl. princip-e, princip-ibus.
Sing. — N. rex, king. Plur. — reg-es,
G. reg-is, reg-um,
D. reg-I, reg-ibus,
Ac. reg-em, reg-es,
V. rex, reg-es,
Abl. reg-e, reg-ibus.
Remark. — All monosyllabic mute stems, with the characteristic pre-
ceded by a consonant, have the Genitive Plural in -ium, as, urbium, of
cities; arcium, of citadels ; montium, of mountains ; partium, of pa/rts ;
noctium, of the nights. The polysyllabic stems also in -nt and -rt have;
more frequently -ium, as, clientium, of clients; cohortium, of companies^
Stems in -at have sometimes both -um and -ium, as, civitatum and civita
tium. See 50, R. 3.
THIRD DECLENSION.
Stems in a T-mute.
55. A. Characteristic preceded by a vowel.
23
i. aetas,
aetat-is,
quies,
quiet-is,
lis,
Ht-is,
D.
vas,
age. anas, duck. vas, bail.
(fern.) anat-is, (fern.) vadis, (masc.)
rest. paries, wall. heres, heir. pes, foot.
(fern.) pariet-is, (masc.) hered-is, (masc.) ped-is, (masc.)
suit. lapis, stone.
(fern.) G.P. ium.
miles,
lapid-is, (masc.)
milit-is.
-). sacerdos, priest.
sacerdot-is.
u. virttis, manlin*
virtut-is, (fern.)
custos, keeper.
custod-is.
palus, bog.
palud-is, (fern.)
pecus, sheep.
peciid-is, (fem.)
laus, praise.
laudis, (fern.)
56.
B. Characteristic preceded by a consonant.
. frons, brow.
nd. frons, leafy branch.
front-is, (fern.)
frond-is, (fem.)
pars, part. It.
puis, porridge.
rd. cor, heart.
part-is, (fem.)
pult-is, (fem.)
cord-is, (neut.)
nox, night.
lac,
milk.
noct-is, (fem.)
lact
■is, (neut.)
ng.— N. aetas, age
Plur. — aetat-es,
Sing.— pes, foot. Plur.— ped-es,
G. aetat-is,
aetat-um,
ped-is, pedum,
D. aetat-i,
aetat-ibus,
ped-i, ped-ibus.
Ac. aetat-em,
aetat-es,
ped-em, ped-es,
V. aetas,
aetat-es,
pes, ped-es,
Abl. aetat-e,
aetat-ibus.
ped-e, ped-ibus.
57. Rule of Gender, — All mute stems, with Nominative in s,
pe feminine.
Exceptions in a K-mute.
Masculines are -unx and -ex,
Saving forfex, forpex, nex,
Lex, vibex, faex, and forms of prex.
faex, dregs.
forfex, shears.
forpex, tongs.
deunx, \\ as.
] Calix, cup, and fornix, arch, are masculine. Calx, heel, and calx, chalk,
ary.
lex,
law.
nex,
slaughter.
prece,
with
prayer.
vibex,
weal
(better vlblx.)
24 THIRD DECLENSION.
Hbeeptitms in a T-nv/te. — Nouns in -es, -itis, are masculine, as, cespeg^
turf cespitis; as are also pes, foot, and its compounds; paries, wall; and,
of the nouns in -is, lapis, stone. Merges, -itis, sheaf, is feminine.
Masculines in -ns are : mons, mountain; pons, bridge; fons, spring,
dens, tooth; torrens, torrent ; rudens, rope.
Neuters are only : cor, heart, and lac, milk, which drop the character-
istic ; and caput, head, capitis.
n.— Vowel Stems.
1.— VOWEL STEMS IN I.
58. Masculines and feminines form their Nominative in s.
Some feminines change, in the Nominative, the stem-vowel i
into e.
Neuters change, in the Nominative, the stem-vowel i into e.
This e is generally dropped by polysyllabic neuters after 1 and r.
All stems in i have Genitive Plural in -ium.
All neuter stems in i have the Ablative Singular in I, and
Nominative Plural in -ia.
Remarks. — The stems of Nominatives in -is and -es are easily distin-
guished.
Consonant stems in -is and -es increase in the Genitive ; but vowel stem?
in l do not increase in the Genitive, as :
Consonant: lapis, stone; Genitive, lapid-is. miles, soldier ; Genitive, mllit-is.
Vowel : civis, citizen. civis. nubes, cloud. nubis.
59.
M. P. P. N.
Sing.— N. colli-s, hill, turri-s, tower. vulp§s,/0£. mare, sea. animal, living being
G. collis, turris, vulpis, maris, animalis,
D. colli, turn, vulpi, marl, animali,
Ac. collem, turrem (turri-m), vulpem, mare, animal,
V. collis. turris, vulpes, mare, animal,
Abl. colle, turre (turn), vulpe, marl, animali,
Plur.— N. colles, turrgs, vulpes, mari-a, animali-a,
G. colli-um, turri-um, vulpi-um, mari-um, animali-um,
D. colli-bus, turri-bus, vulpi-bus, mari-bus, animali-bus,
Ac. colles. turres, vulpes, mari-a, animali-a,
V. colles. turres, vulpes, mari-a, animali-a,
Abl. colli-bus. turri-bus. vulpi-bus. mari-bus. animali-bus.
Remarks. — 1. In Genitive Plural, -um instead of -ium.
Always in : juvenis, young ; senex, old; canis, dog; vates, bard \
strues, heap ; panis, bread.
Usually in: apis, bee ; sedes, seat ; volucris, bird.
THIBD DECLENSION. 0~
2. The Genitive Plural in -ium occurs in the apparently consonant
j stems : imber, rain-storm ; uter, bottle ; v -enter, belly ; linter, skiff; which
form the Nominative without s, dropping the i, and inserting e. Genitive,
imbris, utris, ventris, lintris. All are masculine, except linter, which
is feminine.
3. Under the vowel stems in -i are sometimes classed those mute stems
which take -ium in the Gen. Plural ; urbi-um, monti-um. See 54, R
60. Observations. — Several stems in i, with Nominative in
-is, have Accusative and Ablative Singular and Accusative
Plural in -im, I, Is, respectively :
1. The Accusative Plural in -Is occurs, side by side with -es:
In all vowel stems in i, which have Nominative Singular in -is;
In mute stems, which have Genitive Plural in -ium.
; 2. The Accusative Singular in -im is used:
a. Always in names of towns and rivers in is, as, Neapolis, Accusative,
Neapolim; Tiberis, Accusative, Tiberim; and in vis, force; sitis, thirst ;
tussis, cough.
b. Usually in securis, axe ; febris, fever ; puppis3 poop ; turris, tower.
3. The Ablative Singular in I is used:
a. In all nouns which Lave Accusative Singular invariably in -im, and
in ignis, fire, in the phrases, ferro ignique, aqua et igni interdlcere. Nouns
which have Accusative in -im or -em have Ablative in I or e.
b. In the neuter vowel stems, which have Nominative in e, al, ar. Names
of cities in -e have Ablative also in -e, as, Fraeneste, Genitive, Praenestis.
c. In the adjective vowel stems of the Third Declension, as, facilis, easy ;
J Ablative, facili ; acer, sharp ; Ablative, acri.
Kexakk. — So also the adjectives of this class, when used as substantives by ellipsis:
annalis (sc. liber, book), chronicle ; natalis (sc. dies, day), birthday ; Aprllis (sc. men-
sis, month), and all the other months of the Third Declension : Ablative, annall, natall,
April!, Septembri, etc.
Exceptions.— Juvenis. young man: and aedilis, aedile ; Ablative, juvene, aedile.
Adjectives used as proper nouns have generally Ablative in -e, as, Juvenilis ; Ablative,
Juvenale.
61. Rule of Gender. — 1. Of stems in i, Nominative in -is,
some are masculine, some feminine.
Masculine are:
Amnis, axis, callis, crlnis, Postis, scrobis, buris, collis,
Cassis, cauliSj fascis, finis, Sentis, torquis, atque follis,
Funis, fustis, ignis, ensis, Torris, unguis et annalis,
Orbis, panis, piscis, mensis, Vectis, vermis et canalis.
.
V
THIED DECLENSION.
annus.
axis, axle.
buris, ptong
callis, /:■"■>
canal:-
cassgs. {pi. I ^<?t&.
caulis. rtaflfc.
collis. #£#.
crinis. hair.
ensis, ghiire.
fascis. fagot.
finis. end.
follis. beOows.
funis, rope.
fastis, cudgel
ignis, Jirw.
mensis. month.
or bis. circle.
panis. bread.
piscis. fish.
post is, doorpost.
sentis, bramble.
scrobis, ditch.
torqois, necklace.
torris, fire-brand.
unguis, nail.
vectis, lever.
vermis, worm.
CalliSj finis, scrobis, torquis, are used also as feminines.
Other nouns in -is, and all in -es, are feminine. Vepres, bramble, is
usually masculine.
••2. Vowel stems, with Nominative in -e, -al, -ar, are neuter.
Remark.— Of the names of animals in -is. some are masculine ; tigris. tiger ; caDis,
dog ; piscis. fish ; others feminine: apis, bee; avis, bird ; ovis, sheep ; felis, cat (usu-
ries).
3. VOWEL STEMS IX U.
62. Of stems in u, only the monosyllabic belong to the Third j
Declension.
gruSj crane (fern.).
Sing. — X. grus
G. gruis
D. grui
Ac, gru-em
V. grus
Abl, gru-e
Plue. — gru-es
gru-um
gru-ibus
gru-es
gru-es
gru-ibus.
Siis, MOtntf, commonly fern., usually subus, in D. and AM. Plural.
Taele of Nominative and Genitive Endings of the Third Declension.
A * before the ending denotes that it occur? only in the one word cited.
63- A. NOMINATIVES ENDING WITH A LIQUID.
Nox.
No*.
Gen.
-al
-alis
animal.
animal.
-ar
-arris
far,
spelt.
-alis
Hannibal
proper name.
-er
-eris
anser,
goo*e.
-al
*-alis
sal.
-ris
pater,
father.
-el
-ellis
mel.
honey.
Mneris
iter,
journey.
-il
-ilis
pugil.
boxer.
-er
*-eris
ver.
spring.
-His
Tanaquil.
proper name.
-or
-oris
color,
color.
-51
*-olis
sol.
the sun.
-oris
aequor,
expanse.
-al
-alis
consul.
*-ordis
cor,
heart.
-en
-enis
ren.
kidney.
-ur
-uris
fulgur,
lightning.
-en
-ini3
nomen.
no/me.
-oris
robur.
oak.
-ar
-aris
-aris
calcar.
nectar.
spur,
nectar.
-ar
-uris
fur.
thief.
THIED DECLENSION.
27
64. B. NOMINATIVES EXDIXG WITH S, OR A COM-
POUND OF S (GS, CS), X :
N03I,
Gen.
Nom.
Gen.
-as
-atis
aetas,
age.
-aus
-audis
fraus, cheat ery. Gen,
*-asis
vas,
dish .
PI. fraudium.
-as
*-aris
mas,
male.
-Is
*-ltis
puis, porridge.
*-assis
as.
a copper.
-m(p)s
*-mis
iiiems, winter.
*-adis
vas,
surety .
-ns
-ndis
irons, leafy branch.
*-atis
anas,
duck.
-ntis
frons, forehead.
ies
*-aedis
praes,
surety.
-rs
-rdis
concors, concordant.
*-aeris
aes,
brass.
-rti3
pars, part.
-gs
-is
nubes,
cloud.
-bs
-bis
urbs, city.
*-eris
Ceres.
Ceres.
-ps
;pis
stirps, stalk.
-edis
pes,
foot.
-ipis
princeps. chief.
-etis
abies,
fir.
*-upis
auceps. fowler.
-etis
quies,
rest.
-ax
-acis
pax, pew:e.
-$S
-etis
seges,
crop.
-ax
*-acis
fax. torch.
-idi3
obses,
hostage.
-ex
-icis
judex, judge.
-itis
miles,
soldier.
-ecis
nex, death.
-is
-is
amnis,
river.
-egis
grex, feck.
-idis
lapis,
stone.
*igis
remex,
-eris
cinis,
ashes.
-ex
*-eeis
alex, pickle.
-inis
sanguis
blood.
*-Icis
Tlbex(ix).weal (fern.)
-Is
*-Itis
lis,
suit at law. Gen.
-egis
rex. king.
PI. Htium.
-Ix
-Icis
cervix, neck.
Mris
glls,
dormouse. Gen.
Pi. glirium.
-ix
-icis
*-igis
calix, cup.
strix, screech-owl.
-OS
*-odis
custos,
keeper.
*-ivis
nix, snow. Gen.
-otis
COS,
whetstone.
Pi. nivium.
-oris
nos,
fencer.
-ox
-ocis
vox, voice.
*-ovis
bos,
ox.
-ox
*-ocis
praecox. early-ripe.
-«S
-otis
compos,
possessed of.
*-ogis
Allobrox.
*ossis
OS.
bone.
*-octis
nox. night.
-us
*-udis
pecus,
cattle, sheep.
-ux
-ucis
crux. cross.
*-utis
intercus
, under the skin.
-ugis
conjux, spouse.
*-uris
Ligus,
a Ligurian.
-iix
-Ucis
lux. light.
-oris
corpus.
body.
-ugis
(frox,) fruit
-eris
scelus,
crime.
-aex
-aecis
faex, dregs.
-us
-uis
siis,
stcine.
-aux
-aucis
faux. threat. G« n.
Pi. faucium.
-uris
jus,
right.
-lx
-Icis
falx. sickle.
-iidis
incus,
anvil.
-nx
-ncis
lanx, dish.
-litis
salus,
weal.
-rx
-rcis
arx, citadel.
65.
C. XOMIZSTATIYES EXDLN'G WITH A MUTE.
-ac
*-actis
lac. milk.
-6c
*-ecis
alec, pidkle.
-ut
Mtis
caput, head
23 FOUKTII DECLENSION.
66. D. NOMINATIVES ENDING WITH A VOWEL.
-e
-is
mare, sea.
-8
-onis
pavo, peacock.
-onis
Saxo, Saxon.
-inis
homo, man.
*-nis
caro, flesh.
Fourth Declension.
67. The Fourth Declension embraces only dissyllabic and
polysyllabic stems in u.
The endings are those of the Third Declension.
In the Genitive and Ablative Singular, and the Nominative,
Accusative, and Vocative Plural (sometimes, too, in the Dative
Singular), the u of the stem absorbs the vowel of the ending,
and becomes long, as fructu-is becomes fructus, of fruit ; fmctu-e
becomes fructti, from fruit; fructu-es becomes fructus, fruits.
This u, on the contrary, is lost before the ending -ibus in the
Dative and Ablative Plural.
The Accusative Singular, as always in vowel stems, has the
ending m, without a connecting vowel (compare the Accusative
in -im of the stems in i), hence u-m.
MASCULINE.
NEUTER.
-N.
fructu-s,/rw^. Pl. fructus,
cornu,
horn. Pl
. cornu-a,
G.
fructus, f 'uctu-um,
corntis
cornu-um,
D.
fructu-I (fructti), fructibus,
cornu,
cornibus,
Ac.
fructu-m, fructus,
cornu,
cornu-a,
V.
fructus, fructus,
cornu,
cornu-a,
Abl
. fructti, fructibus,
cornu,
cornibus.
Remakks. — 1. Dative and Ablative Plurals iii -ubus occur in nouns i
-cus, and in tribus, tribe ; artus, joint ; partus, childbirth ; portus, harbor
unus, fold.
2. Domus, home, Ablative Singular, domo; Genitive Plural, domuur
Mid domorum; Accusative Plural, domus and domos. Domi (a locatrv
form) means, at home.
68. Rule of Gender. — Nouns in -us are masculine ; those i
-u are neuter.
Exceptions.— Feminines are idus, pl., the 15th day of the month, tribu
tribe, porticus, piazza, acus, needle, manus, hand, domus, house.
FIFTH DECLENSION. 29
Fifth Declension.
69« The stem ends in e. Nominative in s.
Sing.-
MASCULINE.
FEMININE
-K
die-s, day.
PL
die-s,
Sing
re-s, thing.
PL
re-s.
G.
die-I,
die-rum,
re-i,
re-rum
D.
die-i,
die-bus,
re-i,
re-bus,
Ac,
die-m,
die-s,
re-m,
re-s,
y.
die-s,
die-s,
re-s,
re-s,
Abl.
die,
die-bus.
re,
re-bus.
Eemarks. — 1. The Plural is used throughout in three words only : res,
thing ; dies, day ; and in later Latin, species, appearance. In some words,
only Nominative, Accusative, and Vocative Plural occur ; others have no
Plural at all.
2. The stem-characteristic e, in the Genitive and Dative Singular, is
long after a vowel and short after a consonant, as species, Genitive speciel;
res, thing, Genitive rei; fides, faith, Genitive fidei.
3. Some nouns of the Fifth Declension have a secondary form, which
follows the First Declension, as mollities, softness, and mollitia. Where
the double form exists, only Nominative, Accusative, and Ablative Singu-
lar commonly follow the Fifth Declension.
70. Rule of Gender. — Nouns of the Fifth Declension are
feminine, except dies (which in the Singular is of the common
gender, and. in the Plural masculine), and the masculine merl-
dies, mid-day.
Decle^sio^" of Greek Notjss.
71. Greek substantives, especially proper names, are com-
monly Latinized, and declined regularly according to their
stem-characteristic. Many nouns, however, either retain their
Greek form exclusively, or have the Greek and Latin forms side
by side.
72. Singular Forus of Greek Nouxs.
t. ii.
N. Penelope, Leonidas, Anchises, Delos (us), Ilion (um).
O. Penelopes, Leonidae, Anchisae, Deli, Ilii.
D. Penelopae, Leonidae, Anchisae, Delo, Ilio.
Ac. Penelopen, Leonidam (an), Anchisen (am), Delon (um), Ilion (um).
V. Penelope, Leonida, Anchise, a, a, Dale, Ilion (um).
Abl. Penelopa. Leonida. Anchisa. Dslo. Ilio.
30
GREEK NOUNS.
IT.
ii. in.
ni.
X.
Pantlius,
Androgeos (us), Athos,
Orpheus,
Solon, Solo,
G.
Panthi,
Androgel,
Atho, onis,
Orphei (ei),
Solonis.
D.
Pantho.
Androgeo,
Atho,
Orpheo,
Soloni.
Ac.
Panthun,
Androgeon,
o. ona,
Atho, on, onem
, Orpheum (ea),
Solona (em),
V.
Panthu,
Androgeos,
Athos,
Orpheu,
Solon.
Abl
Pantho.
Androgeo.
Athene.
Orpheo.
Solone.
N.
Aer. air.
Xenophon,
Atlas,
Thales,
Paris.
G.
Aeris,
Xenophontis,
Atlantis,
Thaletis, is,
Paridis, os.
D.
Aeri,
Xenophonti,
Atlanti,
Thai?/*, I,
Paridi, I.
Ac.
Aera cem),
Xenophonta
Atlanta,
Thale/a, en, em, Parto, im, 1
(em),
V.
A6r,
Xenophon,
Atla,
Thale,
Pari, Paris
Abl
. Aere.
Xenophonte.
Atlante.
Thale.
Paride.
N. Oedipus, Achilles, eus, Socrates, Dido, heros.
G. Oedipodfc?, I, Achillis, el, I, Socratis, 1, Didus, onis, herois.
eos,
D. Oedipodi, Achilli, Socrati, Dido, oni, heroi.
Ac. Oedipwm (oda), Achillem, ea, Socraten, em, Dido, onem, heroa, em.
en,
V. Oedipe, Achilles, e, eu, Socrate (es), Dido, heros.
Abl. Oedipocte. o. Achille. Socrate. Dido, one. heroe.
Re? t arks. — 1. Many other forms are found, for which the dictionaries
must be consulted. So poesis, G. poesis, eos, D. poesT, Ace. poesin, poesy.
Many of them are transliterations of Greek words, quoted as Greek.
2. In transferring Greek nouns into Latin, the Accusative Singular was
sometimes taken as the stem.
So KpaTtffj, Ace. xparT/pa, (pnnc7i) bowl.
crater, crateris (masc), and cratera (creterra) craterae (fern.)
2aXajui$y Ace. lEaXajniva, Salamis.
Salamis, Salamlnis, and Salamina, ae.
73.
Plural Forms of Greek Nouits.
N. Pl.
-oe
-e
-es
: canephoroe, basket-bearers.
: epe, epic poetry.
Arcades, Arcadians. How often in prose we can-
not tell.
Georgicon, of tlie Georgics.
-eon : Metamorphose5n, of the Metamorphoses.
D. Pl. -si : Lemniasi (rare), to the Lemnian women.
Ace. Pl. -as ■ Macedonas. Common even in words that are not
Greek : Allobrogas.
G. Pl. -on
IRREGULAR XOUNS.
31
IRREGULAR NOUKS.
74- *• Redundant Nouns.
ABUNDANTIA.
A. Different genders in the same declension :
foaculus, baculum,
balteus, balteum, sword-bdt.
clipeus, clipeum, shield.
calamister, calamistrum, curling-iron.
1.
1st and 2d.
esseda, ae,
essedum, I,
war-chariot, gig.
vespera, ae,
vesper, I,
evening.
2.
1st and 5th.
duritia, ae,
dtirities,
hardness.
materia, ae,
materies,
stuff.
3.
2d and 5th.
diluvium, I,
dlluvies,
flood.
4.
2d and 4th.
eventum, i,
eventus, us,
issue.
5.
3d and 4th.
plebs, is,
tribunus plebi,
plebes, el,
tribune of the people.
commons.
6.
3d acd 2d.
imbecillis,
imbecillus,
weak.
And a few others (adjectives).
•75. II. Defective Notjns.
1. NOUNS DEFECTIVE IN NUMBER.
A. Nouns used in Singular only : Singularia tantum.
Most abstract nouns, and names of materials :
justitia, justice, aurum, gold.
B. Nouns used in Plural onlv : Pluralia tantum.
angustiae.
straits
liberl,
children.
arma, orum,
arms,
manes,
shades of tJie dead.
blgae, quadrigae,
two-horse, four-horse chariot,
minae,
threats.
casses, ium,
. toils {snare),
moenia, ium, N. town-wall.
cervices, um.
neck (preferred to cervix),
nuptiae,
wedding.
divitiae,
riches,
scalae,
stairway.
epulae (epulum),
banquet,
tenebrae,
darkness.
fores, um, f.
door,
valvae,
folding -doors.
habenae,
reins.
viscera,
entrails.
indutiae,
truce.
Kalendae. ffonae,
Idtis, Calends, Nones, Ides.
ambages, -um,
round about,
fauces -ium
, f., gullet.
compedes. -ium.
fetters,
preces -um,
f.. prayer.
These four have the
Ablative Singular in -e: ambaj
?e,compede,
fauce, prece.
Akin to Pluralia tantum are :
C. Nouns used in Plural with a special sense : Heterologa.
aedes. is, temple, aedes, ium, house, palace.
auxilium, help,
castrum, fort,
auxilia,
castra,
auxiliaries, reinforcements,
camp.
3'2 IPTCEGUXAH NOUNS.
copia,
abundance.
copiae,
forces, troops.
finis,
end, limits
fines,
territory, borders.
litera,
letter (of the alphabet).
literae,
epistle, literature.
opera,
work,
operae,
luorkmen.
76- 3. NOUNS DEFECTIVE IN CASE.
A. Used only in Nominative and Accusative Singular : fas, right, nefaa,
wrong, and Greek Neuters in -os.
B. In Ablative Singular: sponte, of free toil!, and many verbals in u:
promptu, in readiness; jussu, by order ; monitu, by advice.
C. In the oblique cases the forms from :
(daps), f., feast, S. and PI. (ops), f, help (No Dat), S. and PI.
(dicio), f., sway, S. (vix), f., change (No Dat.), S. and PI.
(frux), f., fruit, S. and PI.
D. The Genitive Plural of many monosyllabic words does not occur :
cos, whetstone, lux, light, os, mouth.
vis, force : G. and D. are wanting ; Ac. vim ; Abl. vi. PI. vires, virium,
viribus.
nemo, nobody : G. nullius hominis ; D. nemini ; Ac. neminem ; Abl.
nullo nomine.
77- HI. Variable Nouns.
A. Hetehoclttes : Different stems with the same Nominative.
domus (domu- and domo) ; Abl. domo ; PI. G. domuum, domorum ; Ace. domus
and domos.
pecus (peoud- and pecor-), peendis, sheep ; pecoris, cattle.
ficus, flg-iree ; laurus, bay-tree ; pinus, pine-tree ; are declined regularly
according to the Second Declension, but have' secondary forms in use
from the Fourth Declension in the Ablative Singular, and in the Nomina-
tive and Accusative Plural. .
senatus, senate ; G. senatus or senati (rare).
requies, -etis, f. : Ac. requietem and requiem, rest.
fames, -is ; Abl. fame and fame, hunger.
satrapes, G. satrapae and satrapis ; D. satrapae, &c, Persian governor.
78* B. Heterogeneous Nouns have the same stem with different
gender in Singular and Plural:
Singular. Plural.
frenum, bridle. freni, and frena.
jocus, jest. joci, and joca.
locus, jilace. j loca, localities.
< loci, passages in books, topics.
r as tram, mattock. rastrl, and rastra.
ADJECTIVES OF THIRD DECLENSION.
33
79- C. Metaplasts are nouns which have isolated cases from another
than the Nominative stem :
vas, vasis, n., vessel. PI. vasa, vasorum, vasis (as if from vaso).
poema, poematis, n.,poem. PL poemata, poematum, Ibus.
G. poematorum, D. poematis (as if from poemato-).
So all Greek nouns in -a, -atis.
Bacchanalia, -ium (-iorum), -ibus, feast of Bacchus.
So several other names of feasts in -ia.
80.
IV. Peculiarities.
Anio, G. Anienis, the (river) Anio.
as, assis, m., a copper.
auceps, sMCTxpis, fowler.
bos (bovs), bovis, c., ox, cow.
G. Pi. bourn.
D. Abl. bubus, bonus,
caput- capitis, n., head.
So anceps, ancipitis, two-headed.
praeceps, -cipitis, headlong.
caro, carnis (for carinis), f., flesh.
G. PI. carnium,
Ceres, Cereri3, Ceres.
far, fair is. d., spelt.
fel, fellis, ri., gall.
femur, femoris, n., thigh.
feminis.
iter, itineris, n., way, route.
jecur, jecoris, n., liver.
jecinoris.
Jupiter (for Jov(i)piter), Jovis.
mel, mellis. n., honey.
nix=(s)nig(v)s, nivis, f., snow.
os, ossis, n., bone.
OS, oris, n.„ mouth,
pollis. pollinis, m., flour.
sanguis, sanguinis, m., blood.
senex, senis, old man.
supellex, supellectilis, f., furniture.
Venus, Veneris, Venus.
Adjectives oe the Third Declension".
81. The declension of tlie adjectives of the Third Declension
follows the rules given for the substantives.
Most of the adjectives of the Third Declension are vowel
stems in i. They form the masculine and feminine alike, with
Nominative in s; but the neuter Nominative weakens the char-
acteristic i into e. (Compare mare, sea.)
Adjectives of Two Endings.
82. Several stems in i, preceded by r (cr, tr, br), form the
Nominative masculine, not by affixing s, but by dropping the i
and inserting e short before the r, as, stem acri, sharp, Nom.
Masc. acer, Norn. Fern, acris. (Compare 60, 3 c.)
The e belongs to the stem only in celer, celeris, celere, swift.
2*
ADJECTIVES OF TTTITIT) DECLENSION.
MA80,
and Fbv.
Neuter.
Masc.
Fem.
Neuter.
Sing.— N.
facili-s, easy.
facile,
acer,
acri-s,
acre.
G.
facilis,
acris,
D.
facili,
acrl,
Ac.
facilem,
facile,
acrem,
acre.
V.
facilis,
facile,
acer,
acris,
acre.
Abl
facili.
acrl.
Plur.—N.
faciles,
facili-a,
acres,
acri-a.
G.
facili-um,
acri-um,
D.
facili-bus,
acri-bus,
Ac.
faciles,
facili-a,
acres,
acri-a.
y.
faciles,
facili-a,
acres,
acri-a.
Abl.
facili-bus.
acri-bus.
83. The consonant stems have the same forms in all the
genders, except that in the Accusative Singular, and in the
Nominative, Accusative, and Vocative Plural, the neuter is
distinguished from the masculine and feminine.
M. and F.
N.
M. and F. N.
M. and F.
N.
Sing.— N.
felix. lucky,
felix,
priidens, wise, priidens,
vetus, old,
vetus.
G.
fellc-is,
prudent-is,
veter-is,
D.
felic-i,
prudent i,
veter-i,
Ac.
felic-em,
felix,
prudent-em, priidens,
veter-em,
vetus.
V.
felix,
priidens,
vetus,
Abl
fellcl (and -e),
prudent! (and e),
veter-e (or
i).
M. and F.
N.
M. and F. N.
M. and F.
N.
Plur.—N.
felic-es,
felicia,
prtident-es, prudentia,
veter-es,
veter-a.
G.
felic-ium,
prudent ium,
veter-um,
D.
felic-ibus,
prtident-ibus,
veter-ibus,
Ac.
felic-es,
felicia,
priident-Ss, prudentia,
veter-es,
veter-a.
V.
felic-es,
felicia,
prtident-es, prudentia,
veter-es,
veter-a.
Abl. felic-ibus,
prudent-ibus,
veter-ibus.
Adjectives of One Ending.
84. Adjective stems of one ending close with 1, r, s, or a p,
k, or t mute.
vigil. nUH, memor. mindful, pauper, poor, cicur, tame, pubgs, adult, vetus, old.
vigil-is, memor-is, pauper-is, cicur-is, ptiber-is, veter-is.
Abl. i (e). Abl. e. Abl. e. Abl. e.
particep s. sharing,
particip-is, Abl. e.
audax. hold, felix, lucky,
audac-is. fellc-is.
caeleb-s, unmarried,
caelib-is, Abl. e.
duplex, double,
duplic-is.
ferox, fierce,
feroc-is.
inop-s, poor.
inop-is, Abl. i (e).
trux, savage.
truc-is.
COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 35
dives, rich, deses, slothful, compos, possessed of, prudens, wise, concors, harmonious.
divit is, desid-is, compot-is, prudent-is, concord-is,
Abl. e. Abl. e. Abl. e. Abl. e.
85. Obseeyations. — The adjectives of one ending, including
the present participle, follow in part the declension of vowel
stems :
1. In the neuter Plural they have -ia; only vetus, old, has
Vetera. Many have no neuter.
2. In the Ablative Singular they have I and e — when used as
adjectives commonly I; when used as substantives commonly e.
The participles, as such, have e; but used as nouns or adjec-
tives, either e or I, with tendency to I.
3. In the Genitive Plural the consonant-stems have: -ium,
when the characteristic is preceded by a long vowel or a con-
sonant; -urn, when the characteristic is preceded by a short
vowel, as :
audax, bold,
audacium,
prudens, wise.
prtidentium,
Samnites, Samnites.
Samnitium.
supplex, suppliant,
supplicum,
dives, rich.
divitum or ditum.
caelebs, unmarried,
caelibum,
compos, possessed of,
compotum,
memor, mindful.
memorum.
Exceptions occur, as :
multiplex, manifold, multiplicium. Phoenices, Phoenicians, Phoenicum.
The participles have -ium; as, amans, loving, amantium.
Used as nouns, they have sometimes -urn, as :
sapiens, a sage, sapientum. parens, a parent, parentum.
4. Compound adjectives follow the declension of the word
from which they are formed, as :
concors, harmonious, anceps, double, quadrupes,/0wr-/<?0tetf,
concordum, ancipitum, quadrupedum.
Even these, however, have the neuter plural commonly in -ia, as, anci-
pitia, quadrupedia.
Compaeison or Adjectives.
86. The Degrees of comparison are : Positive, Comparative,
and Superlative.
i6
COMrAKTSON OF ADJECTIVES.
The Comparative is formed by adding to the consonant stems
the endings -ior for the masculine and feminine, and -ius for the
n< ater.
The Superlative is formed by adding to the consonant stems
the endings -issinius, -a, -um.
Vowel shins, before forming the Comparative and Superla-
tive, drop their characteristic vowel.
Positive. Comparative.
M. and F. N.
altus. -a, -uin, high, alt-ior, higher, alt-ius,
fortis. -e, brave, fort-ior, fort-ius,
utilis, -e, useful, util-ior, util-ius,
audax, bold, audac-ior, audac-ius,
Superlative.
alt-issimus, a, um, highest
fort-issimus.
iitil-issimus.
audac-issimus.
prudens,
87-
wise,
prudent-ior,
M. and F.
SlKG.-
-K
altior,
G.
altioris,
D.
altiorl,
Ac.
altiorem,
V.
altior,
Abl.
altiore and
Plub.-
-K
altiores,
G.
altiorum,
D.
altioribus,
Ac.
altiores,
V.
altiores,
Abl.
altioribus,
prudent-ius, prudent-issimus.
N.
altius.
altioris.
altiorl.
altius.
altius.
-I. altiore and -L
altiora.
altiorum.
altioribus.
altiora.
altidra.
alti5ribus.
Peculiarities.
88. 1. Adjectives in -er add the Superlative ending -rimus directly to
the Nominative Masculine (-rimus for -simus by assimilation).
Positive.
miser, -a. -um, wrtiched,
celer, -is. -e, swift,
acer. acris. acre, sharp,
vetus, old,
Comparative.
miser-ior, miser-ius,
celer-ior, celer-ius,
acr-ior. acr-ius,
veterior, vetustior,
Superlative.
miser-rimus.
celer-rimus.
acer-rimus.
veter-rimus.
mattirus, ripe, sometimes maturrimus.
2. Six adjectives in -ilia add -limus to the stem, after dropping -i, to
form the Superlative: perhaps by assimilation.
facilis. easy; difficilis, hard; similis, like; dissimilis, unlike; gracilis, slender;
and humilis. low.
facilis,
Comp. facil-ior,
Sup. faoil-limus (for facil-simus).
IRREGULAR COMPARISON.
37
3. The adjectives in dicus, ficus, volus, borrow the Comparative and
Superlative from the participial forms in -dicens, -ficens, and -volens.
benevolus, benevolent, Comp. benevolentior, Sup. benevolentissimus.
maledicus, scurrilous. maledlcentior, maledicentissimus.
In like manner:
egentior, egentissimus.
providentior, providentissimus.
4. Adjectives in -us, preceded by a vowel, form the Comparative and
Superlative by means of magis and maxime, more and most:
idoneus,^, Comp. magis idoneus, Sup. maxime idoneus.
Remark.— Adjectives in -quus are not included under this last rule.
antiquus, old, Comp. antfqu-ior, Sup. antlqu-issimus.
e genus, needy,
providus, far-sighted,
89.
Irregular Comparison.
bonus,
good,
melior,
melius,
optimus.
malus,
bad,
pejor,
pejus,
pessimus.
magnus,
great,
major,
majus,
maximus.
parvus,
small,
minor,
minus,
minimus.
multus,
much,
S.
PL plures,
complurSs,
plus (no Dat. nor Abl.),
plura, G. PL plurium.
compltira and -ia.
pliirimus.
neqnam,
worthless,
nequior,
nequius,
nequissimus.
frugl (indecl.
frugal,
frugalior,
frugalissimus
Remarks.—!. Some Comparatives and Superlatives are in use, whilst
the corresponding Positive is either lacking or rare.
deterior, worse, deterrimus.
ocior, swifter, ocissimus.
potior, better, potissimus.
exterior, outer, extremus, extimus, from exterus, on the outside, and prep, extra,
without.
superior, upper, supremus, or summus, from superus, on the top, and prep, supra,
above.
inferior, lower, infimus, from inferus, below, prep, infra, below.
posterior, hinder, later, postremus and postumus, from posterus, coming after, and
prep, post, after.
2. The Positive stem of existing Comparatives is met with only in a
preposition or an adverb : as, ante, before ; anterior, that is before; prope,
near; propior, proximus; citerior, on this side; citimus, from citra ; ul-
terior, farther; ultimus, from ultra, beyond; interior, inner; intimus,
from intus, within ; prior, former ; primus, first, from prae, before.
3. Many adjectives lack one or both of the degrees of comparison.
Diver sus, different, novus, new, falsus, untrue, meritus, deserved, have no Com-
parative.
Longinquus, ofai, propinquus, near, salutaris, healthful, jnvenis, young (Com*
1 parative junior \ and senex, eld (Comparative senior), Lave no superlative.
uYoungest" and '"oldest/'' are expressed by minimus, maximus (natti).
i8
ADVERBS.
ADVEBBS.
90. Adverbs are cither oblique cases or mutilated forms of
oblique cases of the adjectives.
1. Adjectives in -us and -er form the adverb in e (mutilated
Ablative),
altus, lofty, alte. pulcher, beautiful, pulchre. miser, wretched, misere.
2. The adjectives of the Third Declension form their adverbs by adding
-ter to the stem ; stems in -nt dropping the t, and stems in a K-mute in-
serting the connecting vowel i before the ending.
fortis, brave, fortiter. ferox, wild, ferociter. prudens, foreseeing, prudenter.
Exceptions :
audax, bold, audac-ter (seldom audaciter). difficilis, hard to do, difficulter and
difliciliter.
But instead of these, generally, non facile, vix, aegre.
3. The Ablative of some adjectives serves as an adverb:
tutus, safe, tuto; falso, falsely; perpetuo, ceaselessly; continuo, forth-
wtii ; improvIs5, unexpectedly ; primo, at first.
consulte and consulto, purposely ; certe, at least, and certo, certainly.
rare, thinly, and rard, seldom ; vere, in truth, and vero, true but
recte, correctly, and recta, straightway ; dextera or dextra, to the right% \
and dextere, skillfully.
sinistra and laeva, to the left hand.
4. The Accusative neuter of many adjectives is used as aril
adverb. This is true of all Comparatives.
Multum, much ; paulum, a Utile ; nimium, too much ; ceterum, /<?r tli\
rest ; prlmum, first ; postremum, finally ; potissimum, chiefly ; facile|
easily ; dulce, sweetly ; triste, sadly ; im.pu.ne, scot-free.
91.
Comparison of Adverbs.
Positive.
Comparative.
Superlative.
alt6,
loftily,
altius,
altissime.
pulchrg,
beautifully
, pulchrius,
pulcherrimg.
miserg,
poorly,
miserius,
miserrime.
fortiter,
bravely,
fortius,
fortissime.
audacter,
boldly,
audacius,
audacissime.
tuto,
safely,
tutius,
tutissime.
facile,
easily,
facilius,
facillime.
bene,
xvell,
melius,
optime.
male,
ill,
pejus,
pessime.
[parvus],
small,
minus, less,
minime, least.
[magnus]
great,
magis, more,
maxime, most.
multum,
much,
plus, more,
plurimum.
cito,
quickly,
citius,
citissime.
diu.
long,
diutius.
diutissimS.
saepe,
often,
saepius,
saepissimg.
nuper,
recently,
nuperrimS.
>
satis,
enough,
satius, better.
NUMERALS.
39
J
NUMERALS.
Numeral Adjectives.
92. The Cardinal numerals are indeclinable, except : tinus,
ne, duo, two, tres, three, the hundreds beginning with ducenti,
vo hundred, and the plural milia, thousands, which forms
■illium and miiibus.
duo, tres, tria.
duorum, trium.
duobus, tribus.
duo, tres, tria.
duobus, tribus.
Like duo is declined ambo, -ae, -o, both.
duo, two,
duae,
duorum,
duarum,
duobus,
duabus,
duos, duo,
duas,
duobus,
duabus,
93.
1. Cardinal Numbers.
2. Ordinal Numbers.
1
I
tinus, una, unum
primus, -a, -urn (prior)
2
II
duo, duae, duo
secundus (alter).
3
III
tres, tria
tertius
4
IV
quattuor
quartus
5
V
quinque
quintus
6
VI
sex
sextus
7
VII
sept em
Septimus
8
VIII
octo
octavus
9
IX
novem
nonus
10
X
decern
decimus
11
XI
undecim
undecimus
12
XII
duodecim
duodecimus
13
XIII
tredecim
tertius decimus
14
XIV
quattuor decim
quartus decimus
15
XV
quindecim
quintus decimus
16
XVI
sedecim
sextus decimus
17
XVII
septendecim
Septimus decimus
18
XVIII
duodeviginti
duodevicesimus
19
XIX
undeviginti
undevicesimus
20
XX
vigintl
vicesimus
21
XXI
vigintl unus
vicesimus primus
22
XXII
vigintl duo
vicesimus secundus
23
XXIII
vigintl tres
vicesimus tertius
24
XXIV
vigintl quattuor
vicesimus quartus
25
XXV
vigintl quinque
vicesimus quintus
26
XXVI
vigintl sex
vicesimus sextus
,0
NUMERALS.
1. Cardinal Numerals.
27
XXVII
viginti sept em
28
XXVIII
duodetriginta
29
XXIX
undetriginta
30
XXX
triginta
40
XL
quadr^7ginta
50
L
quinqu^ginta
60
LX
sex<7ginta
70
LXX
sept^aginta
80
LXXX
octoginta
90
XC
nonaginta
100
C
centum
101
CI
centum et unus
115
CXV
centum et quindecim
120
cxx
centum et viginti
121
CXXI
centum et viginti unus
200
cc
ducenti, -ae, -a
300
ccc
trecenti
400
cccc
quadn'ttgenti
500
D(IO)
quingenti
600
DC
sexcenti
700
DCC
septmgenti
800
DCCC
octingentl
900
DCCCC
nongenti
1000
M (CIo)
mille
1001
MI
mille et unus
1101
MCI
mille centum unus
1120
MCXX
mille centum viginti
[unus
1121
MCXXI
mille centum viginti
1200
MCC
mille ducenti
2000
MM
duo milia (millia)
blna milia
2222
duo milia ducenti vi-
ginti duo
5000
IOD
quinque milia
quina milia
10,000
CCIoo
decern milia
dena milia
21,000
unum et viginti milia
100,000
centum milia
centena milia
000,000
decies centena milia
[mue
2. Ordinal Numerals.
vicesimus Septimus
duodetricesimus
undetricesimus
trlcesimus
quadragesimus
quinquagesimus
sexagesimus
septuagesimus
octogesimus
nonagesimus
centesimus
centesimus primus
centesimus et quintus deci
centesimus vicesimus [mui
centesimus vicesimus prij
ducentesimus
trecentesimus
quadringentesimus
quingentesimus
sexcentesimus
septingentesimus
octingent e simus
non^entesimus
millesimus
millesimus primus
millesimus centesimus pr
mus
millesimus centesimus v
cesimus [cesimus primil
millesimus centesimus v
millesimus ducentesimus
bis millesimus
bis millesimus ducente
mus vicesimus secund
quinquies millesimus
decies millesimus
semel et vicies millesin?
centies millesimus
decies centies millesimu;
NUMERALS.
41
Eemark.-D is short for Iq, M for CIo. Adding o on the right of I multiplies by 10 :
; o = 5000 ; IQOO = 50,000. Putting C before as often as q stands after multiplies by 2:
O = 1000; CCIoo = 10,000; CCCIqoo = 100,000.
94- Compound Numerals.
1. From 10 to 20, as in the tables, or separately: decern et tres.
2. The numbers 18, 19, 28, 29, &c., are commonly expressed by subtrac-
:>n ; occasionally, as in English.
3. From 20 to 100, the compound numerals stand in the same order as
le English : twenty-one, viginti unus j or one and twenty, iinus et viginti.
As 21 years old : annos unum et viginti (viginti unum), unum et vi-
inti annos natus.
4. From 100 on, et is inserted after the first numeral, or omitted alto-
ether : mille et centum unus, or mille centum unus = 1101.
Cardinals.
21-
2T viginti unus
or unus et viginti
101
centum et unus
centum iinus
120
centum et viginti
centum viginti
121
centum et viginti unus
—
centum viginti iinus
1001
mille et iinus
mille iinus
1101
mille et centum unus
milie centum unus
1125
miile et centum viginti
quinque
mille centum viginti quinque.
2222
duo milia et ducenti viginti
duo
duo milia ducenti viginti duo
Ordinals.
13-17
tertius decimus
or
decimus et tertius
18
duodevicesimus
octavus decimus
19
undevicesimus
nonus decimus
21
vicesimus primus
unus et vicesimus
22
vicesimus secundus
alter et vicesimus
23
vicesimus tertius
tertius et vicesimus
95.
3. Distributive Numerals.
1
singuli, -ae, -a, one each.
14
quaterni deni
2
bini, -ae, -a, two each.
15
quini deni
3
terni
10
seni deni
4
quaterni
17
septeni deni
5
quini
18
oct5ni deni, duodeviceni
6
seni
19
noveni deni, undeviceni
7
septeni
20
viceni
8
octoni
21
viceni singuli
9
noveni
22
viceni bini, bini et viceni
10
deni
28
duodetriceni
11
undeni
29
undetriceni
12
duodeni
30
trice ni
13
terni deni
40
quadrageni
42
NUMERAL ADVERBS.
50 quinquageni
60 sexageni
TO septuageni
80 oct5geni
90 n5nageni
100 centeni
200 duceni
300 treceni
400 quadringeni
500 quingeni
600 sexceni
700 septingeni
800 octingeni
900 nongeni
1000 singula milia
2000 bina milia
3000 trlna milia
10,000 dena milia
100,000 centena milia
Remarks.— 1. The distributives are used with an exactness, which is foreign to ocr
idiom, whenever repetition is involved, as in the multiplication table. But when singulli
is expressed, the cardinal may be used.
2. The distributives are used with Pluralia tantum : blnae literae, two epistle',}
But with these unl is used for one, trlnl for three: unae literae, trinae literae.
3. The poets occasionally use the distributives for cardinals.
4. Multiplicative Numerals.
1
simplex,
single.
5
quincuplex.
2
duplex,
double,
7
septemplex.
3
triplex,
triple,
10
decemplex.
4
quadruplex,
100
centuplex.
These answer the question, how many fold?
5. Proportional Numerals.
1 simplus, -a, -urn, single, 4 quadruplus.
2 duplus, double, 7 septuplus.
3 triplus, 8 octuplus.
These answer the question, how many times as great?
Remark. — Only a few forms can be proved.
Numeral Adverbs.
96.
1 semel, once,
2 bis, twice,
3 ter
4 quater
5 quinquies, quinquiens
6 sexies
7 septies
8 octies
9 no vies
10 decies
11 undecies
12 duo decies
13 ter decies, tredecies
14 quater decies, quattuordecies I
15 quinquies decies, quindecies
16 sexies decies, sedecies
17 septies decies
18 duodevicies, octies decies
19 undevicies, novies decies
20 vicies
21 semel et vicies, vicies et
* Not semel vicies. bis viciSs, etc., because that would be, once twenty times =;[(
times ; twice twenty times = 40 times.
PRONOUNS. 43
■2 bis et vicies,
vicies et
400 quadringenties
bis, vicies bis *
500 quingenties
0 tricies
600 sexcenties
0 quadragies
700 septingenties
0 quinquagies
800 octingenties
>0 sexagies
900 nongenties
0 septuagies
1,000 millies
K3 octogies
2,000 bis millies
)0 n5nagies
100,000 centies millies
)0 centies
1,000,000 millies millies, decies cen-
)0 ducenties
ties millies.
)0 trecenties
PKONOUNS.
97. Pronouns designate without describing.
Remark. — The pronoun is not a word used instead of a noun. The noun says too
?uch, for all nouns (proper as well as common) are originally descriptive ; the pronoun
mply points out. The noun says too little, because it cannot express person, as ego, /,
i, thou ; it cannot express local appurtenance, as hlC, this (here), ille, that (there),
98. A. Personal Pronouns.
I. Personal Pronouns of the First Person.
SUBSTANTIVE. POSSESSIVE.
meus, -a, -urn, mine or my.
Voc. (masc), ml.
noster, nostra, nostrum, our or ours.
n. Personal Pronouns of the Second Person.
SUBSTANTIVE. POSSESSIVE.
thou,
of thee,
to, for thee, tuus, a, urn, thy or thine,
thee,
Abl. te, from, with, by thee.
* Not semel vicies, bis vicies, etc., because that would be, once twenty times = 20
times ; twice twenty times = 40 time*.
Sing.— N.
ego,
/,
G.
mei,^
of me,
D.
mini,
to, for me,
Ac.
me,
me,
Abl.
me,
from, with, by me.
Plur.— N.
nos,
' we,
G.
nostri,
of us,
nostrum,
D.
nobis,
to, for us,
Ac.
nos,
us.
Abl.
nobis,
from, with, by us.
Sing.— N.
tu,
G.
tuL
D.
tibl,
Ac.
te,
44
jtjk
SUBSTANTIVE.
KJIX\J\J X\&.
Plur.— N.
vos, ye or you,
G.
vestrl, of you,
vestrum,
vester,
D.
vobis, to, for you,
Ac.
vos, you,
POSSESSIVE.
vester, vestra, vestrum, your or yours.
Abl. vobis, from., with, by you.
Remarks. — 1. The forms of the Genitive Plural, nostrum and vestrum, are used as
partitive genitives in reference to number.
2. From noster and vester and also from cujus, whose? (104) are formed the Gentile
adjectives of one ending: nostras, of our country ; vestras, of your country ; cujas, of
whose country? Gen. nostratis, vestratis, cujatis.
III. Personal Pronouns of the Third Person.
100. The personal pronoun of the third person is represented
by the determinative in the oblique cases, with special forms for
the reflexive.
Determinative.
SUBSTANTIVE.
Sing.— N. [is, ea, id], he, she, it,
G. ejus, of him, etc.,
D. el, to, for him,
Ac. eum, earn, id, him, her, it,
Abl. eo, ea, eo, from,, with, by him, etc.
Plur.— N. [el, oril, eae, ea], they,
G. eorum, earum, eorum, of them,
D. els, or ils, to, for the?n,
Ac. eos, eas, ea, them,
Abl. els, or iis, from, with, by them.
POSSESSIVE.
(supplied by the genitive.)
ejus, his, hers, its.
eorum, earum, eorum, their,
or theirs.
Sing.— N.
G.
D.
Ac.
Abl
Plur.— N.
G.
D.
Ac.
Reflexive.
SUBSTANTIVE.
sui, of him, her, it(self),
sibl, to, for, him(self), her (self),
se (sSse), himiself), herisflf),
se (sese), from, with, by him(self).
POSSESSIVE,
suus, -a, -um, his, her(s),
(own).
a, -um, their (own),
sui, of them(selves), SUUS.
sibl, to, for fhem(selves), theirs.
se (sese), them(selves),
Abl. se (sese) from,, with, by them(selves).
Remarks. — 1. The enclitic -met may be added to all the forms of ego (except nos-
trum), to all the forms of til (except tii and vestrum), to sibi, se, and the forms of
suus ; egomet, I myself
2. The enclitic -pte is joined to the Ablative Singular of the Possessives ; it is espe-
cially common with suo ; suopte ingenio. by his own genius.
3. From til are formed ttite and tutemet-
PRONOUNS. 45
101. B. Determinative Pronouns.
1. is, he, that, etc.
Singular.
Plural.
N. is,
ea,
id,
ei, or ii,
eae,
ea,
G. ejus,
D. ei,
eorum,
els, or iis,
earum, eorum,
Ac. eum,
earn,
id,
eos,
eas,
ea,
Abl. e5,
ea,
e5.
els, or iis.
2. Idem, the same.
Singular. Plural.
N. idem, eadem, idem, eldem, or iidem, eaedem, eadem,
G. ejusdem, eorundem, earundem, eorundem,
D. eldem, eisdem, or iisdem,
Ac. eundem, eandem, idem, eosdem, easdem, eadem,
Abl. eodem, eadem, eodem, eisdem, or iisdem.
3. ipse, he, self.
Singular. Plural.
N. ipse, ipsa, ipsum, ipsi, ipsae, ipsa,
G. ipsius, ipsorum, ipsarum, ipsoru x,
D. ipsi, ipsis,
Ac. ipsum, ipsam, ipsum, ipsos, ipsas, ipsa,
Abl. ipso, ipsa, ipso. ipsis.
102. 0. Demonstrative Pronouns.
I. DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUN FOR THE FIRST PERSON.
hie, this.
Sing. N. hie, haec, hoc, Pl. N. hi, hae, naec, these,
G. hujus, horum, harum, h5rum,
D. huic, his,
Ac. hunc, hanc, hoc, h5s, has, haec,
Abl. hoc, hac, hoc. his.
II. DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUN FOR THE SECOND PERSON.
iste, that.
Sing. N. iste, ista, istud, Pl. N. isti, istae, ista,
G. istius, istorum, istarum, ist5rum,
D. isti, istis,
Ac. istum, istam, istud, istos, istas, ista,
Abl. ist5, ista, isto. istis.
I
46
PRONOUNS.
III. DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUN FOR THE THIRD PERSON.
Sing. N.
ille,
ilia,
illud,
PL.
N.
illi, illae, ilia,
G.
illius,
illorum, illarum, illorum,
D.
illi,
illis,
Ac.
ilium,
illam,
illud,
illos, illas, ilia,
Abl.
illo,
ilia,
ill5.
illis.
Remarks. — 1. Hie: the forms in -c arise from the enclitic -C8. So hice, hunce, are
found in older Latin ; and -ci in the interrogative form with ne, hicine ? This -ce is
sometimes appended io the other forms : hujusce, hosce.
2. Iste and Ille have, like hie, forms in -e, but only in Nom. Ace. Abl.
103.
istic,
istaec,
istoc
or istuc,
istunc,
istanc,
istoc
or istuc.
istoc,
istac,
istoc,
So illic, illoc, etc
D.
quae,
quorum,
quae,
Relative Pronouns.
qui, who.
quae, quod, Pl. N. qui, quae,
qu5rum, quarum,
quibus,
quam, quod, quos, quas,
qua, quo. quibus.
Remarks.— t^eis, quis, is also found as a Plural Dat. Abl. The form qui is used as
the Abl. Sing, quo, qu?.. quo, chiefly with -cum ; quicum for quocum, with whom.
Qui, interrogative, means how s-
General Relatives are :
Substantive, quisquis, whoever, quidquid, whatever.
Adjective. quiqui, quaequae, quodquod, whosoever.
quicunque, quaecunque, quodcunque, whichever.
Sing. N.
qui,
G.
cujus,
D,
cul,
Ac.
quern,
Aul
quo,
104.
Substantive. quis ?
Adjective. qui ?
Subst. and Adj. uter ?
Sing. N. quis ?
G. cujus ?
D. cul?
Ac. quern ?
Abl. qu5?
Substantive.
Adjective.
E. Interrogative Pronouns.
quid? what?
quod ? which ?
utrum ? who, which of two f
Possessive.
cujus, cuja, cujum, whose ?
(rare).
quid?
who ?
quae?
utra?
who? what?
whose ?
to, for whom ?
whom? what?
from, with, by whom or what?
Remark.— The plural of the substantive interrogative pronoun and both numbers of
the adjective interrogative pronoun coincide with the forms of the relative qui, quae,
quod, who, which.
Strengthened Interrogatives.
quisnam ? who pray ? quidnam ? what pray ?
quinam? quaenam? quodnam? which pray?
1 y some, any.
CORRELATIVES. 47
105. F. Indefinite Pronouns.
1. Substantive, aliquis, aliqua, aliquid, ) somebody, some one or
quis, qua, quid, J other*
Adjective. aliqui, aliquae (or aliqua*), aliquod, \
qui, quae (or qua*), quod,
2. quidam, quaedam, quiddam (and quoddam), a certain, certain one.
3. quispiam, quaepiam, quidpiam (and quodpiam), some one, some.
4. quisquam, -, quidquam, any one {at all). No plural.
5. qui vis, quaevis, quidvis (and quodvis), \ any one you please,
quilibet, quaelibet, quidlibet (and quodlibet), ) you like.
6. quisque, quaeque, quidque and quodque, each one.
unusquisque, unaquaeque, unumquidque and unumquodque, each
one severally.
The distinction between the substantive and adjective form is observed
igorously only in the neuter.
Remark. — Quisquam is used only as a substantive, except with designations of
ersons ; scriptor quisquam, any writer {at all), Gallus quisquam, any Gaul {at all).
'he corresponding adjective is ullus.
ullus, -a, -um, any ; nullus, -a, -urn, no one, not one. The corresponding
substantives are nemo (76), and nihil, which forms nihil! aud nihild
Abl.) only in certain combinations.
nonnullus, -a, -um, some, many a.
alius, -a, -ud, another ; alter, -era, -erum, the other, one {oftivo) ; neuter,
leutra, neutrum, neither of two.
alteruter, alterutra, alterutrum, the one or the other of the two. Gen.
dterutrius.
(or alter uter, altera utra, alterum utrum. Gen. alterius utrius.)
uterque, utraque, utrumque, each of two, either, ambo, -ae, -o, both.
utervis, utravis, utrumvis, )
uterlibet, utralibet, utrumlibet, \ ^*W you please of the two.
COEEELATIVES.
106- I. CORRELATIVE PRONOMINAL ADJECTIVES.
Interrogative s. Demonstratives. Relatives.
luis? who? is, that, qui, who.
uialis ? ofiohat hind ? talis, such {of that qualis, as {of which kind).
kind),
juantus ? how much ? tantus, so much, quantus, as much,
juot ? how many ? tot, so many. quot, as many.
; . .
* In neuter plural, aliquae or aliqua, quae or qua.
4S
COMPOUND RELATIVES.
107. II. CORRELATIVE PRONOMINAL ADVERBS.
1. Pronominal adverbs ol place.
ubi? where ?
ibi,
there, ubi, where.
qua? where? which
hie, hac,
here, this way, qua, where, which way
way f
istic, istacj
there, that way,
illic, iliac,
there, yonder way.
unde ? whence ?
inde,
thence, unde, whence.
hinc,
hence.
istinc,
thence.
illinc,
thence, from yonder.
quo ? whither ?
eo,
thither. quo, whither.
hue,
hither.
istuc,
thither.
illuc,
thither, yonder.
2. Pronominal adverbs of time.
quando ? when f
turn,
then, quando,
tunc,
at that time, quum.
nunc,
now.
quoties ? how often f
toties,
so often. quoties, as often as.
3. Pronominal adverbs of
manner.
quomodo ? qui ? how
? ita, sic,
so, thus, ut, uti, as.
quam ? hoio much f
tarn,
so much, quam, as.
108- Ill COMPOUNDS OF THE RELATIVE FORMS.
1. The relative pronouns become indefinite by prefixing ali- :
aliquantus, somewhat great ; aliquot, several, some ; alicubi, somewhere
alicunde, from somewhere ; aliquando, at some time.
2. The simple relatives become universal by doubling them
selves, or by suffixing -cunque (cumque) :
quantuscunque, however great ; qualiscunque, of whatever hind. ; quo
quot, however many ; ubicunque, wheresoever ; quandocunque, lohenever
quotiescunque, however often ; utut, in whatever way ; utcunque, how,
ever ; quamquam, however, although.
3. Many of the relatives are further compounded with -vis c
-libet :
quantuslibet, quantusvis, as great as you please ; ubivis, where you will\
quamvis, as you please, though.
THE VERB. 49
THE VERB.
109. The Inflection given to the verbal stem is called Con-
jugation, and expresses :
1. Person and Number ;
2. Voice — Active or Passive ;
3. Tense — Present, Imperfect, Future,
Perfect, Pluperfect, Future Perfect ;
4. Mood — Indicative, Subjunctive, Imperative.
110. These forms belong to the Finite Verb. Outside of the
Finite Verb, and akin to the noun, are the verbal forms called
Infinitive, Supine, Participle, Gerund.
111. The Inflection of the Verb is effected by means of —
1. Personal endings,
2. Connecting vowels,
3. Tense-signs.
1. The personal endings are pronominal forms, which serve to
I indicate not only person, but also number and voice.
2. The connecting vowels are either euphonic or symbolic.
3. The tense-signs occur only in the compound tenses (weak
tenses).
The compound or weak tenses are :
The Imperfect, Active and Passive. The Perfect in vi (ui) and si.
The Pluperfect Active. The Futures in -bo, -bor.
The Future Perfect. The Perf. and Pluperf. Subj.
So in ama-ba-m, I loved, b is the tense-sign, a the connecting vowel, m
the personal ending (comp. me), 1st P. Singular Active.
Remarks.— 1. The tense-signs are themselves auxiliary verbs, as: -r(am) for -s (am),
from (e)s-(se) ; v(i), u(I) from fu(i) ; si from (e)s (se) ; -b(am) -b(o) from fu-(am), fu(o).
2. No adequate uniform translation can be ^iven to all the moods and tenses. Espe-
cially is this true of the subjunctive. See Syntax.
Several parts of the verb are formed with the verb sum, / am.
3
50 THE VERB SUM.
112. The Verb sum, I am (stem es-).
INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE.
Present.
Sing.-
-1.
sum,
I am, sim,
I be,
2.
es,
thou art, sis,
thou be,
3.
est,
he, she, it is, sit,
he, she, it be.
Plur.-
-1.
sumus,
we are, simus,
we be,
2.
estis,
you are, sitis,
you be,
3.
sunt,
they are, sint,
Imperfect.
they be.
SlNG.-
-1.
eram,
1 was, essem,
I were (for em),
2.
eras,
thou wast, esses,
thou wert (fores),
3.
erat,
he was, esset,
he were (foret).
Plur.-
-1.
eramus,
we were, essemus,
we were,
2.
eratis,
you were, essetis,
you were,
3.
erant,
they tvere, essent,
Future.
they were (forent).
SlNG-
-1.
er5,
I shall be,
2.
eris,
thou wilt be,
3.
erit,
he will be.
Plur.-
-1.
erimus,
we shall be,
2.
eritis,
you will be,
3.
erunt,
they will be.
Perfect.
Sing.-
-1.
fui,
I haw been, I was, fuerim,
I have, may have, been,
2.
fuisti,
thou hast been, thou fuerls,
wast,
thou have, mayest have,
been,
3.
fuit,
he has been, he was, fuerit,
he have, may have, been.
Pltjr.-
-1.
fuimus,
we have been, ice fuerimus,
were,
we have, may have, been,
2.
fuistis,
you have been, you fueritis,
were,
you have, may have, been,
3.
fuerunt,
they have been, they fuerint,
were,
Pluperfect.
they have, may have, been.
Sing.-
-1.
fueram,
Iliad been, fuissem,
I had, might have, been,
2.
fueras,
thou hadst been, fuisses,
thou hadst, mightst have,
been,
o
fuerat,
he had been, fuisset,
he had, might have, been.
Plur.
-1.
fueramuSj^^ had been, fuissemus
, we had, might have, been,
2.
fueratis,
you had been, fuissetis,
you had, might have, been,
3.
fuerant,
they had been, fuissent,
they had, might have, been.
COMPOUNDS OF SUM.
51
INDICATIVE.
Future Perfect,
Sing. — 1. fuer6; I sliall have been,
2. fueris, thou wilt haw been,
3. fuerit, he shall have been,
Plur. — 1. fuerimus,w£ shall have been,
2. fueritis, you will have been,
3. fuerint, they will have been.
Sing.
IMPERATIVE.
1. —
2. es,
3.
Plur.
1. —
be thou,
esto,
esto,
thou shalt be,
he shall be.
2. este,
3.
be ye,
estate, you shall be,
sunto, they shall be.
INFINITIVE.
Pres. esse, to be,
Perf. fuisse, to have been,
Fut. futurum (-am, -urn), esse
(fore), to be about to be.
PARTICIPLE.
Fut. futurus, -a, -urn, about to be.
113.
Compounds of sum, / am.
ab-sum, lam away, absent. Perf.
abful, afui.
ad-sum, I am present. Perf. affui.
de-sum, I am wanting .
in-sum, / am in.
inter-sum, lam between.
ob-sum, I am against, I hurt.
Perf. obfui or offul.
prae-sum, lam over, I superintend.
pro-sum, I am for, I profit.
sub-sum, I am under. No Perf.
super-sum, I am, or remain, over.
Remark.— Only absum and praesum form present participles : afosens, absent, and
praesens, present.
Prosum, I profit.
114. In the forms of prosum, prod- is used before vowels.
INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE.
Present, pro-sum, prod-es, prod-est, pro-sim,
pro-sumus, prod-estis, prd-sunt,
Imperfect, prod-eram, prod-essem,
Future, prod-ero,
Perfect, pr5-fui, pro-fuerim,
Pluperfect, pro-fueram, pr5-fuissem.
Fut. Perf., pro-fuero,
INFINITIVE. Pres. prod-esse j pERr. pro fuisse.
52
THE VERB POSSUM.
Possum, I am able, I can.
115. Possum is compounded of pot (potis, pote) and sum; t
becomes s before s.
INDICATIVE.
SUBJUNCr
Present
SlNG.-
-1.
2,
3.
pos-sum, i" am able, can,
pot-es,
potest,
pos-sim,
pos-sis,
pos-sit.
Plur.-
-1.
2.
3.
pos-sumus,
pot-estis,
pos-sunt,
pos-slmus,
pos-sitis,
pos-sint.
Imperfect.
SltfG.-
-1.
pot-eram, I was able,
could,
pos-sem,
2.
3.
pot-eras,
pot-erat,
pos-ses,
pos-set.
Plur.-
-1.
2.
3.
pot-eramus,
pot-eratis,
pot-erant, •
Future.
pos-semus,
pos-setis,
p os-sent
SlNG.-
-1.
2.
3.
pot-ero, I shall be able.
pot-eris,
pot-erit.
Plur.-
-1.
2.
3.
pot-erimus,
pot-eritis,
pot-erunt.
I be able.
I were, might be, able.
Perfect.
Sing. — 1. pot-ui, / ham been able,
2. pot uisti,
3. pot-uit,
Plur. — 1. pot-uimus,
2. pot-uistis^
3. pot-uerunt,
pot-uerim, I have, may have, beer\\
able.
pot-uerfs,
pot-uerit.
pot-uerimuSj
pot-ueritis,
pot-uerint.
SYSTEMS OF CONJUGATION.
53
INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE.
Pluperfect.
Sing. — 1. pot-ueram, / had been pot-uissem, I had, might have,
able, been able,
2. pot-ueras, pot-uisses,
3. pot-uerat, pot-uisset.
Plur. — 1. pot-ueramus, pot-uissemus,
2. pot-ueratis, pot-uissetis,
3. pot-uerant, pot-uissent.
Future Perfect.
Sing.— 1. pot-uero, I shall have been able,
2. pot-ueris,
3. pot-uerit.
Pluk. — 1. pot-uerxxnus,
2. pot-ueritis,
3. pot-uerint.
INFINITIVE. Pres. Posse, to be able. Perf. Potuisse, to have been able.
Systems of Conjugation.
116. There are two Systems of Conjugation, distinguished
by the stem-characteristic, viz., the Vowel Conjugation and the
Consonant Conjugation.
117. Vowel verbal stems end in a, e, I (First, Second, and
Fourth Conjugations).
Consonant verbal stems end in one of the consonants (Third
Conjugation).
Stems in u follow the Consonant Conjugation.
118.
The Stem-Forms.
PRES. IND.
PRES. INFIN.
PERF. IND,
SUPINE.
I. am-5.
ama-re,
ama-vi,
ama-tum,
to love.
II. dele-o.
dele-re,
dele-vi,
dele -turn,
to blot out.
mone-o,
mone-re,
mon-ui,
mon-i-tum,
to remind.
III. em-o,
em-e-re,
em-i,
em-tum,
to buy.
statu-5j
statu- e-re,
statu-!,
statu-tum,
to settle.
scrib-o,
scrib-e-re,
scrip-si,
scrip-turn,
to write.
IV. audi-5,
audi- re,
audi-vi,
audi-tum.
to hear.
54 FIRST CONJUGATION.
119. First Conjugation.
active.
INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE.
Present.
Am loving, do love, love. Be loving, may love.
Sing. — 1. am-o, ame-m,
2. ama-s, ame-s,
3. ama-t, am^-t.
Plur. — 1. ama-mus, ame-mus,
2. ama-tis, am^-tis,
3. ama-nt, am^-nt.
Imperfect.
Was loving, loved. Were loving, miglit love*
Sing. — 1. ama-ba-m, ama-re-m,
2. ama-ba-s, ama-re-s,
3. ama-ba-t, ama-re-t.
Plur. — 1. ama-ba-mus, ama-re-mus,
2. ama-ba-tis, ama-re-tis,
o. ama-ba-nt, ama-re-nt.
Future.
Shall be loving, shall love.
Sing. — 1. ama-b-o,
2. ama-bi-s,
3. ama-bi-t.
Plur. — 1. ama-bi-mus,
2. ama-bi-tis,
3. ama-bu-nt.
IMPERATIVE.
Sing.— 1. ,
2. ama, love thou, ama-to, thou shalt love.
3. ama-to, he shall love.
Plur.— 1. ,
2. ama-te, love ye, ama-tote, ye shall love.
3. ama-nto, they shall love.
PARTICIPLE.
Present. X. ama-n-s, G. ama-nt-is, loving.
Future, ama-tur-us, -a, -um, being about to love.
FIRST CONJUGATION.
55
120. First Conjugation.
active.
INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE.
Perfect.
Have, may have, loved,
ama-ve-ri-m,
Have loved, did love.
Sing.— 1. ama-vi,
2. ama-vi-sti,
3. ama-vi-t,
Plur. — 1. ama-vi-mus,
2. ama-vi- stis,
3. ama-ve-runt,
Had loved.
Sing. — 1. ama-ve-ra-m,
2. ama-ve-ra-s,
3. ama-ve-ra-tj
Plur, — 1. ama-ve-ra-mus,
2. ama-ve-ra-tis,
3. ama-ve-ra-nt,
Shall have loved.
Sing. — 1. ama-ve-r-o,
2. ama-ve-ri-s,
3. ama-ve-ri-t.
Plur. — 1. ama-ve-ri-mus,
2. ama-ve-ri-tis,
3. ama-ve-ri-nt.
ama-ve-n-s,
ama-ve-ri-t.
ama-ve-ri-mus,
ama-ve-ri-tis,
ama-ve-ri-nt.
Pluperfect.
Had, might have, loved.
ama-vi-sse-m,
ama-vi-sse-s,
ama-vi-sse-t.
ama-vi-sse-mus,
ama-vi-sse-tis,
ama-vi-sse-nt.
Future Perfect.
INFINITIVE.
Pres. ama-re, to love.
Perf. ama-vi-sse, to have loved.
Fut. amatur-unij -am, -urn, esse, to be about to love.
GERUND.
N. [ama-re], loving.
G. ama-nd-I, of loving.
D. ama-nd-o, to loving.
Ac. [ama-re], (ad) ama-nd-um, loving, to I
Abl. ama-nd-o, by loving.
SUPINE.
1. ama-tum, to love.
2. ama-tu, to love, in the loving.
56
FIRST CONJUGATION.
121.
First Conjugation.
passive.
Present.
Imperfect.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
Be, may be, loved.
ame-r,
am^-ris,
am^-tur.
ame-mur,
ame-mini,
am^-ntur.
Were, miglit be, loved.
ama-re-r,
ama-re-ris,
ama-re-tur.
ama-re-mur,
ama-re mini,
ama-re-ntur.
Future.
INDICATIVE.
Am loved.
Sing.— 1. amor,
2. ama-ris,
3. ama-tur,
Plur. — 1. ama-mur,
2. ama-mini,
3. ama-ntur,
Was loved.
Sing. — 1. ama-ba-r,
2. ama-ba-ris,
3. ama-ba-tur,
Plur. — 1. ama-ba-mur,
2. ama-ba-mini,
3. ama-ba-ntur.
Shall be loved.
Sing. — 1. ama-bo-r,
2. ama-be-ris,
3. ama-bi-tur.
Plur. — 1. ama-bi-mur,
2. ama-bi-mini,
3. ama-bu-ntur.
IMPERATIVE.
Sing.— 1. ,
2. ama-re, be thou loved, ama-tor, thou shalt be loved,
3. ama-tor, he shall be loved.
Plur.— 1. ,
2. ama-mini, be ye loved.
3. ama-ntor, they shall be loved.
INFINITIVE.
Pres. ama-ri, to be loved.
Perf. ama-t-um, -am, -urn, esse, to have been loved.
Fut. ama-tum Iri, to be about to be loved.
F. P. ama-t-um, -am, -urn, fore.
FIRST CONJUGATION. 57
122. First Conjugation.
passive.
INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE.
Perfect.
Have been loved. Have, may have, been loved.
Sing. — 1. ama-t-us, -a, -urn, s-u-m, ama-t-us, -a, -urn, s-i-m,
2. es, s-I-s,
3. es-t, s-i t.
Plur. — 1. ama-t-i, -ae, -a, s-u-mus, ama-t-i, -ae, -a, s-i-mus,
2. es-tis, s-i-tis,
3. s-u-nt, s-i-nt.
Pluperfect.
Had been loved. Had, might have, been loved.
Sing. — 1. ama-t-us, -a, -um, er-a-m, ama-t-us, -a, -urn, es-se-m,
2. er-a-s, es-se-s,
3. er-a-t, es-se-t.
Plur. — 1. ama-t-i, -ae, -a, er-a-mus, ama-t-i, -ae, -a, es-se-mus,
2. er-a-tis, es-se-tis,
3. er-a-nt, es-se-nt.
Future Perfect.
Shall have been loved.
Sing.— 1. ama-t-us, -a, -um, er-o,
2. er-i-s,
3. er-i-t
Plur. — 1. ama-t-i, -ae, -a, er-i-mus,
2. er-i-tis,
3. er-u-nt.
PAETICIPLE.
Perfect. ama-t-us, -a, -um, loved.
Gerundive, ama-nd-us, -a, -um, (one) to be loved,
3*
58
SECOND CONJUGATION.
123. Second Conjugation.
active.
INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE.
Present.
Destroy (blot out).
Sing.— 1. dele-5,
B
e destroying, may destroy.
dele-a-m,
2. dele-s,
dele-a-s,
3. dele-t,
dele-a-t.
Plur.— 1. dele-mus,
dele-a-mus,
2. dele-tis,
dele-a-tis,
3. dele-nt,
dele-a-nt.
Imperfect.
Was destroying.
SiNG.— 1. dele-ba-m,
Were destroying, might destroy.
dele-re-m,
2. dele-ba-s,
dele-re-s,
3. dele-ba-t,
dele-re-t.
Plur. — 1. dele-ba-mus
.
dele-re-mus,
2. dele-ba-tis.
dele-re-tis,
3. dele-ba-nt,
dele-re-nt.
Future.
Shall destroy.
SiNG.— 1. dele-b-o,
2. dele-bi-s,
3. dele-bi-t.
Plur.— 1. dele-bi-mus
j
2. dele-bi-tis,
3. dele-bu-nt.
IMPERATIVE,
Slng.— 1. ,
2. dele,
Plur.— 1. ,
destroy tlwu,
dele-to, thou shalt destroy.
dele-to, he shall destroy.
2. dele-te,
destroy ye,
dele-tote, ye shall destroy.
dele-nto, they shall destroy.
PARTICIPLE.
Present. N. dele-n-s j G. dele-nt-is, destroying.
Future, dele-tur-us, -a, -urn, about to destroy.
SECOND CONJUGATION".
59
124
Second Conjugation.
INDICATIVE.
ACTIVE.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
Perfect.
Have, may have, destroyed.
dele-ve-ri-m,
dele-ve-ri-s,
dele-ve-ri-t.
dele-ve-ri-mus,
dele-ve-ri-tis
dele-ve-ri-nt.
Pluperfect.
Had, might have, destroyed.
dele-vi-sse-m,
dele-vi-sse-s,
dele-vi-sse-t.
dele-vi-sse-mus,
Have destroyed, destroyed.
Sing. — 1. dele-vi,
2. dele-vi-sti,
3. dele-vi-t,
Plub. — 1. dele-vi-mus,
2. dele-vi-stis,
3. dele-ve-runt,
Had destroyed.
Sing. — 1. dele-ve-ra-m,
2. dele-ve-ra-s,
3. dele-ve-ra-t,
Pluk.— 1. dele-ve-ra-mus,
2. dele-ve-ra tis, dele-vi-sse-tis,
3. dele-ve-ra-nt, dele-vi-sse-nt.
Future Perfect.
Shall hate destroyed.
Sing. — 1. dele-ve-r-o,
2. dele-ve-ri-s,
3. dele-ve-ri-t.
Pluk. — 1. dele-ve-ri-mus,
2. dele-ve-ri-tis,
3. dele-ve-ri-nt.
INFINITIVE.
Present, dele-re, to destroy.
Perfect, dele-vi-sse, to have destroyed.
Future, dele-tur-um, -am, -una, esse, to be about to destroy.
GERUND.
N. [dele-re], destroying, to destroy.
G. dele-nd-i, of destroying.
D. dele-nd-o, to, for destroying.
Ac. [dele-re] (ad) dele-nd-um, destroying,
to destroy,
Abl. dele-nd-o, by destroying,
SUPINE.
1. dele-tum, to destroy.
2. dele-tu, to destroy, in
destroying.
the
60
SECOND CONJUGATION,
125.
Second Conjugation.
INDICATIVE.
Am destroyed.
Sing— 1. dele-o-r,
2. dele-ris,
3. dele-tur,
Pluk. — 1. dele-mur,
2. dele-mini,
3. dele-ntur,
PASSIVE.
Present.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
Be, may he, destroyed.
dele-a-r,
dele-a-ris,
dele-a-tur.
dele-a-mur,
dele-a-minJ
dele-a-ntur.
Was destroyed.
Sing. — 1. dele-ba-r,
2. dele-ba-ris,
3. dele-ba-tur,
Imperfect.
Were destroyed.
dele-re-r,
dele-re-ris,
dele-re-tur.
Pl/CR. — 1. dele-ba-mur,
2. dele-ba-mini,
3. dele-ba-ntur,
dele-re-mur,
dele-re-mini,
dele-re-ntur.
Shall be destroyed.
Sing. — 1. dele-bo-r,
2. deie-be-ris,
3. dele-bi-tur.
Futitrk.
Pluii-
-1. dele-bi-mur,
2. dele-bi-mini,
3. dele-bu-ntur.
IMPERATIVE.
Sing.— 1. ,
2. dele-re, be thou destroyed, dele-tor, thou shalt be destroyed
3. dele-tor, he shall be destroyed.
Plur.— 1. ,
2. dele-mini, be ye destroyed,
3.
dele-ntor, they shall be destroyed
SEC^D CON%UGATION. 61
/. Second Conjugation.
^ PASSIVE.
INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE.
Perfect.
Have been destroyed, was destroyed. Have, may have, been destroyed.
Sing. — 1. dele-t-us, -a, -urn, sum, dele-t-us, -a, -urn, s-i-m,
2.
3.
es,
es-t,
S-l-S,
sit.
Plur. — 1. dele-t-i, -ae, -a,
2.
3.
s-u-mus,
es-tis,
s-u-nt,
dele-t-I, -ae,
-a,
s-i-mus,
s-I-tis,
s-i-nt.
Pluperfect.
Had been destroyed. Had, might have, been destroyed.
Sing.— 1. dele-t-us, -a, -urn, er-a-m, dele-t-us, -a, -um, es-se-m,
es-se-s,
es-se-t.
-ae, -a, es-se mus,
esse-tis,
es-se-nt.
2.
3,
er-a-s,
er-a-t,
Pltjr.-
-1.
2.
3,
dele-t-i, -ae, -a, er-a-mus, del<
er-a-tis,
er-a-nt,
Future Perfect.
SlNG.-
-1.
2.
3.
Shall have been destroyed.
dele-t-us, -a, -um, er-o,
er-i-s,
er-i-t.
Pluk."
-1.
2.
3.
dele-t-i, -ae, -a, er-i-mus,
er-i-tis,
er-u-nt.
INFINITIVE.
Pres. dele-ri, to be destroyed.
Perf. dele-t-um, -am, -um, esse, to have been destroyed.
Fut. dele-tum iri, to be about to be destroyed.
F. P. dele-t-um, -am, -um, fore.
PARTICIPLES.
Perfect. dele-t-us, -a, -um, destroyed.
Gerundive, dele-nd-us, -a, -um, [one] to be destroyed.
62
SECOND d
^NJUGAT
ON.
127.
Second Conjugation.
Like delere, to destroy, are conjugated only,n§re, to spin, flere,
to weep, and the compounds of -plere,^, and -olere (-olSscere),
groiv ; but aboleo, I abolish, forms abolitum.
All other verbs of the Second Conjugation retain the char-
acteristic e in the forms of the Present Stem, and drop it in the
rest of the verbal forms. In the Perfect, the ending vl becomes
ul. In the Supine, the connecting vowel i is used.
128. Five verbs of the Second Conjugation form their Su-
pine without a connecting vowel, viz. :
cense5,
censere,
censul,
censum,
to think.
doceQ,
docere,
docul,
doctum,
to teach.
misceo,
miscere,
miscul,
mtatum (mistum),
to mix.
teneo,
tenere,
tenui,
(ten turn),
to hold.
torreo,
torrgre,
torrul.
tostum,
to parch.
Synopsis of mone-o, / remind.
129. active.
INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE.
Pres. mone-6,
Impf. mone-banij
Fut. mone-b-5j
Perf. mon-ui,
Plpf. mon-ue-ra-m,
F. Pp. mon-ue-r-5.
mone-am,
mone rem.
mon-ue-ri-m.
mon u isse-m.
SECOND CONJUGATION.
Second Conjugation,
active.
IMPERATIVE. INFINITIVE.
63
mone,
mone-to,
Participle. Pres. mone-n-s.
Gerund. mone-nd-L
Supine. 1. mon-itum.
Pres. mone -re.
Pert, mon-ui-sse.
Put. mon-itur-um, -am, urn,
Fut. mon-itur-us, -a, -um.
2. mon-itu.
130.
PASSIVE.
INDICATIVE.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
Pres.
mone-o-r,
mone a-r.
Impp.
Fut.
mone-ba-r,
mone-bo-r,
mone.re-r.
Perf.
mon-it-us, -a,
-um, s-u-m,
mon-it-us, -a, -um, s-i-m.
Plpp.
er-a-m,
es-se-m.
P. Pp.
er-o.
IMPERATIVE.
mone-re,
mone-tor.
INFINITIVE.
Pres. mone-ri.
Perf. mon-it-um, -am, -um, -es-se.
Fut. mon-it-um Iri.
F. Pp. mon-it-um, -am, -um, fore.
Participle. Perfect. mon-it-us, -a, -um.
Gerundive, mone-nd-us, -a, -um.
64
THIRD CONJUGATION.
131.
Third Conjugation".
INDICATIVE.
Buy.
Sing.— 1. em-6,
2. em-i-s,
3. em-i-t,
Plur. — 1. em-i-mus,
2. em-i-tis,
3. em-u-nt,
Was buying.
Sing. — 1. em-e-ba-m,
2. em-e-ba-s,
3. em-e-ba-t,
PLUR. — 1. em-e-ba-mus,
2. em-e-ba-tis,
3. em-e-ba-nt,
Shall be buying, shall buy*
Sing. — 1. em-a-m,
2. em-e-s,
3. em-e-t.
Plur.— 1. em-e-mus,
2. em-e-tis,
3. em-e-nt.
ACTIVE.
Present.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
Be buying, may buy.
em-a-m,
em-a-s,
em-a-t.
em-a-mus,
em-a-tis,
em-a-nt.
Imperfect.
Were buying, might buy*
em-e-re-m,
em-e-re-s,
em-e-re-t.
em-e-re-mus,
em-e-re-tis,
em-e-re-nt.
Future.
Sing.— 1.
IMPERATIVE.
2.
3.
Plur.— 1.
2.
3.
em-e, buy thou,
em-i-to,
em-i-to,
thou shalt buy.
he shall buy.
em-i-te, buy ye.
em-i-tote,
em-u-nto,
ye shall buy.
they shall buy.
PARTICIPLE.
Present. N. em-e-n-s ; G. em-e-nt-is, buying.
Future, em-tur-us, -a, -um, about to buy
THIED CONJUGATION'.
65
132.
Third Conjugation.
ACTIVE.
INDICATIVE.
SUBJUNCTIVE,
PERFECT.
Have bought, bought
Sing. — 1. em-i,
2. em-i-sti,
Have, may have, bought
em-e-ri-m,
em-e-ri-s,
3. em-i-t,
em-e-ri-t.
Plur. — 1. em-i-mus,
em-e-n-mus,
2. em-i-stis,
em-e-ri-tis,
3. em-e-ru-nt,
em-e-ri-nt.
Pluperfect.
Had bought.
Sing. — 1. em-e-ra-m,
Had, might have, bought
em-i-sse-m,
2. em-e-ra-s,
em-i-sse-s,
3. em-e-ra-t.
em~i-sse-t.
Plur. — 1. em-e-ra-mus,
em-i-sse-mus,
2. em-e-ra-tis,
em-i-sse-tis,
3. em-e-ra-nt,
em-i-sse-nt.
Future Perfect.
Shall have bought.
Sing. — 1. em-e-r-6,
2. em-e-ri-s,
3. em-e-ri-t,
Plur. — 1. em-e-ri-mus,
2. em-e-ri-tis,
3. em-e-ri-nt.
INFINITIVE.
Pres. em-e-re,
Perf. em-i-sse,
Fut. em- tor-urn, -am, -um,
to buy.
to have bought
esse, to be about to buy.
GERUND.
SUPINE.
N. [em-e-re], to buy, buying.
G-. em- e-nd-i, of buying.
D. em-e-nd-o, to, for buying.
Ac. [em-e-re] (ad) em-e-ndum, to buy.
Abl. em-e-nd-o, by buying.
1. em-tum, to buy.
2. em-tu, to buy, in the buying.
66
THIKD CONJUGATION.
133.
Third Conjugation.
PASSIVE.
INDICATIVE.
SUBJUNCI
Present.
SlNG.-
-1.
Am bought.
em-o-r,
Be, may be, bought.
em-a-r,
2.
em-e-ris,
em-a-ris,
3.
em-i-tur,
em-a-tur.
Plur.-
-1.
em-i-mur,
em-a-mur,
2.
3.
em-i-mini,
em-u-ntur,
em-a-mini,
em-a-ntur.
Imperfect.
SlNG.-
-1.
Was bought.
em-e-ba-r,
Were, might be, bought.
em-e-re-r,
2.
em-e-ba-ris,
em-e-re-ris,
3.
em-e-ba-tur,
em-e-re-tur.
Plur.-
-1.
em-e-ba-mur,
em-e-re-mur,
2.
em-e-ba-mini,
em-e-re-mini,
3.
em-e-ba-ntur,
em-e-re-ntur.
SlNG.-
Shall be bought.
— 1. em-a-r,
Future.
2.
em-e-ris,
3.
em-e-tur.
Plur. — 1. em-e-mur,
2. em-e-mini,
3. em-e-ntur.
IMPERATIVE.
Sing.— 1.
2. em-ere, be thou bought, em-i-tor, thou shalt be bought
3. em-i-tor, he shall be bought.
Plur.— 1.
2. em-i-mini, be ye bought.
3. em-u-ntor, they shall be bought. I!
THIRD CONJUGATION. 67
134. Third Conjugation.
passive.
INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE.
Perfect.
Have been, was bought. Have, may have, been bought
Sing. — 1. em-t-us, -a, -urn, s-u-m, em-t-us, -a, -um, s-i-m,
2. es, s-i-s,
3. es-t, s-i-t.
dlur. — 1. em-t-i, -ae, -a, s-u-mus, em-t-i, -ae, -a, s-i-mus,
2. es-tis, s-i-tis,
3. s-u-nt, s-i-nt.
Pluperfect.
Had been bought. Had, might have, been bought.
Sing.— 1. em-t-us, -a, -um, er-a-m, em-t-us, -a, -um, es-se-m,
2. er-a-s, es-se-s,
3. er-a-t, es-se-t.
?lur.~— 1. em-t-i, -ae, -a, er-a-mus, em-t-i, -ae, -a, es-se-mus,
2. er-a-tis, es-se-tis,
3. er-a-nt, es-se-nt.
Future Perfect.
Shall have been bought.
Sing. — 1. em-t-us, -a, -um, er-o,
2. er-i-s,
3. er-i-t.
Plur. — 1. em-t-i, -ae, -a, er-i-mus,
2. er-i-tis,
3. er-u-nt.
INFINITIVE.
Pees, em-i, to be bought
Perf. em-t-um, -am, -um, esse, to have been bought
Fut. em-tum Iri, to be about to be bought
p. f. em-t-um, -am, -um, fore.
PARTICIPLE.
Perfect. em-t-us, -a, -um, bought.
Gerundive, em-e-nd-us, -a, -um, to be bought
68
FOURTH CONJUGATION.
135.
Fourth Conjugation.
The stems in i follow in several forms the Third Conjugation,
and take the same connecting vowels.
INDICATIVE.
Hear.
Sing. — 1. audio,
2. audl-s,
3. audi-t,
Plur. — 1. audi-mus,
2. audi-tis,
3. audi-u-nt,
Was hearing.
Sing. — 1. audi-S-ba-m,
2. audi-S-ba-s,
3. audi-S-ba-t,
Plur. — 1. audi-S-ba-mus,
2. audi-e-ba-tis,
3. audi-5-ba-nt,
ACTIVE.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
PRESENT.
Be hearing \ may hear.
audi-a-m,
audi-a-s,
audi-a-t.
audi-a-mus,
audi-a-tis,
audi-a-nt.
Impeefect.
Were hearing, might hear.
audi-re-m,
audi-re-s,
audi-re-t.
audi-re-mus,
audi-re-tis,
audi-re-nt.
Future.
Shall hear.
Sing.-
-1.
audi-a-m,
2.
audi-C-s,
3.
audi-e-t.
Plur.-
-1.
audi-g-mus,
2.
audi-g-tis,
3.
audi-e-nt.
IMPERATIVE.
Sing.-
-1.
y
2.
audi, hear tfiou, audi-to,
thou shalt hea/r.
3.
-1.
2.
audi-to,
he shall hear.
Plur.-
audi-te, hear ye, audi-tote,
ye shall hear.
3.
audi-u-nto,
they shall hear.
PARTICIPLE.
Present. N. audi-e-n-s, G. audi-e-nt-is, hearing.
Future, audi-tur-us, -a, -um, about to hear.
FOURTH CONJUGATION.
69
136.
Fourth Conjugation.
INDICATIVE.
Have heard, heard
Sing. — 1. audl-vi,
2. audl-vi-sti,
3. audi-vi-t,
?lur. — 1. audi-vi-mus,
2. audi-vi-stis,
3. audl-ve-runt.
Had heard.
Sing. — 1. audi-ve-ra-m,
2. audi-ve ra-s,
3. audl-ve-ra-t,
Plur. — 1. audi-ve-ra-mus,
2. audi-ve-ra-tis,
3, audi-ve-ra-nt.
ACTIVE.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
Perfect.
Have, may have, heard.
audi-ve-ri-m,
audi-ve-ri-s,
audl-ve-ri-t.
audi-ve-ri-mus,
audi-ve-ri-tis,
audi-ve-rint.
Pluperfect.
Had, might have, heard.
audi-vi-sse-m,
audi-vi-sse-s,
audi-vi-sse-t,
audi-vi-sse-mus,
audi-vi-sse-tis,
audi-vi-sse-nt.
Future Perfect.
Shall have heard.
Sing. — 1. audI-ve-r-5,
2. audi-ve-rt-s,
3. audi-ve-ri-t,
Plur. — 1. audi-ve-ri-mus,
2. audi-ve-ri-tis,
3. audi-ve-ri-nt.
INFINITIVE.
Present, audi-re, to hear.
Perfect, audi-vi-sse, to have heard.
Future, audi-tur-um, -am, -urn, esse, to be about to Tiear.
N.
G.
D.
Ac.
Abl.
GERUND.
[audi-re], hearing, to hear.
audi-e-nd-i, of hearing.
audi-e-nd-o, to, for hearing.
[audi-re] (ad) audi-e-nd-um, hear-
ing, to hear. 1.
audi-e-nd-o, by hearing. 2.
SUPINE.
audi-tum, to hear.
audl-tu, to Jiear, in the Jiearing,
70
FOURTH CONJUGATION,
137.
Fourth Conjugation.
INDICATIVE.
SlNG.-
Am heard,
-1. audi-o-r,
2. audi-ris,
3. audi-tur,
Plur. — 1. audi-mur,
2. audi-mini,
3. audi-u-ntur.
PASSIVE.
Present.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
Be, may be, heard.
audi-a-r,
audi-a-ris,
audi-S-tur,
audi-a-mur,
audi-a-mini,
audi-a-ntur.
Imperfect.
Was heard.
Sing. — 1. audip.-ba-r,
2. audi-£-ba-ris,
3. audi-8-ba-tur,
Plur. — 1. audi-S-ba-mur,
2. audi-g-ba-mini,
3. audi-B-ba-ntur.
Were, might be, heard.
audl-re-r,
audi-re-ris,
audi-re-tur,
audi-re-mur,
audl-re-mini,
audi-re-ntur.
Future.
Shall be heard.
Sing. — 1. audi-a-r,
2. audi-S-ris,
3. audi-3-tur,
Plur. — 1. audi-e-mur,
2. audi-5-mini,
3. audi-e-ntur.
IMPERATIVE.
Sing.— 1. ,
2. audi-re, be thou heard, audl-tor, thou shalt be heard,
3. audl-tor, he shall be heard.
Plur.— 1. ,
2. audi-mini, be ye heard.
3.
audi-u-ntor, they shall be heard.
FOURTH CONJUGATION. 71
138. Fourth Conjugation.
passive.
USTDICATIYE. SUBJUNCTIVE.
Perfect.
Have been heard, was heard. Have, may have, been heard,
3iNG. — 1. audi-t-us, -a, -urn, s-u-m, audi-t-us, -a, -urn, s-i-m,
2. es, s-I-s,
3. est, s-i-t,
'lur. — 1. audi-t-i, -ae, -a, s-u-mus, audl-t-i, -ae, -a, s-i-mus,
2. es-tis, s-I-tis,
3. s-u-nt. s-i-nt.
Pluperfect.
Had been heard. Had, might have, been heard.
Simg. — I. audi-t-us, -a, -um, er-a-m, audi-tu-s, -a, -urn, es-se-m,
2. er-as, es-se-s,
3. er-a-t, es-se-t,
?lur. — 1. audi-t-1, -ae, -a, er-a-mus, audi-t-i, -ae, -a, es-se-mus,
2. er-a-tis, es-se-tis,
3. er-a-nt. es-se-nt.
Future Perfect.
Shall have been heard.
Sing. — 1. audi-t-us, -a, -um, er-5,
2. er-i-s,
3. er-i-t,
Pltjr. — 1. audi-t-I, -ae, -a, er-imus,
2. er-i-tis,
3. er-u-nt.
INFINITIVE.
Present, audi-ri, to be heard.
Perfect, audl-t-um, -am, um, esse, to have been heard.
Future, audi-tum iri, to be about to be heard,
F. P. audi-tum, -am, -um, fore.
PARTICIPLE.
Perfect. audi-t-us, -a, -um, heard.
Gerundive, audi-e-nd-us, -a, -um, [one] to be heard.
72
APPENDIX TO THE THIRD CONJUGATION.
Appendix to the Third Conjugation.
139. Several verbs of the Third Conjugation in the Present-
stem add i to the stem. This i is dropped when it would come
before e or i, except before et ; as, cap-it, cap-eret, but capi-et.
active.
INDICATIVE.
SUBJUNCTIVE
Present.
Take.
Be taking.
SlNG.-
-1.
capi-6,
capi-a-m,
2.
cap-i-s,
capi-a-s,
3.
cap-i-t,
capi-a-t,
Plttr.
-1.
cap-imus,
capi-a-mus,
2.
cap-i-tis,
capi-a-tis,
3.
capi-u-nt.
capi-a-nt.
Imperfect.
Was talcing.
Were taking.
SlNG.-
-1.
capi-e-ba-m,
cap-e-re-m,
2.
capi-e-ba-s,
cap-e-re-s,
3.
capi-e-ba-t,
cap-e-re-t,
Plur.
-1.
capi-e-ba-mus,
cap-ere-mus,
2.
capi-e-ba-tis,
cap-e-re-tis,
3.
capi-e-ba-nt.
Shall take.
cap-e-re-nt.
Future.
Sing.
-1.
capi-a-m,
2.
capi-e s,
3.
capi-e-t,
Plur.-
-1.
capi-e-mus,
2.
capi-e-tis,
3.
capi-e-nt.
IMPERATIVE.
INFINITIVE.
SlNG.
-2.
cap-e, take thou,
Pres. cap-e-re,
cap-i-t5,
to take.
3.
cap-i-to,
PAETICIPLE.
Plur.
-2.
cap-i-te, take ye,
Pres. capi-e-n-s,
cap-i-tote.
taking.
3.
capi-u-nto.
GERUND.
G. capi-e-nd-I,
of taking.
APPENDIX TO THE THIRD CONJUGATION.
73
140.
INDICATIVE.
Am taken.
Sing. — 1. capi-o-r,
2. cap-e-ris,
3. cap-i-tur,
Plur. — 1. cap-i-mur,
2. cap-i-mini,
3. capi-u-ntur.
PASSIVE.
Present.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
Be, may be, taken.
capi-a-r,
capi-a-ris,
capi-a-tur,
capi-a-mur,
capi-a-mini,
capi-a-ntur.
Imperfect.
Was taken.
SlNG. — 1. capi-e-ba-r,
2. capi-e-ba-ris,
3. capi-e-ba-tur,
Plur.— 1. capi-e-ba-mur,
2. capie-ba-mini,
3. capi-e-ba-ntur.
Were, might be, taken.
cap-e-re-r,
cap-e-re-ris,
cap-e-re-tur,
cap-e-re-mur,
cap-e-re-mini,
cap-e-re-ntur.
Future,
Shall be taken.
Sing. — 1. capi-a-r5
2. capi-e-ris,
3. capi-e-tur,
Plur. — 1. capi-e-mur,
2. capi-e-mini,
3. capi-e-ntur.
Pres.
BIPERATIVE.
Sing. — 2. cap-e-re,
be thou taken,
cap-i-tor,
thou shalt be taken,
3. cap-i-tor,
he shall be taken,
Plur. — 2. cap-i-mini,
be ye taken, ye shall be taken,
3. capi-u-ntor,
they shall be taken.
4
INFINITIVE.
cap-i,
to be taken.
GERUNDIVE,
capi-e-nd-us, -a, -um,
[one] to be taken.
74
DEPONENT OF THE FIRST CONJUGATION.
141. Deponent of the First Conjugation.
INDICATIVE.
Exhort
Sing. — 1. hort-tf-r,
2. horta-ris,
3. horta-tur,
Pluk. — 1. horta-mur,
2. horta-mini,
3. horta-ntur.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
Present.
Be exhorting, may exhort.
horte r,
hort^-ris,
horte-tur,
horte-mur,
horte-mini,
horte-ntur.
Imperfect.
Was exhorting.
Sing. — 1. horta-ba-r,
2- horta-ba-ris,
8. horta-ba-tur,
Plur. — 1. horta-ba-mur,
2. horta-ba-mini,
3. horta-ba-ntur.
Were exhorting, might exhort.
horta-re-r,
horta-re-ris,
horta-re-tur,
horta-re-mur,
horta-re-mini,
horta-re-ntur.
Future.
Shall exhort.
Sing. — 1. horta-bo-r,
2. horta-be-ris,
3. horta-bi tur,
Plur. — 1. horta-bi-mur,
2. horta-bi-mini,
3. horta-bu-ntur.
IMPERATIVE.
Sing.— 2. horta-re,
exhort thou,
horta-tor,
thou shalt exhort,
horta-tor,
he shall exhort,
ACTIVE FORMS.
PART. Pres. horta-n-s,
exhorting,
Fut. horta-tur-us, -a, -urn,
about to exhort.
INF. Fut. horta-tur-um, -am, -um, esse,
to be about to exhort.
PluPw.-
-2. horta-mini,
exhort ye, ye shall exhort,
PASSIVE IN MEANING.
3. horta-ntor,
they shall exhort.
Gerundtve, horta-nd-us, -a, -um,
[one] to be exhorted.
DEPONENT OF THE FIRST CONJUGATION. 75
142. Deponent of the First Conjugation.
INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE.
Perfect.
Have exhorted, exhorted. Rave, may have, exhorted.
Sing. — 1. horta-t-us, -a, -tun, s-u-m, horta-t-us, -a, -um, s-i-m,
2. es, s-I-s,
3. es-t, si-t,
Plur. — 1. horta-t-i, -ae, -a, s-u-mus, horta-t-i, -ae, -a, s-i-mus,
2. es-tis, s-I-tis,
3. s-u-nt. s-i-nt.
Pluperfect.
Had exhorted. Had, might have, exhorted.
SrNG. — 1. horta-t-us, -a, -um, er-a-m, horta-t-us, -a, -um, es-se-m,
2. er-a-s, es-se-s,
3. er-a-t, es-se-t,
Plur. — 1. horta-t-i, -ae, -a, er-a-mus, horta-t-i, -ae, -a, es-se-mus,
2. er-a-tis, es-se-tis,
3. er-a-nt. es-se-nt.
Future Perfect.
Shall have exhorted.
Sing. — 1. horta-t-us, -a,.-um, er-o,
2. er-i-s,
3. er-i-t,
Plur. — 1, horta-t-i, -ae, -a, er-i-mus,
2. er-i-tis,
3. er-u-nt.
INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLE.
Pees, horta-ri, Perfect, hortatus, -a, -um,
to exhort having exhorted.
Perf. horta-t-um, -am, -um, esse,
to have exhorted.
F. P. horta-t-um, -am, -um, fore.
Supine. 1. horta-tum, 2. horta-tu,
to exJtort, for exhorting. to exhort, in the exhoi*ting
Gerund, [horta-ri], G. horta-nd-i,
to exhort, exhorting. of exhorting.
76
DEPONENT OF THE SECOND CONJUGATION.
143. Deponent of the Second Conjugation.
INDICATIVE.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
Shall fear.
Sing. — 1. vere-bo-r,
2. vere-be-ris,
3. vere-bi-tur,
Plur. — 1. vere-bi-mur,
2. vere-bi-mini,
3. vere-bu-ntur.
IMPERATIVE.
Sing.— 2. vere" re,
fear thou,
vere-tor,
thou shalt fear,
Present.
Fear.
Be fearing, may fear.
SlNG.-
— 1. vere-o-r,
vere-a-r,
2. vere-ris,
vere-a-ris,
3. vere-tur,
vere-a-tur,
Plur.-
— 1. vere-mur,
vere-a-mur,
2. vere-mini,
vere-a-mini,
3. vere-ntur.
vere-a-ntur.
Imperfect.
Was fearing.
Were fearing, might fear.
SlNG.-
— 1. vere-ba-r,
vere-re-r,
2. vere-ba-ris,
vere-re-ris,
3. vere-ba-tur,
vere-re-tur,
Plur.-
— 1. vere-ba-mur,
vere-re-mur,
2. vere-ba-mini,
vere-re-mini,
3. vere-ba-ntur.
vere-re-ntur.
Future.
3. vere-tor,
ACTIVE FORMS.
PART. Pres. verens,
fearing^
Fut. ver-i-tur-us, -a, urn,
about to fear.
INF. Fut. ver-i-tur-um, -am, -um, esse
to be about to fear.
Plur.
he shall fear,
-2. vere-mini,
fear ye, ye shall fear, PASSIVE IN MEANING.
3. vere-ntor, Gerundive, vere-nd-us, -a^ -um,
they shall fear. [one] to be feared.
ic
DEPONENT OF THE SECOND CONJUGATION. 77
144. Deponent of the Second Conjugation.
INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE.
Perfect.
Have feared, feared. Have, may have, feared.
Sing. — 1. ver-i-t-us, -a, -um, s-u-m, ver-i-t-us, -a, -urn, s-i-m,
2. es, s-I-s,
3. es-t, s-i-t,
Plur. — 1. ver-i-t-I, -ae, -a, s-u-mus, ver-i-t-i, -ae, -a, s-i-mus,
2. es-tis, s-i-tis,
3. s-u-nt. s-i-nt.
Pluperfect.
Had feared. Had, might have, feared.
Sing. — 1. ver-i-t-us, -a, -um, er-a-m, ver-i-t-us, -a, -um, es-se-m,
2. er^a-s, es-se-s,
3. er-a-t, es-se-t,
Plur. — 1. ver-i-t-i, -ae, -a, er-a-mus, ver-i-t-i, -ae, -a, es-se-mus,
2. er-a-tis, esse-tis,
3. er-a-nt. es-se-nt.
Future Perfect.
Shall have feared.
Sing. — 1. ver-i-t-us, -a, -um, er-5,
2. er-i-s,
3. er-i-t,
Plur. — 1. ver-i-t-i, -ae, -a, er-i-mus,
2. er-i-tis,
3. er-u-nt.
INFINITIVE. PAETICIPLE.
Pres, vere-ri, Perfect, ver-i-tus, -a, um.
to fear.
Perf. ver-i-tum, -am, -um, esse,
to have feared.
F. P. ver-i-tum fore.
Supine. 1. ver-i-tum, 2. ver-i-tu,
to fear, for fearing. to fear, in fearing.
Gerund, [vere-ri], G. vere-nd-i,
to fear, fearing. of fearing.
78
DEPONENT OF THE THIRD CONJUGATION,
145. Deponent of the Third Conjugation.
INDICATIVE.
Speak.
Sing. — 1. loqu-o-r,
2. loqu-e-ris,
3. loqu-i-tur,
Plur. — 1. loqu-i-mur,
2. loqu-i-mini,
3. loqu-u-ntur,
SUBJUNCTIVE.
Present.
Be speaking, may speak.
loqu-a-r,
loqu-a-ris,
loqu-a-tur.
loqu-a-mur,
loqu-a mini,
loqu-a-ntur.
Imperfect.
Was speaking.
Sing. — 1. loqu-e-ba-r,
2. loqu-e-ba-ris,
3. loqu-e-ba-tur,
Plur.— 1.
2.
3.
loqu-e-ba-mur,
loqu-e-ba-mini,
loqu-e-ba-ntur,
Shall speak.
Sing.— 1. loqu-a-r,
2. loqu-e-ris,
3. loqu-e-tur.
Plur. — 1. loqu-e-mur,
2. loqu-e-mini,
3. loqu-e-ntur.
IMPERATIVE.
Sing. — 2. loqu-e-re,
speak thou,
loqu-i-tor,
thou shalt speak,
3. loqu-i-tor,
he shall speak.
Plur. — 2. loqu-i-mini,
speak ye.
3. loqu-u-ntor,
they shall speak.
Were speaking^ might speak.
loqu-e-re-r,
loqu-e-re-ris,
loqu-e-re-tur,
loqu-e-re-mur,
loqu-e-re-mini,
loqu-e-re-ntur.
Future.
ACTIVE FORMS.
PART. Pres. loqu-e-n-s,
Fut.
INF. fut.
speaking.
locti-tur-us, -a, -um,
about to speak.
locu-tur-um, -am, -um, i
to be about to speak.
PASSIVE IN MEANING.
Gerundive, loqu-e-ndus, -a, -um,
to be spoken.
DEPONENT OF THE THIRD CONJUGATION.
146. Deponent oe the Thied Conjugation.
INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE.
Perfect.
Have spoken^ spoke. Have, may have, spoken.
Sing. — 1. locu-t-us, -a, -urn, s-u-m, locu-t-us, -a, -urn, s-i-m,
2. es, si s,
3. est, s-i-t.
Plur. — 1. locti-t-1, -ae, -a, s-u-mus, locu-t-i, -ae, -a, s-i-mus,
79
2.
3.
es-tis,
s-u-nt,
s-i-tis,
s-i-nt.
Pluperfect.
Had spoken. Had, might have, spoken.
Sing. — 1. locu-t-us, -a, -um, er-a-m, locu-t-us, -a, -urn, es-se-m,
2. er-a-s, es-se-3,
3, er-a-t, es-se-t.
Plur. — 1. locu-t-i, -ae, -a, er-a-mus, locu-t-i, -ae, -a, es-se-mus,
er-a-tis,
er-a-nt.
Future Perfect.
es-se-tis,
es-se-nt.
Shall have spoken.
Sing. — 1. locu-t-us, -a, -um, er-o,
2. er-i-s,
3. er-i-t.
Plur, — 1. locu-t-i, -ae, -a, er-i-mas,
2. er-i-tis,
3. er-u-nt.
INFINITIVE.
PARTICIPLE.
Pres. loqu-i, Perf.
locu-tus, -a, -um,
to speak.
having spoken.
Perf. locu-t-um, -am, -um, esse,
to have spoken.
F. Pf. locii-t-um, -am. -um, fore.
Supine. 1. locu-tum,
2.
locd-tu,
to speak, for speaking.
to speak, in speaking.
Gerund, [loqu-i],
&.
loqu-e-nd-i,
to speak, speaking.
of speaking.
30
DEPONENT OF THE FOURTH CONJUGATION.
147. Deponent of the Fourth Conjugation.
Sing.-
INDICAT1VE.
Lie.
-1. menti-o-r,
2. menti ris,
3. mentl-tur,
Plur.— 1. menti-mur,
2. menti-mini,
3. menti-u-ntur,
Was lying.
Sing. — 1. menti-g-ba-r,
2. menti-S-ba-ris,
3. menti-5-ba-tur.
Plur. — 1. menti-§-ba-mur,
2. menti-5-ba-mini,
3. menti-5-ba-ntur.
Shall lie.
Sing. — 1. menti-a-r,
2. menti-e-ris,
3. menti-e-tur.
Plur. — 1. menti-e-mur,
2. menti-e-mini,
3. menti-e-ntur.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
Present.
Be lying, may lie.
menti-a-r,
menti-a-ris,
menti-a-tur,
menti-a-mur,
menti-a-mini,
menti-a-ntur.
Imperfect.
Were lying, might <
menti-re-r,
menti-re-ris,
menti-re-tur,
menti-re-mur,
menti-re-mini,
menti-re-ntur.
Future.
IMPERATIVE.
ACTIVE FOEMS.
Sing. — 2. menti-re,
lie thou,
menti-tor,
thou shall lie,
3. menti-tor,
he shall lie.
Plur. — 2. menti-mini,
lie ye,
3. menti-u-ntor,
they shall lie.
PART. Pres. menti-e-n-s,
lying.
Perf.
-urn.
about to lie.
INF. Fut. menti-tur-um, -am, -urn, esse,
to be about to lie.
PASSIVE IN MEANING.
Gerundive, menti-e-nd-us, -a, -urn.
DEPONENT OF THE FOURTH CONJUGATION. 81
148. Deponent of the Fourth Conjugation.
INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE.
Perfect.
Have Med, lied. Have, may have, lied.
Sing. — 1. menti-t-us, -a, -urn, s-u-m, menti-t-us, -a, -urn, s-i-m,
2.
es,
S-l-S,
3.
es-t,
s-i-t.
Plur.-
— 1. menti-t-i, -ae, -a,
s-u-mus,
menti-t-i,
-ae, -a,
s-i-mus
2.
es-tis,
s-i-tis,
3.
s-u-nt,
s-i-nt.
es-se
-s,
es-se-
■t.
es-se-mus,
es-se
-tis,
es-se
-nt.
Pluperfect.
Had lied. Had, might have, lied.
Sing. — 1. menti-t-us, -a, -urn, er-a-m, menti-t-us, -a, -um, es-se-m,
2. er-a-s,
3. er-a-t,
Plur.— 1. menti-t-i, -ae, -a, er-a-mus, menti-t-i, -ae, -a,
2. er-a-tis,
3. er-a-nt,
Future Perfect.
Shall have lied.
Sing. — 1. menti-t-us, -a, -um, er-5,
2. er-i-s,
3. er-i-t.
Plur. — 1. menti-t-I, -ae, -a, er-i-mus,
2. er-i-tis,
3. er-u-nt.
INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLE.
Pees, menti-ri, Perfect, menti-t-us, -a, -um,
to lie. having lied.
Perf. mentl-t-um, -am, -um, esse,
to have lied.
F. P. menti-t-um, -am, -um, fore.
Supine. 1. menti-tum, 2. menti-tu,
to lie, for lying, to lie, in lying.
Gerund. [menti-ri], G. menti-e-nd-i,
to lie, lying. of lying,
4*
82 PERIPHRASTIC CONJUGATION.
149. Periphrastic Conjugation.
active.
INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE.
Pres. amatur-us, -a, -um, sum, amatur-us, -a, -urn, sim,.
Am about to love. Be about to love.
Imperf. amaturus eram, amaturus essem,
Was about to love. Were about to love.
Fut. amaturus ero, Shall be about to love.
Perf. amaturus fui, amaturus fuerim,
Have been, was, about to love. Have, may have, been about to
love.
i»luperf. amaturus fueram, amaturus fuissem,
Had been about to love. Had, might have, been about
to love.
Fut. Perf. amaturus fuero.
INFINITIVE. Present, amatur-um, -am, -um, esse, to be about to love.
Perfect, amatur-um fuisse, to have been about to love.
150. PASSIVE.
Pres. amand-us, -a, -um, sum, amand-us, -a, -um, sim,
Have to be loved. Have to be loved.
Imperf. amandus eram, amandus essem, forem,
Had to be loved. Had to be loved.
Fut. amandus ero, Shall have to be loved.
Perf. amandus fui, amandus fuerim,
Have had to be loved. Have had to be loved.
Pluperf. amandus fueram, amandus fuissem,
Had had to be loved. Should have had to be loved.
INFINITIVE. Present, amand-um, -am, -um, esse, to have to be loved.
Perfect, amand-um fuisse, to have had to be loved.
ABBREVIATIONS IN CERTAIN FORMS OF THE VERB. 83
151. Abbreviations occurring in certain Forms of
the Verb.
1. The Perfects in -avi5 -evi, -Ivi, drop the V before S or R, and con-
tract the vowels throughout, except those in -Ivi, which admit the con-
traction only before S.
Perfect.
Seng.— 1.
2. amavisti, amasti. delevisti, delesti. audivisti, audlstl.
Flue.— 1.
2. amavistis, amastis. delevistis, delestis. audivistis, audistis.
3. amaveruiit, amarunt deleverunt, delerunt audlverunt, audierunt.
Sttbj. amaverim, amarim. deleverim, delerim. audlverim, audierim.
Pluperfect.
Ind. amaveram, amaram. deleveram, deleram. audlveram, audieram.
Sub j. amavissem, amassem, delevissem, delessem. audlvissem, audlssem.
Future Perfect.
amavero, amaro. delevero, delero. audlvero, audiero.
Infinitive Perfect.
amavisse, amasse. delevisse, delesse. audivisse, audisse.
In like manner, novi, I know, and movi, I have moved, are, in their com-
pounds especially, contracted :
Sing.— 2. nosti. Plur.— 2. nostis, 3. norunt Subj. norim.
Pluperfect, noram. Subj. nossem. Inf. nosse. But the Future is novero, un-
contracted.
Remark. — In petere, to fall upon, desinere, to give over, and in the compounds of Ire,
to go, the V of the Perfect is dropped in 1 and 3 Pers. Sing., and in 1 Pers. PI., but no
contraction ensues, as:
petlvi, petii ; petlvit, petiit So desivi, desil ; desivit, desiit, etc.
And redil, rediit, from redire, to go back.
2. In 3 PI. Perf. Act. instead of the ending -erunt, -ere is often found,
but never iu the contracted Perfects mentioned above : amavere, they have
loved; delevere, they have destroyed ; emere, they have bought ; audlvere,
they have heard. But amare, for amarunt, is not admissible.
3. Instead of -ris in 2 Sing. Pass, we find often -re :
amabare, thou wast loved ; amar ere, thou mightest be loved ; amabere, thou wilt be loved.
This is rare, however, in Present Indicative.
4. The Imperatives of dicer e, to say, ducere, to lead, facer e, to make,
and ferre, to bear, are die, due, fac, fer. These shortened forms occur in
their respective compounds, except in those compounds of facio, which
\ change a into i, as : perfice, achieve thou. (188 R)
5. The Gerund and Gerundive of the 3d and 4th Conjugations, instead
of -endi, -endus, may, especially after i, end in -undi and -undus, as :
faciundus, to be done : gerundus, to be carried,
84 THE STEM.
152. THE STEM.
L In the Present.
The stem of many verbs appears in the Present, not in the
pure, but in a strengthened form.
Hence verbs are classified according to the relation of the
Present Stem to the Verb Stem.
I. Stem class : To this class belong those verbs whose present
stem is the same as the verb stem.
Such are the verbs of the vowel conjugations ; and in the Third Conju-
gation such verbs as leg-o, I read, ed-o, I eat, em-o, I buy.
II. The Protracted or Intensified class: In this class the
vowel of the Verb Stem is lengthened in the Present Stem:
duc-o, Head, stem due-; dlc-o, I say, stem die.
Remark. — This change arises from a diphthongal strengthening of the
stem : douc-o, deic-o ; but the class is treated as a stem-class in formation.
III. The Nasal class : In this class the stem is strengthened
byn.
A. In vowel-stems : si-, sino, I let ; li-, lino, 1 besmear.
B. After the characteristic r or m : cer-, cerno, I sift, separate ; tern-,
temno, I scorn.
C. Before the characteristic mute : vie-, vinco, / conquer ; frag-, frango,
I break ; fud-, fundo, I pour.
Before a P-mute N becomes M: rup-, rumpo, I rend ; cub-, cumbo,
1 lie down.
IV. The T class : flee-, flecto, i" lend.
V. The Inchoative class : The stem strengthened by sc or isc:
sc after vowel stems, isc after consonant stems.
1. ira-, irascor, ere-, cre-sco, dormi-, obdormi-sco,
I am in a rage. I grow \ I fall asleep.
2. ap-, ap-iscor, fac-, profic-iscor, nac-, nanc-iscor,
I reach. I set out. I get.
VI. Redujjlicated class : Eeduplication in the Present stem :
gen-, gi-gno, I beget, (for gi-gen-o) ; sta-, si-sto, si-st-ere, to set, stand
Compare stare, to stand.
VII. V-class : U suffixed to the stem :
ting-, tingu-o, I son fa
SUPINE. - 85
VIII. 1- class : I suffixed to the stem :
cap-, capi-o, I take.
IX. Geminated class :
The Liquids 1 and r may be doubled : pel-, pello, I drive ; cur-,
curro, I run.
So t is doubled in mit-, mitto, / send.
Remark.— This small class is probably a subdivision of the 8th class (I-class) ; pello,
for peljo, pelio; curro, for curjo, curio.
X. Change of Conjugation :
Many consonant-stems assume in the Present the character-
istic of one of the three vowel-conjugations :
vid , vide-o, I see, vi de-re. ven-, veni-o, I come, veni-re*
153. II. In the Perfect.
The Perfect is formed from the pure stem.
Exceptions : see change of conjugation. (156, 176).
1. The vowel-stems take -vi: ama-vi, / have loved; dele-vi,
I have destroyed; audl-vl, I have heard.
However, most verbs of the 2d Conjugation drop the vowel-character-
istic, and change -vl into -ui. (See 128.)
2. Consonant-stems with short stem-syllable take I in the"
Perfect, before which the stem-syllable becomes long, and a is
changed into e.
lego, I read, vid-eo, I see, fod-io, I dig, fug-io, I flee, ag-o, I do,
leg-L vid-L fod-L fug-I. egi.
3. Consonant-stems with long stem-syllables take si in the
Perfect :
rep-o, I creep, rep-si. scrlbo, I write, scrip-si dic-o, I say, dixi = dic-si.
aug-eo, I increase, auxi — aug-si. rad-o, I scrape, ra-sl = rad-si.
Even when the stem-syllable is long by position only:
carp-o, I pluck, carp-si. ping-o, I paint, pinxl = ping-si.
Exceptions. — Exceptions are stems in -nd, which take I in the Perfect:
defend-o, I strike {ward) off, defend-I ; perhaps because the stems in -nd
formed originally a reduplicated perfect :
mand-o, I chew, man(di)dl ; so (fe)fendi, I have struck.
86 FUTURE ACTIVE PARTICIPLE.
4. The stems in u have I in the Perfect: acu-o, / sharpen,
acu-l.
5. Sundry verbs reduplicate in the Perfect, i. e., repeat the
initial consonant of the stem with the vowel following it:
pend-o, I weigh, pe-pend-I. posc-o, I demand, po-posc-i, curr-o, Iran, cu-curr-I.
When a change of vowTel occurs in the stem, e is always found in the
syllable of reduplication :
cad-o, I fall, ce-cid-1. caed-o, I fell, ce-cid-i.
parc-o, I spare, pe-perc-i. pel-lo, I push, pe-pul-i.
These reduplicated Perfects are always formed in -I. They do not
lengthen the stem-vowel, but change a into i, ae into I, a before two con-
sonants into e, and e and o into u before L
Remark.— In compounds with monosyllabic prepositions reduplication is generally
dropped except in disco, 1 learn, do, I give, posco, I demand, std, I stand. The com-
pounds of curro, / run, sometimes retain it, excucurri. With dissyllabic prepositions
the reduplication is commonly retained.
III. The Supine.
154. I. The Supine is formed from impure stem.
1, Vowel-stems and stems in XJ take -turn in the Supine:
am-o, I love, ama-tum. dele-o, I destroy, dele-tum.
audi-o, I hear, audi-tum. tribu-o, / allot % tribu-tum.
Most verbs of the Second Conjugation drop, however, their own char-
acteristic vowel before -turn, and insert the connecting-vowel i : mone-o,
I remind, moni-tum. Some have no connecting- vowel. (See 128.)
2. Consonant-stems in a P- or K-mute take -turn in the Supine :
cap-io, I take, cap-turn. rep-o, I creep, rep-tum.
fac-io, I do, factum. dic-o, I say, dic-tum.
Exceptions. — 1. Among the P-stems, only labor, I slip, lap-sus.
2. Among the K-stems, the Supine in -sum occurs :
A. In verbs whose Present-stem is strengthened by t :
flect-o, I bend, flexum. plect-o, I plait, plexum.
pect-o, I comb, pexum. nect-o, I knot, bind, nexum.
B. Some, whose characteristic is preceded by a Liquid: merg-o, I dip,
mer-sum ; terg-o, I wipe, ter-sum ; parc-o, I spare, par-sum ; sparg-o,
I sc/co, scatter, spar-sum; mulce-o, I stroke, mul-sum.
C. In some the ending -sum prevents confusion w7ith other words:
fingo, I shape, makes fic-tum; but figo, I fasten, fix-um. So mul-sum,
from mulc-eo, I stroke, distinguishes it from multum, much.
.CHANGE OF CONJUGATION. 87
Remark. — The K-niutes are dropped in the Perfect and Supine between 1-g, It, r-S,
r-t: fulc-io, I prop, ful(c)-si, ful(c)-tum; torqu-eo, I twist, tor(qu)-si, tor(qu)-tum.
(See 160.)
3. Consonant-stems in a T-mute take -sum in the Supine :
ed-o, I eat, e sum (for ed-sum) ; lud-o, I play, lu-sum ; defend-o, I ward
off, defensum.
4. Liquid-stems haye partly -turn, partly -sum. Stems in m
and n take -turn ; stems in 1 and r take -sum :
em-o, I buy, em-tum; veni-o, I come, ven-tum ; can-o, I sing, can-turn.
ver-sum, from ver-ro, I sweep; fal-sum, from fall-o, i" cheat ; vul-sum,
from vell-c, I pluck.
Exceptions. — A. Liquid-stems which in the Perfect pass over to the
2d Conjugation have -turn, with or without connecting-vowels: al-o,
\£ nourish, al-i-tum or al-tum.
B. To be distinguished from other forms : par-turn, from pari o, I bring
forth ; but par-sum, from parc-ere, to spare : sal-tum, from sali-o, I leap ;
but sal-sum, from sali-o, I salt.
C. Man-sum, from mane-o, I remain,
II. The Future Active Participle is formed regularly from
the Supine ; in some verbs, however, from the Present-stem.
Juvaturus, about to help, from juvare ; secaturus, from secare, to cut ;
sonaturus, from sonare, to sound ; lavaturus, from lavare, to wash ; but
adjuturus, from adjuvare, to help ; moriturus, from morior, I die ; oritu-
rus, from orior, I rise ; pariturus, from pario, I bring forth ; agnoturus,
from agnosco, / recognize ; nasciturus, from nascor, I am born.
In some TJ-stems it is formed by means of the connecting-vowel I : arguiturus, from
arguo, / accuse; abnuiturus. from abnuo, / refuse ; luiturus, from lu-o, I wash off,
ruiturus, from ruo, I rush ; fruiturus, from fruor, I enjoy.
155. Euphonic Laws
IN THE CONVERSION OP THE CONSONANT-CHARACTERISTIC
Characteristic b before s and t becomes p :
scrib-o, I write, scrip-sl, scrip-turn.
Characteristic g and qu before t become c :
leg-o, I read, lec-tum ; coqu-o, I bake, coc-tum.
Characteristic c, g, and qu with s become x :
dic-o, I say, dixi (= dic-si).
jung-o, I join, junxl (= jung-si).
88 CHANGE OF CONJUGATION. •
coqu-o, I cook, coxi (= coqu-sl).
stingu-o, I poke (put), stinxi.
Characteristic t and d before s are dropped, or become by as*
similation ss :
ed-o, I eat, e-sum (= ed-sum) j ced-o, I give way, ces-sl (= ced-si).
mitt-o, I send, mi-si (= mit-si), mis-sum (= mit-sum).
156. Change of Conjugation.
A change of Conjugation arises when a vowel (e, i, a), or one
of the strengthening suffixes of the Present, is added to the pure
stem. The following instances occur :
1. Consonant-stems, regular in the Perfect and Supine, pass over in the
Present-stem into one of the vowel-conjugations.
auge-o,
auge-re,
aux-I,
auc-tum,
to increase.
senti-o,
senti-re,
sen-si,
sen-sum,
to feel.
sepi-o,
sepi-re,
sep-sl,
sep-tum,
to hedge in.
veni-o,
veni-re,
ven-i,
ven-tum,
to come.
video,
vide-re,
vld-i,
vl-sum,
to see.
vinci-o,
vinci-re,
vinx-I,
vinc-tum,
to bind. '
Be mark. —As these verbs form Perfect and Supine from the pure stem regularly, like
the others of the 3d or Consonant-Conjugation, they are placed among the verbs of the 3d
Conjugation in the list below.
2. Yowel-stems, in consequence of a strengthened Present, pass over
into the 3d Conjugation, but form Perfect and Supine from the vowel-
stem.
cre-sc-c cre-sc-ere, cre-vi, cre-tum, to grow.
line, lin-ere, li-vl (le-vl), li-tum, to besmear.
3. Consonant-stems form the Present regularly according to the 3d
Conjugation, but pass in the Perfect and Supine into the 2d or 4th Con-
jugation.
frem-o, frem-ere, frem-ui, frem-i-tum, to growl.
pet-o, pet-ere, pet-lvl, pet-itum, to fall upon.
4. Yowel-stems vary among the Yo wel-Conj ugations.
crep-o, I. crepa-re, I. crep-ul, II. crep-itum, II., to crackle.
aperi-o, IV. aperl-re, IV. aper-ul, II. aper-tum, to uncover.
5. dare, to give, and stare, to stand, in the Perfect, in consequence of
reduplication, pass over to the 3d Conjugation.
Bemark.— Verbs mentioned under 2, 3, 4, and 5 as suffering change of Conjugation,
are specially marked in 176-180.
MTJTE-STEMS.
89
Stems isr a P-mute.
Supine: -turn.
157. Perfect. — 1. After a short stein-sy liable, Perfect in -I
capi-o (cap-),
ac-cipi-o5
rump-o (rup-),
cap-ere,
ac-cip-ere,
rump-ere,
cep-I,
ac-cep-I,
rup-I,
cap-turn,
ac-cep-tum,
rup-tum,
1 58. 2- After a long stem-syllable, Perfect
carp-o,
de-cerp-o,
nub-o,
rep-o,
scalp-o,
scrib-o,
sculp-o,
serp-o,
in -si.
carp-ere,
de-cerp-ere,
niib-ere,
rep-ere,
scalp-ere,
scrib-ere,
sculp- ere,
serp-ere,
carp-si,
de-cerp-sl,
imp- si,
rep-si,
scalp-si,
scrip-si,
sculp-si,
serp-sl,
carp-tum,
de-cerp-tum,
nup-tum,
rep-tum,
scalp- turn,
scrip- turn,
sculp-tum,
serp-tum,
to take,
to receive.
to break.
to pluck,
to pluck off.
to put on a veil
(as a bride).
to creep,
to scrape,
to write.
to chisel,
to creep.
With change of Conjugation.
sepi-o (saepi-o),
sorbe-o,
clep-o,
lamb-o,
sepi-re,
sorbe-re,
clep-ere,
lamb-ere,
sep-si,
(sorp-si) sorbul,
Exceptions.
clep-sr(elep-i),
lamb-I,
sep-tum,
clep-tum,
(lamb-i-tum),
to hedge in.
to sup up.
to filch,
to lick.
Stems m a K-mute.
Supine : -turn.
159. Perfect. — After a short stem-syllable, Perfect in -I.
a. Pure stem.
ago,
co-g-o,
de-g-o,
red-ig-o,
faci-o,
cale-faci-o (c
per-fici-o,
fugi-o,
jaci o,
con-jici-o,
xeg-o.
col-lig-o,
So the other compounds, except dl-lig-O, intel-lig-O, neg-lig-O, see 161.
ag-ere,
eg-*,
ac-tum,
to do, drive.
co-g-ere,
co-eg-I,
co-ac-tum,
to compel.
dS-g-ere,
—
to pass (time).
red-ig-ere,
red-eg-i,
red-ac-tum,
to bring back.
fac-ere,
fec-i,
fac-tum,
to make.
cale-fac-ere
cale-fec-i,
cale-fac-tum,
to make warm.
per-fic-ere,
per-fec-i,
per-fec-tum,
to achieve.
fug-ere,
fug-i,
fug-i-tum,
to flee.
jac-ere,
jec-i,
j ac-tum,
to cast.
con-jic-ere,
con-jec-I,
con-jec-tum,
to gather.
leg-ere,
leg-I,
lee turn,
topick up, read*
col-lig-ere,
col-leg-i,
col-lec-tum,
to gather.
90
MUTE-STEMS.
b. Stein strengthened by N.
frang-o,
per-fring-o,
linqu-o,
re linqu-o,
(pang-o),
com-ping-o,
vinc-o (vie),
•-ere, freg-1,
per fring ere,per-freg-i,
linqu-ere, liqu-i,
re-linqu-ere, re-llqu-i,
(pang-ere), (peg-I),
com-ping-ere,com-peg-i,
vinc-ere, vlc-i,
frac-tum,
per-frac-tum,
re-lic-tum,
(pac-tum),
com-pac-tum,
vic-tum,
to break.
to shiver.
to leave.
to leave behind.
com p. 2 b and 3,
to drive in.
to drive tight,
to conquer.
1 60. 2. After long stem-syllable, Perfect in -si.
a. Pure stem.
dic-o,
duc-o,
fig-o,
-fllg-o (con-, af-, in-),
frig-o,
stig-o,
dlc-ere,
duc-ere,
fig-ere,
-fllg-ere,
frig-ere,
stig-ere,
dixi (dlc-sl),
dlixl,
fixl,
-flixi,
frixl, .
siixi,
dictum,
duc-tum,
fixum,*
-flic-tum,
fric-tum,
suc-tum,
to say.
to lead,
o fasten,
to strike,
to parch,
to suck.
With change of Conjugation.
auc-tnm,
to cause to wax.
to be chilled.
to give light,
to bein mourning.
auge-o, aug-ere, auxi,
frige-o, frig-ere, (frixi),
luce-o, ltic6-re, luxi,
luge-o, luge-re, luxi,
b. Stem strengthened by N, which is retained in Perfect and generally
in Supine ; the stem-syllable is therefore long by Position.
Supine without N.
fing-o,
fing-ere, finxi,
fic-turn,
to form.
ping-o,
ping-ere, pinxi,
pic-tum,
to paint.
string-o,
string-ere, strinxi,
Supine with N.
stric-tum,
to draw tight.
ang-o,
ang-ere, anxl,
to throttle, vex.
cing-o,
cing-ere, cinxl,
cinc-tum,
to gird.
e-mung-o,
e-mung-ere, e-munxl,
e-munc-tum,
to wipe the nose.
jung-o,
jung-ere, junxl,
junc-tum,
to yoke, join.
lingo,
ling-ere, linxL
linc-tum,
to lick.
ning-o,
ning-ere, ninxl,
to snow.
pang-o,
pang-ere, panxi,
panc-tum,
to drive in.
plang o.
plang-ere, planxi,
planc-tum,
to smite.
-stingu-o (ex-, dis-
re-), -stingu-ere, -stinxl,
-s tine- turn,
to {stick) put out.
ting-o (tingu-o),
ting(u)-ere, tinxi,
tinc-tum,
to ivet, dye.
ung-o (ungu-o).
ung(u)-ere, unxl,
unc-tum,
to anoint.
With cliange of Conjugation.
sanci-o,
sanci-re, sanxi,
sanc-tum and
sancitum,
to hallow.
vinci-o,
vinci-re, vinxi,
vinc-tum,
to bind.
The exceptions mentioned, 154, are marked with *.
MUTE-STEMS.
91
c. Stem strengthened by T, Supine in -sum.
flect-o,
flect-ere,
flexl,
flexum,*
to bend.
nect-o,
nect-ere,
nexi (nexui)
, nexum,*
to knot.
pect-o,
pect-ere,
pexi,
pexum,*
to comb.
plect-o,
plect-ere,
(plexl),
plexum,*
to plait.
d. The K-mute dropped after
L or R, and before S or T.
merg-o,
merg-ere,
mer-sl,
mer-sum,*
to dip in.
sparg-o,
sparg-ere,
spar-si,
spar-sum,*
to strew.
con-sperg-o,
con sperg-ere,con-sper-si,
con-sper-sum.
to besprinkle.
terg-o (e-o),
terg-ere (e-re),ter-sl,
ter-sum,*
to wipe.
With change of Conjugation.
alge-o,
alge-re,
al-sl,
—
to freeze.
farci-o (-ferci-o),
farci-re,
far-si,
far-turn (-sum),
to stuff.
fulci-o,
fulcl-re,
ful-si,
ful-tum,
to prop.
fulge-o.
fulge-re,
ful-si,
to glow.
indulge-o,
indulge-re,
indul-sl,
(indul-tum),
to give way.
mulce-o,
mulce-re,
mul-sl,
mul-sum,*
to stroke.
mulge-o.
mulge-re,
mul-si,
mul-sum (ctum)
* to milk.
sarci-o,
sarci-re,
sar-si,
sar-tum,
to patch.
torque-o,
torque-re,
tor-si,
tor-turn,
to twist.
turge-o,
turge-re,
tur-si,
to swell.
urge-o,
urge-re,
ur-si,
to press.
161.
Exceptions.
1. Stem-syllable short, but Perfect in -si.
coqu-o,
coqu-ere,
C0X1,
coc-tum,
to cook.
[-lig-o (leg-),
-lig-ere,
-lexl,
-lec-tum,]
"
dl-lig-o,
dl-lig-ere,
di-lexi,
dllec-tum,
to love.
intelligo or intellegc
>antellig-ere,
intel-lexi,
intel-lec-tum,
to understand.
negligo or neg-leg-o
, neg-lig-ere,
neg-lexl,
neg-lec-tum,
to neglect.
(col-lig-ere, e-lig-ere, 159)
[-lici-o (lac),
lic-ere,
-lexl.
-lec-tum,J
to lure.
(al-, il-) pel-lici-o,
pel-lic-ere,
pel-lexi,
pel-lec-tum,
to allure.
e-lici-o,
e-lic-ere,
e-lic-ui,
e-lic-i-tum,
to lure forth.
[-spici-o (spec),
-spic-ere,
-spexl,
-spec-turn,]
to peer.
(ad-, con-, de-, in-),
per-spici-o,
per-spic-ere,
per-spexl,
per-spec-tum,
to see through
reg-o,
reg-ere,
rexi,
rectum,
to keep right.
di-rig-o,
dl-rig-ere,
di-rexi,
di-rec-tum,
to guide.
per-g-o,
per-g-ere,
per-rexi,
per-rec-tum,
to go on.
su-rg-o,
su-rg-ere,
sur-rexl,
sur-rec-tum,
to rise up.
teg-o,
teg ere,
texi,
tec-tum,
to cover.
2. Stem-syllable long, but Perfect in -I.
ic-tum,
Ic-O (defective), ic-ere, 1C-1,
Pr sent stem rare : Ic-it, Ic-itur. ic-imur.
to strike.
92
MUTE-STEMS.
162.
3. With reduplicated Perfect.
disc-o,
disc-ere, di-dic-i,
(disc-iturus),
to learn.
Compounds retain reduplication.
(pang-o, 159, b),
(pang-ere), pe-pig-i,
pactum,
to drive a bar-
gain,
to spare.
parc-o,
parc-ere, pe-perc-I (par-si), (par-surus),
com-parco (perccO
, com-parc-ere, com-pars-I,
com-par-sum,
to save.
posc-o,
posc-ere, po-posc-I,
to claim.
pung-o,
pung-ere, pu-pug-I,
punc-tum,
to prick.
inter-pungo,
inter pungere. inter-punxi,
inter-punc-tum,fo place points
between.
tang-o (tag),
tang-ere, te-tig-I,
tac-tum,
to touch.
at-ting-o,
at-ting-ere, at-tig-I,
at-tac-tum,
to border upon.
163.
Aspirate Stems m H
A1ST> V.
The stems in H, and some in V, follow the Conjugation of the
K-mute stems.
Remark. — In these stems an original K-mute reappears, as, viV-0 for vi(g)V0, and
vixl for vig(v)sl. Compare nix for nig(v)S, snow.
Perfect, -si. Supine, -turn,
flu-o (flugv-), flu-ere, fluxi, (flux-us),
stru-o (strugv-), stru-ere, struxl, struc-tum,
trali-o, trah-ere, traxi, trac-tum,
veh-o, veh-ere, vexi, vec-tum,
viv-o (vigv-), vlv-ere, vixl, vic-tum,
With change of Conjugation,
co-nive-o (nigv), co-nive-re, co-nixl and ivl,
164.
to flow,
to build,
to drag,
to carry,
to live.
to close the
Stems in a T-mute.
Supine : -sum.
Perfect. — 1. The sterns in D with short stem-syllable and all stems in
-nd, have Perfect in -I.
(Many stems in -nd, with reduplicated Perfect, see 4 below.)
ac-cend-o,
ac-cend-ere,
ac-cend-i,
ac-cen-sum,
to kindle.
de-fend-o,
de-fend-ere,
de-fend-I,
de-fen-sum,
to strike away,
defend.
ed-o,
ed-ere,
ed-I,
e-sum (es-sum)
to eat.
com-ed-o,
com-ed-ere,
com-gd-I,
com-e-sum and
com-es-tum,
to eat up.
fund-o (fud),
fund-ere,
fud-I,
fu-sum,
to pour.
mand-o,
mand-ere,
mand-I,
man-sum,
to chew.
prehend-o,
prehend-ere,
prehend-i,
prehen sum,
to seize.
scand-o,
scand-ere,
scand-I,
scan sum,
to climb.
a(d)-, de-scend-o,
de-scend-ere,
descend-!,
de-scen-sum,
to climb upt
down.
With change of Conjugation.
prande-o,
prande-re,
prandi,
pran-sum,
to breakfast.
vide-o,
vide-re,
vid-I,
visum,
to see.
MUTE-STEMS.
93
165. 2. Stems in D and T, with long stem-syllable, have Perfect in -si.
claud-o,
eon-, ex-olud-o,
laed-o,
col-lld-o,
claud-ere,
ex-clud-ere,
laed-ere,
col-lld-ere,
lud-o, lud-ere,
plaud-o (ap-plaud-o), plaud-ere,
ex-plod-o, ex-plod-ere,
rad-o, rad-ere,
rod-o, rod-ere,
trud-o, trud-ere,
vad-o (in-, §-), -vad-ere,
clau-si,
ex-clu-si,
lae-si,
col-li-si,
lu-si,
plau-si,
ex-plo-si,
ra-si,
ro-si,
tru-sl,
-va-si,
With change of Conjugation.
arde-o,
arde-re,
ar-si,
ride-o,
ride-re,
ri-sl,
senti-o,
senti-re,
sen-si,
suade-o,
suade-re,
sua-si,
166.
3.
With assii
a. In the Supine
fodi-o,
fod-ere,
fod-1,
mitt-o,
mitt-ere,
mi-si,
pand-o,
pand-ere,
pand-I,
sede-o,
sede re,
sed-i,
b. In the Perfect and the Supine.
ced-o, ced-ere, ces-si,
quati-o, quat-ere, (quas-si),
con-cutio (per-, ex-), con-eut-ere, con-cus-sl,
clau-sum,
to shut.
ex-clti-sum,
to shut up,
out.
lae-sum,
to harm.
col-11-sum,
to strike to-
gether.
lu-sum,
to play.
plau-sum,
to clap.
ex-plo-sum,
to hoot off.
ra-sum,
to scratch.
ro-sum,
to gnaw.
trti-sum,
to push.
-va-sum,
to go.
tion.
ar-sum,
to be on fire.
rl-sum,
to laugh
{at).
sen-sum,
to feel.
sua-sum,
to {make
sweet)
counsel.
fos-sum,
to dig.
mis-sum,
to send.
pas-sum (pansum)
, to spread
out.
ses-sum,
to sit.
ces-sum,
to yield.
quas-sum,
to shake.
con-eus-sum,
to shatter.
167.
di-vid-o,
quati-o,
cud-o,
sid-o,
con-sid-o,
strlde-o (-do),
Exceptions.
1. With short stem-syllable, but Perfect in -si.
di-vid-ere, df-vi-si, di-vi-sum,
quat-ere, (quas-si), quas-sum,
2. With long stem-s}^llable, but Perfect in -I.
cud-ere, cud-I, cu-sum,
sid-ere, sid-I,
In composition -sedf, -sessum,/rwft sede-o.
con sid-ere, con-sed-i, con-ses-sum,
stridere (-ere),strid-i,
vert-o,
re-vert-or,
vert -ere,
re-vert-I,
vert-i, ver-sum,
revert-I (active), re-ver-sum,
to part,
to shake.
to hammer,
to sit down.
to settle
down,
to whistle,
screech,
to turn,
to turn
back.
94
LIQUID-STEMS.
1 68. 4. With reduplicated Perfect.
The
reduplication of the Perfect is
dropped in compound verbs.
(153 R.)
cad-o,
cad-ere,
ce-cid-I,
ca-sum,
to/all.
oc-cid-o,
oc-cid-ere,
oc-cid-I,
oc-ca-sum,
to perish.
caecl-o.
caedere,
ce-cid-I,
cae-sum,
to fell.
oc-cld o,
oc-cid-ere,
oc-cid-i,
oc-ci-sum,
to kill.
pend-o,
pend-ere,
pe-pend-I,
pen-sum,
to hang (tran-
sit.).
tend-o,
tend-ere,
te-tend-I,
ten- sum an
d -turn,
to stretch.
ex-teiid-o
, ex-tend-ere
, ex-tend-I,
ex-ten-sum
and -turn,
to stretch out.
os-tend-o
os-tend- ere,
os-tend-i,
os-ten-sum
(-tus),
to stretch at,
show (obs-t-).
With change
of Conjugation.
morde-o,
morde-re,
mo-mord-I,
mor-sum,
to bite.
pende-o,
pende-re,
pe-pend-I,
to hang (intr.)
sponde-o,
sponde-re,
spo-pond-i,
spon-sum,
to pledge one-
self,
to shear.
tonde-o,
tonde-re,
to-tond-I,
ton-sum,
In some
verbs the strengthening N of the Present has been dropped
. In two verbs
even the reduplicated syllable has been dr
opped.
find-o,
find-ere,
fid 1,
fis-sum,
to cleave.
scind-o,
scind-ere,
scid-I,
scis-sum,
to split.
tund-o,
tund-ere,
tu-tud-I,
tun -sum and tu-sum,
to thump.
1 69. Liquid-Stems.
1. All liquid-stems have the stem-syllable short.
Exceptions. — 1. Contracted forms : su-mo (sub-imo) ; po-no (po-sinc
or posi-n-o).
2. Original sibilant stems : haere-o, haes-.
2. Most liquid-stems, by means of the suffix e, pass over int
the 2d Conjugation, or in the Perfect, at least, suffer change o:
Conjugation.
3. Those which follow the 3d Conjugation throughout take
in the Perfect, and in the Supine either -sum or -turn. The
lengthen the stem-syllable in the Perfect, or retaiu the doubl
letter (rr, 11). Some form the reduplicated Perfect.
em-o, em-ere, era-i, em-tum, to take, to buy.
So, too, co-em-o, I buy up. But the compounds with ad-, ex-, inter
red-, take -im-o. So dir-im-o, I sever.
inter-im-o, inter-im-ere, inter-em-I, inter-em-tum, to make way wit
The other compounds of em-o contract : co-mo, de-mo, pro-mo, su~m<
and have -si in the Perfect, generally with a p between, which is gen
rated by the coming together of a labial and sibilant or dental. Com]
hiem(p)s. 0
t
■I 170. 1
isall-o,
STEMS IN S.
95
om-o, com-ere, comp-sl, comp-tum, to adorn.
em-o, dem-ere, demp-sl, demp-tum, to take away,
rom-o, prom ere, promp-sl (prom-si), promp-tum (promtum), to take out.
um-o, sum-ere, sump-si (stim-si), sump-tum (sumtum), to take.
The same formation occurs in the stem -tern-. Present, temn-o, I scorn.
on-temn-o, -temn-ere, -temp-si (msl), -temp-tum (mtum), to despise.
With the characteristic doubled,
psall-ere, psall-I,
K '
alio, sall-ere, sall-i, sal-sum,
rell-o, vell-ere, vell-I (vul-?i), vul-sum,
rerr-o, verr-ere, verr-I (rare), ver-sum,
2. With change of Conjugation in the Present.
reni-o, venl-re, ven-i, ven-tum,
3. With reduplicated Perfect.
to play on the
cithern.
to salt,
to pluck.
to sweep.
to come.
171. Appabeot liquid-stems in r. — In the liquid-stems in
: with long stem-syllable, the r has arisen from s. The original
111 ; reappears in the Perfect and Supine: hence the endings -si in
he Perfect (or by assimilation -ssl), and -stum (-sum) in the
Supine.
an-o,
can-ere,
ce-cin-i,
can-turn,
to sing.
:urr-o,
curr-ere,
cu-curr-i,
cur-sum,
to run.
alio,
fall-ere,
fe-fell-I,
fal-sum,
to cheat.
)ari-o,
par-ere,
pe-per-I,
par-turn * (pariturus),
tobring forth.
com-peri-o
, com-peri-re
com-per-I,
com-per-tum,
to find out.
re-peri-o,
re-peri-re,
rep-per-i,
re-per-tum,
to find.
>ell-o,
pell-ere,
pe-pul-i,
pul-sum,
to push, drive
back.
>er-cell-o,
per-cell-ere,
per-cul-i,
per-cul-sum,
to smite down.
.oll-o,
toll-ere,
sus-tul-I,
sub-la-tum,
to lift up.
iaere-0, haerS-re, hae-sl, ;
iauri-0, hauri-re, hau-si,"
ir-o, lire-re, us-si,
com-btir-o, com-btir-ere, com-bus-si,
J With short stem-syllable.
*er-o, ger-ere, ges-si,
haes-um,
to stick (to)
haus-tum,
to drain.
us-tum.
to burn.
com-bus-tum,
to bum up.
to carry.
ges-tum (see tostum, 128),
Stems in S.
172. 1. The stems in s preceded by a vowel have in general
jbanged it to r. Unchanged appears only:
to rls-o, vls-ere, vi-si, vi-sum, to visit.
2. Stems in s preceded by a consonant are :
leps-o, deps-ere, deps-ul, deps-tum, to knead.
Dina-o, pins-ere, pins-ui, -I, pins-i-tum (pis-tum, pin-
sum),
;ex-o, tex-ere, tex-ui, tex-tum,
These have undergone change of Con] ligation in
76.)
i
to pound,
to weave.
the Perfect. (See
96
STEMS IN U.
Stems in U.
PERFECT IN -I. SUPINE IN -turn.
173. 1. With characteristic preceded by a consonant.
ab-lu-o,
ab-nu-o,
acu-o,
ad-nuo (an-nu-o),
argu-o,
con-gru-o,
ex-u-o,
im-bu-o,
in-du-o,
lu-o,
metu-o,
minu-o,
plu-o,
ru-o,
spu-o,
statu-o,
sternu-o,
su-o,
tribu-o,
ab-lu-ere,
ab-nu-ere,
acu-ere,
ad-nu-ere,
argu-ere,
con-gru ere,
ex-u-ere,
im-bu-ere,
in-du-ere,
lu-ere,
metu-ere,
minu-ere,
plu-ere,
ru-ere,
spu-ere,
statu-ere,
sternu-ere.
su-ere,
tribu-ere,
ab-lu-i,
ab-nu-I,
acu-i,
ad-nu-1,
argu-i,
con-gru-I,
ex-u-I,
im-bu-i,
in-du-i,
lu-I,
metu I,
minu I,
plu-it, pltiv
ru-I,
spu-I,
statu-i,
sternu-i
su-I,
tribu-I,
ab-lu-tum,
(ab nu-itur-us),
acu-tum,
argti-tum,
ex-u-tum,
im-bu-tum,
in-dti-tum,
lu-itur-us,
minu- turn,
-it.
ru-tum (ruiturus),
sputum,
statu-tum,
su-tum,
tribu-tum,
1 74. 2. With characteristic preceded by a vowel.
to wash off.
to dissent,
to sharpen,
to nod
to accuse.
to agree.
to put off, dqi
to dip, dye.
to put on, don.
to atone for.
to/ear.
to lessen,
to rain,
to rush down,
to spew,
to settle,
to sneeze.
to sew.
to allot.
After a vowel, u appears as v, but in the Supine it suffers, as a vowel, contraction wit 3!
the vowel preceding it (generally with change of conjugation).
cave-o,
cave-re,
cav-i,
cau-tum,
to take heed.
fave-o,
fave-re,
fav-i,
fau-tum,
to be well-di
posed.
fove-o,
fove-re,
fov-i,
fo-tum,
to keep warm.
juv-o,
juva-re,
juv-I,
jii-tum (juvatiirus), to help.
ad-juv-o,
-juva-re,
-jtiv-i,
-jii-tum (jti ttirus)
to stand by i
aid.
(lav-o,)
(lav-ere,)
lav-I,
lautum (lo-tum),
to wash.
lav-o,
lava-re,
(lava-vl,)
lava-tum,
to wash.
move-o,
mov£-re,
mov-I,
mo-tum,
to move.
pave-o,
pave-re,
pav-I,
to quake (wi\
fear).
vove-o,
vovS-re,
vov-I,
vo-tum,
to vow.
The same reappearance of v occurs in :
ferve-o (o), fervS-re (ere), ferv-i (ferb-ul), to seethe.
bo1v-o, solv-ere, solv-i, solii-tum, to loose, pay.
volv-o, volv-ere, volv-I, volu-tum, to roll.
DEPONENTS.
97
DEPONENTS.
1 75. Bemarks. — 1. Deponent verbs are passive forms which
have lost their passive or reflexive signification.
2. Stems strengthened by sc or isc have generally an inchoa-
tive meaning. Comp. 152, V,
1. ad-ip-isc-or,
2. lab-or,
1, a. pro-fic-isc-or,
2, b. fung-or,
nanc-isc-or,
c. ani-plect-or,
1. Stems in a P-mute.
ad-ip-isc-I, ad-ep-tus sum,
lab-I, lap-sus sum,
2. Stems in a K-mute.
pro-fic-isc-I, pro-fee -tus sum,
fung-i,
nanc-isc-I,
am-plect-I,
func-tus sum,
nac-tus (nanc-tus) sum,
am-plex-us sum,
d. ulc-isc-or, ulc-isc-i, ul-tus sum,
Ex.e.experg-isc-or, (-reg-) ex-per-g-isc-i, ex-per-rec-tus sum,
!
pac-isc-or,
fru-or (frugv-),
veil- or,
assenti-or,
fate-or,
con-fite-or,
gradi-or,
ag-gredi-or,
nit-or(gnict-) )
from genu, j
ordi-or,
pati-or,
per-peti-or,
ut-or.
com-mm-isc-or,
ex-peri-or,
misere-or,
quer-or,
pac-isc-I,
3. Stems
rru-i,
veh-i,
4. Stems
assentl-rl,
fate-rl,
con-fite-ri,
grad-1,
ag-gred-i,
nit-I,
ordl-ri,
pat-I,
per-pet-I,
pac-tus sum (pepigi),
IN H AND V.
fruc-tus, fru-i-tus sum,
vec-tus sum,
IN A T-MUTE.
assen-sus sum,
fas-sus sum,
con-fes-sus sum,
gres-sus sum,
ag-gres-sus sum,
ni-sus (nix-us) sum, j
ni-stirus, !
or-sus sum,
pas-sus sum,
per-pes-sus sum,
to {fasten to one's
self) attain,
to glide.
to (get forward)
set out.
to discharge,
to get.
to twine round,
embrace,
to avenge,
to (right one's self
up) awake,
to drive (a bar-
tit-i, u-sus sum,
5. Stems in a Liquid.
com-min-isc-I, com-men-tus sum,
to enjoy.
to (waggon) ride.
to assent.
to confess.
to confess.
to step.
to attack.
to stay one's self
on.
to begin,
to suffer.
to endure to the
end.
to use.
ex-peri-ri,
misere-ri,
l.
loqu-or,
sequ-or,
2. ob-Jiv-isc-or,
ex-per-tus sum,
miser-i-tus sum,
6. Stems in R foe S.
quer-I, ques-tus sum,
7. Stems in TJ.
loqu-i, locti-tus sum,
f equ-I, secti-tus sum,
ob-liv-isc-I, ob-li-tus sum,
5
to think up, de-
vise.
to try.
to pity.
to complain.
to speak,
tofollow
to forget.
98
CHANGE OF CONJUGATION.
crep-o,
crepa-re,
cub-o,
cuba-re,
dom-o,
doma-re,
mic-o,
mica-re,
dl-mic-o,
dl-mica-re,
plic-o (ex-plic-o), plica-re,
(The simple
rare.)
son-o,
sona-re,
ton-o,
tona-re,
vet-o,
veta-re,
Change of Conjugation.
(Compare 156.)
A.
176. t. Verbs of the 1st Conjugation which pass over into the 2d
the Perfect and the Supine.
WITH CONNECTING- VOWEL.
crep-ui, crep-itum, to rattle.
cub-ui, cub-itum, to lie.
dom-ui, dom-itum, to tame.
mic-ui, to quiver. JlaSi
dl-mica-vl, dl-mica-tum, to Jight {out).
plic-ul (plica-vl), plic-itum (-a-tum), to fold.
son-ul, son-itum (sona-tu-
rus), to sound.
ton-ui, to thunder.
vet-ul, vet-itum, toforbid.
WITHOUT CONNECTING- VOWEL,
fric o, frica-re, fric-ui, fric-tum (-a-tum), to rub.
nec-o, neca-re, neca-vi, neca-tum, to Mil.
e-nec-o, e-neca-re, g-nec-ui (-a-vl), g-nec-tum, to Mil off.
sec-o, seca-re, sec-ui, sec-tum, to cut.
2. Verbs of the 3d Conjugation which pass over into the 2d in the Per-
fect and the Supine.
WITH CONNECTING-VOWEL.
ac-cumb-o,
ac cumber e, ac-cub-ul,
ac-cub-itum,
to lie down.
frem-o,
frem-ere,
frem-ui,
frem-itum,
to roar, rage.
gem-o,
gem-ere,
gem-ui,
gem-itum,
to groan.
gi-gn-o (gen-),
gi-gn-ere,
gen-ui,
gen-itum,
to beget.
mol-o,
mol-ere,
mol-ui,
mol-itum,
to grind.
strep-o,
strep-ere,
strep-ui,
strep-itum,
to make a din.
vom-o,
vom-ere,
vom-ui,
vom-itum,
to vomit.
WITHOUT CONNECTING-VOWEL.
al-o,
al-ere,
al-ui,
al-tum, al-itum,
to nourish.
col-o,
col-ere,
col-ui,
cul-tum,
to cultivate.
consul-o,
consul-ere,
consul-ul,
consul-turn,
to consult.
frend-o (e-o),
frend-ere,
(frend-ul),
fre-sum, fres-sum, to gnash.
occul-o,
occul-ere,
occul-ui,
occul-tum,
to conceal.
rapi-o,
rap-ere,
rap-ui,
rap-tum,
to snatch.
cor-ripi-o,
cor-rip-ere,
cor-rip-ui,
cor-rep-tum,
to seize.
ser-o,
ser-ere,
to string {out).
dS-ser-o,
de-ser-ere,
de-ser-ui,
dS-sertum,
to abandon.
So, too,
deps-o, I knead, tex-o, Iiveave, and plnso, I pound.
(See 172.)
WITHOUT
SUPINE.
compe3C-o,
compesc-ere
', compesc-ui,
to curb in.
con-cin-o (oc-,
con-cin-ere,
con-cin-ui,
to sing together
prae-),
ex-cello, (ante-
ex-cell-ere,
ex-cell-ul,
ex-cel-sus,
to surpass.
prae),
Btert-o,
stert-ere,
stert-ui,
to snore.
trem-o,
trem-ere,
trem-ui,
to tremble.
amici-o,
amici-re,
aperi-o,
operi-o,
sali-o,
de-sili-o,
aperi-re,
operi-re,
sali-re,
de-sili-re,
CHANGE OF CONJUGATION. 99
3. Verbs of the 4th Conjugation which pass over into the 2d in the Per-
fect and the Supine.
amic-ui (amixi), amic-tum, to clothe.
aper-ui, aper-tum, to open.
opsr-ui, oper-tum, to cover up.
sal-ui, sal-tum, to leap.
de-sil-ul, (de-sul-tum,) to leap down.
4. Verbs of the 3d Conjugation which pass over into the 4th in the Per-
fect and Supine.
arcess-o, arcess-ere, arcess-ivl, arcess-itum, to send for.
So, too, lacess-o, I tease, capess-o, Hay hold of.-
in-cess-o, in-cess-ivi (cessl), to attack.
So facess-o, I cause, make off.
cupi o, cup-ere, cup-ivi, cup-itum, to desire.
pet-o, pet-ere, pet-Ivi, pet-itum, to seek {fly at).
quaer-o, quaer-ere, quaes-lvi, quaes-Itum, to seek.
quaeso, quaesumus, are old colloquial forms, prythee.
con-quir-o, con-qulr-ere, conquls-ivl, con-quis-Itum, to hunt up.
rud-o, rud-ere, rud-ivl, rud-itum, to roar.
sapi-o, sap-ere, sap-ivl (-ui), to have a flavor.
5. Verbs which vary between the 2d and the 4th Conjugation.
cie-o (ci-o), cie-re (cl-re), el-vl, ci-tum(ci-tum), to stir up.
con-citus, per-cit-us, ex-ci-tus, or excltus, but ac-ci-tus.
6. Verbs which pass over into the 3d Conjugation in the Supine.
pot-o, pota-re, pota-vl, po-tum (po) or
pot-atum,
po-turus,
pota-turus, to drink.
B.
177. Change op Conjugation as result op Reduplication.
d-o, da-re, ded-I, da-tum, to give, put, do.
Remark. — Everywhere a-short, except in das, thou glvest, and da, give thou.
1. Like do, are conjugated the compounds with dissyllabic words, such as :
circum-do, I surround ; satis-do, I give hail; pessum do, I ruin; venuni-do, I sell ; as:
circum-d-o, circum-da-re, circuin-de-dl, eircum-da-tum, to surround.
2. The compounds of da-re with monosyllabic words pass over wholly
into the 3d Conjugation.
ab-d-o,
ab-d-ere,
ab-did-i,
ab-d-itum,
to put away.
ad-d-o,
ad-d-ere,
ad -did-I,
ad-d-itum,
to put to.
con-d-o,
con-d-ere,
con- did-I,
con-d-itum,
to put up
{found).
abs-con-do,
abs-con-d-ere
, abs-con-d-i,
abs-con-d-itum,foi^ -far away.
(didi),
ere d-o,
credere,
cre-did-i,
cre-d-itum,
to put faith.
de-d-o,
de-d-ere,
de -did-I,
de-d-itum,
to give up.
6-d-o,
e-d-ere,
e-did-I,
e-d-itum,
to put out.
in-d-o,
in-d-ere,
in-did-i,
in-d-itum,
to put in.
per-d-o.
per-d-ere,
per-did I,
per-d-itum,
to fordo {ruin).
pro-do,
pro-d-ere,
pro-did-i,
pro-d-itum,
to betray.
red-do,
red-d-ere,
red- did-I,
red-d-itum,
to give back.
tra-d-o,
tra-d-ere,
tra-did I,
tra-d itum,
to give over.
v6n-d-o»
ven-d-ere,
ven-did-1,
vSn-d-itum,
to put up to sale.
100
CHANGE OF CONJUGATION.
I
178.
sto, I stand.
st-o.
s t a -r e ,
st et-i,
(sta-tu-rus)
, to stand.
ad-st-o,
ad-stare,
ad-stit-i,
to stand by.
con-st-o,
con-stare,
con-stit-i,
to stand fast.
in-st-o.
in-sta-re,
in-stit-I,
to stand uj)on.
ob-st-o,
ob-sta-re,
ob-stit-I,
to stand out
against.
per-st-o,
per-sta-re,
per-stit-i,
to stand firm.
prae-st-o,
prae-sta-re,
prae-stit-I,
— ■
to stand ahead.
re-st-o,
re-sta-re,
re-stit-i,
to stand over.
dl-st-o,
di-sta-re,
—
to stand apart.
ex-st-o,
ex-sta-re,
to stand out.
circum-st-o,
circum-sta-re,
civcum-stet-i,
to stand round.
1. Like circum-sto, all compounds of stare with dissyllabic prepositions
have -steti in the Perfect, as :
ante-sto, lam superior ; inter-sto, lam between ; super-sto, I stand upon.
2. In other compounds the reduplicated form sisto is used, which, as a
simple verb, has the transitive meaning, I {cause to) stand, but in its com-
pounds, the intransitive, I stand.
s i s t -o ,
con-sist-o,
de-sist o (ab-),
ex-sist-o,
ob-sist-o,
re-sist-o,
ad-sist-o,
in-sist-o,
circum-sist-o,
s i s t- e r e ,
con-sist-ere,
de-sist-ere,
ex-sist-ere,
ob-sist-ere,
re-sist-ere,
ad-sist-ere,
in-sist-ere,
(stit-I), sta-tum,
con-stit-i,
de-stit-I,
ex-stit-I,
ob-stit-i,
re-stit-I,
ad-stit-i,
in-stit-I,
con-sti-tum,
de-sti-tum,
ex-sti-tum,
ob-sti-tum,
re-sti-tum,
circum-sist-ere, circum-s&tf-i,
to {cause to)
stand,
to come to a stand,
to stand off.
to stand up.
to take a stand
against,
to withstand.
to stand near,
to stand upon,
to take a stand
round.
179.
Change of Conjugation as result of strengthened Present.
1. Present strengthened by n.
lino,
lin-ere,
si-n-o,
sin-ere,
de sin-o,
de-sin-ere,
pon-o (po-sino),
pon-ere,
li-vl, or levi, li-tum,
si-vl, si-tum,
de-sl-vl (if), de-si-tum,
pos-ui, positum,
2. Present strengthened by sc- : compare E (181).
cre-sc-o, cresc-ere, cr6-vi, crS-tum,
no sc-o. nosc-ere, no-vi, (Adj. notus),
co-gnosc-o, co-gnosc-ere, co-gno-vi, co-gn-itum,
to besmear,
to let.
to leave of.
to place, leave be-
hind.
to grow.
to learn to know.
to recognize.
So the other compounds of nosco, except ignosco, Ipardon, take no notice of, which I
has Sup. ignotum(adj. ignotus, unknown^.
pa-sc-o, pase-ere,
pa-vl,
pas-tum,
to graze (trans.)
quie-sc o, quiesc-ere,
quie-vl,
quie-tum,
to rest.
Eue-sc-o (as-, con), suesc-ere,
sue-vl,
su6-tum,
to accustom one
self
INCHOATIVE VEEBS.
D.
101
180. Some stems in-r(-er) undergo change of conjugation as result of
Metathesis, which also is a strengthening of the Present. Ser-o, I sow, is a
reduplicated form for se-so.
cer-n-o,
cern-ere,
(erg- vi),
(cre-tum),
to separat
de-cern-o,
de-cern-ere,
de-cre-vi,
de-cre-tum,
to decide.
ser-o,
ser-ere,
se-vi,
sa-tum,
to sow.
con-ser-o,
con-ser-ere,
con-se-vi,
con-s-itum,
sper-n-o,
spern-ere,
spre-vi,
spre-tum,
to despise.
ster-n-o,
stern-ere,
stra-vi,
stra-tum,
to strew.
ter-o,
ter-ere,
tri-vl,
tri-tum,
to rub.
E.
Inchoative Vekbs.
181. 1. The inchoatives are formed <
rbj adding to the vowel-
stems -sc-.
by adding to the conso-
nant-stems -isc-.
Perfect and Supine are formed from the pure stem.
invetera-sc-o,
na-sc-or,
ex-ole-sc-o,
inveterasc-ere,
nasc-I,
ex-olesc-ere,
in vet era- vi,
na-tus sum,
ex-ole-vl,
invetera-tum,
ex-ole-tum,
to grow old.
to be born.
to get one's growth.
Like exolesco, conjugate obsolesco, / grow old ; but abolesco, / disappear, follows
aboleo, and inolesco has no supine.
ad-olg-sc-o,
co-al§-sco,
eon-valg-sc-o,
in-cale sc-o.
exarde-so-o,
sci-sc-o,
ad-sci-sc-o,
ob-dormi-sc-o,
con-cup-isc-o,
(cup-ere),
in-gem-isc-o,
re-sip-isc-o,
(sap-ere);
re-viv-isc-o,
ad-oi6sc-ere,
co-alesc-ere,
con-valesc-ere,
in-caleso-ere,
ex-ardesc-ere,
sclsc-ere,
ad-scisc-ere,
ob-dormisc-ere,
con-eupisc-ere,
in-gemisc-ere,
re-sipisc-ere,
ad-ole-vf,
co-al-ul,
con-val-ui,
in-cal-ul
ex-ar-si,
sci-vi,
ad-sci-vi,
ob-dorml-vi,
con-cup-ivi,
in-gem-uf,
re-sip-ivi,
ad-ul-tum,
(co-al-itum),
con-val-i-tum,
ex- ar-sum,
scl-tum,
ad-sci-tum,
ob-dorml turn,
con-cupl-tum,
re-vivisc-ere, re-vi-xi,
re-vic-tum,
to grow up.
to grow together,
to get ivell.
to get warm,
to take fire,
to decree,
to take on.
to fall asleep.
to long for.
to sigh.
to come to one's senses.
to come to life again.
2. Inchoative Verbs may be formed likewise from Nouns or Adjectives,
e-van-ui, (vanus),
6-van-esc-o,
Ira-sc-or,
not-esc-o,
vesper-asc-o,
g-vanesc-ere,
IrS-sci,
notesc-ere,
vesperasc-ere,
to disappear,
to grow angry,
lam angry,
not-ul, (notus), to become known.
— (vesper), to become evening.
ira-tus sum, I (Ira)
102 irregulaf verbs.
182. Change of Voice.
Neuter Passive Verbs.
aude-o,
aude-re,
au-sus sum, to dare.
fid-o,
fid-ere,
fl-sus sum, to trust.
gaude-o,
gaude-re,,
gav-lsus sum, to rejoice.
[re-vert-or
re-vert-I,
re-vert-I., re- versus sum], to turn back.
sole-o,
sole-re,
sol-itus sum, to be wont.
Remarks.— 1. Some Active Verbs have a Perfect Passive Participle with Active mean-
ing, as : cenatus, one who has dined, from cenare, to dine ; pransus, having breakfasted,
from prandeo, I breakfast ; potus, drunken, from poto, 1 drink ; jiiratus, having taken
the oath, sivorn, from juro, I swear ; conjiiratus, a conspirator, from conju.ro, I con-
spire. Many snch are used purely as Adjectives: conslderatus, circumspect, from con-
sidero ; cautus, wary, from caveo, I beware.
2. The Perfect Participle of many Deponent Verbs has both Active and Passive mean-
ing: adeptus (adipiscor), having acquired, or being acquired; comitatus (comitor,
1 accompany) ; expertus (experior, / try) ; exsecratus (exsecror, / curse) ; imitatus
(imitor, / copy) ; meritus (mereor, / deserve) ; opinatus, necoplnatus (oplnor, 1
think) ; pactus (paciscor, I contract) ; partitus (partior, I distribute) ; sortitus (sortior,
T cast lots) ; tueor, I protect; tiitus, safe ; the Perf. Participle in ordinary use is tutatus.
183. Irregular Verbs.
A.
Irregular in the Formation of the Tense-Stems.
Irregular in the formation of the tense-stems are:
1. Two Verbs in a P-mute of the 3d conjugation, viz. :
clepo, I filch. lambo, / lick. See 158.
2. Six Verbs of the 3d conjugation in a K-mute, which have, in spite of
the short stem-syllable, the Perfect in -si, viz. :
rego, I keep right, tego, I cover in, coquo, Ibake, and the compounds of
lego, Ipick up, lacio, I lure, specie I spy (-ligo, -licio, -spicio).
From lego, however, only diligo, / love ; intellego, I understand ; and neglego,
I neglect; are irregular. The other compounds are regular. See 161.
3. Two Verbs of the 3d conjugation in a T-mute, which, in spite of the
short stem-syllable, have the Perfect in -si, viz. :
dlvido, Ipart. quatio, I shake. See 167.
4. Four Verbs of the 3d conjugation in a T-mute, which, in spite of long
stem-syllable, have the Perfect in -I, viz. :
ciido, 1 hammer ; sido, I sit; strldeo, I whistle ; verto, I turn. See 167.
IRREGULAR VERBS.
103
5. Assimilation between bs and ms occurs in the Perfect and Supine of
jube-o, jube-re, jus-si, jus-sum,
prem-o (-prim-o), prem-ere, pres-si, pres-sum,
6. Special irregularities occur in :
bib-o,
mane-o,
meti-or,
met-o,
mori-or,
rauci-o,
re-or,
bib-ere,
mane-re,
metl-ri,
met-ere,
mor I,
rauci-re,
re-ri,
bib I, (bib-itum),
man-si, man-sum,
men-sus sum,
mes-sui, mes-sum,
mor tuus sum,
rau-si,
ra-tus sum,
This verb has no present participle.
7. Formed from different tense-stems, are ;
fer-o,
toll-o,
See 186.
fer-re,
toll-ere,
tul-I,
sus-tul-I,
rau-sum,
latum,
sub-la-tum,
to order,
to x>ress.
to drink,
to remain,
to measure,
to mow.
to die.
to be hoarse,
to think.
to bear,
to lift.
184. B.
Irregular in the Conjugation op the Present-Stem.
Irregular in the conjugation of the Present-stem are:
1. ori-or, ori-ri, or-tus sum, to arise.
Present: ori-or, or-eris, or-itur, or-imur, or-iminl, ori-untur.
Imperfect : ori-rer and or-erer. Gerund : ori-undus.
The compounds follow the simple verb, except ad-ori-ri, rise up aty at-
tack, which follows the Fourth Conjugation.
2. i-re, to go. Stem i, which, before a, o, u, becomes e.
185. INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE.
Present.
I be going.
e-a-m,
e-a-s,
e-a-t,
e-a-mus,
e-a-tis,
e-a-nt.
Igo.
Seng.-
-1. e-o,
2. I-s,
3. i-t,
Plur.-
— 1. I-mus,
2. i-tis,
3. e-u-nt.
SlKG.-
-2.1,
3.
Plur.-
-2. I-te,
3.
IMPERATIVE.
go thou,
(jo ye,
I-t5, tlwu slialt go,
I-to, he shall go,
I-tote, ye shall go,
e-u-nto, they shall go.
104
IRREGULAR VERBS.
INDICATIVE.
I-ba-m, I went,
I-b-o, I shall go.
Imperfect.
Future.
Perfect.
I-vi (compos, -i-i), I have gone,
SUBJUNCTIVE.
I-re-m, I were going.
I-veri-m (ex-i-eri-m).
Pluperfect.
I-vera-m (ex-i-era-m), I had gone, I-visse-m (ex-i-sse-m).
Future Perfect.
i-ver-6 (ex-i-er-o).
INFINITIVE : pREs. i-re. Perf. I-visse (I-sse).
PARTICIPLES : Pres. i-e-ns. G. e-u-ntis. fut. ACT. i-tur-us.
GERUND : e-u-nd-I.
SUPINE : i-tum, to go.
The Passive occurs in some of the compounds : circum-i-ri.
Compounds of eo are : ven-eo, I am for sale, and per-eo, I perish, which
serve as passives to ven-do and per-do, whose regular passives occur only
in the forms vend-itus, vend-endus, and per-ditus.
The compound ambi-o, I solicit, follows the Fourth Conjugation
throughout.
Like I-re, to go, are conjugated qui-re, to be able, andne-qui-re, to be unable,
which, however, are usual only in Present Indicative and Subjunctive.
3. fer-re, to bear.
186. The connecting- vowel i is dropped before t and s, and $
before r.
ACTIVE.
INDICATIVE.
Present.
I bear.
Sing.— 1. fer-o,
2. fer-s,
3. fer t,
Pltxr-
-1. fer-i-mus,
2. fer-tis,
3. fer-u-nt.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
I be bearing. .
fer-a-m,
fer-a-s,
fer-a-t,
fer-a-mus,
fer-a-tis,
fer-a-nt.
IRREGULAR VERBS.
105
IMPERATIVE.
Sikg— 2. fer,
3.
Plur.— 2. fer-te,
3.
bear thou,
bear ye,
fer-to, tlwu shalt bear,
fer-to, lie shall bear,
fer-t5te, ye shall bear,
fer-u-nto, they shall bear.
INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE.
Imperfect.
fer-eba-m, 1 teas bearing, fer-re-m, I were bearing.
Future.
f er-a-m, I shall bear.
Perfect.
tul-i, I have borne, tul-eri-m.
INFINITIVE : Pres. fer-re. Perf. tul-isse.
PART. fer-e-ns, bearing. Fut. Act. la-tur-us.
SUPINE : latum (t(o)la-tum).
PASSIVE.
INDICATIVE.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
Present.
lam borne..
I be borne.
Sikg. — 1. fer-o-r,
fer-a-r,
2. fer-ris,
fer-a-ris,
3. fer-tur,
fer-a-tur,
Plue. — 1. fer-i-mur,
fer-a-mur,
2. fer-i-mini,
fer-a-mini,
3. fer-u-ntur.
fer-a-ntur.
IMPERATIVE.
Sing.— 2. fer-re.
be thou borne,
fer-tor, thou shalt be borne,
3.
fer-tor, he shall be borne.
Plur. — 2. fer-i-minl, be ye borne.
3.
INDICATIVE.
Imperf. : fer-eba-r,
Future : fer-a-r.
Perfect : la-tus sum,
INF. fer-ri, to be borne.
fer-u-ntor, they shall be borne.
SUBJUNCTIVE,
fer-re-r.
la-tus sim.
GER. : fer-e-nd-us,
5*
106
IRREGULAR VERBS.
COMPOUNDS.
at-tul-I, al-la-tum, to bear to.
abs-tul-L ab-la-tum, to bear aivay.
con-tul-i, col-la-tum, to collect.
dis-tul-I, dl-la-tuni, to put of.
ex-tul-I, e-la-tum, to carry out.
ob-tul-i, ob-la-tum, to offer.
Remark.— Suf-fero, / undergo, has the Perfect sus-tin-ul (sus-tul-1, sub-la-tum,
being appropriated to toll-o). (183.)
4. ed-ere, to eat.
187. In certain forms the connecting- vowels i and e are dropped
before s, t, and r j d before s (r) is dropped or assimilated (as ss), and before
t becomes s.
af-fer-o,
af-fer-re,
au-fer-o,
au-fer-re,
con-fer-o,
con-fer-re,
dif-fer-o,
dif-fer-re,
ef fer-o,
ef-fer-re,
of-fer-o,
offer-re,
INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE.
Present.
I be eating.
ed-a-m,
ed-a-s,
ed-a-t,
ed-a-mus,
ed-a-tis,
ed-a-nt.
Imperfect.
late, ed-ere-m, es-sem, I were eating.
I eat
Sing.— 1. ed-o,
2. ed-i-s,
3. ed-i-t, e-st,
Plur. — 1. ed-i-mus,
2. ed-i-tis, es-tis,
3. ed-u-nt.
ed-eba-m,
Sing.— 2. ed-e, es,
3.
IMPERATIVE
eat tJiou,
Pltjr. — 2. ed-i-te, es-te, eat ye,
3.
ed-i-to, es-t5, thou shall eat,
ed-i-to, es-to, he shall eat,
editote, es-tote, ye shall eat.
ed-u-nto, they shall eat.
INFINITIVE,
ed-ere, es-se, to eat.
5. fi-erl, to become.
188. Fl-o is conjugated in the Present, Imperfect, and Future, accord-
ing to the 4th Conjugation, but receives a connecting-vowel in the Sub-
junctive Imperfect and in the Infinitive, viz., fi-e-rerh, I were becoming;
fi-e-rlj to become. In these forms the i is short, but elsewhere it is long,
even before another vowel.
IRREGULAR VERBS.
307
The Infinitive ends in -ri, and the whole Verb in the Present-stem is
treated as the Passive to facio, I make The rest of the Passive is formed
regularly from facio.
ACTIVE,
Pres. facio, I make. IKD.
Imperf. faciebam, I made.
Future, faciam, I shall make.
Perfect, feci.
Pluperf. feceram.
F. Perf. fecero.
SUB.
INF. Perf.
Fut.
F. P.
PASSIVE.
fie, / am made, I become.
fis, fit (fimus, fitis), fiunt.
flebam, I icas made, I became.
fiam, I shall be made {become).
factus sum.
factus eram.
factus er5.
flam, fias, fiat, etc.
fierem, fieres, etc.
factum esse, to have become.
futurum esse or fore,
factum fore.
Remark. — The compounds of facio with Prepositions change the a of the stem into
i, and form the Passive regularly from the same stem : perficio, I achieve^ Pass, perficior ;
interficio, Pass, interficior, I am destroyed. But when compounded with words other
than prepositions, facio retains its a, and uses fio as its Passive :
patefacio, Hay open, Pass, patefio: calefacio, Iivarm, Pass, caleflo.
The accent remains the same as in the simple verb : calefacis, thou warmest.
189. 6. Vel-le, to be icilling,
nolle, to be unwilling ; malle, to be willing rather.
INDICATIVE.
Present.
volo,
nolo,
malo,
vis,
non vis,
mavis,
vult,
non vult,
mavult,
volumus,
nolumus,
malumus,
vultis,
non vultis,
mavultis,
volunt.
nolunt.
Imperfect.
malunt.
volebam,
n51ebam,
Future.
malebam.
volam,
nolam,
malam,
voles,
noles,
Perfect.
males.
Yplulj
noluij
malui.
108
DEFECTIVE VERBS.
SUBJUNCTIVE.
Present.
velim,
nolim,
malim,
veils,
noils,
malls,
velit,
nolit,
malit,
vellmus,
nSlimus,
malimus,
velitis,
nolitis,
malitis,
velint.
nolint.
Isiperpect.
malint.
vellem,
nollem,
mallem.
IMP.:
INF. Pres. velle,
Perp. voluisse,
PART. volens.
190.
Sing. — noli, nolito,
Plur. — n51ite, nolit5te, n51unt5.
nolle, malle.
noluisse, maluisse.
nolens.
Defective Verbs.
1. ajo, / say ay.
IND. Pres. 1. ajo, 2. ais, 3. ait. Plur. — 3. ajunt.
Imperp. ajebam, etc.
SUBJ. ajas, ajat, ajant.
PART, ajens (as acij.), affirmative.
2. inquam, I say, quoth I.
IND. Pres. Sing. — 1. inquam, 2. inquis, 3. inquit.
Plur. — 1. inquimus, 2. inquitis, 3/ inquiunt.
Imperii 3. inquiebat.
2. inquies, 3. inquiet.
2. inquisti, 3. inquit.
Plur. — 2. inquistis.
Imperp.
Fut.
Perp.
3. fa-ri, to speak.
Pres. fatur. Fut. fabor, fabitur. Perp. fatus sum, etc. SUP, fatu
IMPER. fare. GER. fandi, fando. PART. Pres. fantis, fantem,
4. ave-re, salve-re, vale-re.
ave, salve, salvebis, liail thou !
avete, salve te, hail ye !
avere, salvere.
age, agite, come !
cedo,
give
1
Plur.
vale, farewell.
valete, farewell.
valere.
apage, begone!
-cette.
OBSOLETE FORMS OF THE VERB. 109
5.
In use only in the Perfect-stem are coepi, I have begun, to which incipio
serves as a Present ; memini, I remember ; odi, I hate ; n5vi (from ndseo,
see 179), I know, am aware ; consuevi (from consuesco), lam wont.
IND. coepi, I have begun. SUBJ. coeperim,
coeperam, coepissem.
coepero. INF. coepisse, to ham begun.
IND. memini, I remember, SUBJ. meminerim,
memineram, meminissem.
meminero. INF. meminisse, to remember.
DIPER Sing. — memento. Pltjr.— mementate.
IND. odi, I hate, SUBJ. oderim,
oder am, o diss em,
odero. INF. odisse, to hate.
coepi and odi have passive forms of the same meaning :
coeptus sum}Ifiave begun (which is used with the Passive Inf.).
osus sum, I hate.
191. Obsolete Forms of the Verb.
1. The Future of Verbs in -io is sometimes formed like Ibo, / shall go :
venibo, I shall come ; scibo, 1 shall knoic.
2. The Pres. Inf. Pass, was origiually longer by -er : monstrarier,
miscerier, admittier, experirier.
3. The Pres. Subj. Act. had an ending -im (compare sim, velim) : edim,
edis, edit, edint, eat ; effodint, dig out ; coquint, cook. Stem vowels were
dropped : temperint, carint. Dare formed duim ; so, perduim, creduim.
4. In older poetry ie of the Imperf. Ind. Act. 4th conj. is sometimes con-
tracted into I : scibam.
5. In the Perfect stem there was a shorter formation. So in the 2 Pers.
Perf. Act. Ind. 3 conj., dixti, dixtis (only from mute stems). The termi-
nations -sim and -sem (Perf. and Pluperf. Subj.), -so (Fut. Perf), -se (Perf.
Inf.), are added to the verb stem. After a vowel s becomes ss. So dixim,
faxim, adaxim, rapsim; locassim, negassim; faxem, extinxem ; faxo,
capso, jusso, amasso ; surrexe, protraxe, dixe. The Inf. forms of the
vowel conjugations coincide with amasse, flesse, audisse, as creasti, de-
; lesti, audisti with dixti. A Future Inf. in -sere is also found : impetras-
sere, prohibessere. Compare, however, facessere, capessere.
The antiquated forms of facio are often found in old formulae.
6. Old forms of esse.
(1) si em, sies, siet, Pr. Subj.
(2) escit, escunt, Inchoative for Fut.
(3) fuam, fuas, fuat, fuant, Pr. Subj. (stem fa-).
(4) fuvi, fovi, Pf. Ind.
110
INDEX OF VERBS.
INDEX OF VERBS.
Tins Index is intended to serve as a supplement also, and contains
many verbs not mentioned in the text, defectives in supine or in perfect
and supine, compounds, isolated forms, rare words.
A Ajo, 190.
Albeo, ere, to be white.
Algeo, ere, alsi, 160.
lexi
Al-licio, ere, n^cull -lectum, 161.
Al-luo, ere, -lui, lutum, 173.
Alo, ere, alul, al(i)tum, 176.
Amb-igo (ago), ere, 159.
Arnb-io (eo), ire, Ivi (ii), Itum, 185.
Amicio, Ire, (^j^1') amictum, 176.
Amo, 5re, avi, atum. See 119.
Amplector, I, amplexus, 175.
Ango, ere, anxi, 160.
An-nuo, ere, annul (annutum), 173.
Ante-cello, ere, 176.
Ante-sto, -stare, -stetl, 178.
Apage, 190.
A-perio, -ire, aperul, apertum, 176.
Apiscor, I, aptus sum. See adipiscor,
175.
Ap-peto, ere, Ivi, itum, 176.
Ap-Plico(176))are)g-^S
turn).
Ap-pono (179), ere, -posul, -positum.
Arceo, ere, arcul j arctus,
(comp. 128) ( artus (adj.)
Arcesso (accerso), ere, arcessivl,
-itum, 176.
Ardeo, ere, arsl, arsum, 165.
Aresco, ere, arul, 181, to become dry.
Arguo, ere, argui, f^g^) 173.
Ar-ripio (rapio), ere, ui, -reptum,
176.
A-scendo (scando), ere, I, scensum,
164.
A-spicio, ere, a-spexl, a-spectum, 161.
As-sentior, 111, assensus sum, 175.
As-sideo (sedeo), ere, -sedl, -sessum,
166.
As-suesco, ere, -suevl, -suetum, 179.
At-texo, ere, -texui, -textum, 172.
At-tineo (teneo), ere, ui, -tentum,
128.
Ab-do, ere, -didl, -ditum, 177.
Ab-igo (ago), ere, -egl, -actum, 159.
Ab-jicio (jacio), ere, -jecl, -jectum,
159.
Ab-luo, ere, -lui, -lutum, 173.
Ab-nuo, ere, -nut (-nuiturus), 173.
Ab-oleo, ere, evl, itum, 127.
Ab-olesco, ere, -olevl, 181.
Ab-ripio (rapio), ere, -ripul, -rep-
tum, 176. [177.
Abs-conclo (do), ere, -dl (-didl), ditum,
Ab-sisto, ere, -stitl, 178.
Ab-sum, -esse, ab-ful, a-ful, 113.
Ac-cendo, ere, -cendl, -censum, 164.
Ac-cido (cado), ere, -cidi, 168.
Ac-cipio (capio), ere, -cepl, -ceptum,
157.
Ac colo (colo), ere, -colul, -cultum,
176.
Ac-cumbo, ere, -cubui, -cubitum,
176.
Ac-curro, ere, ac-currl, -cursum, 170.
Aceo, ere, acul, to be sour.
Acesco, ere, acul, 181, to get sour-
Ac-qulro (quaero), ere, -qulsivl,
-quisltum, 176.
Acuo, ere, acul, acutum, 173.
Ad-do, ere, -didl, -ditum, 177.
Ad-imo (emo), ere, -Bml, -emtum, 131.
Ad-ii)iscor, I, ad-eptus sum, 175, 182.
Ad-olesco, ere, -olevl, -ultum, 181.
Ad-orior, -orlri, -ortus sum, 184.
Ad-scTsco, ere, -sclvl, -scltum, 181.
Ad-sisto, ere, -stitl, 178.
Ad-spicio, ere, -spexl, -spectum, 161.
Ad-sto, -stare, -stitl, 178.
Ad-sum, ad-esse, ad-fui, af-ful, 113.
Aegresco, ere, to fall sick.
Af-tero, -ferre, at-tull, al-latum, 186.
Age, 190.
Ag-gredior, -gredl, -gressus, 175.
A-gnosco, ere, a-gnovi, a-gnitum
(agnoturus), 179.
Ago, ere, egl, actum, 159.
:
INDEX OF YEEBS.
Ill
At-tingo (tango), ere, attigl, attac-
tuin, 162.
i At-tollo, ere, to raise up.
Andeo, ere, ausus sum, 182.
Audio, Ire, IvI, Itum. See 136.
| Au-fero, -ferre, abstull, ablatum, 186.
Aimeo, ere, auxl, auctuui, 156.
Ave, 190.
B.
Balbutio, Ire, to stutter.
BatuOj ere, ui, to pummel, fence.
Bibo, ere. bibi, (bibituru), 183.
c.
Cado, ere, cecidl, casum, 168.
Caecutio, ire, to be blind.
Caedo, ere, cecidl, caesum, 168.
Calefacio, ere, -feci, -factum, 159, 188.
Calesco, ere, calul, to get warm.
Calleo, ere, ul, to be skilled.
Calveo, 5re, to be bald.
Caudeo, ere, ul, to shine.
Caneo, ere, to be gray.
Cano, ere, cecini, cantum, 170.
Capesso, ere, capesslvl, Itum, 176.
Capio, ere, cepl, cap turn, 157. See
139.
Carpo, ere, carpsl, carptum, 158.
Caveo, ere, cavl, cautum, 174.
Odo, ere, cessi, cBssum, 166.
Cenatus, 182, R. 1.
Cerno, ere, (crSvi), (crStum), 180.
S?'te'«vT(citum,176.
Cingo, ere, cinxi, cinctum, 160.
Circum-do, -dare, -dedl, -datum, 177.
Circum-sisto, ere, stetl, 178.
Circum-sto, stare, stetl, 178.
, Claudo, ere, clausi, clausula, 165.
Clepo, ere, ?\^h cleptum, 158, 183.
Co-alesco, ere, -alul, (-alitum), 181.
Co-arguo, ere, ul, 173.
Co-em o, ere, -5ml, -em(p)tum, 169.
Coepi, coepisse, 190.
Co-guosco, ere, -gnovl, -gnitum, 156,
179.
Co-go (ago), ere, co-Sgl, co-actum,
159.
Col-lido (laedo), ere, -lisl, -llsum,
165.
Col-ligo (lego), ere, -legl, -lectum,
159.
Col-luceo, ere, -luxl,160.
Colo, ere, colui, cultum, 176.
Coru-bu.ro, ere, -ussl, -ustum, 171.
Com-edo, ere, -edi, -5sum (estum), 164.
Comitatus, 182, R. 2.
Comminiscor, I, commentus sum,
175.
Com-moyeo, ere, -movl, -motum, 174.
Co-mo (emo), ere, compsl, comptum,
169.
Com-parco, ere, -parsl, -parsum, 162.
Com-pello, ere, com-pull, -pulsum,
168, 170. '
Com-perio (pario), ire, com-perl,
com-per-tum, 170.
Compesco, ere, ul, 176.
Com-piugo, ere, -pegi, -pactum, 159.
Com-plector, I, com-plexus, 175.
Com-pleo, ere, evi, Stum, 127.
Com-primo (premo), ere, -pressl,
-pressum, 183.
Com-pungo, ere, -punxl, -punctum,
162.
Cou-cido (cado), ere, -cidi, 168.
Cou-cldo (caedo), ere, -cidi, -cisum,
168.
Con-cino (cano), ere, -ciuul, 176.
Concitus (cleo), 176.
Con-cludo (claudo), ere, -clusi,-clu-
sum, 165.
Cou-cupisco, ere, -cuplvl, cupltum,
181.
Con-cutio (quatio), ere, -cussi, -cus-
sum, 167.
Con-do, ere, -didi, -ditum, 177.
Con-fercio (farcio), Ire (fersl), fer-
tum, 160.
Con-fero, -ferre, -tull, collatum, 186.
Con-ficio (facio), ere, -feci, -fectum,
159, 188.
Con-fiteor (fateor), 5il, -fessus, 175.
Con-fringo (frakgo), ere, -fregl,
-fractum, 159.
Con-gruo, ere, congrul, 173.
Con-jicio (jacio), ere, -jBd, -jectum,
159.
Coujtiratus, 182, R. 1.
Con.ulveo,5re,(c™vI1))163.
Con-quiro (quaero), ere, -quIsIvL,
-quisltum, 176.
112
INDEX OF VERBS.
Con-sero, ere, -semi, -sertum, 176.
Con-sero, ere, -sB\i, -si turn, 180.
Con-sIderStus, 182, R, 1.
Con-sldo, ere, cpnsBdl, -sessum, 167.
Con-sisto, ere, -stiti, -stitum, 178.
Con-spicio, ere, -spexl,-spectum, 161.
Con-stituo (statuo), ere, ul, -stitu-
tum, 173.
Con-sto, -stare, -still, (eonstattirus),
178.
Con-suesco, ere, -suBvI, -suBtum, 179,
190.
Consulo, ere, consulul, -sultum, 176.
Con- tern no, ere, -tem(p)sl, -tem(p)-
tum, 169.
Con-texo, ere, -texui, -textum, 172.
Con-tineo (teneo, 128), ere, ul, -ten-
turn.
Con-tingo (tango), ere, contigi, con-
tacting 162.
Convalesce*, ere, -valul, -valitum, 181.
Coquo, ere, coxT, coctum, 161, 183.
Cor-ripio (rapio), ere, -ripul, -rep-
tum, 176.
Cor-ruo, ere, corral, 173.
CrBbresco, ere, crBbrui, to get fre-
quent.
CrB-do, ere, -didi, -ditum, 177.
Crepo, are, crepui, crepitum, 176.
CrBsco, ere, crBvI, crBtum, 179.
Cubo, are, cubui, cubitum, 176.
Ciido, ere cudl, ctlsum, 167.
Cupio, ere, cuplvl, cupitum, 176.
Curro, ere, cucurri, cursurn, 170.
D.
DB-cerno, ere, -crBvI, -crBtum, 180.
De-cerpo (carpo), ere, si, turn, 158.
De-do, dedere, dedidi, deditum, 177.
De-fendo, ere, -fendl, -fensum, 164.
Defetiscor, I, to be worn out.
De-go (ago), ere, 159.
Deleo. See Paradigm, 123-126.
De-ligo (lego), ere, -legl, -lectum,
IT)!).
De-mo (emo), ere, dempsl, demptum,
169.
Depello (170), ere, depull, depulsum.
De-primo (pkemo, 183), ere, -pressl,
pressnm.
Depso, ere, depsul, depstum, 172.
De-scendo (scando), ere, -scendl,
-soensum, 164.
De-sero, ere, -serul, -sertum, 176.
De-silio (salio), ire, u^' (gf tUn*
Dc-sino, ere, ^J/' desitum, 179.
De-sipio (sapio), -ere, 176.
De-sisto, ere, -stiti, -stitum, 178.
De-spicio, ere, -spexl, -spectum, 161.
De-sum, -esse, -fui, 113.
De-tendo (168), ere, -tendl, -tentum.
De-tineo (teneo, 128), ere, -ul, -ten-
tum.
De-vertor, -I, 182.
Dico, ere, dixi, dictum, 160.
Dif-fero, -ferre, distull, dilatum, 186,
Dl-gnosco (nosco, 179), ere, -gnovl.
Dl-ligo, ere, -lexi, -lectum, 161.
Dl-mico, are, avi, atum, 176.
Di-rigo, ere, -rexl, -rectum, 161.
Dir-imo (emo, 169), ere, -Bml, -em-
tum.
Disco, ere, didicl, 162.
Dis-crepo, are, -crepui (avi), 176.
Dis-cumbo (176), ere, -cubui, -cubi
turn.
Dis-pesco, ere, [-pescui,] -pestum, to
divide.
Dis-sideo (seoeo, 166), ere, -sedl.
Dl-stinguo, ere, -stinxi, -stiuctum, 160.
Di-sto, -stare, 178.
Dltesco, ere, to grow rich.
Divido, ere, dlvlsl, dlvlsum, 167.
Do, dare, dedl, datum, 177.
Doceo, ere, docul, doctum, 128.
Domo, are, ul, itum, 176.
Dtico, ere, duxl, ductum, 160.
Dulcesco, ere, to grow sweet.
Duresco, ere, durui, to grow hard.
E.
Eclo, ere, edl, esum, 164, 187.
E-do (do), edere, Bdidl, editum, 177.
Ef-fero, -ferre, extuli, Blatum, 186.
Egeo, ere, egul, to want.
E-licio, ere, -licui, -licitum, 161.
E-ligo (lego), ere, -legl, -lectum, 159.
E-mico (176), are, ul (aturus).
Emineo, ere, ul, to stand out.
Emo, ere, Bml, em turn, 169. See 131.
E-neco, are, {*™™^ 5liectum> 176-
Eo, ire, IvI, itum, 185.
E-vado, ere, BvasI, Bvilsum, 165.
E-vanesco, ere, Bvanui, 181.
Ex-ardBsco, ere, exarsl, exarsum, 181.
INDEX OF VERBS.
113
Ex-cello, ere, ul (excelsus), 176.
Excitus, 176.
Ex-cludo (clatjdo), ere, -si, -sum,
165.
Ex-cuito (170), ere, excucurri, -cur-
sum.
Ex-olBsco, ere, -olBvI, -olgtum, 181.
Ex-pello (170), ere, -pull, -pulsum.
Expergiscor, I, experrectus sum, 175.
Ex-perior, In, -pertus sum, 175,
182, R 2.
Ex-pieo, 5re, Bvl, etum, 127.
Ex-plico, are, ul (avl), itum (atum),
176.
Ex-plodo (plaudo), ere, -si, -sum, 165.
Exsecratus, 182, R. 2.
Ex-stinguo, ere, -stinxi, -stiuctum,
160.
Ex-sisto, ere, -stiti, -stitum, 178.
Ex-sto, are (exstaturus), 178.
Ex-teudo, ere, di, -sum (-turn), 168.
Ex-tollo, ere.
Ex-uo, ere, -ul, -Titum, 173.
F.
Facesso (176), ere, Ivi (-1), Itum.
Facio, ere, feci, factum, 159, 188.
Fallo, ere, fefelli, falsum, 170.
Farcio, Ire, farsl, fartum (-sum), 160.
Fan, 190.
Fateor, Sri, fassus sum, 175.
Fatisco, ere, to fall apart.
Fatiscor, I (fessus, adj).
Faveo, ere, favi, fautum, 174.
Ferio, Ire, to strike.
Fero, ferre, tuli, latum, 183, 186.
Ferveo, ere, fervl (ferbui), 174.
Fldo, ere, fisus sum, 182.
Flgo, ere, fixl, fixum, 160.
Findo, ere, fidi, fissum, 168.
Fingo, ere, fmxi, iictum, 160.
Flo, fieri, factus sum, 188.
Flecto, ere, flexl, flexum, 160.
Fleo, ere, gvl, etum, 127.
Fllgo, ere, fllxl, flictum, 160.
Floreo, 5re, ul, to bloom.
Fluo, ere, fluxl (fluxus, adj.), 163.
Fodio, ere, fodl, fossum, 166.
Forem, 112.
Foveo, 5re, fovl, fotum, 174.
Frango, ere, frBgl, fractum, 159.
Fremo, ere, ul, itum, 176.
Frendo (eo), ere (ul), frSsum, fres-
sum, 176.
Frico, are, ul, frictum (atum), 176.
Frigeo, ere (frlxl), 160.
Frlgo, ere, frlxl, frictum (frixum),
160.
Froudeo, Sre, ul, to be leafy.
Fruor, I, fructus (fruitus) sum, 175.
Fugio, ere, fugi, fugitum, 159.
Fulcio, Ire, fulsl, fultum, 160.
Fulgeo, 5re, fulsl, 160.
Fuudo, ere, fudl, fusuni, 164.
Fungor, I, fuuctus sum, 175.
(Fnro, def.), furere, to ram.
G.
Gaunio, ire, to yelp.
Gaudeo, 5re, gavlsus sum, 182.
Gemo, ere, ul, itum, 176.
Gero, ere, gessl, gestum, 171.
Giguo, ere, geuul, geuitum, 176.
Glisco, ere, to swell.
Gradior, I, gressus sum, 175.
H.
Haereo, Sre, haesl, haesum, 171.
Haurio, Ire, hausl, haustum, -j n^
(hausurus, liausturus), ' *
Hisco, ere, to yawn.
Horreo, Sre, ul, to stand on end,
Hortor, arl, atus sum, 141, 142.
Ico, ere, Ici, ictum, 161.
I-gnosco, ere, -gnovl, -gnotum, 179.
Il-licio, ere, -lexi, -lectum, 161.
Il-llclo (laedo), ere, -llsl, -llsum, 165.
Imbuo, eve, ul, titum, 173.
Imitatus, 182, R. 2.
Immineo, Bre, to overhang.
Im-pingo (pango, 160), ere, -pegl,
-pactum.
In-calesco, ere, -calul, 181.
In-cendo, ere, -cendl, -censum, 164.
Incesso, ere, Ivi (I), 176.
In-cido (cado, 168), ere, -cidl, -ca-
sum.
In-cido (caedo, 168), ere, -cidl, -cl-
sam.
In-cipio (capio, 157), ere, -c5pl, -cep-
tum.
In-crepo (ciiepo, 176), are, ul, itum.
In-cumbo (176), ere, -cubul, -cubi-
tum.
114
INDEX OF VERBS.
In-cut io (quatio, 167), ere, -cussl,
• cussum.
Ind-igeo (egbo), Ore, ul, to want.
Ind-ipiscor, I, indeptus sum, 175.
In-do, ere, -didl, -ditum, 177.
Indulgeo, ere, indulsl (indultum), 160.
Iii-duo, ere, -dul, -datum, 173.
Ineptio, Ire, to be silly.
Ingemisco, ere, ingemui, 181.
1 Dgruo, ere, ul. See congruo, 173.
In-notesco (181), ere, notul.
Iu-olesco, ere, -olevl, -olitum, 181.
Inquam, 190.
Iu-sideo (sedeo, 166), ere, -sedi, -ses-
sum.
In-sisto, ere, -stitl, 178.
In-spicio, ere, -spexi, -spectum, 161.
Iuter-fieio, ere, -feci, -fectum, 159.
In-sto, are, -stitl, (instaturus), 178.
In-sum, -esse, -ml, 113.
Intel-ligo, ere,-lexi, lectum, 161, 183.
Iuter-imo (emo), ere, -eml, -emtum,
169.
Inter-pungo, ere, -punxl, -punctum,
162.
Inter-sto, are, -stetl, 178.
Iuter-sum, -esse, -ful, 113.
Inveierasco, ere, -avl, 181.
In-vado, ere, invasi, -vasum, 165.
Irascor, I, Iratus sum, 181.
Jaceo, ere, jacul, to lie.
"Jacio, ere, j eel, j actum, 159.
Jubeo, £re, jussl, jussum, 183.
Juugo, ere, junxl, junctum, 160.
Juratus, 182, R. 1.
Juvo, are, juvl, jutum (juvaturus),
174.
L.
Labor, I, lapsus sum, 175.
Lacesso, ere, lacessivl, -Itum, 176.
Lacio, 161.
Laedo, ere, laesl, laesum, 165.
Lambo, ere, I, 158. 183.
Langueo, ere, I, io be languid.
Lateo, ere, ul, to lie hid.
Lavo, are (ere), lavl, lautum, lotum,
lavatum, 174.
Lego, ere, legl, lectum, 159.
Libet, libere, libuit (libitum est), it
pleases.
Licet, licere, licuit (licitum est), it is
2 ermiited.
Lingo, ere, linxl, linctum, 160.
Lino, ere, llvl (levl), litum, 179.
Linquo, ere, llqui, 159.
Liqueo, ere, licul, to be clear,
Llveo, 5re, to be livid.
Loquor, I, locutus sum. Paradigm^
145, 146.
Ltlceo, ere, luxl, 160.
Ltido, ere, lusl, lusum, 165.
Lugeo, ere, luxl, 160.
t ~ ™„ i ,- S lutum, to wash, 173.
Luo,ere,lm \Mtm^toaton'efor.
M.
Maereo, ere, io grieve.
Malo, Hialle, malul, 189.
Mando, ere, mandl, mansum, 164.
Maneo, ere, mansi, mansum, 183.
Medeor, erl, to heal.
Meminl, 190.
Mentior, Iri, Itus. Paradigm, 147.
Mereor, en, meritus sum, 182, R. 2.
Mergo, ere, mersl, inersum, 160.
Metior, Iri, mensus sum, 183.
Meto, ere, messul (rare), messum,
183.
Metuo, ere, ul, 173.
Mico, are, ul, 176.
Minuo, ere, minul, mintitum, 173.
Misceo, ere, ul, mixtum, (mistum),
128.
' Misereor, erl miseritus, (misertus)
sum, 175.
Mitto, ere, mlsl, missum. 166.
Molo, ere, molul, molitum, 176.
Moneo, ere, ul, itum, 129, 130.
Mordeo, ere, momordl, morsum, 168.
Monor)mo,I)n-o~ussum)183.
Moveo, ere, movl, motum, 174.
Mulceo, ere, mulsi, mulsum, 160.
Mulgeo, ere, mulsi, mulsum(ctum),
160.
Mungo, ere, munxi, munctum, 160.
N.
Nanciscor, I, n actus (nanctus), 175.
Nascor, I, natus sum (nasciturus)ll
181.
Neco, are, avl, atum, 176.
Necto, ere, nexl (nexul), nexum, 160|j
Neg-iigo, ere, -lexl, -lectum, 161.
Necoplnatus, 182, R. 2.
Neo, nere, nevi, netum, 127.
INDEX OF VERBS.
Nequeo, ire, 185.
Noteseo, ere, notul, 181.
ISTingo, ere, ninxl, 160.
Niteo, ere, ui, to shine.
Nltor, I, nixus (nlsus) sum, 175.
Nolo, nolle, nolul, 189.
Noceo, ere, ui (nocittirus), to be hurt-
ful
Nosco, ere, novi, notum, 179.
Nubo, ere, nupsl, riuptum, 158.
i Ob-do, ere, -didi, -ditura, 177.
S Ob-dormlsco, ere, -dorrnlvl, -dorinl-
tum, 181.
! Obllviscor, I, oblltus sum, 175.
Ob-sideo (sedeo, 166), ere, -sedl, -ses-
sum.
Ob-sisto, ere, -stiti, -stitum, 178.
Obs olesco, ere, -olevl, -oletum, 181.
Ob-sto, stare, stiti (obstaturus), 178.
lObtineo (teneo, 128), ere, -tinul,
-tentum.
( Oc-cido, (cado), ere, -cidi, -casum,
168.
Oc-cido (caedo), ere, -cidi, -clsum,
168.
Oc-cino (cano), ere, -clnui, 176.
Oc-cipio (capio), (157), ere, -cepl,
-ceptum.
Occulo, ere, occului, occultum, 176.
Odl, def., 190.
Of-fendo (164), ere, -fendi, -fensum.
Of-fero, -ferre, obtuli, oblatum, 186.
Oieo, ere, ui, to smell.
Olesco. See 181. -
Operio, Ire, operui, opertum, 176.
Opluatus, 182, R. 2.
Opperior, in, oppertus (or Itus).
Comp. 175, 5.
Ordior, Iri, orsus sum, 175.
Orior, In, ortus sum (oriturus), 184.
-Os-tendo, ere, -tendl, -ten-sum (-ten-
uis), 168:
P.
Paciscor, I, pactus sum, 175, 182, R. 2.
Palleo, -ere, -ui, to be pale.
Pando, ere, pandl, passum (pansum),
166.
Parco, ere, pepercl (parsl), parsurus,
162.
Pario, ere,peperl, partum(pariturus),
170.
115
Partior, iri, Itus, 182, R. 2.
Pasco, ere, pavi, pastum, 179.
Pate-facio, ere, -feci, -factum, 188.
Pateo, ere, ui, to be open.
Patior, I, passus sum, 175.
Paveo, ere, pavi, 174.
Pecto, ere, pexi, pexum, 160.
-lexl
Pel-licio, -licere, njcuJ\ -lectum,161.
Pello, ere, pepuli, pulsum, 170.
Pendeo, ere, pependl, 168.
Pendo, ere, pependl, pensum, 168.
Per-cello, ere, percull, perculsum,
170.
Percenseo (censeo), ere, -censul,
-ceusum.
Percitus (cieo), 176.
Per-do, ere, -didi, -ditum, 177.
Per-eo, Ire, peril, itum, 185.
Per-ricio, ere, -feci, fectum, 188.
Pergo (rego), ere, perrexl, perrec-
tum, 161.
Per-petior (patior, 175), I,perpessus
sum.
Per-spicio, ere, -spexl, -spectum, 161.
Per-sto, -stare, -stiti, 178.
Per-tineo (teneo, 128), ere, ui.
Pessum-do, -dare, -cledl, -datum,
177.
Peto, ere, Ivi (il), Itum, 156, 176.
Piget, pigere, piguit, pigitum est, it
irks.
Pingo, ere, pinxl, pictum, 160.
Pinso, ere, ui (I), pinsitum (pistum,
pinsum), 172.
Plango, ere, planxl, planctum, 160.
Plaudo, ere, plausl, plausum, 165.
Plecto, ere, plexl, plexum, 160.
Plector, I, to be punished.
Pleo. See 127.
Plico, are, ui (avl), itum (atum), 176.
Polleo, ere, to be potent.
Pouo (169), ere,posuI, positum, 179.
Posco, ere, poposcl, 162.
Pos-sideo (sedeo, 166), ere, -sedl, ses-
sum.
Pos-sum, posse, potul, 115.
Poto, are, avl, potum, potatum, 176.
Potus, 182, R. 1.
Prae-cello, ere, cellul, 176.
Prae-cino, ere, cinui, 176.
Prae-curro, ere, -cucurrl, -cursum,
170.
Prae-sideo (sedeo, 166), ere, sedl.
1JC
INDEX OF VERBS.
Prac-sum, -esse, -fin, 113.
Prae-sto, -stare, -stitl, (-statQrus),
178.
Prandeo, Bre, prandl, pransum, 164,
182, R. 1.
Prehendo, crc, prcliendl, prehensum,
164.
Pre mo, ere, pressl, pressum, 183.
Pr5d-igo (ago, 159), ere, -Bgl.
Pro-do, ere, -didl, -ditum, 177.
Pro-ficiscor, I, profectus sum, 175.
Pro-fiteor (fateor, 175), Sri, -fessus
sum.
Promo (emo), ere, prompsl, promp-
tum, 169.
Pro-sum, prodesse, profui, 114.
Pro-tenclo (tendo, 168), ere, -tendl,
-tentum, -teusum.
Psallo, ere, I, 170.
Pudet, Bre, puduit, puditum est, it
sliames.
Puerasco, ere, to become a boy.
Pungo, ere, pupugl, puuctum, 162.
Q.
Quaero, ) ere, quaesivl, quaesltum,
Quaeso, j 176.
Quatio, ere, (quassl), quassum, 166.
Queo, quire, 185.
Queror, querl, questus sum, 175.
Quiesco, ere, quievi, quietum, 179.
R.
Rado, ere, rasl, rasum, 165.
Rapio, ere, rapul, raptum, 176.
Raucio, ire, rausi, rausum, 183.
Re-censeo (censeo, 128), ere, -cBnsuI,
-cBnsum (recensltum).
Recitidesco, ere, -crudul, to get raw
again.
Red-arguo (173), ere, -argul.
Red-do, ere, -didl, -ditum, 177.
Red-igo (ago), ere, -S^I, -actum, 159.
Re-fello (fallo, 170), ere, refelll.
Re-iero (183, 186), -ferre, -tull, -la-
tum.
Rego, ere, rexl, rectum, 161, 183.
Re-linquo, ere, -llqul, -lictum, 159.
Reminiscor, I, to recollect.
Renldeo, ere, to glitter.
Reor, rBrl, ratus sum, 183.
Re-perio, Ire, reperl, repertum, 170.
Repo, ere, repsi, reptum, 158.
Re-sipisco, ere, -siplvi (-sipul), 181.
Re-sis to, ere, -stitl, -stitum, 178.
Re-spoudeo (168), ere, -spondl, -spon-
sum.
Re-sto, stare, -stitl, 178.
Restinguo, ere, -stinxi, -stinctum, 160.
Re-tineo (teneo, 128), ere, ui, -ten-
turn.
Re-vertor, I, reverti, reversum, 167.
Re-vivisco, ere, vixi, victum, 181.
Rldeo, ere, rlsi, risum, 165.
Rigeo, ere, ui, to be stiff.
Rodo, ere, rosi, rosum, 165.
Rubeo, ere, ui, to be red.
Rudo, ere, rudlvl, Itum, 176.
Rumpo, ere, rupi, ruptum, 157.
Ruo, ere, rul, rutum (ruiturus), 173.
s.
Salio, ire, (gs^ saltum, 176.
Sallo, ere, salli, salsum, 170.
Salve, def., 190.
Sancio^rB.san^J^^l^
Sapio, ere (saplvl), sapui, 176.
Sarcio, ire, sarsi, sartum, 160.
Satis-do, -dare, -dedi, -datum, 177.
Scabo, ere, scabi, to scratch.
Scalpo, ere, scalpsl, scalptum, 158.
Scando, ere, scandl, scansum, 164.
Scateo, ere, to gush forth.
Sciudo, ere, scidi, scissum, 168.
Sclsco, ere, scivi, scltum, 181.
Scribo, ere, scrlpsi, scrlptum, 158.
Sculpo, ere, sculpsi, sculptum, 158.
Seco.sre, seem, ssee«s> 176.
Sedeo, ere, sedl, sessum, 166.
Seligo (lego, 159), ere, -lsgl, -lectum.
Sentio, ire, sensi, sensum, 165.
Sepelio, Ire, Ivi, sepultum, 176.
Sepio, ire, sepsl, septum, 158.
Sequor, I, seciitus sum, 175.
Sero, ere, 176.
Sero, ere, sBvI, satum, 180.
Serpo, ere, serpsi, serptum, 158.
Sido, ere, sldl, 167.
Sileo, ere, ui, to be silent.
Sino, ere, slvl, situm, 179.
Sisto, ere, stitl, statum, 178.
Sitio, Ire, Ivi, to thirst.
Soleo, ere, solitus sum, 182.
Solvo, ere, solvl, solutum, 174.
Sono, are, sonul,
sonitum,
176.
sonattirus,
Sorbeo, ere (sorp-si), sorbul, 158.
INDEX TO VERBS.
117
Sordeo, ere, ul, to be dirty.
Sortior, Irl, sortltus sum, 182, R. 2.
Spargo, ere, sparsl, sparsum, 160.
Sperno, ere, sprevi, spretum, 180.
-Spicio. See ad-spicio.
Splendeo, ere, ui, to shine.
Spondeo, ere, spopondl, sponsuni,
168.
Spuo, ere, spul, sputum, 173.
Squaleo, ere, to be rough, foul.
Statuo, ere, statu!, statutum, 173.
Sterno, ere, stravl, stratum, 180.
Sternuo, ere, sternui, 173.
Sterto, ere, stertul, 176.
-Stinguo, ere, 160.
Sto, stare, steti, statum, 178.
Strepo, ere, strepul, strepitum, 176.
Strldeo, ere (ere), strldl, 167.
Stringo, ere, strinxl, strictum, 160.
Struo, ere, struxT, structum, 163.
Studeo, ere, ui, to be zealous.
Stupeo, ere, ui, to be astounded.
Suadeo, ere, suasi, suasum, 165.
Sub-do, ere, -didl, -ditum, 177.
Sub-igo (ago, 159), ere, -egl, -actum.
Suc-cedo (cedo, 166), ere, -cessl,
-cessum.
Suc-cendo {see ac-cendo, 164), ere,
-cendl, -ceusum.
Suc-censeo (128), 5re, ui, -ceusum.
Suesco, ere, su5vl, suetum, 179.
Suf-fero, -ferre, sus-tiuui, 186, R
Suf-ficio (facio, 159), ere, -feci, -fec-
tum.
Suf-fodio (166), ere, -fodi, -fossum.
Sug-gero (see 171), ere, -gessi, -ges-
tum.
Sugo, ere, suxi, suctum, 160.
, Sam, esse, fui, 112.
Sumo (emo), ere, sumpsi, sumptum,
169.
Suo, ere, sul, sutum, 173.
Superbio, Ire, to be haughty.
Super-sto, -stare, -steti, 178.
Super-sum, -esse, -fill, 113.
Sup-pouo (see 179), ere, -posui, -posi-
tum.
Surgo (rego), ere, surrexi, surrec-
tum, 161.
I T-
Taedet, pertaesum est, it tires.
Tango, ere, tetigi, tactum, 162.
Tego, ere, texl, tectum, 161, 183.
Temno, ere, 169.
Tendo, ere, tetendi, tensum (-turn),
168.
Teueo, ere, tenui, (tentum), 128.
Tergo (eo), ere, tersi, tersum, 160.
Tero, ej-e, trlvi, tritum, 180.
Texo, ere, texui, textum, 172.
Timeo, ere, ui, to fear.
Ting(u)o, ere, tinxl, tinctum, 160.
Tollo, ere (sustuli, sublatum), 170.
Tondeo, ere, totondi, tonsum, 168.
Touo, are, ui, 176.
Torpeo, ere, ui, to be torpid.
Torqueo, ere, torsi, tortum, 160.
Torreo, ere, torrul, tostum, 128.
Tra do, ere, -didl, -ditum, 177.
Trah o, ere, traxl, tractum, 163.
Tremo, ere, ui, 176.
Tribuo, ere, ui, tributum, 173.
Trudo, ere, trusi, trusum, 165.
Tueor, en ^^f tutatus sum, 182,
R. 2.
Tumeo, ere, ui, to swell.
Tunclo, ere, tutudi, tunsum, tusum,
168.
Turgeo, ere, tursi, 160.
u.
Ulciscor, I, ultus sum, 175.
Ungo, ere, unxl, uuctum, 160.
Urgeo, ere, ursi, 160.
Uro, ere, ussi, ustum, 171.
Utor, I, usus sum, 175.
v.
Vado, ere, 165.
Vale, 190.
Velio, ere, vexl, vectum, 163.
Velio, ere, velll (vulsi), vulsum, 170.
Veu-do, ere, -didl, -ditum, 177.
Ven-eo, ire, Ivi (il), 185.
Venio, Ire, venl, ventum, 170.
Veoum-do, -dare, dedl, -datum,
177.
Vereor, 6rl, yeritus sum. See 143.
Verro, ere, verri, versum, 170.
Verto, ere, verti, versum, 167.
Vescor, I, to feed.
Vcsperasco, ere, 181.
Veto, are, vetul, vetitum, 176.
Video, ere, vldl, visum, 164.
118
INDEX OF VERBS.
Vieo, Ore, Btum, to phut. See 127.
Vigeo, 6re, ul, to flourish.
Vincio, Ire, vinxl, vinctum, 160.
Vinco, ere, vlcl, victum, 159.
Vlso, ere, vlsl, visum, 172.
Vivo, ere, vixl, victum, 163.
Volo, velle, volul, 189.
Volvo, ere, volvi, voltitum, 174.
Vomo, ere, vomul, vomitum, 176.
Voveo, ere, vovl, votum, 174.
SYNTAX.
SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE.
192. Syntax treats of the formation and combination of
sentences.
Sentences are diyided into simple and compound.
A simple sentence is one in which the necessary parts occur
out once.
The necessary parts of the sentence are the subject and the
predicate.
The predicate is that which is said of the subject.
The subject is* that of which the predicate is said.
Luna splendet, The moon shines.
Luna is the subject; splendet, the predicate.
193. The most simple form of the sentence is the finite verb :
i-u-m, I am; doce-s, thou teachest ; scrlb-i-t, he writes.
t Remark.— Here the form contains in itself all the necessary elements (compare 111):
is the first person, s the second, t the third. From the expansion and modification of
e finite verb arise all the complicated forms of the compound sentence.
194. The subject of the finite yerb is always in the Nomina-
tive Case, or so considered.
. Remarks. — 1. The subject of the Infinitive is in the Accusative.
2. The use of the Nominative in Latin is the same as in English.
3. The Vocative (the case of Direct Address) is not affected by the structure of the
entence, and doe3 not enter as an element into Syntax, except in the matter of Concord.
^he form differs from the Nominative in the Second Declension only, and even there the
Nominative is sometimes used instead, especially in poetry and solemn prose. (See
farther, 324, R. 1.)
Almae filius Majae. Hor. Son of mild Maia!
Audi tti, populus Albanus. Liv. Hear thou, people of Alba!
0 is prefixed to give emphasis to the address :
120 FORMS OF THE SUBJECT.
0 formose puer, nimium ne cre"de colon. Verg. 0 shapely boy! trust not com-
ph.vion all too much.
The vocative is commonly interjected in prose, except in highly emotional passages.
195. The Subject may be a noun or pronoun, or some other
word or phrase used as a noun :
Dens mundum gubernat, God steers the universe.
Ego reges ejeci, I drove out kings.
Sapiens res adversas non timet, The sage does not fear adversity.
Victi in servitutem rediguntur, The vanquished are reduced to slawry.
Contendisse decorum est. Ov. To have struggled is honorable.
Magnum est beneficium naturae quod necesse est morl. Sen. It is
a great boon of nature, that we must needs die.
Vides habet duas syllabas, (The word) " vides" has tioo syllables.
' The following remarks may be omitted by the beginner.
Remarks. — 1. Masculine and Feminine adjectives and participles are used as sub-
stantives, chiefly in the plural number: pauperes, the poor ; divites, the rich' docti,
the learned ; whereas, in the singular, the substantive is generally expressed: vir bonus,
a good man; homo doctus, a learned person ; mulier peregrina, a foreign woman.
When persons are not meant, a substantive is understood : cani (capilll), grey hairs ;
calida (aqua), warm water ; dextra (manus), right hand.
2. Neuter adjectives and participles are freely employed as substantives in both num-
l ers: medium, the midst; extremum, the end ; reliquum, the residue ; futurum, the
future ; bonum, good; bona, blessings, possessions; malum, evil; mala, misfortunes.
The plural is frequently employed when the English idiom prefers the singular : vera, the
truth ; omnia, everything.
3. Adjectives of the Second Declension are sometimes used as neuter substantives in
the Genitive case, afterwords of quantity or pronouns : aliquid boni, something good ;
nihil mall, nothing bad. Adjectives of the Third Declension are thus employed only
in combination with those of the Second. (See 371, R. 2.)
4. Instead of the neuter adjective the word r6s, thing, is frequently used, especially in
forms which are identical for different genders ; so bonarum rerum, of blessings, rather
than bonorum (m. and n.).
5. In Latin the plural of abstract nouns occurs more frequently than in English :
adventus imperatorum, the arrival(s) of the generals (because there were severa' ■
generals, or bee mse they arrived at different times). Pluralizing abstract nouns makes
thom concrete : fortitiidinSs, gallant actions ; formidinSs, bugbears ; Irae, quarrels.
0. Other plural expressions to be noted are : nives, snow-flakes) • grandines, hai
(stones ) ; pluviae, (streams of) rain; ligna, (logs of) wood ; carngs, pieces of meat ; aera
articles of bronze ; also symmetrical parts of the human body: cervices, neck ; pectora
breast.
The Plural is freely used in poetry :
Otia si tollas, periere Cupidinis arcus. Ov. If you do away with holidays, Cupid1
bow (and arrows) are ruined.
7. The rhetorical Roman often uses the First Person plural for the First Person sing!
lar. The usage originates in modesty, but mock modesty is the worst form of pompositj
In poetry there is often an element of shyness.
Librum de" senectute ad te misimus. Cic. We (I) have sent you a treatise on ol\
age.
Sitque memor nostrl necne, referte mini. Ov. Bring me back (word) whether s/|l
thinks of us (me among others; or no.
COPULA AND COPULATIVE VERBS. 121
8. The Singular, in a collective sense, is also used for the Plural, but more rarely: faba,
vans ; porcus. pig (meat) ; gallina./o^(as articles of food) ; vestis, clothing ; hostis,
he enemy ; miles, the soldiery ; pedes, infantry ; eques, cavalry.
196. Copula. — When the predicate is not in the form of a
rerb, the so-called Copula is generally employed, in order to
3onple the adjective or substantive with the subject.
The chief Copula is the verb sum, I am.
Fortuna caeca est. Cic. Fortune is blind.
Usus magister est optimus. Cic. Practice is the best teacher.
Remark.— Strictly speaking, the Copula is itself a predicate, as is shown by the
ranslation when it stands alone or with an adverb : est Deus, there is a God, God exists ;
•ecte semper erunt res, things vjill always be (go on) well ; sic vita hominum est,
vch is human life ; u So runs the world away."
197. Other copulative verbs are: viderl, to seem; apparere,
)o appear ; manere, to remain ; nascl, to be lorn ; fieri, to become;
3vadere, to turn out ; crearl, to be created ; deligl, to be chosen ;
putarl, to be thought ; haberl, to be held; did, to be said ; appel-
arl, to be called; nominan, to be named. Hence the rule:
Verbs of Seeming, Remaining, Becoming, with the Passive of
yerbs of Making and Choosing, Showing, Thinking, and Call-
ing, take two nominatives, one of the Subject, one of the Predi-
cate :
Nemo dives nascitur. Sen. No one is born rich.
Aristides Justus appellatur, Aristides is called just.
Servius Tullius rex est declaratus. Liv. Servius Tullius was declared
king.
Thucydides nunquam numeratus est 5rator. Cic. Thucydides has
never been accounted an orator.
Remarks.— 1. All copulative verbs retain the Nominative with the Infinitive after
auxiliary verbs. (424.)
Beatus esse sine virtiite nemo potest. Cic. No one can be happy without virtue.
2. On the Double Accusative construction after Active Verbs, see 334.
198. Subject Omitted. — The personal pronoun is not ex-
pressed, unless it is emphatic, as for example in contrasts :
Amamus parentis, We love (our) parents.
Ego reges ejeci, vos tyrannds introducitis. Cic. I drove out kings, ye
are bringing in tyrants.
199. Verbs that have no definite subject are called Imper-
sonal Verbs, chiefly relating to the state of the weather :
6
L22 CONCORD.
Tonat, it thunders; fulgurat, fulminat, it lightens; pluit, it rains;
ningit, it snows.
Remarks.— 1. The passive of intransitive verbs (201) is often used impersonally:
vivitur, people live / curritur, there is a running. The subject is contained in the verb
itself : sic vivitur = sic vita vivitur, such is life. In the same way explain taedet,
it wearies; miseret, it moves to pity ; piget, it disgusts ; pudet, it puts to shame.
2. All other so-called Impersonal Verbs have an Infinitive or an equivalent for a sub-
ject.
3. Other uses coincide with the English. So the Third Person Plural of verbs of Saying,
Thinking, and Calling. So the Ideal Second Person Singular. (2-52.) To be noticed is
the occasional use of inquit, quoth he, of an imaginary person :
Non concedo, inquit, Epicuro. Cic. i" do not yield the point, quoth he (one), to
Epicurus.
200. Copula Omitted. — Est or sunt is often omitted in saws
and proverbs, in sliort questions, in rapid changes, and in tenses
compounded with participles :
Summum jus summa injuria, The height of right (is) the height of wrong.
Nemo malus felix. Juv. No bad man (is) happy. Quid dulcius quam
habere quicum omnia audeas loqui. Cic. What sweeter than to ham some
one, with whom yon can venture to talk about everything t Aliquamdiu cer-
tatum. Sall. The struggle was kept up for some time.
So also esse with participles and the like.
Caesar statuit exspectandam classem. Caes. Caesar resolved that the
fleet must be waited for.
Concord.
201. The Three Concords. — There are three great con-
cords in Latin :
1. The agreement of the predicate with the subject.
2. The agreement of attributive or appositive with the substantive. (281,
319.)
3. The agreement of the Pronoun with the Noun (Relative with ante-
cedent.) (616.)
Remark.— It may be well for the beginner to study these together.
202. Agreement of the Predicate with the Subject.
The verbal predicate >• agrees with its subject \ m number
1 ) *=> J ( and person.
i( in number,
agrees with its subject •< gender, and
( case.
The substantive predicate agrees with its subject in case.
COXCOKD. 123
Substantiva m5bilia (21) are treated as adjectives, and follow the num-
ber and gender of the subject.
Ego reges ejeci, vostyrann5s introducitis (198).
Verae amicitiae sempiternae sunk Cic. True friendships are abiding.
Dos est decern talenta. Ter. The doiory is ten talents.
Usus magister est optimus. Cic. Practice is the best teacher.
Athenae sunt omnium doctrinarum inventrices. Cic. Athens is the
Inventor of all branches of learning.
Arx est monosyllabum. " Arx" is a monosyllable.
Remarks. — 1. The violation of the rules of agreement is due chiefly to
3ne of two causes :
I. The natural relation is preferred to the artificial (constructio ad sen-
sum, per synesin, according to the sense).
n. The nearer is preferred to the more remote. Hence :
Exceptions. — 1) Nouns of multitude often take the predicate in the
Plural : pars, part; vis, quantity ; multitudo, crowd; organized bodies
more rarely.
Pars major receperant sese. Lrv. The greater part had retired.
Omnis multitudo abeunt. Liv. All the crowd depart.
2) The adjective predicate often follows the natural gender of the sub-
ject:
Capita conjuration] s virgis caesi sunt. Lrv. The heads of the con-
spiracy were flogged.
3) The copula often agrees with the number of the predicate (" the wages
3f sin is death") :
Amantium Irae (195, R. 5) am5ris integratio est. Ter. Lovers' quarrels
ire love's renewal.
2. A superlative adjective defined by a partitive genitive follows the
gender of the subject when it precedes :
Hordeum omnium frugum mollissimum est. Pltn. Barley is the softest
?f all grains.
Otherwise it follows the genitive:
Velocissimum omnium animalium est delphinus. Pltn. The dolphin
is the swiftest of all animals.
3. The Vocative is sometimes used by the poets in the predicate, either
by anticipation or by assimilation, (See 324, R. 1.)
4. The neuter adjective is often used as the substantive predicate of
a masculine or feminine subject :
Triste lupus stabulls. Yerg. The wolf is destruction to the folds.
Omnium rerum (195, R. 4) mors est extremum, Cic. Death is the end
pf all things.
5. The demonstrative pronoun is commonly attracted into the gender
of the predicate :
3
124 voices.
Ea non media sed nulla via est. Liv. That is not a middle course, but
no course at all.
Non ego illam mihi duco d5tem esse, quae dos dxcitur. Platjt. Tliat
which is called a dowry I deem not my doicry, no, not L
When the pronoun is the predicate there is no change. So in defini-
tions.
Quid est Deus ? What is God ?
FOKMS OE THE VERBAL PREDICATE.
Voices of the Verb.
203. There are two Voices in Latin — Active and Passive.
The latter seems to have been Keflexive in its origin.
204. The Active Voice denotes that the action proceeds
from the subject.
Verbs are called Transitive when their action goes over to an
object; Intransitive when their action does not go beyond the
subject: occldere, to fell = to kill (Transitive); occidere, to fall
(Intransitive).
Remark. — Transitive verbs are often used intransitively, and Intransitive verbs
transitively : suppeditare, to supply (Transitive), to be. on hand (Intransitive) ; queror,
/ complain (Intransitive), I complain of (Transitive). When transitive verbs are used in-
transitively they serve simply to characterize the agent. When intransitive verbs are
used transitively it is chiefly with an accusative of the Inner object. (331, R. 2.)
205. The Passive Voice denotes that the subject receives the
action of the Verb.
The instrument is put in the Ablative.
Virgis caeditur, He is beaten with rods.
The agent is put in the Ablative with ab (a).
A patre caeditur, He is beaten by (his) father.
Remarks. — 1. Intransitive verbs of Passive signification are construed as Passives :
fame" perire, to perish of hunger.
Ab reo fustibus vapulavit. Quint. He was whacked with cudgels by the defendant.
2. When the instrument is considered as an agent, or the agent as an instrument, the
constructions are reversed :
Vinci a Voluptate, to be overcome by Pleasure. Cic.
Poeno mllite portas frangimus. Juv. We break down the gates with the Punic
soldiery (as if with a battering-ram).
Animals, as independent agents, are treated like Persons.
A cane non magno saepe ten6tur aper. Ov. A boar is often held fast by a little
dog.
YOICBS. 125
Animals, as instruments, are treated like Things.
Equ5 vehi, to ride a horse (to be borne by a horse) ; in equo, on horseback.
206. The person in whose interest an action is done is put
in the Dative. Hence, the frequent inference that the person
interested is the agent.
With the Perfect Passive it is the natural inference, and com-
mon in prose.
Res mini tota provisa est. Cic. I have had the whole thing provided
for.
Carmina scripta mihi sunt nulla. Ov. Poems — I have none written (I
have written no poems).
With the Gerundive it is the necessary inference, and the
Dative is the reigning combination.
Nihil est homini tarn timendum quam invidia. Cic. There is nothing
that one has to fear to the same extent as envy. See 352.
207. The Direct Object of the Active Verb (the Accusative
Case) becomes the Subject of the Passive.
Alexander Darium vicit, Alexander conquered Darius.
Darius ab Alexandra victus est, Darius was conquered ly Alexander.
208. The Indirect Object of the Active Verb (Dative Case)
| cannot be properly used as the Subject of the Passive. The
Dative remains unchanged, and the verb becomes a Passive in
the Third Person Singular (Impersonal Verb). This Passive
form may have a neuter subject corresponding to the Inner
object. (331, E. 2.)
Active : Miserl invident bonis, The wretched envy the icell-to-do.
Passive : mihi invidetur, I am envied,
tibi invidetur, thou art envied,
ei invidetur, he is envied,
nobis invidetur, we are envied,
vobis invidetur, you are envied,
iis invidetur, they are envied,
ab aliquo, by some one.
Nihil facile persuadetur invitis. Quint. People are not easily per-
suaded of anything against their will.
Anulls nostris plus quam animis creditur. Sen. Our seals are more
trusted than our souls.
i
12 G TENSES.
Remark.— The same rule applies to Genitive and Ablative. The poets are more free
in imitation of the Greek. Cur invideor % Hon. for Cur invidetur mihi ? Wliy am
1 envied ?
209. Reflexive relations, when emphatic, are expressed as in
English :
Omne animal se ipsum diligit. Cic. Every living creature loves itself.
But when the reflexive relation is more general, the Passive
is employed :
Lavor, I bathe, I bathe myself.
Purgari nequiverunt. Liv. They could not clear themselves.
Curabar propriis aeger Fodalirius herbis. Ov. A sick Podalirius, 1
was trying to cure myself by my own herbs.
210. As the Active in all languages is often used to express
what the subject suffers or causes to be done, so the Passive in
Latin in its reflexive sense is often used to express an action
which the subject suffers or causes to be done to itself: trailer,
I let myself be dragged ; tondeor, I have myself shaved.
Ipse docet quid agam ; fas est et ab hoste doceri. Ov. He himself
teaches {me) what to do ; it is (but) right to let oneself be taught even by an
enemy (to take a lesson from a foe).
211. The Deponent is a Passive form which has lost, in most
instances, its Passive (or Reflexive) signification. It is commonly
translated as a Transitive or Intransitive Active: hortor, / am
exhorting (Trans.) ; morior, I am dying (Intrans.).
212. Reciprocal relations ("one another") are expressed by
inter, among, and the Personal Pronouns, nos, us ; vos, you ; se,
themselves : Inter se amant, They love one another.
TENSES.
213. The Tenses express the relations of time, embracing :
1. The stage of the action (duration in time).
2. The period of the action (position in time).
The first tells whether the action is going on, or finished,.
The second tells whether the action is past, prese?it, or future.
Both these sets of relations are expressed by the tenses of the
Indicative or Declarative mood — less clearly by the Subjunctive.
TABLE OF TEMPORAL RELATIONS.
127
214. There are six tenses in Latin :
1. The Present, denoting continuance in the present
2. The Future, denoting continuance in the future.
3. The Imperfect, denoting continuance in the past
4. The Perfect, denoting completion in the present.
5. The Future Perfect, denoting completion in the future.
6. The Pluperfect, denoting completion in the past.
215. An action may further be regarded simply as attained,
without reference to its continuance or completion. Continuance
and completion require a point of reference for definition ; at-
tainment does not. This gives rise to the aoristic or indefinite
stage of the action, which has no especial tense-form. It is
expressed by the Present tense for the present; by the Future
and Future Perfect tenses for the future ; and by the Perfect
tense for the past.
Of especial importance is the Indefinite or Historical Perfect
(Aorist), which differs materially in syntax from the Definite or
Pure Perfect.
216. The Tenses are divided into Principal and Historical.
The Principal Tenses have to do with the Present and Future.
The Historical Tenses have to do with the Past.
The Present, Pure Perfect, Future, and Future Perfect are
Principal Tenses.
The Imperfect, Pluperfect, and Historical Perfect are Histor-
ical Tenses.
Remark. — The Historical Tenses are well embodied in the following distich :
Talia tentabat, sic et tentaverat ante,
Vixque d e d i t victas utilitate maniis. Ov.
217. Table of Temporal Relations.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
Continuance.
Present : scribo,
I am writing.
Future : scribam,
I shall be writing.
pAST : scribebam,
I was writing.
ACTIVE.
Completion.
scrips!,
I have written.
scripsero,
I shall have written.
scrips er am,
I had written.
[Attainment.
scribo,
Iiorite.
scribam (scripsero),
I shall write.
scrips!,
I wrote^\
128
PRESENT.
Continuance.
PASSIVE.
Completion.
seripta est,
has been written,
is written,
Attainment.
scrlbitur,
is written.
scribetur,
will be written.
seripta est,
was written.
Present: scrlbitur (epistola),
The letter is written,
(writing)^
Future : scribetur, seripta erit,
The letter will be written, will ham been,
{icriting), will be written,
Past : scribebatur, seripta erat,
The letter teas written, had been written,
{writing), was written,
Remark. — The English Passive is ambiguous. The same form is currently used for
continuance, attainment, and completion. The context alone can decide. A convenient
test is the substitution of the Active.
r Continuance, Some one was writing a letter.
A letter was written • ) Completion, Some one had written a letter.
( Attainment, Some one wrote a letter.
£5^ The detailed consideration of the Tenses may be omitted by the beginner.
Present Tense.
218. The Present Tense is used as in English of that which
is going on now (Specific Present), and of statements that apply
to all time (Universal Present).
Specific Present :
Auribus tened lupum. Ter. lam holding the wolf by the ears.
Universal Present :
Probitas laudatur et alget. Juy. Honesty is bepraised and freezes.
Remarks.— 1. The Specific Present is often to be translated by the English Progress-
ive Present. The Universal Present is Aoristic, true at any point.
2. As continuance involves the notion of incompleteness the Present is used of at-
tempted and intended action (Present of Endeavor). But on account of the double use of
the Present this signification is less prominent and less important than in the Imperfect.
Do not mistake the Endeavor which lies in the Verb for the Endeavor which lies in the
Tense. So in the traditional example :
Quintus frater Tusculanum venditat. Cic. Brother Quintus is " trying to sell" his
Tusculan villa : venditare itself means to offer for sale. Translate: intends to offer for
sale, if the notion lies in the Tense.
3. The ambiguity of our English Passive often suggests other translations. Use and
Wont make Law ; hence, the frequent inference that what is done is what ought to be
done ; what is nor, done is not to be done.
(Deusj nee bene promeritis capitur, nee tangitur Ira. Lucr. God is not to be in-
veigled by good service, ?ior touched by anger.
IMPERFECT. 129
219. The Present Tense is used more rarely than in English
in anticipation of the future, chiefly in compound sentences:
Si vincimus, omnia tuta erunt. Sall. If we conquer (= shall conquer),
everything will be safe.
Antequam ad sententiam redeo de me pauca dicam. CiC. Before 1
return to the subject, I id ill say a few things of myself.
Exspectabo dum ille venit. Ter. I will wait all the time that he is
coming, or, until he comes.
220. The Present Tense is used far more frequently than in
English, as a lively representation of the %>ast (Historical Pres-
ent) :
Romam proficiscitur. Sall. He sets out for Borne.
Maturat proficisci. Caes. He hastens to depart.
Remark.— Dum, while, commonly takes the Historical Present : Bum haec in col-
loquio geruntur, Caesari nuntiatum est. Caes. While these things were transacting
in the conference, word was brought to Caesar. Dum, so long as, follows the ordinary law.
(See 566.)
221. The Present is used in Latin of actions that are con-
tinned into the present, especially with jam, now ; jam diu, now
I for a long time ; jam prldem, now long since. In English we
often translate by a Progressive Perfect.
Mithridates annum jam tertium et vicesimum regnat. CiC. Mithri-
daies has been reigning now going on ttoenty-three years.
Liberare vos a Philipp5 jam dm magis vultis quam audetis. Lrv*.
You have this long time had the wish rather than (= though, not) the courage
to deliver yourself from Philip.
Imperfect Tense.
222. The Imperfect Tense denotes Continuance in the Past :
pugnabam, I was fighting.
The Imperfect is employed to represent manners, customs,
1 situations ; to describe and to particularize.
The Imperfect and the Historical Perfect serve to illustrate
one another. The Imperfect dwells on ihe process ; the His-
torical Perfect states the result. The Imperfect counts out the
1 items ; the Historical Perfect gives the sum.
223. The two tenses are often so combined that the general
130 PERFECT.
statement is given by the Historical Perfect, the particulars of
the action by the Imperfect : •
Verres in forum venit ; ardebant oculi ; tot5 ex ore crudelitas
eminebat. Cic. Verres came into the forum, his eyes were blazing, cruelty
teas standing out from his whole countenance.
224. The Imperfect is used of attempted and interrupted,
infolded and expected actions (Imperfect of Endeavor). It is
the Tense of Disappointment and (with the negative) of Eesist-
ance to Pressure. (Mere negation is regularly Perfect.)
Curiam relinquebat. Tac. He was for leaving the senate-house.
Postumius dedebatur. Cic. Postumius was to be given up.
Lex abrogabatur. Liv. The law teas to be abrogated.
Oreum et Eretriam Eumeni dabant : senatus libertatem his clvitatibus
dedit. Liv. They were for giving Oreus and Eretria to Eumenes ; the senate
gave these cities liberty.
Curabar propriis aeger Podalirius herbis. Ov. (206.)
Aditum non dabat. Nep. He would not grant access (dedit, did not).
Remarks.— 1. The Imperfect as the Tense of Evolution is a Tense of Vision. But
in English, Imperfect and Historical Perfect coincide ; hence the various translations to
put the reader in the place of the spectator.
2. The continuance is in the mind of the narrator ; it has nothing to do with the ab-
solute duration of the action. The mind may dwell on a rapid action or hnrry over a
Blow one. With definite numbers, however large, the Historical Perfect must be used,
unless there is a notion of continuance into another stage (overlapping).
Gorgias centum et novem annos vixit- Quint. Gorgias lived 109 years.
3. As the Tense of Disappointment, the Imperfect of such verbs as d§bere, to owe,
posse, to be able, is sometimes used in a modal sense. (246, R. 2.)
225. The Imperfect is used as the English Progressive Plu-
perfect : especially with jam, jam diu, jam dudum.
Jam dudum tibi adversabar. Plaut. Iliad long been opposing you.
Remark.— As the Historical Present is used in lively narrative, so the Historical Infin-
itive is used in lively description, parallel with the Imperfect. (649.)
Perfect Tense.
226. The Perfect Tense has two distinct uses :
1. Pure Perfect. 2. Historical Perfect (Aorist).
1. PURE PERFECT.
227. The Pure Perfect Tense expresses completion in the
Present, and hence is sometimes called the Present Perfect.
PERFECT. 131
The Pure Perfect looks at both ends of an action, and the
time between is regarded as a Present. The Historical Present
looks at but one end; or, rather, beginning and end are one.
228. The Pure Perfect is used :
1. Of an action that is over and gone.
Filium unicum habso, imo habul. Ter. I have an only son — nay, I
have had an only son.
Tempora quid faciunt : hanc volo, te volui. Ov. What difference times
make ! I want her — 1 wanted yo u.
2. Far more frequently of the present result of a more remote
action : Eesulting condition.
Equum et milium Brundisii tibi reliqui. Cic. I have left a horse and
mule for you at Brundusium — (they are still there).
Perdidi spem qua me oblectabam. Plaut. I've lost the hope with
which I entertained myself.
Actum est, perlsti. Ter. It is all over ; you're undone.
Remark.— The Pure Perfect is often translated by the English Present : novi, I have
becom.e acquainted with, I know ; memini, I have recalled, 1 remember ; odi, I have con-
ceived a hatred of , I hate ; consuSvi, I have made it a rule, 1 am accustomed. This is
due to the inchoative character of the Present form.
Oderunt hilarem tristes tristemque jocosi. Hon. The long-faced hate the lively
man, the jokers hate the long-faced man.
229. As the Present stands for the Future, so the Perfect
stands for the Future Perfect.
Brutus si conservatus erit, vicimus. Cic. Brutus! — if he is saved, we
are victorious, we (shall) have gained the victory.
Otia si tollas, periere Cupldinis arcus. Ov. (195, R. 6.)
230. Habeo or teneo, I hold, I have, with the Accusative of
the Perfect Participle Passive, is not a mere circumlocution for
the Perfect, but lays peculiar stress on the maintenance of the
result.
Habeo statutum, I have resolved, and hold to my resolution.
Habeo perspectum, I have 'perceived, and I have full insight.
Excusatum habeas me rogo, ceno domi. Mart. I pray you have me
excused, I dine at home.
Remark.— On the Iterative Perfect, see 569,
132 FUTURE.
2. HISTORICAL PERFECT.
231. The Historical or Indefinite Perfect (Aorist) states a
past action, without reference to its duration, simply as a thing
attained.
Veni, vidi, vici. Suet. I came, saw, overcame*
Milo domum venit, calceos et vestimenta mutavit, paulisper com-
moiatus est. Cic. JMilo came home, changed shoes and garments, tarried a
little while.
Gorgias centum et novem vixit annos. Quint. Gorgias lived 109
years.
232. The Historical Perfect is the great narrative tense of
the Latin language, and is best studied in long connected pas-
sages, and by careful comparison with the Imperfect.
Pluperfect Tense.
233. The Pluperfect denotes Completion in the Past, and is
used of an action that was completed before another was begun.
It is, so to speak, the Perfect of the Imperfect. Hence it is used :
1. Of an action that is over and gone.
Putaram, Iliad thought (before such and such a thing happened).
2. Of a Resulting Condition.
Massilienses portas Caesari clauserant. Caes. The Marseillese had
shut their gates against Caesar. {Their gates were shut.)
Remarks.— 1. When the Perfect of resulting Condition is translated by an English
Present (228 R.), the Pluperfect is translated by an English Imperfect : noveram, / had
become acquainted with, I knew ; memineram, / remembered ; oderam, / hated • con-
sueveram, I was accustomed.
2. The Periphrastic Pluperfect with habeo corresponds to the Perfect. (230.)
3. On the Iterative Pluperfect, see 569.
Future Tense.
234. The Future Tense denotes Continuance in the Future ,
scrlbam, I shall be writing.
The Future Tense is also used to express indefinite action in
the Future : scrlbam, / shall write.
Remarks. — 1. In subordinate clauses the Latin language is more exact than the En-
glish in the expression of future relations.
Donee eris fglix, multos numerabis amicSs. Ov. So long as you shall be (are)
happy, you will count many friends,
FUTURE PERFECT. 133
Quidquid e r i s, mea semper eris. Ov. Whatever you shall be (are), you will al-
ways be mine own.
2. Observe especially the verbs volo, I will, and possum, 1 can.
Odero si p o t e r o ; si non, in Vitus amabo. Ov. I will hate if I shall be able (can) ;
if not, I shall love against my tuill.
Si qua volet regnare diu, deludat amantem. Ov. She who shall wish to queen
it long must fool her lover.
235. The Future is used in an imperative sense, as in English,
chiefly in familiar language.
I
Tu nihil dices. Hor. You sliall, are to, say nothing {do you say nothing).
Quum volet accedes, quum te vitabit abibis. Ov. When she wants you>
approacJi ; and when she avoids you, begone, sir.
Future Perfect Tense.
. 236. The Future Perfect is the Perfect, both Pure and His-
torical, transferred to the future, and embraces both completion
and attainment : fecero, I sliall have clone it, or / sliall do it
(once for all); videro, I ivill see to it; profecerit, it will prove
profitable.
Remarks— 1. Hence, when the Perfect is used as a Present, the Future Perfect is used
as a Future :
Novero, I shall know ; consuevero, 1 shall be accustomed ; Odero, si potero. Ov.
(234, R. 2.)
2. In subordinate sentences, the Latin language is more exact than the English in the
use of the Future Perfect.
When one action precedes another in the future, the action that precedes is expressed
by the Future Perfect.
Qui prior strinxerit ferrum, ejus victoria erit. Liv. Who first draws the
1 sword, his shall be the victory.
3. The Future Perfect is frequently used in volo, / will ; nolo, I will not ; possum,
" I can ; licet, it is left free ; libet, it is agreeable ; placet, it is the pleasure ; whereas the
"English idiom familiarly employs the Present.
Si p o t u e r o, faciam vobis satis. Cic. If lean, I shall satisfy you.
4. The Future Perfect in both clauses denotes simultaneous accomplishment or attain-
ment ; one action involves the other.
Qui Marcum Antonium oppresserit, is bellum confecerit. Cic. He who
shall have crushed (crushes) Marie Antony, will have finished (will finish) the tvar.
Ea vitia qui fugerit, is omnia fere* vitia vitaverit- Cic. He who shall have es-
caped these faults, will have avoided almost all faults.
Sometimes, however, the first seems to denote antecedence, the second finality. An
Imperative is often used in the first clause.
Immuta verborum collocationem, perierit tota r5s. Cic. Change the arrange-
ment of the words, the whole thing falls dead.
237. As the Future is used as an Imperative, so the Future
Perfect approaches the Imperative.
De hoc tu ipse videris. Cic. You may see to that yourself hereafter
134: PERIPHRASTIC TENSES.
Periphrastic Tenses.
238. The Periphrastic Tenses are formed by combining the
various tenses of esse, to be, with participles and verbal ad-
jectives.
I. PERIPHRASTIC CONJUGATION— ACTIVE VOICE.
239. The Periphrastic Tenses of the Active are chiefly com-
binations of esse and its forms with the so-called Future Par-
ticiple Active. The Future Participle is a verbal adjective
denoting capability and tendency. Compare amator and amS,-
turus. The translation is very various:
1. Scripturus sum, lam about to write, I am to write, I purpose to write,
I am likely to write.
2. Scripturus eram, I was about to write, etc.
3. Scripturus fui, I7iave been or was about to write (often = I should have
icritten).
4. Scripturus fueram, Iliad been about to lorite, etc.
5. Scripturus ero, I shall be about to write, etc.
6. Scripturus fuero, 7" shall have made up my mind to write, etc. (of
course very rare).
1. Bellum scripturus sum quod populus Romanus cum Jugurtha
gessit. Sall. I purpose to write the history of the war which the Roman
people carried on with Jugurtha.
- 2. Rex non interfuturus navall certamini erat. Lrv. The king did not
intend to be present at the naval combat.
3. Cato qua nocte periturus fuit legit. Sen. Goto read on the night
when he was about to die (kill himself).
Deditos ultimis cruciatibus aflfecturi fuerunt. Liv. They would have
put the surrendered to extreme tortures.
4. Major Romanorum gratia fuit quam quanta Carthaginiensium fu-
tiira fuerat. Lrv. The Romans' credit for this was greater than tlie Cartha-
ginians' would liave been.
5. Plus mini detracturus ero, quam ill! collaturus. Sen. / shall in all
likelihood take away more from myself than I shall bestow on him.
6. Sapiens non vivet, si fuerit sine nomine victurus. Sen. The wise
man will not continue to live, if he finds that he is to live without human
Remark.— The Subjunctives and Infinitives, scripturus sim, essem, fuerim, scrip-
tiirum esse, and scripturum fuisse, are of great importance in dependent discourse.
PERIPHRASTIC TENSES. 135
II. PERIPHRASTIC TENSES OF THE PASSIVE.
A.— Of Future Relations.
240. The following periphrases are used both in Active and
^ssive, but more frequently in the Passive.
1. Futurum est, it is to be, \
erat, ) > ut, t7iaty with the subjunctive.
erat, )
fuit, \w™t°Wt
This circumlocution is used :
1. Rarely in the Indicative.
2. Often in the Infinitive, and necessarily so, when the verb forms no
iiipine or Future Participle :
j ut metuas, that you will fear.
Futurum esse (fore), ( ut metuariSj that you will be feared.
In the Passive it is more common than the Supine with Iri.
Spero fore ut contingat id nobis. Cic. I hope that we shall have that
ood fortune.
In fatis script urn Vejentes habebant fore ut brevi a Gallis Roma
aperetur. Cic. The Vdentes had it written down in their prophetic books
hat Rome would shortly be taken by the Gauls.
| Remarks. — 1. Fore ut ... is used chiefly with Present and Imperfect Subjunctive;
'erf. and Pluperf. are very rare. Cic. ad Att. xvi. 16 E. 16.
2. The form futurum fuisse ut . . . is used with Passive and Supineless verbs, to ex-
ress the dependent apodosis of an unreal conditional sentence.
Nisi eo ipso tempore nuntil de Caesaris victoria essent allati, existimabant
ilerique futurum fuisse ut oppidum amitteretur. Caes. (662.)
3. Posse, to be able, and velle, to will, on account of their future sense, do not require
periphrasis. In the absence of periphrastic forms, the forms of posse are often used
hstead. (659.)
4. The Subjunctive forms futurum sit, esset, fuerit, ut . . . are used in the gram-
aars to supply the periphrastic subjunctive of Passive and Supineless verbs. (See 512,11. 2.)
Warrant in real usage is scarce.
An utique futurum sit ut Carthaginem superent Roman! % Quint. I. O.
II. 8. 7. (not merely periphrastic).
241. 2. In eoest, it is on the point, 1 J7 . , ... .., ,.
' \ I tit, that (of), with the
f . ' \ teas (Impersonal), | subjunctive.
In e5 erat ut Pausanias comprehend ere tur. Nep. It was on the point
that Pausanias should be (P. was on the point of) being arrested*
Remark. — This phrase occurs in Nepos and Livy, seldom in earlier writers.
136 TENSES IN LETTERS.
B.—Of Past Relations.
242. The Perfect Participle Passive is used in combination with sum
lam, and fui, I have been, I was, to express the Pure Perfect and Historical
Perfect of the Passive Voice. Eram, I was, and fueram, I had been, stand
for the Pluperfect ; and ero, I shall be, and fuero, I shall have been, for the
Future Perfect.
Re3iap.k.— Fui i? the favorite form when the participle is frequently used as an ad-
jective: convivium exoruatum fuit, the banquet was furnished forth ; fui is the
necessary form when the Perfect denotes that the action is over and gone : amatus fui, i I
lhave been loved (but I am loved no longer). The same principle applies to fueram and;
fuero. though not so regularly.
Simulacrum e mar more in sepulcro positum fuit; hoc quldam homo no
bilis deportavit. Cic. A marble effigy was deposited in the tomb ; a certain man of ran
has carried it off.
Arma quae fixa in parietibus fuerant, huml inventa sunt. Cic. The
arms which had been fastened to the walls v: ere found on the ground.
Nee mater fuero dicta nee orba diu. Ov. I shall not have been called mother nor
childless long.
C. — Periphrastic Conjugation — Passive Voice.
243. The combination of the Tenses of esse, to be, with th
Gerundive (verbal in -ndus), is called the Periphrastic Conjuga-
tion of the Passive, and follows the laws of the simple conjuga
tion. (See 150.)
Remarks.— 1. The Gerundive has the form of a Present Participle Passive, (-ndus
for -ntus). Whenever a participle is used as a predicate it becomes characteristic, anc
good for all time. Compare 439, R.
As amans not only = qui amat, but also = qui amet, so amandus = qui amStur
2. The Gerundive follows the law (205), and can be formed only from verbs that take
the accusative. Otherwise the Impersonal form must be used.
Parcendum est victls. The vanquished must be spared.
TEXSES m LETTERS.
244. The Eoman letter-writer not unfrequently puts him-
self in the position of the receiver, more especially at the begin-
ning and at the end of the letter, often in the phrase Nihil eral
quod scrlberem, "I have nothing to write." This permutation of
tenses is never kept up long, and applies only to temporary situ
ations, never to general statements.
Table of Permutations.
scribo,
scrips!,
*cribam,
I am writing, ) becomes
scribebam,
:
I write, [
scripsL
lhave written, \
I wrote, )
scripseram,
:
scripseram,
or remains unchanged.
I shall write,
scripturus eram.
'
MOODS. 137
The adverbial designations of time remain unchanged — or
Heri, yesterday , becomes pridie.
hodie, to-day, u quo die has litteras dedi, dab am,
eras, to-morrow, " poster5 die, postridie.
Formias me continue recipere cogitabam, Cic. lam thinking <rf re-
tiring forthwith to Formiae.
Quiim mihi Oaecilius dixisset puerum se Romammittere, haec scrips!
raptim. Cic. As GmcUius has told me that he is sending a servant to Borne,
I write in a hurry.
Litteras eram daturus postridie el qui mihi primus obviam venisset,
Cic. I will give the letter to-morrow to the first man that comes my way.
Moods.
245. Mood signifies manner. The mood of a verb signifies
the manner in which the predicate is said of the subject.
There are three moods in Latin :
1. The Indicative.
2. The Subjunctive.
3. The Imperative.
Kehap.k.— The Infinitive form of the verb is generally, but improperly, called a mood.
The Indicative Mood.
246. The Indicative Mood represents the predicate as a
reality. It is sometimes called the Declarative Mood, as the
mood of direct assertion.
The use of the Latin Indicative differs little from the English.
IT
The beginner may omit the Remarks.
Rbjcahks. — 1. The LatiD language expresses possibility andpoicer. obligation and nt
r.d abstract relations generally, Bsfacts ; whereas, onr translation often implies the
iodize. Such expressions are : debeo. I aught. :': / oportet. U he*
: necesse est. it is <://" :v~. 'leoes-sary : possum, I can. I have it in my power
convenit. it is fitting ; par. aequuni est. it is fair / infinitum, endless : difficile
; longum. tedious; and the Indicative form of the Passive Periphrastic Gonjaga-
ion
Possum persequi multa oblectamenta rerumrusticarum. Cic. Imight rehi
i 0":"-
Longum est utilitates persequi asinorum. Cic, I: i:::d:7 :-: :,:' 'ear-se
' ' (I qua. :'"':'.; f as*cs .J vail not do it).
Ad mortem te duci oportebat. Cic. It behooved you to I you were
not . : ou ought to have been ted of.
Volumnia debuit in te ofneiosior esse, et id ipsum. quod fecit, potuit
facere diligentius. Cic. It was Volumnia's duty to be V. ought to have be-.
: and :':-: .0:0 she aid do ..sle r.;:d it in her power to dO\ she might have done
vxore car-:; .
138
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
Quae condicio non accipienda fuit potius quam patria relinquenda % Cic
What terms ought not to have been accepted in preference to leaving thy country f
Nil mini debuerat cum versibus amplius esse. Ov. Naught more should
have had (ere then) to do with verses.
The Perfect and Pluperfect always refer to a special case.
2. The Imperfect, as the Tense of Disappointment is sometimes used in these verbs t<
denote opposition to a present state of things : debebam, I ought (but do not) ; poteras
you could (but do not;. These may be considered as conditionals in disguise. (See R. 3.)
Poteram morbos appellare, sed non convenlret ad omnia. Cic. I might tram
late (that Greek word") "diseases" but that would not suit all the cases. (Poteram si con
veniret-)
At poteras, inquis, melius mala ferre silendo. Ov. "But," you say, "yo
could (you do not) bear your misfortunes better by keeping silent" (Poteras si sileres.)
3. The Indicative is sometimes used in the leading clause of conditional sentences (th
Apodosis), thereby implying the certainty of the result, had it not been for the interrup
tion.
The Indicative clause generally precedes, which is sufficient to show the rhetoric
character of the construction.
With the Imperfect the action is often really begun :
Labebar longius. nisi me retinuissem. Cic. I was letting myself go on (should ha
let myself go on) too far, had I not checked myself.
Omnlno erat supervacua doctrlna, si natura sufficeret. Quint. Trainir
were wholly superfluous, did nature suffice.
Praeclarg viceramus, nisi Lepidus recepisset Antonium. Cic. We had (shou
have) gained a brilliant victory, had not Lepidus received Antony.
In all these sentences the English idiom requires the Subjunctive, which is disguis<
by coinciding with the Indicative in form except in '- were."
4. In general relative expressions, such as the double formations, quisquis, no matt
who, quotquot, no matter how many, and all forms in -cunque, -ever, the Indicative
employed where we may use in English a Subjunctive or its equivalent : quisquis es
no matter who he is, be, may be • qualecunque est, whatever sort of thing it is, be, m<
be.
Quid quid id est, timeo Danaos et dona ferentes. Virg. Whatever it (ma\
be, I fear the Danai even when they bring presents.
Subjunctive Mood.
247. The Subjunctive Mood represents the predicate as m
idea, as something merely conceived in the mind (abstract
from reality).
Remark.— The Latin Subjunctive is often translated into English by the auxilhj
verbs may, can, must, might, could, would, should. When these verbs have their f
signification of possibility and power, obligation and necessity ; they are represented
Latin by the corresponding verbs: may, can, might, could, by the forms of posse, to
able, licet, it is left free ; will and would, by velle, to will, to be willing / must, by deb
oroportet (of moral obligation), by necesse est (of absolute obligation).
Nostras injtirias nee potest nee possit alius ulcisci quam v5s. Liv. Ourwroi
no other than you has the power or can well have the power to avenge. Here potest gi
the simple affirmation, possit, the moral conviction of the speaker.
248. The realization of the idea may be in suspense, or
may be beyond control. The first, or purely Ideal Subjunctr
POTENTIAL SUBJUNCTIVE. 139
is represented by the Present and Perfect Tenses ; the second,
or Unreal, is represented by the Imperfect and Pluperfect.
Remarks. — 1. The Subjunctive, as the name implies (subjungo, I subjoin), is largely
used in dependent sentences, and will be treated at length in that connection.
2. The following modifications of the above principles must be carefully observed :
A. The Romans, in lively discourse, often represent the unreal as ideal, that which is
beyond control as still in suspense. (598, R. 2.)
B. In transfers to the past, the Imperfect represents the Present, and the Pluperfect
tfitthe Perfect Subjunctive. (510.)
!/( \ 249. The idea may be a view, or a wish. Hence the division of the
Subjunctive into the Potential aud the Optative. The Potential Subjunc-
tive is nearer the Indicative, from which it differs in tone ; the Optative
Subjunctive is nearer the Imperative, for which it is often used.
The beginner may omit to 259.
POTENTIAL SUBJUNCTIVE.
250. The Potential Subjunctive represents the opinion of the
speaker as an opinion. The tone varies from vague surmise to
3li!moral certainty, from "may" and "might" to "must." The
negative is the negative of the Indicative non.
The Potential of the Present or Future is the Present or
Perfect Subjunctive. The verification is in suspense, and so
ieifuture; the action may be present or future : with Perfect some-
times Past.
i"" Velim, I should wish; nolim, I should be unwilling ; malim, I should.
vrefer ; dicas, you would say ; ere das, you would believe, you must believe ;
iicat, dlxerit aliquis, some one may undertake to say, go so far as to say.
Caedi discipul5s minime velim. Quint. I should by no means like
S (pupils to be flogged.
K Tu Flatonem nee nimis valde unquam nee nimis saepe laudaveris.
Die. You canH praise Plato too much nor too often.
251. The Mood of the Question is the Mood of the expected
or anticipated answer (464). Hence the Potential Subjunctive
is used in questions which serve to convey a negative opinion on
Wi ;1 t part of the speaker.
Quis dubitet(=: nemo dubitet) q u I n in virtute divitiae sint ? CiC.
JVho can doubt that there is wealth in virtue f (No one).
Quis tulerit Gracchos de seditione querentes? Juv. Who could
hear the Gracchi complaining of rebellion ? (No one).
Apud exercitum fueris ? Cic. You were with the army?
I
140 OPTATIVE SUBJUNCTIVE.
252. The Potential of the Past is the Imperfect Subjunctive,
chiefly in the Ideal Second Person, an imaginary " you."
Statement :
i
Crederes victos. You icould, might, have thought them beaten.
Haud facile decerneres utrum Hannibal imperatori an exerci-
tui carior esset. Liv. Not readily could you have decided 'whether Hannibal
was dearer to general or to army.
Miraretur qui turn cerneret. Liv. Any one who saw it then must have
been astonished.
Vellem, I should have wished ; nollem, I should have been unwilling ;
mallem, I should have preferred (it is too late).
Question :
Hoc tantum bellum quis unquam arbitraretur ab uno imperatore con- J°
fici posse ? Cic. Who would, could, should have thought that this great way
could be brought to a close by one general ?
Remarks.— 1. The Potential Subjunctive is sometimes explained by the ellipsis of ar
Ideal or of an Unreal Conditional Protasis. But the free Potential Subjunctive differ
from an elliptical conditional sentence in the absence of definite ellipsis, and hence a
definite translation. Compare the first two sentences above with :
Eum qui palam est adversarius facile cavendo (si caveas) vitare possls. Cic
An open adversary you can readily avoid by caution {if you are cautious).
Nil ego contulerim jucundo sanus (= dum sanus ero) amico. Hob. There i
naught 1 should compare to an agreeable friend, while I am in my sound senses.
2. The Unreal of the Present and the Ideal of the Past coincide. What is unreal of
real person is simply ideal of an imaginary person. The Imperfect is used as the tens
of Description.
The Aoristic Perfect Subj. is rarely used as the Ideal of the Past.
3. The Potential Subjunctive, as a modified form of the Indicative, is often foun
whei e the Indicative would be the regular construction. So after quanquam (603, R. 1
OPTATIVE SUBJUNCTIVE.
253. The Subjunctive is used as an Optative or wisliin
mood.
w
V
,J 3
The regular negative is ne. N5n is used chiefly to negative a singl
word.
The Present and Perfect Subjunctive are used when the decision is
suspense, no matter how extravagant the wish ; the Imperfect and Plv
perfect are used when the decision is adverse. The Perfect is rare and old.| ^
Stet haec urbs. Cic. May this city continue to stand!
Di faxint = fecerint. I1 he gods grant !
Ne istuc Juppiter optimus maximus sirit ( s= siverit) ! Lrv. May Jiq
ter, supremely great and good, suffer it not !
254. The Optative Subjunctive frequently takes XJtinam, uf
nam ne, utinam non — in poetry also 0 si, Oh if.
OPTATIVE SUBJUNCTIVE. 141
Utinam modo conata efficere p o s s im. Cic. May I but have it in my
v>wer to accomplish my endeavors.
Utinam reviviscat frater ! Gell. Would that my brother would come to
\fe again !
Utinam inserere jocos m5ris esset. Quint. Would that it were usual
? introduce jokes/
jjj B Illud utinam ne vere scrlberem. Cic. Would that what lam writing
iere not true !
Utinam susceptus n5n e s s e m. Cic. Would I had not been born !
O mihi praeteritos referat si Juppiter annos. Verg. 0 if Jove
a oere to bring me back the years that are gone by !
Remarks. — 1. Utinam was originally an interrogative, How, pray? and belongs
artly to the potential. 6 SI is an elliptical conditional sentence, which is not intended
., p have an Apodosis. When the Apodosis comes, it may come in a different form. So in
ae example. Verg. Aen. viii. 560, 568.
2. For the wish with adverse decision vellem, mallem, and nollem are often used
rith Imperf. and Pipf. Subj.
Veileni adesse posset Panaetius. Cic. Would that Panaetius could be present !
Nollem dixlssem. Cic. Would that 1 had not said it !
So velim, nolim, etc., for the simple wish (546, It. 3).
255. The Optative Subjunctive is used in asseverations :
Ita v i v a m ut maximos sumptns facio. Cic. As I live, I am spending
ery largely (literally, so may I live as 1 am making very great outlay).
256. The Subjunctive is used as an Imperative —
1. In the First Person, which has no Imperative form: .
j Amemus patriam. Cic. Let us love our country.
Ne difficilia optemus. Cic. Let us not desire what is hard to do.
2. In the Second Person— In the Present chiefly of an imagi-
nary "you."
Utare, you may use it; ne requiras, you must not pine for it.
In the Perfect negatively :
Ne transieris Hiberum. Liv. Do not cross the Ebro.
3. In the Third Person (regularly) :
ild \ Amet, let him love ; ne amet, let him not love. (See 265.)
257. The Subjunctive is used as a concessive:
Sit far. Cic. {Granted thai) he be a thief.
Fecerit, si ita vis. Cic. {Suppose) he have done it, if you will (have it so).
Other examples with ut and ne, see 606.
142 IMPERATIVE.
258. The Subjunctive is used in Questions which expect an
Imperative answer (conjunctlvus dellberatlvus).
Genuine questions are commonly put in the First Person or
the representative of the First Person :
Quid faciam ? roger anne rogem ? quid deinde rogabo ? Ov. What
shall I do ? shall I ask or be asked f what then shall I ask him f
Magna fuit contentio utrum moenibus se defenderent an obviam
irent hostibus. Nep. There was a great dispute lohether they should defend
themselves behind the walls or go to meet the enemy. (Utrum nos defendamus
an obviam eamus ?).
Ehetorical questions (questions which anticipate the answer),
under this head, are hardly to be distinguished from Potential.
Quo me nunc vertam ? Undique custodior. Cic. Whither shall T
now turn f Sentinels on every side.
Quid agerem ? Cic. What was I to do f
Imperative Mood.
259. The Imperative is the mood, of the will. It wills that
the predicate be made a reality. The tone of the Imperative
varies from stern command to piteous entreaty. It may appear
as a demand, an order, an exhortation, a permission, a prayer.
Abi in malam rem. Plaut. Go {to the mischief), and be hanged.
Compesce mentem. Hon. Curb your temper.
Da mini hoc, mel meum ! Plaut. Give me this, honey dear !
'■■■■i
'";
260. The Imperative has two forms, known as the First and
the Second Imperative. The First Imperative has only the «
Second person ; the Second Imperative has both Second and
Third persons. The First Person is represented by the Sub-
junctive.
Amemus patriam. Cic. Let us love our country.
Remark.— Some verbs have only the second form. This may be due to the signifi-
cation : so sclto, know thou ; memento, remember thou ; and habeto, in the sense of
know, remember.
261. The First Imperative looks forward to immediate fulfil-
ment (Absolute Imperative) :
Special : Patent portae ; proficiscere. Cic. Open stand the
gates ; depart.
c
c.
IMPERATIVE. 143
General: Justitiam cole et pietatem. Cic. Cultivate justice
md piety*
262. The Second Imperative looks forward to contingent ful-
ilment (Relative Imperative), and is chiefly used in laws, legal
Locuments, maxims, and the* like:
Regi5 imperio duo sunto, there shall be two {officers) with royal power.
Consules appellantor, they shall be called consuls.
I Nemini parento, they are to obey no one.
Illis salus populi suprema lex e s t o. Cic. To them the welfare of the
cople must be the paramount law.
] Rem vobis proponam : vos earn penditSte. Cic. I will propound the
latter to you : do you thereupon perpend it.
• Percontatoirem fugito, nam garrulus Idem est. Hon. Avoid your
uestioner^for he is a tell-tale too.
263. Negative of the Imperative. — The regular negative
f the Imperative is ne (neve, neu), which is found with the
Second Imperative ; with the First Imperative, in poetry only.
c Hominem mortuum in urbe neve sepelito neve urito, thou shalt not
tury nor burn a dead man in the city.
Impius ne audeto placare d5nis iram deSrum. Cic. The impious man
lust not dare attempt to appease by gifts the anger of the gods.
Tu ne cede malls, sed contra audentior Ito. Verg. Yield not thou to
lisf or tunes, but go more boldly (than ever) to meet them.
Remark. — Non may be used to negative a single word.
; A legibus non recedamus. Let us not recede from {let us stick to) the laws.
Opus poliat lima, non exterat. Quint. Let the file rub the work up, not rub it
i
264. Periphkases. — I. Cura ut, taJce care tliat ; fac ut, cause
hat ; fac, do, with the Subjunctive, are common circumlocutions
or the Positive Imperative.
Cura u t quam primum (317) venias. Cic. Manage to come as soon
possible.
Fac c5gites. Cic. Reflect !
II. Cave ne, leroare lest, and cave, with the subjunctive, and
oil, he unwilling, with the Infinitive, for the Negative Imperat-
ive (Prohibitive).
Cave festlnes. Cic. Do not be in a hurry.
144 IMPERATIVE.
Tantum quum finges n e sis manifesta c a v e 1 5. Ov. Only^ when you
pretend^ beicare that you be not detected.
Noli vexare, quiescit. Juv. Don' t disturb her ; she's sleeping.
265. Representatives of the Imperative. — Instead of
the Positive Imperative, may be employed :
1. The Second Person of the Future Indicative ;
2. The Third Person of the Present Subjunctive:
Facies, ut sciam, let me knoio ; vives, live on.
Quod quis habet dominae conferat omne suae. Ov. Let a man
give everything that he has to his lady-love.
Quaedam cum prima resecentur crimina barba. Juv. Let cer-
tain faults be clipped off with the sprouting beard.
266. Instead of the Negative Imperative (Prohibitive), may
be employed :
The Second Person of the Perfect Subjunctive, with n6.
The Second Person of the Future, with non.
The Third Person of the Present or Perfect Subjunctive, with
ne.
Hoc facito, hoc ne feceris. Cic. This do, that leave undone.
Non cessabis. Cic. You must not be idle.
Puer telum ne habeat. Cic. A boy is not to have a deadly weapon.
Ne metus quemquam ceperit. Liv. Let not fear seize any one.
Misericordia commotus ne sis. Cic. Don't let yourself be moved by pity.
Remarks. — 1. Non is often used in poetry forne, and neque, nee for neve, neu.
Aut non tentaris ant perfice. Ov. Either do not try (at all), or effect (your
object).
Nee, si quern falles, tu perjtirare timgto. Ov. Nor if you (shall try to) de-
ceive a man, do you fear to forswear yourself.
On the negative non with a single word, see 263 R. With the Perfect Subjunctive,
neque, nihil, nemo, nullus are freely used, as well as n6ve, neu, nequis, nequid.
2. The Present Subjunctive is employed when stress is laid on the continuance of the
action ; the Perfect, when stress is laid on the completion. Hence in total prohibitions,
the Perfect Subjunctive is the favorite form.
3. The Imperative of the Past is expressed by the Imperfect and Pluperfect Subjunc
tive (unfulfilled duties).
Dotem darStis ; alium quaereret virum. Ter. You should have given her a por-
tion ; she should have sought another match.
Cras Ir6s potius, hodie" hie ccmargs. Vale. Plaut. You ought rather to have
put off going till to-morrow, you ought to (have) dine(d) with us to-day. Good-bye. Any-
thing decided is regarded as past.
Ne" poposcissetis libros. Cic. You ought not to have asked for the books.
267. The Second Person Singular of the Present Subjunc^
TENSES OP MOODS AND VERBAL NOUNS. 145
tive is used both positively and negatively ; but in prose, only
of an imaginary subject ("you") :
Corporis viribus utare, dum adsint; cum absint ne requiras. Cic.
Enjoy your vigor of body while you have it ; when it is gone, you must not
pine for it.
268. Passionate questions are equivalent to a command :
Ndn taces ? tconH you hold your tongue? quin taces? why don't you
hold you tongue t
Cur non ut plenus vitae con viva recedis ? Lucr. Why do you not
withdraw as a guest sated with life f
269. SUMMARY OF IMPERATIVE CONSTRUCTIONS.
Positive.
2d P. Audi, hear thou ; audits (legal or contingent) ; audies (familiar) ;
audias (ideal 2d Person).
3d P. Audito (legal), let him hear ; audiat.
Negative.
2d P. Ne audi, hear not (poetic) ; ne audito (legal) ; n5n audies (fami-
liar) ; ne audias (ideal) ; ne audiveris \ noli audire.
3d P. Ne audito (legal), let him not hear ; ne audiat \ ne audiverit.
Tenses of the Moods and Verbal Nouns.
270. The Indicative alone expresses with, uniform directness
the period of time.
■rfn
271. 1. The Present and Imperfect Subjunctive have to do
| with continued action, the Perfect and Pluperfect with completed
action. The Perfect Subjunctive is also used to express the
attainment.
2. In simple sentences Present and Perfect Subjunctive post-
pone the ascertainment of the Predicate to the Future. The
action itself may be Present or Future for the Present Subjunc-
i tive; Present, Past, or Future for the Perfect Subjunctive.
Credat. He may believe (now or hereafter).
Crediderit. Let him have had the belief (heretofore), he may have come
to the belief (now), he may come to the belief (hereafter.)
3. In simple sentences the Imperfect and Pluperfect Subjunc-
7
116 TENSES OF MOODS AND YEKBAL NOUNS.
tive are Past Tenses. The notion of unreality lies in the past
tense, rather than in the Subjunctive Mood. Compare 243, E. 2.
4. In dependent sentences the Subjunctive is future if the
leading verb has a future signification ; otherwise the Subjunc-
tive represents the Indicative. The tense is regulated by the
law of sequence. (See 510.)
272. The Imperative is necessarily Future.
273. The Infinitive has two uses :
1. Its use as a Noun.
2. Its use as a representative of the Indicative.
274. 1. As a Noun, the Infinitive has twro tenses, Present and
Perfect.
The Present Infinitive has to do with continued action. It is
the common form of the Infinitive, used as a noun.
The Perfect Infinitive has to do with completed action, and
is also used to express attainment.
The Present Infinitive is used as a subject.
Valere est vita, Being well is life.
The Present Infinitive is used as the object of verbs of crea-
tion (Auxiliary Verbs, Verbs that help the Infinitive into being).
(424.)
Metui quam amari malo, I prefer being feared to being loved.
275. The Perfect Infinitive is comparatively little used as a
noun.
1. As a Subject, it is used chiefly in fixed expression or in
marked opposition to the Present.
Plus proderit demonstrasse rectam protinus viam quam r e-
vocare ab errore jam lapsos. Quint. It will be more profitable to have
pointed out the right path immediately than to recall from wandering those |
that have already gone astray.
Non tarn turpe fuit v i n c I quam contendisse decorum est. Ov.
' Twos not so much dishonor to be beaten as 'tis an honor to have struggled.
So by a kind of attraction with debuit, ought, decuit, became, and the
like, especially in earlier and late Latin.
Tunc decuit fl e s s e. Lrv. That was the time when it would have been
becoming to weep {to have wept).
TENSES OF MOODS AND VERBAL NOUNS. 147
2. As an Object, the Perfect Infinitive is seldom found in the
active: so after velle, to wish.
Neminem nota strenui aut ignavi mllitis notasse volui. Liv. I wished
to have marked {to mark finally) no soldier with the mark of bravery w of
cowardice.
Otherwise it is found only in the poets (after the fashion of the Greek
Aorist Infinitive) :
Fratres tendentes opaco Pelion imposuisse Olympo. Hor. The
brothers striving to pile Pelion on shady Olympus.
In the Passive, the Perfect Infinitive is used after verbs of
Will and Desire, to denote impatience of anything except entire
fulfilment.
Here the Infinitive esse is seldom expressed.
Democritum nollem (esse) vituperatum. Cic. I should rather not have
had Democritus abused.
276. 2. As the representative of the Indicative, the Infinitive
has all its Tenses : Present, Fast, Future, and Future Periphras-
tics.
277. The Present Infinitive represents contemporaneous action
— hence the Present Indicative after a Principal Tense, and the
Imperfect after a Historical Tense :
Dlco eum venire, I say that he is coming ; dicebam eum venire,
I said that he was coming.
The Perfect Infinitive represents Prior Action — hence the
Perfect and Imperfect Indicative after a Principal Tense :
Dlco eum venisse, I say that he came, has come, used to come ;
and the Pluperfect, Imperfect, and Historical Perfect Indicative
after a Historical Tense :
Dixl eum venisse, I said that he had come, used to come, did
come.
Remark. — Memiill, I remember, when used of personal experience commonly takes
the present.
Turn me regem appellari a vobis memini, nunc tyrannum vocari video. Lrv.
I remember being styled by you a king then, I see that I am called a tyrant now. So also
memoria teneo and recordor, I remember, I recall. When the experience is not per-
sonal, the ordinary construction is followed :
Memineram Marium ad infimorum hominum misericordiam confugisse. Cic.
I remembered that Marius had thrown himself on the mercy of a set of low creatures.
! The peculiar construction with the Present arises from the liveliness of the recollec-
148 SIMPLE SENTENCE EXPANDED.
tion. When the action is to be regarded as a bygone, the Perfect may be used even of
personal experience :
Me memini Iratum dominae turbasse capillos. Ov. 1 remember in my anger
having tousled my sweetheart's hair.
278. The Present Participle Active denotes continuance; the
Perfect Passive, completion or attainment.
Remark. — The Perfect Participle is often used where we should employ a Present :
ratus, thinking ; complezus, embracing ; hortatus, exhorting.
279. The Future Participle (Active) is a verbal adjective,
denoting capability and tendency, chiefly employed in the older
language with sum, I am, as a periphrastic tense. In later Latin
it is used freely, just as the Present and Perfect Participles, to
express subordinate relations.
Remark.— The so-called Future Participle Passive is more properly called the Gerun-
dive, and has already been discussed. (243.) ^
SIMPLE SENTENCE EXPANDED.
280. The sentence may be expanded by the multiplication
or by the qualification, A, of the subject, B, of the predicate.
A.
1. Multiplication of the Subject.
Concord.
281. Number: The common predicate of two or more sub-
jects is put in the plural number :
Jus et injuria natura dijudicantur. Cic. Right and wrong are
distinguished by nature.
Pater et avus mortui sunt. Ter. Father and grandfather are dead.
Exceptions. — 1. The common predicate may agree with a singular
subject when that subject is the nearest or the most important : (" My flesh
and my heart faileth," Psa. lxxiii. 26.)
Aetas et forma et super omnia Romanum nomen te ferociorem facit,
Liv. Tour youth and beauty, and, above all, the name of Roman, makes you
too mettlesome.
Naves et praesidium excessit. Liv. The fleet and garrison departed.
2. Two abstracts in combination, when they are conceived as a unit
take a singular verb : (" When distress and anguish cometh upon you/
Prov. i. 27.)
concord. 149
Religio et fides anteponatur amicitiae. CiC. Let the religious obliga-
tion of a promise be preferred to friendship.
So any close union : (" Your gold and silver is cankered," Jas. v. 3.)
Senatus populusque Romanus intellegit. CiC. The senate and
people of Borne perceives (r= Home perceives.)
Remarks.— 1. Neque— neque, neither— nor, allows the Plural chiefly when the Per-
sons are different :
Kaec n e q u e ego neque tufecimus. Ter. Neither you nor I did this.
2. A singular subject combined with another word by cum, with, is treated some-
times as a singular, sometimes as a plural :
Mago cum omnibus fere armatis refugerat. Liv. Mago with almost all the
armed men had retreated.
Taurus cum quinque vaccls lino ictti fulminis exanima tl sunt. Lrv. A
bull with jive cows were killed by one stroke of lightning.
282. Gender : When the genders of combined subjects are
different, the adjective predicate takes either the strongest gen-
der or the nearest.
In things with life, the masculine gender is the strongest; in
things without life, the neuter.
The strongest :
Pater et mater mortui sunt. Ter. Father and mother are dead.
Murus et porta de caeld t a c t a. Lit. Wall and gate had been struck
by lightning.
The nearest :
Convictaest Messalina et Sllius. Tag. Messalina was convicted and
(so was) Silius.
Hippoiochus Larissae5rumque deditum est praesidium. LiY.
Hippolochus and the Larissaean garrison {were) surrendered.
When things with life and things without life are combined,
the gender varies.
Both as persons :
Rex regiaque classis profecti sunt. Lit. The king and the kingJs
fleet set out.
Both as things :
Natura inimica sunt libera civitas et rex. LiY. A free State and a
king are natural enemies.
Remark.— On the neuter as a predicate see 199, R. 4.
Pax et concordia victis utilia, victoribus tantum pulchra sunt- Tag. Peace
and harmony are useful (things) to the conquered, to the conquerors alone are they orna-
ments.
150 ADJECTIVE ATTRIBUTE.
283. Persons : When the persons of combined subjects are
different, the First Person is preferred to the Second, the Second
to the Third :
Si tu et Tullia, lux nostra, valetis, ego et suavissimus Cicero vale-
mus. Cic. If Tullia, light of my eyes, and you are well, dearest Cicero and
I are well.
Remarks.— 1. The order is commonly the order of the persons, not of modern polite-
ness : Ego et uxor mea. Wife and I.
2. Exception.— In contrasts, and when each person is considered separately, the pred-
icate agrees with the person of the nearest subject :
Ego sententiam, tu verba defendis. lam the champion of the spirit, you of the
letter.
Et ego et Cicero meus flagitabit. Cic. My Cicero will demand it and (so will) /.
So regularly with disjunctives. On neque— neque, see 281, R. 1.
2. Qualification* of the Subject.
284. The subject may be qualified by giving it an attribute.
An attribute is that which serves to give a specific character.
The chief forms of the attribute are :
I. The adjective and its equivalents : amicus certus, a sure
friend.
II. The substantive in apposition: Cicero orator, Cicero the
orator.
Remark.— The equivalents of the adjective are : 1. The pronouns hlC, this, ille,
that, etc. 2. Substantives denoting rank, age, trade : servus homo, a slave person /
homo senex, an old fellow ; homo gladiator, a gladiator-fellow ; mulier ancilla, a
servant-wench. 3. The genitive (357). 4. The ablative (402). 5. Preposition and case :
excessus e vita, departure from life. 6. Adverbs chiefly with participial nouns : rectS
facta, good actions. 7. Relative clauses (506).
I. Adjective Attribute.
Concord.
285. The Adjective Attribute agrees with its substantive, in
gender, number, and case :
Gender. Number.
Vir sapiens, a wise man, viri sapientes, wise men.
Mulier pulchra, a beautiful woman, mulieres pulchrae, beautiful
women.
Regium donum, royal gift, regia ddna, royal gifts.
PECULIAR FORMS OF THE ADJECTIVE ATTRIBUTE. 151
Case.
Viri gapientis, of a wise man. bone fill ! good son !
Mulierl pulchrae, for a beautiful woman, regio don5, by royal gift.
Virum sapient em, wise man. mulieres pulchras, beautiful
women.
286. The common attribute of two or more substantives
agrees with th e nearest :
Omnes agri et niaria, .
YAH lands and seas.
Agri et maria o m
aria, )
nia,p
Remarks. — 1. The Latin language repeats the common attribute more frequently
than the English : omnes agri et omnia maria, all lands and (all) seas. Generally,
the Latin language has a strong tendency to rhetorical repetition.
2. A common surname is put in the plural : M. et Q- Cicerones, Marcus and Quintus
Cicero ; GK, Gn., M. Carbones, Gains, Gnaeus (and) Marcus Carbo; otherwise, M. Cicero
et Q- Cicero, Marcus and Quintus Cicero.
287. Position of the Attribute. — When the Attribute is em-
phatic, it is commonly put before the substantive, ordinarily
after it.
1, Pugitivus servus, a runaway slam (one complex).
2. Servus f u g i t i v u s, a slave (that is) a runaway (two notions).
Many expressions, however, have become fixed formulae, such as civis
Romanus, Roman citizen ; populus Romanus, people of Borne.
Remark.— The. superlatives which denote order and sequence in time and space are
of ten used partitively, and then generally precede their substantive: summa aqua, the
surface of the water; summus mons, the top of the mountain; vere primo, primo
vere, in the beginning of spring ; in media urbe, in the midst of the city. So also, re-
liqua, cetera Graecia, the rest of Greece.
288. When the attribute belongs to two or more words, it is
placed sometimes before them all, sometimes after them all,
sometimes after the first.
All lands and seas, omnes agri et maria; agri et maria om-
nia; agri omnes et maria.
ygMT' The beginner may omit to 318.
Peculiar Forms op the Adjective Attribute.
289. The following forms of the Adjective Attribute present
important peculiarities.
1. Demonstrative Pronouns.
2. Determinative and Reflexive Pronouns.
152 DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS.
3. Possessive Pronouns.
4. Indefinite Pronouns.
5. Numerals.
6. Comparatives and Superlatives.
1. DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS.
290. Hie, this (the Demonstrative of the First Person), refers
to that which is nearer the speaker, and may mean :
1. The speaker himself : hi c homo = ego.
2. The judges in a suit of law : si ego hos novi, if I know these men
(= the jury).
3. The most important subject immediately in hand: hie sapiens de
quo loquor, this (imaginary) wise man of whom I am speaking.
4. That in which the speaker is peculiarly interested : hoc studium,
this pursuit of mine, of ours.
5. That which has just been mentioned: haec hactenus, these things
thus far = so much for that.
G. Very frequently, that which is about to be mentioned : his condi-
cionibus, on the following terms.
7. The current period of time : h i c dies, to-day ; haec nox, the night
just past or just coming ; hie mensis, the current month.
291. Iste, that (of thine, of yours), refers to that ivhich belongs
more peculiarly to the Second Person (Demonstrative of the
Second Person) :
Perfer i s t a m militiam. Cic. Endure that military service of yours.
Adventu tu5 i s t a subsellia vacuefacta sunt. Cic. At your approach
the benches in your neighborhood were vacated.
Remark.— The supposed contemptuous character of Iste arises .from the refusal to
take any direct notice of the person under discussion, " the person at whom."
292. Hie, that (the Demonstrative of the Third Person), de-
notes that which is more remote from the speaker, and is often
used in contrast to hie, this.
Heu quantum haec Niobe Nioba distabat ab ilia. Ov. Alas ! how
far this Niobe differed from that Niobe.
Ille may mean :
1. That, which has been previously mentioned (often ille quidem):
illud quod initio vobis proposui, that which 1 propounded to you at first
2. That which is well known, notorious (often put after the substantive) :
DETERMINATIVE AND REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS. 15 3
testula ilia, that (notorious) potsherd — institution of ostracism; illud
Solonis, that (famous saying) of Solon1 s.
3. That which is to be recalled: illud imprimis mirabile, that (which
I am going to remind you of) is especially wonderful.
4. That which is expected :
Ilia dies veniet mea qua lugubria ponam. Ov. The day will come
when I shall lay aside (cease) my mournful strains.
Remarks.— 1. Hie and ille are used together in contrasts : as, the latter— the former,
the former— the latter.
When both are matters of indifference the natural signification is observed: hie, the
latter ; ille, the former
Ignavia corpus hebetat, labor firmat ; i 1 1 a maturam senectutem, hie long-
am adulescentiam reddit. Cels. Laziness weakens the body, toil strengthens it ; the one
(the former) hastens old age, the other (the latter) prolongs youth.
When the former is the more important, hie is the former, ille the latter :
Melior tutiorque est certa pax quam sperata victoria ; h a e c in nostra, ilia
in deorum nianu est. Liv. Better and safer is certain peace than hoped-for victory ; the
former is in our hand(s), the latter in the hand(s) of the gods.
2. Hie et ille ; ille et ille ; ille aut ille, this man and (or) that man = one or two.
Non dlcam hoc signum ablatum esse et illud; hoc dico, nullum te signum
reliquisse. Cic. I will not say that this statue was taken off and that ; (what) I say (is)
this, that you left no statue at all.
3. The derived adverbs retain the personal relations of hie, iste, ille : hie, here
(where I am) ; nine, hence (from where I am) ; hue, hither (where I am) ; istlc, there
(where you are) ; illic, there (where he is), etc.
4. The Demonstrative Pronouns hie, iste, ille, and the Determinative is, are often
strengthened by quidem, indeed. The sentence often requires that either the demon-
strative or the particle be left untranslated.
Optare hoc quidem est, non docere. Cic. That is a (pious) wish, not a (logical)
proof.
Nihil perfertur ad nos praeter rumores satis istos quidem constantes
sed adhuc sine auctore. Cic. Nothing is brought to us except reports, quite consistent, it
is true but thus far not authoritative.
2. DETERMINATIVE AND REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS.
293. Is, that, is the determinative pronoun, and the regular
antecedent of the relative.
Mihi obviam venit tuus puer ; i s mihi litteras abs te reddidit. Cic.
I was met by your servant ; he delivered to me a letter from you.
Is minimo eget mcrtalis qui minimum cupit. Syrus. That mortal
is in want of least, who wanteth least.
Remarks.— 1. Is, as the antecedent of the relative, is often omitted, chiefly in the
Nominative, more rarely in an oblique case.
Eis dat qui cito dat. Pkov. He gives twice who gives in a trice.
2. Is, with a copulative or adversative particle, is used as he or that in English, for the
purpose of emphasis. Such expressions are : et is, atque is, isque, and he too, and that
7*
154 REFLEXIVE PRO^OUXS.
too ; neque is, et is non, and he not, and that not ; sed is, but he, further strengthened
by quidem, indeed.
Exempla quaerimus e t e a non antlqua. Cic. We are looking for examples, and
those, too, not of ancient date.
Epicurus una in domo et ea quidem angusta quam magnos tenuit ami-
corum greges. Cic. What shoals of friends Epicurus had in one house, and that a pinched-
up one !
3. Is does not represent a noun before a Genitive, as in the English that of. In Latin
the noun is omitted, or repeated, or a word of like meaning substituted.
Non jiidicio discipulorum dlcere debet magister sed discipull magistri.
Quint. The master is not to speak according to the judgment of the pupils, but the pupils
according to that of the master.
Nulla est celeritas quae possit cum animi celeritate contendere. Cic. There
is no speed that can possibly vie with that of the mind.
M. Coelius tribunal suum juxta G. Trebonl sellam collocavit. Caes. Marcus
Coelius placed his chair of office next to that of Gaius Trebonius.
Of course Hie, Ille, and Iste can be used with the Genitive in their proper sense.
294. Eeflexive : Akin to is is the Eeflexive Pronoun sul,
sibi, se. Instead of the Genitives ejus, eorum, earum, eorum, the
Possessive of the Eeflexive, suns, sua, suum, is employed when
reference is made to the subject of the sentence :
Alexander moriens anulum suum dederat Perdiccae. ISTep. Alex-
ander (when) dying had given Ms ring to Perdiccas.
Quod quis habet dominae conferat omne s u a e. Ov. (265 .)
On the other hand :
Deum agn5scis ex operibus ejus. God you recognize by Ms works.
The same principle applies to the other cases of is and of
the Eeflexive. Hence the general rule :
295. The forms of the Eeflexive Pronoun are used when
reference is made to the subject of the sentence.
Ipse s e quisque dlligit. Cic. Everybody loves Mmself.
Remarks.— 1. Suus, when used in an emphatic sense {own, peculiar, proper), may
refer to another case than that of the subject :
Hannibalem sui elves e clvitate ejecerunt- Cic. HannibaVs own countrymen
exiled him.
Justitia suum culque distribute Cic. Justice gives each man that is his own =
his due.
Inque s u o s volui cogere verba pedes. Ov. And I wished to force the words into
their proper feet (places in the verse).
Suo tempore, at the proper, fitting time. So suo loco :
Comoediae quern usurn in pueris putem suo loco dicam. Quint. What 1
consider to be the good of comedy in the case of boys I will mention in the proper place.
2. In dependent clauses the reflexive is used with reference either to the principal or
to the subordinate subject. See for fuller treatment 521.
distinctive ppoxorx. 155
296. Idem, the same, serves to unite two or more attributes or
predicates on a person or thing.
Idem is often to be translated by at the same time ; Mkeivise,
also ; yet, notwithstanding.
Cimon incidit in eandem invidiam quam pater srius. Nep. Gimon
fell into the same odium as his father.
Quidquid honestum est idem est utile. Cic. Whatever is honorable
is also (at the same time) useful.
Nil prodest quod non laedere possit idem. Ov. Nothing helps that
may not likewise hurt.
Epicurus, quum optimam et praestantissimam naturam del dicat esse,
negat Idem esse in deo gratiam. Cic. Although Epicurus says that the
nature of God is transcendently good and great, yet (at the same time) he says
that there is no sense of favor in God.
Difficilis facilis, jucundus acerbus, es idem. Mart. Grabbed (and)
kindly, sweet (and) sour, are you at once.
Kebiarks.— 1. The same- asis expressed by idem with qui, with atque or ac, with ut,
with cum, and poetically with the Dative :
Servi moribus iisdem erant quibus dominus. Cic. The servants had the same
character as tJie master.
Est animus erga te idem a c fuit- Ter. Her feelings toward you are the same as
they were.
Disputationem esponimus iisdem fere verbis u t actum disputatumque
est. Cic. We are setting forth the discussion in very mmch the same words in which it
was actually carried on.
Tibi mecum in eodem pistrino vlvendum. Cic. You have to live in the same
treadmill vjiih me.
Invltum qui servat idem facit Occident!. Hor. He who saves a man('s life)
against his will, does the same thing as one who Mils him (as if he killed him) .
2. Idem cannot be used with is, of which it is only a stronger form (is + dem).
297. Ipse, self, is the distinctive pronoun, and separates a
subject or an object from all others :
Ipse feci, I myself did it and none other, I alone did it, I did it of my own
accord, I am the very man that did it.
Nunc ipsum, at this very instant, at this precise moment.
Conon non quaesivit ubi ipse tuto viveret, sed unde praesidio
esse posset civibus suis. ISTep. Gonon did not seek a place to live in safely
himself, but a, place from which he could be of assistance to his countrymen.
Valvae subito se ipsae aperuerunt. Cic. The folding-doors suddenly
opened of their own accord.
Cato mortuus est annis oct5ginta sex ipsis ante Ciceronem con-
sulem. Cic, Gato died just eighty-six years before Cicero's consulship.
156 POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS.
Remarks.— 1. Owing to this distinctive character, ipse is often used of persons in
opposition to things; riders in opposition to horses; inhabitants in opposition to the
towns which they inhabit; the master of the house in opposition to his household.
Eo quo me ipsa misit. Plaut. 1 am going where mistress sent me.
2. Et ipse, likewise, as well, is used when a new subject takes an old predicate:
Virtutes et ipsae taedium pariunt nisi gratia varietatis adjiitae. Quint.
Virtue* likewise (as well as faults) produce weariness unless they are flavored with variety.
Camillus ex Volscis in Aequos transiit e t i p s o s helium molientes. Liv.
Camillas went across from the Volscians to the Aequians, who were likewise (as well as the
Volscians) getting up war.
298. Ipse is used to lay stress on the reflexive relation ; in the
Nominative when the subject is emphatic, in the Oblique Oases
when the object is emphatic.
Se ipse laudat, he (and not another) praises himself.
Se ipsum laudat, he praises himself (and not another).
Piger ipse sibi obstat. Pkov. The lazy man stands in Ms own way,
is his own obstacle.
Non egeo medicina ; me ipse consolor. Cic. I do not need medicine ;
I comfort myself (I am my only comforter).
Omnibus potius quam i p s I s nobis consuluimus, we have consulted the
interest of all rather than our own.
Exceptions are common:
Quique aliis cavit n5n cavet ipse sibL Ov. And lie who took pre-
cautions for others takes none for himself.
3. POSSESSIVE PROKOUNS.
299. The Possessive Pronouns are more rarely used in Latin
than in English, and chiefly for the purpose of contrast or clear-
ness.
Manus lava et cena. Cic. Wash (your) hands and dine.
Praedia m e a tu possides, ego aliena misericordia vivo. ClC.
You are in possession of my estates^ (while) Hive on the charity of others.
Remark.— Observe the intense use of the Possessive in the sense of property, peculi-
arity, fitness : suum esse, to belong to one's self, to be one's own man.
Tempore t u o pugnasti. Liv. You have fought at your oivn time (= when you
wished).
Ego anno" meo Gonsul f actus sum. Cic. Iivas made consul in my own year (= j
the first year in which I could be made consul).
Pugna suum finem quum jacet hostis habet Ov. A fight has reached 'itefit
end when the foe is down.
INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 157
4. INDEFINITE FKONOUNS.
300. Quldam means one, a, a certain one (definite or indefinite
to the speaker, not definitely designated to the hearer): qul-
dam rhetor, a certain rhetorician.
In the plural, it is equivalent to some, sundry, without emphasis.
Quldam is often used with or without quasi, as if, to modify
an expression :
Est quaedam virtutum vitidrumque vicinia. Quint. There is a cer-
tain neighborly relation betioeen virtues and vices.
Non sunt isti audiendl qui virtutem duram et quasi ferream
q u a n d a m esse volunt, Cic. Those friends of yours are not to be lis-
tened to who will have it (maintain) that virtue is hard, and as it were made
of iron.
301. Aliquis (aliqul), means, some one (wholly indefinite),
some one or other: fecit hoc aliquis tul similis, some one or
other like you did this; aliqul scrupus, some scruple or other.
In the predicate it is emphatic (by Litotes, 448, R. 2) : sum aliquis,
aiiquid,2 am somebody = a person of importance, something = of some
tceight, opposed to : nullus sum, nihil sum, I am a nobody, nothing.
Est ali qui d fatale malum per verba levare. Ov. It is something to
relieve the fated misfortune by words.
302. Guis (qui), fainter than aliquis, is used chiefly in relative
sentences and after quum, when, si, if, ne, lest, num, whether, quo
the . . . 400.
Ne quid nimis ! nothing in excess !
Si qua volet regnare diu, deludat amantem. Ov. (231, R. 2.)
Quod qui s habet dominae conferat omne suae. Ov. (265.)
/
Remark. — Aliquis is used after si, and the rest when there is stress : si quis, if
any ; si aliquis, if some.
Si aliquid dandum est voluptatl, modicls convlviis senectus delectari potest.
Cic. If something is to be given to pleasure (as something or other must), old age can take
delight in mild festivities. SI quid, if anything ; si quidquam, if anything at all.
When used with negatives, the negative itself is commonly negatived : Verres
nihil unquam fecit sine ali quo quaestu. Cic. (445.)
303. Quispiam is rarer than aliquis, but not to be distin-
guished from it, except that quispiam is never found in negative
sen tences : dixerit quispiam, some one may say.
304. Quisquam and ullus (adjective) mean any one (at all),
138 INDEFINITE PKONOUNS.
and are used chiefly in negative sentences, in sentences that
imply total negation, and in sweeping conditions:
Justitia nunquam nocet cuiquam. Cic. Justice never hurts anybody.
Quis unquam Graecorum rhetorum a Thucydide quidquam
duxit? Cic. What Greek rhetorician ever drew anything from Thucydides?
[None].
Si quisquam, ille sapiens fuit. Cic. If any one at all (was) wise, he was.
Est u 1 1 a res tanti, ut virl boni et splendorem et nomen amittas ?
Cic. Is anything of such importance as that you should lose (for its sake) the
splendid title of a good man?
The negative of quisquam is nemo, nobody ; nihil, nothing (105).
Nemo, however, is sometimes used as an adjective :
Nemo discipulus, no scholar.
The negative of ullus is nullus, no, none, which is also used regularly as
a substantive in the Genitive and Ablative instead of neminis and nemine.
Remarks.— l. On neque quisquam and et nemo, see 479.
2. Nullus is used in familiar language instead of non (so sometimes in English) :
Philippus nullus usquam. Liv. No Philip anywhere.
305. Quisque (from quisquis) means each one.
Laudati sunt omnes ddnatique pr5 merito q u i s q u e . Lrv. All were
praised and rewarded, each one according to his desert.
Quam quisque norit artem in hac se exerceat, (618.)
With superlatives and ordinals quisque is loosely translated
every :
Optimum quidque rarissimum est. Cic. Every good thing is rare ,
more accurately, The better a thing, the rarer it is. (645, R. 2.)
Quinto qudque anno Sicilia tota censetur. Cic. Every fifth year all
Sicily is assessed.
Primo quoque tempore, The sooner the better, as soon as possible.
Remarks. — 1. Quisque is commonly postpositive, almost invariably after the reflex-
ive : ipse se quisque diligit (295) ; suum cuique (295, K. 1), except when the reflex-
ive is especially emphatic.
2. Niigelsbach's formulae:
a. Non omnia omnibus tribuenda sunt, sed suum cuique ;
b. Omnes idem faciunt, sed optimus quisque optime ;
c Non omnibus annls hoc fit, sed tertio quoque anno ;
d. Non omnes idem faciunt, sed quod quisque vult.
306. Alter and alius are both translated other, another, but
alter refers to one of two, alius to diversity.
i
NUMERALS. 150
S51us aut cum a 1 1 e r 5 , alone or with (only) one other ; alter Nero,
a second Nero.
Alter alterum quaerit, one (definite person) seeks the other (definite
person); alius alium quaerit, one seeks one, another another; alter! —
alteri, one party — another party (already defined) ; alii — alii, some — others.
Alter often means neighbor, brother, fellow-man ; alius, third person.
Alter:
AgesJlaiis claudus fuit a 1 1 e r o pede. Nep. Agesilaus was lame of one
foot.
Altera manu fert lapidem, panem ostentat altera. Plaut. In
one hand a stone he carries, in the other holds out bread.
Mors nee ad vivSs pertinet nee ad mortuos : alteri null! (304, R 2)
sunt, alteros n5n attinget. Cic. Death concerns neither the living nor
the dead : the latter are not, the former it will not reach.
Alius:
Fallacia alia aliam trudit. Ter. One lie treads on the heels of another
(indefinite series).
Divitias alii praeponunt, alii honores. Cic. Some prefer riches, others
honors.
Aliud alii natura iter ostendit. Sall. Nature shows one path to one
man, another path to another man.
Alter and alius :
Ab alio espectes alteri quod feceris. Syrus. You may look for
from another what you've done unto your brother (from No. 3, what No. 1
has done to No. 2).
5. NUMERALS.
307. Duo means simply two, ambo, both (two considered to-
gether), uterque, either (two considered apart, as, " They cruci-
1 tied two others with him, on either side one," John xix. 18) :
Supplicatio amborura nomine et triumphus utrique decretus
est. Liv. A thanksgiving in the name of both and a triumph to either (each
of the two) was decreed.
Remark.— Uterque is seldom plural, except of sets :
Utrique [plebis fautores et senatus] victoriam crudeliter exercebant. Sall.
Either party (democrats and senate) made a cruel use of victory.
Duae fuerunt Ariovisti uxores : utraeque in ea fuga perierunt. Caes.
Ariovistus" 's wives were two in number ; both perished on that flight.
On uterque with the Genitive, see 370 R. 2.
308. Mille, a thousand, is in the Singular an indeclinable Adjective,
and is less frequently used with the Genitive : mille milites, rather than
mille militum, a thousand soldiers ; in the Plural it is a declinable Substan-
tive, and must have the Genitive : duo milia militum, two thousand^ of)
soldiers = two regiments of soldiers.
:0 COMPARATIVES.
But if a smaller number comes between, the noun follows the smaller
number :
f tria mllia quingenti equites,
| tria mllia equitum et quingenti, but
3500 cavalry, - <j equit§s tria milia quingenti, or
[ equitum tria mllia quingenti.
309. The ordinals are used for the cardinals with a careless-
ness which gives rise to ambiguity:
Quattuor anni sunt, \ ex quo te non vidi,
It is four pears, y that I have not seen you {since I saw you).
Quartus annus est, )
It is the fourth year {four years, going on four years).
Remark.— To avoid this ambiguity inceptus, begun, and ex&CtVLS, finished, seem to
have been used. Gellius, N. A. iii. 16.
310. The distributives are used with an exactness which is
foreign to our idiom wherever repetition is involved, as in the
multiplication table.
With singuli either cardinal or distributive may be used.
Ant5nius [pollicitus est] denarids quingen5s (or quingentos) singulis
mllitibus daturum. Cic. Antonius promised to give 500 denarii to each sol-
dier.
Scriptum eculeum cum q u i n q u e pedibus, pullos gallinaceos tres
cum terms pedibus natos esse. Ltv. A letter was written to say that a colt
had been foaled with five feet (and) three chickens hatched with three feet
(apiece).
Carmen ab ter novenis virginibus can! jusserunt. Lit. They or-
dered a chant to be sung by thrice nine virgins.
Remark. — The poets often use the distributive where the cardinal would be the
rule, and the cardinals are sometimes found even in prose, where we should expect the
distributives. Bin! is not un frequently used of a pair : Bin! scyphl, a pair of cups.
On the distributives with Pluralia tantum, see 95, R. 2.
6. COMPARATIVES AND SUPERLATIVES.
311. Comparative. — The comparative degree generally takes
a term of comparison either with quam, than, or in the Ablative:
Ign5ratio futurorum malorum utilior est quam scientia. Cic. Igno-
rance of future evils is better than knowledge (of them).
Tullus Hostilius ferocior etiam Romulo fuit. Lrv. Tullus Hostilius
was even more mettlesome than Romulus.
Remarks.— 1. The Ablative is used only when the word with quam would stand in
the Norn, or Ace.
COMPARATIVES. 161
Caesar minor est \ SUam ?omPgJus' !■ Caesar is younger than Pompey.
' rompejo, >
Caesarem magis amamus i ^am_Pompejum, J. we love Caesar ^^ than pompey.
But—
Caesari magis fav emus quam Pompeja, we favor Caesar more than Pompey (647).
2. The Ablative is very common in negative sentences, and is used exclusively in
negative relative sentences.
Non adeo cecidi quamvis dejectus ut infra te quoque sim, inferius quo nihil
esse potest. Ov. / have not fallen so far, however cast down, as to be lower than you,
than ivhom nothing can be lower.
3. Measure of difference is put in the ablative, 397.
4. Quam is often omitted after plus, amplius, more, and minus, less, and the like,
without affecting the construction.
Hominl misero plus quingentos colaphos infregit mini. Ter. He has dealt me,
luckless creature, more than five hundred crushing boxes on the ear.
Spatium est non amplius pedum sexcentorum. Caes. The space is not more than
| (of) six hundred feet.
More than thirty years old: 1. Natus plus (quam) triginta annos.
2. Natus plus triginta annis (rare).
3. Major (quam) triginta annos natus.
4. Major triginta annis (natus).
5. Major triginta annorum.
Palus non latior pedibus quinquaginta. Caes. A swamp not broader than fifty
feet (or pedes quinquaginta).
5. On the combination of the comparative with opinione, opinion, spe, hope, and the
like, see 399, R. 1.
6. Atque for quam is poetical.
312. Standard of Comparison omitted.— When the standard
of comparison is omitted, it is supplied.: 1. By the context;
2. By the usual or proper standard ; 3. By the opposite.
1. By the context :
Solent reges Persarum p lures uxores habere. Cic. The kings of
Persia usually have more wives [than one].
2. By the proper standard :
Senectus est natura loquacior. Cic. Old age is naturally rather (or too)
talkative.
3. By the opposite :
Sed melius nesclsse fuit. Ov. But it had been better not to have known
(than to have known), ignorance had been bliss.
313. Disproportion.- — Disproportion is expressed by the com-
parative with quam pro, than for, and the Ablative, or with ut,
that, or qui, who, and the subjunctive:
Minor caedes quam pro tanta victoria fuit. Liv. The loss was
(too) small for so great a victory.
1G2 SUPERLATIVES.
Major sum quam ut mancipium sim mei corporis. Sen. I am
too great to be the slave of my body.
Major sum quam cui possit Fortuna nocere. Ov. lam too great
for Fortune possibly to hurt me.
314. Two Qualities compared. — When two qualities of the
same substantive are compared, we find either magis and quam
with the positive, or a double comparative :
Celer tuus disertus magis est quam sapiens. Cic. Your (friend)
Celer is eloquent rather than wise- — more eloquent than wise.
Faulli contio fuit verior quam g r a t i o r populo. Liv. Paullus's
speech was more true than agreeable to the people.
Remark.— There is no distinction to be made "between the two expressions. In the
latter turn, mainly post-Ciceronian, the second comparative is merely attracted into the
same form as the first. The same rule applies to the adverb : fortius quam fellcius,
with more bravery than good luck.
315. Restriction to the Comparative. — When but two objects
are compared, the comparative exhausts the degrees of com-
parison, whereas, in English, the superlative is employed, unless
the idea of duality is emphatic.
Natu major, the eldest (of two), the elder; natu minor, the young-
est, the younger.
Prior, the first ; posterior, the last.
Posteriores cogitationes, ut ajunt, sapientiores solent esse. Cic. After-
thoughts, as the saying is, are usually the wisest.
Remark.— The same rule applies to the interrogative uter, which of two? {whether f) :
Quaeritur : ex duobus uter dignior;ex pluribus, quis dignissimus. Quint.
The question is : Of two, which is the worthier ; of more (than two), which is the worthiest.
Exceptions are rare.
316. Superlative. — The Latin superlative is often to be ren-
dered by the English positive, especially of persons :
Quintus Fabius M a x i m u s , Quintus Fabius the Great.
Tarn felix esses quam formosissima vellem. Ov. Would thou
wert fortunate as (thou art) fair.
Maxima impetu, majore fortuna. Liv. With great vigor, with greater
luck.
317. Superlative strengthened. — The superlative is strength-
ened by longe, by far ; multo, much ; vel, even; unus, unusjj
APPOSITION. 163
omnium, one above all others; quam, quantus — potuit, as — as
possible.
Ex Britannis omnibus longe sunt humanissimi qui Cantium incolunt.
Caes. Of all the Britons by far the most cultivated are those that inhabit
Kent.
Protagoras sophistes illls temporibus v e 1 maximus. Cic. Protago-
ras, the very greatest sophist (— professor of wisdom) in those times.
Urbem unam mihi amicissimam declinavi. Cic. I turned aside from
a city above all others friendly to me.
Caesar quam aequissimo loco potest castra communit. Caes. Caesar
fortifies a camp in as favorable a position as possible.
Remabk.— Quam aequissimus locus = tarn aequus quam aequissimus. (For
other expressions, see 645, R. 5.
Apposition.
318. By apposition one substantive is placed by the side of
another, which contains it :
Oicero orator, Cicero the orator.
Rhenus flumen, the river Bhine.
Concord.
319. The word in apposition agrees with the principal word
in number and case, and as far as it can in gender :
Noro. Herodotus pater historiae, Herodotus the father of history ;
Gen, Herodoti patris historiae : D. Herodoto patrl historiae.
Aestus exesor murorum. Lucr. Tide the devourer of walls.
Athenae omnium doctrmarum inventrices. Cic. Athens the in-
ventor of all branches of learning. (See 202.)
Remakks.— 1. The predicate sometimes agrees with the word in apposition, especially
In names of towns : Corioll oppidum captum est. Liv. Corioli-town was taken.
Otherwise regulary:
Fompejus, nostri amores, ipse se aiflixit. Cic. Pompey, our bosom
friend, lias floored himself
2. The Possessive Pronoun takes the Genitive in apposition :
Tuum, hominis simplicis, pectus vidimus. Cic. We have seen your
bosom bared, you open-hearted creature /
' Urbs mea unlus opera salva fuit. Cic. The city was saved by my exer-
tions alone.
320. Partitive Apposition. — Partitive Apposition is that
i\ form of Apposition in which a part is taken out of the whole:
104 PREDICATIVE ATTRIBUTION AND APPOSITION.
Cetera multitud o sorte deciraus quisque ad supplicium
lectl sunt. Liv. (Of) the rest of the crowd every tenth man was chosen by lot
for punishment (Sometimes called Restrictive Apposition.)
321. Distributive Apposition. — Distributive Apposition is
,tluit form of Apposition in which the whole is subdivided into
its parts, chiefly with alter — alter, the one — the other ; quisque,
each one; alii — alii, some — others. (Often called Partitive.)
Duae filiae altera occisa altera capta est. Caes. (Of) two
daughters, the one icas killed, the other captured.
Remark.— The Partitive Genitive is more commonly employed than either of these
forms of apposition.
322. Mihi nomen est. Instead of the apposition with
no men, name, the name of the person is more frequently at-
tracted into the Dative.
/ 1. Mihi Ciceroni nomen est ; most common.
My name is Cicero, < 2. Mihi nomen Cicero est j less common.
a 3. Mihi nomen Ciceronis est j least common.
Nomen Arcturd est mihi. Platjt. My name is Arcturus.
Tibi nomen insand posuere. Hor. They called you " cracked."
Samnites Maleventum, cm nunc urbi Beneventum nomen est, perfu-
gerunt. Lrv. The Samnites fled to Maleventum (Ilcome), a city which now
bears the name Beneventum (Welcome).
Nomen Mercurii est mihi. Plaut. My name is Mercury.
323. Apposition to a Sentence. — Sometimes an accusative
stands in apposition to a whole preceding sentence :
Admoneor ut aliquid etiam de sepultura dicendum existimem, rem
non difficile m. Cic. I am reminded to take into consideration that
something is to be said about burial also — an easy matter.
Remark. — This accusative may follow a Passive or Neuter verb as the Object affected.
Others regard such Neut. Accusatives as Nominatives.
PREDICATIVE ATTRIBUTION AND PREDICATIVE APPOSI-
TION.
324. Any case may be followed by the same case in Predica-
tive Attribution or Apposition, which differ from the ordinary
Attribution or Apposition in translation only.
Nominative : Filius aegrotus rediit.
Ordinary Attribution : The sick son returned.
PREDICATIVE APPOSITION AND ATTRIBUTION. 1G5
Predicative Attribution : The son returned sick — he was sick when he
returned.
Hercules juvenis leonem interfecit.
Ordinary Apposition : The young man Hercules slew a lion.
Predicative Apposition : Hercules, tohen a young man, slew a lion =
he teas a young man ivhen he slew a lion.
Genitive : Potestas ejus adhibendae uxoris, The permission to take her
to wife.
Dative : Amic5 vivo non subvenisti, You did not help your friend
(while he was) alive.
Accusative : Hercules cervam vivam cepit.
Ordinary Attribution : Hercules caught a living doe.
Predicative Attribution : Hercules caught a doe alive.
Ablative : Aere utuntur importato, They use imported copper = the
copper which they use is imported.
Remarks. — 1. The vocative, not being a case proper, is not used predicatively. Ex-
ceptions are apparent or poetical.
Quo, moritTLre, ruis % Yerg. " Whither dost thou rush to die?" = Whither dost thou
rush, thou doomed to die ?
Notice here the old phrase :
Macte virtute esto. Yerg. Increase in virtue — Heaven speed thee in thy high career.
Macte is regarded by some as an old vocative, from the same stem as magnus ; by
others as an adverb.
2. Victores redierunt may mean, the conquerors returned, or they returned conquer-
ors ; and a similar predicative use is to be noticed in idem, the same.
Iidem abeunt qui venerant, they go away just as they had come (literally, the same
persons as they had come).
3. Predicative Attribution and Apposition are often to be turned into an abstract
noun:
Ego non eadem volo senex, quae puer volui, I do not wish the same things (as an
old man) in my old age, that I wished (as a boy) in my boyhood.
So with prepositions :
Ante Ciceronem consul em, before the consulship of Cicero ; ante urbem conditam,
before the building of the city.
4. Do not confound the " as " of apposition with the " as " of comparison— ut, qua-
si, tanquam. (645, R. 4).
Cicero ea quae nunc usii veniunt cecinit ut vates. Nep. Cicero foretold all that
is coming to pass now as (if he were) an inspired prophet .
5. When especial stress is laid on the Adjective or Substantive predicate, in combina-
tion with the verbal predicate, it is well to resolve the sentence into its elements :
Themistocles tinus restitit, Themistocles alone withstood = Themistocles was the
only one that withstood.
Argonautae primi in Pontum Euxinum intraverunt, the Argonauts first
entered the Euxine (Black) Sea = were the first to enter the Black Sea.
Una saltis victis nullam sperare salutem. Yerg. The only safety which the
vanquished have, is to hope for none.
Fragilem true! commisit pelago ratem primus. Hor. He was the first to trust
his frail bark to the ivild waves.
6. The English idiom often uses the adverb and adverbial expressions instead of the
Latin adjective : so in adjectives of inclination and disinclination, knowledge and igno-
166 QUALIFICATION OF THE PREDICATE.
ranee, of order and position, of time and season, and of temporary condition generally t
libens. wUh ph asure ; volens, willingly) ; nolens, •unwillingly) ; invitus, against one's
will ; prudens. aware; imprudens, unawares; sciens, knowingly) ; primus, prior,
first ; ultimus, last ; medius, in, about the middle ; hodiernus, to-day ; matutlnus, in
the morning ; frequens, frequently) ; sublimis, aloft.
Odero si potero, si non, invitus amabo. Ov. (231, R. 2.)
Plus hodie bonl feci imprudens quam sciens ante nunc diem unquam. Ter.
1 have done more good to-day unawares than I have ever done knowingly before.
Adcurrit, mediam mulierem complectitur. Ter. He runs up, puts his arms
about the woman's waist.
Qui prior strinxerit ferrum ejus victoria erit. Liv, Who draws the sword firsts
his shall be the victor-y.
Vespertinus pete tectum. Hor. Seek thy dwelling at eventide.
Rarus venit in cenacula miles. Juv. The soldiery rarely comes into the garret.
So also totus, wholly.
Philosophiae nos totos tradimus, Cic. We give ourselves wholly to philosophy.
Soli hoc contingit sapientl. Cic. This good luck happens to the wise man alone =
it is only the wise man who has this good luck.
7. Carefully to be distinguished are the uses of primus, and the adverbs primum,
first, for the first time, and primo, at first.
Primus : Ego primus hanc orationem legi, I was the first to read this speech.
Hanc p r I m a m orationem legi, this was the first speech that Tread.
Primum : Hanc orationem primum legi deinde transcrlpsi, I first read (and)
then copied this speech.
Hodie hanc orationem primum legi, Iread this speech to-day for the first time.
Primo : Hanc orationem primo libenter legi, postea magis magisque mini
jejuna visa est, at first I read this speech with pleasure, afterward it seemed to me drier
and drier.— Lattmann and Mutter.
B.
1. Multiplication of the Predicate.
325. The Multiplication of the Predicate requires no further
rules than those that have been given in the general doctrine of
Concord.
2. Qualification of the Predicate.
326. The Qualification of the Predicate may be regarded as
an External or an Internal change :
I. External change : combination with an object.
1. Direct object, Accusative.
2. Indirect object, Dative.
II. Internal change: combination with an attribute, whict;
may be in the form of
1. The Genitive case.
2. The Ablative.
ACCUSATIVE. 1G7
3. Preposition with a case.
4. An Adverb.
Remark.— The Infinitive forms (Infinitive, Gerund, Gerundive, and Supine) appear
now as objects, now as attributes, and require a separate treatment.
I. EXTEE^"AL CHAKGE.
Accusative.
327. The Accusative is the case of the Direct Object.
The Object may be contained in the verb (Inner Object, Ob-
ject Effected) :
Deus mundum creavit, God made a creation — the universe.
Akin to this is the Accusative of Extent :
A recta conscientia transversum unguem non oportet discedere. CiC.
One ought not to swerve a nailbreadth from a right conscience.
Decern annds Troja oppugnata est. Liv. Ten years was Troy besieged.
Maximam partem lacte vivunt. Caes. For the most pari they live on
,milk.
From the Accusative of Extent arises the Accusative of the
Outer Object (Object Affected) :
Deus mundum gubernat, God steers the universe.
Remakk. — The Accusative of the Inner Object is the characteristic use of the case;
the Accusative of the Outer Object the most common use. It is sometimes impossible to
determine which element preponderates; so in verbs compounded with prepositions.
K- The so-called Terminal Accusative may be conceived as an Inner or an Outer Object.
q[ [Hence the following table is only approximate :
General View oe the Accusative.
328. I. Inner Object ; Object effected.
Cognate Accusative.
Accusative of Extent.
1. In Space.
2. In time. }► pounded with
3. Of Adverbial Relation.
Terminal Accusative
icllj . (Point Reached).
II. Outer Object : Object affected. • \ „ ,
i. whole. I Yei;l)s, com;
2. Part (so-called Greek fnM, wllh
A .. >. Prepositions.
Accusative). J ^
Verbs com-
mncled v
Prepositions.
108 ACCUSATIVE.
III. Double Accusative: Asking and Teaching.
Making and Taking.
IV. Accusative as the most general form of the object (object created
or called up by the mind) :
In Exclamations.
Accusative and Infinitive.
329. Active Transitive Verbs take the Accusative case:
Romulus Urbem Romam condidit, Romulus founded Hie City of Borne.
(Object Effected.)
Mens regit corpus, Mind governs body. (Object AfFected.)
Remarks. — 1. Many verbs are intransitive in English which are transitive in Latin ',
dolere, to grieve (for) ; desperare, to despair (of) ; horrSre, to shudder (at) ; mirariJ
to wonder (at) ; ridere, to laugh (at). Especially to be noted is the wide scope of the I
Inner Object:
Honores desperant, Cic. They despair of honors (give them up in despair).
Kecata est Vitia quod filil necem flevisset (541). Tac. Vitia was executed for hav
ing wept (for) her son's execution.
Conscia mens recti Famae mendacia risit. Ov. Conscious of right, her soul (but
laughed (at) the falsehoods of Rumor.
Verbs of Smell and Taste have the Inner Object :
Piscis ipsum mare sapit. Sen. The fish tastes of the very sea.
N en omnes possunt olere unguenta exotica. Plaut. It is not every one can sme..
of foreign ointments.
2. The Accusative with Verbal nouns, such as tactio, touching, is comic.
330. Verbs compounded with the prepositions ad, ante, cii
cum, con, in, inter, ob, per, praeter, sub, subter, super, and tram
become transitive, and take the accusative :
All with circum, per, praeter, trans, super, and subter.
Many with ad and in.
Some with ante and con.
Pythagoras Persarum magos adiit. Cic. Pythagoras applied to (co
suited) the Persian magi.
Stella Veneris a n t e greditur solem. Cic. The star Venus goes
advance of the sun
Tarn me circumstant densorum turba malorum. Ov. So dense
crowd of evils encompasses) me.
Earn, si opus esse videbitur, ipse conveniam. Cic. I will go to see h
myself, if it shall seem expedient.
Consilium multae calliditatis init. Ov. He engages in {devises) a plan i
deep cunning. j
Tanais Eur op am et Asiam interfluit. Curt. The Don flows oetwt\
Europe and Asia. )
ACCUSATIVE. 169
Mortem obiitj e medio abiit. Ter. She went to face Death (died), she
left the world,.
Caesar omnem agrum Ficenum percurrit. Caes. Caesar traversed
rapidly all the Picenian district.
Populus solet dignos praeterire. Cic. The people is wont to pass by the
worthy.
Epammondas paenam subiit. Nep. Epaminondas submitted to the pun-
ishment.
Fluminaque antiquds subterlabentia muros. Verg. And rivers
gliding under ancient walls.
Roman! rulnas muri supervadebant. Lit. The Romans marched over
the ruins of the wall.
Crassus Euphratem nulla belli causa transiit. Cic. Crassus crossed
the Euphrates without any cause for war.
Remarks. — 1. If the simple verb is a transitive, it can take two accusatives :
Agesilaus Hellespontum copias trajScit* Nep. Agesilails threw his troops across
the Hellespont
2. With many of these verbs the preposition may be repeated :
Copias trajecit Khodanum, or trans Khodanum, He threw his troops across the
Bhone.
Sometimes with difference of signification :
Adire ad aliquem, to go to a man; adlre aliquem, to apply to {to consult) a man.
331. Any verb can take an Accusative of the Inner Object,
when that object serves to define more narrowly or to explain^
i; more fully the contents of the verb.
"When the dependent word is of the same origin or of kindred
meaning with the verb, it is called the Cognate Accusative.
Faciam ut mei memineris dum vitam vivas. Plaut. I'll make
you think of me the longest day you live.
Servus est qui ut antiqui dixerunt servitutem servit. Quint.
He is a slave who, as old-style people said, slaves a slavery =who is a slave that
is a slave.
Remarks.— 1. The Cognate Accusative, when a substantive proper, is commonly at-
tended by an attribute :
Consiniilem luserat jam olim ille ludum, Ter. He had long before played a
like game.
Cantilenam e a n d e m canis. Ter. You are singing the same song.
Mirum atque inscitum somniavl somnium. Plaut. A marvellous and uncanny
dream I've dreamed.
2. Much more common is the Cognate Accusative of neuter pronouns and adjectives
treated as substantives :
Xenophon eadem fere p e c c a t. Cic. Xenophon makes very much the same mis-
takes.
Equidem posse veil em idem glSriari quod Cyrus. Cic. For my part I could
wish that it were in my power to make the same boast as Cyrus.
I r 0 DO U BLE ACO U S ATI V E.
Quidquid dell rant reges plectuntur Achlvl. Hor. Whatever mad freak
the kings play, the Achivi are punished for it.
Quid lacrumas % Ter. What are you crying for?
With transitive verbs an accusative of the person can be employed beside:
Discipulos id unum moneo ut praeceptores suos non minus quam ipsa
studia anient. Quint. I give pupils this one piece of advice, that they love their teachers
no less Mum their studies themselves.
3. From this the accusative neuter gradually passes over into an adverb, such as
aliquantum, somewhat • nihil, nothing ('* nothing loath1') ; summum, at most. Especi-
ally to be noted are : magnam partem, to a great extent ; id temporis, at that time ; id
aetatis, of that age ; id genus, of that kind • omne genus, of every kind.
Haec vulnera vitae non minimam partem mortis formidine aluntur. Lttcr.
These wounds of life are for not the least part fostered by the fear of death.
Nostram vicem ultus est ipse sese. Cic. He took vengeance on himself in our
stead.
4. Instead of the Cognate Accusative the Ablative is occasionally found : lapidibus
pluere, to rain stones ; sanguine sudare, to sweat blood.
Herculis simulacrum multo sudore manavit. Cic. The statue of Hercules rem
freely with sweat.
332. A part of the object affected is sometimes put in the
Accusative case after a passive or intransitive verb or an
adjective :
Tacita cura animum incensus. Lrv. His soul on fire with silent care.
Jam vulgatum actis quoque saucius pectus. Quint. Now-a-days
"breast-wounded" is actually a common newspaper phrase.
Remarks.— 1. This is commonly called the Greek Accusative, and is found chiefly in
poetry. The common prose construction is the Ablative.
Neseit stare loco ; micat auribus et tremit artus. Verg. He cannot stand still ;
he twitches with his ears and quivers in his limbs.
2. Somewhat different is the Accusative with induor, I don; exuor, I doff ; cingor,
I gird on myself ; in which verbs the reflexive signification is retained :
Inutile ferrum cingitur. Verg. He girds on {himself) a useless blade.
Lorlcara induitur fidoque accingitur ense. Verg. He dons a corslet and begirds
himself vjith his trusty glaive.
Arminius impetu equl pervasit oblitus faciem suo cruore ne nosceretur.
Tac. Hermann got through, thanks to his fiery charger, having smeared his face with his
own gore to keep from being recognized.
DOUBLE ACCUSATIVE.
333. When two Accusatives depend on the same verb, one is the In-
ner, the other the Outer object.
Active verbs signifying to Inquire, to Eequire, to Teach, and
celare, to conceal, take two Accusatives, one of the Person, and
the other of the Thing.
Pusionem quendam Socrates interrogat quaedam gedmetrica. CiC. 1
Socrates asks an urchin sundry questions in geometry.
DOUBLE ACCUSATIVE. 171
Caesar Aeduos fmmentum fiagitabat. Caes. Caesar kept on demand-
ing the corn of the Aedui.
Quid nunc te, asine3 litteras doceam ? (258). Cic. Why should I now
give you a lesson in literature, you donkey f
Iter omnes celat. Nep. He keeps all in the dark about his route, conceals
Ms route from all.
Remarks.— 1. The Passive form with the Nominative of the Person and the Accusa-
tive of the Thing is sparingly used. Discere is more common than doceri.
Mot us doceri gaudet lonicos mattira virgo. Hon. The rare ripe maid de-
lights to learn Ionic dances.
Omnes mllitiae artes edoctus fuerat. Lrv. He had learned (been taught) thoroughly
all tJie arts of war.
2. The expressions vary a good deal. Observe :
This then is not the only way, Posco, I claim, and flagito,
For it is also right to say ; And always peto, postulo :
Locere and celare de, Take aliquid ab aliquo,
Interrogate de qua re\ While quaero takes ex, ab, de, quo.
Adherbal Bomam legatos miserat, qui senatum docerent de caede fratris.
Sall. Adherbal had sent envoys to Borne to inform the senate of the murder of his brother.
Bassus noster me de hoc libro celavit. Cic. Our friend Bassus has kept me in the
dark about this book. (So commonly in the Passive.)
Aquam a pumice nunc postulas. Plaut. You are now asking water of a pumice-
stone (blood of a turnip).
3. With doceo the Abi. of the Instrument is also used : docere fidibus, equo, to teach
the lyre, to teach riding. Doctus generally takes the Abl. : Doctus Graecls llttens, a
good Grecian.
4. Quid me vis \ what do you want of me ? what do you want me fort belongs to thia
general class,
5. On Double Accusative with compound verbs, see 330, R. 1 ; on the accus. neuter of
the Inner Object, see 331, R. 2.
334. Verbs of Naming, Making, Taking, Choosing, Showing,
may have two Accusatives of the same Person or Thing :
Iram bene Ennius initium dixit insaniae. Cic. Well did Ennius
call anger the beginning of madness.
Ancum Marcium regem populus creavit. Lrv. The people made
Ancus Marcius king.
Cato Valerium Flaccum collegam habuit. Nep. Goto had Va-
lerius Flaccus (as) colleague.
Socratem Apollo sapientissimum judicavit. Cic. Apollo
judged Socrates (to be) the wisest.
Atheniensibus Pythia praecepit ut Miltiadem sibi imperatorem
sumerent. Nep. The Pythia instructed the Athenians to take Miltiades
(as) their commander.
Praesta te virum. Cic. Show yourself a man.
Quern intellegimus divitem ? Cic. Whom do we understand by the
rich man ?
172 ACCUSATIVE OF EXTENT.
Remark. — The Double Accusative is turned into the Double Nominative with the
Passive (197). Reddo, / render, is not used in the Passive, but, instead thereof, fio, /
become.
Habeo, with two Accusatives, commonly means to have • in the sense of hold, regard*
other turns are used :
Utrum p r 5 ancilla m 6 habe"s an pro filia ? Plaut. Do you look upon me as a
maidservant or a daughter?
So habere servorum loco, (in) numero deSrum, to regard as slaves, as gods.
ACCUSATIVE OF EXTENT IN SPACE AND TIME.
335. The Accusative of Extent in Space accompanies the
verb, either with or without per, through.
1. "With per to denote entire occupancy (from one end to the
other, all through).
Spars! per provinciam milites, the soldiers scattered all through the
province.
Phoebidas iter per Thebas fecit. Nep. Phoebidas marched through
Thebes.
2. "Without per to denote distance, how far, how long.
Trabes inter se binos pedes distabant. Caes. Tlie beams were
two feet apart.
Campus Marath5n abest ab oppidd Atheniensium circiter m 1 1 i a
passuum decern. Nep. The plain (of) Marathon is about ten miles from
tlie city of Athens.
A recta conscientia transversum unguem non oportet disce-
dere. Cic. (327.)
Remarks.— 1. With abesse and distare, an Ablative of measure may also be em-
ployed :
Milibus passuum quattuor et vlginti abesse. to be twenty-four miles off.
2. When the point of reference is taken for granted, ab (a) with the Ablative may be
used:
Host 6s ab milibus passuum minus duobus castra posuerunt. Caes. The enemy
pitched their camp less than two miles off.
336. The Accusative of Extent in Space accompanies the
adjectives longus, long ; latus, ivide ; altus, high (deep).
Fossa pedes trecentos longa est, sex pedes alta, the ditch
is three hundred feet long, six feet deep.
Milites agger em latum pedes trecentos trlginta altum pedes
octoginta exstruxerunt. Caes. The soldiers raised an embankment
three hundred and thirty feet wide (and) eighty feet high.
ACCUSATIVE AS A GENERAL OBJECTIVE. 173
337. The Accusative of Extent in Time accompanies . the
verb, either with or without per, in answer to the question, How
long ?
Gorgias centum et novem vixit ann5s. Quiht. Gorgias lived 109
years.
Tenuisti provinciam per decern annos. Cic. You have held on to the
province for 10 years (10 years long).
Est mecum per totum diem. Plin. Ep. He is with me the livelong day.
Remark.- Per with the Accusative is frequently used like the Ablative of Time
within which. Per ilia tempora = illis temporibus, in those times.
So especially with the negative :
Nulla res per triennium nisi ad nutum istlus judicata est. Cic. Ko
matter was decided during {in) the three years except at Ms beck.
338. The Accusative of Extent in Time accompanies the
adjective natus, old (born) :
Puer decern annos natus est, the boy is ten years old.
Cyrus regnavit ann5s triginta ; quadraginta annos natus regnare
coepit. Cic. Cyrus reigned thirty years ; (he was) forty years old (when)
he began to reign.
ACCUSATIVE AS A GENERAL OBJECTIVE CASE.
339. The Accusative as the Objective Case generally is used
as an object of Thought, Perception, Emotion ; an object cre-
ated by the mind, evoked or deprecated by the will. Hence the
use of the Accusative :
1. In Exclamations.
2. With the Infinitive.
340. The Accusative is used in Exclamations as the general
object of Thought, Perception, or Emotion :
Me miserum, poor me /
Me caecum qui haec ante non vlderim. Cic. Blind me I not to have
peen all this before.
So in Exclamatory Questions :
Quo mihi fortunam, si non conceditur uti ? Hon. What (is the object
of) fortune to me if Trn not allowed to enjoy it t
Interjections are used:
Heu me miserum ! Alas ! poor me I
174 TERMINAL ACCUSATIVE.
6 miseras hominum mentes, 6 pectora caeca. LuCR. 0/i, the wretched
minds of men, oh, the blind hearts !
Remarks.— 1. 6 with the Vocative is an* address; with the Nom. a characteristic;
with the Accus. an object of emotion.
2. En, Lo! and Ecce, Lo here! take the Nominative :
En Varus, Lo Varus/ Ecce homo ! Behold the man!
In the earlier language the Accusative was used :
En tibi hominem ! Plaut. Here's your man!
Ecce me ! Plaut. Here am I!
So Eccum. ellum, eccam, eccillam, in comic poetry.
There seems to be some confusion between the interrogative En and Em (Hem).
Pro takes the Vocative: Pro di immortales ! Ye immortal gods ! The Accusative
occurs in : Pro deum (hominum, deum atque hominum) fidem ! For heaven's sake.
Hei ! and Vae ! take the Dative.
Hei mihi ! Ah me ! Vae victis ! Woe to the conquered!
341. The Accusative as the most general form of the substantive, and
the Infinitive as the most general form of the verb, are combined so as to
present the general notion of Subject and Predicate as an object of thought
or perception (537).
The Accusative with the Infinitive is used
1. In Exclamations :
HeiTij mea lux, te nunc, mea Terentia, sic vesari ! Hem, light of my
eyes, for you to be so harassed now, Terentia dear. (The idea of) you{r) be-
ing so harassed / So in idiomatic English, Me write !
2. As an Object. (See 527.)
3. As a Subject. (See 535.)
Remark.— The Infinitive was originally a Dative-Locative, but almost every syntac-
tical trace has vanished, and practically it has become an Accusative Neuter.
ACCUSATIVE OF THE LOCAL OBJECT.
Terminal Accusative.
342. The Accusative of the Local Object, Whither? com-
monly takes a preposition, such as: in, into; ad, to; versus,
-ward :
In Graeciam proficisci, to set out for Greece.
Remarks.— 1. The omission of the preposition, except as below stated, is poetical :
Italiam venit- Verg. He came to Italy.
2. Names of Towns and Smaller Islands are put in the Accusative of the place
Whither? without a preposition. So also rus, into the country ; domum, domos, home,
For further explanations, see 410.
DATIVE WITH TRANSITIVE VERBS. 175
Dative.
343. The Dative is the case of the Indirect Object, and al-
ways implies an object effected which may be contained in the
verb or expressed.
Nemo errat uni sibi. Sen. No one errs (makes .mistakes) to, for himself
alone.
Fortuna multis dat nimis, satis nulli. Mart. Fortune to many
gives too much, enough to none.
Remarks.— 1. In English the form of the Indirect Object is the same as that of the
Direct: " He shewed me (Dat.) a pure river ;" He shewed me (Ace.) to the priest. Origi-
nally a case of Personal Interest, it is used freely of Personified Things, sparingly of
Local Relations, and this despite the fact that Locative and Dative are blended in the
First and Third Declensions.
2. When parts of the body and the like are involved, the English possessive is often a
convenient though not an exact translation.
Tuo viro ocuil dolent. Ter. Your husband'1 s eyes ache. Nearer : Your husband
has a pain in the eyes. Tul viri oculi. Your husband's eyes.
DATIVE WITH TRANSITIVE VERBS.
344. The Indirect Object is put in the Dative with Transi-
tive verbs, which already have a Direct Object in the Accusa-
tive. Translation, to, for,. from. This Accusative becomes the
Nominative of the Passive.
Active Form :
To : Facile omnes, cum valemus, recta consilia aegrotis damus. Ter.
Beadily all of us, when well, give good counsel to the sick.
For : Frangam tonsori crura manusque simul. Mart. Id break the
barber's legs for Mm and hands at once.
From : Somnum mihi ademit. Cic. It took my sleep away from me.
Passive Form :
Perpetuus null! datur usus. Hor. Perpetual enjoyment (of a thing) is
given to no one.
Immeritis franguntur crura caballis. Juv. Tlie innocent hacks get tlieir
. legs broken for them.
Anna adimuntur militibus. Lrv. The soldiers have their arms taken
from them.
Domus pulchra dominis aedificatur non muribus. Cic. A handsome
house is built for its owners, not for the mice.
Remarks.— 1. For is nearer the Dative than To; but /or (in defence of) is pro : pro
patria morl, to die for one's country. To (with a view to) is ad or in, and when the idea
' of motion is involved the preposition must be used, even with dare, which gives its name
to the Dative :
1T6 DATIVE WITH INTRANSITIVE VERBS.
Hostis est uxor invlta quae a d virum nuptum datur. Platjt. An enemy is the
wife who \s given to a man in marriage against her will.
Litter as alicul dare, to give one a letter (to carry or to have).
Litteras ad aliquem dare, to indite a letter to one.
Rogas ut mea tibi scripta mittam. Cic. You ask me to send you my writings
(you wish to have them).
Libros jam pridem ad te misissem si esse edendos putassem. Cic. I should
have sent the boohs to you long since if 1 had thought they ou,ght to be published.
2. From is allowable, and even then merely approximate, when the relation of Per-
sonal Interest is involved, otherwise the Ablative is used. Both combined in
Aegroto domino (Dat.) deduxit corpore (Abl.) febres. Hob. From the sick mas-
ter^ body drained the ague {for the sick master from his body).
3. The poets are more free in their use of the Dative, inasmuch as their personifications
are bolder :
KarthaginI jam non ego nuntios mittam superbos. Hon. Carthage no more
shall I send haughty tidings.
Jam satis terrls nivis atque dlrae grandinis misit pater. Hon. Full, full
enough of snow and dire hail the Sire hath sent the land.
The extreme is reached when the Dative follows Ire and the like :
It caelo clamorque virum clangorque tubarum. Verg. Mounts to high heaven
warriws' shout and trumpets' I
DATIVE WITH INTKANSITIVE VERBS.
345. The Indirect Object is put in the Dative with many In-
transitive Verbs of Advantage or Disadvantage, Yielding and
Kesisting, Pleasure and Displeasure, Bidding and Forbidding,
such as : prodesse, to do good; nocere, to do harm ; indulgere, to
give tip ; cedere, to yield ; servlre, to lea slave; parere, oboedlre,
to be obedient ; credere, to lend belief ; ignoscere, to grant forgive-
ness ; placere, to give pleasure ; imperare, to give orders ; resist-
ere, to make resistance.
Nee prosunt domino quae pro sunt omnibus artes. Ov.
And the arts which do good to all do none to their master.
Verba nobis magis nocent, minus prosunt nostra quam aliena.
Quint. Our own words do us more harm (and) less good than the words of
others.
Indulsit lacrimis. Ov. She gate free course to her tears.
Turpe servlre puellae. Ov. It is disgraceful to play the slave to a
girl.
Tu ne cede malls. Vehg. Yield not thou to misfortunes.
Mundus deo paret et huic oboediunt maria terraeque. CiC.
The universe is obedient to God, and seas and lands hearken unto him.
Nimium ne crede color I. Verg. Trust not complexion all too
much.
DATIVE. 177
Ignosce timori. Prop. Grant pardon to my fear. (Be to my fear as
" you knew it not.)
Cui placeo protinus ipsa placet. Ov. The girl I please straight 'pleases
le herself.
Reliquum est ut tute tibi imperes. Cic. It remains that you give orders
i yourself (have absolute command over yourself).
Arbor resistit ventis. Ov. The tree offers resistance to the winds.
Remaeks. — 1. Among the most notable exceptions are : aequare, to be equal ; de
ire (to distinguish), to be becoming ; deficere, to be wanting ; juvare, to be a help ;
ibere, to order ; and vetare, to forbid, which take the Accusative :
Earn picturam imitati sunt multi, aequavit nemo. Plin. That style of
linting many have imitated, none equalled.
Forma v i r o s neglecta d e c e t. Ov. A careless beauty is becoming to men.
Me dies d e f i c i a t. Cic. The day would fail me.
Fortes fortuna a d j u v a t- Ter. Fortune favors the brave.
On jubeo aud veto see 424, R. 3. Fldo and confldo take the Ablative as well as the
ative.
2. The Dative use is often obscured by the absence of etymological translation. So
fibere alicui, to marry a man (to veil for him) ; mederi alicui, to heal (to take one's
easures for) a man ; supplico, / beg (I bow the knee to) ; persuadeo, I persuade (I
ake it sweet).
3. The novice is again reminded that the passives of these verbs are used impersonally :
08).
Qui invident egent, ill! quibus invidetur rem habent. Plaut. Those
ho envy are the needy, tlwse who are envied have the stuff.
DATIVE AKD VERBS COMPOUNDED WITH PREPOSITIONS.
346. Many verbs compounded with the prepositions
ad, ante, con, in, inter,
ob, post, prae, sub and super,
&ke the Dative, especially in moral relations.
J Transitive Verbs have an accusative case besides.
Pelopidas omnibus perlculls adfuit. Rep. Pelopidas was present
'o help) in all dangers.
j Virtus omnibus rebus anteit. Plaut. Virtue goes before all
hings.
Non omnis aetas, Lucie, 1 u d 6 convenit. Plaut. Not every age,
*ood) Lydus (Playfair), sorts with play.
At lupus et turpes instant morientibus ursi. Ov. But the
oolf and foul bears press the dying hard.
! Probus invidet nemini. Cic. The upright man {looks hard at) envies no
ne.
178 DATIVE.
Aris tides interfuit pugnae navali apud Salaminem. Nep.
Aristides was engaged in the naval battle off Salamis.
Obsta principiis. Ov. Oppose the beginnings.
Hannibal Alexandra Magno n5n postponendus est.
Just. Hannibal is not to be pat below Alexander the Great.
Omnibus Druidibus praeest unus. Caes. At tfte head of all the
Druid* is one man.
Blanda quies victis furtim subrepsit ocelli s. Ov. Caressing
sleep crept stealthily o'er her vanquished eyes.
Miseris succurrere disco. Verg. I learn to succor the wretched.
Anatum ova gallinis saepe supponimus, Cic. We often put
ducks' eggs under hens (for them to hatch).
Lucumo superfuit patri. Liv. Lucumo survived his father.
So with Transitive Verbs, compounded with de and ex.
Caesar Dejotaro tetrarchiam eripuit, eidem que detraxit
Armeniam. Cic. Caesar wrested from Dejotarus his tetrarchy, and stripped
from him Armenia.
Eemarks.— 1. When the local signification preponderates, the preposition is repeated
with its proper case :
Adhaeret navis a d scopulum, the ship sticks to the rock.
Ajax incubuit in gladium, Ajaxfell on his sword.
Congredi cum hoste, to engage the enemy.
Detrahere anulum d e digito, to draw a ring from one's finger.
The tendency in later Latin is to neglect this distinction, which even in the best period
is not rigidly observed. Compounds with cum (con-) commonly repeat the preposition :
always communicare aliquid cum aliquo, to communicate something to a man
(share it with him).
2. The analogy of this class of verbs, which imply Nearness, is followed in poetry and
*ater prose by haereo, misceo, jungo, and others.
Haeret later! letalis arundo. Verg. Sticks to the side the lethal shaft.
Quod haerere in equo senex posset (542) admirari solebamus. Cic. We used
to wonder that the old man could stick to his horse.
Misce stultitiam consiliis brevem. Hon. Mix with sense a little nonsense {add
to sense a little spice of nonsense).
Non potest amor cum timore miscSri. Sen. Love cannot mingle with fear.
Jungitur TJrsidio. Juv. She is yoked to Orson.
Junctus is found in Cicero with the Dative.
VERBS WITH ACCUSATIVE AND DATIVE.
347. Some verbs are construed both with the Accusative and
with the Dative.
Sometimes there is hardly an appreciable difference; sometimes the
Dative emphasizes the personal relation.
Comitor aliquem, I accompany a man ; comitor alicui, I act as com-
DATIVE. 170
panion to a man; adulor, generally Accusative, I fawn on; aemulor,
I rival, I am a rival ; praestolor, I wait for.
Sometimes the difference follows naturally from the difference of case :
Cavere alicui, to take precautions for )
' * J {.someone.
aliquem, against )
Quique aliis cavit n5n c a v e t ipse s i b i. Ov. (298.)
Hie niger est, hunc tu, Romane, caveto. Hon. He is a black fellow ;
against Mm he thou on thy guard, oh Eoman !
Metuere alicui, to fear for ) orxnnnM „ n
' J . J \ some one.
aliquem, to dread )
So all Verbs of Fearing.
Consulere alicui, to take measures for, consult the interest of )
7 T J ' J y some one.
aliquem, to consult )
Convenire alicui, to be suitable for ) o/wn/t ^a
m y some one.
aliquem, to meet )
J1 !■ alicui rei, to moderate \
Temperare ) ^ ^ hounds to y a matter.
aliquid, to manage J
To be noticed are the constructions of invideo, I envy.
Invidere alicui aliquid (ClC.) J ((> begmdge a man a m
(in) aliqua re )
alicujus rei (once in Horace).
alicujus alicui rei, to envy something belonging to a man.
Non inviderunt laudes suas mulieribus viri Romani. Liv. The men
of Rome did not begrudge the women the honors that were due them.
Invidet igne rogi miseris. Lucan. Begrudges the hapless men the
' funeral fire.
| Vacare rei |
) to be at leisure for \
) to attend to >a matter.
Vacare re, a re, to be at leisure from )
DATIVE WITH VERBS OF GIVING AND PUTTING.
348. A few verbs, chiefly of Giving and Putting, take a
Dative with an Accusative, or an Accusative with an Ablative,
according to the conception.
Dono tibi librum, I present (to) you a book.
Dono te iibro, I present you with a book.
-.. , j urbi murum, I put round the city a wall.
( urbem muro, I surround the city with a wall.
So also aspergere, to besprinkle and to sprinkle on ; impertire, to endow
1 SO DATIVE.
and to give; induere, to clothe and to put on; exuere, to strip of and to
strip off ; miscere, to mix and to mix in.
DATIVE OF POSSESSOR
349. Esse, to be, with the Dative, denotes an inner connection
between its subject and the Dative, and is commonly translated
by the verb to have:
Mihi est amicus, I have a friend.
An nescis longas regibus esse manus ? Ov. Or perhaps you do not
know that kings have long arms f
Remarks.— 1. The predicate of esse with the Dative is translated in the ordinary-
man ner :
Caesar amicus est mihi, Caesar is a friend to me (amicus meus, my friend, friend
of mine).
2. The Dative is never simply equivalent to the Genitive. The Dative is the Person
interested in the Possession, hence the Possession is emphatic; the Genitive character-
izes the Possession by the Possessor, hence the Possessor is emphatic.
Latin! concedunt Eomam caput Latio esse. Liv. The Latins concede that Latium
has its capital in Rome. (Latii : that Latium's capital was Rome.)
3. On the attraction of the Dative with nomen esse (322).
4. The possession of qualities is expressed by in and the Ablative or some other turn:
In Cicerone magna fuit eloquentia, Cicero had great eloquence.
Cimon habebat satis eloquentiae. Nep. Cimon had eloquence enough.
DATIVE OF THE OBJECT FOR WHICH.
350. Certain verbs take the Dative of the Object for Wliich
(to what end), and often at the same time a Dative of the Per-
sonal Object For Wliom, or To W7iom, as in the legal phrase, cul
bono ? To whom is it (for) an advantage ? == who is advantaged ? *
Nimia fiducia magnae calamitati solet esse. Nep. Excessive corir
fidence is usually a great calamity.
Virtus sola neque datur dono neque accipitur. Sall. Virtue alone
is neither given nor taken as a present.
Paupertas pr o b r 6 haberi coepit. Sall. Poverty began to be held (as)
a disgrace.
Pausanias rex Lacedaemoniorum venit At tic is auxilio. Nep.
Pausanias, king of the Lacedaemonians , came to the help of the Attics.
Viti5 mihi dant quod hominis necessarii mortem graviter fero.
* Such verbs are: esse, to be ; fieri, to become, to turn out'; dare, to put ; mittere, to
tend; accipere, to receive; venire, to come; relinquere, to leave; habere, to hold i
vertere, to interpret ; ducere, to count, and the like.
DATIYE. 181
VIatius ap. Cic. They charge it to me as a fault that I resent the murder of
me so near to me.
Caesar receptul can! jussit. Caes. Caesar ordered a retreat to be
ounded.
Remark. — The origin of this usage seems to be mercantile (Key). In English we treat
Jront and Loss as persons.
Quern fors dierum cumque dabit lucre appone. Hon. "Every day that Fate
hall give, set down to Profit.''''
On the Dative of the Gerund and Gerundive in a similar sense, see 430.
ETHICAL DATIYE.
351. The Ethical Dative indicates special interest in the
iction. It may be called the Dative of Feeling, and its use in
Latin (and Old English) is confined to the personal pronouns.
Tu mihi Ant5nii exemplo istius audaciam defendis? Cic. Do you
lefend me (to my face) by Antony's example that fellow's audacity f
Ecce tibi Sebosus! Cic. Here's your Sebosus! "She's a civil modest wife, one (I
ell you) that will not miss you morning nor evening prayer." — Shakespeare.
Et quoscunque meo fecisti nomine versus, ure mihi, laudes desine
labere meas. Prop. And whatever verses you have made on my account,
mm them me (I beg) ; cease to keep praises of me.
Remark.— Especially to be noted is sibi velle, to want, to mean : Quid tibi v l S,
aulier ? Hor. What do you want, woman f Quid sibi vult haec oratio \ What
loes this speech mean?
DATIVE OF THE AGENT.
352. The Dative is used with Passive Verbs, in prose chiefly
vith the Perfect Passive, to show the interest which the agent
;akes in the result. That the person interested is the agent is
j>nly an inference. (See 206.)
Res mihi tota provisa est. Cic. I have had the whole matter provided
for.
Carmina scripta mihi sunt nulla. Ov. I have no poems written , (there-
re) have written no poems.
r
Remark.— Instances of this Dative with the Tenses of continuance are poetical, or
.dmit of a different explanation :
Barbarus hie ego sum quia non intellegor ulli. Ov. lam a barbarian here be-
ause I can't make myself understood to any one.
Whenever an Adiective or an equivalent is used, the Dative Plural may bean Ablative :
Sic dissimillimls bestiolis communiter cibus quaeritur. Cic. So, though these
itUe creatures are so very unlike, their food is sought in common.
182 DATTVE.
Carmina quae scrlbuntur aquae potoribus. Hor. Poems which are written when
peopk art water-drinkers.
Cena ministratur puerls tribus. Hor. Dinner is served, {the waiters being) the
waiters art (but) three.
353. The agent of the Gerund and Gerundive is put in the
Dative.
Hoc milii faciendum est, I have this to be done (this is to be done by me, I
must do this).
Est mala sed cunctis ista terenda via. Prop. That is a bad road, but
one all have to travel.
Desperanda tibl salva concordia socru. Juv. You must despair of
harmony while Mother-in-law }s alive.
Compare the Dative with verbals in -bilis : mihi amabilis, lovable in
my eyes.
Remark. — When the verb itself takes the Dative, the Ablative with ab (a) is em-
ployed for the sake of clearness :
CI vibus a vobis consulendum. Cic. The interest of the citizens must be consulted by
you.
Where there is no ambiguity there is no need of ab.
Linguae moderandum est tibi. Plaut. You must put bounds to your tongue.
DATIVE OF PARTICIPLES.
354. Datives of Participles are used as predicative attributes.
Phaselis conspicitur prima terrarum Rhodum a Cilicia petentibus.
Liv. Phaselis is the first land sighted as you make for Rhodes from Cilicia
(to people as they make for Rhodes).
In universum aestimanti (= Si aestimes) plus penes peditem rdboris.
Tac. If you look at it as a whole, there is more real strength in the infantry.
Remark.— Notice the Greekish phrase : mihi volenti est, lam willing for it to be so.
DATIVE WITH DERIVATIVE SUBSTANTIVES.
355. A few derivative substantives take the Dative of their
primitives :
Justitia est obtemperatio legibus, Cic. Justice is obedience to the laws.
Remark.— Otherwise the Dative must have a verb to produce the Object Effected.
DATIVE WITH ADJECTIVES.
356. Adjectives of Likeness, Fitness, Friendliness, Nearness,
and the like, with their opposites, take the Dative :
GENITIVE. 183
Rara avis in terris nigroque simillima cycno. Juv. A
"are bird in this worlds and very like a black swan.
Non ego sum 1 a u d I n5n natus idoneus armis. Prop. I am
not fitted, by nature for glory, not fitted for arms.
Utilis urbl. Hor. Useful to the city.
Arnica luto sus. Hon. A hog, devoted to the mire.
Semper, tu sclto, flamma fumo est proxima. Plaut. Bear thou
in mind, that fire is aye next door to smoke.
Testis id dicit quod ill! causae maxime est alienum. Cic. The
witness says what is especially damaging to that case {side).
Remarks.— 1. Many adjectives which belong to this class become substantives, and
as such are construed with the Genitive : amicus, friend ; affinis, connection • aequalis,
contemporary; alienus, foreign, strange; cognatus, kinsman; communis, common ;
contrarius, opposite ; par, match; proprius, peculiaris, own, peculiar ; similis, Wee ;
(•■we ne'er shall look upon his like again"), especially of gods and men ; sacer, set apart,
sacred ; superstes, survivor.
Domini similis es. Ter. You are like your master.
Virtute sis par dispar fortunis p a t r i s. Attius. Be thou thy father's match,
in valor, not in luck.
2. The object toward which is expressed by the Accusative with in, erga, adversus :
Manlius fuit severus in fllium. Cic. Manlius was severe toward his son.
Me esse scit erga se benevolum. Plaut. He knows that I am kindly disposed
toward him.
Adversus deos immortales impii jtidicandi sunt. Cic. They are to be judged im-
pious toward the immortal gods.
3. The object for which may be expressed by the Accusative with ad, to :
Homo ad nullam rem utilis. Cic. A good-for-nothing fellow.
This is the more common construction with adjectives of fitness.
4. Propior, nearer, proximus, next, are construed also (like prope, near) with the
Accusative and the Ablative with ab, off :
Propius est fidem, it is nearer belief, i. e., more likely.
Qui te proximus est, he ivho is next to you.
Proximus a tectis ignis defenditur aegre. Ov. A fire next door is kept off with
difficulty (is hard to keep off).
5. Alienus, foreign, strange, is also construed with the Ablative, with or without ab
(a):
Homo sum, human! nihil a me alienum puto. Ter. I am a man, and nothing
1 that pertains to man do I consider foreign to me.
6. In poetry, Idem, the same, is often construed after the analogy of the Greek, with
the Dative.
Invitum qui servat idem facit Occident!. Hor. (296, K. 1.)
7. Derived adverbs take the Dative.
II. INTERNAL CHANGE.
Genitive.
357. The Genitive Case is the Case of the Complement, and
is akin to the Adjective with which it is often parallel. It is the
substantive form of the Specific Characteristic.
184 GENITIVE.
The chief English representatives of the Genitive are :
The Possessive case :
Domus regis, the king's palace.
The Objective case with of:
Domus regis, the palace of the king.
Substantives used as adjectives or in composition :
Arbor abietis, fir-tree.
Remakks.— 1. Other prepositions than of are not unfrequently used, especially with
the Objective Genitive. (361, R. 1.)
Patriae quis exsul se quoque ftigit % Hon. What exile from his country ever fled
himself as well?
Boiorum triumph! spem collegae rellquit. Liv. He left the hope of a triumph
over the Boii to his colleague.
Via mortis. Liv. The death-path, the way to death. Elsewhere : via a d mortem,
2. An abstract Noun with the Genitive is often to be translated as an attribute :
Verni temporis suavitas, the sweet spring-time.
And, on the other hand, the predicative attribute is often to be translated as an ab-
stract noun with of :
Ante Romam conditam, before the founding of Rome. (324, R. 3.)
Notice also hie metus, this fear = fear of this, and kindred expressions.
358. The Genitive is employed:
I. and II. Chiefly as the complement of Nouns Substantive
and Adjective.
III. Occasionally as the complement of Verbs.
Remark.— The Locative of the Second Declension coincides in form with the Geni-
tive, and is generally treated under the head of the Genitive. (See 412.)
I. GENITIVE WITH NOUNS SUBSTANTIVE.
ADNOMINAL GENITIVE.
Appositive Genitive, or Genitive of Specification.
359. The Genitive is sometimes used to specify the contents
of generic words instead of Apposition in the same case:
Vitium nimiae tarditatis. Quint. The fault of excessive sloioness.
Virtus continentiae. Cic. The virtue of self-control.
So especially with vox, expression; nomen, name; verbum,
tvord, verb: vox voluptatis, the word "pleasure;" nomen regis,
the name or title of Icing,
SuUa nomen Felicis assumpsit. Vell. Sulla assumed the surname (of)
" the Lucky."
GE'STITIYE. 185
"Remark. — So also occasionally other words, such as :
Urbs ftomae, the city of Rome.
Arbor abietis, fir-tree.
Spretae injuria formae. Verg. The insult of despised beauty.
POSSESSIVE GENITIVE.
Genitive of Property.
360. The Possessive Genitive is the substantive form of an
adjective attribute with which it is often parallel :
IDomus regis = domus regia, the palace of the king, the king's palace =
the royal palace.
Remarks. — 1. The adjective form is often preferred. So always with the possessive
pronoun : amicus meus, a friend of mine; canis alienus, a strange dog, another man's
dog; filius nerilis, master's son. So of cities: Thales Milesius, Tholes of Miletus.
2. The attention of the student is called to the variety of forms which possession may
take. Statua Myronis, Myron's statue, may mean : 1. A statue which Myron owns ;
2. Wbich Myron has made ; 3. Which represents Myron.
3. Observe the brief expressions : Ventum erat ad Vestae, We (they) had come to
Vesta's (i. e., temple, aedem) ; Hasdrubal Gisgonis, Gisgo's Hasdrubal, Hasdrubal
Gisgo's son (as it were, Hasdrubal 0' Gisgo) ; Flaccus Claudil, Claudius's Flaccus =
Flaccus the slave or freedman of Claudius.
4. The chorographic (geographic) Genitive is rare and late :
Res Cnalcidem Euboeae venit. Liv. The king came to Chalcis of (in) Euboea.
ACTIVE AND PASSIVE GENITIVE.
361. When the Substantive on which the Genitive depends
contains the idea of an action, the possession may be active or
passive. Hence the division into
1. The Active or Subjective Genitive : amor Dei, the love of
God, the love ivhich God feels (God loves).
2. Passive or Objective Genitive: amor Dei, love of God, love
toward God (God is loved).
Remarks.- 1. The English form in of is used either actively or passively : the love of
women. Hence, to avoid ambiguity, other prepositions than of are often substituted for
the Passive Genitive, such as for, toward, and the like. So, also, sometimes in Latin:
Voluntas provinciae erga Caesarem, the good-will of the province toward Caesar.
Odium in hominum universum genus, Hate toward all mankind.
2. Both Genitives may be connected with the same Substantive :
Quanta sit aviditas hominum talis victoriae scio. Cic. How great the eagerness
of men for such a victory is, 1 know.
362. The Genitive of the Personal Pronouns, except nostrum
and vestrum, is used as the Passive Genitive :
1 86 GENITIVE.
Amor mei, love to me.
Desiderium tui, longing for thee.
Memoria nostri, memory of us (our memory).
Remark.— Nostrum and vestrum are used as Partitive Genitives :
Magna pars nostrum, a great part of us ; uterque vestrum, either (both) of you.
Nostri melior pars means the better part of our being, our better part.
With omnium, the forms nostrum and vestrum must be used.
363. The Possessive Pronoun is generally used as the Active
Genitive.
Amor meuSj my love {the love which I feel).
Desiderium tuum, your longing {the longing which you feel).
Additional attributives are put in the Genitive :
Hoc negotium mea ipsius (sdlius, unius) opera perfectum est. -This
business was finished by my exertions alone.
Remark. — Occasionally, however, in Latin, as in English, the Possessive Pronoun
is used passively : desiderium tuum, longing for thee ; injuria tua, your wrong (" The
deep damnation of his taking off").
GENITIVE OF QUALITY.
364. The Genitive of Quality must always have an Adjective
or its equivalent :
Mitis ingenii juvenis. Lrv. A youth of mild disposition.
Homo nihil! {= nullius pretii). Platjt. A fellow of no account.
Tridui via. Caes. A three days1 journey.
Non multi cibi hospitem accipies, multi joci. Cic. You will receive a
guest who is a small eater but a great joker.
Remark. — The Genitive of Quality is less common than the Ablative, being found
chiefly of the essentials. The Genitive always of Number, Measure, Time, Space ; the
Ablative always of externals, so of parts of the body. Often the use seems indifferent.
(402.)
GENITIVE AS A PREDICATE.
365. The Genitives of Possession and Quality maybe used
as Predicates :
Domus est regis, the house is the king's.
Vir est magni ingenii, the man is (one) of great genius.
Remarks.— 1. The Possession appears in a variety of forms, and takes a variety of |
translations :
Hujus ero vlvus, mortuus hujus ero. Prop. Hers I shall be, living ; dead, hers M
shall be.
GEmTIYE. 187
Omnia quae mulieris fuerunt viri fiunt Cic. All that was the wife's (property)
ecomes the husband's.
Is [Hercules] dlcebatur esse Myronis. Cic. That (statue of Hercules) was said to
e Myron "s (work).
Nolae senatus Romanorum, plebs Hannibalis erat Liv. At Nola the senate was
Dn the side) of the Romans, the common folk (on) Hannibal's.
Bamnatio est judicum, paenalegis, Condemning is the judges' (business), punish-
ment the law's.
Est animi ingenui cui multum debeas eidem plurimum velle debere, Cic. It
hows the feeling of a gentleman to be willing to owe very much to him to whom you already
we much.
Pauperis est numerare pecus, 'Tis only the poor man that counts his flock ('Tis the
nark of a poor man to count the flock).
Stultitiae est, U is folly ; Moris est, it is customary.
So also with facere, to make (cause to be) : Romanae dicionis facere, to bring under
he Roman sway.
; 2. In the Third Declension of the Adjective, the Genitive is the usual form :
Amentis est superstitione praeceptorum contra rationem causae tranl.
^tjint. It is madness to let oneself be carried by a superstitious regard for rules counter to
the requirements of the case.
Sometimes the Nom. of the Third Declension is used in combination with the Nom.
f the Second.
Pigrum et iners videtur siidore adquirere quod possis sanguine parare. Tac.
It is thought slcnv and spiritless to acquire by sweat what you can get by blood.
3. The same methods of translation apply to the Possessive Pronoun in the Predicate
R Vengeance is mine") : meuni est, it is my property, business, way.
Non est meum mentirl. Ter. Lying is not my way {I do not lie).
PARTITIVE GENITIVE.
366. The Genitive stands for the Whole to which a Part be-
longs :
Magna vis militum, a great number of soldiers.
Centum militum, a hundred (of the) soldiers.
n mllitum, those (of the) soldiers.
Fortissimi mllitum, the bravest (of the) soldiers.
Satis mllitum, enough (of) soldiers (soldiers enough).
367. The Partitive Genitive is used with substantives of
Quantity, Number, Weight :
Modius tritici, a measure of wheat.
Libra f arris, a pound of spelt.
Ala equitum, a squadron of cavalry.
Remark. — This is sometimes called the Genitlvus Generis. Whether the conception
be partitive or not, depends on circumstances.
Medimnus tritici, a medimnus of wheat may be a medimnus of wheat (Genitlvus
I1 Generis) or a medimnus of wheat (Partitive).
368. The Partitive Genitive is used with numerals, both
special and general :
1;; z; :r:z
l nntttnm, a hundred (of the) soldiers, a hundred (of) soldiers
C;e-:-_--~ ~Ll;:es. \ :\.: ~ . -" :; :;"":••
Zzdntas rex, ike fifth king.)
Mnlti -itisiJMMij nurajr of the soldiers, many soldiers.
:»:_::: ~r'::§s. : ; :■;':".::..
?.i ••_.- -.= — 1 7:t I:;'.-: li:._'iii-r : :iz::.'.j :::_.: 5 ;ir ; -r::::;!. — ".ess i: ;
t - ; . . - -. — ; i_i r" :
Qnnt efvium adsnxtf .Sw amgr cdxkess are present? Quot elves adsunt
£ - - ■ ?
:::
Bra Ueceatl eomjUravimmg, &r«e hundred of us Juroe bound ourselves by an oath.
A«i#»a» ^BflB ***fit4*» 3iabei-//ifi*<fe aticw fee Afl* tit oreot number {of whom \ t
;. .: :::..-:
;._:: tz::: ' .": .: . . : ■- '''-: ~ '.; ..:.-*
Mere Out English language familiarly employs the partitioii. Exceptions are verj
£ 1 9 J t : := :. .:\. vr-h ?; jiiouns :
E inTlilmn, zfose (of the ) soldiers.
37C V .. Svc . ;. used with C:mpara tires anc
^ : y::\y. v~ = :
B e run nlthmw ille bonornm, J 0 - £ fawf (5/ the good kings.
TtwMtiVX*.— L When tkere are only two, Hie comparative exb.an.sts the degr r; e
0— >-*r.,.VL ;:'
2. UterqiLe- «flfeer (fctffc), is commonly used as an adjective with substantive?.
uterque consuL «&ft£r «s*r~ _ :- : -. :; as a Babetanttre witt pronoun*: uterqut
-
371 igni
omi-
tanttnn. goa : much), aliqnantum, sorr^wkat.
mtiltror ye, rfammj mart.
r- * ~ '.^r- :•::.< mi:-. rninimxim, least.
panm
\/x£, idem. ffti 01016
quod and q ipotmd*.
GEXITITE. 189
Carnis plus habet Aeschines, minus lacertorum. Qulst. Aesdiines
as more flesh , less muscle.
Cimon habebat satis eloquentiae. Xep. (349, R 4.)
Surgit amari aliquid, quod in ipsis floribus angat. Lucr. Uprises
rmething bitter to choke us mid the very flowers.
Nihil reliqui facere. 1. To leave nothing {not a thing). 2. (Occasionally),
leave nothing undone.
Remarks. — 1. The conception is often not so much partitive as characteristic. As we
7 : Scelus puerl es. Plact. You are a rascal of a boy — where the boy is the rascaL
Quodcumque hoc regni. Verg. This realm, what (little) there is of it (what little
aim I have).
2. Neuter Adjectives of the Second Declension can he treated as substantives in the
mitive ; not so Adjectives of the Third, except in combination with Adjectives of the
icond : aliquid bonum. or boni, something good ; aliquid memorabile, something
^movable • aliquid boni et memorabilis, something good and memorable.
Vixque tenet lacrimas quia nil lacrimabile cernit Ov. And scarce restrains
r tears, because she descries naught to shed tears for.
3. The partitive construction is not admissible with a preposition: ad tantum StU-
um, to so much zeal. (Exceptions are late : ad multum diei./ar into the day.)
4. The Partitive Genitive is also used with Adverbs of Quantity, Place, Extent : ar-
orum affatim, abundance of arms; ubi terrarum gentium'? where in the world?
ic. eo arrogantiae prccessit. he got to this, that pitch of presumption. (Later Latin,
m temporis. at that time). Notice especially the phrase: quoad ejus facere pos-
m, as far as lean do so.
5. Instead of the Partitive Genitive with Numerals. Pronouns. Comparatives, and
perlatives, the Ablative may be employed with ex. out of. de.from (especially with
oper names and singulars), or the Accusative with inter, among: Grallus provocat
ium ex Romanls, The Gaul challenges one of the Romans ; unus d e multis, one of
-■■? many (the masses) ; Croesus inter reges opulentissimus. Croesus, wealthiest of
igs; (but in a series : quorum unus. alter, tertius.)
6. On the Attribute used partitively, s^e 287. R.
7. Qualitative Adjectives are combined with the Genitive in later Latin :
Degeneres canum caudam sub alvum flectunt. Plin. Currish dogs curl the tail
under the belly.
In poetry and silver prose the Neuter of Qualitative Adjectives is frequently used be-
e the Genitive :
Ardua dum metuunt amittunt vera vial. (87, R. 1.) Ltjcr. The while they fear
■■ steeper road, they miss the true.
So amara ciirarum, bitter elements of cares. Utter cares ; strata viarum. stratae
ie, the paved streets.
8. The Partitive Genitive as a Predicate is Greekish :
Fies nobilium tu quoque fontium. Hok. Thou too shalt count among the famous
untains.
-GENITIVE WITH PREPOSITIONAL SUBSTANTIVES.
372. Causa, gratia, ergo, and instar, are construed with the
Bnitive :
Causa and gratia, for the sake, commonly follow the Genitive. So also
100 GENITIVE.
ergo, on account (in old formulae). Instar is an old Accusative, as it were,
an "instead."
Sophistae quaestus causa philosophabantur. CiC. The profess-
ors of wisdom dealt in philosophy for the sake of gain.
Tu me a m 5 r i s magis quam honoris servavisti gratia. Enn.
Thou didst save me more for love's (sake) than (thou didst) for honor's sake.
Virtutis erg 5j 0;i account of valor.
Instar montis equus. Verg. A Jiorse to stand in mountain's
stead (a horse that stood a mountain high).
Plato mihi unus instar est omnium. CiC. Plato by himself is in
my eyes worth them all.
Remark.— So mea, tua, sua causa, seldom gratia.
II. GEKTTIYE WITH STOUTS ADJECTIVE.
373. Adjectives of Fulness, of Participation, and of Power,
of Knowledge and Ignorance, of Desire and Disgust, take the
Genitive:
Plenus rlmarum, full of chinks (" a leaky vessel ").
Particeps consilii, a sharer in the plan.
Compos mentis, in possession of (one's) mind.
Peritus belli, versed in war.
Cupidus gloria e, grasping after glory.
Fastidiosus Latinarum literarum, too dainty for Latin.
Omnium rerum inscius, a universal ignoramus.
Cur non ut plenus vitae conviva recedis ? Lucr. (268.)
Sitque memor nostrl necne, referte mihi. Ov. (195, E. 7.)
C o n s c i a mens recti Famae mendacia risit. Ov. (329, R. 1.)
Agricolam laudat juris legumque peritus. Hor. TJie hiu
bandman('s lot) is praised by the counsel learned in the law.
Venator tenerae conjugis immemor. Hor. The hunter of his te?
der spouse unmindful.
Vis consili expers mole ruit sua. Hor. Force void of couns
tumbles by its own mass.
Mentis inops gelida formidine lora remisit. Ov. Senseless fro
chill fear y he let go the reins.
m
■i;
ten:
Or
I
k
k
Hi
i
h
I %:
Remarks.— 1. The following adjectives— refert us, stuffed; praeditus, endowed i»
contentus, satisfied ; fretus, supported— show their participial nature by being co
Btrned with the Al)lative :
Vita referta bonis, a life filled to overflowing with blessings.
Membrls humanls esse praeditum, to be endowed with human limbs.
Fretus opulentia, trusting in wealth.
Uxor contenta est quae bona est uno viro. Plaut. A wife who is good is co
tented with one husband.
IT:
GENITITE.
191
2. Plenus, full, sometimes takes the Ablative :
Maxima quaeque domus servis est plena superbis. Juv. Every great house is
id with overbearing slaves.
8. Dignus, worthy, and indignus, unworthy, are construed with the Ablative :
Digne puer meliore fLamma. Hou. Boy worthy of a better flame.
Vita tua dignior aetas. Verg. Your age is worthier of life.
The Genitive is rare.
4. Liber, free, and vacuus, empty, take the Ablative with or without ab (a) (388) :
Liberum (vacuum) esse metu (a metu), to be free from (void of) fear.
5. On alienus, strange, see 356, R. 5.
t On aequalis, communis, conscius, contrarius, par, similis, superstes, and the
:e, see 356, R. 1.
6. Verbs of Filling sometimes follow the analogy of plenus, full, and take the Geni-
re.
On egere and indigere with the Gen., see 389, R. 2. .
The poets carry the analogy of Plenty and Want very far.
Bitissimus agri. Verg. Rich of domain.
r Solutus operum. Hon. loosed of (released from) work.
Thus the Genitive in poetry comes near the Ablative or Whence case :
*! Besine mollium tandem querelarum. Hon. Cease at last from zvomanish com-
linings.
GENITIVE WITH VERBALS.
374. Present Participles take the Genitive when they lose
teir verbal nature; and so do verbals in -ax in poetry and later
:ose :
i
Epaminondas adeo veritatis erat diligens nt ne joco quidem
entire tur. Nep. Epaminondas was so careful of the truth as not to tell lies
m in jest.
Omnium consensu capax imperii nisi imperasset. Tac. By general
\Xment capable of empire, had he not become emperor.
Remarks.— 1. The participle is transient; the adjective permanent. The simple test
>the substitution of the relative and the verb : amans (participle), loving (who is lov-
i) ; amans (adjective), fond, (substantive), lover ; patiens (part.), bearing (who is bear-
1 ; patiens (adjective), enduring, (substantive), a sufferer.
1 2. In later Latin and in the poets almost all adjectives that denote an affection of the
nd take a Genitive of the Thing to which the affection refers : aeger timoris, sick of
r; ambiguus consilii, doubtful of purpose ; vitae dubius, doubtful of life.
I Here model prose requires the Ablative or a Preposition.
;The analogy of these adjectives is followed by others, so that the Genitive becomes a
fiplement to the adjective just as it is to the corresponding substantive.
Integer vitae. Hor. Spotless of life; like Integritas vitae. (Fama et fortunis
teger. Sall. In fame and fortunes intact.)
3. The seat of the feeling is also put in the Genitive, chiefly with animl (which is
?pected of being a Locative). Aeger animi, sick at heart, heartsick; audax ingenii,
ring of disposition.
n Hi-
W\
192 GENITIVE.
III. — GENITIVE WITH VERBS.
GENITIVE WITH VERBS OF MEMORY.
375. Verbs of Keminding, Remembering, and Forgetting,
take the Genitive :
Te veteris amicitiae commonefacio. [Cic] 1 remind you of our old
friendship.
Est proprium stultitiae aliorum vitia cernere, oblivisci suorum. Cic.
The fact is, it shows a fool to have keen eyes for the faults of others, to forget
one's oicn.
Ipse jubet mortis te meminisse Deus. Mart. God himself bids
you remember death.
Remarks.— 1. Verbs of Reminding also take the Ablative with de (so regularly
moneo), and the Ace. Neut. of a Pronoun or Numeral Adjective :
Oro ut Terentiam moneatis de" testaments. Cic. I beg you to put Terentia in
mind of the will.
Discipulos id unum moneo. Quint. (331, R. 2.;
2. Verbs of Remembering and Forgetting also take the Accusative, especially of
things :
Haec olim meminisse juvabit- Verg. To remember these things one day will givt
us pleasure.
Dulces moriens reminiscitur Argos. Verg. Dying, he remembers sweet Argos.
Oblivisci nihil soles nisi injurias. Cic. You are wont to forget nothing excep
injuries.
Recordor (literally = I bring to heart, to mind) is commonly construed with the Ace.
Et v o c e m Anchisae magni vultumqne recordor. Verg. And I recall (call tj
mind) the voice and countenance of Anchises the Great. With persons, de.
MeminI, I bear in mind, /(am old enough to) remember, takes the Accusative :
Antipatrum tu probe meministl. Cic. You remember Antipater very well.
3. Venit mini in mentem, it com.es into (np to) my mind, may be construed imper
eonaliy with the Genitive, or personally with a subject :
Venit mini in mentem Platonis. Cic. (or Plato.) Plato rises before my mind's eye
Certiorem aliquem facere, to inform, follows the analogy of Verbs of Reminding.
GENITIVE WITH VERBS OF EMOTION.
376. Misereor and miseresco, / pity, take the Genitive, an*
miseret, it moves to pity, paenitet, it repents, piget, it irks, pudef
it makes ashamed, taedet and pertaesum est, it tires, take the Ac!
ensative of the Person Who Feels, and the Genitive of the Ex
citing Cause :
Miserere sororis. Verg. Pity thy sister t
Suae quemque fortunae paenitet. Cic. Each man is discontenit
with his lot.
V
GENITIVE. 193
Miseret te aliorum, tul te nee m i s e r e t nee pudet. Platjt.
You are sorry for others, for yourself yon are neither sorry nor ashamed.
Pudet is also used with the Geuitive of the Person whose Presence
excites the shame :
Pudet deorum hominumque. Lrv. It is a shame in tlie sight of gods and
men.
Remark.— These Tmpersonals can also have a subject, chiefly a Demonstrative or
Relative Pronoun:
Hon te haec pudent ? Tek. Do not these things put you to the blush?
Other constructions follow from general rules :
Non me paenitet vixisse. Cic. (540.)
Quintum paenitet quod animum tuum offendit Cic. Quintus is sorry that h*
has wounded your feelings.
I y
/ GENITIVE WITH JUDICIAL VERBS.
377. Verbs of Accusing, Convicting, Condemning, and Ac-
quitting take the Genitive of the Charge :
Miltiades accusatus est proditionis. Nep. Miltiades was accused of
treason.
Oannensem exercitum quis pavoris insimulare potest ? Liv. Who can
charge the army of Cannae with craven fear f
Parce tuum vatem sceleris damnare, Cupido. Ov. Be slow to condemn
thy bard of crime, 0 Cupid !
Absolvere improbitatis, to acquit of dishonesty.
So also kindred expressions : reum facere, (to make a party) to indict, to bring an
action against ; sacrilegil compertum esse, to be found (guilty) of sacrilege.
Remarks.— 1. Verbs of Condemning and Acquitting take the Ablative as well as the
Genitive of the Charge and the Punishment, and always the Ablative of the Fine :
Accusare capitis, or capite, to bring a capital charge.
Damnare capitis, or capite, to condemn to death.
Damnari decern milibus, to be fined 10,000.
Multare, to mulct, is always construed with the Ablative :
IMultare pecunia, to mulct in (of) money.
Manlius virtiitem filii morte multavit- Quint. Manlius punished the valor of
his son with death.
2. Most verbs belonging to this class take also instead of the Genitive the Ablative
with de : accusare de vi, of violence (no Genitive; ; de veneficio, of poisoning ; de
dt -j rebus repetundls, of extortion.
3. Destination and Enforced Labor are expressed by ad or in : damnari ad bestias,
to be condemned (to be thrown) to wild beasts ; ad (in) metalla, to the mines ; ad (in) opus
I- publicum, to hard labor. Voti damnari, to be bound to fulfil a vow.
GENITIVE WITH VERBS OF RATING AND BUYING.
378. Verbs of Rating and Buying are construed with the
194 GENITIVE.
Genitive of the general value or cost, and the Ablative of the
particular value or cost. (404.)
Verbs of Rating are : aestimare, to value ; putare, to reckon ; ducere,
to take ; habere, to hold; pendere, to weigh; facere, to make, put ; esse,
to be (worth).
Verbs of Buying are : emere, to buy ; vendere, to sell ; venire, to be
for sale ; stare and constare, to cost, to come to ; prdstare, licere, to be ex-
posed, left (for sale) ; conducere, to hire ; locare, to let.
379. Verbs of Eating take:
Magnl, much, pluris, more, plurimi, maxima, most.
Parvi, little, minoris, less., minimi, least.
Tanti, so much, quanti, how much, nihili, naught.
Equivalents of nihili, nothing, are flocci, a lock of wool, nauci, a trifle,
assis, a copper, and the like, and so also hujus, that (a snap of the finger),
with the negative, which is omitted only in the earlier times.
Tanti is often used in the sense of operae pretium est = it is worth
while.
Dum ne ob malefacta peream parvi [id] aestimo. Platjt. So long
as I be not killed for my misdeeds little do I care.
Voluptatem virtus minimi facit. Cic. Virtue makes little account of the
pleasure of the senses.
Judices rempublicam flocci non faciunt. Cic. The judges do not care
a fig for the State.
Non habeo nauci Marsum augurem. Ennius. I do not value a Marsian
augur a baubee.
Est mini tanti hujus invidiae tempestatem subire. Cic. It is worth
while (the cost), in my eyes, to bear this storm of odium.
380. Verbs of Buying take tanti, quanti, pluris, and minoris.
The rest are put in the Ablative :
Vendo raeum frumentum non pluris quam ceteri, fortasse
etiam minoris. Cic. I sell my corn not dearer than everybody else, per-
haps even cheaper.
Magis ilia juvant quae pluris emuntur. Juv. Things give more
pleasure which are bought for more.
Emit Oanius hortos tanti quanti Pythius voluit. CiC. Canius
bought the gardens at the price Pythius wanted.
Quanti cenas ? What do you give for your dinner ?
Quanti habitas ? What is the rent of your lodgings?
But :
P a r v 5 fames constat, m a g n 5 fastidium. Sen. Hunger costs little,
daintiness much.
GENITIVE. 195
Remarks.— 1. Aestimo is found with the Ablative as well as with the Genitive. So
aestimare m a g n o and m a g n I. to value highly.
2. Observe the phrases : bonl (aequi bonlque) facio, bonl consulo, I put up with,
take in good part.
3. Bene emere, to buy cheap; bene vendere, to sell dear; male emere, to buy tear;
male vendere, to sell cheap.
GENITIVE WITH INTEREST AND REFERT.
* 381. Interest and Refert take a Genitive of the Person, seldom
of the Thing, concerned.
Clodii interest. Cic. It is Clodius's interest.
Refert compositionis quae quibus anteponas. Quint. It is of impor-
tance far the arrangement of words, which you put before which.
Instead of the Genitive of the Possessive Pronouns the
Ablative Singular Feminine of the Possessives is employed :
Mea interest, mea refert, I am concerned.
Remarks. — 1. Refert is commonly used absolutely, occasionally with mea, etc., sel-
dom with the Genitive.
2. Instead of Apposition use the Relative :
Vehementer intererat vestra, qui patrgs estis, llberos vestros hie potissimum
discere. Plin. Ep. It were vastly to the interest of you parents, that your children, if
possible, were taught at home.
3. No satisfactory explanation has been given of this construction. Mea seems to be
an adverbial form like qua, nac, ea. (Madvig.)
382. 1. The Degree of Concern is expressed by an Adverb,
Adverbial Accusative, or a Genitive of Value :
Multum (nihil) interest. It makes much (no) difference.
Quid interest ? What difference does it make f
Magnl interest mea una n5s esse Cic. It is of great importance to me
that we be together.
2. The Object of Concern is commonly put in the Infinitive,
Accusative and Infinitive, lit or ne, with the Subjunctive, or an
Interrogative Sentence.
Quid Milonis intererat interfici Clodium ? Cic. What interest had Milo
in Clodius1 being killed.
Caesar dicere solebat non tarn sua quam relpublicae interesse ut
salvus esset. Suet. Caesar used to say that it icas not of so much impor-
tance to 7iim(se\f) as to the State that his life should be spared.
Vestra interest n e imperat5rem pessimi faciant. Tac. It is to your
interest that the dregs of creation do not make the emperor.
i
196
ABLATIVE.
Quid refert tales versus qua voce Iegantur. Juv. Wlmt matters it
what voicr such verses are recited with?
Occasionally by the Nominative of a Neuter Pronoun :
Quid (Ace.) tua id (Norn.) refert ? Ter. What business is that of yours?
3. The Thing Involved is put in the Ace. with ad :
Magni ad hon5rem nostrum interest quam primum nds ad urbem ve-
nire. Cic. It makes a great difference touching our honor that we should
come to the city as soon as possible.
Ablative.
383. The Ablative is the Adverbial, as the Genitive is the
Adjective case. It contains three elements :
A. Where ? B. Whence ? C. Wherewith ?
In a literal sense, the Ablative is commonly used with Pre-
positions; in a figurative sense, it is commonly used without
Prepositions.
A. The Ablative of the Place Where appears in a figurative
sense as the Ablative of t*he Time When.
B. The Ablative of the Place Whence appears as:
1. The Ablative of Origin.
2. The Ablative of Measure.
C. The Ablative of the Thing Wherewith appears in a figu-
rative sense, as :
1. The Ablative of Manner.
2. The Ablative of Quality.
3. The Ablative of Means.
Remark. — It is impossible to draw the line of demarcation with absolute exactness.
So the Ablative of Cause may be derived from any of the three fundamental significations
of the case, which is evidently a composite one.
To these we add :
D. The Ablative of Cause :
E. The Ablative Absolute.
I. THE LITERAL MEANINGS OP THE ABLATIVE.
A ABLATIVE OF THE PLACE WHERE.
Ablatlvus locdlis.
384. The Ablative answers the question Where? and takes a
a rule the preposition ijst :
ABLATIVE. 19?
In portu navigo. Ter. I am sailing in harbor.
Pons in Hibero prope effectus erat. Caes. The bridge over the Ebro
was nearly finished.
Histrio in scena est. Plaut. The actor is on the stage.
Haeret in equd senex. Cic, The old man sticks to his horse.
Remarks. — 1. Verbs of Placing and kindred significations take the Ablative with in, to
designate the result of the motion: ponere, to place • collocare, to put • statuere, con-
stituere, to set ; considere, to settle ; deflgere, to plant ; demergere, to plunge ; im-
primere, to press upon ; inserlbere, to write upon ; incldere, to carve upon.
Plato rationem in capite posuit, iram in pectore locavit Cic Plato has put
reason in the head, has placed anger in the breast.
Lucretia cultrum in corde defigit. Liv. Lucretia plants a knife in {thrusts a knife
down into) her heart.
Philosophi in ils ipsis librls quos scrlbunt de contemnenda gloria sua no-
mina inscrlbunt. Cic. Philosophers write their own names on (the titles of) the very
books which they write about contempt of glory.
Index inciditur in aeneis tabulis. Suet. An index is engraved on tablets of bronze.
The same observation applies to sub:
Pone sub curru nimium propinqui solis in terra domibus negata. Hon. Put
(me) under the chariot of the ail-too neighboring sun, in a land denied to dwellings.
So humi, which is a Where-case : hum! prosternere, to throw flat on the ground.
2. The poets are free in omitting in,- but regard must be had to 387.
3. On the Locative Ablative of Towns and Small Islands, see 412.
385. In citations from books and in enumerations, the Abla-
tive of the Place Where is used without in :
Libro tertiOj third book ; versu decimo, tenth verse; alio locd, elsewhere.
Remark.— Locus, place, used metaphorically, generally omits in : hoc loco, in this
position, situation; in hoc loco (or hoc loco), in this place, part of the country. Libro
is used when the whole book, in libro, when merely a passage in the book, is devoted to
the subject in hand.
in
386. In designations of place with totus, whole, and the like,
rthe Ablative of the Place Where is generally used without in:
Menippus disertissimus tota Asia fuit. Menippus was the most eloquent
man in all Asia (Minor).
Battiades t5to semper cantabitur orbe. Ov. Battiades (Callimaclms)
will always be sung throughout the world,
387. In all such Designations of Place as may be regarded in
the light of Cause, Manner, or Instrument, the Ablative is used
without a preposition :
Ut terra Thermopylarum angustiae Graeciam ita marl fretum Euripi
claudit. Lit. As the pass of Thermopylae bars Greece by land, so the frith of
Euripus by sea.
198 ABLATIVE.
Nemo ire quenquam publica prohibet via. Plaut. No man forbiddeth
(an j/ one to) travel by the public road.
Matris cineres Tiber! subvecti sunt. Suet. His mother's ashes were
brought up by the Tiber.
Imperator milites (in) castris tenebat (intra castra). Caes. The general
kept the soldiers in camp.
Recipere aliquem tecto, oppido, portu. To receive a man into one's
house, town, harbor.
B. ABLATIVE OF THE PLACE WHENCE.
Abldtlvus Separdtlvus.
388. The Ablative answers the question Whence? with or
without the prepositions ex, oat of, de, from, ab, off:
Eum exturbasti ex aedibus. Plaut. You hustled him out of the house.
Araneas dejiciam de pariete. Plaut. I will get the cobwebs down from
the wall.
N5n ex eo loco sed ab eo loco me dejecit. Cic. It was not out of that
'place, but from that place that he dislodged me.
The prepositions are omitted chiefly with Verbs of Abstain-
ing, Removing, Relieving, and Excluding, but with Persons a J
preposition (chiefly ab) must be used.
Alieno rnanus abstineat. Cato. Let him keep his hands from other peo-
ple's property. But :
Alexander vix a se maniis abstinuit. Cic. Alexander hardly kept (could
hardly keep) his hands from himself (from laying hands on himself).
Populus Atheniensis Phocionem patria pepulit. Nep. The Athenian
people drove Phocionfrom his country. But :
Ilium aemulum ab ea pellito. Ter. Drive that rival from her.
Multos fortuna liberat paena, metu neminem. Sen. Fortune rids
many of punishment, none of fear. But :
Te ab eo llbero. Cic. I rid you of him.
Amicitia nullo loc5 excluditur. Cic. Friendship is shut out from no
place. But :
Ab ilia excludor, hue concludor. Ter. I am shut out from her (and)
shut up here (to this, to live with her).
Alcibiadem Athenienses e civitate expulerunt. Nep. The Athenians
banished Alcibiades from the Slate.
Hannibal ex Italia decedere coactus est. Cic. Hannibal was forced
to withdraw from Italy.
ABLATIVE. 190
Crede mihi, mores distant a carmine nostro. Ov. Believe me, far
my conduct differs from my song.
Consules se abdicant magistrate. Cic. TJie consuls abdicate their office.
So also kindred Adjectives :
Animus excelsus omni est liber cura. Cic. A lofty mind is free from
all care.
Cato, omnibus humanis vitiis immunis, semper fortunam in sua po-
testate habuit. Yell. Cato, exempt from all human failings, always had
fortune in his own power.
Remakks. — 1. Compounds with dl (dis) also take the Dative (in poetry) :
Paullum sepultae distat inertiae celata virtus. Hon. Little doth hidden worth
differ from buried sloth.
2. The Place Whence gives the point of view from which. In English a different trans-
lation is often given, though not always necessarily : a tergo, in the rear ; ex parte
dextra. on the right side ; ab oriente, on the east ; a tanto spatio, at such a distance ;
ex fuga, on the flight ; a re frumentaria laborare, to be embarrassed in the matter of
provisions.
3. The poets are free in the use of the Ablative as a Whence-case without a preposi-
tion. On the difference of conception between Dative and Ablative, see 344, R. 2. On the
Genitive, see 373, R. 6.
4. On the Ablative as a Whence-case in Names of Towns and Small Islands, see 411.
389. Verbs of Depriving and Filling, of Plenty and Want,
take the Ablative :
-Democritus dicitur oculis se privasse. Cic. Democritus is said to
have deprived himself of his eyes.
Deus bonis omnibus explevit mundum. Cic. God has filled the uni-
verse with all blessings.
Abundant dulcibus vitiis. Quint. They abound in charming faults.
Non caret effectu quod voluere du5. Ov. What two have resolved
on never lacks execution.
Amor vac at metu. Ov. Love is void of fear.
Sapiens eget nulla re. Sen. The sage stands in need of nothing.
Remarks.— 1. Verbs of Filling are commonly referred to the Instrumental Ablative
rather than to the Ablative of the Source, and are put here for convenience of contrast.
But observe that in the classic tongues the construction of opposite? is identical.
2. Egeo and (more frequentty) indigeo also take the Genitive.
Non tarn artis indigent quam laboris. Cic. They are not so much in need of skill
as of industry.
3. Adjectives of Plenty and Want take the Genitive, but some of them follow the
analogy of the verb (373, R. 1) :
Asellus onustus auro. Cic. A donkey laden with gold.
Pollicitis dives quilibet esse potest. Ov. Anybody can be rich in promises.
Amor et melle et felle est fecundissimus. Flaut. Love is very fruitful both in
honey and in gall (of acrimony).
ABLATIVE.
390. Opus and TJsus take the Dative of the Person who Wants
and the Ablative of the Thing Wanted; but the Thing Wanted
may be the subject and opus the predicate:
Opus est mini libro, libris, I want a book, boohs.
Liber mini opus est, a book is a want to me (is what I want).
Libii mihi opus sunt, books are a want to me (are what I want).
Quid opus est speculo tibi ? Plaut. What do you want to do with a
mirror?
Emas non quod opus est sed quod necesse est ; quod n5n opus est
asse carum est. Cato. Buy not what you want, but what is absolutely need-
ful ; what you do not want (have no use for) is dear at a penny.
So with the Perfect Participle Passive :
Quod paratd opus est para. Ter. What must be got ready, get ready.
Vicin5 opus est convents. Plaut. The neighbor must be called on.
Usus est pecunia or pecunia. Plaut. Money is wanted (is, would be
(246, R. 1) useful).
N5n facto est usus. Plaut. It were better let alone.
Remark.— This construction belongs to the Instrumental, and is put here for conve-
nience of reference :
Opus est, there is ivorh to be done with.
TJsus est. there is making use of()ike iitor, 405).
The Genitive is of rare occurrence. Other constructions are the Infinitive and ut.
The Neuter Accusative is often adverbial (331, R. 3) :
Quid (Ace.) digitos opus est graphio lassare tenendo % Ov. What is the use of
tiring the fingers by holding the stilus ?
Opus est te animo valere ut corpore possis. Cic. You must be well in mind in
order to be well in body.
An cuiquam est usus homini se ut cruciet ? Ter. Of what good is it to any man
to torture himself t
C. ABLATIVE OF THE THING WHEREWITH.
Abldtivus Socidtlvus.
391. The Ablative of Attendance takes the preposition cum,
with :
Cum baculo peraque senex. Mart. An old man with stick and wallet.
Nee tecum possum vivere nee sine te. Makt. I can't live eithe-r with
you or without you.
Remarks.— 1. In military phrases, the troops with which a march is made are put in
the Ablative, with or without cum ; generally without cum when an adjective is used
(Ablative of Manner), with cum when no adjective is used (Ablative of Attendance) :
Rex Hellespontum cum exercitii transiit, The king crossed the Hellespont with
an art i "j.
ABLATIVE. 201
Dictator (cum) ingenti exercitu ab urbe profectus est. The dictator set out from
the city with a great army.
2. Not to be confounded with the above is the Instrumental Ablative :
Kavibus proficisci, to set out by ship.
So also with verbs which denote other military actions :
Hostes sagittariis et funditoribus terrebat, he was frightening the enemy with
archers and slingers.
Armatns ipse et armatis saeptus. Liv. Armed himself and hedged about with
armed men.
Nil actum est nisi Poeno milite portas frangimus. Jut. Naught is accomplished
unless we break the gates with the Punic soldiery (as if with a battering-ram).
II.— THE FIGURATIVE MEANINGS OF THE ABLATIVE.
A. The Place Where is transferred to the Time When.
Ablative of Time. .
>2. Time When or Within Which is put in the Ablative .
Qua nocte natus est Alexander eadem Dianae Ephesiae templum
deflagravit. Cic. On the sam& night on which Alexander was born, the
temple of Diana of Ephesus burnt to the ground.
Saturn! stella triginta fere annis cursum suum conficit. Cic. The
planet Saturn completes its period in about thirty years.
Many adverbial forms of time are really locative ablatives :
So hodie, to-day ; heri(e), yesterday ; mane, in the morning.
Remarks.— 1. Time within which may be expressed by per and the accusative :
Per eos ipsos dies quibus Philippus in Achaia fuit, Philocles saltum Cithae-
ronis transcendit. Lrv. During those very days, while Philip was in Achaia, Philocles
crossed the range of Cithaemn.
2. Time Within Which may embrace both extremities ; so with totus, all, whole :
Tqfa nocte pluit, redeunt spectacula mane. Verg. All night (Jupiter) rains ;
back corns the shows in the morning.
So with definite numbers (chiefly later) :
Apud Pythagoram discipulis quinque annis erat tacendum. Sen. In the school
of Pythagoras the disciples had to keep silence Jive years.
3. When the Notion is Negative the English Time For Which is the Latin Within
Which:
Quadriennio (or per quadriennium) non militavit. Lrv. For four years he did
not serve as a soldier (during, at any time within, four years').
4. Especially to be noted is the Ablative of Time with hie, this ; ille, that :
Ego ad te bis duobus mensibus non scripseram (244). Cic. I have not written to
you these two months {at any time within the last two months).
Hanc urbem hoc biennis evertes. Cic. This city you vrill overturn in the next two
years.
Transferred to Oratio Obliqua, hie becomes ille (063, 3) :
Diodorus respondit illud argentum se paucis illls disbus misisse Lilybaeum,
Diodorus answered that he had sent that silver plate to Lilybaeum within a few days (a few
days before).
9*
202 ABLATIVE.
393. The Ablative with the preposition in is used of points
within a period of time, or of the character of the time:
Bis in die, tic ice a day ; in pueritia, in boyhood; in adulescentia, in
youth.
Null5 mo do mihi placuit bis in die saturum fieri. CiC. It did not suit
me in any way to eat my fill twice a day.
Sometimes, however, bis die, as dies = unus dies.
Feci ego istaec itidem in adulescentia. Plaut. I did those things too in
my youth.
In may be omitted, chiefly with an adjective or in phrases :
Prima pueritia, in early boyhood ; illo tempore, at that time ; in illo
tempore, in those circumstances, at that crisis ; in tempore or tempore =
at the right time ; bello Persico, at the time of the Persian war ; in bello,
in tear times ; in pace, in peace times.
Remark. — De is also used in designations of time :
Tit jugulent homines surgunt de nocte latrones. Hon. To kill people, highioay-
men rise by night., i. e., while it is yet night.
Inter, between: Quot prandia inter continuum perdidi triennium. Plaut.
How many luncheons I have lost during three years together f
Intra, within : Subegit solus intra vlginti dies. Plaut. He quelled them all
alone in less than twenty day-.
On per, through, see 337, R.
Cum, with ; cum prima luce, with daybreak.
394. B. The Place Whence is transferred :
1. To Origin ; 2. To Measure.
1. Ablative of Origin.
395. Participles which designate Birth take the Ablative of
Origin, with or without the Prepositions ex and de :
Tanaquil summo loc5 nata. Liv. Tanaquil born (by birth) of high de-
gree.
Numae Pompilii regis nepos, filia ortus, Ancus Mafcius erat. Lit,
King Numa Pompilius's grandson, a daughter's son, was Ancus Matcius.
Maecenas atavis edite regibus. Hon. Maecenas, offshoot of great-grand-
sire kings.
DIs genite et geniture deos. Verg. Begotten of gods and destined U
beget god* !
Sate sanguine divdm! Verg. Seed of blood divine !
Ex me atque hoc natus es. Ter. You are his son and mine.
Oderunt natos de pellice. Juv. They hate the offspring of the concubine
ABLATIVE. 203
Ab is employed of remote progenitors :
Plerique Belgae sunt orti ab Germanis. Caes. Belgians are mostly of
German descent.
396. The Ablative of Material commonly takes ex : constare,
to consist, sometimes omits the preposition :
Animo constamus et corpore, constamus ex animo et corpore. Cic.
We consist of mind and body.
Medicina tota constat experimentis. Quint. All medicine is made up
of experiments (is empirical).
But : Statua ex auro, ex aere, facta, a statue made of gold, of bronze.
Often an adjective is used: aureus, golden, ligneus, wooden.
Remarks. — 1. A remnant of the old usage is found with fio and facio .*
Quid fecisti scipione % What have you done with the wand?
Quid me fiet % What will become of me ?
Quid me futurum est % What is to become of me ?
Quid facies hoc nomine % How will you dispose of this man ?
Hulc homini % What will you do to this m,an ? De hoc nomine, in this man's case.
Fles de rhetore consul. Juv. From (having been) rhetorician you will become con-
sul.
2. Otherwise the simple Ablative of Material is poetic or late :
Mavors caelatus ferro. Vero. Mars carven of iron.
Meliore luto nnxit- Juv. Refashioned him of better clay.
2. Ablative of Measure.
397. The Ablative gives the Point from which a thing is
measured or treated : Ablative of Measure or Eeference.
398. The Ablative is put in answer to the questions From
What Point of View ? According to What ? By What ? In Ke-
spect of What ?
Magnos homines virtute metimur, non fortuna. Nep. We measure
A great men by worth, not by fortune.
Sonis homines dignoscimus ut aera tinnltu. Quint. We distinguish
men by sound as coppers by ring.
Descriptus erat populus Romanus censu, ordinibus, aetatibus. Cic.
The people of Rome was drawn off according to income, rank, (and) age.
Ennius ingenio maximus arte rudis. Ov. Ennius in genius great, in
art unskilled.
Animo pravus, procax ore. Tac. Crooked of soul, saucy of tongue.
Crlne ruber, red-haired ; captus oculis (literally, caught in the eyes),
204 ABLATIVE.
blind ; captus mente, insane; mea sententia, according to my opinion;
jure, by right; lege, by law; and the Supines in -u (437).
Remarks.— 1. Prepositions are also used, which serve to show the conception :
Caesaris adventus ex colore vestltus cognitus est. Caes. The arrival of Caesar
was known by the color of his clothing.
De gestu intelligo quid respondeat. Cic. / understand by your gesture what
r you are giving.
Ex lege, according to law ; ex pacto, according to agreement ; ex (de) more, accord-
ing to custom : ex animi sententia, according to (my) heart's desire; ex ii.su, useful.
Ab animo aeger ful. Plaut. At heart I was sick.
Otiosum esse ab animo. Ter. To be easy in mind.
2. Dignus (distinguished), worthy, and indignus, unworthy, are most conveniently
referred to this head. (Examples, see 373, R. 3.)
So also dignor, I deem worthy,
399. The Ablative of Measure is used with the Comparative
instead of quam, than, with the Nominative or Accusative:
Tunica propior pallio. Prov. The shirt is nearer than the cloak.
Phidiae simulacris (= quam simulacra) cogitare possumus pulchriora.
Cic. We can imagine more beautiful things than the statues of Phidias.
So also after adverbs, but not so freely in prose:
Nemo est qui tibi sapientius suadere possit te ips5. Cic. There is no
one icho coin give you wiser advice than you yourself
Pulchrum ornatum turpes mores pejus caen5 collinunt. Platjt. Foul
behavior doth bedraggle fine apparel worse than mud.
Remarks. — 1. The comparative is also employed with the Ablative of certain abstract
substantives and adjectives used as substantives :
Consul serius spe (= quam spes fuerat) Eomam venit Liv. The consul came to
Borne later than was hoped.
Amnis solito citatior. Liv. The river running faster than usual.
2. Alius, other than, with the Ablative, is poetic.
400. Measure of Difference is put in the Ablative :
Turres denis pedibus quam murus altiores sunt. Curt. The towers
are (by) ten feet higher t/ian the wall.
Tanto est accusare quam defendere quanto facere quam sanare vul-
nera facilius. Quint. It $t as much easier to accuse than to defend as it is
easier to inflict wounds than to cure them.
Perfer et obdura : multo graviora tulisti. Ov. Endure to the end and
be firm : you have borne much more grievous burdens.
Quoque minor spes est, hoc magis ille cupit. Ov. And the less his
hope, the greater his desire.
Remarks.— 1. This rule applies to verbs involving difference as well as to comparatives: ]
Aesculapii templum quinque millibus passuum ab urbe Epidauro distal Ljy.
The temple of Aesculapius is five miles from the city of Epidaurus.
2. The Accusative is sometimes employed. (See 335.)
ABLATIVE. 205
3. Especially to he noted is the use of the Ablative of Measure with ante, before, and
post, after:
Panels ante diebus, Paucis diebus ante, a few days before.
Paucis post diebus, Paucis diebus post, a few days after, afterward.
Duobus annis postquam Roma condita est, Two years after Rome was founded,
Paulo post Trojani captam, A little while after the taking of Troy.
The Accusative can also be employed : post paucos annos, after a few years ; ante
paucos annos, a few years before ; and the ordinal as well as the cardinal numbers : two
hundred years after{ward) may be :
Ducentis annis post or Dueentesimo anno post,
Post ducentos annos " Post ducentesimum annum.
Ante hos sex menses, six months ago (comp. 392, K 2), more frequently abhine sex
menses : abhine sex mensibus, means six months before (Madvig).
With a relative sentence the Ablative may be used alone :
Roscii mors quatriduo quo is occisus est, Chrysogono nuntiatur. Cic. The
death of Eoscius tuas announced to Chrysogonus four days after he was killed {in the course
the four days iviihin which he was killed). See 392.
Hence is ad : ad sex menses, six months hence.
C. ABLATIVE OF THE THING WHEREWITH.
Abldtlvus socidtwus. Ablative of Attendance.
1. Ablative of Manner.
401. The Ablative of Manner answers the question How ?
and is used with the Preposition cum when it has no Adjective ;
with or without cum when it has an Adjective :
Miltiades summa aequitate res constituit Chersonesi. Nep. Miltiades
settled the affairs of the Chersonese with the greatest fairness.
Non facile est aequa commoda mente pati. Ov. It is not easy to bear
good fortune with an even temper.
Cum cura scrlbere, to write icith care.
Magna cura, j
Cum magna cura, I with great care.
Magna cum cura, )
[_ Remark.— Several Ablatives are used adverbially without an Adjective or Preposi-
tion : ordine, in an orderly manner ; silentio, silently • casu", by chance, accidentally ;
via et ratione, methodically ; dolo, fraude, fraudulently. It is sometimes hard to dis-
tinguish between the Manner and the Instrument : vi, violently and by violence ; vi et
armis, by force of arms ; pedibus, afoot; navibus, by ship. Notice, also, the use of
per, through, with the Accusative: per vim, by violence ; per lltteras, by letter.
2. Ablative of Quality.
(Descriptive Ablative.)
402. The Ablative of Quality has no Preposition, and always
! takes an Adjective or an equivalent:
206 ABLATIVE.
Agesilaus statura fuit humili. Nep. Agesildus was (a man) of low
stature.
Cato singular! fuit prudentia et industrial Nep. Cato was (a man) of
unique foresight and energy.
1st a turpiculo puella naso. Cat. That girl of yours with the ugly nose.
Clavi ferrei digiti pollicis crassitudine. Caes. Iron nails of the thick-
ness of your thumb.
Remarks.— 1. External and transient qualities are put by preference in the Ablative ;
Measure, Number, Time, and Space, are put in the Genitive only; parts of the body in
the Ablative only. Otherwise there is often no difference.
2. Of unnatural productions cum may be used : agnus cum suillo capite. Lrv. A
lamb with a swine's head.
3. Ablative of Means.
403. The Instrument is put in the Ablative without a Prep
osition.
The Agent or Doer is put in the Ablative with the Prepo-J
sition ab (a) :
The Person Through Whom is put in the Accusative with
per:
Pyrrhus lapide interfectus est, Pyrrhus was killed, by a stone.
Pyrrhus a muliere interfectus est, Pyrrhus was killed by a woman.
Pyrrhus a muliere lapide interfectus est, Pyrrhus was killed by a
woman with a stone.
\ 1. nuntio, by a message.
Xerxes certior factus est, ( ^ - - ..- t
v 2. a nuntio, by a messenger.
Xerxes was informed, J ft per niintium> hy means of a me9myger%
Nee bene promeritis capitur neque tangitur ira. Lucr. (218, R. 3
Ipse docet quid agam : fas est et ab hoste doceri. Ov. (210.)
Discite sanari per quem didicistis amare. Ov. Learn to be healed b\
means of (him by) whom you learned to love.
Remarks.— 1. When the Instrument is personified and regarded as an Agent, or th
Agent is regarded as an Instrument, the constructions are reversed ; when an Adjective
used, the construction may be doubtful, 352, R.
So jacent suis testibus. Cic. They are cast by their own witnesses ; or, they m
cast, their own men being witnesses.
2. Especially worthy of note under this head are assuesco and assuefacio : asSTlStUi
labore, accustomed to toiL familiar with toil (the Dative is more rare) ; doctus Graei:
litterls, learned in Greek; and the various words for sacrifice :
Quinquaginta caprls sacrificaverunt Liv. They sacrificed fifty she-goats.
Aflicere, to treat, with the Ablative, is a favorite term ; see the Lexicons.
3. NItor, I stay myself, is construed with the Ablative, with or without in : Hastl
nixus, leaning on a spear (stayed by a ppear).
ABLATIVE. 207
[Pompgi] in vita nitgbatur salus civitatis. Cic. The weal of the State depended
m Pompey's life.
Notice also stare, with the Abl. : stare condicionibus, to abide by the terms.
4. Ablative of Price.
404. Definite Price is put in the Ablative :
Viginti talentis unam Srationem Isocrates vendidit. Plin. Isocrates
wld one speech far twenty talents.
Emit morte immortalitatem. Quint. He purchased deathlessness with
death.
Nimium risus pretium est si probitatis impendio constat. Quint. The
mice of a laugh is too high, if it costs the outlay of a man's uprightness.
Argentum accepi; dote imperium vendidi. Plaut. The cash I
took ; (and) for a dowry sold my sway.
Remark.— Mutare, to exchange, is sometimes Give, sometimes Get ; sometimes Sell,
sometimes Buy :
Pax misera vel bello bene mutatur. Tac. A wretched peace is well exchanged even
for war.
Durus qui potuit lucro mutare puellam. Prop. Bard (is the soul of the) man
who could sell his sweetheart for lucre.
Cur valle perxnutem Sablna divitias operosiores. Hor. Why should I exchange
my Sabine vale for riches sure to breed (me) greater trouble ?
5. Ablative with Sundry Verbs.
405. The Deponent Verbs TJtor, Abutor, Fruor, Fungor, Potior,
and Vescor, take the Ablative:
Victoria uti nescis. Liv. How to make use of victory you know not.
QuSusque tandem abutere patientia nostra. Cic. How long, tell me,
will you abuse our patience ?
Lux qua fruimur a Deo nobis datur. Cic. The light which we enjoy is
given to us by God.
Fungor vice cotis. Hob. I discharge the office of a whetstone.
t Tutius esse arbitrabantur sine ull5 vulnere victoria potlri. Caes.
el They thought it safer to make themselves masters of the victory without any
wound.
Numidae lacte vescebantur. Sall. The Numidians made their food of
Awtilk {fed on milk).
id;
Remarks.— 1. These Ablatives are commonly regarded as Ablatives of the Instru-
ment; but fruor, I get fruit, and vescor, I feed myself from (ve-ed-scor), and perhaps
fungor seem to take the Ablative as a Whence-case. In older Latin they are sometimes
combined with the Accusative. Hence they have a Gerundive :
Justitia dicet te esse injustum quum graviter feras te quod iitendum acce-
2 S ABLATIVE.
peris reddidisse. Cic. Justice will say that you are unjust since you resent having restored
what y on have nceived (but) to use.
2. Utl is a favorite word, and has a most varied translation :
Uti aliquo amlco, to avail oneself of {to enjoy) a man's friendship {to have a friend in
him).
Utl consilio, to follow advice ; utl bono patre, to have the advantage of having a
good father ; utl legibus, to obey the laws. See the Lexicons.
3. Vivo is construed like vescor : aliena misericordia vivo, I live on the charity
of others.
Potior, / possess myself, sometimes takes the Genitive ; always potiri rerum, to
possess the supreme power.
D. ABLATIVE OF CAUSE.
406. The Ablative of Cause may be referred to so many
classes, that it is most convenient to regard it as a class by
itself.
407. The Ablative of Cause is used without a preposition,
chiefly with Verbs of Emotion :
Castor gaudet equis. Hon. Castor rejoices in horses.
Quidam vitiis suls gloriantur. Sen. Some make a boast of their vices,
Pecunia fidens non dubitabat. Nep. Trusting in his money *, he had nc
doubts.
In culpa sunt qui oflicia deserunt mollitia animl. Cic. They are tc
blame who shirk their duties from effeminacy of temper.
Oderunt peccare boni virtutis am5re. Hon. The good hate to sinfron
a love of virtue.
So also jussu civium, at the bidding of the citizens ; med rogatii, at mi
request, and other verbal Ablatives. On causa and gratia, for the sake of
see 372.
Remarks. — 1. The moving cause is often expressed by a participle with the Ablative
adductus, led; ardens,J?ra£; commotus, stirred up ; incitatus, egged on; incensus
inflamed ; impulsus, driven on; Ira, by anger ; odio, by hate ; metxi, from fear ; metlh
perterritus, sore frightened ; propter metum, on account of, {by reason of) fear.
2. The preventing cause is expressed by prae,/or :
Prae gaudio ubi sim nescio. Ter. I know not where lam for joy.
ji
i\
I
E. ABLATIVE ABSOLUTE.
408. The so-called Ablative Absolute is an Ablative com
binecl with a participle, and serves to modify the verbal predicat
of a sentence. Instead of the participle, a predicative substan||
tive or adjective can be employed.
Remark.— This Ablative, which may be called the Ablative of Circumstance, spring ..Jj
from the Temporal Use of the Ablative— the Temporal from the Local.
"
NAMES OF TOWNS. 209
409. The Ablative Absolute may be translated by the Eng-
ish Objective Absolute, which is a close equivalent: but for
purposes of style, it is often well to analyze the thought, to
hange Passive into Active, to make use of an abstract noun.
Xerxe regnante (— Quum Xerxes regnaret)3 Xerxes reigning. When
"Xerxes teas reigning. In the reign of Xerxes.
Xerxe victo (= Quum Xerxes victus esset), Xerxes being, having been,
lefeated. When Xerxes had been defeated. After the defeat of Xerxes.
Xerxe rege (= Quum Xerxes rex esset), Xerxes [being] king. When
Xerxes was king.
Patre vivo, while father is, was alive (in father's lifetime).
Maximas virtutes jacere omnes necesse est voluptate domi-
l ante. Cic. All the greatest virtues must necessarily lie prostrate, if (or
vhen) tlie pleasure (of the senses) is mistress.
Roman! veteres regnari omnes volebant libertatis dulcedine
iondum experta. Liv. The old Romans all icished to have a king over
hem (because they had) not yet tried the sweetness of liberty.
Urbe expugnata imperator rediit :
Passive Form : The city [being] taken (after the city was taken), the gene-
ral returned.
Active Form : Having taken the city (after he had taken the city), the
general returned.
Abstract Form : After the taking of the city. After taking the city.
Remarks. — 1. As the Latin language has no Perf . Part. Active, except the Deponent,
vhich is thus used, the Passive construction is far more common than in English:
Tunc juvenes veste posita corpora oleo perunxerunt. Cic. Then the youths,
having) laid aside their clothing, anointed their bodies with oil: or, laid aside their cloth-
( ng, and anointed their bodies with oil.
2. The Ablative Absolute, though often to be rendered by a co-ordinate sentence, for
onvenience1 sake, always presents a subordinate conception :
Lysander suadet Lacedaemoniis ut regia potestate dissoliita ex omnibus dux
SDi!:ieligatur ad bellum gerendum. Nep. Lysander advises the Lacedaemonians that the
jiroyal power be done away with, and a leader be chosen from all, to conduct the war. Here
the one is necessary to the other.
3. As a rule, the Ablative Absolute can stand only when it is not identical with the
subject, object, or dependent case of the verbal predicate. Manlius slew the Gaul and
stripped him of his necklace, is to be rendered : Manlius caesum Galium torque spo-
liavit-
The rule is most frequently violated when the dependent case is in the Genitive :
i Jugurtha fratre meo interfecto regnum ej us sceleris sui praedam fgcit Sall,
Jugurtha killed my brother, and (= after killing my brother) made his throne the booty of
%i his crime.
Ilk 4. On the Ablative of the simple participle, see 438, R. 2.
Names of Towns and Small Islands.
410. Names of Towns and Small Islands are put —
In the Accusative of the Place Whither.
210 NAMES OF TOWNS.
So also rus, into the country, domum, domos, home.
Legatl Athenas missi sunt. Liv. Envoys were sent to Athens.
Latona confugit Delum. Cic. Latona took refuge in Delos.
Laelius et Scipio rus evolabant. Cic. Laelius and Scipio used to hurry
out into the country.
Innumerabiles philosophi nunquam domum revertere. Cic. In-
numerable philosophers never returned home.
So verbals : domum reditus, a return home.
Remarks.— 1. Domum, house, with a possessive pronoun, or Genitive, may or may
not have in before it : domum meam or in domum meam, to my house / domum Pom
pejl or in domum Pompeji, to Pornpey's house ; also domum ad Pompejum. Other-
wise : in magnificam domum venire, to come into a grand house.
2. When urbem, city, or oppidum, town, precedes the name of the city or town, the
preposition in or ad is prefixed ; if urbem or oppidum follows, in or ad may be omit-
ted : in (ad) oppidum Cirtam, to, in (at) the town (of) Cirta.
Jugurtha Thalam pervenit in oppidusi magnum et opulentum. Sall. Jugur-
tha arrived at Thala, a great and wealthy town.
3. Ad means to the neighborhood of, often before, of military operations. Ad Muti
nam, to the neighborhood {siege of) Matina (Mod en a).
4. Observe that there must be motion, not merely extent, which requires a preposition
A Salonis ad Oricum porttis. Caes. The harbors from Salonae to Oricus.
5. Motion To a Place embraces all the local designations :
Phalara in sinum Maliacum processerant- Liv. They had advanced to Phalan
on the Maliac Gulf.
Tarentum in Italiam inferiorem proficisci, to set out for Tarentum in Lowe
Italy
41 1. Names of Towns and Small Islands are put-
In the Ablative of the Place Whence:
Demaratus fugit Tarquinios Corintho. Liv. Demaratus fled to Tai
quinii from Corinth.
Dolabella Delo proficiscitur. Cic. Dolabella sets out from Delos.
So also domo, from home ; humo, from the ground ; rure, from t?
country.
Remarks.— 1. The prepositions ab (a) and ex (e) are sometimes used for the sake
greater exactness. So regularly ab with the Place from which distance is measured :
Aesculapii templum quinque milibus passuum ab urbe Epidauro distat Li
(400, R. 1.)
When the common nouns urbe, city, and oppido, town, are employed, the use of t
preposition is the rule :
Aulide, ex oppido Boeotiae,/n>m Aulis, a town of Boeotia.
£x Apollonia Pontl urbe,/ww Apollonia, a city of Pontus.
Ex oppido Gergovia, from the town of Gergovia.
2. The Place Whence embraces all the local designations :
Agrigento ex Aesculapii fano, whereas we should say, from the temple of Aescuil
vius at Agrigentum.
Unde domo % Veru. From what home?
3. Letters are dated from rather than at a place.
4. The poets arc free in using the Ablative as a Whence-case.
NAMES OF TOWNS. 211
412. Names of Towns and Small Islands are put
In the Locative of the Place Where.
The Locative coincides in the Singular with the Genitive of the Second
Declension, with the Dative of the First and Third. In the Plural, Dative,
Locative, and Ablative coincide, and the Ablative is blended with the Lo-
3ative in Syntax and in the Third Declension, often in form. (See 23, R. 1.)
Locative S. 1. Romae (RSmai) PI. 1. Athenis
2. Corinth! 2. Delphis
3. Sulmom(e) 3. Curibus.
Ut Romae consules sic Karthagini (Carthagine) quotannis bin! reges
Dreabantur. Nep. As at Rome (two) consuls, so in Carthage two kings, were
created yearly.
Artemisia nobile fecit HaJicarnassi sepulcrum. Cic. Artemisia built
i famous sepulchre at Halicarnassus.
Tarquinius Superbus mortuus est Oumis. Liv. Tarquin the Over-
)eo,ring died at Cumae.
Timotheus Lesbl vixit. Nep. Timotheus lived in Lesbos.
;ff j Eemarks.— 1. Other locative forms are, domi, at home, (Genitive, domiis) humi, on
fie ground, and also belli and militiae, in combination with domi :
£arvi sunt foris arma nisi est consilium domi. Cic. Of little value are arms
ibroad unless there is wisdom at home.
Hum! jacere, to lie on the ground.
Huml prosternere, to throw flat on the ground.
Domi militiaeque, belli domlque, inpeace and in war, in war and in peace, at homt
% in the field.
n. Hurl, in the country, is also generally considered a locative form (but mre meo, on my
earm).
On animl, see 374, R. 3.
2. Appositions are put in the Ablative commonly with in :
Milites Albae constitemnt in urbe opportuna, the soldiers halted at Alba, a con-
veniently situated town.
Archias Antiochlae natus est celebri quondam urbe, Archias was born at AntU
%ch, once a populous city.
Neapoll in celeberrimo oppido, at Naples, a very populous town— in the populous,
'elebrated town of Naples.
When urbe, city, oppido, town, or insula, island, precedes, the preposition is always
employed :
In urbe Roma, in the city (of) Borne.
In oppido Neapoll, in the town of Naples.
I In insula Samo, in the island (of) Samos.
3. Domi takes the Possessive Pronoun in the Genitive :
Marcus Drilsus occisus est domi suae, M. Drusus was hilled at his own house.
Also domi alienae, in a strange house.
Metuis ut domi meae curetur diligenter. Ter. Ton fear that she will not be care-
fully nursed in my house ; otherwise, in domo casta, in a pure house.
In dom5 Periclis, in the household) of Pericles.
In domo, in the house (not, at home).
212 PREPOSITIONS.
Prepositions.
413. The Prepositions are local adverbs, which serve to define j
more narrowly the local ideas of the cases. The only cases that
convey local ideas are the Accusative and Ablative. The Accu
sative, as the case of the Direct Object, represents the relation
whither? the Ablative represents the relations whence? and
where? *
Rkmarks.— 1. In Verbs of Motion, the result of the motion is often considered a
Rest in a place (where) :
Ponere in loco, to put in a place.
2. In Verbs of Rest, the Rest is sometimes conceived as the Result of motioj
(whither) :
Habere in potest at em, to have (got) in (to) one' s power.
In carcerem asservare, to keep in jail.
3. Prepositions derive their name from the fact that they are prefixed in compositior
Many of the Latin prepositions are not used in composition, and these may be called in
proper prepositions. The prefixes amb- (am- an-), dis (di), red- (re-) sed- (se-) and vi
are sometimes called inseparable prepositions.
414. Position of the Preposition. The Preposition generall
precedes the case.
Remarks.— 1. Versus, -ward, and tenus, as far as, are postpositive, and so is cue
with, in combination with the Personal Pronouns and Relative :
Mecum, with me.
Nee tecum possum vivere nee sine te. Mart. (391.)
Secum, with oneself.
Quocum (al so quicum,) with whom (likewise, cum quo).
Quibuscum, with whom, wherewith (also, cum quibus).
2. Other prepositions are postponed chiefly after the relative : quem contra, again
whom ; quos inter, among ivhom; quo de.from whom.
3. Poets and affected writers are very free in putting the Preposition after its case,
415. The Preposition is often put between the Attribute an
the Case :
Magno cum metu, with great fear.
Whereas the Genitive and other forms of the Attribute aL
connecting particles are often put between the Preposition arj
its case :
Post ver5 Sullae victoriam, but after Sulla's victory.
Remark.— Especially to be noted is the position of per, through (by), in adjuratior
Lydia die per omnes Te" deos oro, Hon. Lydia, tell, by all the gods, Ipray thee.
k
t;
i"
fee
m
PREPOSITIONS.
213
416. Repetition and Omission of the Preposition. — With
liferent words which stand in the same connection, the Prepo-
sition is repeated, when the Preposition is emphatic, or the indi-
vidual words are to be distinguished ; so always after et — et, nee
-nee: et ex urbe et ex agris, both from (the) city and from (the)
mintry. Otherwise it is omitted ; so always with que.
Clodius a Milone candidato consulates jugulatus est. Yell. Clodius
oas killed by Mllo, a candidate for the consulship.
Cimon in eandem invidiam incidit (in) quam pater suus. Nep. (296).
Discite sanari per quern ( = per eum per quern) didicistis amare. Ov.
403).
otic|o;
Remark.— Several Prepositions, such as contra, on the other hand, extra, outside,
nfra, below, supra, above, ultra, beyond, are used also as adverbs without a case :
Iliacos intra muxos peccatur et extra. Hon. Inside the walls of Ilium sin is
Drought, and outside (too).
! Otherwise two Prepositions cannot be used with one case : For and against Scipio,
?ro Scipione et adversus Sclpionem. Before and after the battle, ante pugnam et
>ost earn.
I.— PREPOSITIONS CONSTRUED WITH THE ACCUSATIVE.
417. Prepositions construed with the Accusative are :
inr;
ante,
apud,
ad,
adversus,
circum,
circa,
citra,
cis,
erga,
contra,
inter,
extra,
infra,
intra,
juxta,
ob,
penes,
pone,
post and praeter,
prope,
propter,
per,
secundum,
supra,
versus,
ultra,
trans.
: Remarks.— 1. To these we may add clam, xinlcnown to. hidden from (cel-O, OC-Cul-Oj
vhich is commonly used as an adverb secretly and according to some MSS. is construed
Mth the Ablative as well as with the Accusative.
2. The detailed consideration of the Prepositions belongs to the Dictionary.
ft.d, at, to (comp. ad-do, I put to), up Circum,
to — opposed to Ab.
Adversus, ) [turned to], towards,
Adversum, ) over against, against.
Ante [oxer against, facing], before
(most frequently of time).
Apud (chiefly of persons), at, near,
, in the presence of (official), with
'oil (French, chez), at the house of, in
the view of.
i around, about.
Circiter, about (seldom of place,
sometimes of time, chiefly with
numerals).
Cis, ) this side, short of, correlative
Citra, ) of ultra.
Contra ( == cum + tra), opposite to,
oxer against, opposed to, against.
Erga, opposite, towards, seldom of
214
PREPOSITIONS.
place ; generally of friendly rela-
tions.
Extra, without, outside of, beside, (op-
posed to intra).
Infra, beneath, lower down, later.
Inter, betioeen (reaching from one to
the other), among, during.
Intra, within.
Juxta [adjoining], hard by, near, next
to.
Ob (over against, op-posite to), right
before, with a mew to, for.
Penes, with = in the hands of.
Penes eum est potestas, The
power lies with him. [to, by.
Per (along), through, by way of, owing
Pone, behind (rare).
Post, behind, after.
Praeter, on before, past, beyond, be-
sides, contrary to,
Prope, near.
Propter, near, on account of.
Secundum [following], next to, imme-
diately behind, after, along, accord-
ing to.
Supra, above, higher up (earlier).
Trans, on the other side, beyond,
across.
Ultra, on that side, beyond (opp. to
citra).
Versus, -ward (always postponed).
Romajn versus, Homeward.
IL— PREPOSITIONS CONSTRUED WITH THE ABLATIVE.
418. Prepositions construed with the Ablative are:
Ex, E, out of, from (opposed to in)
A, ab, and abs, off, of, from, by (op-
posed to ad).
Before vowels and h, ab ; before
consonants, a or ab ; abs, used
chiefly before te, thee.
Absque (off), without (antiquated).
C5ram, face to face with, in the pres-
ence of (accidental).
Cum, with.
De, down from, from, of= about.
i.
Before vowels and consonants, exp
(so chiefly in the model period):
before consonants, e.
Prae, in front of, side by side with, fo
(preventive cause).
Pro, before, for.
Sine, without, opposed to cum.
Tenus (to the extent of), as far a
(occasionally with the Genitive). <
Remark.— In poetry and later prose palam, openly, takes the Ablative ; procul, afar %' .
follows the analogy of ab ; simul, at the same time, that of cum.
Err
III.— PREPOSITIONS CONSTRUED WITH THE ACCUSATIVli \
AND ABLATIVE.
419. Prepositions construed with the Accusative and Ablal I
tive are : N 1 1
In, in,
Sub, under,
Super, over,
Eubter, under,
ACCUSATIVE.
into, for (purpose),
about (of time),
over, above,
over and above,
under \ beneath,
about (of time) [rarely]
about = de.
over [in prose rarely
under, beneath [rarely],
ta
INFINITIVE. 215
The Infinitive as a Substantive.
420. The Infinitive is the substantive form of the verb.
Remakk.— The Infinitive differs from a verbal substantive, in that it retains the ad-
rbial attribute, the designations of voice and time, and the regimen of the verb :
Amare. to love ; valde amare, to love hugely • amari, to be loved ; amavisse, to have
<ed ; amare aliqueni. to love a man ; nocere alicui, to hurt a man.
But the great claim of the Infinitive to be considered a verb lies in the involution of
xlicate and subject. Like the finite verb, the Infinitive involves predicate and subject ;
t the subject is indefinite and the. predication is dependent.
,'421. The Infinitive, when it stands alone, involves an mdefi-
te Accusative Subject, and the Predicate of that Subject is, of
'iurse, in the Accusative Case.
Regem esse, To be king.
Bonum esse, To be good.
So in the paradigm of the verb:
Amaturum esse, To be about to love.
Remark.— On the Nominative with the Infinitive by Attraction, see 528.
In consequence of this double nature, the Infinitive may be used as a
4bstantive or as a verb.
{..
422. The Infinitive, as a Noun, is used regularly in two
/4ses only — Nominative and Accusative. In the other cases its
ace is supplied by the Gerund and the Ablative Supine.
THE INFINITIVE AS A SUBJECT.
423. The Infinitive, as a Subject, is treated as a neuter sub-
pjkative :
i Errare humanum est. To err is human (that man should err is human),
Incipere multo est quam impetrare facilius. Platjt. Begin-
ng is much easier (work) than winning.
Non tarn turpe fuit vine! quam contendisse decorum est. Ov. (275.)
1 Esse b o n a m facile est quum quod vetet esse remotum est.
V. Be -a good woman — 'tis easy when what icould prevent it is distant.
THE INFINITIVE AS AN OBJECT.
J 424. The Infinitive is used as the Object of Verbs of Creation,
)mmonly known as Auxiliary Verbs.
These Verbs hdp the Infinitive into existence.
2 1 6 INFINITIVE.
Such verbs denote Will, Power, Duty, Habit, Inclination, Resolve, Con-
tinuance, End, and the like, with their opposites :
Emori cupio. Ter. I want to die.
Cato esse quam videri bonus malebat. Sall. Caio preferret
being (good) to seeming good.
Et precor ut p o s s i m tutius esse miser. Ov. And I pray that .
may he more safely wretched.
Vincere scis, Hannibal ; victoria uti nes'cls. Ltt. How t
win victory, you know, Hannibal ; how to make use of victory, you know no\
Qui mori didicit, servire dedidicit. Sen. He who has learned t
die has unlearned to be a slave.
Maledictis deterrere ne scribat p a r a t. Ter. He is preparin
(trying) to frighten (him) from writing, by abuse.
So paratus, ready.
Qui mentiri solet, pejerare consuevit. CiC. He who is wont to
accustomed to sice ar falsely.
Vulnera quae fecit debuit ipse pati. Ov. The wounds he gave J
should himself have suffered.
Vereor te laudare praesentem. CiC. I feel a delicacy about praisii
you to your face.
Religionum animum nodis exsolvere pergo. Ltjcr. I go on
loose the spirit from the bonds of superstitious creeds.
Atque ut vivamus vivere desinimus. Mart. And that wemc\
live, we cease to live.
So habeo, I have (it in my power).
Tantum habeo polliceri me tibi cumulate satisfacturum. CiC.
much I can promise that I will give you abundant satisfaction.
L(
42
Remarks. — 1. Notice that coepl, I have begun, anddesino, I cease, have Passive P
fects with Passive Infinitives :
Athenienses undique premi bello sunt coepti. Nep. The Athenians began to J (Mfi
the pressure of war on {from) all sides.
Veteres orationes legl sunt desitae. Cic. The old speeches have ceased to be reai
When the Passives are really Reflexives or Neuter, the active forms may be used.
2. Verbs of Will and Desire take ut as well as the Inf. So regularly opto, I choose,
3. Verbs which denote Hope and Promise take the Accusative and Future Infinit fei
(occasionally as in English) :
Spero me" hoc adepturum esse, I hope to (that I shall) obtain this.
Promittebat s<5 venturum esse, he kept promising that he would come (to come).
Doceo, I teach, jubeo, Ibid, veto, 1 forbid, sino, I let, take the Infinitive as a Seco
Accusative : \
Dionysius ne collum tonsorl committeret tondere filias suas d o c u i t. (
Dionysius, to keep from trusting his neck to a barber, taught his daughters to shave (tan I
them shaving).
Ipse jubet mortis te meminisse Deus. Mart. (375.)
Vltae summa brevis spem ncs vetat incohare longam- Hor. Life's brief
forbids us open (a) long (account with) hope.
•5
GEEUXD. 217
Neu Me&os sinas equitare inultos. Hor. Nor let the Median ride and ride un-
Duni«hed.
4. Poetical Uses of the Infinitive : The poets use the Infinitive as an Object with
*reat freedom :
1.) After many verbs which are not auxiliary in Prose :
Ardet mere. Ov. He glows {he burns) to rush.
Quid sit futurum eras fuge quaerere. Hok. What will be to-morrow, Jly the ques-
tion.
Parce tuum vatem sceleris damnare, Cupido. Ov. (377.)
2.) For the Genitive of the Gerund and Geruudive, see 429, K. 4.
i
3.) For the Accusative of the Gerundive :
Quern virum ant heroa lyra vel acri tibia sumes celebrare, Clio ? Hor.
What man or hero wilt thou undertake to celebrate on harp or shrilly flute, 0 Clio? (siim.es
^elebrandum.)
But dare is used with the Infin. even in prose, in familiar phrases : dare bibere, to
jive to drink.
4.) For ut, of purpose ; ad with the Gerund, or Gerundive ; or Supine :
Tunc ego : non oculos sed ventrem pascere venl. Mart, Then I: I'm come to
feed my belly, not my eyes.
Semper in Oceanum mittit me quaerere gemmas. Prop. She is always
tending me to the ocean to. look for pearls.
i 5.) For the Supine in -u, ad with Gerund, or the like :
Roma cap! facilis- Lucan. Rome is easy to be taken, to take (facile capitur).
6.) In fine, the Infinitive is often used because the word or phrase is considered an
equivalent to a verb of creation. In all these points the Post- republican prose follows
joetry more or less closely.
|
INFINITIVE AS A PREDICATE.
425. The Infinitive, as a verbal Substantive, may be used as
} Predicate after the copula esse, to ie, and the like :
Docto homini et eruditS vivere est cogitare. Cic. To a learned and
cultivated man to live is to think.
Gerund and Gerundive
J 426. The other cases of the Infinitive are supplied by the
jrerund. With Prepositions, the Gerund, and not the Infinitive,
s employed.
Remark. — Of course the Infinitive may be quoted as an abstract notion:
Multum interest inter "dare " et "accipere." Sen. There is a vast difference
between "Give" and " Receive."
Nom. Legere difficile est, reading (to read) is hard to do.
Gen. Ars legend!, the art of reading.
Puer studiosus est legendl, the boy is zealous of reading.
Dat. Puer operam dat legendo, the boy devotes himself to reading.
10
218 GERUNDIVE.
Acc. Puer cupit legere, the boy is desirous to read.
Puer propensus est ad legendum, the boy has a bent toward readf
trig.
Ar.L. Puer discit legendo, the boy learns by reading.
427. As a verbal form, the Gerund, like the Infinitive, take;
the same case as the verb.
Studium obtemperandi le gibus. Zeal for obedience to the laws.
Remarks.— 1. The Gerund is the Substantive of the Gerundive. (243, R. 1.) The si;
nification of necessity comes mainly from its use as a predicate. Verbal Nouns are Actrv
or Passive according to the point of view. (Compare 361.) Worthy of note is the fa<
that the leading form of the Greek Active Infinitive is ultimately a Present Particip
Passive.
2. Gerundive and Perfect Participle Passive are often translated alike ; but in the or M
case the action is progressive or prospective, in the other it is completed.
Caesare interficiendo Brutus et Cassius patriae libertatem restituere cona
sunt. By the murder of Caesar (by murdering Caesar), Brutus and Cassius endeavored
restore their country' 's freedom to her.
Caesare interfecto, Brutus et Cassius patriae libertatem non restituerun
By murdering Caesar, Brutus and Cassius did not restore their country 's freedom to her.
428. Gerundive for Gerund. — Instead of the Gerund, wit kt
an Accusative Object, the object is generally put in the case c
the Gerund, with the Gerundive as an Attribute.
I
Gen. Placandi Dei, of appeasing God.
Dat. Placando Deo, for appeasing God. J I,
Abl. Placandd Deo, by appeasing God. Iud
In the model period this construction is invariably employed with Pr
positions.
Ad placandSs Deos, for appeasing the gods.
In placandis Deis, in appeasing the gods.
T;
Remarks. — 1. It is impossible to make a distinction between the Gerund and t
Gerundive Form. They are often used side by side, where there can be no differen ^0}
Liv. xxi. 5; xxv. 40; xxviii. 37; xxx. 26. The preference for the Gerundive is of Hfe
piece with the use of the Perf. Pass. Participle in preference to an Abstract Not
(357, R. 2.)
2. Neuter Adjective? and Pronouns are not attracted: studium agendi aliqu
desire of doing something ; cupiditas plura habendi. greed for having more. But wl
the Neuter Adjective has become a subslantive (195, R. 2), the Gerundive form may
used : modus investigandl veri, the method of investigating the truth.
3. The Gerundive can be formed only from Transitive Verbs, the Gerund from t\
(243. R. 2). Hence the impersonal form must be used with all verbs that do not take
Accusative.
Valetiidinl parcendum est, the health must be spared.
Exceptions.— tftendus, to be used; fruendus, to be enjoyed; potiendus. to be % ^
tessed ; fungendus, to be discharged ; vescendus, to be eaten (405) ; which, however,
.to
_r
i tie,
y
GERUND. 219
ised only * in the oblique cases. Further, medendus, to be healed ; paenitendus, to be
regretted.
Expetuntur dlvitiae ad perfruendas voluptates. Cic. Riches are sought for the
njoyment of pleasures. But :
tltendum est aetate, cito pede labitur aetas. Ov. Life's season is to be enjoyed,
wift-footed glides that season.
* The Impersonal Nominative with the Accus, is rare and antiquated :
Aeternas quoniam paenas in morte timendum est- Lucr. Since we must fear
ternal punishments in death.
GENITIVE OF THE GERUND AND GERUNDIVE.
11 429. The Genitive of the Gerund and Gerundive is used
hiefly after substantives and adjectives which require a com-
oi'lement :
■ Sapientia ars Vivendi putanda est. Cic. Philosophy is to be considered
\ie art of living.
Et propter vitam Vivendi perdere causas. Juv. And on account of
Y$, to lose the reasons for living.
Raucaque garrulitas studiumque immane loquendi. Ov. And hoarse
\\\iattiness1 and a monstrous love of talking.
Triste est ipsum nomen carendl. Cic. Dismal is the mere word
carere" {go without).
Non est placandi spes mihi nulla Dei. Ov. / am not without hope of
ppeasing God.
Ign5rant cupidi maledicendi plus invidiam quam convicium posse.
uint. Those who are eager to abuse know not that envy has more power
,an billingsgate.
Titus equitandi peritissimus fuit. Suet. Titus was exceedingly, skillful
\ riding.
Neuter sui protegendi corporis memor erat. Liv. Neither thought of
ielding his own body.
I Qui hie mos obsidendi vias et viros alienos appellandi ? Liv. What
rt of way is this of blocking up the streets and calling upon other women's
is kisbands f
Summa eludendl occasio est mihi nunc senes. Ter. / have a Up-top
nnce to fool the old folks now.
Remarks. — 1. As meL tui, SUl, nostri, vestrl, are, in their origin, neuter singulars,
!>m meum, my being ; tuum, thy being ; suum, one's being, etc., the Gerundive is put
the same form: conservandl sui, of preserving themselves; vestrl adhortandl, of
horting you.
Copia placandi sit modo parva tui. Ov. Let (me) only have a slight chance of try-
7 to appease you (feminine).
Similar constructions are also found with other words : exemplorum eligendi po-
pe <[ £tas, power of choosing exanqrfes.
M
* In Cic. Fin. 1, 1, 3, fruenda (Nom.) is used for the sake of paranda.
S82C -zr.Tvr.
itrm An:!:::: fa : nltSS IStar agrorum snls latronibus condonanc
Bow is whether Antony shall be empowered to give away lands I;
'■ . ' :.:. :-/ :.
■....: :-anS3 -irk the Gc : - . _ . Serundvre finr the sake
to ez iig lolo i u m e S i j i e a 1 : i a m causa, for ih-e sake of escapl.
i ,:. . '. ".- seine: zir; :ir 3~r.i:ivf ;.;.-...- is used :
L:; .".:.: ^J:::-::i :;'::-}::e:^r Sail. Lepidus took up arms a?
- -'•: -' j>: --. :-' ; : f ft ; / -/V :.
- : - . ■ ■ : : s t e - ; :
:.--i- - -:::~z ~:.~ '. e :: etc
: " '. : i :■ : ~ :• : r i: a e —in 1 en da e s ant- Lit. AM such distincti
.: ■:' :_: -" ■"' '■:■: : :: :~-e i ::':; -'.:." /: -;-;.".' -.: ::.•: ;;-.;;■•■;" .
- :--■: -=^ "~ ~ B: Eaves aula Bui |uisqnc c:rr_modi fec-erat Ships wh
ehadQi&t :er) of personal concert '.-■;-;.
Iezi^"i= rs: :'" . '_: -'_ : . consilium est, id h 77? y {your, Mb) plan; andaf
::lers. _.;'. 7 v.- . _". v ."._ :~e :::::::-: : Tempns at Ire ::"bl est. J~ :5 rrrr --■•r :::. :■:
r _- : , .
Bot when tempos is nsed in the sense of season- ("a time to weep and a time
lan^i"), the Gerund, or Gerundive is rets ir.ed :
If s = rei ger endas non dimisit • Hbf. Zysander did not let the op:
: . .:'-;. ;-' :.::i: :'l\
4 Tie 1 e:= are -err free -j. :ie n= :- : : the TnfinitiTe for the Genirive of the Gen;
;-_ : \.:. ~: _ - :: .e 7 :-:r. = ::'T.e :le r_ iVe :ri_e :: v.: ': -::::::~r I: :e :i: : . r_:.:e V ■=■:": .
A: s e : T : e. rr.ies e: n e : : : .-. : a 1 1 er e = qnae nesciat fallere) vita. Yi
(tet^ without a can. and a Ufe that knoweth not Ttow to disappoint {ignorant of di,
;.'■:: - \e:~ .
-
8
DATIVE W TZZ GERUND AOT GERUNDIVE.
430 The Dative rf the Gerund and Gerundive is n^
ihieflj after woi 3 . which imply capacity and adaptation:
Arv.e :;::r:^e atOls e^: faibeodd. Plht. Alkaline water is good
c. '.'-:. ; ". ' : ::. .
rigmnn aiidmn materia est idonea eliciendis ignibus. Sex.
wood is a fit substance fo' r ; fire (drawing out sparks
Refenmdae err habeo lir.guam natam gratia e. Plaut. / hat
:: ■■; ' -: ~~ .: : ': : "'■. ~: ' .'".:". \: the ::.":. " less.
Rarer if the Datire in combination with the Accnsatiye.
C : d b d 1 7- 1 a : a r. r i ?. d 1= r. a I r p e r a m 1 it . The consul does his endeai ;
Eg tc be d >ticed ifi the Datiye with esse, and in na:
: ] ■ .".s :
Ek>hrendc rivitates nrn ere:::, Cic The com rtuniUes iiere not equ
li'.e::-. v:re^ s::r: :;r rit Bcif se e.:^e oneri ferendo. Sex. .77^
:7t ; Ae knows thai Tie is (equal)
7^ ?
to
GERUND. 221
Decemviri legibus scribundis, Decemvirs for (charged with) drawing up
ws.
Remark.— Later writers treat the Dative of the Gerund or Gerundive as if equivalent
ad.
ACCUSATIVE OF THE GERUNDIVE.
431. The Gerundive is used in the Accusative of the Object
11 be Effected, after such Verbs as Giving and Taking, Sending
' id Leaving.
Diviti homini id aurum servandum dedit. Plaut. He gave (hat gold
k& rich man to keep.
Conon muros renciendos curat. Nep. Conon has the walls rebuilt.
Patriam diripiendam relinquimus. Cic. We leave our country to be
Sundered.
Carvilius aedem faciendam locavit. Lrv. Garvilius let the (contract of)
' ikling the temple.
Of course the Passive form has the Nominative :
[2 Filius Philippi Demetrius ad patrem reducendus legatis datus est.
v. The son of Philip, Demetrius, was given to the envoys to be taken back to
? father.
ABLATIVE OF THE GERUND AND GERUNDIVE.
i 432. The Ablative of the Gerund or Gerundive is used as
e Ablative of Means and Cause, seldom as the Ablative of
aimer or Circumstance.
i XJnus hom5 nobis cunctando restituit rem. Exntcs. One man by
\gering raised our cause again.
\i Cede repugnant!, cedendd victor abibis. Ov. Yield to her when she
nsts ; you'll come off victor by yielding.
Quid digitos opus est graphio lassare tenend5 ? Ov. (390, R.)
Exercendo quotidie milite hostem opperiebatur. Lrv. Drilling the
'' diers daily he loaitedfor the enemy.
Occasionally with the Comparative.
PREPOSITIONS WITH THE GERUND AND GERUNDIVE.
433. The Accusative of the Gerund and Gerundive takes the
•epositions ad and inter, seldom ante, circa, in, ob.
j Nulla res tantum ad dicendum proncit quantum scriptio. Cic. NotTi-
g is as profitable for speaking as writing.
222 supine.
Atticus philosophorum praeceptis ad vitam agendam n5n ad osten
tationem. utebatur. Xep. Atticus m of philosopher
for the conduct of Ir
Inter spoliandum corpus hostis exsplravit. Lrr. While in the act oj
si \ ping the b. ' the enemy he gave up the ghost,
434. The Ablative of the Gerund and Gerundive takes th
pre] - ab, de, ex, often in. seldom cum and pro, and sin
never.
Prohibenda maxime est Ira in puniendo. Cic. Especially to be foi
in- pun ishing.
Brutus in liberanda patria est interfectus. Cic. Brutus was slain i
i
Philosophi in ils ipsls libris quos scribunt de contemnenda gloria su
nomina inscribunt. Cic. (384, R. 1.)
Ex discendo capimus voluptatem. Cic. We receive pleasure from lean\\
ing.
Sutihs.
435. The Supine is a Verbal Xoun, which appears only i:Ij
the Accusative and Ablative cases.
!
THE ACCUSATIVE SUPINE.
436. The Accusative Supine (Supine in -ran) is used chiefl
after Verbs of Motion :
4:
fe
h.
Galli gallinacei cum sole eunt cubitum. Plin. Cocks go to roost
Spectatum veniunt, veniunt spectentur ut ipsae. Ov. They come
see v \ they come to be themselves a show.
Stultitia est venatum ducere in vitas canes. Plaut. ' Tis foolishness
take unvn .' p % a-h. u nting.
Hcstis est uxor invita quae ad virum n up turn datur. PlauJj
(344; R 1.)
Remarks.— L The Accusative S ipine may take aii object, but the construction is e
oinmon :
Hannibal patriam defensum (more usual : ad defendendam. patriam) revocat
est- Nbp. B
SL Egf e i i ally : xm moo is the us »J - opine after the verb ire, to go :
Cur te Is perditum ? Ter. Why are you going to ruin you
Turpisiimi virl bmarum uraemia ereptum eunt. Sall. The scoundrels o
y by force the rewards of the hette
Lp of the Passive Infinitive cf ire
:;:. ... 3 the Supine :
PARTICIPLE. 223
Dicunt reum damnatum Irl. They say that the defendant villi be condemned, {that
ople are going (Irl from Itur, 199. R. 1.), that there is a movement, to condemn the accused).
The consciousness of this is lost, as is shown by the Nominative (528).
Beus damnatum irl videbatur, Quint. The accused seemed to be about to be con-
mned.
THE ABLATIVE SUPINE.
437. The Ablative Supine (Supine in -u) is used chiefly with
djectives, as the Ablative of the Point of View From Which :
Mirabile dicta, Wonderful (in the telling) to tell, visu, to behold.
Hoc dictii quam re facilius est, Liv. This is easier in the saying than
the fact (easier said than done).
Remarks. — 1. The use of the Ablative Supine is confined to a few verbs, chiefly :
ctii, to tell ; factii, to do ; auditu, to hear ; visu, to see : cognitu, to know. Authors
Try much. The adjectives generally denote Ease or Difficulty, Pleasure or Displeasure,
ght or Wrong.
2. Ad, with the Gerundive, is often used instead :
Cibus facillimus ad concoqnendum,/<?o^ (that is) very easy to digest.
The Infinitive, facilis concoqui, is poetical.
3. The local use of the Ablative Supine is very rare :
Vilicus primus cubitii surgat, postremus cubitum eat. Cato. The steward
ist be the first to get out of bed, the last to go to bed.
4. The Supine in -u never takes an object.
Participle.
438. The Participle may be used as a Substantive, but even
Aen generally retains something of its predicative nature.
Nihil est magnum somnianti. Cic. Nothing is great to a dreamer (to a
an, when he is dreaming).
Regia, crede mihi, res est succurrere lap sis. Ov. It is a kingly
ing, believe me (to run to catch those who have slipped), to succor the fallen.
Remarks. — 1. The Attribute of the Participle, employed as a Substantive, is gene-
ly in the adverbial form : recte facta, right actions • facete dictum, a witty remark.
2. Especially to be noted is the Ablative of the Participle without a Substantive :
jidlto, it having been heard ; comperto, it having been found out.
So also an adjective used predicatively : the Substantive is commonly supplied by a
atence. The construction is of limited use.
Alexander audlto Dareum movisse ab Ecbatanis fugientem insequi pergit.
rRT, Alexander, (it) having (been) heard that Darius had decamped from Ecbatana, pro-
ids to follow him up on his flight.
439. The Participle, as an Adjective, often modifies its ver-
3,1 nature, so as to be characteristic :
Epamlnondas erat temporibus sapienter u t e n s, Epaminondas was a
an icho used to use opportunities wisely (= is qui uteretur).
224 NEGATIVE ADVERBS.
Remark.- -Especial attention in called to the parallelism of the Participle or Adjective
with the Relative and Subjunctive:
Res parva dictii, sed quae studiis in magnum certamen excesserit. Liv. A
small thing to mention, but one which, by the excitement of the parties, terminated in a grea
contest
B
One class of Adverbs demands special notice — the Negatives.
NEGxVTIVE ADVEKBS.
Adverb. ^
440. 1. The Predicate may be qualified by an Adverb.
2. Adverbs qualify verbs, adjectives, and other adverbs, anc
sometimes substantives, when they express or imply verbal o
adjective relations:
Male vivit, lie lives ill; bene est, it is well; fere omnes, almost all
nimis saepe, too often ; admodum adulescens, a mere youth, quite a youth
late rex (Verg.), wide-ruling ; bis consul, twice consul ; duo simul bell
two simultaneous wars.
Remark. — The form of the Adverb does not admit of any further inflection, and there
fore the Adverb requires no rules of Syntax except as to its position.
441. Position of the Advert. — Adverbs are commonly pu
next to their verb, and before it when it ends the sentence, an
immediately before their adjective or adverb,
Injuste facit, he acts unwisely.
Admodum pulcher, handsome to a degree, wry handsome.
Valde diligenter, very carefully.
Exceptions occur chiefly in rhetorical passages, in which great stress I
laid on the Adverb, or in poetry :
Iram bene Ennius initium dixit insaniae, Well did Ennius call ange
the beginning of madness.
Vixit dum vixit bene. Ter. He lived while he lived (and livec
well.
N
leo:
nt
Ci
§
442. There are two original negatives in Latin, Ne and Han
(haut, hau). From ne is derived non (ne-oinom (uimm), no-wlii
not). Ne is used chiefly in compounds, or with the Imperath
and Optative Subjunctive. The old use appears in ne — quidei
Non is used with the Indicative and Potential Subjunctiv
haud, mainly with Adjectives and Adverbs.
id
!!'
NEGATIVES. 225
NEGATIVE OF THE INDICATIVE.
443. 1. The regular Negative of tlie Indicative and of the
Potential Subjunctive is non, the absolute not.
Quern amat, amat \ quern non amat, n5n amat, Whom he likes, he likes ;
ohom he does not like, he does not like.
Non ausim, / should not venture.
Remark.— Non as the emphatic, specific negative may negative anything. (See 263,R.)
2. Haud in model prose is used chiefly with Adjectives and
idverbs : hand magnus, not great ; haud male, not badly.
Haud scio (Hauscio), in haud scio an, is the chief exception
!>59, E.)
In antitheses non is used, and not haud :
Non est vivere sed valere vita. Martial. Not living, but being well, is
ife.
I Remark.— Other negative expressions are : haudquaquam, nequaquam, neuti^
[nam, by no means; nihil, nothing. (*' Adam, with such counsel nothing swayed.") On
iUllus, see 304, R. 2.
I 444. Subdivision of the Negative. — A general negative may
3e subdivided by neque — neque, as well as by aut — aut, or
strengthened by ne — quidem, not even :
Nihil unquam neque insolens neque gloriosum ex 5re Timo-
.eontis processit. Nep. Nothing insolent or boastful ever came out of the
nouih of Timoleon.
Consci5rum nemo aut latuit aut fugit. Liv. Of the accomplices no one
either hid or fled.
Nunquam Scipionem ne minima quidem re offendi. Cic. / never
wounded Scipio's feelings, no, not even in the slightest matter.
("I will give no thousand crowns neither.'1'' — Shakes.)
Remark.— In the same way nego, 1 say no, is continued by neque— neque (nee—
aee) :
Negant nee virtutes nee vitia crescere. Cic. They deny that either virtues or vices
increase.
445. Negative Combinations. — In English, we say either no
yme ever, or, never any one; nothing ever, or, never anything ; in
Latin, the former turn is invariably used : nemo unquam, no one
"ever :
Verres nihil unquam fecit sine aliquo .quaestu. Cic. Verres
never did anything without some profit or other.
Remark.— No one yet is nondum quisquam.
10*
226 NEGATIVES.
446. Nego (/ say no, I deny) is commonly used instead of
dico non, I say — not.
Negant quemquam virum bonum esse nisi sapientem. Cic. They say
that no one is a good man except the sage.
Remark- The positive (ajo, / say) is sometimes to be supplied for a subsequent
clause. Caes. B. G. i. 19. The same thing happens with the other negatives.
POSITION OF THE NEGATIVE.
447. The Negative naturally belongs to the Predicate, and
usually stands immediately before it but may be placed before
any emphatic word or combination of words :
Potes non revertl. Sex. Possibly you may not return.
Non potes revertl. You cannot 'possibly return.
Saepe viri fallunt ; tenerae non saepe puellae. Ov. Often do men
deceive ; soft-hearted maidens not often.
Non omnis aetas, Lude, ludo convenit. Plaut. (346.)
Ee marks. — 1. As the Copula esse, to be, is, strictly speaking, a Predicate, the Nega-
tive generally precedes it, contrary to the English idiom, except in contrasts. The differ-
ence in position can often be brought out only by stress of voice : fellx non erat, he
wasn't happy ; non fellx erat. he was not happy, he was far from happy.
2. Ne — quidem bestrides the emphatic word or emphatic group (444).
448. Two negatives in the same sentence destroy one
another, and make an affirmative:
Non nego, I do not deny {I admit).
Remark;.- 1. Non possum non, I cannot but, {I must).
Qui mortem in malls ponit non potest earn non timere. Cic. He who classes H
death among misfortunes cannot but (must) fear it.
2. The double Negative is often stronger than the opposite Positive :
Non iDdoctus. a highly educated man ; non sum nescius, lam well aware.
Non indecoro pulvere sordidl. Hon. Swart fsoiled) with (no dis)honorable dust.
Non ignara mall miseris succurrere disco. Verg. Not unacquainted (= but toe
well acquainted) with misfortune, I learn to succor the wretched.
This figure, which has a very wide application, is called Litotes LAiToTr}$), oi
Under sta lament.
3. It follows from R. 2. that nee non is not simply equivalent to et, and: nee belong;
to the sentence, non to the particular word :
Nec hoc Zeno non vldit. Cic. JS/or did Zeno fail to see this.
4. Of especial importance is the position of the Negative in the following combina
tions :
Indefinite Affirmative. General Affirmative.
nonnihil, somewhat; nihil non, everything;
nonnemo, some one, some ; nemo non, everybody;
nonnulll. some people ; null! non, all;
nonnunquam, sometimes; nunquam non, always;
nonnusquam. somewhere; nusquam non, everywhere.
INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES. 22?
In ipsa curia nonnemo hostis est- Cic. In the senate-house itself there are enemies
aemo non hostis est, everybody is an enemy).
Non est placandi spes mihi nulla Dei- Ov. 1 ham some hope of appeasing
rod (nulla spes non est, I have every hope).
Nemo non didicisse mavult quam diseere. Quint. Everybody prefers having
arned to learning.
NEGATIVE OF THE IMPERATIVE.
449. Ne is the Negative of the Imperative and of the Opta-
ive Subjunctive :
Ne cede malls. Verg. Yield not thou to misfortunes.
Ne transierls Hiberum. Liv. Do not cross the Ebro.
Ne vivam, May I cease to live.
Remark.— The Negative non is sometimes used instead of ne, when contrast is
Emphasized : '
Aut non tentarls aut perfice. Ov. Either attempt not, or achieve.
450. Ne is continued by neve or neu:
i Ne illam vendas neu me perdas hominem amantem. Plaut. Don't
il hery and don't ruin me, a fellow in love.
Incomplete Sentence.
Interrogative Sentences.
451. An interrogative sentence is necessarily incomplete.
irhe answer is the complement.
, 452. A question may relate :
1. To the existence or non-existence of the Predicate: Pre-
dicate Question:
j Vivitne pater ? Is my father alive ?
II. To some undetermined integrant of the sentence, such as
'Subject, Object, Adjective, Adverbial modifier : Nominal Ques-
ion :
ii
Quis est ? Who is it f Quid ais ? What do you say ? Qui hie mos 7
What sort of way is this ? Cur non discedis ? Why do you not depart ?
For a list of Interrogative Pronouns see 104,
Remarks. — 1. The second class requires no rules except as to mood (464).
2, The form of the question is often used to imply a negative opinion on the part of
ie speaker,
228 INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES.
Quid interest inter perjurum et mendacem ? Cic. What is the difference between
a perjured .'nan and a liar?
All questions of this kind are called Rhetorical.
453. Interrogative sentences are divided into simple and
compound (disjunctive). Am I? (simple) ; Am I, or am I not ?
(disjunctive).
Remark.— Strictly speaking, only the simple interrogative sentence belongs to thi;
section ; but for the sake of completeness, the whole subject will be treated here.
454. Interrogative sentences are further divided into direct
and indirect, or independent and dependent. Am I? (direct)
He asks whether I am (indirect).
DIRECT SIMPLE QUESTIONS.
455. Direct simple questions sometimes have no interrogate
sign. Such questions are chiefly passionate in their character
and serve to express Astonishment, Blame, Disgust.
Infelix est Fabricius quod rus suum fodit ? Sen. Fabricius is unhapp.
because lie digs Ms own field? (Impossible !)
Reus, inquitj linguam vis meam praecludere ? Phaedr. Ho! ho
quoth lie, you wish to shut my mouth, you do. (You shall not.)
Quod dicis te non fecissej ego feci ? Quint. Because you say you di\
not do it, I did ? (Absurd !)
Remark.— When several questions follow in immediate succession, only the first gen
rally takes the Interrogative Pronoun, or -ne. Repeated questioning is passionate.
456. Interrogative Particles. — Ne (enclitic) is always aj:
pended to the emphatic word, and generally serves to denote
question, without indicating the expectation of the speaker :
Omnisne pecunia soluta est? Cic. Is all the money paid?
Estne omnis pecunia soluta? Is all the money paid?
Remarks. — 1. -Ne is originally a negative. Questioning a negative leans to t
affirmative; and -ne is not always strictly impartial.
2. -Ne sometime? cuts off a preceding -s, and shortens the long vowel of the same, a,1
often drops its own e. Viden ? Seestf Tun 1 You?
457. Nonne expects the answer Yes :
Nonne meministi ? Crc. Do you not remember?
Nonne is generosissimus qui optimus ? Quint. Is Jie not the trw
gentleman tcho is the best man?
So the other negatives with ne: nemone, nihilne, and the like.
tei;
INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES. 229
n ,. 458. Hum expects the answer No :
Num quis hie alius praeter me atque te ? Nemo est. Platjt. Is any
body here besides you and me f J\To.
Num tibi quum fauces urit sitis, aurea quaeris pocula ? Hon. When
thirst burns your throat for you, do you ask for golden cups f [No.]
459. An (or) belongs to the second part of a disjunctive
J question.
Sometimes, however, the first part of the disjunctive question is sup-
pressed, or rather involved. The second alternative with an serves to
urge the acceptance of the positive or negative proposition involved in the
preceding statement. This abrupt form of question (or, then) is of frequent
use in Remonstrance, Expostulation, Surprise, and Irony.
Non manum abstines 7 An tibi jam mavis cerebrum dispergam hie ?
' Ter. Are you not going to keep your hands off? Or would you rather have
! me scatter your brains over the place now ?
(Vir custodit absens.) (My husband keeps guard, though absent.)
(Is it not so f) An nescis longas regibus esse manus ? Ov. Or per-
Jr haps you do not knoic (you do not know, then) that kings have long hands
(arms).
Remark.— Especially to be noted, in connection with an, are the phrases, nescio an,
hand scio an, / do not knoiv but ; dnbito an, / doubt, 1 doubt but = / am inclined to
think ; which give a modest affirmation. Negative particles, added to these expressions,
give a mild negation :
Hand scio an ita sit. Cic. / do not know but it is so.
Hand scio an nulla senecttis beatior esse possit Cic. I do not know but it
is impossible for any old age to be happier.
Dnbito an Thrasybulum primum omnium ponam. Nep. 1 doubt but I should
( =1 am inclined to think I should) put Thrasybulus first of all.
So forsitan, perhaps, regularly with the Potential Subjunctive :
Forsitan et Priaml f n e r i n t quae fata reqniras. Verg. Terhaps you may
ask what was the fate of Priam, too.
In later Latin an is used as a simple interrogative, and nescio an = nescio num.
DIRECT DISJUNCTIVE QUESTIONS.
460. Direct Disjunctive Questions have the following forms:
First Clause. Second and Subsequent Clauses.
utrum, whether j an, (anne), or
utrumne, an,
:et:
an,
an (anne),
ne (chiefly in indirect questions).
2C0 INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES.
U t r u m nescis quam alte ascenderis, a n id pro nihilo habes ? Cic.
Are you not aware how high you have mounted, or do you count that as
nothing?
Vosne Lucium Domitium a n vos Lucius Domitius deseruit ?
Caes. Have you deserted Lucius Domitius, or has Lucius Domitius deserted
you f
Eloquar an sileam ? Verg. Shall I speak, or hold my peace ?
Utrum hoc tu parum meministi, a n ego non satis intellexi, a n
mutasti sententiam ? Cic. Do you not remember this, or did I misunder-
stand you, or ham you changed your view ?
Sunt haec tua verba necne ? Cic. Are these your words, or no f
Remark.— Aut (or), in questions, is not to be confounded with an. Aut gives another
part of the same question, or another form of it (or in other words).
Voluptas melioremne efficit aut laudabiliorem virum? Cic. Does pleasure make
a better or more praiseworthy man ? (Answer : neither.)
Tibi ego an tu mini servus es % Plaut. Am I slave to you or you to me— which ?
(The MS. reading aut would expect the answer: neither).
461. In direct questions, or not is annon, rarely necne; in
indirect, necne, rarely annon:
I s n e est quern quaero, a n n 5 n ? Is that the man lam looking for, or
not?
Sitque memor n5stri necne, referte mihi. Ov. (195, R. 7.)
Remark. — Utrum is sometimes used with the suppression of the second clause for
whether or no?
INDIRECT QUESTIONS.
462. Indirect questions have the same particles as the
direct, with the following modifications :
1. Num loses its negative force, and becomes simply whether :
Specularl jussi sunt num sollicitati animi sociorum essent. Lrv.
They icere ordered to spy out whether the allies had been tampered with.
2. Si, if, is used for whether, chiefly after verbs and sentences,
implying trial :
Tentata res est si primo impetu cap! Ardea posset. Lrv. An attempt j
was made (in case, in hopes that, to see), if Ardea could be taken by a dash
(coup-de-main). Compare O si (254).
3. An is sometimes used for num and ne, but never in model j
prose :
INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES. 231
Consuluit deinde Alexander a n totius orbis imperium sibi destina-
3t pater, Curt. Alexander then asked the wacle whether his father des-
ned for him the empire of the whole world,
4. The form ne is found chiefly in the indirect ques-
^on :
Tarquinius Prisci Tarquinii regis filius neposne fuerit parum liquet.
it. Whether Tarquin was the son or grandson of king Tarquin the Elder,
oes not appear.
Remark.— The form ne— ne is poetical.
SUMMARY OF DIRECT AND INDIRECT DISJUNCTIVE
QUESTIONS.
463. Direct:
Is the last syllable short or long f
Postrema syllaba utrum brevis est a n longa ?
brevis n e est a n longa ?
Indirect :
In a verse it makes no difference whether the last syllable be short or long :
utrum postrema syllaba brevis sit an
longa.
postrema syllaba brevis n e sit an longa.
postrema syllaba brevis a n longa sit. CiC.
postrema syllaba brevis sit longa n e.
In versu nihil refert ■<
Moods in Interrogative Sentences.
I. IN DIRECT QUESTIONS.
464. The Mood of the question is the Mood of the expected
r anticipated answer.
465. Indicative questions expect an Indicative answer, when
he question is genuine.
A. Quis homo est ? B. Ego sum. Ter. Who is that? It is I.
A. Vivitne [pater ?] B. Vlvum Hquimus. Plaut. Is father alive ? We
ft him alive.
466. Indicative questions anticipate an Indicative answer
vith the negative when the question is rhetorical.
233 INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES.
Quis paupertatem n5n extimescit ? Cic. Wlio does not dread poverty ?
Remark.— Nonne and num in the direct question are really rhetorical. With nonne
a negative answer is anticipated to a negative, hence the affirmative character. Compare
further, 452, R. 2.
467. Subjunctive questions expect Imperative or anticipate
Potential answers. Subjunctive questions expect Imperative
answers, chiefly in the First Person.
A. Abeam? B. Abi. Plaut. Shall I go away ? Go.
Remark.— So in the representative of the First Person in dependent discourse. (258.)
468. The Subjunctive is used in rhetorical questions, which
imply a negative opinion on the part of the speaker:
Quis hoc credat? Who would believe this? [No one.] Quid faceret
aliud ? What else was he to do f [Nothing.]
Quis tulerit Gracchos de seditione querentes ? Juv. (251.)
Remark.— On the Exclamatory Question see 534, 560.
II. IN INDIRECT QUESTIONS.
469. The Dependent Interrogative is always in the Subjunc-
tive.
The Subjunctive may represent the Indicative :
Consider abimus quid fecerit (Ind. fecit), quid faciat (Ind. facit), quid
facturus sit (Ind. faciet or facturus est). Cic. We will consider what 7u
has done, what he is doing, what he is going to do {will do).
Epaminondas quaesivit salvusne esset clipeus. Cic. Ejpaminonda,
asked whether his shield was safe. (Salvusne est ?)
The Subjunctive may be original :
Ipse docet quid agam (210) ; fas est et ab hoste doceri. Ov. (Quii
agam, what I am to do ; not, what I am doing). See 258.
Remarks.— 1. When the leading verh is disconnected from the interrogative, the Id'
dicative form is employed :
So often with die, say, vide, see, quaere, ask. Die, quid est % Tell me, what is it
(Die quid sit, Tell me what it is.)
Quin tti iino verbo die : quid est quod me veils ? Ter. Won't you tell me in o?
word : What is it yov, want of me ?
Die mini quid feci nisi non sapienter amavi. Ov. Tell me what have I done, sa\
that I have loved unwisely.
The early poets yo even further than this.
2. Ne"scio quis, nescio quid, nescio qui, nescio quod, I know not who, what, whic.
are used exactly as indefinite pronouns, and have no effect on the construction.
i-eli.
IOTEKKOGATIVE SENTENCES. 233
So also, nescio quomodo, I know not how — strangely ; and mirum quantum, it (is)
marvellous how much = uvnde? fully, are used as adverbs :
Mirum quantum profuit ad concordiam. Liv. It served wonderfully to promote
harmony.
Nescio quid majus nascitur Iliade. Prop. Something, Iknow not tvhat, is rising
greater than the Iliad.
Nescio quo pacto vel magis homines juvat gloria lata quam magna. Pun. Ep.
Somehow or other ; people are even mare charmed to have a wide-spread reputation than a
jrand one,
The position excludes a conscious ellipsis of the Subjunctive.
3. The Relative has the same form as the Interrogative quis ? except in the Nom. Sing. ;
hence the importance of distinguishing between them in dependent sentences. The in-
terrogative depends on the leading verb, the relative belongs to the antecedent. (612,
R. 2.)
Interrogative ; die quid rogem, Tell me what it is lam asking.
Belative : die quod rogo. Ter. Tell me that which I am asking (the answer to
my question).
The relative is not unfreqneiitly used where we should expect the interrogative, espe-
cially when the facts of the case are to be emphasized :
Dicam quod sentio, I will tell you my real opinion.
Incorporated relatives are not to be confounded with interrogatives :
- Quaeramus ubi ( =ibi ubi) maleficium invenlrl potest. Cic. Let us look for the
misdeed in the place where it can be found.
PECULIARITIES OF INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES.
470. The subject of the dependent clause is often treated
as the object of the leading clause (Prolepsis) :
ai'ii
Nosti Marcellum quam tardus sit. Cic. You Tcnoio Marcellus, what a
slow creature he is.
471. Contrary to our idiom, the interrogative is often used
in participial clauses. In English, the participle and verb
change places, and a causal sentence becomes consecutive :
Quam utilitatem petentes scire cupimus ilia quae occulta nobis sunt ?
Cic. What advantage do we seek ichen we desire to know those things which
I are hidden from usf
Solon Pisistrato tyranno quaerenti qua tandem spe fret us sibi
tarn audaciter resisteret respondisso dicitur, senectute. Sen. Solon,
to Pisistratus the usurper, asking him (= when Pisistratus the usurper
asked him) on what earthly hope relying (— on what hope he relied that)
he resisted him so boldly, is said to have answered " old age."
472. Final sentences (sentences of Design) are used in ques-
tions more freel}7 than in English :
234 SYNTAX OF THE COMPOUND SENTENCE.
Sessum it praetor. Quid ut judicetur ? Cic. The judge is going to take
his seat What is to be adjudged? (To adjudge what?)
Remark.— The Latin language goes further than the English in combining interroga-
tive words in the same clause.
YES AND NO.
473. Yes is represented :
1. By sane, (literally) soundly, sane quidem, yes indeed, etiam, even (so),
vero, of a truth, ita, so, omnino, by all means, certe, surely, cextb^for cer-
tain, admodum, to a degree.
2. By immo or imo, which conveys a correction, and either removes a
doubt or heightens a previous statement — yes indeed, nay rather.
Ecquid placeant aedes me rogas ? Immo. Plaut. Do 1 like the house,
you ask me ? Yes, indeed.
Causa igitur non bona est ? Immo optima. Cic. The cause, then, is a
bad one ? Nay, it is an excellent one.
3. By cense o, I think so.
4. By repeating the emphatic word either with or without confirmatory
particles :
Estisne ? Sumus. Are you ? We are.
Dasne ? D5 sane. Do you grant ? I do indeed.
N~o is represented :
1. By non, non vero, non ita, minime, by no m,eans, nihil, nothing,
minimi vero, nihil sane, nihil minus.
2. By repeating the emphatic word with the negative :
N5n irata es ? Non sum irata, You are not angry ? I am not.
Remark. — Yes, for, and no, for, are often expressed simply by nam and enim:
Turn Antonius : Heri enim, inquit, hoc mini proposueram. Cic. Then quoth
Antony : Yes, for I had proposed this to myself yesterday.
k
«
Sicl
1
it
J
4
SYNTAX OF THE COMPOUND SENTENCE.
474. 1. A compound sentence is one in which the necessary
parts of the sentence occur more than once, one which consists
of two or more clauses.
2. Coordination is that arrangement of the sentence accord-*
ing to which the different clauses are merely placed side by
side.
3. Subordination is that arrangement of the sentence accord-
ing to which one clause depends on the other.
Si
SYNTAX OF THE COMPOUND SENTENCE. 235
He "became poor and we became rich, is a coordinate sentence.
He became poor that we might be rich, is a subordinate sen-
:ence.
4. The sentence which is modified is called the Principal
Clause, that which modifies is called the Subordinate Clause.
'He became poor" is the Principal Clause, " that toe might be
"ich" is the Subordinate Clause.
Remark.— Logical dependence and grammatical dependence are not to be confounded,
n the conditional sentence, yivam Si Vivet, let me live if she lives, my living depends
>n her living ; yet " vivam " is the principal, " si Vivet " the subordinate clause. It
s the dependence of the introductory particle that determines the grammatical relation.
Coordination.
475. Coordinate sentences are divided into various classes,
According to the particles by which the separate clauses are
tound together.
j Remabk. — Co-ordinate sentences often dispense with conjunctions (Asyndeton),
Then the connection must determine the character.
Copulative Sentences.
476. The following particles are called Copulative Conjunc
ions: et, -que, atque (ac), etiam, quoque.
477. Et is simply and, the most common and general par-
icle of connection, and combines likes and unlikes :
Panem et aquam natnra desiderat. Sen. Bread and water (is what)
mture calls for.
Probitas laudatur e t alget. Juv. Honesty is bepraised and— freezes.
478. -Que (enclitic) unites things that belong closely to one
mother. The second member serves to complete or extend the
irst :
!J
^
Senatus populus que Romanus, The Senate and people of Borne.
Ibi mortuus sepultusque Alexander. Liv. There Alexander died and
oas buried.
Combinations : et — et ;
-que — et;
et — que (only for two words) ;
-que — que, chiefly in poetry (also Lrv. and Sall.)
jH|j Et domino satis et nimium furique lupoque. Tib. Enough for owner, and too
inch for thief and wolf
236 SYNTAX OF THE COMPOUND SENTENCE.
479. Atque (compounded of ad and -que) adds a more impor-
1 an t to a less important member. But the second member often
owes its importance to the necessity of having the complement
(-que). Ac (a shorter form, which does not stand before a
vowel) is fainter than atque, and almost equivalent to et:
Intra moenia atque in sinu urbis sunt hostes. Sall. Within the 1
ay, and in the heart of the city, are the enemies.
A. Ego servos? (29.) B. Atque meus. Plaut. I— a slaw? And
mine to hoot.
Atque or ac is often used to connect the parts of a clause in
which et has been already employed :
Et potentes sequitur invidia et humiles abjectosque contemptus et
turpes ac nocentes odium. Quint. The poicerful are followed by envy ; the
low and grovelling, by contempt ; the base and hurtful, by hatred.
Remarks. — 1. Adjectives and Adverbs of Likeness and Unlikeness may take atque or I
ac See 645.
2. On the Latin proneness to subordination by means of the participle, see 409, R. 2,
and 667, R. 1.
480. Etiam, even {noiv), yet, still, exaggerates (heightens) and
generally precedes the word to which it belongs :
Nobis res familiaris etiam ad necessaria deest, We lack means even
for necessaries of life.
Ad Appil Claudii senectutem accedebat etiam ut caecus esset
Cic. (558.)
Of time:
Non satis pernosti me etiam qualis sim. Ter. You still do not know
well enough (— little know) what manner of person lam.
Remark.— Et is sometimes used for etiam, but sparingly. So et ipse, and kindred
expressions.
481. Quoque, so also, complements (compare -que) and alway
follows the words to which it belongs:
Quum patri Timothei populus statuam posuisset, filio quoque
dedit. Nep. The people, having erected a statue in honor of the father of
Timotheus, gave one to the son also {likewise).
Rem auk.— The difference between etiam and quoque is not to be insisted on to<
rigidly :
Grande et conspicuum nostro quoque tempore monstrum. Juv. A huge an,
conspicuous prodigy, evtn in our day.
SYNTAX OF THE COMPOUND SENTENCE. 237
482. Copulation by means of the Negative. — Instead of et
and the negative, neque (nee) and the positive is the rule in
Latin:
Opini5ne vulgi rapimur in errSrem nee vera cernimus. Cic. By
the prejudice of the rabble we are hurried into error, and do not distinguish
the truth.
Caesar substitit neque hostem lacessivit. Caes. Caesar halted and did
not Jiarass the enemy {without harassing the enemy).
Remarks.— 1. Et— non, and .... not, is used when the negation is confined to a
6ingle word, or is otherwise emphatic :
Et militavi non sine gloria. Hon. And I have been a soldier not without glory.
On nec non, the opposite of et non, see 448, R. 3.
2. Combinations: Neque —neque ; nee — nec, neque — nec.
neque —-que. (nec — neque.)
et —neque.
3. Paradigms : And no one, neque quisquam, nor any one.
And no— neque ullus, nor any.
And nothing, neque quidquam, nor any thing.
And never, neque unquam, nor ever.
Neque amet quemquam nec ametur ab ullo, Juv. May he love no one,
and be loved by none.
4. Nec is often nearly equivalent to nec tamen, and yet not :
Extra invidiam nec extra gloriam erat, Tac. He was beyond the reach of envy.
and yet not beyond the reach of glory.
483. 1. Insertion and Omission of Copulatives. — When mul-
tus, much, many, is followed by another attribute, the two are
often combined by copulative particles : many renowned deeds,
multa e t praeclara facinora ; many good qualities, mnltae bonae-
que artes.
2. Several subjects or objects, standing in the same relations,
^1 either take et throughout or omit it throughout. The omission
of it is common in emphatic enumeration :
Phryges et Pisidae et Cilices j or, Phryges, Pisidae, Cilices, Phry-
gians, Pisidians, and Cilicians.
;/ 3. Etis further omitted in climaxes, in antitheses, in phrases,
and in formulae :
Viri non est debilitari dolore, frangl, succumbere. Cic. It is unmanly
to allow oneself to be disabled (unnerved) by grief, to be broken-spirited, to suc-
cumb.
238 OTHER PARTICLES EMPLOYED.
Difficilis facilis, jucundus acerbus, es idem. Mart. (296.)
Patres Conscript!, Fathers (and) Conscript (Senators).
Jupiter Optimus Maximus, Father Jove, supremely good (and) great.
OTHER PARTICLES EMPLOYED.
,484. Other particles are sometimes employed instead of the
copulative in the same general sense.
1. Temporal : Turn — turn, then — then ; nunc — nunc, modo — modo,
now — noiD ; simul — simul, at the same time. Turn Graece — turn
Latine, partly in Greek, partly in Latin.
Horatius Codes nunc singulos provocabat, nunc increpabat om-
nes. Lit. Horatius Codes now challenged them singly, now taunted them
all.
Modo hue, modo illuc, now hither, now thither {hither and thither).
Simul spernebant, simul metuebant, they despised and feared at the same
time (they at once despised and feared).
On Quum — turn, see 589.
2. Comparative : ut — ita, as — so :
Dolabellam ut Tarsenses ita Laodiceni ultro arcessierunt, As the
people of Tarsus so the people of Laodicea (= Both the people of Tarsus
and those of Laodicea) sent for Dolabella of their own accord.
Often, however, there is an adversative idea :
Haec omnia u t invitis ita non adversantibua patriciis transacta.
Lrv. All this was done, the patricians, though unwilling, yet not opposing
(= against the wishes, but without any opposition on the part of the patri-
cians).
3. Adversative : Non modo, non solum, non tantum, not only ; sed
etiam, verum etiam, but even, but also (sometimes simply sed)
Urbes maritimae non solum multis periculis oppositae sunt sec
etiam caecis. Cic. Cities on the seaboard are liable not only to mani\
dangers, but even (also) to hidden (ones).
Non doceri tantum sed etiam delectarl volunt. Quint. They icisJm .,
not merely to be taught but to be tickled to boot. I ^
In the negative form, non modo non, not only not; sed ne . . . quidem||
but not even ; sed vlx, but hardly.
Ego n o n modo tibi non irascor sed ne reprehendo quidenj;
factum tuum. Cic. I not only am not angry with you, but I do not even fin
fault with your action.
Remarks.— 1. Instead of non modo (solum) non— sed ne— quidem, the latter nolj
is generally omitted, when the two negative clauses have a verb in common, the negativ,
of the first clause being supplied by the second :
ADVERSATIVE SENTENCES. 239
Pisone consule senatui non solum juvare rempublicam sed ne lugere quidem
licebat. Cic. Wlien Piso was consul, it was not only not left free for the senate (= the senate
was not only not free) to help the commonwealth, but not even to mourn (for her).
2. Nedum, not (to speak of) yet, much less, is also used, either with or without a verb
in the subjunctive :
Satrapa nunquani sufferre ejus sumptus queat, nedum tu possls. Tek. A
nabob could never stand that girPs expenditures, much less could you.
Nedum from Livy on is used after affirmative clauses as well.
ADVERSATIVE SENTENCES.
485. The adversative particles are: autem, sed, verum, vero,
at, atqui, tamen, ceterum. Of these only sed and tamen are really
adversative.
486. Autem (postpositive) is the weakest form of but, and in-
dicates a difference from the foregoing, a contrast rather than a
contradiction. It serves as a particle of transition and explana-
tion ( — moreover, furthermore, now), and of resumption (= to
come bach), and is often used in syllogisms :
Rumoribus mecum pugnas, ego autem a te rati5nes require Cic.
You fight me with rumors, whereas I ask of you reasons.
Quod est bonum, omne laudabile est ; quod autem laudabile est, omne
est honestum ; bonum igitur quod est, honestum est. Cic. Everything
\hat is good is praiseworthy ; hut everything that is praiseworthy is virtuous ;
"therefore, what is good is virtuous.
Remark. — Autem commonly follows the first word in the sentence or clause ; but
vhen an unemphatic est or sunt occupies the second place, it is put in the third. So
.gitur and enim.
487. Sed (set) is used partly in a stronger sense, to denote
contradiction, partly in a weaker sense, to introduce a new
thought, or to revive an old one :
^'f Non est vivere sed valere vita. Mart. (443.)
Domitius nulla iile quidem arte sed Latine tamen dicebat. Cic. Domi-
lel! ius spoke with no art it is true, but for all that, in good Latin.
ieJ 488. Verum, it is true, true, always takes the first place in a
entence, and is practically equivalent to sed in its stronger sense :
SI certum est fac ere, facias ; verum ne post conferas culpam in
a ; ne. Ter. If you are determined to do it, you may do it ; but you must not
fterward lay the blame on me.
2-iO ADVERSATIVE SENTENCES.
489. Vero? of a truth, is generally put in the second place,
asserts with conviction, and is used to heighten the statement:
Plat5nem Dion adeo admiratus est ut se totum el traderet. Neque
vero minus Plato delectatus est Dione. Nep. Dion admired Plato to
such a degree that lie gave himself wholly up to him ; and indeed Plato was no
less delighted with Dion.
490. At (another form of ad = in addition to) introduces
startling transitions, lively objections, remonstrances, questions
wishes, often by way of quotation :
Si gravis dolor, brevis. At Philocteta jam decimum annum in spe
lunca jacet. Cic. If pain is sharp, it is short. But Philoctetes has been ly
ing in his cave going on ten years.
"At multis malls affectus ?" Quis negat? Cic. " But he has suffere
much ?" Who denies it f
Si scelestus est at mi infidelis n5n est. Ter. If he is a scamp, y>
(at least) he is not unfaithful to me.
At videte hominis intolerabilem audaciam! Cic. Well, but see thefe
loicys insufferable audacity !
A t vobis male sit ! Cat. And ill luck to you !
Remakk.— Ast = at + set (sed) is antiquated and poetic.
k
n
m
491. AtquI (But hoiv ? = But what of that ?) is still strong
than at, and is used chiefly in argument :
Atqui perspicuum est hominem e corpore animoque constare. CW^
But it is clear that man consists of body and soul ; igitur, therefore,
492. Tamen (literally, even thus), nevertheless, is often coi
bined with at, verum, sed.
It is commonly prepositive, unless a particular word is to
made emphatic :
Naturam expellas furca, tamen usque recurret. Hor. You may dr it
out Dame Nature with a pitchfork, for all that she will ever be returning.
Domitius nulla quidem arte sed Latine tamen dicebat (487).
493. Ceterum, for the rest, is used by the historians as
adversative particle.
Remark.— In lively discourse, the adversative particles are often omitted.
DISJUNCTIVE SENTENCES.
494. The disjunctive particles are aut, vel, -ve, slve (seu).
Hi
DISJUNCTIVE SENTENCES. 241
495. Aut, or, denotes absolute exclusion or substitution :
Vinceris aut vincis. Prop. Ton are conquered or conquering.
Aut is often = or at least (aut saltern) :
i
Cuncti aut magna pars fidem mutavissent. Sall. All, or at least a
great part, would have changed their allegiance.
Duo aut summum tres juvenes. Lit. Two, or at most three, youths.
Aut — aut, either — or:
Quaedam terrae partes aut frigore rigent aut uruntur calore. Cic.
.Some parts of the earth are either frozen with cold or burnt with heat.
j Aut die aut accipe calcem. Juv. Either speak or take a kick.
496. Vel (literally, you may choose) gives a choice, often with
etiam, even, potius, rather :
i Ego vel Cluvienus. Juv. I, or, if you choose, Gluvienus.
Per me vel stertas licet, non modo quiescas. Cic. For all I care, you
<H)nay {even) snore, if you choose, not merely sleep.
Satis vel etiam nimium multa. Cic. Enough, or even too much.
Epicurus homo minime malus vel potius vir optimus, Epicurus
[was) a person by no means bad, or, rather, a man of excellent character.
Vel — vel, either — or (whether — or) :
Miltiades dixit ponte rescisso regem vel hostium ferr5 vel inopia
(jj paucis diebus interiturum. ]N"ep. Miltiades said that if the bridge were cut
'he king would perish in a few days, whether by the sword of the enemy, or for
want of provisions.
/OP
497. -Ve (enclitic) is a weaker form of vel (with numerals,
ft most) :
I Cur timeam dubitem v e locum defendere ? Juv. Why should I fear
>r hesitate to maintain my position?
Bis terve, twice or at most thrice (bis terque, twice and indeed as much as
•hrice, if not more).
i 498. Slve, (seu), if you choos ? gives a choice between tw >
Resignations of the same object :
Urbem matri seu novercae reliquit. Liv. He left the city to his mother,
rr {if it seems more likely) to his step-mother.
499. Slve — slve (seu — seu) whether — or (indifference) :
11
242 CAUSAL AND ILLATIVE SENTENCES.
Sive tu medicnm adhibueris sive non adhibueris n5n convalesces.
Cic. Whether you employ a physician, or do not employ (one), you will not get
well.
S e u visa est catulis cerva fidelibus seu rupit teretes Marsus aper
plagas. Hor. Whether a doe hath appeared to the faithful hounds, or a Mar-
tian boar hath burst the tightly -twisted toils.
CAUSAL AND ILLATIVE SENTENCES.
500. A. The causal particles are nam, enim, namque, and
etenim, for.
Sensus mirifice collocati sunt. Nam oculi tanquam speculatores al-
tissimum locum obtinent. Cic. The senses are admirably situated. For
eyes, like the watchmen, occupy the highest post.
Themistocles mur5s Atheniensium restituit suo peiiculo. Namque
Lacedaemonii prohibere conati sunt. Nep. Themistocles restored the wallsl
of Athens with ?isk to himself For the Lacedaemonians endeavored to pre-
vent it.
Pisces dva relinquunt, facile enim ilia aqua sustinentur. Cic. Fish leav
their eggs, for they are easily kept alive by the water.
Remarks. — 1. Nam is always put at the beginning of a sentence ; enim is alway,
postpositive (486, R.) : namque and etenim are commonly put in the first place :
For what can you do? Nam quid agas % Quid enim agas ? Namque quic
agas? Etenim quid agas 1
2. These particles are originally asseverative, and are often used not only to furnish
reason, but also to give an explanation or illustration (as for instance). Quid enim agas
!Vhat,for instance, can you dof This is especially true of enim, but a broad differenc
between nam and enim twhich is derived from nam) cannot be proved. Etenim i
often used to carry on the argument, and gives an additional ground. Nempe (from nam
namely, to wit, that is, of course, is often used ironically.
Sed qualis rediit \ Nempe una nave. Juy. But in what style did he return ? Wit ^
one ship, forsooth.
3. In atenim, sed enim, verumenim, enimvero, verumenimvero, as in etenin
enim gives a ground or an illustration of the leading particle, but translation by an ellip:
would be too heavy, and enim is best left untranslated:
A. Audi quid dlcam. B. At enim taedet jam audire eadem millies. Ter. a
Hear what I say. B. But {I won't, for) lam tilled of hearing the same things a thousan
times already.
501. B. Illative particles are itaque, igitur, ergo, ideo, idcirci
proinde.
502. Itaque (literally, and so), therefore, is put at the begir
ning of the sentence by the best writers, and is used of fac\
that follow from the preceding statement:
Nemo ausus est liber Phocionem sepelire. Itaqu e a servis sepult?
i
5i
!5
it
SUBORDINATION. 243
est. Kep. No free man dared to 'bury Phocion, and so he was buried by
slaves.
503. Igitur, therefore, is generally postpositive, and is used of
opinions which, have their natural ground in the preceding
statement :
Mihi non satisfacit. Sed quot homines tot sententiae ; fall! igitur
possumus. Cic. Me it does not satisfy. But many men many minds. 1
may therefore be mistaken.
Remark.— In historical writers, igitur is used both in position and signification as
■itaque. When emphatic, igitur is found even in the best authors at the head of the
sentence.
i
504. Ergo denotes necessary consequence, and is used espe-
cially in arguments, with somewhat more emphasis than igitur.
4ldeo, idcirco, means on that account ; proinde, accordingly, is
employed in exhortations, appeals, and the like:
Negat haec filiam me suam esse ; n5n ergo haec mater mea est.
Plaut. She says that I am not her daughter, therefore she is not my mother.
Quod praeceptum (nosce te ipsum) quia majus erat quam ut ab no-
mine videretur idcirco adsignatum est deo. Cic. This precept (know thy-
self),'because it was too great to seem to be of man, was, on that account, attri-
buted to a god.
P r o i n d e aut exeant aut quiescant. Cic. Let them then either depart
or be quiet.
SUBORDINATION".
505. Subordinate sentences are only extended forms of the
simple sentence, and are divided into Adjective and Substantive
sentences, according as they represent adjective and substantive
relations.
506. Adjective sentences express an attribute of the subject
in an expanded form :
Uxor quae bona est (625) = uxor bona.
nfflla
507. Substantive sentences are introduced by particles,
ifhich correspond in their origin and use to the Oblique Cases,
Accusative and Ablative.
These two cases furnish the mass of adverbial relations, and hence we
nake a subdivision for this class, and the organization of the subordinate
Sentence appears as follows :
24:4: MOODS IN SUBORDINATE SENTENCES.
508. A. Substantive sentences.
I. Object sentences.
II. Adverbial sentences :
1. Of Cause. (Causal.)
2. Of Design and Tendency. (Final and con-
secutive. )
3. Of Time. (Temporal.)
4. Of Condition and Concession. (Condi-
tional and concessive.)
B. Adjective sentences (Kelative) .
Moods in Subordinate Sentences.
509. 1. Final and Consecutive Clauses always take the Sub-
junctive. Others vary according to their conception. Especially
important are the changes produced by Oratio Obllqua.
2. Oratio Obllqua, or Indirect Discourse, is opposed to Oratiq
Recta, or Direct Discourse, and gives the main drift of a speech]
and not the exact words. Oratio Obllqua, proper, depends on
some Verb of Saying or Thinking expressed or implied, the
Principal Clauses being put in the Infinitive, the Dependent ir
the Subjunctive.
Socrates dlcere solebat :
6. R. Omnes in eo quod sciunt satis sunt eloquentes.
O, R. Socrates used to say : u All men are eloquent enough in what thet
UNDERSTAND."
O. O. Omnes in e5 quod scirent satis esse eloquentes.
6. O. Socrates used to say that all men were eloquent enough in what the
UNDERSTOOD.
3. The oblique relation may be confined to a depender
clause and not extend to the whole sentence. This may I
called Partial Obliquity :
6. R. Nova nupta dicit : Fleo quod Ire necesse est. The bride says :
weep because I must needs go.
6. O. Nova nupta dicit se flere quod ire necesse sit. The bride sa
that she weeps because she must needs go.
6. R. Nova nupta flet quod Ire necesse est. Cat.
The bride weeps because she must go.
P. O. Nova nupta flet quod Ire necesse sit.
The bride is weeping because " she must go " (quoth she).
i
Al
SEQUENCE OF TENSES.
245
4. Akin to 0. 0. is the so-called Attraction of Mood by which
clauses originally Indicative are put in the Subjunctive because
they depend on Infinitives or Subjunctives. (666.)
N5n dubito quin nova nupta fleat quod Ire necesse sit. I do not doubt
that the bride is weeping because she must go.
Remark. — The full discussion of O. O. must, of course, be reserved for a later period,
See 650.
Sequence of Tenses.
510. In those dependent sentences which require the subjunc-
tive, the choice of the tenses of the dependent clause is deter-
mined by the form of the principal clause. Principal Tenses
tlare followed by Principal ; Historical, by Historical.
All forms that relate to
., the Present and Future
(Principal Tenses)
• are followed by
All forms that relate to the
Past (Historical Tenses)
the Present Subjunctive
(for continued action) ;
the Perfect Subjunctive
(for completed action).
the Imperfect Subjunctive
(for continued action) ;
the Pluperfect Subjunc-
tive (for completed ac-
tion).
Remark. — The action which is completed with regard to the leading verb may be in
itself a continued action. So in English : I have been doing, I had been doing. Hence,
| the Imperfect Indicative (I was doing) is represented in this dependent form by the Per-
fect and Pluperfect, when the action is completed as to the leading verb.
!l
are followed by -
511. Pres.
Pure Pf.,
cognosco,
cognovi,
•:'
Hi
Future, cognoscam,
Fut. Perf., cognovero,
I am finding out,
I have found out
(I know),
I shall (try to)
find out,
I shall have found
out (shall know),
Imperp., cognoscebam, I was finding out,
Pluperf., cognoveram,
i" had found
(I knew),
out
quid facias,
what you are doing ;
quid feceris,
what you have doney
what you have been
doing (what you did),
what you were doing
(before).
quid faceres,
what you were doing ;
quid fecisses,
what you had done, tchat
you had been doing,
what you were doing
{before).
246 SEQUENCE OF TENSES-
Hist. Perf., Caesar cognovit, Caesar found out,
quid facerent hostes,
what the enemy was
doing ;
quid fecissent hostes,
ichat the enemy had
. done.
Peincipal Tenses.
Nihil refert postrema syllaba brevis an longa sit. Cic. (463.)
Nemo adeo ferus est u t n o n mitescere p o s s it. Hon. (556.)
Rusticus exspectat dum defluat amnis. Hon. (574.)
Post mortem in morte nihil est quod metuam mall. Plaut.
(634.)
Ar d e a t ipsa licet, tormentis gaudet amantis. Juv. (609.)
U t r u m nescis quam alte ascenderis a n id pro nihilo habes ? Cic.
(460.)
Laudat Panaetius Africanum quod fuerit abstinens. Cic. (542.)
Non is es u t te pudor unquam a turpitudine revocarit. Cic. (556.)
Quern mea Calliope laeserit unus ego. Ov. (633.)
Sim licet extremum sicut sum missus in orbem. Ov. (609.)
Multl fuerunt qui tranquillitatem expetentes a negotiis publicis se
removerint. Cic. (634.)
Nee mea qui digitis lumina c o n d a t erit. Ov. (634.)
Historical Tenses.
Epaminondas quaesivit salvusne esset clipeus. Cic. (469.)
Noctu ambulabat in foro Themistocles quod somnum capere non
posset. Cic. (541.)
Ad Appii Claudil senectutem accedebat etiam u t caecus esset.
(558.)
Tanta opibus Etruria e r a t ut jam non terras solum sed mare etiam
fama nominis sui implesset. Liv. So great in means ( = so powerful)
was Etruria that she had already filled not only the land but even the sea with
the reputation of her name.
Quum primi ordines hostium concidissent, tamen acerrime re-
liqui resistebant. Caes. (587.)
Accidit ut una nocte omnes Hermae dejicerentur. ]STep. (513, E. 2.)
Agesilaus quum ex Aegypto reverteretur decessit/ JSTep. (586.)
Deleta est Ausonum gens perinde ac s I internecivd bello c e r t a s-
set. Ltv. (603.)
Hannibal omnia priusquam excederet pugna erat expertus.
Liv. (579.)
Remarks.— 1. The Historical Present is treated according to its Tense, or according to
its Sense. Final sentences more commonly follow the Sense.
SEQUENCE OF TENSES. 247
Caesar cognoscit quid host es fl faciant, fecerint, is doing, has done,
etc.
Caesar finds out (found out) what the enemy 1 2. facerent, fecissent, was doing, had
[ done, etc.
Tense : Ubii Caesarem orant ut sibi parcant. Caes. The ZJbii beg Caesar to spare
them.
Sense: Athenienses creant decern, praetores qui exercitui praeessent. Nep.
The Athenians make ten generals to command their army.
Sense and Tense : Agunt gratias quod sibi pepercissent ; quod arma cum ho-
minibus consanguinels contulerint queruntur. Caes. They return thanks to them
for having spared them, and complain that they had crossed swords with kinsmen.
So of authors :
Chrysippus disputat aethera esse eum quern homines Jovem appellarent. Cic.
Chrysippi/s maintains that to be aether which men call Jove.
2. The Pure Perfect is often treated as an Historical Perfect in the matter of sequence :
Hodie expertus sum quam caduca felicitas esset- Curt. This day have I found
tut how perishable happiness is.
512. Sequence of Tenses in Sentences of Design. — Sentences
of Design have, as a rule, only the Present and Imperfect Sub-
junctive. The Eoman keeps the purpose and the process, rather
bhan the attainment, in view.
•t Present, edunt, they are eating,
Pure Perf., ederunt, they haw eaten,
Future, edent, they will eat,
Fut. Perf., ederint, they will ham eaten,
Imperfect, edebant, they were eating, t ut viverent
Pluperfect, ederant, they had eaten, J ^ ^ migM fe ^ ^
Hist Per ederunt, they ate, v
Principal Tenses.
Atque ut vivamus vJvere desinimus. Mart. (424.)
Et precor ut possim tutius esse miser. Ov. (424.)
Galllnae pennis fovent pullos n e frigore laedantur. CiC. (545.)
i Legem brevem esse oportet, quo facilius ab imperltis teneatur.
Sen. (545.)
Me praemisit domum haec ut nuntiem ux5ri suae. Plaut. He has
ient me home ahead of him, to take the neics to his wife.
Oculos efifodiam tibi ne observare possis. Plaut. I will gouge out your
fyes for you, to make it impossible for you to watch me.
ut vivant,
that tJiey may live (to live).
1
•Historical Tenses.
Laelius veniebat ad cenam ut satiaret desideria naturae. CiC. Lae*
'us used to go to table, to satisfy the craving* of nature.
l'4\ Phaethon ut in currum patris toll ere tur optavit. Cic. (546.)
248 SEQUENCE OF TENSES.
Remark.— The Perf. and Pluperf. Subj. aro sometimes found in sentences of Design,
Chiefly in earlier and later Latin, when stress is laid on completion, or when an element
of Hope or Fear conies in : Ut sic dixerim, if I may be allowed to use the expression.
Id agendum est ut satis vixerimus. Sen. We must aim at having lived enough.
Affirmare audeo me omni ope adnisurum ne frustra vos hanc spem de me con-
cgperitis. Liv. I dare assure you that I will strain every ne?-ve to keep you from having
conceived this hope of me in vain. (After a past tense, ne concepissetis.)
513. Exceptional Sequence of Tenses: — Sentences of Result
(Consecutive Sentences). In Sentences of Kesult, the Present
Subjunctive is used after Past Tenses to denote the coi tinuance
into the Present, the Perfect Subjunctive to imply final result.
This Perfect Subjunctive may represent either the Pure Perfect
or the Aorist, the latter especially with the negative : the action
happened once for all or not at all.
Present Tense :
Siciliam Verres per triennium ita vexavit ut ea restitui in antiquum
statum nulla mo do p o s s i t. Cic. Verres so harried Sicily for three years
as to make it utterly impossible for it to be restored to its original condition.
Perfect Tense (Pure) :
Murena Asiam sic obiit ut in ea neque avaritiae neque luxuriae ves-
tigium reliquerit. Cic. Murena so administered Asia as not to ham
(that he has not) left in it a trace either of greed or debauchery. (There is no
trace there).
Perfect Tense (Aorist) :
E quite s hostium acriter cum equitatu nostro conflixerunt tamen
ut n5stri eos in silvas collesque compulerint. Caes. The cavalry of
the enemy engaged the cavalry on our side briskly, and yet (the upshot was
that) our men forced them into the woods and hills.
Neque ver5 tarn remisso ac languido anim5 quisquam cmnium f u i 1
qui ea nocte conquieverit. Caes. And indeed there was no one at al
of so slack and indifferent a temper as to take {a wink of) sleep thai night.
Remarks. — 1. Authors vary much in the use of this Perfect. Cicero uses it very rarely |
some abuse it.
2. After accidit, contigit, and other Verbs of Happening, the Imperfect is alway
used, the result being already emphasized in the Indicative form.
Accidit ut una nocte omnes Hermae dejicerentur. Nep. It happened that in on
night all tJie Hermae were thrown down.
I
Representation op the Subjunctive in the Future and Future Perpec
Tenses.
514. The Subjunctive has no Future or Future Perfect, whicl
h
SUBJUNCTIVE IN FUTURE AND FUTURE PERFECT.
249
are represented either by the other Subjunctives, or in the
Active by the Subjunctive of the Periphrastic Conjugation.
Eule I. — After a Future or Future Perfect Tense, the Future
relation is represented by the Present Subjunctive, the Future
Perfect by the Perfect Subjunctive, according to the rule.
Cognoscam, *j quid facias, what you are doing (will
'[shall (try to) find out, be doing).
Cognovero,
,T sJiall have found out (shall know),
quid feceris, what
(will have done).
you ham done
But whenever the dependent future is subsequent to the leading future,
i:he Periphrastic Tense must be employed.
Cognoscam,
I shall (try to) find out,
Cognovero,
CZ shall have found out (shall know),
quid facturus sis,
- what you are going to do (what you
will do).
[Considerabimus], [we shall consider],
A. Quid fecerit aut quid ipsi acciderit aut quid dlxerit,
What he has done, or what has happened to him, or what he has said.
B. Aut quid f a c i a t, quid ipsi a c c i d a t, quid dicat, Or, what he is
doing, what is happening to him, ichat he is saying.
C. Aut quid facturus sit, quid ipsi casurum sit, qua sit
a sur us oratione. Cic. Or what he is going to do (will do), what is going
lo (will) happen to him, what plea he is going to employ (will employ).
Tu quid sis acturus si ad me scripseris pergi atum erit.
iJic. It will be a great favor if you will write to me what you are going to do.
Remark. — In soine of these forms, ambiguity is unavoidable. So A may represent a
jiijal perfect, B a real present.
515. Eule II. — After the other tenses, the future relation
Is expressed by the Active Periphrastic Subjunctive, Present or
Imperfect.
Cognosco,
I am finding out,
Cognovi,
have found out (know), [
Cognoscebam,
Twas trying to find out,
Cogn5veram,
I had found out,
Incertum est quam longa cujusque nostrum vita futura sit. CiC.
It is uncertain how long the life of each one of us is going to be (will be).
11*
quid facturus sis,
what you will do.
{what you are going to do),
quid facturus esses, {what you were going to do),
ichat you would do.
250 SEQUENCE OF TENSES.
Antea dubitabam venturaene essent legiones. CiC. Be*
fore, J was doubtful whether the legions icould come (or no).
Nunc mihi non est dubium quin venturae n5n s i n t. CiC.
Now I have no doubt that they will not come.
Remarks.—.!. The Perfect and Pluperfect Subjunctive of the Periphrastic are used
only to represent the Apodosis of an Unreal Conditional Sentence.
u
Cognosce Cognovi, quid factiirus fueris. (what you have been
I am finding out, I have found out (know), what you would have done. going to do),
Cognoscebam, Cognoveram, [quid factiirus fuisses, (what you had been
I was trying to find out, I had found out, what you would have done, going to do),
rare].
2. There is no Periphrastic for the Future Perfect Active, no Periphrastic for Passive
and Supineless Verbs. The Grammars make up a periphrastic for all these from futurum
sit, esset ut, as :
i ut redierit, I do not doubt that he will have returned.
Non dubito quin futurum sit -J ut maereat, that he will grieve.
' ut necetur, that he will be tilled.
For the dependent Fut. Perf. Pass. Cicero says (Att. ix. 7, 2) :
Non dubito quin confecta jam res futura sit, I do not doubt but the matter will
have been settled by this time.
In the absence of the Periphrastic forms, use the proper tenses of posse. (240, R. 3.)
3. When the preceding verb has a future character (Fear, Hope, Power, Will, and the
like), the simple subjunctive is sufficient :
Galli nisi perfregerint munitiones de omni salute desperant ; RomanI si
rem obtinuerint flnem omnium laborum exspectant. Caes. The Gauls despair of
all safety unless they break through (shall have broken through) the fortifications ; the Ro-
mans look forward to an end of all their toils, if they hold their own (shall have held).
Venerunt querentes spem nullam esse resistendl nisi praesidium Romanus
misisset- Liv. They came with the complaint that there was no hope of resistance unless
the Roman sent a force to protect them.
Of course the Deliberative Subjunctive is future: Examples, 258.
516. Sequence of Tenses in Oratio Obllqua: In Oratio
Obllqua and kindred constructions, the attraction of tenses applies
also to the representatives of the Future and Future Perfect
Subjunctive.
In [scytala] erat scriptum nisi domum rever,teretur se capitis
eum damnaturos, It was written in the scytale that if he did not return home,
they would condemn him to death. Nep. (Oratio Recta : Nisi domum re
verteris te capitis damnabimus, unless you (shall) return home, we will con-
demn you to death.)
Pythia praecepit ut Miltiadem sibi imperatorem sumerent ; id si fe-
cissent incepta prospera futura. Nep. The Pythia instructed them to take
Milt lades for their general ; that if they did that, their undertakings icould be
successful. (Oratio Recta : si id feceritis, incepta prospera erunt.
Laced aemoniij Philippe minitante per litteras se omnia quae c5na-
•h
5
n
SEQUENCE OF TENSES. 251
entur (6. R., c5nabimini) prohibiturum, quaesiverunt num s e esset
rfiam mori prohibitum s. (6. R., prohibebis). Cic. The Lacedaemo-
itans, when Philip threatened them by letter, that he would prevent everything
hey undertook {should undertake), asked whether -he was going to (would) pre-
ent them from dying too.
517. Sequence of Tenses after the other Moods. — The Imper-
ative and the Present and Perfect Subjunctive haye the Se-
uences of the Principal Tenses; the Imperfect and Pluperfect
lave the Sequences of the Historical Tenses.
[Ne] comp5ne comas quia sis venturus ad illam. Ov. Do not
rrange (your) locks because (forsooth) you are going to see her.
Excellentibus ingeniis citius defuerit ars qua civem regant quam
ua hostem suparent. Liv. Great geniuses would be more likely to lack the
kill to control the citizen than the skill to overcome the enemy.
I Quid me prohiberet Epicureum esse, si probarem quae ille diceret ?
3ic. What would prevent me from being an Epicurean if I approved what
f£ said (says) ?
Turn ego te primus hortarer diu pensitares quern potissimum eligeres.
'lin. Ep. In that case I should be the first to exhort you to weigh long whom
ou should choose above all others.
j Quae vita Priam5 fuisset, si ab adolescentia s c i s s e t quos eventus
snectutis esset habiturus? Ctc. What sort of life would Priam
hve led if lie had known, from early manhood, what were to be the closing
'.enes of his old age f
Remarks.—!. Of course when the Perf. Subj. represents the Historical Perf. it takes
Qie historical Sequence :
Magna culpa Pelopis qui non docuerit filium quatenus esset quidque curan-
im. Cic, Greatly to blame is Pelops for not having taught his son how far each thing
Jw$ to be cared for.
So also in the conditional proposition, when the, action is past. For varying conception,
1 Cic. Off. iii. 24.
2. The Imperfect Subjunctive, being used in opposition to the Present, might be
jeated as a Principal Tense, but the construction is less usual :
Vererer ne immodicam orationem putares nisi esset generis ejus ut saepe in*
spere saepe desinere videatur. Plin. Ep. I should be afraid of your thinking the
fech of immoderate length, if it were not of such kind as to produce the effect of often be-
nning often ending.
\ 518. Sequence of Tenses after an Infinitive or Participle.—
Vhen a subordinate clause depends on an Infinitive or Partici-
le. Gerund or Supine, the tense of that clause follows the
[jenses of the Finite verb.
252
SEQUENCE OF TENSES.
Cupio scire,
I am desirous of knowing,
Cupiebam scire,
I teas desirous of knowing,
Mihi interroganti,
- when I ask him,
(literally : to me asking),
what you are doing.
what you have done.
what you are going to do
(will do).
what you were doing.
what you had done.
quid acturus esses, what you were going to do
(would do).
quid agat, ichat he is doing, "
quid egerit, what he has done,
quid acturus sit, what he is going
to do (will do),
r quid agas,
quid egeris,
quid acturus sis,
' quid ageres,
quid egisses,
Mihi interroganti,
when I asked him,
(literally : to me asking).
quid ageret,
~\ quid egisset,
i
what he was do-
ing,
what he had done,
non re
spondet
he give;
no an
swer.
n5n re
spondit
he gav
no an
swer.
quid acturus esset,what he was go-
{ ing to do,
Apelles pictores e5s peccare dicebat qui non sentiren
quid e s s e t satis. Ctc. Apelles used to say that those painters blundere
wlw did, not perceive what was (is) enough.
Athenienses Cyrsilum quendam suadentem ut in urbe manerer
lapidibus cobperuerunt. Cic. (546.)
Cupido incessit animos juvenum sciscitandi ad quern eorui
regnum Romanum e s s e t venturum. Liv. The minds of the young me
were seized by the desire of inquiring to which of them the kingdom of Ron
would come.
Miserunt Delphos consultum quid facerent. ISTep. They sent to JDelp,
to ask the oracle what they should do.
Exception. — A Perfect Infinitive or Participle, dependent on a Prese
Tense, commonly takes the sequence of the Past Tenses :
Satis mihi multa verba fecisse v i d e o r quare e s s e t hoc be
lum necessarium. Cic. i" think I have said enough (to show) why this w>
is necessary.
519. The Potential of the Past— The Potential of the Pa
may depend on a Present Tense :
Video causas esse permultas quae Titum Roscium imp
1 e r e n t. Cic. I see that there are very many causes which might have i
pelted Titus Iloscius.
Quaero ate cur Gajum Cornelium n5n defenderem. Cic.
ask you why I was not to defend Gajus Cornelius.
Remark- The Sequence of Tenses is not nnfrequently deranged by the attractioE
parenthetic clauses, or the shifting of the conception.
p]
USE OF THE REFLEXIVE. 253
USE OF THE REFLEXIVE IK SUBORDINATE SENTENCES.
520. In subordinate clauses, the Kenexive is used with refer-
ence either to the subject of the principal, or to the subject of
the subordinate, clause; and sometimes first to the one and then
to the other.
521. The Eeflexiye is used of the principal subject when ref-
erence is made to the thought or will of that subject ; hence,
in Infinitive Sentences, in Indirect Questions, in Sentences of
Design, and Sentences which partake of the Oblique Relation :
Animus sentit se vl sua, non aliena mover!. Cic. The mind feels
that it moves by its own force, (and) not by that of another.
Quaesiverunt num s e esset etiam mori prohibitum s. Cic. (516.)
Pompejus a me petlvit ut s § cu m et apud s e essem quotidie. Cic.
Pompey asked me to be with him, and at his house, daily.
Paetus omnes libr5s quos frater s u u s reliquisset mihi donavit. Cic.
Paetus presented to me all the books (as he said) thai his brother had left (qu5s
frater ejus reliquerat, would be the statement of the narrator).
Remarks.— 1. Sentences of Tendency and Result have" is :
Tarquinius sic Servium diligebat ut is ejus vulgo haberetur filius. Cic. Tar-
quin loved Servius so that he was commonly considered his son.
2. The Reflexive may refer to the real agent, and not to the grammatical subject of the
principal clause :
A Caesare invltor sibi ut sim legatus. Cic. lam invited by Caesar (= Caesar in-
vites me) to be lieutenant to him.
Especially to be noted is the freer use of SUUS (295, R. 1). The other forms are em-
ployed chiefly in reflexive formulae :
Sul colligendi hostibus facultatem non relinquunt. Caes., They do not leave
the enemy a chance to rally.
So se recipere, to withdraw.
3. The Reflexive is used in general sentences, as one, oneself, etc. :
Deforme est de se praedicare. Cic. It is loathsome to be bragging about oneself.
With the Infinitive this follows naturally from 420.
4. In Indicative Relative Sentences, which are mere circumlocutions (506), is is the
rule:
Socrates inhonestam sibi credidit orationem quam ei Lysias reo composuerat.
Quint. Socrates believed the speech which Lysias had composed for him when he was ar-
raigned, dishonouring to him.
Sometime*, however, the Reflexive is put contrary to the rule :
Metellus in iis urbibus quae ad s e defecerant praesidia imponit. Sall. Me-
tellus put garrisons in those towns ivhich had gone over to him / regularly, ad eum.
Ille habet quod sibi debebatur, He has his due ; regularly, el.
5. Sometimes the Demonstrative is used instead of the Reflexive, because the narrator
presents his po;nt of view:
Solon, quo tutior vita ejus esset, furere se simulavit Cic. Solon feigned madness,
that his life might be the safer. (The notion of Result intrudes.)
254 OBJECT SENTENCES.
6. Examples of Reflexive? pointing both ways :
Roman! legatos miserunt qui a Prtisia peterent ne inimlcissimum suura
(= RoinanorurcO apud se [Prusiam] haberet Nep. The Romans sent ambassadors to
ask Prusias not to keep tin ir bitterest enemy at his court.
Agrippa Atticum flens orabat atque obsecrabat ut se sibi suisque re-
servavet- Xi:r. Agrippa begged and conjured Atticus with tears to save himself [Atticus]
for him [Agrippa] and for his own family [Atticus].
Hopeless ambiguity:
Heres meus damnas esto dare ill! omnia sua. Quint. My heir is to give him all
that is his.
7. For the sake of clearness, the subject of the leading sentence is not unfrequently re-
ferred to in the form of the Demonstrative instead of the Reflexive :
Helvetil Allobrogibus sese persuasuros existimabant vel vi coacturos ut per
suos fines eos ire paterentur. Ca.es. The Helvetians thought that they would persuade
or force the Allobroges to let them [the Helvetians] go through their territory.
8. Ipse is always used in its proper distinctive sense: so when it represents the
speaker in 0. 0.
Ejus and Sui.
522. Alexander moriens anulum s u u m dederat Perdiccae, Alex-
ander^ [when] dying, had given his ring to Perdiccas.
Perdiccas acceperat ejus anulum, Perdiccas had received his ring.
Quare Alexander declaraverat s e regnum e I commendasse, There-
by, Alexander had declared that he had committed the kingdom to him.
Ex quo Perdiccas conjecerat e u m regnum sibi commendasse,
From this, Perdiccas had gathered that he had committed the kingdom to him.
Ex qu5 omnes conjecerant e u m regnum e I commendasse, From
this, all had gathered that he had committed the kingdom to him.
Perdiccas postulavit ut s e regem haberent quum Alexander anu-
lum sibi dedisset, Perdiccas demanded that they should have him to king, as
Alexander had given the ring to him.
Amici postulaverunt ut omnes eu m regem haberent quum Alexan-
der anulum e I dedisset, (His) friends demanded that all should have him to
king, as Alexander had given the ring to him. (Lattmanu and Miiller.)
Ita se gesserat Perdiccas ut e I regnum ab Alexandro commendare-
tur, Perdiccas had so behaved himself that the kingdom was intrusted to him
by Alexander.
Object Sentences.
523. Verbs of Doing, Perceiving, Conceiving, of Thinking
and Saying, often take their object in the form of a sentence.
Remark. — These sentences are regarded, grammatically, as neuter substantives. The
accusative of neuter substantives is employed as a Nominative. Hence, a Passive or
Intransitive Verb may take an object sentence as a subject.
OBJECT SENTENCES. 255
I. OBJECT SENTENCES INTRODUCED BY QUOD.
524. Clauses which serve merely as periphrases (circumlocu-
tions) of elements in the leading sentence are introduced by
quod, that.
Remarks.— 1. The leading sentence often contains a demonstrative, such as hoc, this ;
illud, id, that ; and then the whole structure may be considered as a relative.
%W As these sentences present difficulties to the beginner, it may be well to postpone
the consideration to the Relative.
2. In some of the combinations, quod may be considered an adverbial accusative of
extent. (Inner Object.) Quod, in that (= because).
525. Quod is used to introduce explanatory clauses chiefly
after a Demonstrative, after verbs of Doing and Happening with
an adverb, and after verbs of Adding and Dropping :
Here quod means " the fact that," " the circumstance that."
H 5 c solo propior quod amic5s conjugis odit. Juv. In this alone
(is the wife) nearer (than a mere neighbor), that she hates the friends of her
husband.
Nil habet infelix paupertas durius in se quam quod (= id quod)
ridiculos homines facit. Juv. Unhappy poverty hath in itself nothing harder
(to bear) than that it makes people ridiculous.
Magnum beneficium est naturae quod necesse est mori. Sen. (195.)
Quod spiro et placeo, si placeo, tuum est. Hon. That I do breathe and
please, if that I please, is thine.
Bene facis quod me adjuvas. Cic. You do well (in) that you help
me.
Bene mihi evenit quod mittor ad mortem. Cic. It is fortunate for me
that I am sent to death (execution).
Adde quod ingenuas didicisse fideliter artes emollit mores nee
sinit esse feros. Ov. Add (the fact) that to have acquired faithfully the ac-
complishments (education) of a gentleman, softens the character, and does not
let it be savage.
On nisi quod, see 592, R. 3.
The reigning mood is the Indicative. The Subjunctive is
only used as in Oratio Obllqua.
Quum Castam accusarem nihil magis press! quam quod accusator
ejus praevaricationis crimine corruisset. Plin. Ep. When I accused Casta,
there was no point that I laid more stress on than the fact (that I stated) " that
her accuser had been crushed under a charge of collusion"
256 ACCUSATIVE AND INFINITIVE.
Remarks.— 1. To this group belongs tho exclamatory interrogation Quid? quod or
^uid quod ? What of this, that?
Quid quod simulac mihi collibitum est praesto est imago ? Cic. What is to be
said of the fact that the image presents itself as soon as I see fit? {Nay, does not the image
■nt itself?)
2. A sentence with quod often precedes as an adverbial accusative :
Quod me Agamemnonem aemulari putas falleris. Nep. In that (if) you think
that 1 am emulating Agamemnon, you are mistaken.
3. With several of the above-mentioned verbs, ut can be employed, as well as quod
(ut, of the tendency — quod, of the fact) :
Ad Appii Claudii senectutem accedebat ut etiam caecus esset, Cic. (558), or,
quod caecus erat.
Accedit quod patrem plus etiam quam ipse scit amo. Cic. Besides, I love the
father even more than he himself knows.
But when the action is prospective or conditional, ut must be used :
Hue accedat ut perfecta virtus sit- Sen. To this be added the perfect nature of
virtue.
4. Verbs of Emotion, such as Kejoicing, Sorrowing, etc., take quodwith the Indicative
•r Subjunctive. See Causal Sentences, 540. I
II. OBJECT SENTENCES, WITH ACCUSATIVE AND
INFINITIVE.
526. Preliminary Observation. — On the simple infinitive as
an object, see 424.
The Infinitive as a verbal predicate, has its subject in the Accusative.
(421.)
Remark.— The Accusative is the most general form of the noun; the Infinitive (or
rather the Indefinitive), the most general form of the verb. The two together give the
outline, and not the details, of the thought — present an idea, and not a fact, as such.
Compare 340.
527. Active verbs of Saying, Showing, Believing and Per-
ceiving (Verba sentiendl et declarandl*), and similar expressions,
take the Accusative and Infinitive :
Thales Milesius a quam dixit e s s e initium rerum, Thales of Miletus
said that water was the first 'principle of things.
Solon furere se simulavit. Cic Solon pretended to be mad.
* Verba sentiendl are : video, audio, sentio, animadverto, scio, nSscio, intellego, per-
spicio, comperio, disco, meminl, credo, arbitror, puto, suspicor, judico, cgnseo, dtico,
concludo, npero, despero. Similar expressions are : spes est, opinio est.
Verba decldrandl arc" ': edico, affirnio, nego, fateor, narro,trado, scrlbo, nfintio, ostendo,
dSmonstro. persuadeo (546, K. 2.) significo, polliceor, promitto, minor, simulo, dissimulo,
etc. Similar expressions are : fama est, auctor sum, testis sum, certiOrem aliquem facio.
etc.
ACCUSATIVE AND INFINITIVE. 257
Medici causa morbi inventa ciirationem esse inventam
putant. Cic. Physicians think that, (when) the cause of disease (is) dis-
covered, tlie method of treatment is discovered,
Volucres videmus finger e et construere nidos. Cic. We see that birds
fashion and build nests.
Audiet cives acuisse ferrum. Hon. [The youth] shall hear that citizens
gave edge to steel.
Timagenes auctor est omnium in litteris studi5rum antiquissimam
musicen exstitisse. Quint. Timagenes is the authority (for the state-
ment) that of all intellectual pursuits music was the most ancient.
The sentence very often passes over into the Ace. and Inf. (O. O.) with-
out any formal notice.
Remarks. — 1. Verbs of Perception and Representation take the Participle to express
the actual condition of the object of Perception or Representation (536). As there is no
I Present Participle Passive the Infinitive must be used, and thus the difference between
intellectual and actual perception is effaced, sometimes even in the Active.
Audio elves acuentes ferrum, I hear citizens sharpening) the steel.
Audio a clvibus acui ferrum, 1 hear that the steel is sharpened by citizens / or, the
steel as it is sharpened by citizens.
Octavium dolore confici vldi. Cic. 1 have seen Octavius (when he was) wearing
out with anguish.
Vldi histriones fientes egredi. Quint. I have seen actors leave the stage weeping.
Notice faeio, I make out, represent, suppose :
Plato a Deo aedifieari mundum facit- Cic. Plato makes out that the uni-
verse is built by God.
Isocratem Plato laudarl fecit a Socrate. Cic. Plato has represented Isocrates
as praised by Socrates.
Fac, quaeso, qui ego sum esse te. Cic. Suppose, 1 pray, yourself to be me.
2. When the subject of the Infinitive is a personal or reflexive pronoun, that subject
J is sometimes omitted— chiefly with Future Infinitive — and then esse also is dropped :
Eefracturos carcerem minabantur. Liv. They threatened to break open the jail.
3. The simple Infinitive is often used in English, where the Latin takes Ace. and Inf.
See 424, R. 3.
The (Greek) attraction of the predicate of the Inf. into the Nominative after the Verb
of Saying or Thinking, is poetical :
Phaseius ille, quern videtis, hospites, ait fuisse navium celerrimus. Cat.
That pinnace yonder, which you see, my stranger guests, declares she used to be the fastest
^ craft afloat.
4. When the Accusative with the Infinitive is followed by a dependent accusative,
ambiguity may arise :
Ajo te, Aeaeida, Romanos vincere posse, in which te may be subject or object.
Real ambiguity is to be avoided by giving the sentence a passive turn :
Ajo a te, Aeaeida. Romanos vine! posse, I affirmthat the Bomans can be conquered
^ by thee, son of Aeacus.
Ajo te, Aeaeida, a Romanis vine! posse, I affirm that thou, son of Aeacus, canst be
conquered by the Romans.
When the context shows which is the real subject, formal ambiguity is of no import-
ance. But see Quint, vii. 9. 10.
258 XOMIXATTVE AVTTTT INFINITIVE.
NOMINATIVE WITH INFINITIVE.
528. Passive verbs of Saying, Showing, Believing, and Per-
ceiving, prefer the personal construction, in which the Accusa-
tive Subject of the Infinitive appears as the Nominative Subject
of the leading verb.
Active :
Tradunt Homerum caecum fuisse, they say that Homer was blind
Passive :
Traditur Homerus caecus fuisse, Homer is said to have been blind.
[Traditur Homerum caecum fuisse], it is said that Homer teas blind.
But when the leading verb is a form compounded with esse,
to be, the impersonal construction is preferred :
Traditum est Homerum caecum fuisse. Cic. There is a tradition that
Homer was blind.
Aristaeus inventor olei fuisse dicitur. Cic. Aristaeus is said to
have been the inventor of oil.
Terenti (29, R. 1.) fabulae propter elegantiam sermonis putabantur
a Laelio scrlbi. Cic. Terence's plays, on account of the elegance of the
language, were thought to be written by Laelius.
Si Vejos migrabimus amisisse patriam videbimur. Lrv. If
we remove to Veji, we shall seem to have lost our country. *
Reus damnatum Iri videbatur. Quint. (436, R. 2.)
But:
Venerem Adonidi nupsisse proditum est. Cic. It is recorded
that Venus married Adonis.
Oreditur Pythagorae audltorem fuisse Numam. Cic. It is
believed that Numa was a hearer of Pythagoras.
Remark.— In Verbs of Saying, except dlCO, the personal construction is confined to
the third person. The poets are free in treating verbs under this head.
TENSES OF THE INFINITIVE AFTER VERBA SENTIENDI
ET DECLARANDI.
529. The Infinitive denotes only the stage of the action, and
determines only the relation to the time of the leading verb
(274).
ACCUSATIVE AND INFINITIVE.
259
530. After verbs of Saying, Showing, Believing, and Perceiv-
ing, and the like,
The Present Infinitive expresses contemporaneous ac tion ;
The Perfect Infinitive expresses prior action ;
The Future Infinitive expresses future action.
Remark. — The action which is completed with regard to the leading verb may be in
itself a continued action. So in English : / have been studying, I had been studying.
Bence, the Imperfect Indicative (I was studying) is represented in this dependent form by
the Perfect Infinitive, because it is prior to the leading verb.
^F" In this table the Present is taken as the type of the Principal, the Imperfect as
.he type of the Historical, Tenses.
531.
Active.
Contemporaneous Action. Passive
P. T. Dlcit : te errare, te decipl,
He says, that you are going wrong, that you are deceived (217, R.).
H. T. Dicebat : te errare, te decipi,
He was saying, that you were going that you were deceived,
wrong,
Prior Action.
P. T\ Dibit : te errasse,
He says, that you have gone wrong,
that you went wrong \
that you have been going
wrong,
H. T. Dicebat : te errasse,
He was saying, that you had gone
wrong,
that you went wrong,
that you had been
going wrong,
te deceptum esse,
that you have been (are) deceived,
that you were deceived (Aon.),
(that people have been deceiving you),
te deceptum esse,
that you had been deceived.
that you were deceived (Aor.),
(that people had been deceiving you).
Subsequent Action.
P, T. Dicit : te erraturum esse,
He says, that you (are about to go
wrong), will (be) go(ing) wrong,
H. T. Dicebat : te erraturum esse,
He was saying, that you were about
to (would) go wrong,
te deceptum iri,
that you (are going to) will be de-
ceived.
te deceptum iri,
that you were going to (woidd) be
deceived.
Periphrastic Future.
The following form (the Periphrastic Future) is necessary when the Verb has no Su~
ine or Future Participle. It is often used from other verbs to intimate an interval,
hich cannot be expressed by other forms, and is more common in the Passive than the
uture Passive Inf. of the paradigms.
200 ACCUSATIVE AND INFINITIVE.
Active. Periphrastic Future. Passive.
P. T. Dlcit : fore (futurum esse) ut fore ut decipiaris (metuaris),
erres (metuas),
fore (futurum esse) ut erra- fore ut deceptus sis (rare), usually .
veris* (rare), deceptum fore (not futurum
esse).
H. T. Dicebat : fore ut errares fore ut decipereris (metuere-
(metueres), ris),
errasses (rare), dgceptum fore (rarely : fore ut
deceptus esses).
Remarks.— 1. For examples of the Periphrastic, see 240.
Carthaginienses debellatum. moxfore rebantur. Liv. The Carthaginians thought
that the war would soon be brought to an end. From debellatum erit, it will be (have
been) brought to an end. So in the deponent adeptum fore.
2. Posse, velle, etc., do not require the Periphrastic, and seldom take it. (240, R. 3.)
ACCUSATIVE AND INFINITIVE WITH VERBS OF WILL AND
DESIRE. I
532. Verbs of Will and Desire take a dependent Accusative
and Infinitive :
The relation is that of an Object to be Effected :
Si vis me flere, dolendum est primum ipsi tibi. Hon. If you wish mt
to weep, you must first feel the pang yourself.
Utrum Milonis corporis an Fythagorae tibi malls vires ingenii dari
Cic. Which {whether) would you rather ham given to you, Milo's strength of
body or Pythagoras' strength of mind ?
Ipse jubet mortis nos meminisse Deus. Mart. (375, 3.)
Vitae summa brevis spem nos vetat incohare longam. Hor. (424j &
R.3.)
Nemo ire quenquam publica prohibet via. Plaut. (387.)
German! v I n u m ad se omnino importari non sinunt. Caes
TJie Germans do not permit wine to be imported into their country at all.
Remarks.— 1. On the construction of this class of verbs with ut (ne, quominus
see 546. Impero, I command, in ordinary prose takes only the Passive Infinitive :
Hannibal imperavit quam plurimas venenatas serpentes vivas colligi. Ne:
Hannibal ordered as many poisonous serpents as possible to be caught alive.
Permitto seldom takes the Infinitive. Jubeo, Ibid ; sino, / let ; veto, I forbid ; pr
hibeo, I prohibit, always have the Infinitive of Passive Verbs. These verbs may ther
selves be turned into the Passive : jubeor, sinor, vetor, prohibeor.
* Heavy periphrastics are of rare occurrence. So Fetiales decrevSrunt utru
eorum fecisset recte" facturum (Liv. xxxi. 8) ; not fore ut fecisset, although the O.
requires utrum feceris, recte feceris. (223, R. 4.) See Weissenborn's note.
ACCUSATIVE AND IXFIXITIVE. 261
2. After jubeo, / bid, and veto, I forbid, the Infinitive Active can be used without an
imaginary or indefinite subject :
Jubet reddere, he bids return (orders the returning).
Vetat adhibere medicinam, he forbids the administration of medicine.
Infandum, regina, jubes renovare dolorem. Verg. Not meet for speech, 0 queen,
the anguish which you bid (me, us) revive.
3. When the subject of the Infinitive is the same as the subject of the leading verb,
the subject of the Infinitive is not necessarily expressed :
NI parere veils, pereundum erit ante lucernas. Juv. Unless you resolve to
obey, you will hare to perish before candle-light.
Etjam mallet equos nunquam t etigisse paternos. Ov. And now he
could have wished rather never to have touched his father's horses.
But the subject may be expressed, and commonly is expressed, when the action of the
Infinitive is not within the power of the subject :
Timoleon maluit s e dlligi quam metui. Nep. Timoleon preferred that he should
'■•f be loved rather than that he should be feared.
Et fugit ad salices et s e cupit ante videri. Verg. And fees to the willows, and
desires that she should first be seen.
4. The poets go much further in using verbs and phrases as expressions of Will and
\U Desire. See 424, R. 4.
ACCUSATIVE AND INFINITIVE WITH VEKBS OF EMOTION.
533. Verbs of Emotion take a dependent Accusative and In-
finitive, inasmuch as these verbs may be considered as verbs of
Saying and Thinking :
Salvum t § advenlsse gaudeo, I rejoice that you should haw arrived safe
J (to think that you ham arrived safe, at your arriving safe).
Quod salvus advenisti, that you have arrived safe.
Quod salvus adveneris, that (as you say) you have arrived safe.
Gloriatur Epicurus se non toto asse pascL Sen. Epicurus brags of
^dining for not quite one copper. See 541.
ACCUSATIVE AND INFINITIVE IN EXCLAMATIONS.
l- 534. The Accusative with the Infinitive is used in Exclama-
tions and Exclamatory Questions as the object of an unexpressed
m thought or feeling :
Hem, mea lux, te nunc, mea Terentia, sic vexari. CiC. (341.)
Hominemne Romanum tam Graece loqui ? Plin. Ep. A Boman speak
h such good Greek f ( To think that a Roman should speak such good Greek).
Mene incept5 desistere — ? Verg. I— desist from my undertaking?
1! Hinc abire matrem ? Ter. Mother go away from Jieref
Re-marks.— 1. Different is quod, which gives the ground :
Hei mihi quod nullls amor est medicabilis herbis . Ov. Woe's me that {in that,
because) love is not to be cured by any herbs.
2. On ut, with the subjunctive, in a similar sense, see 560. Both forms object.
UAJ m i^tfixitivz,
; ^;:tsat:ti a>t ixfinitivb as a subject.
cSd. The : with the Infinitive maj be :_t Sul
of a senten: 7 Predicate is a suhfitanti a or neuiA a.aa
..:." aa: _ . " '. a: : . : : aiasa
Tniisi latum est regent capitis ream esse. C: A u an extraorc
:' ;:':t : " A /- :. A; : Z ~ .-A/-- "..* AV
F acinus est vinciri civem "RnmanfiTn. Cic. It is an outrage that a
Z. . ' : Z V" Z ■ _:" ' . : ' :: :-?.
Necesseest facere Amptnm q zl ruaerit (== eum qui quaerit
1~ztz~l r^-^77 _"~ " "" " A
I_§rr~ *zr-rTr~ rssr :r:r.rT, cue A c A i u 5 3. "~ imrc-ritls "enc-^tiir
E
C:i: es: "A
:: va.ere. . ::
en used wit!
7:
IMoBker* Uame^lmtyou mu&tgi £
Ok nae i object of the L:
.-t A :ir ::A-" '-- -"■---": prc =
~Al Ss.::-;
:-~ -
: z n :
MflB I SflJ - i
:Z>~TZZ~ZZ^ ZZ?ZZ-ZI~ZZZ BY THE PAETICIPL
536. The Participle is used after rerbs of Perec :n a
a a, aaz---: :--:.:::.. ::aa:a:::1: a
3tMc6rum circnmfuirj
an ocean of Stoic bo
cai LrmssL
Frodiga ncn sentit pereuntem femina censum. Jut. 7un
wt perceive (how) the ina i
Saepe illam audivl furtive v; : r 1 ; ;_ /..-..: -.:. :
fer talking in a stealthy tone.
Gaude quod spectant oculi te mille 1 : q . ente n Hoi " 4 2
Polyphemum Homerus com ariete colloquentem f a : : :
Homer represents Pelyphemiu ls :...'/.-.. « .: '. * e
Remark.— Od the Infinitive see a .' B I. The Breek ; . _
i ' f Perception Kmot ■
Sensit medios delapsus in hostes- Yne. He -
fallen) 'midst the enemy.
G-audent perfusi sanguine fratrum. Vase / ■. 'inched wUM brother? Hood.
537. The Perfect Parti:: pie Passive is usee ei verbs : :
. Causation and Desire.:; lenote impatience :: anything t:::;:
entire fulfillment :
Caligula Lolliam mis s a m fe c it Suet _-
(for good and all).
i Prudent! mandes si quid recte curatum veils. Tip. I~
to a sensible man wJu few - _ ._ t _ -
Remakk. — After verbs of Will mdl on trad
"^with these Participles, and hence they may he con;:" afect Infinitives 275
Compare, however, Perfect ?_::.;. F ssrre with :~ is est "1315 ts: (390.)
IftUBAI SMffMHiB
538. Causal sentences are introdoc
1. Bv Quia, : good, that) bet
3y Que mam quom lam . f, quando, quancc- -
quidem, rarely in this sense
3. By Quum, Inference
4 By the Relative Pronoun, partly alone, partly frith ut, utpote, quippe,
to -ee626?63^
Rkxakks. — Quia and quod differ chiefly in :: - ~- : i is ~; - -. —hrn the
ansal sentence is at the same time in Reject stnt;n:e Qucd - --- -=-:■: 1~- :
"" uia the Ace. Xent PL of qui, and often hi e a : :?t :_e demonstrative, such as ec
: idcirco. therefore, propterea. on that zc:c-i.ni.
Qnoniam and quando quand&quideic -te used :t* evident present .
uando quandoquidem is rare in an7 ::hfr :hen a temporal =en.se Z-\
re often used causally
'AUSAL SENTENCES TTITH QUIA, QUOD. AND QUONIAM.
539. Causal sentences with quia. quod, and quoniam sure at
n the Indicative, except in oblique relation Partial ;: I::.
264 CAUSAL SENTENCES.
Remark.— The other person of the oblique clause may be imaginary, and the writer or
speaker may quote from himself indirectly :
Laetatus sum quod mihi liceret recta defendere. Cic. I was glad that I was free
to champion the right.
540. Causal sentences with quia, quod, and quoniam take the
Indicative in Direct Discourse:
Amantes de forma judicare non possunt, quia sensum ocul5rum prae-
cipit animus. Quint. Lovers cannot judge of beauty, because the heart fore-
stalls the eye.
Quia natura mutarl non potest idcirco verae amicitiae sempite*
nae sunt. Cic. Because nature cannot change, therefore true friendships are\
everlasting.
Torquatus fllium suum quod is contra imperium in hostem pug
naverat necari jussit. Sall. Torquatus bade his son to be put to death
because he had fought against the enemy contrary to order(s) [quod pugnassel
= because, as Torquatus said or thought].
Neque me vixisse paenitet quoniam ita vixl ut n5n frustra me
natum existimem. Cic. And I am not sorry for having lived, since I haVi
so lived that I think I was born not in vain.
Solus ero quoniam non licet esse tuo. Prop. (535, R. 2.)
«t
Erant quibus appetentior famae Helvidius videretur quando etian
sapientibus cupido gl5riae novissima exuitur. Tac. There were some t
whom Helvidius seemed too eager for fame , since, even from the wise, ambitioi
is the last (infirmity) that is put off.
541. Causal sentences with quia, quod, and quoniam take fch
Subjunctive in Oblique Discourse (Partial or Total).
Noctu ambulabat in foro Themistocles quod somnum capere no
posset. Cic. Themistocles used to walk about in the market-place at night b
cause (as he said) he could not get to sleep.
Quae quia non 1 i c e a t non facit, ilia facit. Ov. She who does it n
because (she thinks, forsooth) she may not (do it), does it.
Elsewhere : quae quia non licuit non facit, ilia facit.
[Ne] compone comas quia sis venturus ad illam. Ov. (517.)
Quoniam ipse pro se dicere non posset, verba fecit frater ejus Stei
goras. Nep. " As [Miltiades] could not speak for himself,'" Ms brother, Stet m
goras, made a speech. (Indirect quotation from the speech of Stesagoras
Remarks.— 1. Non quod, non quia, are used with the Indicative or Subjunctive,
cording to the general rule. The Indicative denies absolutely,* the Subjunctive rejej
tect!
Imp!
rqnod
54S
"■
* That the Indicative is used only of excluded/acfe is not borne out by the usage|
the language from Luck. ii. 2, to Tac. Ann. xiii. 1.
CAUSAL SENTENCES. 265
an imaginary suggestion (as if from an ideal second person). The real ground often fol-
lows with sed quia, sed quod.
The Subjunctive is more common than the Indicative with non quod, non quia.
Non quo = non quod, and non quln = non quo non, are found with the Subjunctive
only.
Subjunctive: •
Pugiles in jactandls caestibus ingemiscunt, non quod doleant, sed quia pro-
fundenda voce omne corpus intenditur venitque plaga vehementior. Cic. Boxers
in plying the caestus heave groans, not that (as you might suppose) they are in pain, but be-
cause in giving full vent to the voice all the body is put to the stretch, and the blow comes
with a greater rush.
i Majores nostrl in dominum de servo quaerl noluerunt ; non quln posset ve-
idfum invenirl, sed quia videbatur indignum esse. Cic Our ancestors would not
allow a slave to be questioned by torture against his master, not because (not as though, they
thought.) the truth could not be got at, but because such a course seemed degrading.
A Lacedaemoniorum exulibus praetor vim arcuerat, non quia salvos vellet
flfraed quia perire causa indicta nolebat. Lrv. The praetor had warded off violence from
\l^he Lacedaemonian exiles, not(&s you might have supposed) because he wished them to escape,
ml because he did not wish them to perish with their case not pleaded (unheard).
i The same principle applies to magis quod (quo), quia .... sed quod, quia, with
he moods in inverse order.
1 Llbertatis originem inde, magis quia annuum imperium consulare factum
ist quam quod deminutum quidquam sit ex regia potestate, enumeres. Liv.
I Fou may begin to count the origin of liberty from that point, rather because the consular
I overnment was limited to a year, than because aught was taken away from the royal
A Indicative:
f Sum non dicam miser, sed certe exercitus, non quia multis debeo sed quia
lepe concurrunt. Cic. lam, I will not say, wretched, but certainly worried, not because
am in debt to many, but because they (their claims) often conflict.
2. Verbs of Saying and Thinking are put in the subjunctive with quod by a kind of
traction :
Impetrare non potui, quod religione se impedirl dlcerent- Cic. I could not ob-
n permission, because they said they were embarrassed (prevented) by a religious scruple
quod impedlrentur, because (as they said) they were prevented).
3. Causal sentences may be represented by a Participle. (672.)
:e no )l
QUOD WITH VERBS OF EMOTION.
542. Quod is used to give the ground of Emotions and Ex-
pressions of Emotion, such as Verbs of Joy and Sorrow, Satis-
ction and Anger, Praise and Blame, Thanks and Complaint*
\ The rule for the Mood has been given already.
Indicative :
Gaude quod spectant ocull te mille loquentem. Hon. Re-
ze that a thousand eyes are gazing at you (while you are) speaking.
^'JDolet mini quod tu. nunc stomacharis. Cic. It pains me that you
i angry now.
12
0 r
'
266 FINAL SENTENCES.
Quintum paenitet quod aniraum tuum offendit. Cic. (376. R.)
Juvat m§ quod vigent studia. Plin. Ep. I am charmed that studies
are flourishing.
Tristis es? indignor quod sum tibi causa doloris. Ov. Are you
sad? I am provoked (with myself) that I am a cause of pain to you.
Tibi gratias ago, quod me omul molestia liberas. Cic.
thank you, that you free me from all annoyance.
Subjunctive :
G a u d e t miles quod vicerit hostem. Ov. The soldier rejoices at
having conquered the enemy.
Nunquam mini in mentem veniet paenitere quod a me ipse non de-
sclverim. Cic. It will never occur to me to be sorry for not having been
untrue to myself.
Laudat Panaetius Africanum quod fuerit abstinens. Cic. Panaetius
praises (Scipio) Africanus for having been abstinent.
Nemo oratorem admiratus est quod Latlne loqueretur. Cic. No one
(ever) admired an orator for speaking (good) Latin.
Socrates accusatus est quod corrumperet juventutem. Quint. So-
crates was accused of corrupting youth.
Memini gloriari solitum esse Quintum Hortensium quod nunquan
bell 5 civil! interfuisset. Cic. I remember that Quintus Hortensius used t>
boast of never having engaged in civil war.
Agunt gratias quod sibi pepercissent. Caes. (511, R. 1.)
Remark. — All these verbs may be construed with the Accusative and Infinitive : Sail
vnm te advenisse gaudeo. (533.) But in Expressions of Praise and Blame, Tbankf
and Complaint, quod is more common.
Amo te et non neglexisse habeo gratiam. Teh. Hove you (= much obliged), a??|
I am thankful to you for not having neglected (it).
Gratulor ingenium non latuisse tuum. Ov. I congratulate (you) that your gent
has not lainjjerdu.
Isocrates queritur plus honoris corporum quam animorum virtutibus daij
Quint. Isocrates complains that more honor is paid to the virtues of the body than to thci
of the mind.
On cum, see 565. J
Sentences of Design and Tendency.
543. 1. Sentences of Design are commonly called Fir
Sentences. Sentences of Tendency are commonly called Co
secutive Sentences. Both contemplate the end — the one, as
aim; the other, as a consequence.
2. They are alike in having the Subjunctive and the parti
lit (how, that), a relative conjunction.
3. They differ in the Tenses employed. The Final Senten
i*i
FI2TAL SENTENCES. 267
.s a rule, takes only the Present and Imperfect Subjunctive.
Consecutive Sentences may take also Perfect and Pluperfect.
4. They differ in the kind of Subjunctive employed. The
rnal Sentence takes the Optative. The Consecutive Sentence
flakes the Potential. Hence the difference in the Negative:
Final : ne (ut ne), Consecutive : ut non, that not.
ne quis3 ut nemo, that no one.
ne ullus, ut nullus, that no.
ne unquam, (ne quando,) ut nunquam, that never.
ne usquam, (necubi,) ut nusquam, that nowhere.
ne aut — aut, (ut neve— neve,) ut neque — neque, that neither
— nor.
Remarks. — 1. Verbs of Effecting have the Final Sequence.
2. Verbs of Hindering have the sequences of the Final Sent
ion of the Consecutive.
3. Verbs of Fearing belong to the Final Sentence only so far as they have the Opta-
,2. Verbs of Hindering have the sequences of the Final Sentence, but often the signifl-
ion of the Consecutive.
^7 FINxiL SENTENCES.
544. Final Sentences are divided into two classes:
L Final Sentences in which the Design is expressed by the
J /tide : Sentences of Design.
ian Dsse oportet ut vivas, non vivere ut edas. [Cic] You must eat in order
A] mm, not live in order to eat.
' I
'his form may be translated by, (in order) to ; sometimes by, that may, might, Mat
the subj., and the like. .
,;''J(IH
Final Sentences in which the Design lies in the leading
b (Verba studil et voluntatis, Verbs of Will and Desire) : Coin-
tientary Final Sentences.
olo uti mihi respond eas Cic. I tcish you to ansicer me.
lis form is often rendei ed by to, never by in order to, sometimes by that and the sub-
t| {llMve, or some equivalent.
Partly Final and partly Consecutive are:
1 1, Verbs of Hindering.
Peculiar in their sequence are :
lr% Verbs of Fearing.
arks. — 1. Temporal Particles are often used in a final sense. So dum, doneo,
(574), antequam, priusquam (579).
i
268
FINAL SENTENCES.
2. The general sense of a Final Sentence may be expressed:
1.) By the Genitive of Gerund or Gerundive, with (seldom without) causa or gratia!
(439, R. 2.) I
2.) By ad with Gerund and Gerundive. (433.)
3.) By the Accusative Supine after Verbs of Motion. (436.)
4.) By the Future Participle Active (later Latin) :
Maroboduus mlsit legatos ad Tiberium oratiiros auxilia, Marbod sent commii
sioners to Tiberius, to beg for reinforcements.
I. Sentences of Design.
545. Sentences of Design are introduced by :
1. Ut (utl) (how) that, and other Kelative Pronouns and A<
verbs (631).
Ut is often preceded by a demonstrative expression, such as : idcircl'0
therefore ; eo, on that account ; eo consilio, with the design.
2. Quo — ut eo, that thereby; with comparatives, tl^ui
tJie ..._...;
3. Ne, that not, lest, continued by neve, neu. (450.)
Remark.— Other particles are of limited use. So ut ne cannot follow verbs of n
tive signification ; quominus is used with Verbs of Hindering ; quin requires a prececi
negative besides. HAtfaei
Esse oportet ut vivas, non vivere ut edas. [Cic] You must eat to '
not live to eat.
Inventa sunt specula, ut homo s§ ipse nosceret. Sen. Mirrors ^
invented, to make man acquainted with himself.
Ut ameris, amabilis esto. Ov. That you may be loved {to make yoin
loved, in order to be loved), be lovable.
Legem brevem esse oportet, quo facilius ab imperitis teneatur
A law ought to be brief, that it may the more easily be grasped by the un\
cated.
Senex serit arbores, quae alter! secul5 prosint. Cic. The old mat
out trees, to do good to the next generation.
Semper habe Pyladen, qui consoletur Oresten. Ov. Always h(\
Pylades, to console Orestes.
Artaxerxes Themistocli Magnesiam urbem ddnaverat, quae el p;
praeberet. Nep. Artaxerxes had given Themistocles the city of Mag
to furnish him with bread.
Galllnae pennis fovent pullos, ne frigore laedantur. Cic. HerM\
(their) chickens warm with (their) icings, that they may not be {to keepm%
from being) hurt by the cold. W
Dionysius ne collum tonsorl committeret tondere filias suas d'l
Cic. (424, R. 3.) §•
FINAL SENTENCES. 269
Remark.— lit non is used when a particular word is negatived :
Confer te ad Mallium, ut Don ejectus ad alienos sed invitatus ad tuos esse
ddearjs- Cic. Betake yourself to Mallius, that you may seem not thrust out to stranger sy
ut invited to your own (friends).
II. Complementary Final Sentences.
546. Complementary Final Sentences follow Verbs of Will-
lg and Wishing, of Warning and Beseeching, of Urging and
>emanding, of Resolving and Endeavoring, of Forcing and
permitting (Verba studii et voluntatis).*
Positive : TJt.
ki
Nil i
Volo uti mihi respondeat. Cic. I wish you to answer me.
Fhaethdn ut in currum patris tolleretur optavit. Cic. Phaethon de-
'ed to be lifted up into Ms father's chariot.
Admoneo ut quotidie meditere resistendum esse iracundiae. Cic. I
monisli you to reflect daily that resistance must be made to hot-Iieadedness.
Et precor ut passim tutius esse miser. Ov. (424.)
Exigis ut Priamus natorum funere ludat. Ov. You exact that Priam
rt at (his) sons' funeral.
Athenienses quum statuerent ut naves conscenderent, Cyrsilum
endam suadentem ut in urbe manerent lapidibus cooperuerunt. Cic.
1 Athenians, resolving to embark on board their ships, covered with stones
stoned) one Cyr situs, who tried to persuade them to remain in the city.
Publium Lentulum ut s§ abdicaret praetura coegistis. Cic. You
I ced Publius Lentulus to resign the praetor ship.
1 '^' Jlud natura non patitur, ut aliorum spoliis nostras copias augeamus.
. Nature does not allow us to increase our wealth by the spoils of others.
Star 4]
(jjttfltpo also any verb or phrase used as a verb of Willing or De-
nding :
>ythia respondit ut moenibus ligneis se munirent. Nep. The Pythia
pered that they must defend themselves with walls of wood.
o ea lege, ea condicione ut (ne), on condition that (that not).
iieeifplegative : Ne, ut ne.
n Itf i
Such verbs and phrases are : oro, rogo, peto, precor, obsecro. fiagito, postulo, -
video, provideo, prospicio, — suadeo, persuadeo, censeo, hortor, adhortor, raoneo
•neo, permoveo, adrlfico, incito, impello, cOgo, — irapero, mando, praecipio, edlco
Jscrlbo, mitto. — coucedo, permitto (sino), — statuo, constituo and decerno, —volo
{\ J,malo, opto, studeo, nitor, contendo, elabOro, pugno, — id ago, operam do, legea
lex est, auctor sum, consilium do.
1
270 FINAL SENTENCES.
Caesar suis imperavit ne quod omnino telum in hostes rejiceren
Cass. Caesar gave orders to Ms (men) not to throw back any missile at all c
the (fit my.
Themistocles collegis suis praedixit ut ne prius Lacedaemoni5ru?
legatos dimitterent quam ipse esset remissus. Nep. Themistocles told h
colleagues beforehand not to dismiss the Lacedaemonian envoys before he we
sent back.
Ut ne is not used after verbs of negative signification, such as impedio, / hind<
recuse I refuse. (548.)
Fompejus suis praedixerat ut Oaesaris impetum exciperent neve
loco moverent. Caes. Pompey\ad told his men beforehand to receive Gaesa
charge and not to move from their position.
Neque is sometimes used after ut :
Monitor tuus suadebit tibi ut hinc discedas neque mihi ullum v
bum respondeat. Cic. Your adviser will counsel you to depart hence a
answer one never a word.
Remarks.— 1. Instead of ut with the Subjunctive, the Infinitive is frequently n
with this class of verbs. So, generally, with jubeo, I order, 532. Authors vary. '
use of the Infinitive is wider in poetry and silver prose.
2. When verbs of Willing and Wishing are used as verbs of Saying and Think
Knowing and Showing, the Infinitive must be used. The English translation is that,
the Indicative : volo. I will have it (maintain), moneo, 1 remark, persuadeo, / convtl
decerno, 1 decide, cogo, I conclude.
Moneo artem sine assiduitate dlcendi non multum juvare. Cic. I remark j
art ivithout constant practice in speaking is of little avail.
Vlx cuiquam persuadebatur Graecia omni cessuros Romanos. Liv. Scarce
one could be persuaded that the Romans ivould retire from all Greece.
Non sunt isti audiendl qui virtiitem diirani et quasi ferream quandam
volunt Cic. (300.)
Est mos hominum ut nolint eundem pluribus rebus excellere. Cic. It
way of the world not to allow that the same man excels in more things (than one).
3. When the idea of Wishing is emphatic, the simple Subjunctive, without ut, is
ployed, and the restriction of sequence to Present and Imperfect is removed:
Exlstimes velim neminem cuiquam cariorem unquam fuisse quam te i
Cic. I wish you to think that no one was ever dearer to anyone than you to me. I l
Malo te sapiens hostis metuat quam stulti elves laudent. Liv. I had rav j
wise enemy should fear you than foolish citizens should praise you. I "!
Excusatum habeas me rogo, ceno domi. Mart. (230.)
Hue ades, insani feriant sine llttora fluctus. Verg. Come hither (and) t\
mad waves lash the shores.
Tarn fellx esses quam formosissima vellem. Ov. (316.)
Nollem dixissem. Cic. (254, R. 2.)
Occidit occideritque sinas cum nomine Trojam. Verg. 'Tis fallen, and let,
befallen name and all.
So jubeo in poetry and later prose. Compare also potius quam, 579, R.
1
fli,
Ri
Mi
-
VERBS OF HTXDERTXG. 271
III. Verbs of Hindering.
547. The dependencies of Verbs of Hindering may be re-
garded as partly Final, partly Consecutive. Ne and quominus
are originally final, but the final sense is often effaced, especially
in quominus. Quln is a consecutive particle. The sequence of
Verbs of Hindering is that of the Final Sentence.
The negative often disappears in the English translation.
548. Verbs signifying to Prevent, to Forbid, to Eefuse, and
to Beware, take ne with the Subjunctive :
Impedior ne plura dicam. Cic. / am hindered from saying more (I
am hindered that I should say no more).
I Compare : 4i Who did hinder you that ye should not obey the truth ? " Gal. v. 7.
Servitns mea mihi interdixit ne quid mirer meum malum. Plaut.
My slavery has forbidden me to marvel aught at (329, R. 1.) ill of mine.
Histiaeus obstitit ne res conficeretur. Nef. Histiaeus opposed tJie
thing being done.
Regulus ne sententiam diceret recusavit. Cic. Regulus refused to
'pronounce an opinion.
Maledictis deterrere ne scrlbat parat. Ter. (424.)
Tantum quum tinges ne sis manifesta caveto. Ov. (264.)
Tantum ne noceas dum vis prodesse videto. Ov. Only see (to it) that
fou do not do harm while you wish to do good.
Remarks.— 1. Verbs of Preventing also take quominus (549), and some of them the
nfinitive (532, R. 1). So regularly prohibere :
Nemo Ire quenquam publica prohibet via. Plaut. (387.)
Impedire, to hinder, deterrere, to frighten off, reciisare, to refuse, sometimes have
ie Infinitive.
2. Verbs signifying to Beware belong to Verbs of Hindering only so far as actiou is
Dntemplated.
After caveo, I beware, ne is often omitted :
Cave credas. Beware of believing.
(Gave ut credas, Be sure to believe.)
Quos vieerls tibi amicos esse cave credas. Curt. Do not believe that those whom
ni have conquered are friends to you.
549. Quominus (= ut eo minus), that thereby the less, is used
ritli verbs of Preventing :
] Such as : impedire, to hinder ; prohibere, to keep from ; tenere, to hold ;
eterrere, to frighten off ; obstare, to be in the way ; recusare, to refuse;
id the like :
272 VERBS OF HINDERING.
Aetas non impedit qudminus agrJ colendi studia teneamus. Cic Age
does not tender our retaining interest in agriculture.
Non deterret sapientem mors quominus rei publicae (347) consulat.
Cic. Death does not deter the sage from consulting the interest of the State.
Quid obstat quominus Deus sit beatus ? Cic. What is in the way of
GooVs being happy f
Caesar cognovit per Afranium stare quominus proelio dimicaretur.
Caes. Caesar found that it was Af ramus' 's fault that there was no decisive
fight (stat, tliere is ei stand still).
550. Quin is used like quominus, with Verbs of Preventing,! .
but only when they are negatived or questioned.
Remarks.— 1. Quin is compounded of qui + ne, how (in which way), + not, and
answers to ut eo non or quo non. For non quin (= non quo non), see 541, R. 1.
2. Quin is used only after Negative Sentences, or Questions which expect a negative
answer.
3. When quin is used as a Consecutive or Relative particle, ut non or qui non, it hat
all the sequences of the Consecutive or Relative. See 556.
4. When quin is used after Negative expressions of Doubt it has the sequences of th
Interrogative.
5. When quin is used with Verbs of Preventing it has the sequences of the Final Sen
tence.
I
I
(
MS
I
N:
ie
M
551. Quin is used when Verbs and Phrases of Preventing
Omitting, Kefraining, Kefusing, and Delaying, Doubt and Un
certainty, are negatived or questioned:
1. Verbs of Preventing and the like (Sequence of the Pinajj^
Sentence) :
Vix nunc obsistitur illis (208) quin lanient mundum.v Ov. They m\
now hardly to be kept {that they should not rend) from rending the universe.
Antiochus non se tenuit quin contra suum doctorem librum ederetj
Cic. Antiochus did not refrain from publishing a book against his teacher.
Nullum adhuc interims! diem quin aliquid ad te litterarum darer
Cic. I ham thus far- not allowed a day to pass but I dropped you {with oi
dropping you) something of a letter (a line or two).
Pacere non possum quin quotidie ad te mittam litteras. Cic. I ca\
not do without {I cannot help) sending a letter to you daily.
(Nullo modo facere possum ut non sim popularis. Cic. I cannot he
being a man of the peopled)
Non possum quin exclamem. Plaut. I cannot but (I must) cry out.
Nihil abest quin sim miserrimus. Cic. There is nothing wanting tha\
should be (= to make me) perfectly miserable.
Fieri nuUo modo poterat quin Cleomeni (208) parceretur. Cic.
w
VERBS OF DOUBT. 2/3
ould in no icise happen but that Cleomenes should be spared {— Cleomenes
lad to be spared).
Paulum afuit quin Fabius Varum interficeret. Caes. There was little
%cking but Fabius (had) killed Varus (= Fabius came near killing Varus).
2. Verbs of Doubt and Uncertainty (Sequence of the Inter-
ogatiye sentence) :
Non dubium est quin ux5rem nolit filius. Ter. There is no doubt that
ny) son does not want a wife.
Quis dubitet (= nemo dubitet) quin in virtute divitiae sint? CiC.
fe.)
Non dubitari debet quin fuerint ante Homerum poetae. CiC. It is not
be doubted that there were poets before Homer.
Nunc mihi non est dubium quin venturae non sint legiones. CiC.
15.)
Occasionally Verbs of Saying and Thinking are found with the same
instruction, because they are near equivalents.
Negari non potest quin rectius sit etiam ad pacatos barbards exerci-
m mitti. Lrv. It cannot be denied (doubled) that it is better for an army to
| sent to the barbarians even though they be quiet.
Non abest suspicio (Litotes for dubitari non potest) quin Orgetorix
se sibi mortem consciverit. Caes. There is no lack of ground to suspect
t there is no doubt that, 448, R 2) Orgetorix killed himself.
Remarks.— 1. In Future relations non dubito quia, (according to 515, R. 3) may have
j Simple Subjunctive instead of the Periphrastic :
Non dubitare quin de omnibus obsidibus supplicium siimat Ariovistus. Caes.
Te did not doubt thai Ariovistus would put all the hostages to death." Comp. Cat. cviii.
So when there is an original Subjunctive notion :
Non dubito quin ad te statim veniam. Cic. I do not doubt that I ought to come
you forthwith. (Veniam "? Shall 1 come ?)
2. Of course dubito and non dubito may have the ordinary interrogative construc-
ts. On dubito an, see 459, R.
3. Non dubito, with the Infinitive, usually means I do not hesitate to:
Non dubitem dicer e omnes sapient es semper beatos esse. Cic. I should not hesi-
i to say that all wise men are always happy.
Et dubitamus adhiic virtute extendere vires % Verg. And do ive still hesitate to
md (our) power by (owe) prowess? Compare timeo, vereor, I fear, hesitate to.
iSo occasionally non dubito quin. See K. 1.
Roman i arbitrabantur non dubitaturum fortem virum quin cederet aequo
.mo legibus. Cic. The Romans thought that a brave man would not hesitate to yield
h equanimity to the laws.
4. Non dubito with the Inf. for non dubito quin occurs chiefly in Nepos, Livy and
r writers.
Sunt multi qui quae turpia esse dubitare non possunt utilitatis specie ducti
jbent- Quint. There are many who, led on by the appearance of profit, approve ivhat
/ cannot doubt to be base.
12*
274 VERBS OF FEARING.
IV. Verbs of Fearing.
552. Verbs of Fearing are followed by the Present and Per-
fect, Imperfect and Pluperfect Subjunctive.
The Present Subjunctive represents the Present and Future
Indicative.
The Perfect Subjunctive regularly represents the Perfect In
dicative.
Present and Perfect Subjunctive become Imperfect and Plu
perfect after a Past Tense.
With Verbs of Fearing, ne, lest, shows that the negative h
wished and the positive feared ; ut (ne non) shows that the posi
tive is wished and the negative feared : ne non is used regularly
after the negative,
Timeo ne hostis veniat, I fear lest the enemy come, that he is coming\
that he will come.
(I wish he may not come.)
Timeo ne hostis venerit, I fear lest the enemy have come,
that (it will turn out that) he has come.
Timeo ut amicus veniat, I fear lest my friend come not, that he is n<
coming, will not come.
{I wish he may come.)
Timeo ut amicus venerit, I fear lest my friend have not come,
that he has not come.
Non timeo ne amicus non veniat, I do not fear that my friend is n
coming, will not come.
Non timeo ne amicus venerit, I do not fear that my friend has not com
Vereor ne dum minuere velim laborem augeam. Cic. Ifear lest, wh
I wish to lessen the toil, I increase it (that lam increasing it).
Veremur ne parum hie liber mellis et absinthii multum habere vid
atur. Quint. / am afraid, that this book will seem to have too little honey a
(too) much wormwood.
Timeo ut sustineas labores. Cic. Ifear that you will not hold out unc
your toils.
Non vereor ne tua virtus opinioni hominum non respondeat. C
I do not fear that your virtue will not answer to (come up to) public expe*
tion.
Metuo ne id consilii ceperim quod n5n facile explicare possim. C
Ifear that I have formed a plan that I cannot readily explain.
COXRECUTIVE SENTENCES. 275
Unum illud extimescebam ne quid turpius facerem vel dicam jam
effecissem, The only tiling I feared teas, lest I should act disgracefully, or, 1
should (rather) say\ (lest) I had already acted disgracefully.
Remarks.— 1. With the Infinitive, Verbs of Pear are Verbs of Will. So especially
vereor, I fear to.
Verebr te laudare praesentem. Cic. (424) (Vereor = prae timore nolo.)
2. Vide ne, see to it lest, is often used as a polite formula for dubito an (459, R.),
and has the same sequences.
Vide ne plus profuttira sit ratio ordinaria. Sen. See to it lest (I am inclined to
think that) the ordinary method will be the more profitable.
CONSECUTIVE SENTENCES.
Sentences of Tendency and Result.
553. Consecutive Sentences are those sentences which show
the Consequence or Tendency of Actions. In Latin, Eesult is
a mere inference from Tendency, though often an irresistible
inference. In other words, the Latin language uses so as
^ij throughout, and not .so that, although so that is often a conve-
nient translation. The result is only implied, not stated.
554. Consecutive Sentences, or Sentences of Tendency and
Eesult, have the Subjunctive mood.
Consecutive Subjunctives are put in the Present or Perfect,
1 Imperfect or Pluperfect Tense according to the rules for
sequence.
The introductory particle is ui
In the leading clause, demonstratives are often employed in
un correlation with ut, which is a relative.
The Eelative is sometimes used, parallel with ut (632).
The Negative is ut non, sometimes after negatives quln.
J When the notion of Design or Condition enters, ne is also found,
555. Consecutive Sentences are used after
1. Demonstratives,
2. Transitive and
3. Intransitive Verbs, and
4. Phrases,
556. 1. Consecutive Sentences are largely used after De-
monstratives expressed or implied.
Tanta vis probitatis est, ut earn in hoste etiam diligamus. Cic. So
great is the virtue of uprightness, that we love it even in an enemy.
,/•!/('
all implying the creation or exis-
tence of conditions that tend to
a result.
'■'!!•
276 CONSECUTIVE SENTENCES.
Nemo tarn timidus est ut malit semper pendere quam semel cadere.
Sex. No one is so timid as to prefer to be hanging always than to fall once
{for alt).
Neque me visisse paenitet quoniam ita vixi ut non frustra me natum
existimem. Cic. (540.)
Non is es ut te pudor unquam a turpitudine revocarit. Cic. You are
iwt the man for shame ever to ham recalled you (= ever to have been re-
called by shame) from baseness.
Nemo adeo ferus est ut non mitescere possit. Hon. No one is so sav-
age that he cannot (be made to) soften.
After a negative quin = ut non :
Nil tarn difficile est quin quaerendo investigari possiet (possit). Ter.
Naught is so hard but it can ( == that it cannot) be tracked out by search.
Nun quam tarn male est Siculis qnlnaliquid facete et commode dicant.
Cic. The Sicilians are never so badly off as not to (have) something or other
clever and pat (to) say.
Remarks.— 1. Notice especially tantum abest (Irapers.) . . . ut . . . ut. The ori-
gin of the phrase is shown by
Tantum abest ab eo ut malum mors sit ut verear ne homini sit nihil bonum
aliud- Cic. So far is it from death (= so far is death from) being an evil that I fear man
has no other blessing.
Tantum abest ut nostra miremur ut usque eo difficiles sumus ut nobis non
satisfaciat ipse Demosthenes. Cic. So far are we from admiring our own (composi-
tions) that we are so hard to please that Demosthenes himself fails to satisfy us.
The personal construction can be used when an abstract follows.
2. Dignus. worthy, indignus, unworthy, aptus, idoneus,^, take a consecutive sen- I
tence. but usually with qui, seldom with ut :
Digna fuit ilia natura quae meliora vellet. Quint. That nature was worthy of
willing better things (= of better aims).
3. A consecutive sentence follows quam ut (Cic.) or quam qui :
Major sum quam ut mancipium sim mel corporis. Sen. (313.)
Major sum quam cui possit Fortima nocere- Ov. (313.)
On the omission of ut with potius quam (priusquam), see 579, R.
4. !Ne, lest, is sometimes irregularly used instead of ut non, especially when the idea
of design or wish intrudes :
Ita me gessi ne tibi pudori essem- Liv. / behaved myself so as not to be a dis-
grace to you.
5. Ita— ut (sometimes ut alone), so that, often serves to restrict and condition. The
negative is often ne (comp. 554).
Ita probanda est mansuetudo at adhibeatur relpiiblicae causa" severitSs. Cic.
Mildness is to be approved, so that (provided that) strictness be used for the sake of the com-
monwealth.
Ita frai volunt voluptatibus ut nulll propter e^s dolores consequantur, Cic.
They wish to enjoy pleasures without having any pain to ensue on account of them.
Pythagoras et Plato mortem ita laudant ut fugere vitam vetent, Cic, Py-
thagoras and Plato so praise death that they, while they praise deaths forbid fleeing from
life.
Ita tii istaec tua misceto ne me admisceas. Ter. Mix up your mixings so you
mix me not withal.
1
h
5
t
ECC:
P
F
la
h
so)
Ac
h
k.
5c
CONSECUTIVE SENTENCES. 277
6. Ut non is often — without and the English verbal in -ing ;
Octavianus nunquam fllios suos populo commendavit ut non adjiceret : SI
merebuntur. Suet. Octavianus (Augustus) never recommended his sons to the people
in such a way as not to add (= without adding) : If they are worthy.
Qui non vere virtiiti studet certe malet exlstimari bonus vir ut non sit
raam esse ut non putetur. Cic. He who is not a true lover of virtue will certainly pre-
fer being thought a good man without being such, to being (a good man) without being
)elieved (to be such).
After negatives quin = ut non- (550, E. 3.)
557, 2. Verbs of Effecting belong partly to the Consecutive,
tartly to the Final Sentence. The negative is non or ne ; the
sequence, final.
Such verbs are facio, efficio, perficio, I make, effect, achieve ; assequor,
jonsequor, I attain, accomplish, and other verbs of Causation. Facere ut
,s often little more than a periphrasis.
Fortuna vestra facit ut irae meae temperem. Lrv. Your fortune
causes that I (makes me) restrain my anger (put metes to my anger).
Invitus (324, R 6) facio ut recorder ruinas reipublicae. Cic. (It is)
gainst my will that I (am doing so as to) recall the ruined condition of the
ommonwealth.
I Negatives:
Rerum obscuritas non verbSrum facit ut non intelligatur 5ratio. Cic.
? is the obscurity of the subject, not of the words, that causes the language not
9 be understood.
Potestis efficere ut male moriar, ne moriar non potestis. Plik. Ep.
You may make me die a hard death, keep me from dying you cannot.
558. 3. Consecutive Sentences follow many Impersonal Verbs
f Happening and Following, of Accident and Consequent:
Such verbs are fit, accidit, contingit, it happens, usu venit, it occurs,
ccedit, there is added, sequitur, it follows. So also est, it is the case.
I Fieri potest ut fallar. Cic. (It) may be (that) I am mistaken.
Potest fieri ut is unde te audisse dicis iratus dixerit. Cic. (It) may be
hat) he from whom you say you heard (it) said it in anger.
Persaepe evenit ut utilitas cum honestate certet. Cic. It very often
\o) happens that profit is at variance with honor.
Ad Appii Claudii senectutem accedebat etiam ut caecus esset. CiC.
yo the old age of Appius Claudius was further added his being blind.
Remark.— Very common is the periphrasis fore (futurum) ut, which gives the corn-
on form of the Fut. Inf. See 240.
559. 4. Many abstract phrases are followed by consecutive
^ntences.
278 TEMPORAL SENTENCES.
Such are : mos, consuetiido est, it is the icay, the wont, opus, usus est,
there is need, and the like. More rarely after adjectives such as aequum,
justum, fair, just, and the like. So with the Genitive after esse.
The leading sentence is often a negative one to show the imaginary
character of the result.
J^P"" In all these relations the Accusative with the Inf. is more common.
Est mos hominum ut nolint eundem pluribus rebus excellere. Cic.
(540, R. 2.)
An culquam est usus homini se ut cruciet ? Ter. (390, R.)
Dionysio ne integrum quidem erat ut ad justitiam remigraret. CiC.
Dionysius was not free even (if he had wished it) to return to justice.
Est miserorum ut malevolentes sint atque invideant bonis. Plaut.
Tfie wretched have a way of being ill-natured and envying the well-to-do.
Rarum (= rar5 accidit) ut sit idoneus suae rel quisque defensor.
Quint. It is rare for a man to be a good defender of his own case.
Remark. — Necesse est, it is necessary, generally, and oportet, it behooves, always,
omit ut :
Leuctrica pugna immortalis sit necesse est. Nep. The battle of Leuctra must
needs be immortal.
Sed non effugies ; mecum moriaris oportet. Prop. Bui you shall not escape ; you
must die with me.
Exclamatory Questions.
560. XJt with the Subjunctive is used in Exclamatory Ques-
tions.
Egone ut te interpellem ? Cic. I interrupt you f
Tu ut unquam te corrigas ? Cic. You — ever reform yourself?
Remark. — The expression is closely parallel with the Accusative and Infinitive. The
one objects to the idea ; the other, to any state of things that could produce the result. It
neither case is there any definite or conscious ellipsis.
Temporal Sentences.
561. The action of the Temporal or Dependent clause maj
stand to the action of the Principal clause in one of thre<
relations :
I. It may be antecedent :
Conjunctions : Postquam (Postea quam), after that, after; ut, as; ub:
when (literally, where) ; simulac, as soon as ; ut prlmum, cum primum, th
first moment that.
II. It may be contemporaneous :
AXTECEDE1ST ACTIOX. 279
Conjunctions : Dum, donee, while, until ; quoad, up to (the time) that ;
quamdiii, as long as ; cum, iphen.
III. It may be subsequent :
Conjunctions : Antequam, priusquam, before that, before.
A special chapter is required by
IV. Cum, when.
Moods in Temporal Sentences.
562. 1. The mood of Temporal clauses is regularly the
■i Indicative.
2. The Subjunctive is used only —
l.)In Oratio Obllqua (509), Total or Partial. So also in the
Ideal Second Person.
2.) When the idea of Design or Condition is introduced.
i/O:.
I. ANTECEDENT ACTION.
563. In historical narrative, Temporal Clauses with postquam,
ubi, ut, simulac, ut primum, and cum prlmum commonly take the
Historical Perfect or the Historical Present Indicative :
The English translation is not unfrequently the Pluperfect.
Postquam Caesar pervenit, obsides poposcit. Caes. After Caesar ar-
rived, he demanded hostages.
Quae ubi nuntiantur Romam, senatus extemplo dictatorem dici jusstt.
rhoii JjiY. When these tidings were carried to Borne, the senate forthwith ordered a
dictator to be appointed.
Pompejus ut equitatum suum pulsum vidit, acie excessit. Caes. As
Pompey saw his cavalry beaten, he left the line of battle.
Pelopidas non dubitavit, simulac conspexit hostem, confligere (551,
[ia|, R. 3.). Nep. As soon as he (had) caught sight of the enemy, Pelopidas did not
7iesitate to engage (him).
Subjunctive in Oratio Obllqua :
Ariovistum, ut semel Gallorum copias vicerit (O. R. vicit), superbe
i.( imperare. Caes. " That Ariovistus, as soon as he had once beaten the forces
of the Gauls, exercised his rule arrogantly."
Remark. — Postquam is rarely found with the Subjunctive outside of 0, 0.
564. The Imperfect is used to express an action continued
into the time of the principal clause (overlapping).
280 ANTECEDENT ACTION.
The translation of; en indicates the spectator (224, R. 1).
Postquam nemo procedere audebat, intrat. Curt. After (he found
that) no one hod the courage to come forth, he entered.
Ubi nemo obvius ibat, ad castra hostium tendunt. Liv. When (they
saw that) no one was coming to meet them, they proceeded to tlie camp of tJie
enemy.
Subjunctive in Oratio Obllqua:
ScripsistI eum, postquam n5n auderet (O. R. non audebat) reprehen-
dere, laudare coepisse. Cic. You wrote that, after he could not get up the
courage to blame, he began to praise.
565. 1. The Pluperfect is used to express an action com-
pleted before the time of the principal clause ; often of the Re-
sulting Condition.
Albinus postquam decreverat n5n egredi provincia, milites stativis
castrls habebat. Sall. After Albinus had fully determined not to depart
from the province, he kepi his soldiers in cantonments.
Posteaquam multitudinem collegerat emblematunij instituit officinam.
Cic. After he had got together a great number of figures, he set up shop.
566. 2. The Pluperfect is used with postquam when a definite
interval is mentioned.
Post and quam are often separated. With an Ablative of Measure,
post may be omitted.
Aristides decessit fere post annum quartum quam Themistocles Athe-
nis erat expulsus. Xep. Aristides died about four years after Themistocles
had been (was) banished from Athens.
Hamilcar nono anno postquam in Hispaniam venerat occisus est.
ZSTep. Hamilcar was Jcilled nine years after he came to Spain.
Aristides sexto fere anno quam erat expulsus in patriam resti tutus
est. Xep. Aristides was restored to his country about six years after he was
exiled.
Subjunctive in Oratio Obllqua:
Scriptum a Poslddnio est triginta annis vixisse Panaetium postea-
quam librcs de ofSciis edidisset. Cic. It is recorded by Posidonius that
Panaetius need thirty years after he put forth his books on Duties.
The attraction is sometimes neglected.
Remark. — The Historical Perfect is also in frequent use:
Nero natus est Antii post novem menses quam Tiberius excessit Suet. Nero
was born at Antium nine month- after Tiberius departed (this life).
On the Iterative P'upe.fect, see below, 568.
ITERATIVE ACTION. 281
567. Postquam and the like, with the Present and Perfect
Indicative, assume a causative signification (compare quoniam,
noiv that == since) :
Curia minor mihi videtur posteaquam est major. Cic. The senate-house seems
to me smaller novj that it is (really) greater.
Tremo horreoque post quamaspexl hanc Tek. I quiver and shiver since I have
seen her.
So cum sometimes :
Gratulor tibi cumtantum vales. Cic. I wish you joy now that you have so much
influence.
Iterative Action.
568. Eule I. — When two actions are repeated contempora-
neously, both are put in tenses of continuance :
Humiles laborant ubi potentes dissident. Phaedr. The lowly suffer
\when the powerful disagree.
Populus me slbilat; at mihi plaudo ipse domi simulac nummos con-
templor in area. Hon. The people hiss me ; but I clap myself at home as soon
as I gloat o'er my cash in the strong box.
Ut quisque maxime laborabat locus aut ipse occurrebat aut aliquos
mittebat. Liv. As each point was hard pressed, he would either hasten to help
himself or send some persons.
The Subjunctive with the Ideal Second Person :
Bonus segnior fit ubi negligas. Sall. A good man becomes more slug-
gish tchen you 'neglect him.
569. Eule II. — When one action is repeated before another,
the antecedent action is put in the Perfect, Pluperfect, or Fu-
ture Perfect ; the subsequent action, in the Present, Imperfect, or
Future, according to the relation.
As this use runs through all sentences involving antecedent action, all the
classes are represented in the following examples:
Remark.— Observe the greater exactness of the Latin expression. Comp. 236, R. 2.
Quoties ceciditj surgit, As often as he falls, he rises.
Quoties cecideratj surgebat, As often as he fell, he rose.
Quoties ceciderit, surget, As often as he falls, he will rise.
Simul inflavit tibicen a perito carmen, agnoscitur. Cic. As soon as the
fluter blows, the song is recognized by the connoisseur.
Alcibiades simulac se remlserat, luxuriosus reperiebatur. Nep. As
soon as Alcibiades relaxed, he was found a debauchee.
£82 ITERATIVE ACTION.
Dociliora sunt ingenia prius quam obduruerunt. Quint. Minds are
more teachable before they (have) become hardened.
Ager quum multos annos requievit, uberidres efferre fruges solet. CiC.
When afield has rested (rests) many years, it usually produces a more abun-
dant crop.
Quum palam ejus anuli ad palmam converterat Gyges,a nullo vide-
batur. Cic. Whenever) Gyges turned the bezel of the ring toward the palm
(of his hand), he was to be seen by no one.
Si pes condoluit, si dens, ferre non possumus. Cic. If afoot, if a tooth
ache(s), we cannot endure it.
Stomachabatur senex, si quid aaperius dixeram. Cic. The old man
used to be fretted, if I said anything (that was) rather harsh.
Quod non dedit fortuna non eripit. Sen. What fortune has not given
(does not give), she does not take away.
Haerebant in memoria quaecumque audierat et viderat [Themisto-
cles]. Nep. Whatever Themistocles had heard and seen (= heard and saw)
remained fixed in his memory.
Qui timere desierint, odisse incipient. Tac. Those who cease to fear
will begin to hate.
The Subjunctive with the Ideal Second Person:
Ubi consuluerls, mature facto opus est. Sall. When you have delibe-
rated, you icant speedy action.
The Subjunctive in Oratio Obllqua :
Cato mirari se ajebat quod n5n rideret haruspex haruspicem cum
vidisset. Cic. Cato said that he wondered that an haruspex did not laugh when
he saw (another) haruspex. (Non ridet cum vidit.)
The Subjunctive by Attraction:
Rete texunt araneolae ut si quid inhaeserit conficiant. Cic. (Si quid
inhaesitj conficiunt.)
Quare fiebat, ut omnium oculos, quotiescunque in publicum prodisset,
ad se converteret. Nep. (Quotiescunque prodierat, convertebat.)
(66G.)
Remark.— The Subjunctive (Imperf. and Pluperf.) is sometimes found in Iterative
Sentences— chiefly after the Imperf. Ind. or some combination which shows Will, Habit,
Expectation. The construction is best explained by Partial Obliquity (509, 8). It is found
chiefly in later historians and in Nepos. The passages in Caesar are not numerous, and
tome are uncertain. *
Incurrere ea gens in Macedoniam solita erat ubi regem occupatum externo
bello sensisset- Lit. That tribe was wont to make a raid in Macedonia whenever they
perceived the king engrossed in foreign war.
CONTEMPORANEOUS ACTION. 283
Qui unum ejus ordinis offendisset omnes adversos habebat Liv. Whoso had
offended one of that order was sure to have all against him.
Modum adhibendo ubi res posceret priores erant. Liv. By the use of moderation,
when the case demanded it, they were his superiors.
So sometimes the Perf. Subj. with the Pres. Indicative. Compare 666, R. 2.
II. CONTEMPORANEOUS ACTION.
570. Conjunctions used of Contemporaneous Action are :
Dum, donee, while, so long as, until ; quoad, up to (the time)
that ; quamdiu, as long as ; cum, when.
An action may be contemporaneous in Extent — so long as,
while.
An action may be contemporaneous in Limit — until.
Remark.— Dum (while) yet, denotes duration, which maybe coextensive, so long as,
or not. It is often causal. Donee (old form donicum, of uncertain composition), paral-
lel with dum in the sense, so long as, until. Cicero uses it only as until. Quum (cum)
demands a separate treatment.
I. Contemporaneous in Extent.
(So long as, while.)
571. Dum, donee, quoad, quamdiu, so long as, while, take the
Indicative of all the tenses.
Dum vitant stulti vitia in contraria currunt. Hor. Fools, while they
avoid (one set of) faults, run into the opposite.
Sibi vero hanc laudem relinquunt, " Vixit, dum vixit, bene." Ter.
They leave indeed this praise for themselves, " He lived well while he lived "
(all the time).
Tiberius Gracchus tamdiu laudabitur dum memoria rerum Roma-
narum manebit. Cec. Tiberius Gracchus shall be praised so long as the
memory of Roman history remains (shall remain).
Fuit haec gens fortis dum Lycurgi leges vigebant. Cic. This nation
was brave so long as the laws of Lycurgus toere in force.
Donee gratus eram tibi, Persarum vigui rege beatior. Hor. While I
was acceptable in your sight, I throve more blessed than Persia's king.
Quoad potuit, restitit. Cic. As long as he could, he withstood.
Subjunctive in Oratio Obllqua :
[Regulus dixit] quamdiu jurejurando hostium teneretur non esse se
senatorem. Cic. [Regulus said] that as long as he icas bound by his oath to
the enemy he was not a Senator* (Quamdiu teneor ndn sum senator.)
Dum often resists the change. (658, R. 3.)
"284 CONTEMPORANEOUS ACTION.
Subjunctive by Attraction:
Vereor ne, dum minuere velim, laborem augeam. CiC. (552.) (Dum
minuere volo, augeo.)
Remark. —When the actions are coextensive, the tenses are generally the same in both
members, bat not always. Dum with the Pluperf. Ind. is used of the Resulting con-
dition. Liv. xxxii. 24.
572. Dum, while, while yet, commonly takes the Present In-
dicative after all Tenses : so especially in narrative.
Cape hunc equum, dum tibi virium aliquid superest. Lrv. Take this
horse, while you have yet some little strength left.
Dum haec Romae aguntur, consules ambo in Liguribus gerebant bel-
lum. Liv. While these things were going on at Borne, both consuls were carry-
ing on war in Liguria.
Praetermissa ejus rel pccasio est, dum in castellis recipiendis tempus
teritur. Lrv. The opportunity was allowed to slip by, while time was wasted
in recovering miserable forts.
Remark. — The relation is often causal, and the construction is parallel with the Pre-
sent Participle, the lack of which in the Passive it supplies. Here the Present Ind. is
simply a tense of continuance rather than an Hist. Present.
II. Contemporaneous in Limit.
{Until.)
573. Dum, donee, quoad, up to (the time) that, until, have the
Present and Perfect and Future Perfect Indicative:
The Present is either an Historical Present, or looks forward to the
Future.
Tityre, dum rede5, brevis est via, pasce capellas. Yerg. Tityrus,
while I am returning (= till I return) — the way is short—feed my kids.
Epamin5ndas ferrum in corpore usque eo retinuit, quoad renuntia-
tum est vicisse Boeoti5s. Nep. Epaminondas retained the iron in his
body, until tcord was brought back that the Boeotians had conquered.
Donee rediit Marcellus, silentium fuit. Liv. Until Marcellus returned,
there was silence.
Haud desinam donee perfecero. Ter. I will not cease until I have
(shall have) accomplished (it).
Exspectabo dum venit. Ter. I will wait until he comes.
Subjunctive in Oratio Obllqua :
Scipioni Silanoque donee revocati ab senatu forent prorogatum im-
perium est. Liv. Scipio and Silanus had their command extended until
u they should have been recalled by the senate."
DUM WITH THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 285
574. Dum, donee, and quoad, until, take the Subjunctive when
Suspense and Design are involved:
Verginius dum collegam consuleret moratus est. Liv. Verginius
delayed until he could (long enough to) consult his colleague.
At tibi sit tanti non indulgere theatris, dum bene de vacu5 pectore
cedat amor. Ov. But let it be worth the cost to you {— deem it worth the
cost) not to indulge in play-going, until love be fairly gone from (your) unten-
anted bosom.
Often with exspecto, Itvait :
Rusticus exspectat dum defluat amnis. Hor. The clown waits for the
river to run off (dry).
Also : exspectare ut, si (never Infinitive), 462, 2.
Remark. — The Subjunctive is sometimes used in narrative with dutli, while, and
donee, while, until, to express subordination (like cum, 585). The principle is that of
Partial Obliquity. There is often a Causal or Iterative sense.
Dum intentus in eum se rex totus averteret, alter elatam securim in caput
dejecit. Liv. While the king fixed upon him was quite turned away, the other raised his
axe and planted it in his skull. (Averteret from the point of view of alter = dum videt
avertentem.)
575. Dum, with the Subjunctive, is used in Conditional
Wishes : Negative, dum ne = ne interim.
Oderint dum metuant. Atttus. Let them hate so long as they fear (pro-
vided that, if they will only fear).
Dumne ob malefacta peream parvi [id] aestimo. Plaut. (379.)
So also dummodOj modo, provided only, only :
Dummodo morata recte veniat, dotata est satis. Plaut. Provided
only she come with a good character, she is endowed (=her dowry is) enough.
Multa [in eo] admiranda sunt : oligere modo curae sit. Quint. Many
things in him are to be admired ; only you must be careful to choose.
Copia placandi sit modo parva tui. Ov. (429, R. 1.)
III. SUBSEQUENT ACTION.
Antequam and Priusquam with the Indicative.
576. Antequam and priusquam, before, take the Present, Per-
fect, and Future Perfect Indicative, when the limit is stated as
a fact.
Remark.— The present is used in anticipation of the future. The elements ante,
antea, prius — quam, are often separated.
'O'. ASTKQUAM AHD P&IUSQUA1L
577, TL_- 3. — .::- I:. .:; ~:""t is :.— ". After Positive Sentences :
Anteqnam ad 5en7en:i?.m redec. de me pauca die am. ClC Before I
return to the subject, I wiU say a few things of myself
O mni a experiri certain est priusquam per eo. Tz
try everything befor 7 Priusquam peream = s : iiir: _ n t1;_
to keep from perishing.)
:>,rk. — The Pare Perfect Indicate is used ::' Heratin; Action. (569.)
Dociliora sunt ingenia priusquam obdHra grant . u ra i
575, The Perfect (Aorist) and Future Perfect Indicative are
:-:.. -;::::,.-- after Xegarive Sentences After P;s:ti~e Sen-
tences there is no necessary connection.
LegaU n5n ante pre fee:: quarn imp c sites in naves milites viderunt.
Liv I~ -. z : : i c?*# /aetf «e£ <?i^ &#?# lAe^ amp fA« soldiers on board.
Neque de:a::ree:r anteq-eam iilerum vias ratienesque percepero. et
pr5 omnibus et contra omnia dispntandi. ClC. 1 until not
weary before (until) 1 learn (shall have learned; ~
: \:. ;::.:. ir , .-_ : :\i .;.
9 il jnn stive in Otario OUlqaa :
Tnemisteeles celiegts sues prae dixit, ut ne prius Lacedaemonierum
legates dlmi::erent q'jam ipse esset remissus. INep. ;-:' Nellte dl-
rri::ere priusquam ege ere remissus
Au:equam : ': Priusquam ztice.
579. Antequar:: too priusquam are used with the Subjunt
when an ideal limit u g ren : when toe action is expected, con-
tuu' entj lesigned, ibordinat
An ideal limit involves necessary anteceden
sequence. After Positive sentences, S : cially
ric sentences and in naror are cur*. 185. The Sub
junctive is absolutely necessary when the action does n take
translation is often before, and in -tw^.
Ante vidimus fulguratienem quam sonum audiamus %EH
. __ ..-.._...- .:. .. ... ■ ._. ^ . . . ^;- _■-_- ^ve may nevei hear it).
In omnibus negetits priusquam aggrediare adhibenda est praeparatio
CONSTRUCTIONS OF CUM. .. : '.
Collem celeriter priusquam ab adversariis sentiatur coirim-lni! Gaes
eedity fortified the hill before he was jx. soon to
De perceived by the enemy). (Prius quam = prius quam oft.]
Hannibal omnia priusquam excederet pugna erat expertu3. Ln
Hannibal had tried everything before withdrawing from the fir'.- — \ _
»yitli drawing from the fight).
Saepe magna indoles virtutis prius quam rei publicae prodesse potu-
jsset exstincta fuit. Cic. Often hath great natim worth
tefore it could be of service to the State.
Ducentis annis antequam urbem Romam caperent in Italiam Galli
iescenderunt. Lit. (It was) two hundred taking L
the Gauls came down into Italy.
Here the Subjunctive gives the natural point of refer- ..
After the Negative :
Inde non prius egressus est quam mon priusquam = dcnec rex eum
ji fidem reciperet. Xep. He did not go away until the '-.
-otection. (He stayed to make the king take him under his protec-
• ion.)
Eemakk.— When the will is involved, potius quam is used in the aune ~ - is prius
main.
Depugna potius quam servias. Cic. Fight it out rather than bt
I IV. CONSTRUCTION OF CUM QUUM\
580. Cum is a relative conjunction, and stands nearer tc the
lative than to the Accusative in signification, per": in
form (quo(fi)m). Cum is the cl - ; M Ine
;• pronunciation.
581. There are three great uses of cum :
I. Temporal cum (whe —41 lakes :he Indicative :
II. Historical cum, as, the Imperfect and Plnperfeci Sub-
junctive :
1. Causal cum, as. since : and
2. Concessive cum, whereas. aWio: ta) ; i&e Snbjnne-
tive.
I. Cum ver appetit, milites ex hibernis movent.
- i 'diers move out of winter-qua
II. Cum ver appeteret, Hannibal ex hibernis movit.
approaching (spring approaching), Hannil
III. 1. Cum ver appetat, ex hibernis movendum es: ring
roaching, we must move out of winter-quarters.
888 TEMPORAL CUM.
III. 2. Cum ver appeteret, tamen hostes ex hibernis non moverunt,
Whereas (although) spring teas approaching, nevertheless the enemy did not
move out of ivinter-quarters.
Remark.— So called cum inversum (cum in the apodosis) is as natural in English as
in Latin :
Jam ver appetebat, cum Hannibal ex hibernis movit Liv. Spring was (already)
approaching, when Hannibal moved out of winter-quarters.
According to 581, I., it is, of course, put in the Indicative.
I. Temporal Cum.
582. Cum, when, is used with all the tenses of the Indicative,
to designate merely temporal relations.
In the Principal clause, a temporal adverb or temporal expression is fre-
quently employed, such as turn, tunc, then; nunc, now; dies, day ; tempus,
time ; jam, already ; vlx, scarcely ; and the like.
Animus, nee cum adest nee cum discedit, apparet. Cic. The soul is not
visible, either when it is present, or when it departs.
Sex libros tunc de Republica scrlpsimus cum gubernacula reipublicae
tenebamus. Cic. I wrote the six books about the State at the time wlien I held
the helm of the State.
Recordare tempus illud cum pater Curio maerens jacebat in lectS
Cic. Remember the time when Curio the father lay abed from grief.
Longum illud tempus cum non ero magis me movet quam hoc exi
guum. Cic. That long time (to come), when I shall not exist, has moi*e effecx
on me than this scant (present time).
Jam dilucescebat cum signum consul dedit. Liv. By this time day
was beginning to daicn, when the consul gave the signal. (See 580, R.)
Ideal Second Person with the Subjunctive :
Pater, hominum immortalis est infamia. Etiam turn vivit cum esse
ere das mortuam. Plaut. Father, immortal is the ill-fame of the world. 1\
lives on even when you think that it is dead.
Remarks.— 1. Fuit cum commonly follows the analogy of other characteristic rela
tives (633), and takes the Subjunctive :
Fuit tempus cum (=fuit cum) rura colerent homings. Varro. There was a tim<
when mankind lived in the country.
The Indicative is rare.
2. Meminl cum, / remember the time when, takes the Indicative ; but audire cunj
takes the Subjunctive parallel with the Participle:
Audlvl Mgtrodorum cum de his ipsis disputaret. Cic. I have heard Metrodoru
disc m s(ing) these very matters.
3. Peculiar is the use of cum with Lapses of Time. Lapses of Time are treated a;
Designations of Time in Accusative or Ablative :
Muitl anni sunt cum (= multos annos) in aere meo est. {It is) many years (tbat
he has been (221) in my debt.
HISTORICAL CUM. 289
Mnlti annl sunt cum (= multis annls) in aere meo non fuit. It is many years
that he has not been (since he was) in my debt.
Nondum centum et decern annl sunt cum (= ex quo = abhinc annis) de pe-
cuniis repetundis lata lex est- Cic. It is not yet 110 years since the law concerning ex-
tortion was proposed,
583. Coincident Action. — When the actions of the two
clauses are coincident, cum is almost equivalent to its kindred
relative quod, in that :
Cum tacent, clamant. Cic. When (= in that) they are silent, they cry
aloud.
Dixl omnia cum hominem nominavl. Plin. Ep. I have said everything,
in naming the man.
584. Conditional use of Cum. — Cum with the Future, Future
Perfect, or Universal Present, is often almost equivalent to si,
if with which it is sometimes interchanged :
Cum poscis3 posce Latine. Juv. When (If) you ask (for anything),
ask in Latin.
Cum veniet contra, digito compesce labellum. Juv. When (If) he
^ meets you, padlock your lip with your finger.
585. Iterative use of Cum.— Cum in the sense of quoties, as
often as, takes the Tenses of Iterative Action :
Solet cum se purgat in me conferre omnem culpam. Cic. He is accus-
tomed, when he clears himself, to put off all the blame on me.
Ager cum multos annos requievit uberiores efferre fruges solet. Cic.
Cum palam ejus anuli ad palmam converterat Gyges a null5 videba-
tur. Cic. (569.)
I1
Remark.— The Subjunctive is also found (569, R.) :
Cum in jus duel debitorem vidissent, undique convolabant. Liv. Whenever
they saw a debtor taken to court, they made it a rule to hurry together from all quarters.
II. Historical Cum.
586. Cum, whe?i (as), is used in narrative with the Imperfect
cu11 Subjunctive of contemporaneous action, with the Pluperfect
p Subjunctive of antecedent action.
, Remark.— The subordinate clause generally precedes, and often indicates Causal as
' well as Temporal relation. The Subjunctive in some cases seems to be due to the Latin
tendency to express inner connection (evolution) by the Subjunctive. In the absence
of participles, cum with the Subjunctive is a parallel construction.
13
290 CAUSAL AND CONCESSIVE CUM.
Agesilaus cum ex Aegyptd reverteretur decessit. ]STep. Agesilaus
died as he was returning from Egypt.
Zendnem cum Athenis essem audiebam frequenter. Cic. When I was
(Being-) at Athens, Iheard Zeno (lecture) frequently.
Athenienses cum statuerent ut naves conscenderent, Cyrsilum quen-
dam suadentem ut in urbe manerent, lapidibus cooperuerunt. Cic.
(546.)
Cum Caesar Anconam occupasset, urbem reliquimus. Cic. When
(As) Caesar had occupied Aneona (Caesar having occupied Ancona), I left the
city.
Attalus moritur alter5 et septuagesimo ann5, cum quattuor et qua-
draginta annos regnasset. Lit. Attalus died in his seventy -second year,
having reigned forty -four years.
III. Causal and Concessive Cum.
1. Causal Cum.
587. Cum, when, ivhereas, since, seeing that, with the Sub-
junctive, is used to denote the reason, and occasionally the
motive, of an action :
Quae cum it a sint, effectum est nihil esse malum quod turpe non sit.
Cic. Since these tilings are so, it is made out (proved) that nothing is bad that
is not dishonorable.
Cum Athenas tanquam ad mercaturam bonarum artium sis profectus,
inanem redire turpissimum est. Cic. As (Since) you set out for Athens as
if to market for good qualities, it would be utterly disgraceful to return empty
(handed).
Dolo erat pugnandum, cum par n5n esset armis. Nep. He had to fight
by stratagem, as he (seeing that he) was not a match in arms.
Remark.— The Subjunctive is used because the relation is a mere conception (charac-
teristic); that it is a mere conception is emphasized by quippe and utpote, as in the
relative sentence.
On the occasional use of cum with the Ind. in a causal sense, see 567. Oftener in
earlier Latin
2. Concessive Cum.
588. Causal cum, ivhereas, becomes Concessive cum, whereas,
although, when the cause is not sufficient : the relation is often
adversative.
Nihil me adjuvit cum posset. Cic. He gave me no assistance, althougl
(at a time when) he had it in his power.
Cum primi ordines hostium concidissent, tamen acerrime reliqui re
CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 291
sistebant. Caks. Although ike first ranks of the enemy had fallen (been cut
to pieces), nevertheless the rest resisted most vigorously.
Perire artem putamus nisi apparet, cum desinat ars esse, si apparet.
Quint. We think thai (our) art is lost unless it shows, whereas it ceases to be
art if it shows.
589. Cum — turn. — When cum, when, turn, then (both — and
especially), have the same verb, the verb is put in the Indica-
tive :
Pausanias consilia cum patriae turn sibi inimica capiebat. Nep.
Pausanias conceived plans that were hurtful both to his country and especially
to himself.
When they have different verbs, the verb with cum may be
in the Subjunctive, which often has a concessive force :
Sisennae historia cum facile omnes superiores vincat, turn indicat
tamen quantum absit a summo. Cic. Although the history of Sisenna easily
surpasses all former histories, yet it shows how far it is from the highest
(mark).
Conditional Sentences.
590. In Conditional sentences the clause which contains
the condition (supposed cause) is called the Protasis, that which
contains the consequence is called the Apodosis.
Logically, Protasis is Premiss ; and Apodosis, Conclusion.
Grammatically, the Apodosis is the Principal, the Protasis the
Dependent, clause.
591. Sign of the Conditional. — The common conditional
particle is si, (/.
Remarks.— 1. SI is a locative case, literally so, in those circumstances (comp. sic so).
So in English : " I would by combat make her good, so were I a man.1' — Shakesp.
Hence, Conditional clauses with si may be regarded as adverbs in the Ablative case,
and are often actually represented by the Ablative Absolute.
2. The connection with the Causal Sentence is shown by si quidem, which in later
Latin is almost = quoniam.
3. The temporal particles cum and quando, when, and the locative ubi, are also used
to indicate conditional relations in which the idea of Time or Space is involved.
592. Negative of si. — The negative of si is either si non or nisi.
Si non negatives a particular word, if not ; nisi, unless, nega-
tives the whole idea — restricts, excepts.
Si non is the rule —
292 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES.
1. AVhen the positive of the same verb precedes :
Si feceris, magnam habebo gratiam ; si non feceris, ignoscam. ClC.
If you do it, I will be very grateful to you ; if you do not, I will forgive (you).
2. When the Condition is concessive :
Si mihi bona republica frui non licuerit, at carebo mala. Cic. If I
shall not be alloiced to enjoy good government, I shall at least be rid of bad.
Nisi is in favorite use after negatives :
Parvi (= nihil!) sunt foris arma nisi est consilium domi. Cic. Of
little (value) are arms abroad unless there is wisdom at home.
Non possem vivere nisi in litteris viverem. Cic. I could not live un-
less I lived in study.
Memoria minuitur nisi earn exerceas. Cic. Memory wanes unless (ex-
cept) you exercise it. (Si non exerceas, in case you fail to exercise it.)
So nisi si, except in case :
Miseros illudi nolunt homines nisi si se forte jactant. Cic. Men do not
like to have the unfortunate mocked unless (except in case) they happen to
swagger.
Remarks. — 1. Sometimes the difference is unessential :
Nisi Curio fuisset, hodie te muscae comedissent- Quint. If it had not been/or
Curio, the flies would have eaten you up this day. Si non fuisset would be equally correct.
2. Nisi and nisi Si are often used after negitive sentences or equivalents in the signi
fication of but, except, besides, only :
Inspice quid port em ; nihil hie nisi triste videbis, Ov. Examine what lam
bringing y you will see nothing here except (what is) sad.
Falsus honor juvat et mendax infamia terret, quern nisi mendacem et men-
dosum? Hon " False honor charms and lying slander scares, whom but the false and
faulty ?"> — Brougham.
3. Nisi quod introduces an actual limitation — with the exception, that:
Nihil acciderat [Polycrati] quod nollet nisi quod anulum quo delectabatur
in marl abjecerat. Cic. Nothing had happened to Polycrates that he could not havel
wished, except that he had thrown into the sea a ring in which he took delight (== a favorite;
ring). So praeterquam quod.
Nihil peccat nisi quod nihil peccat. Plin. Ep. He makes no blunder except- -tha
he makes no blunder (kt faultily faultless ").
4. Nisi forte, unless perhaps, nisi vero, unless indeed, with the Indicative, eithe
limits a previous statement, or makes an ironical concession :
Nemo fere saltat sobrius nisi forte insanit- Cic. There is scarce any one tha\
dances (when) sober, unless perhaps he is cracked.
Licet honesta morte defungi, ni3i forte satius est victoris exspectare arbi
trium. Curt. We are free to die an honorable death, unless perhaps it is better to awai
the pleasure of the conqueror.
5. Nl is antiquated or poetical, and is equivalent to si non :
Nl parere veils, pereundum erit ante lucernas. Juv. (532, R. 3.)
So in oaths, promises, and the like :
Peream nl piscem putavl esse. Vauro. May I die if I did not think it was a fish,
CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 293
593. Two Conditions excluding each the other. — When two
conditions exclude each the other, si is used for the first; sin, if
not (but if), for the second.
Sin is further strengthened by autem, but; minus, less {not) ;
secus, other ivise ; aliter, else :
Mercatura, si tenuis est, sordida putanda est ; sin magna et copiSsa,
non est admodum vituperanda. Cic. Mercantile business, if it is petti/, is
to be considered dirty (work) ; if (it is) not (petty, but) great and abundant
(= conducted on a large scale), it is not to be found fault with much.
Remark.— If the Verb or Predicate is to be supplied from the context, si minus, if
less (not), sin minus, sin aliter, if otherwise, are commonly used, rarely si non :
Ediic tecum omnes tuos ; si minus, quam pliirimos. Cic. Take out with you all
your (followers) ; if not, as many as possible.
Odero si potero ; si non, invitus amabo. Ov. (234, R. 2.)
594. Other Forms of the Protasis. — 1. The Protasis may be
expressed by a Relative :
Qui videret urbem captam diceret. Cic. Whoso had seen it, had said
that the city id as taken.
Miraretur qui turn cerneret. Lrv. (252.)
2. The Protasis may be contained in a Participle :
Si latet ars, pr5dest ; affert deprensa pudorem. Ov. If art is concealed,
it does good ; (if) detected, it brings shame.
Maximas virtutes jacere omnes necesse est voluptate dominante.
irf Cic. All the greatest virtues must necessarily lie prostrate^ if the pleasure (of
the senses) is mistress.
Nihil potest evenire nisi causa antecedente. Cic. Nothing can happen,
JJ unless a cause precede.
3. The Protasis may be involved in a modifier :
Fecerunt servi Milonis quod suos quisque servos in tali re facere
Hl voluisset. Cic. The servants of Milo did what each man would have wished
his servants to do in such case (si quid tale accidisset).
At bene non pnterat sine puro pectore vivi. Lucr. But there could be
itW'-no good living without a clean heart (nisi prirum pectus esset).
4. The Protasis may be expressed by an Interrogative, or,
what is more common, by an Imperative :
Tristis es ? indignor quod sum tibi causa doloris. Ov. (542.)
29-1 LOGICAL CONDITIONAL SENTENCES.
Cedit amor rebus : res age, tutus eris. Ov. Love yields to business ; do
business (if you plunge into business), you will be safe.
Immuta verborum collocationem, perierit tota res. CiC. (236, R. 4.)
595. Correlatives of Si. — The correlatives of Si are : Sic, so ;
ita, thus J but they are commonly not expressed. Occasionally
turn, then; and ea condicione, on those terms, are employed.
De frument5 responsum est ita usurum eo populum Romanum, si pre-
tium acciperent. Liv. In the matter of the corn, answer was made that the
Roman people would avail themselves of it, on condition that they accepted the
value.
CLASSIFICATION OF CONDITIONAL SENTENCES.
596. Conditional sentences may be divided into three classes,
according to the character of the Protasis:*
I. Logical Conditional Sentences: Si, with the Indicative.
II. Ideal Conditional Sentences : Si, with Present and Per-
fect Subjunctive.
III. Unreal Conditional Sentences: Si, with Imperfect and
Pluperfect Subjunctive.
I. LOGICAL CONDITIONAL SENTENCES.
597. The Logical Conditional Sentence simply states the |
elements in question, according to the formula:
If this is so, then that is so ; if this is not so, then that is not j
so.
It may be compared with the Indicative Question.
The Protasis is in the Indicative; the Apodosis is generally inj
the Indicative; but in future relations any equivalent of the |
Future (Subjunctive, Imperative) may be used.
I
* In some grammar? of Greek and Latin, conditional sentences, and sentences involve!
ing conditional relations, have been divided into particular and general. Whether a con-
dition be particular or general depends simply on the character of the Apodosis. Any!
form of the Conditional Sentence may be general, if it implies a rule of action. ThejH
forms for Iterative action have been given. (568, 569.)
LOGICAL CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 295
Protasis. Apodosis.
Si id credis, erras,
If you believe that, you are going wrong.
Si id credebas, errabas,
If you believed that, you were going wrong.
Si id credidisti, errastl,
If you (have) believed that, you have gone (you went) wrong.
Si id credes, errabis,
If you (shall) believe that, you will (be) go(ing) wrong: (234, R.S).
Si id credideris, erraveris,
If you (shall have) believe(&) that, you will have gone (will go) wrong.
Si quid credidisti, erras.
If you have believed anything
(= when you believe anything), you go wrong. Comp. 569.
Si quid credideras, errabas.
If you had believed anything
(= when you believed anything), you went wrong.
Si spiritum ducit, vivit. Cic. If he is drawing (his) breath (breathing)
he is living.
Farvi sunt foris arma nisi est consilium domi. Cic. (412, R. 1.)
Si occidi, recte feci ; sed non occidi. Quint. If I hilled him, I did
right ; but I did not kill Mm.
Naturam si sequemur ducem, nunquam aberrabimus. Cic. If we
(shall) follow nature (as our) guide, ice shall never go astray.
Improbos si meus consulatus sustulerit, multa saecula propagarit rel
publicae. Cic. If my consulship shall have done away with the destructives,
it will have added many ages to the life of the State.
Si pes condoluit, si dens? ferre non possumus. Cic. (569.)
Stomachabatur senex, si quid asperius diseram. GiC. (569.)
Vivam, si vivet ; si cadet ilia, cadam. Prop. Let me live, if she lives ;
if site falls, let me fall.
Nunc si forte potes, sed non potes, optima conjux, finitis gaude tot
mini morte malls. Ov. Now, if haply you can, but you cannot, noble wife,
rejoice that so many evils have been finished for me by death.
Piectere si nequeo superos, Acheronta movebo. Yerg. If I can't
bend the gods above, III rouse (all) hell below.
Si tot exempla virtutis non movent, nihil unquam movebit \ si tanta
clades vilem vitam non fecit3 nulla faciet. Liv. If so many examples of
valor stir you not, nothing will ever do it; if so great a disaster has not made
life cheap, none ever will.
Desines timere si sperare desieris. Sen. You will cease to fear, if you
oftfl (shall Jiave) cease(d) to Jpqe.
Remarks.— 1. After a Verb of Saying or Thinking (Oratio Obliqua), the Protasis
must be put in the Subjunctive, according to the rule.
296 IDEAL CONDITIONAL SENTENCES.
(SI id credis, erras.) Dlco. te. si id credas. errare.
dixi. te. si id crederes. errare.
(Si id credes, errabis.) Dlco. te, si id credas. erraturum esse.
dixi, te. si id crederes. erraturum esse.
(Si id credidisti, errasti.) Dlco. te. slid credideris, errasse.
dixi, te, si id credidisses, errasse.
For examples, see Oratio Obllqua, 660.
2. The Subjuncive is used by Attraction :
Kete texunt araueolae ut si quid inhaeserit conficiant. Cic. (SI quid inhaesit,
connciunt.) (667.)
3. The Ideal Second Person takes the Subjunctive in connection with the Universal
Present :
Senectiis plena est voluptatis si ilia scias uti. Sen. Old age is full of pleasure,
if you know (if one knows) how to make use of it.
Memoria minuitur nisi earn exerceas. Crc. (592.)
4. SIve— slve (seu— seu) almost invariably takes the Logical form. (499.)
Seu vlcit. ferociter instat victls ; seu victus est, instaurat cum victorious cer-
tamen. Liv. If he vanquishes (569), he presses the vanquished furiously ; if he is van-
quished, he renews the struggle with tJie vanquishers.
II. IDEAL CONDITIONAL SENTENCES.
598. The Ideal Conditional Sentence represents the matter
as still in suspense. The supposition is more or less fanciful,
and do real test is to be applied. There is often a wish for or
against.
The Protasis is put in the Present Subjunctive for continued
action, and in the Perfect Subjunctire for completion or attain-
ment.
The Apodosis is in the Present or Perfect Subjunctive.
The Imperative and Future Indicative or equivalents are often
found. The Universal Present is frequently used, especially in
combination with the Ideal Second Person.
On the difference between Subjunctive and Future, see (27.)
Protasis. Apodosis.
Si id credas, erres,
If you should (were to) believe that, you would be going wrong.
Si id credas, erraveris,
If you sluovld (were to) believe that, you would go wrong.
Si id credideris, erres,
1. If you should (prove to) have believed,
that (Perfect ; Action Past or Future), you would be going wrong.
2. If you should (come to) believe that
(Aor. ; Action Future), you would be going wrong.
Si id credideris (rare), erraveris,
If you (should have) believe (d) that, you would (have) ^o(ne) wrong.
'
UNKEAL CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 297
Si viclnus tuns equum meliorem habeat quam tuus est, tuumne equum
malls an illius ? Cic. If your neighbor (were to) have a better horse than
yours is, would you prefer your horse or his ?
Si gladium quis apud te sana mente deposueritj repetat insaniens,
reddere peccatum sit, officium non reddere. Cic. If a man in sound
mind were to deposit (to have deposited) a sword with you (and), reclaim it
(when) mad, it would be wrong to return it, right not to return it.
Si nunc me suspendam meam operam luserim, et meis inimlcls volup-
tatem creaverim. Plaut. Should I hang myself now, I should (thereby)
(have) fool(ed) my icork away, and give(n) to my enemies a charming treat.
Ut redeant veteres : Cicerdnl nemo ducentos nunc dederit nummos
nisi fulserit anulus ingens. Juv. Let the ancients return : no one would
give Cicero now-a-days two hundred two-pences unless a huge ring glittered (on
his hand).
Si is destituat, nihil satis tutum habebis. Lrv. Should he leave us in the
lurch, you will find no safety.
SI valeant homines, ars tua, Phoebe, jacet. Ov. Should men keep well,
your art, Phoebus, is naught.
Otia si tollas, periere Cupldinis arcus. Ov. (195, R. 6.)
Si verum excutias, facies non uxor amatur. Juv. If you (were to) get
' out the truth, it is the face, not the wife, that is loved.
Nulla est excusatio peccatl, si amici causa peccaveris. Cic. It is no
excuse for a sin to have sinned for the sake of a friend.
Eemarks.— 1. The Potential of the Past coincides in form with the Unreal of the
Present. (Comp. 252, R. 2.) Clear examples of definite persons are rare. Hon. Sat. I. 3, 5.
Of indefinite persons : Miraretur qui turn cerneret. Liy. (252.)
So. Erat Quinctius, si cederes, placabilis. Liv. Quinctius was, if you yielded to
him,(?\we to be) placable. (Est si cedas.)
Si luxuriae temperaret, avaritiam non timeres. Tac. if he were to control his
i; love of pleasure, you should not have feared avarice. (Si temperet, non timeas.)
2. The lively fancy of the Roman often employs the Ideal where we should expect the
Unreal. (Comp. 248, R. 2.)
Til si hie sis, aliter sentias. Ter. If you were I (Put yourself in my place), you
would think differently.
Haec si tecum patria loquatur, nonne impetrare debeat 1 Cic. If your country
^should (were to) speak thus with you, ought she not to get (what she wants) ?
In comparing Ideal and Unreal Conditionals, be careful to exclude all forms of future
'verbs, such as posse, to be able; velle, to wish, and the like.
Sometimes the conception shifts in the course of a long sentence :
SI revlviscant et tecum loquantur— quid talibus virls responderes ? Cic. If
they should come to life again, and speak with you— what answer ivould you make to such
men?
3. In Oratio Obliqua the difference between Ideal and Logical Future is necessarily
effaced, so far as the mood is concerned. (659.)
III. UNREAL CONDITIONAL SENTENCES.
599. The Unreal Conditional sentence is used of that which
jis Unfulfilled or Impossible, and is expressed by the Imperfect
i 13*
rXEEAL COXr>ITTOXlL SENTENCES.
Subjunctive for continued action — generally, in opposition to
the Present : and by the Pluperfect Subjunctive — uniformly in
opposition to the 1\
The noti ssibility comes from the irreversible character of the
Past Tense. Compare the Periphrastic Future Perfect and Imperfect.
Any action thai is decided is considered Past. (Comp. 266, R, 3.)
Protasis Apodosis.
Si id crederes, errares,
If you bettered (were believing) that, [you do not,] you would be going wrong.
Slid ere di diss is, erravisses,
If \ i i ; t ' : e : v . I t '". :: :. [yon did not ] you would have gone wrong.
Sapientia non expeteretur, si nihil efficeret. Cic. Wisdom would not
ght after, if it did no practical good.
Caederem te, nisi irascerer. Sex. I should flog you, if I were not getting
■
SI ibi te esse sclssem. ad te ipse venissem. Cic. If I had known you
TH have come to you myself.
Hectora quis ncsset. si felix Troja fuisset. Ov. Who would Tcnow (of)
Troy had I I ppt/f
Nisi ante Roma profectus esses, nunc eamcerte relinqueres. Cic. If
you had not departed from Rome before, you would certainly learn it now.
Ere nisi peperissem. Roma non oppugnaretur ; nisi fllium haberem, j
libera in libera patria mortua essem. Lrv. Had I not become a mother,
Id not be besieged ; had I not a son, I slwuld have died a free woman
free I vnd.
cmarkb. — 1. The Imperfect Subjunctive is sometimes nsed in opposition to con-
tinuance in the Past. This is necessarily the case when the Protasis is in the Imperfect,!
and the Aprdosis in the Pluperfect, except when the Imperfect denotes opposition to aj
general statement, which holds good both for Past and for Present :
lion tarn facile opes Carthaginis tantae coneidissent. nisi Sicilia classibusl
nostria pateret- Cic. The great resources of Carthage (Carthage with her great re J
sour: - I not I ) readily, if Sicily had not been open to our fleets.
SI pudorem haberes. tilt imam mihi pensionem mini remisisses. Sen. If yo<\
— yon had not. as you have notj any delicacy, you would have let me off from the last
I
Memoriam ipsam cum voce perdidissemus. si tarn in nostra potestate essej
oblivisci quam tacere. Tac. We should have lost memory itself, together with utterancA
much in our power to forget as to keep silent.
The Imperfect in both members is rai
SI Protogenes Ialysum iUum suum caeno oblitum videret magnum, credo, a<j
ciperet dolorem Cic. If Protogenes had seen thai famous lalysus of his besmeared wi
felt a mighty pang.
Perhaps this may be regarded as a form of Repraesentatio. (657, H.)
2. In Unreal Conditions, the Apodosis is sometimes expressed by the Imperfect I:
dicative. when the action is represented as interrupted (234) ; by the Pluperfect and Hi
"hen the conclusion is confidently anticipated. (246, R. 3.)
UNREAL CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 299
Labebar longius, nisi me retinuissem. Cic. (246. R. 3.)
Omnino erat supervacua doctrina. si natura sufficeret. Quint.
Peractum erat bellum, si Pompejum opprimere Erundusii potuisset Flor.
The war was (had been) finished, if he had been able to crush Pompey at Brundusium.
The Imperfect Indicative is sometimes found in the Protasis :
Ipsam tibi epistolam misissem, nisi tarn subito fratris puer proficiscebatur.
Cic. 1 should have sent you the letter itself, if my brother's servant was not starting so
suddenly.
3. The Indicative is the regular construction with verbs which signify Possibility or
Power, Obligation or Necessity — so with the Active and Passive Periphrastic — vix.
paene, scarcely, hardly, and the l!ke.
Consul esse qui potui. nisi eum vltae cursum tenuissem ? Cic. How could I have
been consul, if I had not kept that course of life ?
Antoni potuit gladios contemnere, si sic omnia dixisset. Jot. He might have
despised Antony's swords, if he had thus said all (that he did say).
Emendaturus, si licuisset, eram. Ov. I should have removed the faults, if 1 had been
free (to do it).
In bona venturus, si pater ere (R. 1,) fuit. Ov. He would have come into (my) pro-
perty, if you had permitted it.
Pons iter paene hostibus dedit (paene dedit = dabat = daturus erat.) ni unus
vir fuisset. Liv. The bridge well nigh gave a passage to the enemy, had it not been for om
man.
4. In Oratio Obliqua the Protasis is unchanged ; the Apodosis is formed by the
Periphrastic Future Infinitive, with esse and fuisse for the Active, futurum (fore) ut,
futurum fuisse ut for Passive and Supineless Verbs.
A. Dico (dixi), te, si id crederes, erraturum esse.
B. Dico (dixi), te, si id credidisses, erraturum fuisse.
A. Dico (dixi), si id crederes, fore ut decipereris.
B. Dico (dixi), si id credidisses, futurum fuisse ut decipereris.
A is very rare ; A theoretical. For the long form, E, the simple Perfect Infinitive is
found. Examples, see 6G2, R.
5. When the Apodosis of an Unreal Conditional is made to depend on a sentence
which requires the Subjunctive, the Pluperfect is turned into the Periphrastic Perfect
Subjunctive-; the Imperfect form is unchanged.
Non dubito, ] quin, si id crederes, errares,
1 do not doubt, \ that, if you believed that, you would be going wrong.
Non dubitabam, \ quin, si id credidisses, erratum s fuens,
. I did not doubt, J that, if you had believed that, you would have gone wrong.
Honestum tale est ut, vel si ignorarent id homines, esset iaudabile. Cic.
Virtue is a thing to deserve praise, even if men did not know it.
Nec dubium erat quin, si tarn pauci simul obire omnia possent, terga dattiri
hostes fuerint- Liv. There was no doubt that, if it had been possible for so small a num-
ber to have managed every thing at the same lime, the enemy would have turned their
hacks.
Die quidnam facturus fueris, si eo tempore censor fuisses ? Liv. Tell {me) what
you would have done, if you had been censor at that time ?
Adeo inopia coactus est Hannibal, ut, nisi turn fugae speciem abeundo
glj timuisset, Galliam repetiturus fuerit. Liv. Hannibal was so hard pressed by want
;!(: of provisions, that, had he not at the time feared (presenting) the appearance of flight by re
treating, he would have gone back to Gaul.
The Periphrastic Pluperfect Subjunctive occurs rarely, and then only in the Depend-
ent Interrogative,
Potui CJ46. R.l)commonly becomes potuerim, and the Periphrastic Passive with ful
become* fuerim :
300 INCOMPLETE CONDITIONAL SENTENCES.
Hand dubiumfuit quin, nisi ea mora intervenisset, castra eo diePunica capl
potuerint- Lit. There was no doubt that, had not that delay interfered, the Punic camp
could have been taken on that day.
The Passive Conditional is unchanged :
Id ille si repudiasset, dubitatis quin ei vis esset allata? Cic. If he had re-
jected that, do you doubt that force would have been brought (to bear) on him?
The active form is rarely unchanged. (Liv. II. 33.) In the absence of the periphrastic
tense use potuerim.
INCOMPLETE CONDITIONAL SENTENCES.
600. Omission of the Conditional Sign. — Occasionally the
members of a Conditional sentence are put side by side without
a Conditional sign :
An ille mihi (351) liber, cui mulier imperat? poscit, dandum estj
vocat, veniendum; ejicit, abeundum; minatur, extimescendum. CiC.
Or is he free (tell), me, to whom a woman gives orders f she asks, he must
give; she calls, he must come ; she turns out (of door), he must go ; she\
threatens, he must be frightened.
Unum cognoris, omnes noris. Teh. You know one, you know all.
Dedisses huic animo par corpus, fecisset quod optabat. Plin. Ep.|
Had you given him a body that was a match for his spirit, he would have ac-
complished what he desired.
601. Omission of the Verb of the Protasis. — When the Verbl
of the Protasis is omitted, either the precise form or the general!
idea of the verb is to be supplied from the Apodosis :
Si quisquam, Cato sapiens fuit =r SI quisquam fuit. CiC. If any orui
was wise, Cato loas. I
602. Total Omission of the Protasis. — The Protasis is ofterp
contained in a Participle or involved in the context (594, 2).
The Potential Subjunctive is sometimes mechanically exll
plained by the omission of an indefinite Protasis. See 252, E. 1
Nimio plus quam velim Volscorum ingenia sunt mobilia. Liv. Tim
dispositions of the Volscians are (too) much more unstable than I should lik\
(if I had my way, if I could manage it, or what not).
Velim sic existimes. Cic. I should like you to think so. (Utinam exist j
mes !)
Tarn felix esses quam formosissima vellem. Ov. (316). (Utinam esses j
The impossibility of definite ellipsis constitutes the Modality.
CONDITIONAL SENTENCES OF COMPARISON. 301
603. Omission of the Apodosis. — The Apodosis is omitted in
Wishes, in conformity with the vague character of the expres-
sion, which is poetical See 254 and R. 1.
O mihi praeteritos referat si Juppiter Annos. Verg. (254.)
CONDITIONAL SENTENCES OF COMPARISON.
604. The Apodosis is omitted in comparisons with ut si,
velut si, ac si, quam si, tanquam si, quasi, or simply velut and
tanquam, as if.
The verb is to be supplied from the Protasis, as is common in
correlative sentences.
The Mood is the Subjunctive.
The tenses follow the rule of sequence, rather than the ordi-
nary use of the conditional. In English, the translation implies
the unreality of the comparison.
N51I timere quasi [=quam timeas si] assem elephanto des. Quint.
Don't be afraid, as if you were giving a penny to an elephant.
Parvi prlmo ortu sic jacent tanquam [= jaceant si] omnino sine
animo sint. Cic. Babies, ichen first born, lie (there), as if they had no mind
at all.
Hie est obstandum, mllites, velut si ante Romana moenia pugnemus.
Lrv. Here (is where) we must oppose them, soldiers, as if ice were fighting
before the walls of Rome (velut obstemus, si pugnemus, as we would oppose
them, if we were to fight).
Me juvat, velut ipse in parte laboris ac periculi fuerim, ad finem belli
i Funic! pervenisse. Liv. / am delighted to have reached the end of the
Punic war, as if I had shared in the toil and danger (of it).
Suspectus tanquam ipse suas incenderit aedes. Juv. Suspected as if
he had (of having) set his own house on fire.
Tantus patres metus cepit velut si jam ad portas hostis esset. Lrv.
A great fear took hold of the senators, as if the enemy were already at their
gates.
Deleta est Ausonum gens perinde ac si interneclvo bello certasset.
i\\ Lrv. Tlie Ausonian race was blotted out, just as if it had engaged in an in-
ternecine war (war to the knife).
Remarks.— 1. Occasionally the sequence is violated out of regard to the Conditional :
Massilienses in eo honore audlmus apud Romanos esse ac si medium umbili-
Cum Graeciae incolerent. Liv. We hear that the people of Marseilles are in as high
honor with the Romans as if they inhabited the mid-navel (= the heart) of Greece.
I
rt
MH '
ESSEVS SKHTEafOEa
:he ordinary condir .comparative sentence. The
Prota- - ssed
GaUI lae:: at exploi its victoria Ad castra Rom iuioriuii pergunt. Cazs. The
Goals in their jo% ory had been fully asct :he camp of
:'■ :
---.'.. : dma :: ellc Romano tamquam non transitilris in Asiam
Romanis. Lw A -chus was as unconcerned at?: :ci ik Rome as if the, Romans
t intend to cross over into Asia Minor.
KCESSITE SEXTEXCES.
. Lcessive vt:l:t: : — are introduced —
1. By the sonditional Particles, etsl. etiamsl, tametsi.
2. By the Generic Relative, quanquani.
0. By the compound.-, quainvls, quantum vis,
1. By :ke Ver':: licet.
5. By the Final Particles, ut (lie).
1 y quum icum : .dd answering generally to the notion
atthc
EzxiSEs. — Etsl et - si . -:.-: '- if: etiamsl. t ~: tametsi. yd
cuai:ui„ ]"am - :-;am . :o what exU :: totitr : quamvls. to what extent you
choose; qnantomvis. to what amount you choose ; lice: -f:free (perhaps intrans
::" lincuc ~ -- -
606. Etsl, etiamsl, and tametsi, take the Indicative or Sub-
y;:. :::"e. ; : :-ord:ng t<; the general principles vrhich regulate the
use >fai, if. The Indicative is more common, especially with
e:s: and etiamsl :
D§ ruturls rebus etsl semper difficile est dicere. tamen interdum con-
jectorapossia accidere. Cic Affl< '. : :: r.dt to teU abou
tome near it o y guessing.
Banrilcac ets: flagrabat bellandi cupiditate. tamen pad serviendurr
pu: = v::. Net -.-"~~" _." J eqfwart
-' ' U jfitili ~ ~ ~ ~ serve to work few
Incps Die etiamsl referre gratiam non potest, habere certe potest
i s[ >ken : : . if he : mot return a favor, can at lea
fed
Me vera pro gratia loqm, etsl me urn ingenium non moneret. necessi
tas ccgit. Liv. Even ifm% m did not bid. rue. compels m
~ ~ - 'of the smooth.
? z y. .,:.::- — S: ' -
7. Quanquam. to what extent soever, falls under the head c
generic re] :A. in the best authors, is con
Btrned with the Indicative:
CONCESSIVE SENTENCES. 303
Medici quanquam intellegunt saepe, tamen nunquam aegris dicunt,
illo morbo eos esse morituros. Cic. Although physicians often know,
nevertheless they never tell their patients that they will die of that disease.
Remarks. — 1. The Potential Subjunctive is sometimes found with quanquam :
Quanquam exercitum qui in Volscis erat mallet, nihil recusavit. Lit. Although
he might well have preferred the army which was in the Volscian country, nevertheless he
made no objection.
2. Quanquam is often used at the beginning of sentences, in the same way as the
English, And yet, Although, However, in order to limit the whole preceding sentence ; less
frequently etsi, tametsi.
3. The Indicative, with etsi and quanquam, is, of course, liable to attraction into
the Subjunctive in Oratio Obllqua. (509.)
608. Quamvls follows the analogy of volo, / will, with which
it is compounded, and takes the Subjunctive. Quantiimvls and
quamlibet (as conjunctions) belong to poetry and silver prose.
Quamvls sint sub aqua, sub aqua maledicere tentant. Ov. Although
they be tinder the water, under the water they try to revile.
Quamvis ille niger, quamvis tu candidus esses. Verg. Although he
teas black, although you were fair.
Vitia mentis, quantum vis exigua sint, in majus excedunt. Sex,
Mental ailments ( = passions), no matter how slight they be, go on increasing.
\" Remarks. — 1. In later Latin, quamvls and quanquam change parts :
ilrt Quamvis ingenio non valet, arte valet. Ov. Although he does not tell by genius, he
s tell by art.
In Tacitus, for instance, quanquam regularly has the Subjunctive.
2. The Verb in quamvls is sometimes inflected :
Quam velit sit potens, nunquam impetravisset. Cic. No matter how powerful
on :she may be, she would never have obtained it.
609. Licet retains its verbal nature, and, according to the
^Sequence of Tenses, takes only the Present and Perfect Sub-
junctive :
Licet irrideat si qui vult. Cic. Let any one laugh who will.
Ardeat ipsa licet, tormentis gaudet amantis. Juv. Though she herself
is aglow, she rejoices in the tortures of her lover.
Sim licet extremum, sicut sum, missus in orbem. Ov. Although 1 be
sent, as I have been, to the end of the world.
Remarks.— 1. Exceptions are extremely rare : Juv. xiii. 56.
2. Quamvis is sometimes combined with licet.
610. Ut and ne are also used concessively :
Ut desint vires, tamen est laudanda voluntas. Ov. Granted that
rength be lacking, nevertheless you must praise (my) good will.
304 RELATIVE SENTENCES.
Ne sit summum malum dolor, malum certe est. CiC. Granted that
pain be not the chief evil, an evil it certainly is.
Remark.— Ut noil can be used on the principle of the Specific Negative :
Hie dies ultimus est ; ut non sit, prope ab ultimo. Sen. This is your last day ;
granted that it be not, it is near the last.
On ita— ut, see 255 ; on ut— ita, see 484, 2.
611. Concessive sentence represented ~by a Participle or Pre-
dicative Attribute. — The Concessive sentence may be represented
by a Participle or Predicative Attribute.
Risus interdum ita repente erumpit, ut eum cupientes tenere nequea
mus. Cic. Laughter between whiles (occasionally) breaks out so suddenly that
we cannot keep it down, although we desire to do so*
Multorum te ocull et aures non sentientem custodient. Cic. (Of].
many (the) eyes and ears will keep guard over you, though you perceive it not
(without your perceiving it).
Quis Aristidem n5n mortuum diligit. Cic. Who does not love Aristides
(though) dead?
Remark.— Later writers combine etsi, quanquam, or quamvis, with the Participle
Caesarem milites quamvis recusantem ultro in Africam sunt secuti- Suet
The soldiers followed Caesar into Africa of their own motion, althovgh he declined it.
With Adjectives quamvis is used even in the best writers :
Saepe bibi sticos quamvis in Vitus amaros. Ov. / have often drunk bitter potions
although against my will.
Relative Sentences.
612. The Latin language uses the relative construction fa:
more than the English : so in the beginning of sentences, anc
in combination with Conjunctions and other Relatives.
Remarks.— 1. The awkwardness, or impossibility, of a literal translation, may gene]
rally be relieved by the substitution of a demonstrative with an appropriate conjunctiorlj
or the employment of an abstract noun :
Quae quum ita sint- Now since these things are so (Ciceronian formula).
Futtira modo exspectant ; quae quia certa esse non possunt, conficiuntur ej
angore et metti. Cic. They only look forward to the future; and because that cannot l\
certain, they wear themselves out with distress and fear.
Epiciiru3 non satis polltus ils artibus quas qui tenent, eruditl appellantuil
Cic. Epicurus is not sufficiently polisJied by those accomplishments, from the possession oi
which, people are called cultivated.
Notice especially quod in combination with si, ubi, in which quod means and as fd
that, and is sometimes translated by and, but, therefore, sometimes not at all.
2. The Relative is the fertile source of many of the introductory particles of the conj
pound sentence, and is therefore put last on account of the multiplicity of its uses.
613. Relative sentences are introduced by the Relative Prcl
RELATIVE SENTENCES. 305
nouns in all their forms: Adjective, Substantive, and Adverbial.
(See Tables.)
Remarks. — 1. The relative adverbs of Place, and their correlatives, may be used
instead of a preposition with a relative. Unde, whence, is frequently used of persons,
the others less frequently : ibi = in eo, &c. ; ubi = in quo, &c. ; inde = ex 60, &c ;
unde = ex quo, &c. ; eo = in eum, &c. ; quo — in quern, &c. :
Potest fieri ut is, unde te audisse dicis, iratus dixerit. Cic. It may be that Tie,
' from whom you say you heard (it), said it in anger.
2. The relative is not to be confounded with the dependent interrogative sentence.
(469? R. 3.)
Quae probat populus ego nescio. Sen. The things that the people approved, I do
■ not know (quid probet. what it is the people approves).
Et quid ego te velim, et tu quod quaeris, scies. Ter. You shall know both what
(it is) I want of you, and what (the thing which) you are asking ( = the answer to your
question).
m 614. Position of Relatives. — The Eelative and Relative forms
are put at the beginning of sentences and clauses. The Prepo-
sition, however, generally, though not invariably, precedes its
relative. (44.)
615. Antecedent. — The word to which the Eelative refers is
called the Antecedent, because it precedes in thought even
when it does not in expression.
i
Remark.— The close connection between Relative and Antecedent is shown by the
| frequent use of one preposition in common. (416.)
CONCOED.
616. The Eelative agrees with its Antecedent in Gender,
Number, and Person:
J\
to Is minimo eget mortalis, qui minimum cupit. Syrus. (293.)
Uxor contenta est quae bona estuno viro. Platjt. (373, R. 1.)
Malum est consilium quod mutari ncn potest. Syrus. Bad is the
•plan that cannot (let itself) be changed.
Hoc illis narro qui me non intelligunt. Phaedbus. I tell this tale for
iM'hose who understand me not.
Ego qui te confirmo, ipse me non possum. Cic. Z", who reassure you,
annot reoissure myself.
Enjf
Remarks.— 1. The Relative agrees with the Person of the true Antecedent, even
hen a predicate intervenes :
Tu es is, qui mead caelum extulisti. Cic. You are he that has extolled me to the
Ues.
So occasionally in English: Acts xxi. 38.
306 RELATIVE SENTENCES.
2. When the Relative refers to a sentence, id quod, that which, is commonly used
(parenthetically) :
SI a vobis deserar, (id quod non spero,) tamen animo non deficiam. Cic. If 1
should be deserted by you, {which 1 do not expect,) nevertheless I should not become faint-
hearted.
3. The gender and number of the Relative may be determined :
I. By the sense, and not by the form.
II. By the predicate or the apposition, and not by the antecedent :
Examples : I. Sex mill a qui Pydnam perfugerant. Lrv. Six thousand,
who had fled to Pydna.
Equitatum omnem praemittit, qui videant. Lit. He sent all the cavalry
ahead, who should see (that they might see, to see).
II. Thebae, quod caput BoeStiae est. Liv. Thebes, which is the capital
of Boeotia.
Flumen Scaldis, quod influit in Mosam. Caes. The river Scheldt, whicl
empties into the Maas.
Justa gloria, qui est fructus virtutis. Cic. Real glory, which is thefrui,
of virtue.
4. The apposition may be incorporated into the relative :
Testarum suffragils quod ill! ostracismum vocant. Nep. By potsherd votes -
(a thing-) which they call " ostracism,"
5. When the Relative refers to the combined antecedents of different gender, th]
strongest gender is preferred, according to 282 :
Grandes natii matres et parvuli llberi, quorum utrorumque aetas misericoil
diam nostram requirit. Crc. Aged matrons and infant children, whose age on eitlum
hand demands our compassion.
Otium atque divitiae, quae prima mortales putant- Sall. Leisure and monei
which mortals reckon as the prime things.
Or, the nearest gender may be preferred :
Eae fruges atque fructus quos terra gignit. Cic. Those fruits of field and tre^
which earth bears.
6. Combined Persons follow the rule, 283.
617. Repetition of the Antecedent. — The Antecedent of til
Eelative is quite often repeated in the Kelatiye clause, with tlj
Eelative as its attributive :
Caesar intellexit diem instare, quo die frumentum militibus met:
oporteret. Caes. Caesar saw that the day was at hand, on which {day I
behooved to measure) corn (was to be measured out) to the soldiers.
618. Incorporation of the Antecedent. — The Antecedent ai|
the Adjective, or the apposition of the Antecedent, are often if
corporated into the Relative clause :
In quern primum egress! sunt locum Troja vocatur. Liv. The fig
place they landed at was called Troy.
RELATIVE SENTENCES. 307
Amanus Syriam a Cilicia dividit, qui mons erat hostium plenus.
Cic. Syria is divided from Cilicia by Amanus, a mountain which teas full
rf enemies.
Themistocles, de servis suis quern habuit fidelissimum, ad Xerxem
inisit. Nep. Themistocles sent the most faithful slave he had to Xerxes.
Quam quisque norit artem, in hac se exerceat. Cic. What trade each
nan understands, in that let him practise himself ( = every man to his
I rade).
> Remark.— Especially to be noted are the phrases : quae tua prudentia est, which
such) is your prudence • qua prudentia es ( = tu es ea prudentia), of which (such)
"prudence are you ( = pro tua prudentia, in accordance with your prudence). See 628.
619. Attraction of the Relative. — The Accusative of the Eel-
/tive is occasionally attracted into the Ablative of the Antece-
.ent, rarely into any other case :
j Hoc confirmamus illd augurio quo diximus. Cic. We confirm this by
\e augury which toe mentioned.
Remarks. — 1. This attraction takes place chiefly when the verb of the relative clause
mst be supplied from the principal sentence :
Quibus sauciis poterat secum ductis ad urbem pergit. Liv. Having taken with
\m all the wounded he could, he proceeded to the city.
1 ' 2. Inverted Attraction.— So-called Inverted Attraction is found only in poetry, and then
J . the Accusative case, which may be considered as an object of thought or feeling:
ic0ri Urbem quam statuo, vestra est- Verg. (As for) the city which lam rearing, (it) is
mfrurs.
j Istum quern quaeris, ego sum. Ter. (As for) that man whom you are looking for, 1
!0,lt'V he. (" He that hath ears to hear, let him hear.'1)
l/fjV:
lit
620. Correlative Use of the Relative. — The usual Correlative
f qui is is, more rarely hie, ille :
Is minimo eget mortalis, qui minimum cupit. Syrtts. (293.)
Hie sapiens, de quo loquor. Cic. (290, 3.)
Ilia dies veniet, mea qua lugubria ponam. Ov. (292, 4.)
621. Omission of the Correlative. — The Correlative, is, is
In omitted, especially when it would stand in the same case
\ the Eelative :
Postume, non bene olet, qui bene semper olet. Mart. Postumus, (he)
xells not sweet, who always smells sweet.
Quern arma non fregerant vitia vicerunt. Curt. (Him) whom arms had
i crushed did vices overcome.
Quern di diligunt adulescens moritur. Plaut. (He) whom the gods love
I es young.
308 RELATIVE SENTENCES.
Xerxes praemium proposuit qui [ = el qui ] invenisset novam vol
uptatem. Cic. Xerxes offered a reward to him who should invent a neu
pleasure.
Miseranda vita qui [ — eorum qui ] se metui quam amari malunt
Nep. Pitiable is the life of those who would prefer being feared to being loved.
Discite sanari per quern [ = per eum, per quern ] didicistis amare
Oy. (403.)
622. Position of the Correlative clause. — The Eelative claus*
often precedes the Correlative ; incorporation is common :
Male res se habet quum quod virtute effici debet id tentatur pecunis
Cic. It is a bad state of affairs when what ought to be accomplished by wortl\
is attempted by money.
Quod vides accidere pueris hoc nobis quoque majusculis pueris eveni
Sen. What you see befalls children (this) happens to us alsoy children
a larger growth.
Quae quia non liceat ndn facit, ilia facit. Ov. (541.)
Quam quisque norit artem, in hac se exerceat. (618.)
The Correlative omitted:
Quod non dedit fortuna, non eripit. Sen. What fortune has not gi
(does not give), she does not take away.
Per quas nos petitis saepe fugatis opes. Ov. The means you take 111
win us, often scare us off.
623. Indefinite Antecedent. — The Indefinite Antecedent
generally omitted :
Elige cui dicas : tii mini sola places. Ov. Clwose some one to wh\
you may say : You alone please me.
Remark.— Such sentences are sometimes hardly to be distinguished from
Interrogative :
Conon non quaes! vit ubi ipse tiito viveret. Nep., (297), might be either.
TENSES IN RELATIVE SENTENCES.
624. Future and Future Perfect. — The Future and Putil
Perfect are used with greater exactness than in current Engl:[
(234, 236) :
Sit liber, dominus qui volet esse meus. Mart. He must be free w
wishes (shall wish) to be my master.
Qui prior strinxerit ferrum, ejus victoria erit. Lrv. (236, R. 2.)
RELATIVE SENTENCES. 309
625. Iterative Action. — Relative sentences follow the laws
laid down for Iterative action (568, 569 :)
I. Contemporaneous action :
Ore trahit quodcumque potest, atque addit acervo. Hon. Drags
with its mouth whatever it can, and adds to the treasure (heap).
Quacumque incedebat agmen, legatl occurrebant. Lrv. In whatever
^■direction the column advanced, ambassadors came to meet them.
II. Prior action :
Terra nunquam sine usura reddit, quod accepit. Cic. The earth never
""'\ returns without interest what it has received (receives).
Quod non dedit fortuna, non eripit. Sen. (622.)
1 N5n cenat quoties nemo vocavit eum. Mart. He does not dine as
rften as (when) no one has invited (invites) him.
Haerebant in memoria quaecumque audierat et viderat [Themistocles].
Sep. (569.)
Sequentur te quocumque perveneris vitia. Sen. Vices will follow you
chithersoever you go.
Qui timere desierint, odisse incipient. Tag. (569.)
|'jl Remark.— According to 569, the Subjunctive is used
1.) In Oratio Obliqua (Total or Partial) ;
2.) By Attraction of Mood (Complementary Clauses) :
Quis eum diligat quern metuat 1 Cic. Who could love him whom he fears ?
Mos est Athenls laudari in contione eos qui sint in praeliis interfecti. Cic.
It is the custom at Athens that a panegyric be pronounced on those who have been killed in
battle. (Laudantur, qui interfecti sunt.)
3,) In the Ideal Second Person :
Bonus segnior fit ubi neglegas. Sall. (568.)
4.) On the general principle of oblique sense, chiefly in later historians :
Qui ununi ejus ordinis offendisset omnes adversos habebat Lrv. (569.)
MOODS IN RELATIVE SENTENCES.
626. The Eelative clause, as such — that is, as the representa-
ive of an adjective — takes the Indicative mood:
Uxor quae bona est, A wife who is good (a good wife).
., RemARK.— The Relative in this use often serves as a circumlocution for a Substantive,
. I rith this difference : that the Substantive expresses a permanent relation ; the Relative
ause. a transient relation : ii qui docent = those who teach = the teachers (inasmuch as
ley are exercising the functions).
627. The Explanatory Relative qui, with the Indicative,
~ is enim, for he,) often approaches quod, in that.
310 RELATIVE SENTENCES.
Habeo senectuti magnam gratiam, quae mihi sermonis aviditatem
auxit. Cic. / am wry thankful to old age, which (= it, in that it) has in-
creased me (= in me) the appetite for talk.
Remark.— Qui with the Subjunctive gives a ground = cum is (587); qui with the
Indicative, a fact / and in many passages the causal sense seems to be inevitable :
Erraverim fortasse qui me esse aliquem putavi. Plin. Ep. 7 may have erred i
thinking myself to be somebody.
Improba [*• *-i Ardea] quae nostros cogis abesse viros. Ov. Naughty Ardea, tha
forcest (for forcing) our husbands to be away.
In some authors this causal sense is heightened by ut, utpote, as • quippe, namely
but with these particles the Subjunctive is far more common.
628. Qui = si quis, if any, has the Indicative when the Condij
tional is logical. So in Generic Sentences. (246, li. 4.)
Terra nunquam sine usura reddit, quod accepit. Cic. (Si quid accej
pit.) (625.)
Qui mori didicit, servire dedidicit. Sen. (424.)
Remark.— On the Relative with the Subjunctive in Conditional Sentences, see 594.
629. The Subjunctive is employed in Kelative clauses whel
it would be used in a simple sentence.
Potential: Habeo quae velim. Cic. I ham what I should like.
Optative ; Quod faustum sit, regem create. Liv. Blessing be on yot^
choice, make ye a king.
n
WVfi
Remark. — Especially to be noted is the Subjunctive in Restrictive phrases. This Re
tive often takes quidem, sometimes modo. Such phrases are quod sciam = quanti
scio, for all I know ; quod meminerim, so far as memory serves me.
Omnium oratorum quos quidem cognoverim aciitissimum judico SertoriulJ'^'
Cic. Of all orators, so far as I know them, I consider Sertorius the most acute.
Nullum ornatum qui modo non obsciiret subtrahendumputo. Quint. IthW
no ornament is to be tvithdrawn, provided thai it do not cause obscurity.
Sometimes qui quidem is found with the Indicative.
630. The Subjunctive is used in Relative clauses which fo
a part of the utterance or the view of another than the n|
rator, or of the narrator himself when indirectly quoted. (5
E.) So especially in Oratio Obliqua and Final Sentences :
Recte Graeci praecipiunt, non temptanda quae effici non possl
Quint. Right are the Greeks in teaching, that those things are not to bef
tempted, which cannot be accomplished.
Apud Hypanim fluvium Aristoteles ait, bestiolas quasdam nasci qU
unum diem vivant. Cic. (653.) |j
Paetus omnes libros quos frater suus rellquisset mihi donavit. Jc.
(This is Paetus' statement ; otherwise ; quos frater ejus (521) reliquerjj- i
RELATIVE SE^TE^CES. 311
Xerxes praemium proposuit qui [= ei qui] invenisset novam volup-
tatem. Cic. (621.)
Multi suam vitam neglexerunt ut eos qui his cariores quam ipsi sibi
essent liberarent. Cic. Many have neglected their own lives, that they might
free those who were dearer to them, than tliey were to themselves.
Remarks. — Even in Oratio Obliqua the Indicative is retained :
1. In explanations of the narrator :
Nuntiatur Afranio magnos commeatus qui iter habebant ad Caesarem ad
'flumen constitisse. Caes. It is (was) announced to Afranius that large supplies of pro-
visions (which were on their way to Caesar) had halted at the river.
In the historians this sometimes occurs where the Relative clause is an integral part
of the sentence, especially in the Imperfect and Pluperfect ; partly for clearness, partly
for liveliness. For shifting Indicative and Subjunctive, see Liv. xxvi. 1.
2. In mere circumlocutions :
: Quis neget haec omnia quae videmus deorum potestate administrari ? Cic.
Who would deny that this whole visible world is managed by the power of the godsl
Provideiidum est ne ea quae dicuntur ab eo qui dicit dissentiant. Quint. We
must see to it that the speech be not out of keeping with the speaker*
631. Belatiye sentences which depend on Infinitives and
m Subjunctives, and form an integral part of the thought, are put
n the Subjunctive (Attraction of Mood) :
Pigri est ingenii contentum esse iis quae sint ab aliis inventa. Quint.
TX is the mark of a slow genius to be content with what has been found out by
others.
Quis eum diligat quem metuat aut eum a quo se metui putet ? Cic.
itwy?}io could love a man 'whom he fears, or by whom he deems himself feared f
Nam quod emas possis jure vocare tuum. Mart. For what you buyy
you may rightly call your own.
Ilk Ab alio exspectes alteri quod feceris. Sykus. (306.)
i In virtute sunt multi ascensus, ut is gloria maxime excellat, qui vir-
dte plurimum praestet. Crc. In virtue there are many degrees, so that he
vcels most in glory , who has the greatest eminence in virtue.
Si solos eos diceres miseros quibus moriendum esset, neminem eorum
ui viverent exciperes ; moriendum enim est omnibus. Cic. If you
ilUed only those wretched who had (have) to die, you would except none who
ved (live) ; for all have to die.
Remarks.— The Indicative is used :
1. In mere circumlocutions; so, often in Consecutive Sentences:
Necesse est facere siimptum qui quaerit lucrum. Plaut. (535.)
Efficitur ab oratore, ut ii qui audiunt ita amciantur ut orator velit Cic It is
n 'ought about by the orator that tJwse who hear him (= his auditors) are affected as he
vshes (them to be).
-j i 2. Of individual facts :
'_ L Et quod vides perisse perditum diicas. Cat. And what you see (definite thing,
W JJfinite person) is lost for aye, for aye deem lost. (Quod videas, any body, any thing.)
312 RELATIVE SEKTEKCES.
632. Relative Sentences of Design. — Relative sentences are
put in the Subjunctive (of Design) when qui == ut is:
Sunt multi qui aliis eripiunt quod aliis largiantur. Cic. Many are
they who snatch from some to lavish on others.
Senex serit arbores, quae alter! seculo prosint. Cic. (545.)
Semper habe Fyladen, qui consoletur Oresten. Ov. (545.)
Artaxerxes Themistocli Magnesiam urbem donaverat, quae ei panenl
praeberet. Nep. (545.)
Remark.— In many combinations this Relative leans to the Characteristic, and th||
conception seems Potential rather than Optative.
633. Relative Sentences of Tendency. — Optative Relative senl
tences are put in the Subjunctive (of Tendency) when qui = utif
The notion is generally that of Character and Adaptation :
Damna nulla tanta sunt quae non viri fortes ferenda arbitrentur. Ci I
There are no losses so great, that brave men should not think them endurab\
(great enough to keep brave men from thinking them endurable).
Ille ego sum cujus laniet furiosa capillos. Ov. I am the man who^
hair she tears in her seasons of frenzy.
Nil prodest quod non laedere possit idem. Ov. (296.)
Quern mea Calliope laeserit unus ego. Ov. I am the only one that fill
Calliope ( = my Muse) has hurt.
Major sum quam cui possit Fortuna nocere. Ov. (313.)
Digna fuit ilia natura quae meliora vellet. Quint. (556, R. 2.)
634. This construction of the Characteristic Relative
especially common after such general expressions as
Est qui, sunt qui, there is, there are some who ; nemo est qui, there\
none to ; nihil est quod, there is nothing ; habeo quod, 1 have to; repe
untur qui, persons are found who (to) . . . ; quis est qui ? who is th
who (to) . . . . ? est cur, there is reason for, &c. So, also, fj
cum, there was a time when.
Sunt qui discessum animi a corpore putent esse mortem. Cic. Th
are some who (to) think that death is the departure of the soul from the body
Fuit qui suaderet appellationem mensis August! in Septembr
transferendam. Suet. There was a man who urged ( = to urge) that
name of the month (of) August should be transferred to September.
Multi fuerunt qui tranquillitatem expetentes a negotiis publicisjpj
removerint. Cic. There have been many who, in the search for quiet, 7j]
withdrawn themselves from public engagements.
Post mortem in morte nihil est quod metuam mali. Plaut. A
death there is no ill in death for me to dread.
■ >
RELATIVE SENTENCES. 313
Nec mea qui digitis lumina condat erit. Ov. And there will he no
one to close mine eyes with his fingers,
Miserrimus est qui cum esse cupit quod edat non habet. Plaut.
He is a poor wretch who, when he wants to eat, has not any thing to eat.
Non habet quid edat would mean : does not lenow what to eat.
Non est quod paupertas n5s a philosophia revocet ne egestas quidem.
1 Sen. Tliere is nothing to make narrow circumstances recall us from phil-
osophy—not even ( = or even) want.
Remarks.— 1. The Indicative may be used in the statements of definite facts, and not
of general characteristics :
Multl sunt qui eripiant, Multl sunt qui eripiunt.
There are many to snatch away. Many are they who snatch away.
. Of course this happens only after affirmative sentences. The poets use the Indicative
more freely than prose writers :
Sunt-qui ( = quldam) quod sentiunt non audent dicere. Cic. Some dare not say
what they think.
Sunt-quibus ingrate timida indulgentia servit. Ov. To some trembling in-
dulgence plays the slave all thanklessly.
Est-ubi profecto damnum praestat facere quam lucrum. Plaut. Sometimes, in
point of fact, His better to lose than gain.
2. When a definite predicate is negatived, the Indicative may stand on account of the
definite statement, the Subjunctive on account of the negative :
a. Nihil bonum est quod non eum qui id possideat meliorem facit ; or,
b. Nihil bonum est quod non eum qui id possideat meliorem faciat.
a. Nothing that does not make its owner better is good.
b. There is nothing good that does not make its owner better.
635. Negative of Qui in Sentences of Character. — Qui non,
sometimes quae non, quod non, &g.} are represented after nega-
tive clauses by quln :
Sunt certa vitia quae nemo est quln eflfugere cupiat. Cic. There are
certain faults which there is no one but ( = everybody) desires to escape.
Nil tarn difficile est quin quaerend5 investigari possiet ( = possit).
Teh. (556.)
But as quin = ut ndn, the demonstrative may be expressed :
Non cum quoquam arma contuli quin is mihi succubuerit. Nep. lhave
'■ never measured swords with any one that he has not (but he has) succumbed
to me.
Fur other uses of quin, see 551.
636. Relative in a Causal Sense. — When qui = cum is, as he,
1 the Subjunctive is employed.
zil^z:~z sizxtizsztes.
The particles ut, utpote. qulppe, as, are often used in conj unction n
tzz E .'. ■ • .--
~C?-*-vzs foi: mirinc-a virilaotia cu: suo tote consnlatii sonnum :::::
viderit. C: inius has shown martc fulness, ?\
= z-.kri ~:nk : •: : ~z :;T. \V zz^z^zz
O fortunate adnlescens, quitaae virUUIs Homeram praec5nem inve-
neris :; Zueky youth! to liam found a met = zrunipeter) of
Major gloria Scipicnis. Quincti recentior ut qui e □ anno triumphasset.
1~ Sfegpufo glory was greater. # was f is was to be ex-
pected in) a man :: inasmuch is he) I -ur.
Plat: a D::-ys:c tyra.oo: crodeliter viclatos es: qulppe ^nemve-
nundar: jus sis set _:z? p~.r; z. ; -''--"- "'.':■: "■:. Vy tut tyn. d
Z : :;. :. ■',-:" . -\c: ~z " : ;-.": z" ". : : Z" Z: z \z .
637. Edat w ia Concur Adversative zV use — Qui is
sometime as equixalent to cam is in z Concessive :
E": col le-ri:er Graeols IzzeraZ attigissem.. tamen cum venissem '
Atheoa.* crmpl-ores dies :':: coonocraros som. Czz J."'7:: "
c '"."-."" ': - '.':'.:'.: ? -:.'-. ■::. :7-;Vz. : : :; z" 'Z z Airmen*, I *t yec.
:' ■ :' i: z;
638 .- - t Rekd i ' Z - Hi z — The Ac z:z ~ ~z
Relative, with the I^zz:::~t. may be used in Dratifl Ob&qaa ^vhenl
:z\r Et. :^ :; :- res: .Ted :z ^jrdinating ~ z_; unctionl
. 1 zz Z em; zs::z ::t- :
fare to our own.
icoemcue oestrum muudl esse partem. ei>
;z ccrumuuem utilitatem u:s:rs.e c.:.-.^zlrZ
k that every one of us is a pa .-: />zH
enee of this is - z prefer the
ils: ::ot~Ot: =eo:r:::e= '-"i:Z :Z^ r^Ziu-r ;:::Z.Z= coda BOB v.
, etc: quia trneldi t f : aia tnundarent -^causefhey
:_: Z :-r: "oi=Mrii^ =
339.1 i - --'_"" - : Sentences, — RelatiYe Sentenc
;tions :nly whe
they are actually coordii.
it the second Eek L stand in the
the jmmonly omitted.
COMPARE TI YE S E WTM NC E S. 315
When it would stand in a different case, the Demonstrative is
often substituted; or, if the case be the Nominative or Accusa-
tive, the Relative may be omitted altogether :
Dumnorix qui principatum obtinebat cuique plebs favebat,
Dumnorix, who held the chieftaincy, and whom the common,-, favored;
Dumnorix qui principatum obtinebat ac plebi acceptu3 erat.
Dumnorix, who held the chieftaincy , and ''who; was acceptable to the cornrno i .
Dumnorix qui principatum obtinebat eique plebs favebat.
Dumnorix, who held the chieftaincy, and whom the common? favored ;
Dumnorix qui principatum obtinebat et plebs diligebat,
Dumnorix, who held the chieftaincy, and (whom; the commons loxed ;
Dumnorix quern plebs diligebat et principatum obtinebat,
Dumnorix, whom the commons loved, and (who; held the chieftaincy.
Ke3Iark. — The Relative is not combined with adversative or illative conjunction -
who, who therefore), except at the beginning of a sentence, when it represents or antici-
pates a demonstrative. (622.)
Qui fortis est fidens est. qui autem fidens est i3 non extiniescit. Cic. He who
I is brave is confident, but he who is confident is not afraid.
Sed qui, qui tamen. can be used in antithesis to adjectives.
Sophron iniinorum quidem scriptor sed quern Plato probavit. Qcint
a writer of mimes, 'tis trv.e, but (one; that Plato approved.
640. Relative Sentence represented by a Participle. — The
Eelative sentence is sometimes represented by a Participle, but
generally the Participle expresses a closer connection than the
mere explanatory Eelative :
Omnes aliud agentes, aliud simulantes perfidi sunt. Cic. All who are
-driving at one Hang and 'pretending another are treacherous.
Pisistratus Homeri libr5s confuses antea sic disposuisse dicitur ut
nunc habemus. Cic. Pisistratus is said to have arranged the looks of Homer,
which were (whereas they were) in confusion before, as ice have them now.
•;|i Comparative Sentences.
641. A peculiar phase of the Eelative sentence is the Com-
parative, which is introduced in English by as or than, in La iin
ij a great variety of relative forms :
I. By correlatives ;
II. By atque or ac ;
III. By quam.
l 642. Moods in Comparative Sentences. — The mood of the
dependent clause is the Indicative, unless the Subjunctive is
f:.:
[ ;:
EXTJEXCES,
le laws of oblique relation, or by the conditional!
cic
pendent cl
a borrow i -; rrb from th-j
Irz
es: qnam scientia. Cic. (311.)
L:--us. :: (296, R 1.)
644. When the dependent clause (or standard of comparison |
borr :~ its verb from the leading clause, the dependent elans
i: seated as a part : the leading clause; and if the f:;
leading clause stands in the Ac msative with the InSnitiTe, tbj
second or dependent clause must have the Ace likewise
Zr: C-I;
: : :
tizam lir-r-s^r. l::::ll:.::e- esse :;;ar. Grae:a~ l:
fc^jf Zfo JEatiii language i* richer than the Greek.
Jaesarem non eadem de republica sentire quae me sc:
I Gaius Caesar has not the same mews tcuh regard to ike st J
L CORRELATIVE COMPARATIVE SENTENCES
645. Correlate Sentences : son are introdr
; : ::-_:.-.-tS :
cue:.
cu=u:us.
qualis,
cul
'2. Ai~r:ii~ : ;rr-rl: r>r5 :
:aur.
:au::r ere
tcties
1 e_Ul IL1U
::=l. si:
:~.euu :v. :. err.
qnam.
:-;a.n:::ere
cu:u§5,
i u ~ rr. ill JL.
u: = u:l =::uu
(so) <k many
(so) as great
r...: \
flu same
IK.
(so) a* much]
(SO) 0# 77ifl«& I
a? for*/?
qnemadmodmn, £ ** (*«) = <»•
: v : rr. : c : .
Qnot homines, tot sentantLae, fas) many men, (so) many minds. Pp.
Frnmentam tanti fait qnanU iste aestimaviu Cic. Cbra was wor?\
much as he valued iL
COAIPARATT
Qualem inveni talem reliqui. Front. r I J
(him i.
Cimon incidit in eandem invidiam quani pater sons. ~
Nihil tarn populare quam bonitas. C
Undness.
Sic de ambiticne quomodo d§ arnica queruntur
of ambition as they do of
Tamdiu requiesco quamdiu ad te scribo. C: ; I rest
7 to you.
Reitakk8.— 1. On other form- with idem see -206.
8. TTt quisque with the Snpe .ore come. :io quisq~7
Comparative, and - .
Ut quisque sibi plurimum coniidit- ita maxime exceilit. C r mm a man
Obscurior quo quisque deterior.
One member often her:
Optimum quidque rarissimum est = Ut quidque rar: =
3. Ut —ita is of ten used - ] -
4. Ut and pro eo ut are fre [oently used a - - - fmras, ina*-
Pro eo ut temporum difficultas tulit
ut turn res erant : ut temporibus ill: 5
furiosus. stark
Vir ut inter Aetolos facundus Liv
Ut sunt humana. nihil est perpetuum datum. Plaut rjoth-
I
5. On quam. quantus. and the Superi - -511.
e in this connection quam qui
Tarn sum amicus reipiiblicae quam qui maxim!
frit - ? he who U ;
II. COMPARATIVE SENTENCES WITH atque
646. Adjectives and Adyerbs kenesfi and Unlikeness
may take atque or ac :
Virtus eademin homine ac dec. Cic.
god.
Date operam ne simili fortuna utamur atque antea usi sumus. Tes.
Do your end
Dissimulatio est quum alia dicuntur ac sentias. [ :;
other thin * are said tl ' a aething 3 s
what you mean).
Similiter facis ac si me roges cur te du5btis contaear ocuEs el
altera. Cic. Tou why lam
:ith tico t
318 COMPARATIVE SENTENCES.
Non dixi secus (aliter) ac sentiebam. Cic. I did not speak otherwise
than I 'thought.
Remarks.— 1. The expression is commonly explained by an ellipsis :
Aliter dixi at que [aliter] sentiebam, / spoke one way and yet I was thinking
(mother way.
So we find :
Timeo ne aliud credas atque aliud nunties. Ter. I fear that you believe one thing
and tell another.
Et and -que are occasionally used in the same way.*
2. Alius, aliter, secus, seldom have quam : non alius and other negative combina-
tions seldom have atque, commonly quam or nisi. (592, R. 2.)
Philosophia quid est aliud ( = nihil est aliud) nisi donum deorum ? Cic.
Philosophy — what else is it but the gift of the gods ?
Non aliter has either quam or atque.
III. COMPARATIVE SENTENCES WITH quam.
647. Comparative Sentences with quam follow the compara-
tive degree or comparative expressions.
The Verb of the dependent clause is commonly to be supplied
from the leading clause, according to 643.
In Comparative Sentences quam takes the same case after it
as before it :
Melior tutiorque est certa pax quam sperata victoria. Liv. (292, R. 1.)
Potius amicum quam dictum perdidl. Quint. / preferred to lose my
'friend rather than my joke.
Exlstimes velim neminem culquam cariorem unquam fuisse quam te
mihi. Cic. (546, R. 3.)
Remarks.— 1. When the second member is a subject, and the first member an oblique
case, the second member ww^ be put in the Nominative, with the proper form of thej
verb esse, unless the oblique case be an Accusative :
Vicinus tuus equum meliorem habet quam tuns est. die. (598.)
Haec verba sunt Varronis, hominis doctioris quam fuit Claudius, Gell.
Them words are (the words) of Varro, a person of greater learning than Claudius (was).
Ego hominem callidiorem vidi neminem quam Phormionem Ter. / have
eeen. no shrewder man than Phorrnio ( = quam Phormio est).
2. On quam pro, see quam qui, 313. On the double comparative, 314.
3. Atque for quam after a comparative is poetical.
4. When two clauses are compared by potius, rather, prius, before, citius, quicker,
sooner, the second clause is put in the Present or Imperfect Subjunctive (51^), with or
without ut.
Depugna potius quam servias. Cic. (579 R.)
Vir bonus statuit intolerabill dolore lacerarl potius quam ut omciumprodat.
Cic. A good man resolves to let himself be torn by unsufferable anguish, rather than be nn
true to his duty.
* Still, -que in atque connects these clauses with the Relative, and the explanation t)f
atque as ad + que, in comparison with + Jww (Ribbeck) is worthy of note.
HISTORICAL IXFUSTTTVE. 319
Morituros se affirmabant citius quam in alienos mores verterentur. Liv.
They declared that they had rather die, than let themselves be changed to foreign ways.
If the leading clause is in the Infinitive, the dependent clause may be in the Infinitive
likewise, and this is the more common construction when the Infinitive follows a verb of
Will and Desire :
Haec patienda censeo, potius quam trucldari corpora vestra. Liv. 1 think,
these things are to be endured, rather than that your bodies ( = you) s/iould be butchered.
5. Instead of tam — quam, as— so, the Roman prefers the combinations noil minus
quam— non magis quam (by Litotes).
10 Non minus quam means. no less than = quite as much :
Patria hoininibus non minus cara esse debet quam liberl. Cic. Country ought
to be no less dear to men than children ( = quite as dear as).
2.) Non magis quam means quite as little, or quite as much:
Animus non magis est sanus quam corpus. Cic. The mind is no more sound than
the body = as little sound as the body.
Or it might mean :
The mind is no more sound than the body = the body is quite as sound as the mind.
Fahius non in armls praestantior fuit quam in toga. Cic Fabius was not more
distinguished in war than in peace (no less distinguished in peace than in war, quite as dis-
l in peace as in war).
The Abridged Sentence.
648. The compound sentence may be reduced to a simple
sentence, by substituting an Infinitive or a Participle for the
dependent clause.
The Infinitive and Infinitive Forms.
649. The practical uses of the Infinitive and its kindred
forms, as equivalents of dependent clauses, have already been
considered :
Infinitive after Verbs of Creation : 424 and after.
Gerund and Gerundive: 426 and after.
Supine: 435 and after.
Infinitive in Object Sentences : 526 and after.
Infinitive in Complementary Final Sentences: 532.
Infinitive in Eelative Sentences : 638.
Remark. — Under the head of the Abridged Sentence, will be treated the Historical
Infinitive and Oratio Obliqua: the Historical Infinitive, because it is a compendious
Imperfect ; Oratio Obliqua. because it foreshortens, if it does not actually abridge, and
effaces the finer distinctions of Oratio Recta.
HISTORICAL INFINITIVE.
650. The Infinitive of the Present is sometimes used by
the historians to give a rapid outline of events, with the
320 ORATIO OBLIQUA.
subject In the Nominative ; generally, several infinitives in
succession :
[Verres] minitari Diodoro, vociferari palam, lacrimas interdum vix
tenere. Cic. Verves threatened Diodorus, bawled out before everybody,
sometimes could hardly restrain his tears.
Remarks.— 1. The ancient assumption of an ellipsis of coepit, began (Quint, ix. 3, 58),
serves to show the conception, although it does not explain the construction. There is
no ellipsis. The Infinitive is to be explained as in Oratio Obliqua. It takes the place
of the Imperfect, io used chiefly in rapid passages, and gives the outline of the thought,
and not the details.
2. The Historical Infinitive is sometimes found after cum, ubi, etc. :
Non multuni erat progressa navis cum dato signo ruere tectum. Tac. Not
far (but. a little way) had the ship advanced, when, at a signal given, the roof came down
with a rush (began to tumble).
ORATIO OBLIQUA
651. The thoughts of the narrator, or the * exact words of
a person, as reported by the narrator, are called Oratio Recta, or
Direct Discourse.
Indirect Discourse, or Oratio Obliqua, reports not the exact
words spoken, but the general impression produced.
Remarks. — 1. Under the general head of Oratio Obliqua are embraced also those
clauses which imply Indirect Quotation (Partial Obliquity). See 509.
2. Inquam, quoth I, is used in citing the Oratio Recta \ ajo, I say, generally in
Oratio Obliqua. Inquam is always parenthetic ; ajo may or may not be parenthetic.
Oratio Recta may also be cited by a parenthetic " ut ait," " ut ajunt," as he says, as
they say. When the subject of inquit is mentioned it is commonly postponed.
652. Oratio Obliqua differs from Oratio Recta, partly in the
use of the Moods and Tenses, partly in the use of the Pro-
nouns.
Remarks. — 1. It must be remembered that 0- 0. is necessarily less accurate in its
conception than 0. R-, and hence it is not always possible to restore the 0. R. from the
0. 0- with perfect certainty. What is ideal to the speaker, may become unreal to the
narrator from his knowledge of the result, and hence, when accuracy is aimed at, the nar-
rator takes the point of view of the speaker, and in the last resort passes over to 0.
Recta^
2. 0. Obliqua often comes in without any formal notice.
Moods in Oratio Obliqua.
653. In Oratio Obliqua the principal clauses are put in the
Infinitive, the subordinate clauses in the Subjunctive.
ORATIO OBLIQUA. 321
Dratio Recta : Apud Hypanim fluvium, inquit Aristoteles,
Oratio Obliqua : Apud Hypanim fluvium Aristoteles ait,
0. R. : bestiolae quaedam nascuntur,
O. O. : bestiolas quasdam nasci,
0. R. : quae tinum diem vivunt,
O. O. : quae unum diem vivant.
0. R. — On the river Bog, says Aristotle, )-,.,-, . -, ,-, .
5. 0.-Aristo0e says that, on the river Bog, \ httle creaiures are born> that
live (but) one day.
Socrates dicere solebat :
0. R. Omnes in eo quod sciunt satis sunt eloquent es.
O. O. Omnes in e5 quod scirent satis esse eloquentes.
0. R. Socrates used to say : "All men are eloquent enough in what they understand."
6. O. Socrates used to say thai all men were eloquent enough in tohal
they UNDERSTOOD.
Remark. — When the Principal Clause, or Apodosis, is in the Indicative, the Infini-
tive is used according to the rule for Verbs of Saying and Thinking. When the Prin-
cipal Clause, or Apodosis, is in the Subjunctive, as in the Ideal and Unreal conditions,
special rules are necessary. (059.)
Otherwise, Subjunctive in 0. R. continues to be Subjunctive in 0. 0.
654. Interrogative sentences are put in the Subjunctive ac-
cording to 469 :
Ariovistus respondit se prius in Galliam venisse quam populum
Romanum : quid sibi vellet cur in suas possessionem veniret. Caes.
Ariovistus replied that he had come to Gaul before the Roman people : what did
he (Caesar) mean by coming into his possessions f (Quid tibi vis ?)
Thrasybulus magna voce exclamat ; cur se fugiant ? Thrasybulus
cried out with a loud voice (asking) ,*ichy they ran from him. (O. R., cur
me fugitis ?)
Remakes.— 1. Indicative Rhetorical Questions (466) are transferred from the Indica-
tive of the Oratio Recta to the Accusative and Infinitive of 0- 0- ; but seldom in the
Second Person, which is commonly in the Subjunctive.
0. R. Num possum % Can I? [No.] a 0. Kum posse ? Could he ?
Quid est turpius % What is baser? [Nothing.] Quid esse turpius % What was
baser f
Quo se repulsos ab Romanis ituros % Liv. Whither should they go, if repelled by
the Bomans f (Quo ibimus V
Cui non apparere ab eo qui prior arma intulisset injiiriam ortam esse ? Liv.
To whom is it not evident that the wrong began with him, who had been the first to wage
war f (Cui non apparet I)
Si bonum ducerent, quid pro noxio damnassenf? Liv. If they thought him a
good man, why had they condemned him as guilty f (Si bonum ducitis, quid pro noxio
damnastis ?)
2. In Subjunctive Rhetorical Questions the Subjunctive is either retaine i, or trans*
ferred to the Infinitive. The Deliberative Subjunctive is always retained.
14*
3'2'l ORATIO OBLIQUA.
Quis sibi persuaderet sine certa re Ambiorigem ad ejusmodi consilium de-
scendisse? Cabs. Who could persuade himself that Ambiorix had proceeded to an
extreme measure like that, without (having made) a sure thing (of it) ? (Quis sibi per-
suadeat %)
The Infinitive form would be the Future: quern sibi persuasurum % (659) and is
not to be distinguished from the Future Indicative.
655. Imperative sentences are put in the Subjunctive: the
Negative is, of course, ne :
Redditur responsum : Nondum tempus pugnae esse ; castris se tene-
rent. Liv. There teas returned for answer, that it was not yet time to fight,
that they must keep within the camp. (O. R. castris vos tenete.)
Vercingetorix cohortatus est : ne perturbarentur incommodo. Caes.
Vercingetorix comforted them (by saying) that they must not allow themselves
to be disconcerted by the disaster. (O. R. nolite perturbari.)
Remark. — Ut can be used in the first sentence, according to 546 ; but only in the
first.
Pythia respondit ut moenibus ligneis se munlrentt Nep. The Pythia answered
that they must defend themselves with walls of wood.
TENSES IN ORATIO OBLIQUA.
656. The Tenses of the Infinitive follow the laws already-
laid down (530) :
The Present Infinitive expresses contemporaneous action;
The Perfect Infinitive expresses prior action ;
The Future Infinitive expresses future action.
657. The Tenses of the Subjunctive follow the laws of se-
quence (510). The choice is regulated by the point of view of
the Reporter, or the point of view of the Speaker.
Remark. — By assuming the point of view of the speaker, greater liveliness as well as
greater accuracy is imparted to the discourse. This form is technically called Reprae-
sentatio. In Conditional Sentences Repraesentatio often serves to prevent ambiguity.
The point of view not unfrequently shifts from reporter to speaker, sometimes in the
same sentence.
Point of View of the Reporter:
Legation! Ariovistus respondit : sibi mirum videri quid in sua Gallia
quam belld vicisset, Caesarl negotii esset. Caes. To the embassy Ario-
vistus replied, that it seemed strange to him (he wondered) what business Cae-
sar had in his Gaul, which he had conquered in war.
Point of View of the Speaker :
Legatis Helveciorum Caesar respondit : consuesse deos immortales,
ORATIO OBLIQUA. 323
quo gravius homines ex commutatiSne rerum doleant, quos pro scelere
eorum ulcisci velint, his secundiores interdum res concedere. Caes. To
tlte envoys of the Helvetians Caesar replied, that the gods were (are) wont, that
men might (may) suffer the more severely from change in their fortunes, to
grant occasional increase of prosperity to those whom they wished (wish) to
punish for their crime. (A. long passage may be found in Liv. xxviii. 32.)
Point of View shifted :
Ad haec Marius respondit : Si quid ab senatu petere vellent, ab armis
discedant. Sall. Thereto Marius replied : If they wished to ask anything of
the senate , they must lay down their arms.
658. Object, Causal, Temporal, and Eelative Clauses follow
the general laws of Oratio Obliqua.
Examples of 6. O. in Object Glauses, 524.
Causal, 541.
Temporal, 562, 563, 564, 566, 570, 572, 576.
Relative, 630.
Remarks. — 1. Coordinate Relative Clauses are put in the Accusative and Infinitive
(638).
2. Relative Clauses are put in the Indicative : 1. In mere circumlocutions. 2. In ex-
planations of the narrator. (630, R. 1.)
3. Dum, with the Indicative, is often retained as a mere circumlocution (so also some-
times cum) :
Die, hospes, Spartae nos te hie vidisse jacentes, dum Sanctis patriae legibus
obsequimur. Cic. Tell Sparta, stranger, that thou hast seen us lying here obeying (in
obedience to) our country's hallowed laws.
659. Conditional Sentences in Oratio Obliqua {Total and Partial).
1. The Protasis follows the rule.
2. The Indicative Apodosis follows the rule, but Present, Im-
perfect, and Perfect Subjunctive are turned into the Future In-
finitive or its periphrases.
The Pluperfect Subjunctive is transferred to the Perfect In-
finitive of the Active Periphrastic Conjugation.
Passive and Supine-less Verbs take the circumlocution with
faturmn fuisse ut . . . . 240, R. 2.
Remark.— Posse needs no Future (245, R. 3), and potuisse no Periphrastic Perfect
Infinitive, so that these forms are often used to lighten the construction.
3. Identical Forms. — In the transfer of conditions to 0. 0.,
the difference between many forms disappears. For instance :
;i:at: : : :,i:;ri,
I. SI id :re:
S: id eredes. errabis. Dice te. si id eredas, erraturum esse.
Si :d creeds, euros
TT. Si id c /edis. errabis.
Si id creres. errabis
Si id eredas, erres.
Si id crederes. errares
.
m. Si id e: b - i (lexis, errabis.
Siid creed deras. erres.
Si id ere die eras, err averts.
Si id credidisses. errares,
Dixi fee, si id crederes. erratarum esse.
I>ixi te. si id credidisses, erraturum
esse.
toi ¥i ':'.. dcreca exactness is lost
B epraesentatio for the logical condition, and
r Dm ■?:"-. it is] ssible. The difference
_::.'.±iif:l !:..-: . :..:-.."_".;---..-_-.■. .e :;:'_- :;;.;-.
;:-:.:i — Id 2 : I :"ce iirerfiiie
In^o. IL the ami ignityis troide
tne use ::' r'ae "r"; ..ris:; : P rrre:: :':
"r~::: -11 7 "..: Izl'r '.. ~ It rill ill A
rator. to whom both are Fasi
in., like Xo. n.. is used chiej
Ariovistus respondit: SI quid ipsi a Caesare opus esse: sese ad ilium ventu-
rumruisse: si quid ille se velit. ilium ad s? venire upartere 2abe A
answered, that if he had wanted anything of Caesar he would hare come to Mm ; if he
(Caesar) wanted anything of him. he ought to come to him (Ariovistns).
0 E 5: :a:a mi a: I Caesare :pus esse: er: ad ilium reaissem : si quid ille
me vd: iidara aa me venire caor:e:
660. Logical Conditions in Oratio Obliqua :
1. Ad haec Arte vistas respondit . si ipse pepulo Rcraano ncn prae-
s:ri":ere: quern ad mod-am sac rare ateretur. ncn cportere sese a populo
Redman e in sac j-are impedlri L'azs _T : : : If
he did not prescribe to the Roman people how t their rigid, he ought
not to he hindered by the 5 of his right. | O, R. Si
ego con praes:r:bo, n5n cportet me impedirl)
2 Si be nam aacerent, cd: pre ncxie damnassent ? Sin 593] noxium
cemperissent. qaid alteram ccnsulatum crederent? Iar.
7. good m \ad they condemned him as guilty ; if on the
hand they had f: im guilty, why did i~ with 7 con-
sulship? OR Si — ducitis. quid damr.asas 9 sin — comperistis. quid cre-
di as?)
THurins cl ami tab at, saara senientiam in atramque partem esse
tatam : si nihil esse: 5. R., si nihil erit lurius. nulla periculo ad proxi-
marn legidnem perven tares O. R, psrveaie:is ; si Gallia omnis cum
German!? censentiret C R . sicensentit unam esse 6. R.. est. in cele-
r:*".:e r -s::am said: em .a~s T .' ' ~
; (should be especial t?oey
CONDITIONAL 8KMTENCES Of 0. 0. 325
! get to ike-next legion without danger ; -
the Germans, their only m speed.
4. Bum omnium laborum finem fore existimabant si hostem ab Hiberd
intercludere potuissent. Caes. They thought that would bt t
(their; toils, if they could cut off the enemy fnm tht Z 5. R., is labo-
rum finis erit (or fuerit) si hostem intercludere potuerimus
5. [Hi] Jugurthae non mediocrem animum pollicitando accendebant
si Micipsa rex occidisset, fore uti solus imperio Numidiae potiretur.
Sall. These persons kindled no little courage in Jug ~~
wring oxer and oxer that if King Micipsa fell, he
O. R.. si Micipsa Occident, tu solus imperio potie:.
G. Fides data est, si Jugnrtham vivum aut necatum sibi tradidisset
fore ut illi senatus impunitatem et sua omnia concederet. Sall. His
word was pledged that if lie delivered tc
would grant him impunity, O. R., si mihi tradideris,
tibi senatus tua omnia concedet.
7. Non multo ante urbem captam exaudita vox est . . futururn
nisi provisum esset, ut Roma caperetur. Cic. N<
of the city, a voice was heard saying), that
Borne would be taken. (O. R., nisi provisum erit, Roma capietur
8. Ariovistus respondit si quid ille se velit ilium ad se venire opor-
tere. Caes.
9. [Ariovistus respondit] nisi decedat [Caesar] sese ilium pro hoste
habiturum; quodsi eum interfecerit, multis sese nobilibus principibus-
que populi Romani gratum facturum. Caes. A
l<
him, he w mid lo a j f the highest \
pie. O. R., Nisi decedes te pro hoste habebo . . . si te inter-
fecero gratum fee ero (236, R
10. Fertur Jugurtha dixissa urbem venalem et mature perituram si
-^ emptor em in veu erit. Sall. Subj
that hit it j O. R.,
urbs peribit si emptorem invenerit : Fat. Perl. Ind.)
Remark. — Fosse is used as has been stared. : '
Negamnt bellum dirimi posse nisi Messeniis Achaei Pylum redderent ~ ~~~
They said that the ic a
■ nians. (Q. R. Bellum dirimi non potest poterit nisi Pylum reddent-
-:£• Docent. si turris concidisset. non posse milites contineri quin spe praedae in
- ttrbem irrumpant- Caes. Tkey shoic ::':-:<-.::
from -\e hope of booty. 0. R, si conciderit. non possi^:
ipoterunt contineri.)
661. Ideal Conditions in Oratio Obliqna :
1. Ait se si uratur ;i Quam hoc suave" dicturum. Cic. He declares
3*26 PRONOUNS IN ORATIO OBLIQUA.
that if he were to be burnt lie would say, " How sweet this &.V (O. R. Si urar,
dicam, same form as Logical.)
2. Voluptatem si ipsa pro se loquatur concessuram arbitror Dignitati.
Cic. I think that if Pleasure were to speak for herself, she would yield (the
palm) to Virtue. (The context shows (Fin. III. 1) that the condition is
Ideal, not Logical. Si loquatur, concedat. Comp. 598, R. 2.)
662. Unreal Conditions in Oratio Obllqua :
1 . Titurius clamitabat Eburones, si Caesar adesset, ad castra [Roma-
n5rum] venturos [non] esse. Caes. Titurius kept crying out that if Caesar
were there, tlte Eburones loould not be coming to the campxf the Romans. !
(6. R.. si Caesar adesset, Eburones non venirent.) On the rareness of
this form see 659, R.
2. Apparebat si diutius vixisset Hamilcare duce Poen5s arma Italiae j
illaturos fuisse. Liy. It was evident that if he had lived longer, the Funics \
would have carried their arms into Italy under Hamilcafs conduct.
3. Nisi eo ipso tempore nuntii de Caesaris victdria essent allati ex-
Istimabant plerique futurum fuisse ut oppidum amitteretur. Caes. Had i
not news of Caesar's victory been brought at that very time, most persons^
tlwught the city would have been lost. (O. R., nisi nuntii allati essent, oppi-
dum amissum esset.)
Remark.— As the Pluperfect Indicative is sometimes used (rhetorically) for the Sub-
junctive (246, R. 3), so the ordinary Perfect Infinitive is sometimes employed instead of J
the Periphrastic :
Nemo mini persuadebit multos praestantes viros tanta esse conatos (= cona j
turos fuisse) nisi animo cernerent (599, R. 1) posteritatem ad se pertinere. Cicj
No one will per made me that (so) many eminent men had made such mighty endeavors, ha
they not seen with their mind^ (eye) that posterity belonged to them.
Pompejum plerique exlstimant si acrius insequl voluisset bellum eo die pot
uisse flnire. Caes. Most people think that if Pompey had (but) determined to follow itjj
more energetically, he could have finished the war on that day. 0- R-, si voluisset, po
tnit, 599, R. 2.)
Namque ilia multitudine si sana mens esset (599, R. 1) Graeciae, suppliciun;
Persas dare potuisse. Nep. For with that number if Greece had had (= been in herjj
sound mind, the Persians might have paid the penalty (due). (0. R- SI sana mens esse J
Graeciae. supplicium Persae dare potuerunt)
Pronouns in Oratio Obllqua.
663. 1. The Reflexive is used according to the principles lai*j
down 520, and after.
2. The person addressed is ille or is :
[Ariovistus respondit] nisi decedat [Caesar] sese ilium pro hoste h£|
biturum : quodsi eum interfecerit, multis sese nobilibus principibusqujj
populi Roman! gratum facturum. Caes. (667, R. 9.)
Of course this does not exclude the ordinary demonstrative use.
ORATIO OBLIQUA.
327
3. Hie and iste are commonly changed into ille or is, as nunc
into turn and tunc.
Diodorus respondit se panels illis diebus argentum misisse Lily-
baeum. Cic. (389, R. 4.)
4, Nos is used when the narrator's party is referred to. Oaes.
B. G. I. 44.
664. Specimens of the conversion of Oratio Obllqua into
Oratio Recta.
Oratio Obllqua.
1. Anovistus respondit :
Transisse Rhenum sese non
sua sponte sed rogatum et arcessi-
tum a Gallis ; non sine magna spe
magnlsque praemiis domum propin-
quosque rellqnisse ; sedes habere
in Gallia ab ipsls concessas, obsides
ipsorum voluntate datos ; stlpen-
dium capere jure belli, quod victores
victls imponere consuerint. Non
sese Gallis sed Gallos sibi bellum in-
tulisse ; omnes Galliae clvitates ad
se oppugnandum venisse et contra
,lllf\ s5 castra habuisse ; eas omnes
I copias a se uno proelio pulsas ac
pot superatas esse. Si iterum experlri
w«J! velint, se iterum paratum esse de-
,# certare ; si pace uti velint, iniquum
est cle stlpendio recusare, quod sua
cim|; voluntate ad id tempus pependerint,
iiiel Amicitiam popull Roman! sibi or-
seknamento et praesidio, non detri-
ments esse oportere idque se" ea spe
petisse. Si per populum Romanum
stlpendium remittitur et dediticil
subtrahantur, non minus libenter
:sese recusaturum popull RomanI
amicitiam quam appetierit. Quod
multitudinem Germanorum in Gal-
!liam traducat, id se" sui muniendl,
I non Galliae impugnandae causa
h; facere ; ejus rel testimonio esse
quod nisi rogatus non veuerit et
'quod bellum non intuierit sed de-
fender it.
Caes. B. G. I., 44.
Oratio Recta.
Transil Rhenum non mea sponte
sed rogatus et arcessltus a Gallis ;
non sine magna spe magnlsque
praemiis domum propinquosque re-
liqui ; sedes liabeo in Gallia ab ipsls
concessas, obsides ipsorum volun-
tate datos ; stlpendium capio jure
belli, quod victores victls imponere
consuerunt. Nou ego Gallis sed
Galll mihi bellum intulerunt ; o-
mnes Galliae clvitates acl me oppu-
gnandum venerunt et contra me
castra habuerunt ; eae omnes copiae
a me uno proelio pulsae ac supera-
tae sunt. Si iterum experlri volunt,
iterum paratus sum decertare, si
pace uti volunt, iniquum est de stl-
pendio recusare, quod sua voluntate
ad hoc tempus pependerunt. Amici-
tiam popull RomanI mihi orna-
mento et praesidio, non detriments
esse oportet idque ea spe petil. Si
per populum Romanum stlpendium
remittetur et dediticil subtrahentur,
non minus libenter recusabo popull
RomanI amicitiam quam ap petil.
Quod multitudinem Germanorum
in Galliam traducam * id mel muni-
endl non Galliae impugnandae
causa facio ; ejus rel testimonio est
quod nisi rogatus nou venl et quod
bellum non intull sed defend!.
* Allusion to the preceding speech,
otherwise traduco.
328
ORATIO OBLIQTJA.
Oratio Obliqua.
2. ZZw OcBsar ita respondit :
Ed sibi minus dubitatlonis darl
quod e8s res quas lBgatl HelvBtil
commemorassent memoria tenBret
atque e(5 gravius ferre quo minus
merits popull Roifianl accidissent ;
qui si alicujus injuriae sibi conscius
fuisset non fuisse difficile cavBre;
sed eo deceptum quod neque com-
missum a sB intellegeret quarB
timBret neque sine causa" timendum
putaret. Quod si veteris contumB-
liae obllvisci vellet num etiam recen-
tium injuriarum, quod eo invito iter
per provinciam per vim tempt-as-
sent, quod Aeduos, quod Ambar-
ros, quod Allobrogas vexassent me-
moriam dBponere posse? Quod
sua victoria tarn insolenter gloria-
rentur quodque tarn diu sB impune
tulisse injurias aclmirarentur eodem
pertinBre. Consuesse enim deos im-
mortalBs quo gravius homines ex
commutatione rBrum doleant, quos
pro scelere eorum ulciscl velint, his
secundiorBs interdum res et diutur-
niorem impunitatem concBdere.
Cum ea ita sint, tamen si obsidBs, ab
ils sibi dentur utl ea quae pollicean-
tnr facturos intellegat, et si Aeduls
dB injurils quas ipsis socilsque
eorum intulerint, item si Allobrogi-
bus satisfaciant sBsB cum ils pacem
esse facturum.
Caes. B. G. L, 14.
Oratio Recta.
Hoc mihi minus dubitationis da-
tur quod eas rBs quas vos, lBgatl
Helvetii, commemorastis, memoria
teneo atque eo gravius fero quo
minus merito popull Romani acci-
dBrunt ; qui si alicujus injuriae sibi
conscius fuisset, non fuit difficile ca-
vBre; sed eo deceptus quod neque
commissum a sB intellegBbat quarB
timBret neque sine causa timendum
putabat. Quod si veteris contumB-
liae obliviscl volo, num etiam recen-
tium injuriarum, quod mB invito
iter per provinciam per vim temp-
tastis quod Aeduos, quod Ambarros,
quod Allobrogas vexastis,memoriam
dBponere possum ? Quod vestra vi-
ctoria tarn insolenter gloriaminl.
quodque tarn diu mB impune tu-
lisse injurias admiramini eodem
pertinent. ConsuBvBrunt enim dl
immortalBs quo gravius homines
ex commutatione rBrum doleant*
quos pro scelere eorum ulciscl vo-
lunt, his secundiorBs interdum rBs
et diuturniorem impunitatem con-
cBdere. Cum haec ita sint, tamen
si obsidBs a vobls mihi dabuntur, utl j
ea, quae pollicBmini, facturos intel-
legam et si Aeduls dB injurils quas
ipsis socilsque eorum intulistis, item
si Allobrogibus satisfaciBtis, ego vo-
blscum pacem faciam.
3. Sulla regl patefecit :
Quod polliceatur, senatum et po-
pulum Eomanum, quoniam amplius
armls valuissent, non in gratiam
habittiros ; faciundum aliquid, quod
illorum magis quam sua rBtulisse
viderBtur ; id ideo in promptu esse,
quoniam Jugurthaecopiam habBret,
quern si Romanls tradidisset, fore
ut ill! plurimum dBbBrBtur ; amici-
tiam, foedus, Numidiae partem,
quam nunc peteret, tunc ultro ad-
venttiram.
Sall. B. J. 111.
Quod pollicBris, senatus et popu- i
lus Romanus quoniam amplius
armls valuBrunt, non in gratiam ha
bBbunt; faciundum aliquid, quod
illorum magis quam tua rBtulisse
videatur ; id ideo in promptu est,
quoniam Jugurthae copiam habBs,
quern si Romanls tradideris tibi i
plurimum dBbBbitur ; amlcitia, foe-
dus, Numidiae pars, quam nunc
petis, tunc ultrd adveniet.
*Kraner's interpretation would
require do lent.
b
ATTRACTION OF MOOD.
329
Oratio Obliqua.
4. AtJienienses deplordverunt ms-
tdtionem populdtionemque miserd-
bilem agrbrum. Neque se id querl
quod hostilia ab hoste pass! forent ;
esse enim quaedam belli jura quae
ut facere ita pati sit fas. Sata extirl,
dirui tecta, praedas hominum peco-
r urn que agi misera raagis quani in-
digna patient! esse ; vSrum enim
vSro id se querl, quod is, qui Roma-
nos alienigenas et barbaros vocet,
adeo omnia simul divina humana-
' que jura polluerit ut priore popula-
i tione cum infernis diis, secunda
cum superls bellum nefarium gesse-
- rit. Omnia sepulcra monumentaque
■' diruta esse in ftnibus suis, omnium
- nudatos manes, nullius ossa terra
tegl. Qualem terram Atticam ffece-
• rit, exornatam quondam opulentarn-
[ que, talem eum si liceat A.etoliam
I Graeciamque omnem facturum.
^Urbis quoque suae similem defor-
( mitatem futarum fuisse nisi RomanI
■ subvenissent.
Lit. xxxi. 30.
Oratio Recta.
Nonid querimur quod hostilia ab
hoste pass! sumus. Sunt enim
quaedam belli jura quae ut facere
ita pati est fas. Sata exuri, dirui
tecta, praedas hominum pecorum-
que agi misera magis quam indigna
patient! sunt ; vSrum enim vBro id
querimur quod is, qui Roman os
aliSnigenas et barbaros vocat, adeo
omnia simul divina humanaque
jura polluit ut priore populatione
cum infernis diis, secunda cum su-
perls bellum nefarium gesserit.
Omnia sepulcra monumentaque di-
ruta sunt in finibus nostris, omnium
ntidati manes, nullius ossa terra
teguntur. Qualem terrain Atticam
fecit, exornatam quondam opulen-
tamque, talem is, si licBbit Aetoliam
Graeciamque omnem faciet. Urbis
quoque nostrae similis deformitas
tuisset, nisi RomanI subvenissent.
INVOLVED ORATIO OBLIQUA. ATTRACTION OF MOOD.
665. Oratio Obliqua proper depends on some verb of Thinking or
Saying, expressed or understood. In a more general sense, the term O.
Obliqua is used of all complementary clauses, that belong to ideal rela-
tions. The principle is the same in both sets of sentences, for in the one
as in the other, the Infinitive takes its dependencies in the Subjunctive, on
account of the close relation between the Ideal mood and the Substantive
Idea of the verb. Hence the favorite combination of the Infinitive and
the Ideal second person :
Proprium human! ingenii est odisse quern laeseris. Tac. It is peculiar
to human nature to hate whom you have injured. (But Odisti quem laesisti.)
The so-called attraction of mood by which clauses originally Indicative
become Subjunctive in dependence on Subjunctives, is another phase of
the same general principle.
666. All clauses which depend on Infinitives and Subjunc-
tives, and form an integral part of the thought, are put in the
Subjunctive :
330 PARTICIPIAL SENTENCES.
Recordatione nostrae amicitiae sic fruor ut beate vixisse videar quia
cum Scipione vixerim. Cic. / enjoy the remembrance of our friendship so
much that I seem to I lave lived happily because Hived with Scipio.
Vereor ne dum minuere velim laborem augeam. Cic. I fear lest while
lam wishing to lessen the toil I may increase it (dum minuere volo, augeo).
Corporis viribus utare dum adsint, cum absint ne requiras. Cic.
(264.)
Quare flebat ut omnium oculos quotiescumque in publicum prodisset
ad se convert eret. Nep. Whereby it happened that he attracted the eyes of
all, every time lie went out in public (quotiescumque prodierat convertebat).
Nescire quid antequam natus sis acciderit, id est semper esse pue-
rum. Cic. Not to know what happened before you were born, (that) is to be
always a boy.
Fraus fidem in parvis sibi praestruit ut cum operae pretium sit,
cum magna mercede fallat. Cic. Fraud lays itself a foundation of credit
in small things in order that when it is worth while it may make a great profit
by cheating.
Rete texunt [araneolae] ut si quid inhaeserit conficiant. Cic. Spiders
iceave a web to kill anything that gets caught in it (si quid inhaesit confici-
unt, 569).
Abeunti si quid poposcerit concedere moris. Tac. To the departing^
(guest) it is customary to grant anything that he asks (Si quid poposcitl
concedunt).
Remarks. — 1. From this it is easy to see how the Subjunctive came to be used in
Generic or Iterative sense after Tenses of Continuance. Present, Imperfect, and Futu
Indicative may all involve the Notion of Habit, Will, Inclination, Endeavor, and th<
complementary clauses would follow the sense rather than the form (Partial Obliquity)
Examples, see 505, R.
2. Dum not unfrequently resists the Attractive both in prose and poetry :
Tantum ne noceas dum vis prodesse videto. Ov. (548.)
Participial Sentences.
667. Participles are used in Latin even more extensively
than in English, to express a great variety of subordinate rela-
tions, such as Time and Circumstance, Cause and Occasion
Condition and Concession, The classification cannot always b
exact, as one kind blends with another.
%
Remarks. — 1. It is sometimes convenient to translate a Participial Sentence by a col
ordinate clause, but the Participle itself is never coordinate, and such clauses are neve|
equivalents. (409, R. 2.) :
Manlius Galium caesura torque spoliavit Liv. Manlius slew the Gaul and strijch
ved him of his neckchain (alter slaying the Gaul stripped him of his neckchain, havinj|
slain, etc.).
■
PARTICIPIAL SENTENCES. 331
Miltiades capitis afcsolutus, pecunia multatus est. Nep. Miltiades (though) ac-
quitted of a capital charge, was mulcted in (a sum of) money (was acquitted, but mulcted).
2. A common translation of the Participle is an Abstract Noun : See 324, R 3 :
Terra mutata non mutat mores. Lrv. The change of land changeth not the char-
acter.
Teucer Ulixen reum facit Ajacis occisl. Quint. Teucer indicts Ulysses for the
murder of Ajax.
On the Participle after Verbs of Perception and Representation, see 524, R. 1 and 536.
668. Participles may represent Time when :
Alexander moriens anulum suum dederat Perdiccae. Nep. Alexan-
der (when he was) dying, had given his ring to Perdiccas.
Dionysius tyrannus Syracusis expulsus Corinth! pueros docebat.
Cic. Dionysius the tyrant, (after he had been) exiled from Syracuse (after
i his exile from Syracuse), taught (a) boys1 (school) at Coiinth.
Ablative Absolute :
Solon et Pisistratus Servio Tullio regnante viguerunt. Cic. Solon and
f Pisistratus flourished wlien Servius Tullius was king (in the reign of Servius
'{'\\ Tullius).
Sole orto Volsci se circumvallatos viderunt. Lrv. When the sun was
!| risen (after sunrise), the Volscians saw that they were surrounded by lines of
;1t intrenchment.
Remark.— On the Ablative Absolute of the Simple Participle, see 438, R. 1.
4 669. Participles may represent Cause Why :
thepi
Areopagitae damnaverunt puerum coturnicum oculos eruentem.
Quint. The court of Mars1 Hill condemned a boy because he plucked out
(for plucking out) the eyes of quails.
Athenienses Alcibiadem corruptum a rege Persarum capere noluisse
Cymen arguebant. Nep, The Athenians charged Alcibiades with having
been unioilling to take Cyme (because he had been) bribed by the King of
Persia.
I
J Ablative Absolute :
liOlip Roman! veteres regnari omnes volebant libertatis dulcedine nondum
3 M experta. Liv. The old Bomans all wished to have a king over them (because
they had) not yet tried the sweetness of liberty.
nW
Remark. — An apparent cause is given by ut as velut, as, for instance, tanquam (so)
i «*, quasi, as if see 604, R. 2.
670. Participles may represent Condition and Concession :
Si latet ars prodest, aflfert deprensa pudorem. Ov. (594, 2.)
332 PARTICIPIAL SENTENCES.
Risus interdum ita repente erumpit ut eum cupientes tenere nequea-
mus. Cic. (611.)
Miltiades capitis absolutus pecunia multatus est. Nep. (667, R.)
Ablative Absolute :
Maximas virtutes jacere omnes necesse est voluptate dominante.
Cic. (594, 2.)
Remark.— Later writers combine with the Participle etsi, quanquam, quamvis,
see 611, R.
671. Participles may represent Relative Clauses (640) :
Omnes aliud agentes, aliud simulantes, perfidi sunt. Cic.
Pisistratus Homer! libros confus5s antea sic disposuisse dicitur ut
nunc habemus. Cic.
Remark.— So called, qui dicitur, vocatur, quern vocant ; above-mentioned, quern
antea, supra diximus.
672. Future Participle (Active). — The Future Participle is a verbal
adjective, denoting capability and tendency, chiefly employed in the older
language with sum, I am, as a periphrastic tense. In later Latin, it is used
freely, just as the Present and Perfect Participles, to express subordinate
relations.
Peculiar is the free use of it in Sentences of Design, and especially no-
ticeable the compactness gained by the employment of it in Conditional
Relations.
673. In later Latin, the Future Participle (Active) is used to
represent subordinate relations :
1. Time When:
Tiberius trajecturus (cum trajecturus esset) Rhenum commeatum non
transmisit. Suet. When Tiberius was about to cross the Bhine, he did not
send over the provisions.
2. Cause Why:
Deridiculo fuit senex foedissimae adulationis tantum infamia usurus
Tac. A butt of ridicule was the old man, as infamy was the only gain he
would make by his foul fawning.
Antiochus securus erat de bello Roman5 tanquam non transiturls in
Asiam Romanis. (604, R. 2.)
3. Purpose :
Maroboduus misit legatos ad Tiberium oraturos auxilia. Tac. (543
R. 2.)
ARRANGEMENT OF WORDS. 333
Remark.— The Present Participle is sometimes used in a similar sense, but the Pur-
pose is only an inference :
Legati venerunt nuntiantes Asiae quoque civitates sollicitarl. Lit. Envoys
came with the announcement thai the states of Asia (Minor) also were tampered with.
4. Condition and Concession :
1.) Protasis.
Dedituris se Hannibal! fuisse accersendum Romanorum praesidium?
Liv. If they had been ready to surrender to Hannibal, would they ham had
to send for a Roman garrison f (= Si dedituri fuissent, O. R. si dedituri
fuerunt.)
2.) Apodosis.
Quatiunt arma, rupturi imperium ni ducantur. Tac. They clash their
arms, ready to break orders, if they be not led forward.
Librum mis! exigent! tibi, missurus ets! non exegisses. Plin. Ep. I
have sent you the book, as you exacted it, although I should have sent it even
if you had not exacted it.
ARRANGEMENT OF WORDS.
674. The Latin language allows greater freedom in the ar-
rangement of words than the English. This freedom is, of
course, due to its greater wealth of inflections.
675. Grammatical arrangement has for its object clearness.
Rhetorical arrangement has for its objects Emphasis and
Rhythm.
1. Emphasis is produced 1. By reversing the ordinary position.
2. By approximation of similars or opposites.
3. By separation.
In all sentences beginning and end are emphatic points. In long sen-
tences the means as well as the extremes are the points of emphasis.
2. Rhythm. — Much depends on the rhythmical order of words, for
which the treatises of the ancients are to be consulted. Especially avoided
are poetic rhythms. So, for example, the dactyl and spondee, or close of
an hexameter at the end of a period.
676. Rule I. — The most simple arrangement of a sentence
is as follows :
1. The Subject and its Modifiers.
2. The Modifiers of the Predicate.
3. The Predicate Proper or Verb.
334: ARRANGEMENT OF WORDS.
1. Democritus tyrannus, 2. Syracusis expulsus Corinthi pueros,
o. docebat. Cic. (008.)
Rhetorical positions :
Potentes sequitur invidia. Quint. (479.)
Nobis non satisfacit ipse Demosthenes. Cic. (556. R. 1.)
Descriptus eratpopulus Romanus censu, ordinibus, aetatibus. ClC.
Intra moenia sunt hostes. Sall.
Remark.— The modifiers of the predicate stand in the order of their importance. The
following arr mgement is common :
1. Place, Time, Cause, or Means.
2. Indirect Object.
3. Direct Object.
4. Adverb.
5. Verb.
677. Rule II. — Interrogative Sentences begin with the in-
terrogative, subordinate clauses with the leading particle or
relative :
Quis eum diligat quern metuat ? Cic. (637.)
Postquam Caesar pervenit obsides poposcit. Caes. (563.)
Si spiritum ducit vivit. Cic. (597.)
Qui timere desierint odisse incipient. Tac (569.)
Rhetorical position :
Naturam si sequemur due em, nunquam aberrabimus. Ctc. (597.)
De futuris rebus etsi semper difficile est dicere, tamen interdum con-
jectura possis accedere. Cic. (606.)
Cato mirari se ajebat quod non rideret haruspex, haruspicem cum
vidisset. Cic. (569.)
678. Rule III. — An Adjective or dependent Genitive fol-
lows the word to which it belongs :
Torquatus filium suum necari jussit. Sall. (540.)
Sensum oculorum praecipit animus. Quint. (540.)
Rhetorical positions :
Hannibalem sui elves e civitate ejecerunt. Cic. (295, R. 1.)
Isocrates queritur plus henoris corporum quam animorum virtutibus
dari. Quint.
Ager, cum multos ann5s requievit, uberiores efferre fiaiges solet. Cic.
(567.)
Vereor ne parum hie liber mellis et absinthii multum habere videa-
tur. Quint. (552.)
Remarks.— 1. Many expressions have become fixed formulae: So titles, proper
name-', and the like : see 284 :
Facinus est vinciri civem Romanum. Cic. (535.)
ARRANGEMENT OF WORDS. 335
2. The demonstrative pronouns regularly precede :
Yereor ne hie liber absinthii multum habere videatur. Quint. (551.)
Rhetorical position :
Recordare tempus illud, cum pater Curio maerens jacebat in lecto. Cic. (582.)
3. New modifiers of either element may be inserted, prefixed, or added :
Catonem vidi in bibliotheca sedentem multls circumfusum Stoicorum librls.
Cic. (536.)
Saepe magna indoles virtutis priusquam reipublicae prodesse potuisset ez-
stinctafuit. Cic. (579.)
At videte hominis intolerabilem audaciam. Cic. (490.)
Aristides interfuit pugnae navall apud Salaminem. Nep. (343.)
679. Eule IV. — Adverbs are commonly put next to their
verb, and before it when it ends a sentence, and immediately
before their adjective or adverb :
Zenonem cum Athenis essem audiebam frequenter . . . Cic. (586.)
Nemo orator em admiratus est quod Latine loqueretur. Cic. (542.)
Vix cuiquam persuadebatur Graecia omni cessuros Romanos. Lrv.
(546, R. 2.)
Risus interdum ita repente erumpit ut eum cupientes tenere neque-
amus. Cic. (611.)
Rhetorical positions :
iram bene Bnnius initium dixit insaniae. Cic. (441.)
Saepe magna indoles virtutis priusquam reipublicae pr5desse potu-
isset exstincta fuit. Cic. (579.)
Remarks.— 1. Fere, paene, prope, usually follow :
Nemo fere saltat sobrius nisi forte insanit Cic. (591, R. 4.)
■ l 2. Negatives always precede, see 447.
680. Eule V. — Prepositions regularly precede their case.
11(414)
A recta conscientia transversum unguem non oportet discedere. Cic.
(332.)
Remarks. — 1. On versus, tenus and the regular postposition of cum in combination
with the Personal Pronouns and the Relative, see 414, R. 1.
2. Monosyllabic prepositions are not unfrequently put between the Adjective and
♦Substantive :
Magna cum cur a (401).
[ Less frequently between the Genitive and Substantive; except when the relative is
employed.
3. Dissyllabic prepositions are sometimes put after their case (Anastrophe), especial-
ly after a relative or demonstrative : most frequently contra, inter, propter. So also
adverbs.
4. The preposition may be separated from its case- by a Genitive or an Adverb.
Ad Appii Claudil senectiitem accedebat etiam ut caecus esset. Cic. (558.)
5. Monosyllabic prepositions such as cum, ex, de, post, sometimes append the en-
ARRANGEMENT OF WORDS.
clitics -que. -ve. -ne. as ex que ils. a?idfro??i them. Usually, however, the enclitics join
the dependent substantive : in patriamque rediit, and returned to his country.
On the position of per, see 415, R.
681. Rule VX — Particles vary :
Enim commonly takes the second, seldom the third place; nam and
namque are regularly prepositive.
Ergo in the syllogism precedes, elsewhere follows ; igitur is commonly
second or third ; itaque regularly first.
Tamen is first, but may follow an emphatic word.
Etiam usually precedes, quoque always follows.
Quidem and demum (at length) follow the word to which they belong.
682. Rule VJLL — A word that belongs to more than one
word regularly stands before them all, or after them all, some •
times after the first (287) :
Ariovistus respondit multls sese nSbilibus principibusque popul
Roman! gratum facturum. Caes. (670, R. 9.)
Isocrates queritur plus honoris corporum quam animorum virtutibu
dari. Quint. (542, R.)
Longum est mulorum persequ! utilitates et asinorum. Cic. (246, R
683. Rule YIII. — Words of kindred or opposite meanin;
are often put side by side for the sake of complement or con
trast :
Manus manum lavat, One hand washes the other.
Cato mirari se ajebat quod non rider et haruspex, haruspicem cur
vidisset. Cic. (569.)
Emit morte immortalitatem. Quint. (404.)
684. Rule IX. — Contrasted Pairs. — "When pairs are cor
trasted, the second is put in the same order as the first, bi
often in inverse order. This inverse order i^called Chiasmus,
or crosswise position, and gives alternate stress. The princip"
is of wide application.
Same order :
Fortuna vestra facit ut irae meae temperem. Liv. (557.)
Malo te sapiens hostis metuat quam stult! elves laudent. Liv. (54
R. 2.)
* From the Greek letter X-
1. Foris y" 2- arma.
2. consilium ^ l. domi.
ton:
ARRANGEMENT OF CLAUSES. 33?
Inverse order (Chiasmus) :
Ante vidimus (1) fulgurationem (2) quam sonum (2) audiamus (1).
Sen. (579.)
Parvi sunt foris (1) arma (2) nisi est consilium (2) domi (1). Cic. (412,
I R 1.)
ARRANGEMENT OF CLAUSES.
685. A period is a compound sentence with one or more
subordinate clauses, in which sentence the meaning is kept sus-
pended to the close.
686. Latin periods may be divided into two classes :
1. Responsive or Apodotic, in which a Protasis has an
Apodosis.
2. Intercalary or Enthetic, in which the various items are
r inserted in their proper place between Subject and Predicate.
687. Care must be taken—
E 1. To vary the clauses, so as to prevent too great uniformity
of rhythm.
2. To observe a certain proportion in the length of the
clauses.
The following passages may be cited as specimens of long
periods :
Ut saepe homings aegri morbo gravl, cum aestti febrlque jactantur, si
; aquam gelidam biberunt, primo relevari videntur, deinde multo gravius
J vehementiusque affiictantur: sic hie morbus, qui est in republics, rele-
vatus istlus paena, vehementius, vlvls reliquls, ingravescet. Cic. (Apodotic.)
Catuvolcus, rSx dlmidiae partis Eburonum. qui una cum Ambiorige
W\ consilium inierat, aetale jam confectus, cum laborem aut belli aut fugae
vl ferre non posset, omnibus precibus detestatus Ambiorigem, qui ejus con-
silil auctor fuisset, taxo, cujus magna in Gallia Germaniaque copia est, sS
exanimavit. Caes. (Enthetic.)
FIGURES OF SYNTAX AND RHETORIC.
688. Ellipsis is the omission of some integral part of the
1 thought, such as the substantive of the adjective (195, R. 1),
the copula of the predicate (200), the verb of the adverb.
Unde domo ? 411, R. 2.
15
338 FIGURES OF SYNTAX AXD RHETORIC.
Remark.— When the ellipsis is indefinite, do not attempt to supply it. The figure is
much abused by commentators in the explanation of grammatical phenomena.
689. Brachylogy (breviloquentia) is a failure to repeat an
element which is often to be supplied in a more or less modified
form.
Tarn fellx esses quam formosissima (= es) vellem. Ov. (316.)
690. Zeugma {yoking) is a junction of two governing words
under the same regimen, or with the same modifier, although
the common factor strictly applies but to one.
Manus ac supplices voces ad Tiberium tendens. Tac. Stretching out
hands and (uttering) suppliant cries to Tiberius.
691. Aposiopesis is a rhetorical breaking off before the close
of the sentence, as in the famous Vergilian duos ego.
692. Pleonasm is the use of superfluous words.
693. Hyperbaton, or Trajection, is a violent displacement of
words.
Lydia die per omnes te deos 5ro. Hon. (415, R.)
694. Anacoluthon, or want of sequence, occurs when the
scheme of a sentence is changed in its course.
695. Hendiadys (ev Sid dvozr) consists in giving an analy-
sis instead of a complex, in putting two substantives connected
by a copulative conjunction, instead of one substantive and
an adjective or attributive genitive :
Vulgus et multitude), the common herd.
Via et ratio, scientific method.
VI et armis, by force of arms.
Remark. — This figure is much abused by commentators.
696. Constructio Praegnans. So-called constrnctio praegnans
is nothing but an extended application of the accusative of the
Inner Object (Object Effected). The result is involved, not
distinctly stated.
Exitium irritat. Tac. He provokes destruction. (Ad exitium irritat.)
697. On Litotes, see 448, R. 2.
PROSODY.
698. Prosody treats of Quantity and Versification.
Remark. — Prosody originally meant Accent. Latin Accent is regu-
lated by Quantity, and as classic Latin versification is also quantitative,
Prosody is loosely used of both quantity and versification.
Quantity.
699. Eule I. — A syllable is said to be long by nature when
it contains a long vowel or diphthong : o, vae, leges, saevae.
Remark. — Every vowel sound followed by j is long. This is due
sometimes to the broad sound of the j itself, sometimes to natural length
j of the vowel, sometimes to compensation (G-ajus for Gaius, pejero for
perjero). J does not make position in the compounds of jugum, yoke ;
bijugus, two-horse.
700. Bule II.— A syllable is said to be long by position when
a short vowel is followed by two or more consonants, or a
double consonant : a rs, c o llran, d i sco, c a stra.
Remarks. — 1. The consonants may be divided between two words:
per m are, in t erris ; but when all the consonants are in the second word,
the preceding short syllable commonly remains short : praemia scribae.
2. The natural length of a vowel before two consonants is often hard,
often impossible, to determine. Every vowel before nf and ns seems to
have had a long sound. Other points are too much disputed to be intro-
duced into an elementary treatise. With the clear and full pronunciation
of the vowels, the difference between length by nature and length by posi-
tion was probably not so great as might be supposed.
tat.)
701. Eule III. — A syllable ending in a short vowel before
mute, followed by 1 or r, is common : tene-brae.
340 QUANTITY OF FINAL SYLLABLES.
Remarks. — 1. The syllable must end in a short vowel: navi-fragus,
melll-fluus ; but a b-rumpo, 6 b-liviscor.
2. In Greek words, m and n are included under this rule : Te-cmessa,
Cy-cnus.
702. Eule IV. — Every diphthong, and every vowel derived
from a diphthong, or contracted from other vowels, is long :
saevus, concludo (from claudo), iniquus (from aequus), cogo
(from coigo = con 4- ago).
Exception. — Prae in composition is shortened before a vowel ; prae-
ustus.
703. Eule V. — One simple vowel before another vowel-
sound, or h, makes a short syllable : deus, God ; puer, loy ;
nihil, nothing.
Exceptions. — 1. a in the old Genitive of the First Declension : aural.
2. e in -el of the Fifth Declension, when a vowel pre-
cedes : diei, but fidel.
3. a and e before i in proper names in -jus : Gal,
Pompei.
4. i in the Genitive form -ius. Alterius is often short-
ened, perhaps even in prose : unius, ullius, nullius,
totius, are found in poetry. In alius the i is never
shortened (alius for aliius).
5. i in fio (for fuio) is long, except before r : flo, but
fieret.
6. eheu, Diana, one, dius (= divus).
7. Many Greek words : a er, Menel a us, mus e urn,
Med 5 a.
Quantity of Final Syllables.
A. Polysyllables.
704. Eule VI. — In words of more than one syllable, final
a, e, and y are short ; i, o, and u are long.
1. a is short: terra, earth ; dona, gifts ; capita, heads.
Exceptions. — 1. Ablative of the First Declension : terra.
2. Vocative of words in as (Aenea), and Greek Nomin
ative in a long (Electra).
3. Imperative of First Conjugation : ama.
4. Most uninflected words : triginta, juxta- but ita
quia, eja, puta {for instance).
;i)iti
QUANTITY OF FINAL SYLLABLES. 341
2. e is short
Exceptions. — 1. Ablative of the Fifth Declension: die.
2. Imperative of Second Conjugation : mone (but cave7
and occasionally other Iambic Imperatives).
3. Most adverbs of Second Declension : recte (but bene,
male, inferne, superne, saepe).
4. Greek words in e long {rj) : Tempe, mele.
3. y is always short, except in contracted forms : misy (Dative misy =
misyi).
4. i is long : domini, viginti, audi.
Exceptions.—!. Greek Dative si : Troasi.
2. Greek Nominatives, sinapi Vocatives, Pari; Da-
tives Sing, (rarely) Minoidi.
3. quasi, nisi, cui (when a dissyllable).
4. i is common in mihi, tibi, sibi, ibi, ubi.
Observe the compounds : ibidem, ibique, ublque, ubinam, ubivis, ubi-
cunque, necubi ; (uti, but) utinam, utique, slcuti.
5. o is long : bono, tut5.
Exceptions. — 1. Common in Nominatives of proper names, and occa-
sionally in common nouns : Scipio, virgo.
2. Common in verbal forms, but more rarely outside of
the Present Tense or in verbs with long penults :
scio, puto, volo ; esto, credo. The short pronun-
ciation extended sometimes even to the Gerund :
amando.
3. o is short in modb, cito, dub, octb, ego, illicb, immb,
and in many other words (in later poetry).
6. u is always long : cornu, fructu, auditu.
705. Eule VII. — All final syllables that end in a simple
consonant other than s are short.
Exceptions. — 1. alec, lien, and many Greek nouns.
2. The adverbs and oblique cases of illic, illuc, istic,
istuc, can hardly be considered exceptions, as -c is
for -ce, and is merely enclitic.
3. Compounds of par : dispar, impar.
4. iit, petiit, and their compounds.
706. Rule VIII. — Of final syllables in s : as, es, os, are long;
; is, us, ys, short.
842 QUANTITY OF FINAL SYLLABLES.
1. as is long : Aeneas, servas, amas.
Exceptions. — 1. Greek nouns in as, adis : Areas, Arcadis.
2. Greek Accusative Plural, Third Declension : heroas,
Arcadas.
3. anas, anatis.
2. es is long : reges, dies, mones.
Exceptions. — 1. Nominative Singular Third Declension, when the
Genitive has etis, itis, idis : seges, miles, obses ;
but abies, aries, paries.
2. Compounds of es, be : ades, potes.
3. penes (Preposition).
4. Greek words in es (e$) : Nominative Plural, Arcades ;
Vocative, Demosthenes ; Neuter, cacoethes.
3. os is long : de5s, nepos.
Exceptions. — 1. Compos, impbs, exos.
2. Greek words in os (oS) : melbs.
4. is is short : canis, legis.
Exceptions. — 1. Dative and Ablative Plural . terris, bonis.
2. Accusative Plural of the Third Declension : omnis =
omnes.
3. In the Nominative of sundry words, increasing long
in the Genitive : Quiris, Quiritis.
4. Second Person Singular Present Indicative Active,
Fourth Conjugation : audis.
5. In the verbal forms from vis, sis, fis, and velis :
no-lis, ma-lis, ad-sis, cale-fis.
6. In the Second Person Singular Future Perfect In-
dicative and Perfect Subjunctive, is is common ;
videris.
5. us is short : servus, curriis.
Exceptions. — 1. Gen. Sin., Nom. and Ace. Plural, Fourth Declension ;
curriis.
2. Nominative Third Declension, when the Genitive has
a long u : virtus, virtutis ; incus, inciidis : tellus,
telluris.
3. In Greek words with u long (ovS) : tripiis, Sapphus ;
but Oedipus and polypus.
6. ys is short : chlamys.
QUANTITY OF MONOSYLLABLES. 343
B. Monosyllables.
707. Kule IX. — All monosyllables that end in a vowel are
long : a, da, me, de, hi, si, 6, do, tu.
Except the enclitics : -que, -ve, -ne, -ce, -te, -pses -pte.
708. Bule X. — Declined or conjugated monosyllables that
end in a consonant follow the rules given : das, fles, scis, dat,
net, is, id, quis, his, quis, quos.
hie and hoc (Nominative and Accusative) are sometimes short ; die and
due have the quantity of their verbs ; es, be, is short.
709. Bule XL — -Monosyllabic Nominatives of Substantives
and Adjectives are long when they end in a consonant, even if
the stem-syllable be short: os, mos, ver, sol, ftir, plus; lar (laris),
pes (pedis), bos (bovis), par (paris).
Exceptions. — vir and lac, os (ossis), mel ;
Also cor, vas (vadis), fel.
710. Eule XII. — Monosyllabic particles that end in a con-
sonant are short : an, cis, in, nee, per, ter.
Excepting en and n5n and quin ;
And also eras and cur and sin ;
Also the Adverbs in c : hie, hue, hac, sic.
Quantity of Stem-Syllables.
711. Eule XIII. — The quantity of stem-syllables, when not
determined by the general rules, is fixed by the usage of the
poets (long or short by authority).
Remarks. — 1. The changes of quantity in the formation of tense-stems
have been set forth in the conjugation of the verb, (153, 2.)
2. The occasional differences in the quantity of the stem- syllables,
which spring from the same radical, can only be explained by reference
to the history of each word, and cannot be given here.
QUANTITY
in
compounds.
pax, pacis.
sedeo,
sedes.
macero.
fides,
fido (feido).
lex, legis.
dux, ducis,
duco (douco).
rex, regis.
voco,
v5x.
tegula.
lucerna,
luceo (louceo).
acerbus.
suspicor,
suspicio.
molestus.
mbveo,
mobilis (= movbilis).
Quantity
ik Compounds.
paciscor,
macer,
lego,
rego,
tego,
acer,
moles,
712. Eule XIV. — Compounds generally keep the quantity
of their constituent parts: (cedo), ante-cedo, de-cedo, pro-cedo,
(caedo), occldo (cado), occido.
Eemarks. — 1. Of the inseparable prefixes, di, se, and ve, are long, re,
short : diduco, sediico, vecors, rediico. Exceptions : di in disertus is
short ; in dirimo dir stands for dis.
2. Ne is short, except in nedum, nemo (ne-hemo), nequam, nequid-
quam, nequaquam, nequitia, neve, necnbi, necunde.
8. Re is sometimes lengthened ; the following letter is then doubled in
many texts: rel(l)igio, rel(l)iquiae, rep(p)erit, re(t)tulit ; compare reddo.
Re is for red, but, except in perfect stems and in dactylic poetry, there is
no compensation.
4. Pro is shortened in many words, especially before f : prbfugio, profii-
gus, profundus, profiteor, prbfari, profanus, prbficiscor, prbcella, prbcul,
prbnepos. The older language shortens less frequently than the later.
In Greek words pro {jcpo) is generally short : prbpheta.
5. The second part of the compound is sometim es shortened : dejero,
(from juro), cognitus, agnitus (from notus). Notice the quantity in the
compounds of -dicus : fatidi cus, verid icus (dlco), and inniiba, pronuba
(nubo).
6. Mechanical rules, more minute than those given above, might be
multiplied indefinitely, but they are all open to so many exceptions as to
be of little practical value. A correct pronunciation of Latin cannot be
acquired except by constant practice, under the direction of a competent
teacher, or by a diligent study of the Latin poets, and consequently of
Latin versification.
ElGUKES OF PKOSODY.
713. Poetry often preserves the older forms of language, and
perpetuates peculiarities of pronunciation, both of which are too
frequently set down to poetic licence.
T
'
FIGURES OF PROSODY. 345
714. Hiatus and Elision. — Hiatus is the meeting of two
vowels in separate syllables, which meeting produces an almost
continuous opening (yawning) of the vocal tube. In the body
of a word this hiatus, or yawning, is avoided sometimes by con-
traction, often by shortening the first vowel (13).
In poetry, when one word ends with a vowel and another
begins with a vowel, or h, the first vowel is elided. Elision is
not a total omission, but rather a hurried half-pronunciation.
a e
O felix un(a) ant(e) alias Priameia virgo. — Verg.
In like manner m final (a faint nasal sound) is elided with its short
yowel before a vowel or h (EcthUpsis).
u xl e
Monstr(um), horrend(um), inform(e) ingens cui lumen ademptum. —
Verg.
Exceptions. — After a vowel or m final, the word est, is, drops its e
and joins its preceding syllable.
Si rixas t ubi tu pulsas ego vapulo tantum. — Juv.
Aeternas quoniam paenas in morte timendum s t. — Lucr.
Remarks. — 1. The Hiatus is sometimes allowed : a, in the Arsis, chiefly when the first
vowel is long; ft, in the Thesis, when a long vowel is shortened ; c, before a period.
a. Stant et juniperl (h) et castaneae (h) hirsutae. Verg.
d) J b. Credimus 1 an qui (h) amant ipsi sibi somnia fingunt *? Verg.
»i, c. Promissam eripui genero. {h) Arma impia sumpsi. Yerg.
2. Monosyllabic interjections are not elided.
3. On the elision of e in -ne % see 456, R. 2.
715. Diastole. — Many final syllables, which, were originally
long, are restored to their rights by the weight of the Arsis.
1r This is called Diastole.
oi -■
Hostis est ux5r invita quae ad virum nuptum datur. — Plaut.
Dummodo morata recte veniat dotatast satis. — Plaut.
Fectoribus inhians spirantia consulit exta. — Yerg.
Perrupit Acheronta Herculeus labor. — Hor.
Sometimes, however, Diastole arises from the necessities of the verse
(as in proper names), or is owing to a pause (Punctuation).
Nee quas Priamides in aquosis vallibus Idae. — Ov.
Desine plura puer — et quod nunc instat agamus. — Verg.
Remarks. — 1. Scholars are not agreed on all these points.
2. Notice especially -que :
Sideraque ventique nocent avidaeque volucres. Ov,
15*
346 FIGURES OF PROSODY.
716. Systole. — Long syllables which had begun to shorten in
prose, are shortened (Systole).
Obstupui steteruntque comae vox faucibus haesit. — Yerg.
E terra magn(um) alterius spectare laborem — Lucr.
Unius ad certain formam primordia rerum. — Lucr.
Nullius addictus jurare in verba magistri. — Hor.
Remarks.— 1. Many regard the short penult of the Perf. in stetSrunt, dederunt, as
original (dedro in inscriptions).
2. In earlier poetry (e. g. Plautus), many syllables otherwise long by position are
shortened : So Hie, and its forms iste, more rarely ipse. Also inde, unde, and others.
717. Hardening. — The vowels i and u assert their half-con-
sonant nature (Hardening) : abjete, (abiete), genva (g^nua),
tenvia (tenuia).
Fluvjorum rex Eridanus camposque per omnes.— Yerg.
Nam quae tenvia sunt hiscendist nulla potestas, — Lucr.
718. Dialysis. — The consonants j and v assert their half-
vowel nature (Dialysis) : dissoluo (dissolvo), Gaius (Gajus, from
Gavius).
Adulteretur et columba m i 1 u o. — Hor.
719. Syncope. — Short vowels are dropped between conson-
ants, as often in prose (Syncope) : calfacio for calefacio.
Templorum positor templorum sancte r e p o s t o r. — Ov.
Quiddam magnum add ens unum me surpite(= surripite) morti. — I
Hor.
720. Tmesis. — Compound words are separated into their (i
parts (Tmesis).
Quo me cunque rapit tempestas deferor hospes. — Hor.
Remark.— The earlier poets carry Tmesis much further in unwise emulation of the|
Greek. Celebrated is: —
Saxo cere comminuit "brum. Ennius.
721. Synizesis. — Vowels are connected by a slur (Synizesis) J
as often in the living language: deinde, deinceps.
Quid faciam roger anne rogem ? quid deinde rogabo ? — Ov
So even when h intervenes, as dehinc :
Eurum ad se Zephyrumque vocat, dehinc talia fatur. Yerg.
VERSIFICATION. 34?
Remark. — Synize^is (settling together) is also called Synaeresis (taking together), as
opposed to Diaeresis (5) ; but SyDaeresis properly means contraction, as in cogo (for
coigo). and nemo (lor nehemo). Synaloepha is a general term embracing all methods
of avoiding Hiatiis.
722. Peculiarities of S. — In the older poetry, final s, preceded
by a short vowel, is dropped before a consonant.
In somnis vidit priu(s) quam sam (— earn) discere coepit. — Ennius.
Often in Lucretius.
Remark.— In comic poetry, a short final syllable in s blends with est, and sometimes
with es: opust (= opus est) ; simili's (= similis es).
VERSIFICATION.
723. Rhythm. — Rhythm means harmonious movement. In
language, Rhythm is marked by the stress of voice (Accent).
The accented part is called the Arsis ; the unaccented, the
Thesis. The Rhythmical Accent is called the Ictus (blow, beat).
Remark. — Besides the dominant Ictus, there is a subordinate or second-
ary Ictus, just as there is a dominant and a secondary Accent in words.
724. Metre. — Rhythm, when represented in language, is em-
bodied in Metre (Measure). A Metre is a system of syllables
standing in a determined order.
725. Unit of Measure. — The Unit of Measure is the short
syllable: Mora, Tempus (Time), v.
The value in music is ^ = -§-.
The long - is the double of the short.
The value in music is I = \.
Remark.— Any quantity that cannot be measured by the standard unit is called
irrational.
726. Resolutio7i and Contraction. — In some verses, two short
syllables may be used instead of a long (Resolution), or a long
instead of two short (Contraction).
I i"^
Resolution. w w # *. Contraction, ww 0 0.
U I
727. Feet. — As elements of musical strains, Metres are called
iars.
318
VERSIFICATION.
As elements of verses, Metres are called Feet.
As musical strains are composed of equal bars, so verses are
composed of equal feet, marked as in music, thus | .
Remark. — Theoretically, the number of metres is unrestricted ; prac-
tically, only those metres are important that serve to embody the prin-
cipal rhythms.
728. Names of the Feet. — The feet in use are the following :
Feet of '
rHREE Times.
„
Trochee,
— \j
legit.
J/
Iambus,
\j —
legunt.
-fj
Tribrach,
\J \J KJ
legite.
m m m
Feet of
Four Times.
Dactyl,
— KJ \J
legimus.
i n
0 & &
Anapaest,
KS \J —
legerent.
n i
0 o &
Spondee,
--
legi.
i i
0 0
Feet of
Five Times.
Cretic,
— \j —
legerint.
» 9 0
First Paeon,
— ^j \j
^/ legeritis.
i h n
0 0 00
Fourth Paeon,
\J KJ \J
— legimini.
H 1* 1
Bacchius,
W
legebant.
000
Antibacchius,
\J
legistis.
JJS
Feet of Six Times.
Ionicus a major!,
v->
\j collegimns.
\ i n
0 0 00
Ionicus a minSri,
\y kj —
- relegebant.
n i i
Choriambus,
-uu
- colligerent.
i n i
0 0 0 0
Di trochee,
— v^ —
<j colliguntur.
1 M h
0 0 0 0
Diiambus,
vy — w
- legaminl.
P» -1 > J
& 0 0 <ff
VEKSIFICATION.
349
Remark.— Other feet are put down in Latin Grammars, but they do not occur in
Latin verse, if in any, such as :
Pyrrhic,
First Epitrite,
SecoDd Epitrite,
Third Epitrite,
Fourth Epitrite,
legit
relegerunt.
eligebant.
selegerint.
colleglstis.
Antispast,
Dispondee,
Second Paeon,
Third Paeon,
Molossus,
legebaris.
selegerunt.
l§gentibus.
legitote.
legeriint.
729. Ascending and Descending Rhythms. — Rhythms are
divided into ascending and descending. If the Arsis follows,
the Ehythm is called ascending ; if it precedes, descending. So
the Trochee has a descending, the Iambus an ascending, rhythm.
Ascending rhythms may become descending by Anacrusis.
When the Thesis precedes the Arsis, it is cut off and called
an Anacrusis {upward stroke, signal-beat). So the Iambus is re-
garded as an Anacrustic Trochee, the Anapaest as an Anacrus-
tic Dactyl, the Ionicus a minori as an Anacrustic Ionicus a
major! The sign of the Anacrusis is: .
730. Names of Rhythms. — Rhythms are commonly called
after their principal metrical representative. So the Trochaic
Ehythm, the Anapaestic Rhythm, the Iambic Rhythm, the
Dactylic Rhythm, the Ionic Rhythm.
731. Classes of Rhythms. — In Latin, the musical element of
versification is subordinate, and the principles of Greek rhythm
have but a limited application,
The Greek classes are based on the relation of Arsis to Thesis.
I. Equal Class, in which the Arsis is equal to the Thesis (yivoS i6ov).
This may be called the Dactylico- Anapaestic class.
II. Unequal Glass, in which the Arsis is double of the Thesis (ysvot
8i7tAddiov).
This may be called the Trochaico-Iambic class.
III. Quinquepartite or Paeonian Class (Flve-eightJis class), of which the
Cretic and Bacchius are the chief representatives (yevo$ rj/iioXtov).
732. Rhythmical Series. — A Rhythmical Series is an unin-
terrupted succession of rhythmical feet, and takes its name from
the number of feet that compose it.
Monopody = one foot.
Dipody = two feet.
Tripody = three feet.
Tetrapody = four feet.
Pentapody = five feet.
Hexapody = six feet.
350 VERSIFICATION.
Remark?.— 1. The Dipody is the ordinary unit of measure (-meter) in Trochaic, Iam-
bic, and Anapaestic verse. In these rhythms a monometer contains two feet, a dimeter
four, a trimeter six, a tetrameter eight.
2. There are limits to the extension of series.
In Latin, lour feet is the limit of the Dactylic, six of the Trochaic and Iambic series.
All beyond these are compounds.
733. Equality of the Feet. — Every rhythmical series is com-
posed of equal parts. To restore this equality, when it is vio-
lated by language, there are four methods :
1. Syllaba Anceps.
2. Catalexis.
3. Protraction.
4. Correption.
734. Syllaba Anceps. — The final syllable of a series or verse
may be short or long indifferently. It may be short when the
metre demands a long; long when the metre demands a short.
Such a syllable is called a Syllaba Anceps.
735. Catalexis and Pause. — A complete series is called Aca-
talectic ; an incomplete series is called Catalectic. A series or
verse is said to be Oatalectic in syllabam, in dissyllabum, in
trisyllabum, according to the number of syllables in the cata-
lectic foot.
y.w | j:uv; | /. Trimeter dactylicus catalecticus in sylldbam.
j-xj w I j^^j kj I ^w Trimeter dactylicus catalecticus in dissylldbum.
The time is made up by Pause.
The omission of one mora is marked
A
" " two morae "
A
736. Protraction and Syncope. — Protraction (rovrj) consists
in drawing out a long syllable beyond its normal quantity. It
occurs in the body of a verse, and serves to make up for the
omission of one or more theses, which omission is called Syn-
cope.
- = 3=J. - = 4 = J
737. Correption. — Correption is the shortening of a syllable
to suit the measure.
VEKSIFICATICXN-. 351
So oo = two short syllables with the value of one.
So the ordinary (heavy) dactyl is — ^ w = 4 J J J
The light (irrational) dactyl is -vv* =: 3 (lf+i + 1) J3"j
Remark. —Under this head, notice the frequent use of the irrational long in Trochaic
and Iambic verses, and in Anacrusis. The irrational long is marked > .
The following line illustrates all the points mentioned ;
a be b c b cL e
> I— I *- II
-^ -
A'
Nullam | Vare sa- | era || vite pri- | us || severis | arbo | -rem. Hon.
a. Irrational trochee, b. Light dactyl, c. Syncope and Protraction, d. Syllaba
anceps. e. Catalexis.
738. Verse.— A Simple Ehytlim is one that consists of a
simple series.
A Compound Khythm is one that consists of two or more
series.
A Verse is a simple or compound rhythmical series, which
forms a distinct and separate unit. The end of a verse is
marked —
1. By closing with a full word. Two verses cannot divide a word be-
tween them.
2. By the Syllaba Anceps, which can stand unconditionally.
3. By the Hiatus, *. e.y the verse may end with a vowel, though the next
verse begin with one.
Remark.— Occasionally, one verse is run into another by Elision. This is called
Synaphea (dvvdcpeia). It is a violation of the fundamental law, and is not to be imi-
tated. Vekg. A en. i., 332-3, 448-9 ; ii., 745-6.
739. Methods of Combining Verses. — The same verse may be
repeated throughout without recurring groups. So the Heroic
Hexameter, the Iambic Trimeter (Linear Composition). Or the
same verse or different verses maybe grouped in pairs (distichs),
triplets (tristichs), fours (tetrastichs). Beyond these simple
stanzas Latin versification seldom ventured.
Larger groups of series are called Systems.
Larger groups of verses are called Strophes, a name some-
times attached to the Horatian stanzas.
740. Union of Language with Rhythm. — When embodied in
language, rhythm has to deal with rhythmical groups already
352 VERSIFIC ATI ON.
in existence. Every full word is a rhythmical group with its
accent, is a metrical group with its long or short syllables, is a
word-foot. Ictus sometimes conflicts with accent; the unity
of the verse-foot breaks up the unity of the word-foot.
741. Conflict of Ictus and Accent. — In earlier Latin poetry,
the coincidence and conflict of Ictus and Accent are regulated
by subtle laws, the exposition of which would require, too much
space. In ordinary Latin verse, Ictus overrides Accent, at least
according to modern pronunciation.
742. Conflict of Word-foot and Verse-foot — The conflict of
word-foot and verse-foot gives rise to Caesura. Caesura means
an incision produced by the end of a word in the middle of a
verse-foot, and is marked f .
This incision serves as a pause, partly to rest the voice for a more
vigorous effort, partly to prevent monotony by distributing the masses of
the verse.
Remarks.— 1. So in the Heroic Hexameter the great caesura falls before the middle of
the verse, to give the voice strength for the first arsis of the second half.
Una salus victis t nullam sperare salutem. Verg.
It does not occur at the middle, as in. that case the verse would become monotonous.
2. In many treatises any incision in a verse is called a Caesura.
743. Masculine and Feminine Caesurae. — In trisyllabic me-
tres, when the end of the word within the verse-foot falls on an
arsis, it is called a Masculine Caesura ; when on a thesis, a
Feminine Caesura.
a b c d
Una sa | lus t vi | ctis f nul | lam f spe | rare f sa | lutem.
a, &, c, are Masculine Caesurae ; d, a Feminine Caesura.
744. Diaeresis. — When verse-foot and word-foot coincide,
Diaeresis arises, marked thus : ||.
Ite domum saturae f venit || Hesperus | ite capellae. — Verg.
Remark.— Diaeresis, like Caesura, serves to distribute the masses of the verse and
prevent monotony. What is Caesura in an ascending rhythm becomes Diaeresis as soon
as the rhythm is treated anacrustically.
Suis I et i | psat Ro | ma vi I ribus II ruit Iambic Trimeter.
Su : is et II ipsa II Roma II viri | bus t ru I it. Troch. Trimeter, Catal., with Anacru-
sis.
VERSIFICATION. 353
745. Recitation. — "When the word-foot runs oyer into the
next verse-foot, a more energetic recitation is required, in order
to preserve the sense, and hence the multiplication of Caesurae
lends vigor to the verse.
Remark. — The ordinary mode of scanning, or singing out the elements of a verse,
without reference to signification, cannot be too strongly condemned, as,
Unasa, lusvic, tisnul, lamspe, raresa, lutein !
Trochaic Ehythms.
746. The Trochaic Ehythm is a descending rhythm, in which
the arsis is double of the thesis. It is represented —
By the Trochee : ^ v ;
By the Tribrach : \0 ^ w; and, at the end of a series,
By the Spondee : -c — , or rather the irrational Trochee, — > .
Remarks.— 1. Anapaests are rare. Dactyls are used only in proper names. Both are
of course irrational. In the earlier poets, however, the treatment of the Trochaic verse
is very free.
2. Trochaic-meters, being compounded of dipodies (ditrochaei), have £ instead of |-
time (729). The second trochee of each dipody (-meter) may be irrational on the principle
of syllaba anceps. Hence the rule :
747. Trochaic-meters admit the substitution of a long for
the short of the even places.
1. Trochaic Tripody (Ithy phallic).
Bassareu bicornis. — Atil. Fort. zu| -v; | -u
2. Trochaic Tetrapody (Catalectic).
Aula divitem manet. — Hon. ^u | -u | -u | - »
3. Trochaic Dimeter, a. Acatalectic ; o. Catalectic.
a. Vive laetus quisque vivis. jlkj \ — >|^.v^|— 3
5. Vita parvom munus est. — Anthol. Lat. zu | -> | zu | - »
4. Trochaic Dimeter with Anacrusis {Alcaic). *
Si fractus illabatur orbis. — Hor. ^:^.v>» | — > | jl. <j | — 3
748. 5. Trochaic Tetrameter Acatalectic (Octonarius).
JLKJ I "-> I JLKJ I -> I JLKJ J -> J JLKJ I -C;.
Farce jam camoena vati parce jam sacro furori. — Servius.
Remark.— This verse and the following are compounds. The Octonarius is com-
pounded of two Dimeters acatalectic ; hence regular Diaeresis after the Dimeter ; freely
handled in comedy ; Hiatus in the Diaeresis ; Monotonous, on account of the division
into two equal parts. It occurs occasionally in Plautus and Terence.
354 VERSIFICATION.
Verba dum sint, verum si ad rem II conferentur, vapulabit. Ter.
Sine modo et modestia sum II sine bono jure atque honore. Plaut.
Petulans protervo iracundo II animo indomito incogitato. Plaut.
749. 6. "Trochaic Tetrameter Catalectic (Septenarius).
-^ ^ _ >^^_ > ||^.w_>-z_^_/^
Cras amet qui nunquam amavit || quique amavit eras amet. Pervig.
Ven.
Tu me amoris magi' quam honoris | servavisti gratia. Ennius.
Vapulare te vehementer || jubeo : ne me territes. Plaut.
Remark. — The Trochaic Tetrameter (so called by eminence) is of frequent occurrence
in comic poetry. It is compounded of Dimeter + Dimeter Catalectic. Hiatus is often
found at the break.
Manibu' puris capite operto II ibi continuo contonat. Plaut.
Iambic Ehythms.
750. The Iambic Rhythm is an ascending rhythm, in which
the arsis is double of the thesis. It is represented
By the Iambus : ^ ^- ;
By the Tribrach : w & ^ ;
By the Spondee : _ ^ (in -meters) ;
By the Dactyl : — kO ^ (sometimes) ; and
By the Anapaest: w w ^.
Remark.— Of course, Spondee, Dactyl, and Anapaest, are all irrational. The Spondee
— _ > ? the Anapaest, — w w > , and the Dactyl, - -vw.
751. Iambic -meters admit substitution of a long for the
short of the odd feet.
Remark.— Regarding the Iambus as an Anacrustic Trochee, the same rule and reason
hold for the substitution in the one, as in the other (746, R. 2).
752. 7. Iambic Dimeter.
Usual Scheme. Anacrustic Scheme.
Inarsit aestuosius v^^w_^^.^_ vy ; xu|„u|/.w|- a
Imbres nivesque com-
parat _^.w_w^w_ > : ^u|_uUu|_ *
Videre properantes
domum _^.w^^ — ^ w __ > : zw|uu>|jcu|_ a
Ast ego vicissim ri-
sero. Hor. _^w^ ^.w__ > : v^ww|_>|^_w|_a
Remark.— According to the Anacrustic Scheme, the Iambic Dimeter Acatalectus is a
trochaic Dimeter Catalectic with Anacrusis.
VERSIFICATION. 355
753. 8. Iambic Trimeter Catalectic.
Mea renidet in domo lacunar w^w_w^.w__w^.^
Regumque pueris nee satelles Orci. Hon. _^^ww_^.w_w^^
Anacrustic Scheme : > : — w | _ > | _ ^ | _ w | l__ | _ ^ (with Syn-
cope).
754. 9. lamlic Trimeter Acatalectic (Senarius).
Suis et ipsa f Roma viribus ruit w-^v/— w^w_w^.w_
Heu me per urbem t nam pudet tanti
mali __^w ^.w ^w_
Deripere lunamf vocibus possim meis _ v£ w w ^.^ ^.w —
Infamis Helenae f Castor offensus
vicem — -^■www — ^-w ^-v^__
Optat quietem f Pelopis infidi pater —^.^ ^ ^ ^ ^w —
Alitibus atque f canibus homicidam
Hectorem — \i> kj kj kj \D w kj w w -^-w
Vectabor humeris f tunc ego inimicis
e ques — -^-wv^w — -^-www *- \j —
Pavidumque leporem et f advenam
laqueo gruem. Hon. ww^-ww^^^^ — ww-^-^.-
Anacrustic Scheme : ^:_w|_'i_^l_^l_w
>, ... >.
Remarks.— 1. The Iambic Trimeter when kept pure has a rapid aggressive movement.
Hence, it is thus used in lampoons and invectives. It admits the Spondee in the odd
places (first, third, fifth foot) ; the Tribrach in any but the last ; the Dactyl in the first
and third, The Anapaest is rare. When carefully handled, the closing part of the verse
is kept light, so as to preserve the character. Special study is necessary to understand
the treatment of the comic Trimeter.
2. Caesurae.— The principal caesura is the Penthemimeral, which falls on the middle
of the third foot (7tevBr/jUlJ^£ft77^ = 2^) an(* is rarely wanting. Less important is the
Hepthemimeral (scpS-q/uijuepr/S = 3^)r which falls on the middle of the fourth foot.
w_ ] w_ | wj*__ | wj*_ | w_ | w_
Levis crepante t lympha t de silit pede. Hor.
Of course in the Anacrustic Scheme the Caesura of the ordinary scheme becomes
Diaeresis.
Le : vis ere I pante !l lympha !! desi I lit pe I de.
3. A break (Diaeresis) at the middle of the verse is avoided. Short particles, which
adhere closely to the following word, do not constitute exceptions.
Laboriosa nec_cohors Ulixei. Hor.
Adulteretur etcolumba miluo. Hor.
In like manner explain —
Refertque tanta grexamicus ubera. Hor.
356 VERSIFICATION.
755- 10. Trimeter lambicus Claudiis (Choliambus) ; Scazon
(= llohbler) Hipponacteus.
Miser Catulle desinas ineptire. Cat. w^w — w^.v^__w^^.w
Fulsere quondam candidi tibi soles. Cat. — jl \j .z. w — w -£--£• \^
Dominis parantur ista ; serviunt vobis.
Mart. u u z w kj jl. \j u zz vy
Remarks.— 1. In the Choliambus the rhythm is reversed at the close, by putting a
trochee or spondee in the sixth foot. The lighter the first part of the verse, the
greater the surprise. It is intended to express comic anger, resentment, disappoint-
ment.
2. The Anacrustic measurement is as follows :
:_w | _ | _w | _w |i | _w. Trochaic Trimeter with Anacrusis
Syncope and Protraction.
756. 11. Iambic Tetrameter Acatalectic (Octonarius).
W-^-W — -Z- W — \J I ■*- KJ — \J -Z- KJ —
Hie finis est iambe salve f vindicis doctor mali. Seryitjs.
Te cum securi caudicali f praeficio provinciae. Platjt.
Remark.— This verse occurs frequently in the comic poets, and is to be regarded as a
compound. It either divides itself into equal parts at the end of the first Dimeter (with
Hiatus and Syllaba Anceps) or has a Caesura in the first Thesis of the third Dimeter.
1. 0 Troja, 0 patria, 0 Pergamum, II 0 Priame, periisti senex. Plaut.
Is porro me autem verberat II incursat pugnis calcibus. Plaut.
2. Facile omnes quum valemus recta | consilia aegrotis damus. Ter.
757. 12. Iambic Tetrameter Catalectic (Septenarius).
Remitte pallium mihi f meum quod involasti. Cat.
Remarks.— 1. This verse is to be regarded as a compound of Dimeter + Dimeter Ca-
talectic : hence, regular Diaeresis after the first Dimeter :
With Syllaba Anceps :
Si abduxeris celabitur II itidem ut celata adhuc est. Plaut.
With Hiatus :
Sed si tibi viginti minae II argenti proferuntur. Platjt.
2. It may be measured anacrustically :
Dactylic Ehtthms.
758. The Dactylic Rhythm is a descending rhythm, in which
the Arsis is equal to the Thesis (2 = 2).
The Dactylic Khythm is represented by the Dactyl : ^ w ^.
Often, also, by the Spondee : ^ -•
VERSIFICATION. 357
A Dactylic verse of one Dactyl is called a Monometer ; of two,
a Dimeter ; of three, a Trimeter; of four, a Tetrameter ; of five,
a Pentameter ; of six, an Hexameter.
759. 13. Dactylic Dimeter {Adonic).
Terruit urbem. Hon. ^. w w ^ —
Remark.— Though generally measured thus, this verse is properly logaoedic, and will
recur under that head.
760. 14. Dactylic Trimeter Oatalectic in Syllabam.
Pulvis et umbra sumus, Hor. *- ^ ^ ■*- ^ ^ ■*-
15. Dactylic Tetrameter Gatalectic in Dissyllabum.
Aut Epheson bimarisve Corinthi ^v^w^_^w^ww^3
O fortes pejoraque passi j^-.^._^.ww^3
Mensorem cohibent Archyta. Hon. ^. — jl. \j ^ jl — x. Z>
16. Dactylic Tetrameter Acatalectic (Alcmanius).
Nunc decet aut viridi nitidum caput jlkj\jj^\j\j^.\j\jjl\j\j
Pallida mors aequo pulsat pede ^.ww^_^._^ww
Vitae summa brevis spem nos vetat ^_^.ww^._^.ww
Occurs only in combination.
Heroic Hexameter.
761. 17. L*Jv|iJof^3vH^uU|^|^-
1. Ut fugiunt aquilas t timidissima II turba columbae. Ov. 1
2. At tuba terribili t sonitu t procul || aere canoro. Yerg. I
3. Quadrupedante putrem t sonitu I quatit II ungula campum. i lve ac y s*
Verg. J
4. Cum medio celeres t revolant i exjiequore mergi. Verg. \
5. Vastius insurgens t decimae I ruit II impetus undae. Ov. >■ Four Dactyls.
6. Et reboat raucum t regio t cita II barbara I bombum. Luck. )
7. Muta metu terram t genibus t summissa petebat Lucr. \
8. Inter cunctantes t cecidit t moribunda ministros. Verg. V Three Dactyls.
9. Ne turbata volent t rapidis t ludibria ventis. Verg. )
10. Versaque in obnixos t urgentur II cornua vasto. Verg. ) t d
11. Processit longe t flammantia II moenia mundi- Lucr. j
12. Portam vi multa t converso II cardine torquet Verg. ) ■
13. Tectum augustum ingens t centum sublime columnis. Verg. J
14. Olli respondit t Rex_AlbaI Longai. Ennius. \ No Dactyl.
— is:?: :_t:
..:.-::::•:■:■:::::• i--i: Lrrei:: Tel*.
' -::.L::-;.:;^--_:::.::, Aii^ulil^s ~-~
% The two reigning ietnses are the first and fonft, and the pnmueioani;-''
- _- - ■ - -■ : • -----: .-_-.;-.- -- _i --,-■- ■._• - - i ::;;' -.I- p. r::i :»
Terse, the Sonmaa by panses within the Ter*e, both before and after the u
: V - : • - : - - /. " ;•:"•;• " ' ; /- - - - ■'-"-_ ' f the are 3=
saira'rf toe thard foot, the so-ealled TKittf rroe^ wMch is less used among
than among the Greek* ; then the Hqtithemimeral 3^j in the arsis of the :
,. -; _.... . ;._-; ■ -:.• • -. *.- ■_•-.- . -. .. -. -;;.--: ".;.-_-.•.; .-.---. ' ". ■ ; r^:'! ■'. '
•i-' ■■■-;- , •-::--,-•:.,, :-•::•:•; " " ' ~ ". ". - ^ - i ^ - ' • ; :- . ;: ; > - :: . .
r " ' -: ."- ': - • - • • " - ' ': ' ' ' ~ . . " :: " -: ; ' *. ; ' * '. ■: ' \ " '. fCl ■ '. *
* : :- i Li • . ------ .:-:.. i ',. '.:■-. : - - .^: .-;.-.-.. '
,;. - : ' • i ! ". . : ' : V . ' " : ' r .' . : ' ". : - ' - ' i. J- ' -': '. -': - -: - *. .'. '-. ' "-': ' " ': '. '. T . 1 ".
;-.- ■ - ; V: :j
Hif laerimii ritam " da.mus - ct miaereseimvs ult:
: ■ i - b. - . * - ~ - ■ . - - ~ • I •: • . ' -. ■ . ■ ' ; ,~ • - ' '. ". . ' . -:-. ' '. '/ . . \
Foemi 1 perrortentef I omnia f eireumcuraant Eyy in.
Cto tte other ha»4, the Bo^>15e t^trapod j. or pause at the end of the fourth foot d: - 1
' - - :: '-^ ' -:.-■-■'■■ - :; v --.-■":■;.-.• i v. : i". -'v.-:. ^ ;;•> ^^
troehaSe sooreaaeirt to th»s h-exaaBaeter. ft is oftem sonant after.
SI Xodi of the oeaaty of the Hexameter depends 00 the selection and arrangemer 1 1
of tibe word* eoMsidered aa metrical elements, The examp
the end of the Hexameter demote sarprise; aoapaestie words, rapid mo d tL^I
Agaki, the Hexameter maybe lowered to a eoitTersatlonal tone by large mas»e£ of
.■■■-,. ■*.■.■■■■ ,■■_ ,;••-.., .-c '.',-.;>. •••: ••■-; .: :'•';;:>," .-;;--;>. '.Mi o/i'.-': i:, :lc
',':>. . -' -.',- - •-- ^\-e»
ve:
762. IS. Elegiac ' T J).
At dolor in lacrimas ] verterat cmne
merum. Tib. _______
Me legat et lecto ] carmine dcctos
amet. C _ _ _ _______
At nunc barbaries ] grandis habere
nihfl. Or. - — !__•_.
Concessum nulla j lege redfbit iter.
Rrop. .
The Elegia." _e Heroic ~£-z-
ameter, with which it forms
Saepe ego tentavi curas depellere vino
At dolor in lacrimal ! vertera: :___._ meruin. Tib,
Ingenium quondam fuerat pretiosi-f __ro
At nunc barbaries | grandis habere nihil. <>v.
Par erat inferior versus risisse Cupido
Dicitur atque unmn | aar
Saepe ego cum dominae iolcea _• _■_■_ __ro
Agnosco vcces | sedomi
Rexarks.— 1. The E
themimers. the first of ? = ■
Diaeresis in -
from the o] I ______________
used in eentime
1 -
_
This show - - - -
.ins the preference
3. As "ie -Santar
the Penta meter as maeh as poss ■ ■ ■ "»
great mec a a . . _ ess . _J m ; . ntanaeter ends in a dissyllable, and elision
led.
AxAr bs Et-frr___s
763. The An is
which the arsis is _is as 2 to & is - —
By the Anapaest : - - - : or
By the Spondee : — .
By the Dactyl: - ^ -
The Anapaestic -iv rfsts c --
le used among the Bo a
300 VERSIFICATION.
19. Dimeter Catalecticus (Paroemiacus).
Volucer pede corpore pulcher w^-c^w — ww^.w
Lingua catus ore canorus _-z.ww_^w^-^
Verum memorare magis quam _^ww — ww-^-w
Functum laudare decebit. AusON. — ■*- ^w^-v>
20. Dimeter Acatalectus.
Venient annis || saecula seris ^kj jl v£w
Quibus Oceanus || vincula rerum ww^wv^ v^w
Laxet et ingens || pateat tellus _ v£ ^ ww^_
Tethysque novos || detegat orbes -xuu v^w
Nee sit terris || ultima Thule. Sen. Trag. _ *- v£w
Syllaba Anceps is rare.
Remarks. —Latin anapaests, as found in later writers, are mere metrical imitations of
the Greek anapaests, and do not correspond to their original in contents. The Greek
anapaest was an anacrustic dactylic measure or march (in 4. time). Hence the use of
Pause to bring out the four bars.
Paroemiacus: Anacrustic Scheme.
Volucer pede corpore pulcher ^ w :_ w ^ | _ww | . | —
A
Dimeter Acatalectus : Anacrustic Scheme.
Quibus Oceanus vincula rerum w ^ : — w w | | ^w— | —
The Theses of the last feet are supplied by the Anacrusis of the following verse.
LOGAOEDIC EHYTHMS.
764. The Logaoedic Khythm is a peculiar form of the tro-
chaic rhythm in which the thesis has a stronger secondary ictus
than the ordinary trochee.
Instead of the trochee, the light dactyl may be employed.
This light or cyclical dactyl is represented in morae by 1%, £, 1 ;
in music, by ££1 = fV, tV> i-
When dactyls are employed, the trochee preceding is called a
Basis, or tread. This trochee may be irrational - > (so-called
spoudee). If the basis is double, the second is almost always
irrational in Latin poetry. The basis is commonly marked X.
Instead of the trochee, an iambus is sometimes prefixed. Ana-
crusis and Syncope are also found.
Remarks.- 1. Logaoedic comes from A, 6y o S, prose, and ocoidtj, song, because the
rhythms seem to vary as in prose.
2. Dactyls are not necessarily employed. No. 4 (Alcaic enneasyllabic) is logaoedic.
versification. 361
One Dactyl.
21. Adonic. (See No. 13.) -t- w ^ — v>
Terruit urbem. Hon. -vu | -v^ |
22. Arisioplianic {Ghoriambic). ^- \j ^ — ^
Lydia die per omnes. Hor. -v ^ | — w ] i— | — A
765. One Dactyl, with Basis.
23. Pherecratean. — x— j- \j ^ — ^
Nigris aequora ventis. Hor. — > \***\* | «— | — A
--i-A
24. Glyconic.
Bmirabitur insolens. Hor. — > |
25. Phalaecean (Hendecasyllabic). _x_ )
Passer mortuus est meae puellae — w y^w — v — v-.^
Arida modo piimice expolitum kD — )
Tuae Lesbia sint satis superque. Cat. _> |-^w | _ u | _v^|— ^
Remark.— The so-called spurious Phalaecean admits the Spondee — > in the place
of the dactyl.
Quas vidi vultu tamen sereno. Cat.
766. One Dactyl, with Double Basis.
26. Sapphic {Hendecasyllabic). *- v^ — *_ ^.f^w_w«^
Audiet cives f acuisse ferrum. Hor. — ^ | _> | _ f <» | — w | — \j
Remark.— The Greek measure (Catullus) is _u I _> I -vu I _v I „a
767. One Dactyl with Double Basis and Anacrusis.
27. Alcaic (Greater) Hendecasyllabic. Z ,— w _*-. J jl ^ ^ _ kj _
Vides ut alta [| stet nive candidum ^ : — ^ I — > | -v ^ | — ^ | —A
Soracte nee jam || stistineant onus. Hor.
Remark.— The second basis always a spondee in Horace.
768. Two Dactyls.
28. Alcaic (Lesser) or Decasyllabic. jlwjlw^kj — Z>
Vertere funeribus triumphos. Hor. -^w |-~w | — ^ | — w
16
O 02 VERSIFICATION.
In all these, the Dactyl has a diminished value. More questionable is
the logaoedic character of the Greater Archilochian.
769. 29. Archilochian {Greater) = Dactyl. Tetr. and Troch.
Tripody.
Solvitur acris hiems grata vice | veris et Favoni. Hon.
Remark.— If measured logaoedically, the two shorts of the dactyl must be reduced in
value to one (go — ^)y and the logaoedic scheme is
-£l-£l-£l-£l-~l-~l-l-A
Logaoedic tetrapody + Logaoedic tetrapody with Syncope.
770. ChoriamMc Rhythms. — When a logaoedic series is syn-
copated, apparent choriambi arise. What is I -* ^ I »— I seems
to be -ww-. Genuine choriambi do not exist in Latin.
30. Asclepiadean (Lesser). -^ww-_-^ww_w_
Maecenas atavis || edite
regibus. Hor. — > | -^ w | t__ || -^ ^ | _ ^ | L
31. Asclepiadean (Greater). _*_ ^.ww_^ww_^ww«v^_
Nullam Vare sacra || vite
prius J severis arbo-
rem. Hor. _> | -y | l_ || -™ | u_ | -»y | _ v | _ A
32. Sapphic ( Greater). _ x^, _ x_ ^.ww — ^w^/_w_3
Te deos oro Sybarin || cur
properas amando.
Hor. _w I _> | ^w | l_ 1 -w | _^ | l_ | _
33. Priapean (Gly conic +
Pherecratean). __x_ ^^w_w_ || L __ -c w v^ _ v-»
Hunc lucum tibi dedico ||
consecroque Priape.
Cat. _> | -vv, | — w | i_ || — > | ~^o | i_ | .
Cretic and Bacchic Ehythms.
771. These passionate rhythms are found occasionally in the
comic poets. They both belong to the Quinquepartite or Five-
EightTfis class.
1. The distribution of the Creticus is 3 + 2 morae.
The metrical value of the Creticus is — ^ _ (Amphimacer).
VERSIFICATION. 303
Second long resolved _ w w w Paeon Primus.
First long resolved w w w _ Paeon Quartus.
34. Tetrameter Catalecticus. -^w^^.v-/-i.^w^-c_
Da mi(hi) hoc mel meum si me amas saudes. Plaut.
35. Tetrameter Acatalectus. z.u^xUi.ivxxu^
Ex bonis pessumi et fraudiilentissumi. Platjt.
2. The Bacchius has the following measure : v^^_l + 2 + 2 morae
( M i V or if the descending form — -ube regarded as the normal one
2 + 2 + 1 morae (J J ^).
36. Bacchic Tetrameter.
Quibus nee locust ullu' nee spes parata w.z._v^^_w-^ — uzG
Misericordior nulla mest feminarum w J"b _kjjl-.kjjl — \jx.\j
I Ionic Ehythm.
772. The Ionic Khytlim is represented by Ionicus a major!
. — ^^ 000 0- For the Ionicus a major! maybe substituted
i the Ditrochaeus -^_w. This is called Anaclasis (breaking-
, UP)-
The verse is commonly anacrustic, so that it begins with the
^1 thesis ^ ^ : - -. Such verses are called Ionic! a minor!.
The second long has a strong secondary ictus.
773. 37. An Ionic System is found in Horace, Od. iii. 12.
It consists of two periods, the first being made up of two di-
podies, the second of two tripodies.
Ionicus a minori scheme :
Miser arum est neque amori kj\jj^ — ^v-z-—\
dare ludum neque dulci ww^.„w^^._|
mala vino lavere aut exanimari v^w^-_^w-^— w^-^— |
metuentes patruae verbera linguae uuz_^w^.-vyuz..|
Ionicus a majorl scheme ;
w w : w w | , I I, 2
A
ww : __^ w | --^| 2
w w : — _vu | uu | II. 3
w w : ww| uu | -r 3
364 VERSIFICATION.
Remarks.— 1. The Roman numerals refer to periods, the Arabic to the number of
feet or bars, the dots indicate the end of a line.
The iOnicus is an excited measure, and serves to express the frenzy of distress as
well as the madness of triumph.
774. 38. Tetrameter Catalechc.
The Galliainbic verse (Tetrameter Catalectic) is found in a famous
poem by Catullus (lxiii).
Ordinary Scheme :
Without Anaclasis : ^w^.__w^^_ww^. — uu^.
With Anaclasis : w^-^wjiw^._ww^.w_w^.
Anacrustic Scheme :
Without Anaclasis : w w : w ^ | f ^ ^ I uw I1—1 — 1
A
With Anaclasis : uu:-u_u| f ^ w | — w__w|l_j_||
A
The Anaclastic form is the more common. The Anacrusis may be contracted (9 times
in the Attis).
The frequent resolutions and conversions give this verse a peculiarly wild character.
Et earum omnia adirem furibunda
latibula uux-uu^_^u^.uuu^i
Quo nos decet citatis celerare tri-
t
pudiis -.j-kj.£-\jx. — \j\jjl\j^,\j\jx.\j
Itaque ut domum Cybebes tetigere
lassulae \j\jx.\j^.\j-£-—. \j\jjl\jjl\j^s^j
Super alta vectus Attis celeri rate
maria \j\jjl.\jj-k_/-£- — \j\j^-\j\j \j \j x.
Jam jam dolet quod egi jam j anti-
que paenitet __^.v^^.vy^. jl\j j-\j x.
775. Verses Compounded of Iambi and Dactyls.
89. 1. Iambelegus. Iambic Dimeter and Dactylic Penthemimeris.
Tu vina Torquato move || consul e
pressa meo. Hon. w^w_^^.w^||-cv^v^-cv/^^l|
Or as two verses :
>-:— ■|->I-V-A"l
A
A
VERSIFICATION. 365
776.
40. 2. Elegiambus {Dactylic Penthemimeris and Iambic Dimeter).
Desinet imparibus || certare submo-
tus pudor. Hor.
Or as two verses :
-wu|_^u|_-.[
A
> . .,1 > ,
I _£| -vl
Saturnian Verse.
777. The Saturnian verse is an old Italian rhythm which
occurs in the earlier monuments of Latin literature. It divides
itself into two parts, with three Arses in each : —
The queen was in lier 'parlor ',
Eating bread and honey v.
Dabunt malum Metelli Naevio poetae
Iterum triumpans in urbem Romam rediit
Duello magno dirimundo regibus subigundis.
778. Lyric Metres of Horace.
I. Asclepiadean Strophe No. 1. Lesser Asclepiadean Verse (No. 30)
repeated in tetrastichs.
_£.\^/W_|j_£.V^^,_W__
Or thus :
->
1— 1^-11— 1 -v 1 -AJ
3
3
->
|-u|^||-vv|-w|-Ai
3
3
->
1— ' l«-|-^ 1 -- I -Al!
3
3
->
|^w | l_|-vw | -^ | _A ||
3
3
In Od. i. 1 ;
iii. 30 ;
iv. 8.
OA
AsclSpiadean (No. 30) alternating, and so forming tetrastichs.
v^w_w
3G6 VERSIFICATION.
Or thus : ->|'-vvs1— vs|_Aj 4
1 ' ' A" *
_> |^J lu-l^v, I --|-A» 8
-> I — I -- I -All i
->|-ww|(_|-wv|-w|-A| 3
A 3
In Od. i. 3, 13, 19, 36 ; ii. 9, 15, 19, 24, 25, 28 ; iv. 1, 3.
III. AsctepiadSan Strophe No. 3. Three Lesser Asclepiadean Verses,
followed by a Glycouic (Nos. 30 and 24).
_x_^uv,_|zuw_^_ _>|-^|l_||-^|_w|_a 3
— x— ^^w_||jiww_w— -> I -vv I 1 — || -^ w | _ w | _ 3
A 3
-x_ ^ww_||^^^_w- ->|-^w|l_||-vw|_w|_^ ^
3
— X_ -C-^f KJ — W — __>|-V^|_W|_
/\ 4
In Od. i. 6, 15, 24, 33 ; ii. 12 ; iii. 10, 16 ; iv. 5, 12.
IV. AsclepiadSan Strophe No. 4. Two Lesser Asclgpiadean Verses
(No. 30), a Pherecratean (No. 23), and a Glyconic (No. 24).
__x_ iu^_|^.uu_u_ I. _>|^w|l_||-^w|_^||| 1.3
/\ o
_X_-^W_||^WW_W_ _> I -»KJ I L_||-VW I _ W I _ J 3
/x 3
_x_^w_w II. _> |.Wu I l— I - || II.-
A 4
— *_ -^ w w — w _ _>|-^w|_v^|__||
A 4
In Od. i. 5, 14, 21, 23 ; iii. 7, 13 ; iv. 313.
V. AsclSpiadean Strophe No. 5. Greater AsclSpiadean (No. 31), re-
peated in fours.
Or thus :
-> I-wIl-I^Il-I-^ I --I-JI 3
^X-^I^ii-^i^i^i -o|'-Al I
3
_>|^|t_||^|u_||-^|-w| I 1
3
-> I— I -II— I -II— I -- I -All §
In Od. i. 11, 18 ; iv. 10.
VERSIFICATION.
VI. Sapphic Strophe. Three Lesser Sapphics (No. 26), and an Adonic
(No. 21), which is merely a clausula. In No. 26 Horace regularly breaks
the Dactyl.
1 v^l_ j-\ kj w_ w _ kj _ w | _> | _fca I _ ^ I _ WJ
Iu--^t^^-u-^ _v^|_>|_fcj|_w|_w||
^- \j \j J-\J -«U | -W | ?
In Od. i. 2, 10, 12, 20, 22, 25, 25, 30, 32, 38 ; ii. 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 16 ; iii. 8,
11, 14, 18, 20, 22, 27; iv. 2, 6, 11 ; Carmen Saeculare.
Word divided at the end of the third verse; Od, i. 2, 19; 25, 11; ii.
16,7.
VII. Lesser Sapphic Strophe. Aristophanic (No. 22), and Greater
Sapphic (No, 32). Two pairs are combined into a tetrastich.
-£. \J \J \J __ KJ
Or thus :
_ W I _> |-u^ |l__||-^/W |
A"
II 4
"Al! 4
-v l^> |-~y tM-v^ | -^ 1 «— I -Afl 4
In Od. L 8.
VIII. Alcaic Strophe. Two Alcaic verses of eleven syllables (No. 27)
one of nine (No. 4), and one of ten (No. 28).
i - >. T «
-:---X-l------ >:-w|-> |-u|-.| -A i L5
5
u:Iv,_x_l^.uw„v,- >:_^|_>|-v,^|-w|-A|| '
w ■ v ' ' A TT
-. - IL
JL. \J \J \-/ v^» — V-» W
-Vw|-^W | -U | — KJ \
In Od. i. 9, 16, 17, 26, 27, 29, 31, 34, 35, 37 ; ii. 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11, 13, 14, 15
17, 19, 20 ; iii 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 17, 21, 23, 26, 29 ; iv. 4, 9, 15, 17.
568 VERSIFICATION.
IX. Arcliilochian Strophe No. 1. Hexameter (Xo. 17), and Lesser
Aichilochian No. 14), two pairs to a tetrastich.
JS.\y \j I JL \j \j j i | UU | -£. ^ W j _^ v^ ^/ | -£. __
_^ v^ ^ I _^_ w w I .fc
Or -.:„
_v^v^[_^Wj— f VU I _ v^/ w I _ ^ U I I
3
_ w ^ I — w ^ j J
3
_ \J \J — \J \J
_f uu I _uu I -^v I 1 3
— w^'—w^l . I
A ' 3
In Od. ir. 7.
X. Aichik :hian Strophe Xo. 2. A Dactylic Hexameter (Xo. 17), and
in fcmbelegiis X:
\j J- \j \j -L. \J [ -1. W \j -Z- W \J ^-
Or thus :
— VT V* I _V/U | -V/U | —WW j _U w | |
u ■ */ ' A '
Epod. 13.
XT. Archilochian Strophe Xo. 3. An Iambic Trimeter (Xo. 9), fol-
lowed by un El-giambas Xo. 40).
v,- - - ]x*y I - w ° I ' -r A I
.Z. \^/ W _ '^ ^ — s-/ -£. '-^ __ 'V-' -£■ ^
Epod It
u • = <r J A
XII. Archilochian Strophe Xo. L Greater Archilochian (No. 29), and
Trimeter I lectk No. 8). Two pairs combined to form a te-
trastich
iv/jiv-'-'w'^^^v; [ -£. v-/ w __ ^
\J -L- ■sj L/jL\/~ v/^.u
1
Rehjlrk.— This verse u sometimes considered as loguoedic
VERSIFICATION. 309
•a» i
2
_>i
GO '
-I
_ GO || __ \J | _ w
-1
-l\
-^ 1
--IH-A."
Si
-l\
-l\
— GO || _ w | _ w
-a!
4
A " 4
>:_v,|->l-v>l-"|i-|-A
XIII. AJcmanian Strophe. Dactylic Hexameter (No. 17). followed by
Catalectic Dactylic Tetrameter (No. 15).
In Od. i. 7, 28. Epod. 12.
Remark.— The Tetrameter may be considered acatalectic with a spondee in the
fourth place.
XIV. Iambic Trimeter repeated (No. 9).
v/^-w — w-^-w — w^-u- ^ : zu I - I -u I -
', In Epod. 17.
-v'-a
XV. Iambic Strophe. Iambic Trimeter (No. 9), and Dimeter (No. 7).
w-^-w — w^.v_/_ w^w_ > :_w | _ > | _w j _^ | _^ | __A
\j ' w ' ' ^ ' A
> . ! >
"A
In Epod. 1-10.
V/-C.W — ^iU_ w;~Wi""t,|— ^
XVI. Pythiambic Strophe No. 1. Dactylic Hexameter No. 17 (Versus
Pythius), and Iambic Dimeter (No. 7).
Epod. 14, 15.
XVII. Pythiambic Strophe No. 2. Dactylic Hexameter (No. 17), and
Iambic Trimeter (No. 9).
\J JL \j v^-£>^-— V> -£. yy _
Epod. 16.
16*
3; 0 VERSIFICATION.
XVIII. Trochaic Strophe. Catalectic Trochaic Dimeter (No. 3), and
a Catalectic Iambic Trimeter (No. 8). Two pairs make a tetrastich.
J- \u — w -f v./ _
\J ■£- KJ \J ^- \J — \J -£- KJ
In Od. ii. 18.
XIX. Ionic System.
In Od. iii. 12. (See No. 37.)
779. Index of Horatian Odes and Metres.
Book. Ode. Metre.
I. 1 i.
2 . .. vi.
3 ii.
4 xii.
5 iv.
6 iii.
7 xiii.
8 vii.
9 viii.
10 vi.
11 v.
12 vi.
13 ii.
14 iv.
15 iii.
16 viii.
17 viii.
18 v.
19 ii.
20 vi.
21 iv.
22 vi.
23 iv.
24 iii.
25 vi.
26 viii.
27 viii.
28 xiii.
29 viii.
30 vi.
31 viii.
32 vi.
33 iii.
34 viii.
35 viii.
36 ii.
37 viii.
38 vi.
Book. Ode. Metre.
II. 1 viii.
2 vi.
3 viii.
4 vi.
5 viii.
6 vi.
7 viii.
8 vi.
9 viii.
10 vi.
11 viii.
12 iii.
13 viii.
14 viii.
15 viii.
16 vi.
17 viii.
18 xviii.
19 viii.
20 viii.
III. 1 viii.
2 viii.
3 viii.
4 viii.
5 viii.
6 viii.
7 iv.
8 vi.
9 ii.
10 iii.
11 vi.
12 xix.
13 iv.
14 vi.
15 ii.
16 iii.
17 , viii.
Book. Ode. Metre
III. 18 Vi!
19 ii.
20 vi.
21 viii.
22 vi.
23 viii.
24 ii.
25 ii.
26 . viii.
27 vi.
28 ii.
29 viii.
30 i.
IY. 1 ii.
2 vi.
3 ii.
4 viii.
5 iii.
6 vi.
7 ix.
8 i.
9 viii.
10 v.
11 vi.
12 iii.
13 iv.
14 viii.
15 viii.
Carmen Saeculare. vi.
Epod. 1-10 xv.
11 xi.
12 xiii.
13 x.
14 xvi.
15 xvi.
16 xvii.
17 xiv.
APPENDIX.
ROMAN CALENDAR.
The names of the Roman months were originally adjectives. The
substantive mensis, month, may or may not be expressed : (mensis) Janu-
arius, Februarius, and so on. Before Augustus, the months July and
August were called, not Julius and Augustus, but Quintilis and Sextilis.
The Romans counted backward from three points in the month,
Calends (Kalendae), Nones (Nonae), and Ides (Idus), to which the names
of the months are added as adjectives: Kalendae Januariae, Nonae Feb-
ruariae, Idus Martiae. The Calends are the first day, the Nones the
fifth, the Ides the thirteenth. In March, May, July, and October, the
Nones and Ides are two daj^s later. Or thus :
In March, July, October, May,
The Ides are on the 15th day,
The Nones the 7th ; but all besides
Have two days less for Nones and Ides.
In counting backward (u come next calends, next nones, next ides")
the Romans used for fi the day before " pridie with the accus. pridie
kalendas Januarias, Dec. 31, pridie nonas Jan. = Jan. 4, pridie Id. Jan.
= Jan. 12.
The longer intervals are expressed by ante diem tertium, quartum, etc.,
before the accusative, so that ante diem tertium kal. Jan. means il two
days before the calends of January; " ante diem quartum, or a. d. iv., or
iv. kal. Jan., " three days before," and so on. This remarkable combina-
tion is treated as one word, so that it can be used with the prepositions
ex and in : ex ante diem iii. Nonas Junias usque ad pridie kal. Septem-
bres, from June 3 to August 31 ; differre aliquid in ante diem xv. kal.
Nov., to postpone a matter to the ISth of October.
Leap Year. — In leap year the intercalary day was counted between
a. d. vi. kal. Mart, and a. d. vii. kal. Mart. It was called a. d. bis sex-
tum kal. Mart., so that a. d. vii. kal. Mart, corresponded to our February
23d, just as in the ordinary year.
To turn Roman Dates into English.
For Nones and Ides. — I. Add one to the date of the Nones and Ides,
and subtract the given number.
For Calends.— -II. Add two to the days of the preceding month, and
subtract the given number.
Examples : a. d. viii. Id. Jan. (13 + 1 — 8) = Jan. 6; a. d. iv. Non.
Apr. (5 + 1 - 4) = Apr. 2 ; a. d. xiv. Kal. Oct. (30 + 2 - 14) = Sept. 18.
HSTDEX OF SYNTAX-
The Figures refer to the Sections.
A.
A, ab, abs, with ablative, 412; of
agent, 205, 403 ; of origin, 395 ; of
part affected, 398 ; a tergo, ab
oriente, a spatio, 386, R. 2.
Abhwc, 400, R. 3.
Ablative, syntax of, 383-409; of
place where, 384-387; of place
whence, 388-390 ; of attendance,
391 ; of time when, 392, 3 ; of
origin, 395; of material, 396; of
measure. 397-400, 566 ; of man-
ner, 401 ; of quality, 402 ; of means,
403 ; of price, 404 ; with sundry
verbs, 405 ; of cause, 406 ; ablative
absolute, 408, 409 ; prepositions
with, 418, 420; abl. of gerund and
gerundive, 432 ; of supine, 437.
Absolute ablative, 408 ; restrictions
of use, 403, R. 3.
Absque, w. abl. 418.
Abstract nouns in plural 195, R.
5 : as attribute and vice versa, 357,
R.
Abutor, 405, 428 ; R. 3.
Ac atque, 479, 615.
Accedit, constr., 525, R. 3.
Accidit, sequence after, 513, R. 2.
Accinqor, constr., 332, R. 2.
Accipio, with two datives, 350.
Accusative, 327-340. Direct object,
inner, outer object, 327 ; general
view, 328 ; with active transitive
verbs, 329 ; with verbs compd.
with prepositions, 330 : cognate,
331 ; adverbial, 331, R. 3 ; of part
affected, 332; double, 333,-334;
of local objects (terminal accusa-
tive), 342, 410 ; of extent in space,
335, 336 ; in time, 337, 338 ; in ex-
clamations and explanatory ques-
tions, 340 ; with interjections,
340 ; with prepositions, 417 ; of
infinitive, 424 ; of gerund, 426 ; of
gerundive, 431 ; of supine, 436.
Accusative and infinitive, 341-
526.
Accusing and acquitting, verbs of,
—constr., 377.
Ac si, 389.
Action, stage of, 213 ; period of,
213.
Active voice, 204 ; for passive, 205 ;
R. 1.
Active genitive, 361.
Ad, in compds. with ace, 330 ; with
dat., 346. Preposition with ac-
cus., 356, R. 1, 417; whither, 341,
R. 2 ; ad Yestae, 360, R. 2 ; w.
gerund, 437, R. 2 ; ad, hence, 400,
R. 3.
Adire aliquem, 330, R. 2.
Adjective for substantive, 195, R.
1-4. — Adjective predicate, 202;
adj. attributes, 285, 288; peculiar
forms of, 288 foil. ; comparison
of, 311 ; as adverb, 329, R. 6. Ad-
jective sentences, 505.
Adnominal genitive, 359.
Adulor, constr. 347.
Advantage, dative of, 345.
Adverbial accus., 331, R. 3; abl.
401.
Adverbial sentences, 507.
Adverbs of quality, place, extent
witli gen., 371, R. 3. Compara*
five of constr., 399. Adverbs,
440. Position of, 441. Negative
adv., 442-450. Prepositions as
adv., 406, R. Adverbs of likeness
and unlikeness with atque, 640,
INDEX OF SYNTAX.
373
Adversative particles for copula-
tive, 484.
Adversative sentences, 486-493.
Adversus, w. accus., 356, R. 2, 417.
Aeger, w. gen. 374, R. 2.
Aemulor, 347.
Aequdlis, 356, and R. 1.
Aequdre, 345, R. 1.
Aequl bonlque facto, 180, R. 2.
Aestimo, constr., 180, R. 1.
Affatim, w. gen., 371, R. 3
Affection of the mind, 374, R. 2.
Afflnis, constr., 356, and R. 1.
Affirmative, indefinite, and general,
448, R.
Agent, abl. of, w. a (ab), 202, 403;
without a (ab), 202, R. 2 ; dative
of, 203, 352, 353.
Agreement of predicate and sub-
ject, 199, 281, 283 ; of attribute
and substantive, 285, 286 ; of rela-
tive and antecedent, 616.
Ajo, 651, R.
Alienus, w. dat.,. 356; with gen.,
356, R. 1 ; w. abl., R. 5.
Aliquis, aliqul, 301.
Aliter witli aique, 646 ; with sin,
593.
Alii— alii, 321.
Alius, 306; with abl., 399, R. 2;
with atque, 645.
Alter, 306. Alter— alter, 321.
Alius, 336.
Ambiguity in use of ace. and inf.,
527, R. 4.
Amicus, constr., 356 and R. 1.
An, 459, 462.
Anacoluthon, 694.
Animi, constr., 374, R. 3.
Annbn, 461.
Ante, in compds., with ace, 330, w.
dat., 346, Ante, w. ace, 417. A
in expressions of time, 400, R. 3.
Antecedent, 615; repeated, 617; in-
corporated, 618 ; attraction into,
619 ; omission of, 623.
Antequam, constr., 576 foil.
Aorist, 212.
Apodosis, 590 ; omitted, 603 foil
Apodotic period, 686.
AposiopBsis, 691.
Apposition, 319. Partitive (restrict-
ive), 320. Distributive, 321 ; with
nornen, 322 ; to a sentence, 323.
Predicative, 324. Apposition of
antecedent incorporated, 618.
Apud, w. accus., 417.
Arrangement of words, 674, foil, of
clauses.
As, 324, R. 3.
Aspergo, constr., 348.
Asseverations, 255.
Assis, 379.
Assuetus, w. abl., 403, R. 2.
Asyndeton, 472, 480.
Attempted actions by present, 218,
R. 2; by imperf, 224.
Attendance, ablative of, 391.
Atque, for quam, 311, R. 6. See ac.
Atqul, 488.
Attraction of pronoun, 199, R. 5. At-
traction of names of persons, 322.
Attraction of mood, 509, 666: w.
quod., 541, R. 2. Attraction of
relative, 619 : inverted, 619, R. 2.
Aui, 492.
Autem, 486.
Ax, verbals in, w. gen. 174.
Becoming, verbs of, 193.
Belli, 409, R. 3.
Beseeching, verbs of, 546.
Bewaring, verbs of, 548.
Bene emere, vendere, 381, R. 3.
Bidding, verbs of, 345 and R. 1.
Birth, part, of, 395.
Bonl consulo, 380, R. 2.
Brachylogy, 689.
Capitis, and capite, 377, R. 1.
Gaptus, w. abl., 398.
Cases, syntax of, 377-412; nom.,
194; voc, 194, R. 2; accus., 327-
340; dat, 342-356; gen., 357-
382; abl., 381-409; with prepo-
sition, 417-419.
Causa, gratia, w. gen., 372, 407.
Causal particles, 500, sentences, 588,
foil.
Causal participle, 669.
Causation, verbs of, w. partic, 537.
Cause, abl. of, 406.
374
TXDEX OF SYXTAX.
Cave, with snbj. for imperat., 264.
Cairo, w. ace. and dat., 317; ne ut,
548, R. 2.
C#0, 833 aud R. 2.
Ceterum, 490.
Chiasmus, 6S4.
Choosing, verbs of, 197, 334.
Circa, circiier, w. aceus., 417.
Circum, compds. w. ace., 530; e*r-
cum, w. ace., 417.
Circumdo, constr., 348.
O-S', <r#ra, w. aceus., 417.
Citations in abl., 386.
Cities, names of, 410-412.
Clam, w. abl., 417, R.
Clauses, 474.
Coeptus sum, 424, R.
Cognate, aceus., 331.
Cogndtus, constr. . 356, R. 1.
Coincident action, 583,
Collocdre in, w. abl., 384, R\
Com. con, in compels., w. dat., 346.
Combination of relative sentences,
639.
Comitor, constr,, 347.
Communicdre, const., 346, R.
Communis, 356, R. 1.
Comparative degree with quam,
311, 647, foil.; with abl., 399;
with gen., 370.
Comparative particles for copula-
tives, 484. C. sentences, 645, foil.
Comparison, 311 ; standard of, omit-
ted, 823 : of qualities, 314.
Complementary final sentences, 541,
543.
Compos, w. gen., 373.
Compound sentences, 192, 474,
Compounds of preposit, with ace.,
330 ; w. two ace, 330 ; w. dat.
346.
Conceiving, verbs of, 523.
Concessive subjunctive, 257. Con-
cessive sentences and conjunc-
tions, 606. C. participles, 611,
670.
Concord of predicate, w. subj., 202,
281 ; gender, 282 ; number, 281 ;
of attribute, 285 ; common attri-
bute, 286 : of apposition, 349 ; of
relative, 616.
Concords, the three, 198.
Condemning, verbs of, 377.
Condition, resulting, 225, 230.
Conditional sentences, 590-604 ; lo-
gical^ 597; ideal, 598; unreal,
599; incomplete, 600; in or at io
obliqtta, 659, foil. ; conditional
participle, 670.
Qonducere, constr., 378.
Conjunctions. — Coordinate, copula-
tive, 477, 484; adversative, 486-
493 ; disjunctive, 494-497 ; cau-
sal, 500 : illative, 501-504 ; sub-
ordinate, causal, 538 ; final, 543 ;
temporal, 561 ; conditional, 591.
Conscius, w. gen., 373, R. 1.
Consldere in, 384, R. 1.
Consilium est, w. inf. 429, R. 3.
Constituere in, 384, R.
Consto, 370.
Consulo, 347, 380, R. 2.
Constructio praegnans, 696.
Contentus, w. abl., 373, R. 1.
Continuance, verbs of, 424.
Contigit, sequence after, 513, R. 2.
Contra, as adv., 416, R. ; w. ace,
217.
Contrdrius, 356, R. 1.
Convenio, 347.
Convicting, verbs of, 377.
Coordinate conjunctions. See con-
junctions.
Copula, 196 ; omitted, 200 ; agree-
ment with predicate, 202, R. 1.
Copulative conjunctions, 477-484;
inserted, 483 ; omitted, 475-483.
Copulative verbs, 1.
Coram, with abl,, 418.
Correlatives of si, 595. Correlatives
of qui, 620. Correlatives, list of,
645.
Cum. prep., abl., with and* without,
391-401; postpositive, 414, R. 1;
with abl., 418.
Gum {quum) primum, 563 ; cum
(constr.), 581; temporal, 582; co-
incident action, 583 ; lapse of
time, 582, R. 3 ; conditional, 584 ;
iterative, 585 ; historical, 586 ;
causal, 587; concessive, adversa-
tive, 588 ; cumtum, 587.
Cumque, compounds with, 246, R.
4.
Cupidus, w. gen., 373.
Cupio, 532.
Curd ut, 264,
INDEX OF SYNTAX.
375
Dative, 343-356 ; w. transitive verbs,
344 ; w. in trans, verbs, 345 ; w.
compd. verbs, 346 ; differs from
accus., 347 ; with verbs of giving
and putting, 348 ; with esse} 349 ;
of the object for which, 350 ; ethi-
cal dat., 351 ; of agent, 352 ; with
gerund, 353; of participles, 354;
with derivative nouns, 355 ; with
adjectives, 356. Dative of gerund,
430.
Be, with abl., 418 ; for gen., 371, R.
4, 377, R. 2 ; of time, 393, R. ; of
origin, 395; with abl. of measure,
398.
Bebebam, 246, R.
Becere, 355, R. 1.
Declarative mood, 246.
Becerno, 446, R. 2.
Beficere, 355, R. 1.
Beflgere in, abl., 384, R,
Definite price, 404.
Delay, verbs of, 551.
Demanding, verbs of, 546.
Demonstratives, use of, 290-292.
Deponent verbs, 211.
Depriving, verbs of, 389.
Derivative nouns with dat, 355.
Design, sentences of, 544, foil. ; re-
presented, 544, R.
Besino, 424.
Desire, adj. of, w. gen., 373; verbs
of, w. inf., 542 ; w. partic, 547.
Besitus sum, 424, R. 1.
Bespero. w. ace, 329.
Destination, 377, R. 3.
Determinative pronouns, 293-298.
Beterreo, constr., 548, R. 1.
Difference, abl. of, 400.
Bl, dis, compounds with, 388, R. 1.
Bignor, 398, R. 2.
Bignus, 373, R. 3 ; 398, R. 2. Dignus
qui, 556, R. 2.
Direct discourse, 509.
Direct object, 327.
Direct question, 454.
Disadvantage, dat. of, 345.
Disgust, adj. of, 373.
Disjunctive conjunctions, 494-497,
Bispdr, 356, R. 1.
Disproportion, 313.
Distance, abl. of, 400, R. 2.
Bistdre, w. dat, 388, R. 1; with
abl., 400, R. 1, 2 ; with ace, 335.
Distributives, 310.
Bo, with two datives, 350.
Boceo, 333, 424, R. 3.
Boctus, constr., 403, R. 2.
Boleo, w. ace, 329, R. 1 , w. quod,
542.
Bold, 401, R. 1.
Boml, 412, R. 2.
Bomb, 411, R. 2.
Bombs, domum, 410.
Bbnec. See Bum.
Doubt, verbs of, 551.
Duco, with two dat, 350, with gen.,
378.
Bubito an, 469, R.
Bubito, other constr. 550, R.
Bum, with pres., 217, R. 1, 572 ; w.
ind., 571, 573; with subj., 574.
Bum, Bummodo, 575.
E.
for ex. with abl., 417; for gen.,
571, R. 4; of origin, 395; ex fugd
388, R. 1.
Ecce, 340.
Egeo, 389, R. 1.
Ellipsis of substantive, 195, R. 1.
Ellipsis, 688.
Emo, 378.
Emotion, verbs of, 406, 542.
En, 340.
End, verbs of, 424.
Endeavor, verbs of, 546.
Enim, 500.
Enumeration in abl., 384, R.
Eb, w. gen., 371, R. 3.
Ergd, w. accus., 356, R. 2, 417.
Ergo, w. gen., 372.
Ergo, conj., 504.
Est qui, 426.
Et, 534 ; et ipse, 297, R. 2 ; et nemo,
482 ; et nbn, 534.
Etenim, 497.
Etiam, 477.
Ethical dative, 351.
Etiamsl, etsi, 605, 606.
Exclamations, 340 with ace. and
inf. 534 ; with ut, 560.
Expers, w. gen., 373.
Exspectdre, constr., 574.
I
370
INDEX OF SYNTAX.
Extent in space, 335, 336.
External qualities, 402, R.
Extra, as an adverb, 406, R. ; with
ace, 417.
Fac, in circumlocutions, 264.
Facio, with gen., 365, R, 379; w.
inf., 527, R. 1 ; w. part, 536; w.
subj., 557.
Feeling, dat. of, 351.
Fearing, verbs of, 347, 552.
Fido, 345, R. 1, 402.
Filling, verbs of, 374, R. 6, 389.
Final sentences, 543, foil.
Fine, abl. of, 377, R. 1.
Flo, with two norn., 197 ; with two
dat., 349 ; with abl., 403, R, 2.
Fitness, adjectives of, 356.
Fldgito, 333 and R. 2.
Forbidding, verbs of, 355.
Forgetting, verbs of, with gen., 375.
Frequens, 324, R. 5.
Frequentative. See Iterative.
Frelus, with abl., 373, R. 1.
Friendliness, adj. of, 356.
Frubr, 413 ; fruendus, 428, R. 3.
Ful, perf. partic. pass, with, 240.
Fulness, adjectives of, 382.
Fungor, 405; fungendus, 428, R. 3.
Future, 237; periphrastic, 237; in
subjunctive, 514; inf., 529.
Future participle, 279.
Future perfect, 233, foil.; iterative
use, 659.
Futurum esse, fore ut, 237, 531, R.
Futurum fuisse ut, 240, R. 2, 659.
of memory, 375; with verbs ol
emotion, 376 ; w. judicial verbs,
377 ; with verbs of rating and
buying, 376, 377 ; gen. with in-
terest and refert, 381, 382 ; appa-
rent gen , 412 ; gen. of gerund
and gerundive, 429 ; cases of, 427.
Gerund and gerundive, 426-432 ;
gerundive for gerund, 428 ; after
prepositions, 428, R. 1 ; gerundive
formation restricted, 428, R. 2 ;
428, R. 3 ; genitive of, 429 ; da-
tive of, 430 ; accus. of, 431 ; ablat.
of, 432.
Glbrior, with abl., 407.
Gratia, with gen., 372, 407.
Hdbeo, w. perf. part, pass., 227 ; with
two dat, 350 ; with gen., 378 ;
with inf., 424, R. ; nihil habeo
quod and non habeo quid, 634.
Habit, verbs of, 424.
Happening, verbs of, 525, 558.
Hand, 442. Hand scio an, 457, R.
Hendiadys, 695.
Hei, 340, R. 2.
Heu, 540.
Hie, 290 ; of time, 383, R. 2.
Historical tenses, 213. Historical
present, 227. Historical cum, 586.
Hodiernus, 324, R. 6.
Hope, verbs of, 424, R. 3.
Horrere, w. accus., 529, R.
G.
Gaudeo, w. abl., 406; w. inf., 533;
w. quod, 528.
Generic relative with ind., 246, R. 4.
Genitive, 357-382 ; appositive gen.,
or gen. of specification, 359 ; pos-
sess, gen., 360 ; active and passive,
361-363 ; gen. of quality, 364 ; as
a predicate, 365 ; partitive gen.,
366, foil. g. generis, 367, R. ; gen.
with prepositional substantives,
372; with adj., 373; with verbals
and participles, 374 ; with verbs
Ideal second person, 250, 267. Ideal
_ conditional sentence, 598.
Idem, 296 ; predicative use of, 324,
R. 2 ; with dat., 356, R. 6.
Idoneus, with dat., 356; qui, 556,
R. 2.
Igitur, 563.
Igadrus, w. gen. 373.
Ignorance, adjectives of, w. gen.
373.
Illative conjunctions, 502-504.
FOe, 292 ; of time, 393, R. 2.
Immemor, w. gen., 373.
Impedio, coustr., 540, 549.
INDEX OF SYNTAX.
srr
Imperative, 259-269; tenses, 259-
262 ; negative, 263 ; periphrases
for, 264 ; representatives of posi-
tive imperative, 265 ; of negative,
266 ; of positive aDd negative,
267, 268 ; time of, 272 : imperative
in oratio obllqua, 655 ; used mo-
dally, 246, R.
Imperfect tense, indicative, 222,
foli. ; subjunctive, 250 ; in se-
quence of tenses, 517; in unreal
conditional sentences, 599, R. 2.
Impero, w. inf., 532, R. 1.
Impersonal verbs, 96.
Impertio, 348.
Imprimere in, abl., 384, R.
In, in compounds with ace, 330;
with dat., 346. In, with abl. of
place, 384, R. ; with ace, 413, R. ;
with ace. and abl., 419. In, with
abl. of time, 393.
Inclination, verbs of, 324.
Incorporation of antecedents, 618 ;
antecedent, 623.
Indefinite perfect, 212 ; pronouns,
302-304.
Indicative mood, 246 ; for subjunc-
tive, 399, R. 4. See the different
classes of sentences.
Indigeo, constr., 388, R. 1.
Indignus, w. abl., 373, R. 3 ; 398, R.
2. Indignus qui, 556, R. 2.
Indirect discourse. See oratio ob-
liqua.
Indirect object, 208, 343.
Indirect questions, 462.
Induo, constr., 348.
In eb esse ut, 237, 241.
Infinitive, tenses of, 273, foil. 314;
subject of, 327, 525 ; as a noun,
420, 422; as a subject, 223 ; as an
object, 224; as a predicate, 425;
accus. and inf., 526 ; ambiguity of
accus. and inf., 527, R. 4 ; accus.
and inf., with verbs of will and
desire, 532 ; with verbs of emo-
tion, 533; in exclamations, 534;
accus. and inf., as a subject, 535;
in relative sentences, 538.
Infra, as an adverb, 416 R. ; with
accus., 417.
Inquam, 439.
Inquiry, verbs of, 333.
Inscribere in, abl., 384, R.
Instar, with gen., 370.
Instrument, abl. of, 205, 103.
Inter, in compound with dat., 346.
Inter, with accus., 417; with ac-
cus. for gen., 371, R. 4. Inter se,
212. Inter of time, 393, R.
Intercalary period, 686.
Interest, constr., 373-381.
Interjections, 194, R. 2 ; with divers
cases, 340.
Interrogative sentences, 449, 473.
Intra, with accus., 417; of time,
393, R.
Intransitive verbs, 204, 345.
Inverted attraction, 618, R. 2.
Invltus, 324, R. 6.
Ipse, use of, 297, foil.
Ire, with supine, 437.
Islands, names of smaller, constr.,
410, 411, 412.
Itaque, 499.
Ita—ut, restrictive, 556, R. 5.
Item, itidem-, 645.
Iterative tenses, 568-9.
Jubeo, constr., 532, R. ; 546, R. 1.
Jure, 398.
Jussu, 407.
Juvo, w. accus., 315, R. 1.
Knowledge, adjectives of, 373.
L.
Lotus, constr., 336.
Lege, 398.
Letters, tenses in, 244 ; date, 411,
R. 3.
Libens, 324, R. 6.
Liber, 373, R. ; Ixbero, w. abl., 388.
Librb, and in librb, 385, R.
Licere, constr., 378.
Licet, constr., 535, R. 2.
Likeness, adjectives of, 356 ; with
ace, 646.
Locdre, constr., 378.
Locative, 412.
378
INDEX OP SYNTAX.
Loco, 385, R
Longe, with superl., 317.
Longus, w. accus., 336.
M.
Made, 324, R 1.
Magis quam, 314.
3fagni, 377 ; magno, 380.
Making, verbs of, with two accus. ,
334; passive of, w. two nom.,
196.
Male, emere, vendere, 380, R 3.
Malo, constr., 532, R 4; 546, R 3.
Manner, abl. of, 401.
Material, abl. of, 396.
Mdtutinus, 324, R 6.
Measure, abl. of, 398-400; of differ-
ence, 398.
Medeor, w. dat, 345, R 2; meden-
dus, 428, R 3.
Melius, w. indie., 246, R 1.
Memini, w. pres. inf., 27, R ; w.
gen. 375.
Memo?', w. gen., 373.
Memoria teneo, 277, E.
Memory, verbs of constr., 375.
Metuo, w. dat. and ace, 347.
Militiae, 412, R 2.
Mille, 308.
Minbris, 380.
Minor, minus, without quam, 311,
R4.
Mirdrl, with accus., 329, R 1.
Mlrurn quantum, 469, R 2.
Misereor, miseresco, miseret, w. gen.,
376.
Mittere, w. two dat., 350.
Moderoi\ with dat, and accus., 347.
Jfwfo, with snbjunc, 575.
Modo-modo, 481.
Moneo, w. gen., 375 and R 1 ; with
ut, 546 ; with inf., 546, R 2.
Mood, attraction of, 506.
Moods, 244; indie, 246, foil.; sub-
junctive, 247, foil. ; imperfect,
259 ; infinitive, 245, R
Moris est, 365.
Moving cause, 407, R
Multiplication of subjects, 282, foil.
Multitude, noun of, 202. R
Multo, with superlat., 317.
Multus, with et, 468.
Muto, constr., 404, R
N.
Nam, namque, 500.
Name, dat. of, 322 : gen. of, 359.
Names of cities and small islands,
constr., 410, 411, 412.
Naming, verbs of, with two accus.,
334.
Natus, w. accus., 338 ; w. abl., 395.
—Ne, 456, 462.
Ne, with optative subj., 253 ; with
imper. subj., 256, 266 ; with ini-
perat, 263, 264; with sentences
of design, 543 ; of result, 566, R
4 ; ne, provided that, 610.
Nearness, adjectives of, 256.
Necesse est, 344, R
Necessitj', expressed how, 246, R 1.
Necne, 461.
Nee non, 448, R 3.
Nedum, 484, R 2.
Negative, of optative subjunctive,
253 ; of imperative, 263 ; nega-
tives, 442, foil. ; subdivision of,
444 ; position of, 447 ; two nega-
tives, 448.
Nego, 446.
Nemo, 304.
Nempe, 500, R
Neque, 482. Ne-quidem, 484.
Nescio an, 404.
Nescio quis qubmodo, with indie,
469, R 2.
Neuter adjective as substantive,
199, R 4; as cognate accus., 331,
R 2 ; as adverb, R 3 ; with par-
titive £en., 371.
Nl, 592,TR. 5.
Nihil, 301 ; nihili, 379.
Nid and si non, 592 ; nisi and nisi
si — only, 592, R 2 ; nisi quod, R
3 : nisi forte, R 3.
Nltor, with abl, 403, R 3.
No, 473.
Noll, with inf. for imperat., 264.
Nolo, 532.
Nomen est, 322. Nomen w. gen, 359.
Nominative, 194 ; double, 196 ; nom.
for accus., 528 ; with inf. , 525.
Non, 442 ; position of, 447 ; non
quod, quo, 541, R 1.
Non alius quam, 646, R 2.
Non modo-solum tantum, 484.
Nbnne, 457.
INDEX OP SYNTAX.
379
Won possum non, 448, R. 1.
Ms == ego, 195, R 7.
Wostrl, nostrum, 362 and R
Nouns. See Substantive and Ad-
jective.
Nubo% with dat., 345, B. 2.
Nulius, 300, 304 ; for non, R. 2.
Nam, 458.
Number, singular for plural, 195, R.
7 and 8 ; agreement in, 199.
Nunc-nunc, 484.
O.
6, with voc, 194, R. 2 ; w. accus.,
340.
0 si, 254, 388.
Ob, in compds. with ace., 330 ; with
dat, 346. Ob, w. accus., 417.
Object, direct, 204; indirect, 205;
infin. as object, 424; object sen-
tences, 523-537 ; with quod, 525 ;
with ace. and inf., 326, foil.
Object, for which, 350.
Obligation expressed, 246, R. 1.
Oblique cases, 327-408.
Obliquity, partial, 502.
Obllviscor, constr., 375, R. 1.
Olere and redolere, w. accus., 329, R.
Omitting, verbs of, 551.
Omnes, 369, R. 1.
Oplnione, 399, R. 1.
Oportet, 535, R. 1 ; 559, R 1.
Optative, subjunctive, 256.
Opto, 424, R. 2 ; 546.
Opus, 390.
Ordtio obliqua, 509, 651-655 ; moods
in, 509, 653, 654 ; tenses in, 655,
foil. ; condit. sentences in, 659 ;
pronouns in, 663 ; involved, 655-6.
Ordinals for cardinals, 309.
Or dine, 401.
Origin, abi. of, 395.
Ortus, 395.
Paenitet, 376 ; paenitendus, 428,
R. 3.
Par and dispdr, constr., 356, R. 1.
Part, accus. of, 332.
Particeps, w. gen., 373.
Participial clauses, interrogative in,
470.
Participial sentences, 667, foil.
Participles, tenses, 278-9 ; w. geni-
tive, 374; subordination, by
means of, 409, R. 2 ; 667, R. 1 ;
participle as substant., 438 ; as ad-
ject., 439; after verbs of Percep-
tion and Representation, 524, R.
1, 533; verbs of Causation and
Desire, 534.
Participation, adjectives of, 373.
Partition in English, none in Latin,
369, R 1.
Partitive genitive, 366-371.
Partitive, use of attribute, 287, R. ;
apposition, 321.
Parum, w. gen., 371.
Parvi, 380.
Passionate Question, 258.
Passive voice, 205 ; passive of in-
transitive verbs, 199, R. ; 204,
208; passive genitive, 361.
Peculidris, constr., 356, R. 1.
Pedibus, 401, R. 1.
Penes, w. accus., 415.
Per, in compds. with ace. , 330 ; per
with ace, 417 ; position, 416, R.
Per, of space, 335 ; of time, 337 ;
of manner, 401, R.
Perceiving, verbs of, constr., 527,
536.
Perfect, pure, 227 ; historical, 231 ;
passive, 242 ; perfect in letters,
244; perfect subjunctive poten-
tial, 250 ; optative, 254 ; impera-
tive, 256, R. 1, 266; time of, 271 ;
in sequence, 511 ; in sentences of
result, 513 ; perfect infin., 275 ; as
representative of indie, 277, and
perf. part., 278; after verbs of
causation and desire, 537; con-
cessive, 670.
Period of action, 213.
Periphrastic conjugation, 240-243;
subj., 514-516 ; infin. 531 ; in
ordtio obliqua, 659.
Perlius, w. gen., 373.
Permitto ut, 532, R. 1.
Person, concord of, 202, 283.
Personal pronoun omitted, 195 ;
gen. of, 362 ; personal pronoun w.
gerundive, 429, R. 1.
Person interested, 206.
380
INDEX OP SYNTAX.
Persuddeo, 345, R 1 ; w. inf., 546,
R2.
Pertaesum est, 376.
Peto, 333, R 2.
Piget, 376.
Placing, verbs of, 384, R 1.
Place, whither, 332, 410; where,
384-387, 412 ; whence, 388 ; place,
as cause, manner, or instrument,
3S7
Plenus, 373 and R 2.
Pluperfect, 233 ; indie, for subj.,
246, R 3; 599, R 3; iterative,
569; pluperf. subj. as imperat. of
pasi, 266, R 2 ; in sequence, 511 ;
iterative, 569, R 2 ; in conditional,
599.
Plural of abstracts, 195, R 5, 6 ; for
sing., R 7.
Pluriml, 380.
Pluris, 380.
PHls, without quam, 311, B. 4.
Pone, w. accus., 417.
Pbnere in, abl., 384, R
Posco, constr., 333 and R
Position of attribute, 287, 288; of
preposition, 404, foil. ; of adverb,
441 ; of negative, 447, foil. : posi-
tion, in interrogative sentences,
470; of relative, 614.
Posse, for future, 240, R 3; 662,
R2.
Possessive genitive, 360.
Possessive pronouns, use of, 299 ;
apposition with gen., 319, R 2;
for genitive, 363 ; with refert and
interest, 381 ; reflexive, 295, R 1,
521.
Possessor, dative of, 349.
Possibility expressed, 246, R 1.
Post, in compounds with dat, 346;
in expressions of time, 400, R 3.
Post, w. accus., 417.
Post quam, 563-567.
Postulo, constr., 333, R 2.
Potential subjunctive, 250, foil., 519,
543.
Poteram, 246, R
Potior, constr., 405, and R 3.
Potius quam, 362, R
Poiuisse, for futurum fuisse ut, 659,
R 2.
Power expressed, 246, R 1 ; adjec-
tives of, 373.
Prae, in compounds w. dat, 346;
with abl., 407, R ; 418.
Praeditus, w. abl., 373, R 1.
Praestolor, constr., 347.
Praeter, in compds., w. accus., 329.
Praeter, w. accus., 417. ""
Predicate, 192; predicative apposi-
tion and attribution, 324.
Prepositions, 413-419 ; origin of
word, 413, R 3 ; position of, 214,
215; repetition and omission of,
216; adverbial, 416, R; prepo-
sitions w. ace, 417 ; with abl.,
418 ; with accus. and abl., 419 ;
with gerundive, 428, R 1 ; with
abl. gerund., 432.
Present indicat., 215-218 ; of en-
deavor, 215, R 2 ; for future, 219 ;
for past, 220; with jam, jamdiu,
jamprldem, 221 ; present subjunc-
tive, time of, 271 ; in sequence of
tenses, 511; for future, 514; in
conditional sentences, 381 ; pre-
sent infinitive, 273; of contempo-
raneous action, 529 ; present par-
ticiple, 278.
Preventing cause, 407, R 2; verbs
of, 548, 549.
Price, gen. of, 378 ; abl. of, 404.
Prlmo, primum, 324, R 7.
Principal clauses, 474.
Prior, primus, as predicates, 324, R
6, 7 ; w. gen., 370.
Prius quam, constr., 576-9.
Pro, interjection, 340.
Pro, in compounds, w. dat., 346.
Pro, with abl., 418. Pro eo, ut, 465,
R4.
Prohibeo, constr., 547.
Prolepsus, 470.
Promise, verbs of, 424, R 2.
Pronouns, 290-304; demonstrative,
290-293 ; reflexive, 294, 520-522 ;
determinative, 296-298 ; possess-
ive, 299; indefinite, 300-304; in
ordtio obllqua, 663.
Prope, w. accus., 417.
Propius, constr., 356, R 4.
Proprius, 356, R 1.
Propter, w. accus., 417.
Protasis, 590; omitted, 252, R 1,
602.
Proxime, w. accus., 356, R 4.
Prudens, as adv., 324, R 5.
INDEX OF SYNTAX.
381
Pudet, 376.
Pure perfect, 212.
Puto, w. gen., 378.
Putting, verbs of, constr., 348, 384,
R.
Q.
Qudprudentid es, 618, R. 1.
Qualification of subject, 284.
Qualis, 433.
Quality, gen. of, 364; ablative of,
402.
Qualities, two compared, 314.
Quam, w. comparatives, 311, 647;
w. superlatives, 317 ; quam pro ut
qui, 313 ; quam quod, 525 ; quam
si, 604; quam omitted, 311, R. 4.
Quamdiu, 570, 645.
Quanquam, 607.
Quamvls, 608.
Quando. Quandoquidem, 538.
Quantl, 400 and R. ; Quantus, 645.
Quasi, 604.
— Que, 478.
Questions. See Interrogative Sen-
tences.
Qui, indef., 302.
Qui, 612, foil. See relative.
Quia, 538 ; non quia, 541, R. 1.
Qulcunque, 266, R. 1.
Quldam, 300.
Quidem, 298, R.
Quid me vis, 331, R. 3.
Quln, in questions, 268 ; quln, 550 ;
after verbs of omitting, etc., 551 ;
for qui non, 556 ; non qulny 541,
R. 1.
Quis, indef., 302
Quispiam, 303,
Quisquam, 304.
Quisque, 305 ; ut quisque, 645, R. 2.
Quisquis, w. ind. , 246, R. 4.
Quo, measure of difference, 400 =
that thereby, 545 ; quo quisquef
645, R. 2.
Quoad, with gen., 371, R. 3 ; constr.,
573.
Quod, in object sentences, 525 ; in
causal sentences, 538-541 ; w.
verbs of emotion, 542, foil. ; nisi
quod, 592, R, 3 ; quodsl ubi, 612,
R. 1.
Quominus, 549.
Quoniam, 538, foil.
Quoque, 481.
Quot, w. gen., 368, R. ; correlate
645.
Quoties, 569 ; correl., 645.
Quotquot, w. ind., 246, R. 4.
Quum. See cum.
R.
Rating, verbs of, constr., 378.
Reciprocal relations, 212.
Recordor, 277, R.
Recuso, constr., 548.
Reddo, 334, R.
Refert, constr., 381, 382.
Refertus, constr., 374, R. 1.
Reflexive pronoun, 294 ; in subordi-
nate sentences, 520-522.
Refraining, verbs of, 551.
Refusing, verbs of, 548.
Relative sentences, 506, 612, foil. ;
relative, position of, 614 ; con-
cord of, 616 ; attraction of, 619 ;
correlatives of, 620 ; relative
clause, position of, 622 ; tenses in,
624, 625; moods in, 626, foil.;
ind., 626, foil. ; subj., 629, foil. ; in
ordtio obhqua, 630 ; by attraction,
631 ; when qui ut — is, 632, 634;
when qui = cum is, 635 ; accus.,
rel. and inf., 638 ; combination of
relative sentences, 639 ; relative-
in ordtio obllqua, 658, R. 1 and 2 ;
relative represented by participle,
640, 671.
Relinquo, with two datives, 350.
Remaining, verbs of, 197.
Remembering, verbs of, 375.
Reminding, verbs of, 375.
Reminiscor, 375 and R. 2.
Repeated action. See Iterative.
Representatives of imperative, 265-
268.
Representation, verbs of, with par-
ticiple, 536.
Requiring, verbs of, 333.
Res, use of, 195.
Resisting, verbs of, 345.
Restriction to the comparative,
315.
Restrictive apposition, 320.
Result, subjunctive of, 340, foil. ;
382
INDEX OF SYNTAX.
exceptional sequence in sentences
of result, 513.
Resolve, verbs of, 424, and R. 2.
Rhetorical questions, 452, R. 2 ; in
drdtio obllqua, 654, R.
Rideo, w. accus., 329.
Rogata, 407.
Rare, 410, 411 ; rus, 410.
Burl, 412.
S.
Sacer, 356, R. 1.
Sacrifice, 403, R. 2.
Satis, w. gen., 371.
Saying, verbs of, constr., 523-529.
Sciens, 324, R. 5.
Seat of feeling, 374, R. 3.
Sed, 487.
Seeming, verbs of, 196.
Sentences, simple, 129; expanded,
281 ; compound, coordinate and
subordinate, 474 ; copulative, 477,
foil. ; adversative, 486, foil. ; dis-
junctive, 495, foil. ; causal, 500 ;
illative, 502; object, 503, foil.;
causal, 538, foil. ; final, 543, foil. ;
consecutive, 553, foil. ; temporal,
567, foil. ; conditional, 590, foil. ;
concessive, 605, foil. ; relative,
612, foil. ; comparative, 641, foil. ;
abridged, 649, foil.
Separation, abl. of, 388.
Sequence of tenses, 511, foil.
Sen. See Slve.
Showing, verbs of, with two norm,
197; with twTo accus., 334; with
accus. and infin., 526-529.
£i, whether, 462; if, 591.
Sign of conditional omitted, 600.
Silentio, 401, R. 1.
Similis, constr., 356, R. 1.
Simple sentences, 195 ; expanded,
280, foil.
Sim u I — simul, 484.
Simulac, 563.
Sin (minus, secus, aliter), 593.
Si non, 592.
Sine, with abl., 418 ; not used with
gerund, 432.
Singular for plural, 195, R. 7 and 8.
Sino, w. accus. and inf., 424, R. 3 ;
with uty 546, R. 3; without ut,
546, R. 3.
Sitio, with accus., 329, R.
Slve— slve, 498, 499.
Space, extent in, 335, 336.
Spe, comparative with, 399, R. 1
Specification, genitive of, 354.
Specific characteristic, 357.
Stage of action, 213.
Standard of comparison emitted,
312.
Statu o in, abl., 384, R.
Sto, constr., 378; with abl., 403,
R.3.
Stultitiae est, 365, R.
Sub, in compounds with ace, 330;
with dat,, 346; with ace. and abl.,
488; comp., 413, R.
Subject, the forms of, 195; object
for, 470; accus. subj. of infin.,
525, R. ; subject omitted, 526, R.
2; 532, R. 4; noni. subj. for ac-
cus., 528.
Subjective genitive, 361.
Subjunctive, 247; ideal and unreal,
248 ; potential, 250 ; optative,
253 ; in asseverations, 255 ; as im-
perative, 256 ; as concessive, 257.
Subjunctive, future, how represent-
ed, 511, See different classes of
sentences.
Subllrnis, 324, R. 6.
Subordinate clauses, 474.
Subordination by means of partici-
ple, 409, R. 2.
Substantlva mobilia, 199.
Substantive, agreement of attribute
with, 285, foil. ; substantive sen-
tences, 307.
Subter, in compounds with accus.,
330; with ace. and abl., 219.
Sul. See Reflexive.
Sum, with dat,, 349, 350 ; w, dative
of gerund, 430 ; with predicative
genitive, 365.
Sunt qui, 426.
Super, in compounds with ace,
330 ; with dat., 346 ; super, with
ace, and abl., 419.
Superlative, 316; strengthened, 317;
with gen., 371.
Supine, 435-437 ; accus. 436 ; ablat.,
437.
Supplico, w. dat., 345, R. 2.
Supra, as adv., 416, R. ; with accus.,
417.
INDEX OF SYNTAX.
383
Suus, use of, 294, 299, R.
Synesis, 202.
Syntax, defined, 193.
Table of temporal relations, 217.
Taedet, 376.
Taking, verbs of, 334.
Talis, 645.
Tamdiu, 645.
Tamen, 492.
Tametsl, 606.
Tarn quam, tarn quam si, 604.
Tantl, 380 ; tantum abest ut, 556,
R. 1 ; tantus, 645.
Teaching, verbs of, 333.
Tempero, constr., 347.
Temporal conjunctions for copula-
tive, 484 ; conjunctions, 561 ; tem-
poral relations, table of, 214^
Tempus est, 429, R. 3.
Tendency, sentences of, 340, foil.
Tenes, w. perf., part., pass., 227.
Tenses, 213, foil. ; number of, 214 ;
present, 218-221; perfect pure,
227-230 ; historical, 231 ; imper-
fect, 221, foil. ; pluperfect, 232-3 ;
future, 234; future perfect, 235;
periphrastic, 235 ; active, 236 ;
passive, 240-243 ; in letters, 244 ;
tenses of indicative, 270 ; subjunc-
tive, 270 ; imperative, 272 ; in-
finitive, 273, foil, ; participle, 278 ;
sequence of tenses, 510, foil. ;
dependent infinitive, 529, foil.,
iterative, 568, 569; in bratio ob-
llqua, 656, foil.
Tenus, position, 414, R. ; with abl.
and gen., 419.
Thinking, verbs of, 197 ; with ac-
cus. and inf., 526-529.
Time, accus. of, 337-8 ; abl. of, 392,
393 ; with in, 393 ; with ante, post,
dbhinc, 400, R. 3 ; participle, 552.
Tirneo, w. dat., 347.
Tot, 645.
Toties, 645.
Tbtus, of space, 386 ; of time, 392,
R. 1.
Towns, names of, 410-412.
Trans, in compounds, w. accus.,
330 ; with two accus., 330, R. 1,
2 ; w. accus., 417.
Transient qualities, 402, R. 1.
Transitive verbs, 204, 317.
Turn — cum, 364.
Turn— turn, 484,
Tuns, 299, R.
Ubi, w. gen., 371, R. 3 ; of time,
563.
TJllus, 304.
Ultimus, 324, R. 5.
Ultra, as adv., 416; with accus.,
417.
Unreal conditional sentence, 599.
Unus, unus omnium, with superlat.,
.317.
Unus, how translated, 324, R. 5;
unus qui, 633.
Urging, verbs of, 546.
Usus, 390, 322, R.
Ut — ita, concessive, 484.
Ut uti, design, 545 ; tendency, 554 ;
ut omitted, 545, R. 3 ; 579, R.
Ut qui, 627, R., 636 ; ut, of cause,
645, R, 4.
Ut, in explanatory questions, 560.
Ut nbn, 543 ; 556, R. 6.
Ut si, 604.
Ut quisque — ita, 645, R. 2.
Uter, 315.
Uterque, 370, R. 2.
Utinam, 253.
Utor, 405 ; utendus, 428, R. 3.
Ut prlmum, 563.
Utrum, 460, 461, R.
V.
Vacdre, 347.
Vacuus, constr., 388.
Vae, 340, R. 2.
Value, gen. of, 379.
— Ve, 497.
Vel, with superl., 317 ; ml, 496.
Vel—vel, 496.
Velle, for future, 240, R. 3 ; telle sibi,
351.
Velut velutsl, 604.
Vendo, 378.
Veneo, 378.
Venio, with two dat., 350.
Venit in mentem, 375, R. 3.
384
INDEX OF SYNTAX.
Verb, voices, active, 204; passive,
205 ; reflexive, 209 ; deponent,
201 ; tenses, 213, foil. ; moods,
244, foil. See Voice, Mood, Tense.
Verbal nouns, sequence after, 518.
Verbum, w. gen., 359.
Vereor, 424. 552 ; w. dat, 347.
Verb, 489.
Versus, position, 414; w. accus.,
417.
Verum, 488.
Verto, w. two dat., 350.
Vescor, 405 ; vescendus, 428, R. 3.
Vesperlifius, 324, R. 5.
Vestri vesirum, 362, R.
Veto, w. ace, 345, R. 1; with inf.,
424, R. 3.
Via et ratione, 401, R.
Videre ne, 552, R. 2.
Vi et armls, 401, R.
Vivo, w. abl., 405, R. 3.
Vocative, 194, R. 3.
Voice, active, 204 ; passive, 205.
Volens, 324, R. 6 ; volenti, 354.
Yolo, 532, and R. 4; 526, and R. 3.
Voti damndri, 377, R. 3.
Vox, with gen., 359.
W.
Want, verbs of, 389 ; adj. of, 373
R. 1 ; 389, R. 2.
Warning, verbs of, 546.
Whither? 313,410.
Wishing, verbs of, 532, 546, mood.
Y.
Yes, 473.
Yielding, verbs of, w. dat, 345.
Z.
Zeugma, 690.
[gildersleeve's latin grammar.]
COMPARATIVE SECTIONS OF SYNTAX.
The numbers in the first column of each division below indicate sections in former
editions of the Grammar; those in the second refer to corresponding sections in the
Revised Latin Grammar.
O. E.
N. E.
O.E.
N. E.
O.E.
N. E.
O. E.
N. E.
O.E.
N. E.
1
192-3
54
250-2
113
313
168
371
227
439
2
194
55-6
253-4
114
314
169
372
228
440
3
195
57
255
115
3 5
170
373
229
441
4
196-7
58
256
116
316
171
374
230
442
5
198
59
257
117
317
172
375
231
444
6
199
60
259
118
319
173
376
232
447
7
200
61
260
119
320
174
377
233
445
8
202
62
261
120
321
175
378
234
446
9
202 R.4
63
262
121
322
176
379-80
235-9
448
10
202 R.5
64
263
122
323
177-8
381
240
449
11
204
65
264
123
324
179
382
241
450
12
205
66
265
H. 1-7
R. 2-8
180
412
242
453
13
206
67
266
124-5
325-6
181
383 •
243
454
14
207
68
267
126
327
182
384
244
455
15
208
69
268
127
329
183
412
245
456-9
16-17
209
70
269
128
330
184
385
246
460
18
210
71
270
129
331
185-6
3S6-7
247
461
19
211
72-3
271
130
332
187
388
248
462
20
212
74
272
131
333
188
411
249
463
21
213
75
274
132
334
189
389
250
465-6
22
214
76
275
133
342
190
390
251
467-8
23
216
77
277
134
410
191
391
252
469
24
217
78
278
135
335
192 a
392
253
470-1
25
218
79
279
136
336
192 b
393
254
473
26
218 R.2
80
281
137
337
193
395
255
474
27
219
81
282
138
338
194
398
256
477
28
220
82
'281 R.2
139 i
340
195
399
257
478
29
221
83
283
140 (
196
400
258
479
30
227-8
84
284
141
343
199
403
259
645
30R.2
229
85
285
142
314
200
404
260
480
30R.3
230
86
286
143
345
201
405
261
481
31 a
222-3
87
287
144
346
202
40(5-7
262
482
31 b
224
88
288
145
347
203
408-9
263
448 R.3
31 c
225
89 -j
289
146
348
204
413
264
444
32-33
233
290
147
349
205
414
265-7
483
34 j
231-2
90
291
148
350
206
415
268-9 {
484
216
91-3
292
149
351
207
416
270 \
35
234
94
293
150
352
208
417
271
486
36
234 R.1
95
294
151
353
209
418
272
487
37
235
96
295
152
354
210
419
273
488
38-41
236
97
296
153
355
211
420
274
489
42
238
98 )
99 (
297
154
356
212
422
275
490
43
239
155
357
213
423
276
491
44 -j
240
100
298
156
359
214
424
277
492
241
101
299
157
360
215
425
! 278
493
45
242
102
300
158
361
216-7
426
279 \
1 280 \
495
46
243
103
301
159
362
218
428
47
244
104
302
160
363
219
429
281 /
282 f
496
48
245
105
303
161
364
220
430
49 )
106-7
305
162
365
221
431
283
498
50 y
246
108
306
163
366
222
432
284
499
51 J
109 I
110 j"
304
164
367
223
435
285
497
52
247
165
368
224
436
| 286
500
53 -j
248
111
311
166
369
225
437
287
502
249
112
312
167
370
226
438
288
503
COMPARATIVE SE :
5YOTAX
N. E.
B
N. E.
N "^
N. E,
0. E.
N. E.
s
504
319
-
"
: a-4
634-5
200 f
320
535
356
" -
6:36-7
505
H
536
SI
*
428
633
a
^
":
605
639
:
3^9
y?4
396
606
4:30
41
a i
510
'-.
399
431
642
•; r
511
541
361
400
' :s
644
512
543
401
609
433-4
645
514
543
581
1C
435
646
a g
r:,-:
54
i
611
41
Tlr
332-4
:
"
-. 4-fl
13
649
511
"
:
" 4
406
613
438
650
301 I
512
558
4 i
439
651-2
i-l
•■
368
408
616
440
653
r:-
>'-
54
369
409
416
441
654
3.4
-:-
■
544 E.2
;•
588
41C
442
655
- "
51
M
553-5
~:
"
411
618
443
3-H5
520
a oTi
ys
590
-:•,
619
444
657-8
521
558
H3
' '.
413
620
659
> -
5§9
\'.
/--
r 4
414
21
448-51
660
:
523
m
m
' I
415
45S
:
524
--
560
r
- m
m
453-6
662
:.
- "
-
554
- 3
417
624
457
m
HI
:' I ,
378
-
418
625
458
665
m
S
^ --:
' 2
4j
.\
528
.
561
:•>',
- :
42C
i
667
H4
.
-:-'
-
421
387
601
422
629
482
669
" . 3 B 1
: •
.
423
630
4 o
670
"
".
564
-
i
424
631
464
-- .
-~-
5 .:-:
i :
. ; ;
425
_ ;_':
Ik
'j
Deacidified using the Bookkeeper pi
Neutralizing agent: Magnesium Oxic
Treatment Date: July 2006
PreservationTechnolo
A WORLD LEADER IN PAPER PRESER'
1 1 1 Tromson Park Drive
Cranbe/ry Township, PA 160€
Live Music Archive
Librivox Free Audio
Metropolitan Museum
Cleveland Museum of Art
Internet Arcade
Console Living Room
Books to Borrow
Open Library
TV News
Understanding 9/11